Copyright: Copyright 1996 - 2003. Corel Corporation. All rights reserved.
Citation: Copyright 1996 - 2003. Corel Corporation. All rights reserved.


Automatic editing

WordPerfect provides automatic editing features that help save you time when editing documents.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	marking misspelled words and grammatical errors as you type

•	correcting misspelled words automatically

•	entering text automatically


Marking misspelled words and grammatical errors as you type

You can use Spell-As-You-Go to automatically check spelling in a document. Spell-As-You-Go underlines misspelled words in red.

You can also use Grammar As-You-Go to automatically correct grammatical errors. Grammar As-You-Go underlines grammatical errors in blue.

Prompt As-You-Go replaces misspelled words, grammatical errors, and synonyms. The Prompt As-You-Go list box displays suggestions as you type. A color coding system identifies the type of error encountered. If the text in the Prompt As-You-Go box is red, the word may be misspelled. If the text is blue, there may be a grammar or usage error. If the text is black, you can choose a synonym to replace the word. If the box is blank, there are no suggestions for the word.

For example, if you type "Worf," you will see the following in the Prompt As-You-Go list box:

 How to


To automatically check spelling

•	Click Tools [image] Proofread [image] Spell-As-You-Go.

 Notes

•	A red underline displays below each misspelled word.

•	Spell-As-You-Go is enabled if a bullet displays next to it. If Grammar As-You-Go is enabled, Spell-As-You-Go is also enabled even though there is no bullet next to Spell-As-You-Go. For information on Grammar As-You-Go, see "To automatically check grammatical errors."

 Tips

•	You can disable the automatic checking of spelling errors by clicking Tools [image] Proofread [image] Off.

•	You can replace the misspelled word with a new word by right-clicking the misspelled word and clicking a word from the menu.

 Related topics


To automatically check grammatical errors

•	Click Tools [image] Proofread [image] Grammar As-You-Go.

 Notes

•	A blue underline displays below each grammar error.

•	If Grammar As-You-Go is enabled, Spell-As-You-Go is also enabled even though there is no bullet next to Spell-As-You-Go.

 Tip

•	You can disable the automatic checking of grammatical errors by clicking Tools [image] Proofread [image] Off.

 Related topics


To replace misspelled words, grammatical errors, and synonyms

1	Click Tools [image] Proofread [image] Prompt As-You-Go.

A check mark next to the Prompt As-You-Go command indicates that Prompt As-You-Go is enabled.

2	Click a word or phrase in your document.

3	Choose the replacement text from the Prompt As-You-Go list box on the property bar.

 Note

•	If the text in the Prompt As-You-Go box is red, the word may be misspelled. If the text is blue, there may be a grammar or usage error. If the text is black, you can choose a synonym to replace the word. If the box is blank, there are no suggestions for the word.

 Related topics


Correcting misspelled words automatically

You can enable QuickCorrect to automatically correct common typing mistakes. QuickCorrect provides a list of commonly misspelled words and their correct spellings. For example, QuickCorrect can automatically replace "adn" with "and." You can add words to the QuickCorrect list, including a pair of words. For example, you can replace "byt he" with "by the." Words can also be deleted from the QuickCorrect list.

 How to


To automatically correct common typing mistakes

1	Click Tools [image] QuickCorrect.

2	Enable the Replace words as you type check box.

 Note

•	QuickCorrect is automatically disabled when you edit a macro.

 Tip

•	You can also automatically correct typographical errors that have only one possible correction by enabling the Correct other mistyped words when possible check box. WordPerfect does not notify you of the change.

 Related topics


To add a word to the QuickCorrect list

1	Click Tools [image] QuickCorrect.

2	Type a misspelled word in the Replace box.

3	Type the correctly spelled word in the With box.

4	Click Add entry.

 Note

•	You can also add abbreviations to the QuickCorrect list. QuickCorrect abbreviations are case-sensitive. For example, if you add "wm" for "William," and then you type "WM" in the document, QuickCorrect inserts "WILLIAM."

 Related topics


To delete a word from the QuickCorrect list

1	Click Tools [image] QuickCorrect.

2	Choose a word from the Misspelled word list.

3	Click Delete entry.

 Related topics


Entering text automatically

QuickWords are abbreviations of words or strings of text that you insert into a document. When you type the abbreviation in a document, QuickWords automatically expands it. For example, you can have cc represent "Corel Corporation." When you type cc, "Corel Corporation" appears in the document. QuickWords are not case-sensitive. Typing CC also inserts the text, "Corel Corporation." You can add a word to the QuickWords list and then insert the word into a document. You can also add a graphic to the QuickWords list.

The words that QuickWords represent can be changed.

You can expand all QuickWords in a document.

 How to


To add a word to the QuickWords list

1	Select a word or phrase.

2	Click Tools [image] QuickWords.

3	Type a word to represent the word or phrase in the Abbreviated form box.

4	Click Add entry.

 Note

•	Avoid common words when you create QuickWords. For example, if you make "the" an abbreviation for "theatric," the word "the" will expand to "theatric" whenever you type it. To avoid this problem, you can add a special character, such as an ampersand (&) or an asterisk (*), before QuickWords.

 Related topics


To add a graphic to the QuickWords list

1	Select a graphic

3	Click Tools [image] QuickWords.

4	Type a word to represent the graphic in the Abbreviated form box.

5	Click Add entry.

If you want the graphic to display in the active document, click Options [image] Expand as text with formatting.

 Related topics


To insert QuickWords

1	Type the QuickWords abbreviation.

3	Press Enter.

 Tip

•	You can also insert QuickWords by pressing Tab or the Spacebar.

 Related topics


To change the text that QuickWords represents

1	Select the text that you want QuickWords to represent.

2	Click Tools [image] QuickWords.

3	Choose a word from the Abbreviated form list.

4	Click Options [image] Replace entry.

5	In the Replace QuickWords with new selection dialog box, click Yes.

You can also
Rename QuickWords	Choose a word from the Abbreviated form list. Click Options [image] Rename entry and type a name in the QuickWords name box.
Delete QuickWords	Choose a word from the Abbreviated form list, and click Delete entry.
 Related topics


To expand all QuickWords in a document

To	Do the following
Expand all QuickWords in the current document as plain text	Click Tools [image] QuickWords. Click Options [image] Expand as plain text.
Expand QuickWords as formatted text	Click Options [image] Expand as text with formatting.
Expand QuickWords as you type	Enable the Expand QuickWords when you type them check box.
Prevent QuickWords from expanding as you type	Disable the Expand QuickWords when you type them check box.
Expand all QuickWords in the current document using a macro	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Play. Double-click EXPNDALL.WCM.
 Notes

•	For information about macros, see "Playing macros."

•	When you expand text as plain text, the QuickWords text will look the same as the other text in that document. Plain text includes tabs and hard returns but not font attributes or other formatting. When you expand text as formatted text, you can insert QuickWords into a document and include the formatting and graphics that appeared with the word when you created it.

 Tip

•	If the Expand QuickWords when you type them check box is disabled, you can expand QuickWords by pressing Ctrl + Shift + A.

 Related topics


Using bookmarks and QuickMarks

WordPerfect lets you insert bookmarks and QuickMarks into documents. Bookmarks and QuickMarks mark a place in a document so that you can return to that location quickly.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	inserting bookmarks and QuickMarks

•	finding bookmarks and QuickMarks

•	editing bookmarks and QuickMarks


Inserting bookmarks and QuickMarks

You can insert a bookmark. You can also associate a bookmark with selected text, so that when you return to the bookmark, the text is selected again. You can create multiple bookmarks with different names.

WordPerfect lets you insert one QuickMark into a document. A QuickMark can be used to save your place in a document each time you quit WordPerfect.

 How to


To insert a bookmark

1	Click where you want to insert a bookmark.

2	Click Tools [image] Bookmark [image] Create.

3	Type a name for the bookmark in the Bookmark name box.

 Note

•	If you do not type a bookmark name in the Bookmark name box, a QuickMark is inserted.

 Related topics


To insert a bookmark using selected text

1	Select the text you want to use to create the bookmark.

2	Click Tools [image] Bookmark [image] Create.

3	Type a name in the Bookmark name box.

4	Enable the Selected bookmark check box.

 Related topics


To insert a QuickMark

1	Click where you want to insert a QuickMark.

2	Click Tools [image] Bookmark [image] Set QuickMark.

If you want to automatically insert a QuickMark at the cursor location whenever you save a document, enable the Set QuickMark on file save check box.

 Related topics


To save your place in a document

1	Click Tools [image] Bookmark.

2	Enable the Set QuickMark on file save check box.

3	Enable the Go to QuickMark on file open check box.

 Related topics


Finding bookmarks and QuickMarks

You can find bookmarks and QuickMarks that you have inserted into a document.

 How to


To find a bookmark

1	Click Tools [image] Bookmark.

2	Choose a bookmark from the Bookmarks list.

3	Click Go to.

 Tip

•	You can find a bookmark created by selected text by clicking Go to & select.

 Related topics


To find a QuickMark

•	Click Tools [image] Bookmark [image] Find QuickMark.

 Related topics


Editing bookmarks and QuickMarks

Bookmarks can be moved, renamed, and deleted. You can also delete a QuickMark.

 How to


To move a bookmark

1	Click where you want the bookmark to display.

2	Click Tools [image] Bookmark.

3	Choose a bookmark from the Bookmarks list.

4	Click Move.

 Related topics


To rename a bookmark

1	Click Tools [image] Bookmark.

2	Choose a bookmark from the Bookmarks list.

3	Click Rename.

4	Type a name for the bookmark in the New name box.

 Related topics


To delete a bookmark or a QuickMark

1	Click Tools [image] Bookmark.

2	Choose a bookmark or QuickMark from the Bookmarks list.

3	Click Delete.

 Related topics


Customizing WordPerfect

WordPerfect has customization features that let you create your own unique workspace with the display options and settings you prefer.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	customizing toolbars

•	customizing toolbar buttons and separators

•	copying, renaming, restoring, and deleting toolbars

•	customizing the property bar

•	customizing the application bar

•	choosing and creating menus

•	adding and removing menu items, separators, and drop-down menus

•	renaming, deleting, and restoring menus

•	customizing workspace and display options

•	Using Microsoft Outlook address book in WordPerfect

•	changing shadow cursor and dragging settings

•	changing measurement and ruler settings

•	changing user information, prompt settings, and error notifications

•	changing the language for WordPerfect

•	saving workspace settings

•	choosing and creating shortcut keys

•	copying, restoring, renaming, and deleting keyboards

•	changing font size and colors of the Help


Customizing toolbars

You can choose which toolbars display on your screen. You can also move a toolbar anywhere on the screen. Placing it inside the document window creates a floating toolbar with a title bar. Placing it on any of the four sides of the document window docks the toolbar, making it part of the window border.

You can create custom toolbars to provide quick access to the features, keystrokes, commands, and macros you use most.

 How to


To display a toolbar

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Toolbars tab.

4	In the Available toolbars list, enable the check box beside a toolbar name.

A check mark next to the toolbar indicates that it is displayed.

 Note

•	The maximum number of toolbars you can display is 10.

 Tip

•	You can display a list of some of the available toolbars by right-clicking a toolbar.

 Related topics


To move a toolbar

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Toolbars tab.

4	Choose a toolbar name from the Available toolbars list.

5	Click Options.

6	In the Toolbar location area, enable one of the following options:

•	Left [image] docks the toolbar on the left side of the document window

•	Right [image] docks the toolbar on the right side of the document window

•	Top [image] docks the toolbar at the top of the document window

•	Bottom [image] docks the toolbar at the bottom of the document window

•	Palette [image] creates a floating toolbar that you can move anywhere on the screen

You can also
Set the number of rows for a toolbar	Type a value in the Maximum number of rows/columns to show box.
Add a scroll bar to a toolbar	Enable the Show scroll bar check box.
 Tip

•	You can also move a toolbar by pointing to the toolbar's border, and dragging it to a new position.

 Related topics


To create a floating toolbar

•	Point to the border of a docked toolbar and drag it onto the work area.

 Tips

•	You can dock a floating toolbar by pointing to the border of the toolbar, and dragging it toward the edge of the window until it changes shape.

•	You can also dock a floating toolbar by double-clicking the toolbar.

 Related topics


To create a custom toolbar

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize setting dialog box, click the Toolbars tab.

4	Click Create.

5	In the Create toolbar dialog box, type a name for the toolbar in the New toolbar name box.

6	In the Toolbar editor dialog box, choose a category from the Feature categories list box.

7	Choose a feature from the Features list.

8	Click Add button.

 Tip

•	You can also create a custom toolbar by right-clicking a toolbar, and clicking Settings [image] Create.

 Related topics


Customizing toolbar buttons and separators

You can add buttons and separators to custom toolbars or to the preset toolbars provided with WordPerfect. Separators are the vertical lines between buttons and are used to create a group of buttons. You can also rearrange buttons on a toolbar. You can also remove a button from a toolbar.

You can change toolbar buttons so that they display with text only, with pictures only, or with both pictures and text. You can change the picture on a button.

 How to


To add a button to a toolbar

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Toolbars tab.

4	Choose a toolbar from the Available toolbars list.

5	Click Edit.

6	In the Toolbar editor dialog box, choose a category from the Feature categories list box.

7	Choose a feature from the Features list.

8	Click Add button.

 Tip

•	You can also add a button to a toolbar by dragging the button from the Features list to the toolbar.

 Related topics


To add a separator to a toolbar

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Toolbars tab.

4	Choose a toolbar from the Available toolbars list.

5	Click Edit.

6	Double-click in the Separator box.

 Tip

•	The new separator displays at the end of the toolbar. You can position the separator by dragging it to a new position.

 Related topics


To remove a separator

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Toolbars tab.

4	Choose a toolbar from the Available toolbars list.

5	Drag the separator from the toolbar to the document window.

 Related topics


To rearrange buttons on a toolbar

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Toolbars tab.

4	Choose a toolbar from the Available toolbars list.

5	Click Edit.

6	On the toolbar, drag a button to a new position.

 Tip

•	You can reposition a toolbar button by holding down Alt and dragging the button to a new position.

 Related topics


To remove a button from a toolbar

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Toolbars tab.

4	Choose a toolbar from the Available toolbars list.

5	Click Edit.

6	Drag a button from the toolbar.

 Tip

•	You can also remove a toolbar button by holding down Alt and dragging the button from the toolbar.

 Related topics


To change the appearance of a toolbar button

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Toolbars tab.

4	Choose a toolbar from the Available toolbars list.

5	Click Options.

6	In the Button appearance area, enable one of the following options:

•	Text [image] displays text only on the toolbar button

•	Picture [image] displays pictures only on the toolbar button

•	Picture and text [image] displays pictures and text on the toolbar button

 Related topics


To change the picture on a toolbar button

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Toolbars tab.

4	Choose a toolbar from the Available toolbars list.

5	Click Edit.

6	On the toolbar, right-click a toolbar button, and click Customize.

7	In the Customize button dialog box, click Edit in the Image area.

8	In the Image editor dialog box, modify any of the settings.

You can also
Edit text	In the Customize button dialog box, type text in the Button text box.
Edit a QuickTip	In the Customize button dialog box, type text in the QuickTip box.
 Tip

•	You can also edit a toolbar button by right-clicking a toolbar, and clicking Edit.

 Related topics


Copying, renaming, restoring, and deleting toolbars

You can copy toolbars. Copying a toolbar is useful when you want to create a toolbar with similar features and buttons as an existing toolbar. You can also rename toolbars; however, you can rename only the toolbars that you have created, not the preset toolbars provided with WordPerfect.

You can restore any of the preset toolbars provided with WordPerfect to their original settings.

You can delete toolbars you have created.

 How to


To copy a toolbar

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Toolbars tab.

4	Click Copy.

5	From the Template to copy from list box in the Copy toolbars dialog box, choose the template in which the toolbar is stored.

6	Choose a toolbar from the Select toolbars to copy list.

7	From the Template to copy to list box, choose the template to which you want to copy the toolbar.

8	Click Copy.

9	In the Copy/rename object dialog box, type a name for the toolbar in the Object box.

 Related topics


To rename a toolbar

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Toolbars tab.

4	Choose a toolbar from the Available toolbars list.

5	Click Rename.

6	In the Rename toolbar dialog box, type a name in the Rename toolbar to box.

 Note

•	Only customized toolbars can be renamed. Preset toolbars cannot be renamed.

 Related topics


To restore a toolbar

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Toolbars tab.

4	Choose a toolbar from the Available toolbars list.

5	Click Reset.

 Related topics


To delete a toolbar

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Toolbars tab.

4	Choose a toolbar from the Available toolbars list.

5	Click Delete.

 Note

•	You can delete only toolbars you have created.

 Related topics


Customizing the property bar

The property bar displays different controls, depending on the object you have selected. You can change the location of a property bar.

You can add a button to a property bar. You can change the appearance of property bar buttons so that they display with text only, with pictures only, or with both pictures and text. You can also edit the picture used for a property bar button.

You can restore the original settings of the property bar at any time.

 How to


To change the location of a property bar

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Property bars tab.

4	Choose a property bar from the Available property bars list.

5	Click Options.

6	In the Property bar location area, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Left [image] docks the property bar on the left side of the document window

•	Right [image] docks the property bar on the right side of the document window

•	Top [image] docks the property bar at the top of the document window

•	Bottom [image] docks the property bar at the bottom of the document window

•	Palette [image] creates a floating property bar that you can move anywhere on the screen

You can also
Set the number of rows for a property bar	Type a value in the Maximum number of rows/columns to show box.
Add a scroll bar to a property bar	Enable the Show scroll bar check box.
 Tips

•	You can double-click a docked property bar to make it a floating property bar.

•	You can dock a floating property at its last docked position by double-clicking it.

 Related topics


To add a button to a property bar

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Property bars tab.

4	Choose a property bar from the Available property bars list.

5	Click Edit.

6	In the Property bar editor dialog box, choose a category from the Feature categories list box.

7	Click Add button.

You can also
Add a separator to the property bar	Double-click in the Separator box.
Remove a button from the property bar	Drag the button off the property bar.
Rearrange buttons on the property bar	Drag a button to a new position on the property bar.
 Related topics


To change the appearance of a property bar button

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Property bars tab.

4	Choose a property bar from the Available property bars list.

5	Click Options.

6	In the Button appearance area, enable one of the following options:

•	Text [image] displays text only on the property bar button

•	Picture [image] displays pictures only on the property bar button

•	Picture and text [image] displays pictures and text on the property bar button

 Related topics


To change the picture on a property bar button

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Property bars tab.

4	Choose a property bar from the Available property bars list.

5	Click Edit.

6	On the property bar, right-click a property bar button , and click Customize.

7	In the Customize button dialog box, click Edit in the Image area.

8	In the Image editor dialog box, modify any of the settings.

You can also
Edit button text	Type text in the Button text box.
Edit the QuickTip for a button	Type text in the QuickTip box.
 Related topics


To restore a property bar

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Property bars tab.

4	Choose a property bar from the Available property bars list.

5	Click Reset.

 Related topics


Customizing the application bar

The application bar displays information about the document that is open in WordPerfect. By default, the application bar appears at the bottom of the application window.

You can display or hide the application bar. You can add items to the application bar, and you can change the order in which options on the application bar appear. You can change the size of text on the application bar. The font on the application bar is based on the Windows system font. You can also restore the application bar to its original settings.

The illustration below shows how you can use the application bar to view information about the status of a WordPerfect document.

 How to


To display or hide the application bar

•	Click View [image] Application bar.

A check mark next to the application bar command indicates that the application bar is displayed.

 Related topics


To add information to the application bar

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Application bar.

3	In the Select items to appear on the bar list, enable the check boxes beside the items you want to add.

 Related topics


To move an item on the application bar

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Application bar.

3	On the application bar, drag an item to a new position.

 Tip

•	You can also move an item on the application bar by holding down Alt and dragging the item to a new position.

 Related topics


To change the size of text on the application bar

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Application bar.

3	In the Font size area, enable one of the options:

•	Small

•	Normal

•	Large

 Note

•	If the Small option is grayed, the system font is already as small as it can be.

 Related topics


To restore the default application bar

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Application bar.

3	In the Application bar settings dialog box, click Reset.

 Related topics


Choosing and creating menus

You can choose the menu you want to use.

Displaying shortcut keys on menus can make accessing menu commands easier.

You can create custom menus that contain the commands and features you use most often.

 How to


To choose a menu

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Menus tab.

4	Choose a menu from the Available menus list.

5	Click Select.

 Tip

•	You can revert to the default menu by pressing Ctrl + Alt + Shift + Backspace.

 Related topics


To display shortcut keys on a menu

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Environment.

3	In the Environment settings dialog box, click the Interface tab.

4	In the Items to display on menus area, enable the Shortcut keys check box.

 Related topics


To create a menu

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Menus tab.

4	Click Create.

5	In the Create menu bar dialog box, type a name for the menu in the New menu bar name box.

6	Click OK.

The Menu editor dialog box opens, and the menu is displayed at the top of the document window.

7	Choose a category from the Feature categories list box.

8	Choose a feature from the Features list.

9	Click Add menu item.

 Related topics


Adding and removing menu items, separators, and drop-down menus

You can add menu items, separators and drop-down menus to a custom menu or to one of the preset menus provided with WordPerfect. Separators are the horizontal lines between commands in a menu and are used to create a group of commands.

You can also remove menu items you no longer need.

 How to


To add a menu item to a menu

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Menus tab.

4	Choose a menu from the Available menus list.

The menu displays at the top of the document window.

5	Click Edit.

6	In the Menu editor dialog box, choose a category from the Feature categories list box.

7	Choose a feature from the Features list.

8	Click Add menu item.

 Tip

•	You can also add a menu item by choosing a menu from the available menus list, and dragging it from the Features list box to the menu outside the Menu editor dialog box.

 Related topics


To add a separator to a menu

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Menus tab.

4	Choose a menu from the Available menus list.

The menu displays at the top of the document window.

5	Click Edit.

6	In the Menu editor dialog box, drag a separator from the Separator box to a menu on the menu bar.

 Related topics


To add a drop-down menu to a menu

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Menus tab.

4	Choose a menu from the Available menus list.

The menu displays at the top of the document window.

5	Click Edit.

6	In the Menu editor dialog box, drag a drop-down menu from the Menu box to a menu on the menu bar.

 Related topics


To remove a menu item from a menu

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Menus tab.

4	Choose a menu from the Available menus list.

The menu displays at the top of the document window.

5	Click Edit.

6	Drag a menu item from the menu bar.

 Related topics


Renaming, deleting, and restoring menus

You can rename or delete menus that you have created. You cannot rename or delete the preset menus provided with WordPerfect. You can restore the preset menus provided with WordPerfect.

 How to


To rename a menu

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Menus tab.

4	Choose a menu from the Available menus list.

5	Click Rename.

6	In the Rename menu bar dialog box, type a new name in the Rename menu bar to box.

 Related topics


To delete a menu

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Menus tab.

4	Choose a menu from the Available menus list.

5	Click Delete.

 Related topics


To restore a menu

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Menus tab.

4	Choose a menu from the Available menus list.

5	Click Reset.

 Note

•	Only preset menus can be restored.

 Related topics


Customizing workspace and display options

You can customize how the document window looks by displaying or hiding items, such as table gridlines, graphics, and hidden text. For example, you can speed up the display of a document by displaying table gridlines or by hiding graphics. For more information about table gridlines, see "Displaying table gridlines and formula indicators." For more information about graphics, see "Modifying graphics."

By hiding all bars and menus in a document, you can remove the toolbars, property bar, ruler, application bar, scroll bar, and menus from the document window.

You can choose to hide the QuickTips on menus. QuickTips provide information about the icons and buttons on the toolbar, property bar, and application bar, and about options on the menu. QuickTips pop up in a small box next to the pointer when you point to an icon or button for a few seconds.

You can enable Corel RealTime Preview, which lets you view the effects of a proposed change to text before you apply the change.

 How to


To display or hide items in a document

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Display.

3	In the Display settings dialog box, click the Document tab.

4	In the Show area, enable or disable any check boxes.

A check mark next to the item in the View menu indicates that the item is displayed.

 Tip

•	You can customize settings by right-clicking the WordPerfect title bar and clicking Settings.

 Related topics


To hide all bars and menus in a document

•	Click View [image] Hide bars.

 Tip

•	You can restores the bars and menus to your screen by pressing Esc.

 Related topics


To hide QuickTips on menus

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Environment.

3	In the Environment settings dialog box, click the Interface tab.

4	In the Items to display on menus area, disable the QuickTips check box.

 Note

•	QuickTips are displayed by default.

 Related topics


To enable Corel RealTime Preview

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Display.

3	In the Display settings dialog box, click the Document tab.

4	Enable the RealTime preview check box in the Show area.

 Related topics


Using Microsoft Outlook address book in WordPerfect

WordPerfect allows you to use a Microsoft Outlook address book in WordPerfect. For example, you can choose an individual from the Outlook contact list when creating routing slips for document tracking or creating envelopes and labels. You can also use Outlook for merging documents.

 How to


To use Microsoft Outlook address book in WordPerfect

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Environment.

3	In the Environment settings dialog box, click the General tab.

4	Enable the Use Outlook address book/contact list check box.

 Related topics


Changing shadow cursor and dragging settings

The shadow cursor displays when you point to text or to white space (background), but only in the active editing area. The purpose of the shadow cursor is to show you exactly where the cursor will go when you click the mouse.

You can change settings for the shadow cursor, including how the shadow cursor reacts in the document window and how it displays.

You can enable the drag option. The drag option lets you drag to set the size of a graphic.

 How to


To change shadow cursor settings

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Display.

3	In the Display settings dialog box, click the Document tab.

4	In the Shadow cursor area, open the Color picker, and click a color.

5	Open  the Shape picker, and click a shape.

6	In the Active in area, enable one of the following options:

•	Text [image] lets the shadow cursor become active when positioned in text

•	White space [image] lets the shadow cursor become active when positioned in white space

•	Both [image] lets the shadow cursor become active when positioned in text or white space

7	In the Snap to area, enable one of the following options:

•	Margins [image] makes the shadow cursor snap to margins

•	Tabs [image] makes the shadow cursor snap to tab settings

•	Indent [image] makes the shadow cursor snap to indents

•	Spaces [image] makes the shadow cursor snap to spaces

 Note

•	If you choose to have the shadow cursor active only in text, the Snap to options are not available.

 Related topics


To enable the drag option

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Environment.

3	In the Environment settings dialog box, click the Graphics tab.

4	Enable the Drag to create new graphic boxes check box.

 Related topics


Changing measurement and ruler settings

You can choose a unit of measurement for such items as font size, columns and margins, lines, and horizontal and vertical spacing. You can also change ruler settings so that tabs snap to specific measurements or so that ruler guides are displayed.

 How to


To change measurement settings for dialog boxes and Reveal Codes

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Display.

3	In the Display settings dialog box, click the Document tab.

4	Choose a unit of measure from the Units of measure list box.

 Tip

•	You can also choose a unit of measure to be used on the application bar and ruler by choosing a unit of measurement from the Application bar/ruler display list box.

 Related topics


To change ruler settings

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Display.

3	In the Display settings dialog box, click the Ruler tab.

4	In the Ruler options area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Tabs snap to ruler grid [image] makes the tabs snap to specific ruler settings

•	Show ruler guides [image] displays ruler guides

 Tip

•	You can also change ruler settings by right-clicking the ruler, and clicking Settings.

 Related topics


Changing user information, prompt settings, and error notifications

WordPerfect lets you change user information. For example, you can add your name and initials to user information and choose a color in which to display your comments so that other users can easily identify them.

You can choose to be prompted if a word needs to be hyphenated. You can also choose to be notified when an error is detected in a document.

 How to


To change user information for comments and document summaries

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Environment.

3	In the Environment settings dialog box, click the General tab.

4	Type a name in the Name box.

5	Type initials in the Initials box.

6	Open the User color picker, and click a color.

 Related topics


To change hyphenation prompts

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Environment.

3	In the Environment settings dialog box, click the Prompts tab.

4	From the On hyphenation list box choose one of the following options:

•	Always [image] displays a prompt every time a word should be hyphenated

•	Never [image] never displays a prompt when a word should be hyphenated

•	When required [image] displays a prompt when a word should be hyphenated, but is not found in the main word list

 Related topics


To change error notifications

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Environment.

3	In the Environment settings dialog box, click the Prompts tab.

4	In the Beep area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	On error [image] notifies you when an error is detected

•	On hyphenation [image] notifies you when a word should be hyphenated, but isn't

•	On find failure [image] notifies you when WordPerfect fails to find an item during a search

 Related topics


Changing the language for WordPerfect

WordPerfect is available in different language versions. When you use each language version, the program interface, including dialog box text, prompts, and menus, uses that language. You can change the interface language as long as you have another language version installed.

WordPerfect includes writing tools to help you type and proofread text. You can change the writing tools language. For example, if you do much of your work in English but also write documents in German, you can set a document's language as German and use the German spelling checker, thesaurus, and Grammatik.

 How to


To change the interface language

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Environment.

3	In the Environment settings dialog box, click the Interface tab.

4	Choose a language from the Interface language list box.

 Related topics


To change the writing tools language

1	Click Tools [image] Language [image] Settings.

2	Choose a language from the Current language list.

If you want to set a language as the default, enable the Save as default writing tools language check box.

 Related topics


Saving workspace settings

You can save your customized workspace settings, including shadow cursor settings, measurement and ruler settings, toolbar, application bar and property bar settings. By saving your workspace settings, they remain in effect until you change them.

 How to


To save workspace settings

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Environment.

3	In the Environment settings dialog box, click the Interface tab.

4	In the Save workspace area, enable one of the following options:

•	Always [image] always saves workspace settings when quitting WordPerfect

•	Never [image] never saves workspace settings when quitting WordPerfect

•	Prompt on exit [image] prompts you to save workspace settings when quitting WordPerfect

 Related topics


Choosing and creating shortcut keys

WordPerfect provides shortcut keys that help you work more efficiently. You can customize shortcut keys to provide quick access to the features and macros you use most. You can choose a specific keyboard to use. You can revert to the default WordPerfect keyboard at any time.

You can create a custom keyboard that lets you choose the shortcut keys you use most. You can also add and remove shortcut keys from the keyboards you have created or from the keyboards provided with WordPerfect. For more information about using shortcut keys, see "Using shortcut keys."

 How to


To choose a keyboard

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Keyboards tab.

4	Choose a keyboard from the Available keyboards list.

5	Click Select.

 Related topics


To revert to the default keyboard

•	Press Ctrl + Alt + Shift + Backspace.

 Related topics


To create a keyboard

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Keyboards tab.

4	Click Create.

5	Type a name for the keyboard in the New keyboard name box, and click OK.

6	In the Keyboard shortcuts dialog box, choose a shortcut key from the Choose a shortcut key list.

7	On the Features tab, choose a category from the Features categories list box.

8	Choose a feature from the Assign a feature to the shortcut key list.

9	Click Assign feature to key.

 Related topics


To add a shortcut key

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Keyboards tab.

4	Choose a keyboard from the Available keyboards list.

5	Click Edit.

6	In the Keyboard shortcuts dialog box, choose a shortcut key from the Choose a shortcut key list.

7	On the Features tab, choose a category from the Features categories list box.

8	Choose a feature from the Assign a feature to the shortcut key list.

9	Click Assign feature to key.

You can also
Assign a shortcut that will run an application	Click the Programs tab. Click Assign program to key. In the Open file dialog box, select a program to be run when the shortcut key is pressed.
Assign a shortcut that will play a macro	Click the Macros tab. Click Assign Macro to key. In the Select macro dialog box, choose a macro to be played when the shortcut key is pressed.
 Related topics


To remove a shortcut key

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Keyboards tab.

4	Choose a keyboard from the Available keyboards list.

5	Click Edit.

6	In the Keyboard shortcut dialog box, choose a shortcut key from the Choose a shortcut key list.

7	Click Remove assignment.

 Related topics


Copying, restoring, renaming, and deleting keyboards

WordPerfect allows you to copy keyboards. Copying a keyboard is useful when you want to create a new keyboard that contains keyboard assignments similar to an existing keyboard. You can also restore any of the preset keyboards provided with WordPerfect to their original settings.

You can rename or delete keyboards that you have created. You cannot rename or delete the preset keyboards provided with WordPerfect.

 How to


To copy a keyboard

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Keyboards tab.

4	Click Copy.

5	From the Template to copy from list box in the Copy keyboard dialog box, choose the template in which the keyboard is stored.

6	Choose a keyboard from the Select keyboards to copy list.

7	From the Template to copy to list box, choose the template to which you want to copy the keyboard.

8	Click Copy.

9	In the Copy/rename object dialog box, type a name for the keyboard in the Object box.

 Related topics


To restore a keyboard

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Keyboards tab.

4	Choose a keyboard from the Available keyboards list.

5	Click Reset.

 Related topics


To rename a keyboard

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Keyboards tab.

4	Choose a keyboard from the Available keyboards list.

5	Click Rename.

6	In the Rename keyboard dialog box, type a new name in the Rename keyboard to box.

 Related topics


To delete a keyboard

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Keyboards tab.

4	Choose a keyboard from the Available keyboards list.

5	Click Delete.

 Related topics


Changing font size and colors of the Help

You can decrease and increase the font size of the text that displays in a Help window. You can apply the system colors so that the background color and text in the Help window match the system colors.

 How to


To change the font size in a Help topic

1	Click Help [image] Help topics.

2	Click the Contents tab.

3	Choose a book icon.

4	Click Open.

5	Choose a topic.

6	Click Display.

7	In the WordPerfect Help window, click Options [image] Font, and click one of the following:

•	Small [image] decreases the default font size

•	Normal [image] displays text in the default font size

•	Large [image] increases the default font size

A check mark indicates which font is enabled.

 Related topics


To apply system colors to the Help window

1	Click Help [image] Help topics.

2	Click the Contents tab.

3	Choose a book icon.

4	Click Open.

5	Choose a topic.

6	Click Display.

7	In the Help window, click Options [image] Use system colors.

A check mark indicates that this command is enabled.

 Related topics


Editing documents

Once you create a document, you can edit it using a variety of methods.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	finding and replacing text

•	modifying find and replace settings

•	finding and replacing codes

•	cutting, copying, and pasting text and graphics

•	moving text and graphics

•	undoing, redoing, and repeating actions

•	reviewing documents

•	routing documents

•	comparing documents

•	controlling document comparison

•	changing the settings for document review and compare

•	adding digital signatures

•	adding, editing, and deleting comments

•	displaying, hiding, and viewing comments

•	converting text to comments and comments to text

For more information about editing documents, see "Reference: Editing documents."


Finding and replacing text

WordPerfect lets you find and replace text. You can search for words, phrases, or individual characters in a document. Once the text is found, you can replace some or all occurrences of the text with other text, or you can delete the text.

You can search for text that is displayed in a specific font or case. You can also find and replace forms of a word. For example, you can replace forms of the word "entry" with the word "insertion." Therefore, if the word "entries" is found, which is the plural of the word "entry," it will be replaced with the word "insertions." Furthermore, you can search for occurrences of words that are whole words, and not part of a larger word. For example, if you are searching for the word "sum," a default search would find "sum" and other words such as "summer" and "summit." Therefore, if you do a whole word search for the word sum, you will find only occurrences of the word "sum."

 How to


To find and replace text

1	Click Edit [image] Find and replace.

2	In the Find box, type the text you want to search for.

3	Type the replacement text in the Replace with box.

4	Click one of the following:

•	Find next [image] finds the next occurrence of the text

•	Find prev [image] finds the previous occurrence of the text

•	Replace [image] finds and replaces the next occurrence of the text

•	Replace all [image] finds and replaces all occurrences of the text

You can also
Find the next occurrence of the search text	Press Ctrl + Alt + N.
Find the previous occurrence of the search text	Press Ctrl + Alt + P.
 Tips

•	You can delete all occurrences of a text string by typing the text you want to delete in the Find box and leaving the Replace with box empty.

•	You can search for a word or phrase you searched for previously by choosing the word or phrase from the Find list box.

 Related topics


To find text in a specific font

1	Click Edit [image] Find and replace.

2	Type the text you want to search for in the Find box.

3	Click Match [image] Font.

4	Enable the Font check box.

5	Choose a font from the Font list box.

6	Click one of the following:

•	Find next [image] finds the next occurrence of the text

•	Find prev [image] finds the previous occurrence of the text

You can also
Search for a font style	Choose a font style from the Font style list box.
Search for a specific point size	Enable the Point size check box. Type a point size in the Point size box.
Search for specific font attributes	In the Attributes area, enable one or more of the attribute check boxes.
 Related topics


To find and replace text in a specific case

1	Click Edit [image] Find and replace.

2	Click Match [image] Case.

3	In the Find box, type the word you want to search for.

4	Type the replacement word in the Replace with box.

5	Click one of the following:

•	Find next [image] finds the next occurrence of the word

•	Find prev [image] finds the previous occurrence of the word

•	Replace [image] finds and replaces the next occurrence of the word

•	Replace all [image] finds and replaces all occurrences of the word

 Related topics


To find and replace a form of a word

1	Click Edit [image] Find and replace.

2	Click Type [image] Word forms.

3	In the Find box, type the word you want to search for.

4	Type the replacement word in the Replace with box.

5	Click one of the following:

•	Find next [image] finds the next occurrence of the word form

•	Find prev [image] finds the previous occurrence of the word form

•	Replace [image] finds and replaces the next occurrence of the word

•	Replace all [image] finds and replaces all occurrences of the word

 Related topics


To find and replace a whole word

1	Click Edit [image] Find and replace.

2	Click Match [image] Whole word.

3	In the Find box, type the word you want to search for.

4	Type the replacement word in the Replace with box.

5	Click one of the following:

•	Find next [image] finds the next occurrence of the word

•	Find prev [image] finds the previous occurrence of the word

•	Replace [image] finds and replaces the next occurrence of the word

•	Replace all [image] finds and replaces all occurrences of the word

 Related topics


Modifying find and replace settings

WordPerfect lets you modify settings for finding and replacing text. You can specify the direction of a search and specify in which area of the document to search. For example, you can search only in the body of a document, excluding all other substructures, such as headers, footers, endnotes, and equations. Moreover, you can limit the number of times search text is replaced. You can also specify the position of the cursor during a search.

 How to


To specify the direction of the search

1	Click Edit [image] Find and replace.

2	Click Options, and choose one of the following:

•	Begin find at the top of document [image] begins the search at the top of the document, no matter where the cursor is positioned

•	Wrap at Beg/End of document [image] searches from the cursor position to the end of the document, and then searches from the beginning of the document to the cursor position

 Related topics


To control the area of a search

To	Do the following
Search headers, footers, and other substructures, such as endnotes and equations	Click Options [image] Include headers, footers, etc. in Find.
Limit the area of a search	Select the area of the document you want to search. Click Edit [image] Find and replace. Click Options [image] Limit find within selection.
 Related topics


To limit the number of times search text is replaced

1	Click Edit [image] Find and replace.

2	Click Options [image] Limit number of changes.

3	In the Limit number of changes dialog box, type a number in the Limit changes to box.

 Related topics


To specify cursor position during a search

1	Click Edit [image] Find and replace.

2	Click Action, and click one of the following options:

•	Select match [image] selects the text that you searched for

•	Position before [image] positions the cursor before the search text

•	Position after [image] positions the cursor after the search text

•	Extend selection [image] selects text from the cursor to the search text

 Related topics


Finding and replacing codes

You can search for and replace codes in a document. For example, if you search for a font size code, all font size codes are found. You can also search for specific codes, such as a specific font size. For a detailed list of the specific codes you can search for, see "List of specific find and replace codes."

To find and replace codes, you must first enable Reveal Codes. For more information about using Reveal Codes, see "Displaying Reveal Codes."

 How to


To find and replace a code

1	Click Edit [image] Find and replace.

2	Click Match [image] Codes.

If you want to choose a merge code, enable the Display merge codes only check box.

3	Choose a code from the Find codes list box.

4	Click Insert.

5	In the Find and replace dialog box, click in the Replace with box.

6	In the Codes dialog box, choose a replacement code from the Replace codes list box.

7	Click Insert and close.

8	Click one of the following:

•	Find next [image] finds the next occurrence of the code

•	Find prev [image] finds the previous occurrence of the code

9	Click Replace.

If you want to replace all occurrences of a code, click Replace all.

 Related topics


To find and replace a specific code

1	Click Edit [image] Find and replace.

2	Click Type [image] Specific codes.

3	Choose a code from the Find codes list box.

4	Type values in the following boxes:

•	Find

•	Replace with

5	Click one of the following:

•	Find next [image] finds the next occurrence of the code

•	Find prev [image] finds the previous occurrence of the code

6	Click Replace.

 Note

•	The contents of the Find and replace dialog box change depending on the code you select. For a detailed list of the codes, see "List of specific find and replace codes."

 Tip

•	If you want to replace the code with nothing, enable the Replace with nothing check box if it is available.

 Related topics


Cutting, copying, and pasting text and graphics

You can cut or copy text or graphics and paste them to a new location in a document.

When you cut or copy information, it is stored on the Clipboard. You can paste it anywhere in the active document, in another document, or in another application.

Clipboard contents are only available until you cut or copy something else or until you quit Windows. However, you can append the Clipboard contents so that new information is added to the existing Clipboard contents instead of replacing the information already stored there.

You can also choose a specific format when you paste information from the Clipboard into WordPerfect. For example, you can copy text from another application in Rich Text Format (.rtf) or as simple text.

 How to


To cut, copy, and paste text and graphics

To	Do the following
Copy text or graphics to the Clipboard	Select the text or graphic. Click Edit [image] Copy.
Cut text or graphics and move to the Clipboard	Select the text or graphic. Click Edit [image] Cut.
Paste text or graphics in a document	Click where you want to insert the text or graphic. Click Edit [image] Paste.
Add a selection to the current Clipboard contents	Select the text to add to the Clipboard. Click Edit [image] Append.
 Tips

•	You can also copy, cut, or paste text or graphics by clicking Copy, Cut, or Paste on the toolbar.

•	You can link copied information to a document by enabling the Paste link option. The changes you make to the linked information in the active file will be reflected in the original file. The changes made to the original file will also appear in the active file.

 Related topics


To paste Clipboard contents in a specified format

1	Select the text or graphic.

2	Click Edit, and click one of the following:

•	Copy

•	Cut

3	Click Edit [image] Paste special.

4	Enable the Paste option.

5	Choose a format from the As list box.

 Tip

•	You can paste text as unformatted text by pressing Ctrl + Alt + C.

 Related topics


Moving text and graphics

You can move text and graphics by dragging them within a document or between documents.

 How to


To move text or graphics by dragging within a document

•	Select a text or graphic, and drag it to a new position.

 Related topics


To move text or graphics by dragging to another document

1	Click Window, and click one of the following:

•	Tile top to bottom [image] arranges the windows so that the documents are displayed above or below one another

•	Tile side by side [image] arranges the windows so that the documents are displayed side by side

2	Select the text or graphic, and drag it to the other document.

 Related topics


Undoing, redoing, and repeating actions

WordPerfect lets you undo actions one at a time or undo a series of actions all at once. You can undo changes made to text, graphics, or tables. However, some actions, such as scrolling or saving a document, cannot be reversed. You can redo actions that you have undone. You can also repeat actions.

In addition, you can recover text that you deleted from a document. When you recover deleted text, WordPerfect displays the deleted text as highlighted text at the cursor. You can reinsert the highlighted text or choose from up to two previous deletions.

 How to


To undo actions

To	Do the following
Undo the last action you performed	Click Edit [image] Undo.
Undo a series of actions	Click Edit [image] Undo/Redo history. Choose an action from the Undo list, and click Undo.
Set the number of undo levels	Click Edit [image] Undo/Redo history. Click Options. Type a value in the Number of undo/redo items box.
Save undo/redo items with a document	Click Edit [image] Undo/Redo history. Click Options. Enable the Save undo/Redo items with document check box.
 Notes

•	The maximum number of undo levels is 300. If you have a large number of items in the undo/redo history, you will require more disk space and memory for editing. If you notice reduced computer performance, decrease the number of items in the undo/redo history.

•	If the undo/redo history has not been saved with the document, you can undo and redo changes that have been made since the document was last saved.

 Tips

•	You can undo an action by clicking the Undo button on the toolbar.

•	You can undo a series of actions by clicking the drop-down arrow beside the Undo button on the toolbar.

 Related topics


To redo actions

To	Do the following
Redo an action you have just undone	Click Edit [image] Redo.
Redo a series of actions	Click Edit [image] Undo/Redo history. Choose an action from the Redo list box. Click Redo.
 Tips

•	You can redo an action by clicking the Redo button on the toolbar.

•	You can redo a series of actions by clicking the drop-down arrow beside the Redo button on the toolbar.

 Related topics


To repeat an action

1	Click Edit [image] Repeat next action.

2	Type a value in the Number of times to repeat next action box.

If you want to set this value as the default whenever you use repeat, click Use as default.

 Related topics


To recover deleted text

1	Click where you want to insert the deleted text.

2	Press Alt + Shift + Backspace.

3	Click one of the following:

•	Restore [image] inserts the deleted text

•	Previous [image] displays the previous deletion

•	Next [image] displays the next deletion

 Related topics


Reviewing documents

Using WordPerfect, you can send a document to a reviewer, or multiple reviewers, to add changes or make revisions to the document. These changes and revisions are also referred to as annotations. If you authored the document, you can open it to accept or reject the annotations.

If you send the document to multiple reviewers, the annotations of each reviewer are displayed in a unique color. All revisions display as strikeout text and comments are displayed as redline text. However, you can modify the way annotations are displayed. For more information about modifying the display of annotation text, see "Changing the settings for document review and compare."

 How to


To review a document

1	Click File [image] Document [image] Review.

2	Click Reviewer.

3	Type your name in the User name box.

4	Type your initials in the User initials box.

5	Open the color picker on the feature bar, and click a color. All the changes you make to the document will display in the color you choose.

If you want to see another reviewer's color selection, choose the reviewer's name from the Reviewer list box.

6	Edit the document.

7	Click Close.

8	Click File [image] Save.

 Notes

•	You can use all WordPerfect features, except Sort, to edit a document. Only text editing changes are marked with a color.

•	You can edit additions that other users have made; however, you cannot edit or undo previous deletions that other users have made.

 Related topics


To incorporate reviewers' changes

1	Click File [image] Document [image] Review.

2	Click Author.

3	Choose a reviewer from the View annotations from list box. This displays only the changes made by the selected reviewer.

If you want to display the changes made by all reviewers, choose All reviewers from the View annotations from list box.

4	Click one of the following:

•	Go to previous [image] moves to the previous change

•	Go to next [image] moves to the next change

5	Click one of the following:

•	Show/hide [image] displays or hides margin markers

•	Display annotations [image] shows the edited text with or without color markings

•	Insert current annotation [image] accepts the current annotation

•	Insert all annotations [image] accepts all annotations

•	Delete the current annotation [image] rejects the current annotation

•	Delete all annotations [image] rejects all the annotations in the document

6	Save the document.

 Notes

•	If you want to move through the document from change to change, you cannot move through subsections, such as headers, footers, and footnotes.

•	If you save a reviewed document in another file format, for example Rich Text Format (.rtf files), the document will not be in review mode when you open it. The reviewer's remarks are lost because the added text (red) and the deleted text (strikethrough) revert to regular text. You should not save the document to a different file format until all changes are incorporated.

 Tip

•	You can also incorporate reviewer's changes in a subdocument by clicking in the subdocument and clicking the Next button to move from change to change.

 Related topics


Routing documents

Routing a document allows you to send a document for an online review to several reviewers in a specified order. The routing process allows you to send a document to several reviewers, one reviewer at a time, to allow each of the reviewers to see the changes made by the previous reviewer(s). When routing a document, it is inserted in an e-mail as an attachment. You must have Microsoft Outlook as your default address book for this option to work. For more information about using Microsoft Outlook, see "Using Microsoft Outlook address book in WordPerfect."

In order to route a document, you must create a routing slip. The routing slip allows you to specify who to send the document to and in what order.

When a reviewer receives a routed document, they can make changes and revisions to the document. When they are done, they close the document and it is sent to the next reviewer listed on the routing slip. If they prefer, they can save the changes to the document and send it later. In addition, a reviewer can reassign a routed document to another reviewer listed on the routing slip.

 How to


To create a routing slip

1	Click File [image] Document [image] Routing slip.

2	Type a subject name in the Subject box.

The subject name that you type in the box displays in the subject box of the e-mail that contains the document.

3	Type a message in the Message box.

The text that you type in the Message box displays in the message area of the e-mail that contains the document.

4	Click the Add button to add reviewers to the Reviewers list box.

You can also
Move a reviewer up in the routing order	Choose a reviewer from the Reviewers list. Click the Up arrow.
Move a reviewer down in the routing order	Choose a reviewer from the Reviewers list. Click the Down arrow.
 Related topics


To review a routed document

1	In Microsoft Outlook, double-click the attached document.

If you prefer, you can save the document and then open the saved document to review it.

2	In the Reviewer mode options dialog box, click Review.

3	Type your name in the Reviewer list box.

4	Open the color picker on the feature bar, and click a color. All the changes you make to the document will display in the color you choose.

If you want to see another reviewer's color selection, choose the reviewer's name from the Reviewer list box.

5	Edit the document.

6	Click Close.

 Notes

•	You can use all WordPerfect features, except Sort, to edit a document. Only text editing changes are marked with a color.

•	You can edit additions that other users have made; however, you cannot edit or undo previous deletions that other users have made.

 Related topics


To reassign a routed document

1	In Microsoft Outlook, double-click the attached document.

2	In the Reviewer mode options dialog box, click Reassign.

3	In the Reassign document review dialog box, choose a reviewer from the list.

4	Click Send.

 Related topics


Comparing documents

You can compare a current version of a document with an earlier version to see what changes have been made. When comparing documents, you can generate a compare summary and a list of changes. A compare summary describes the color and the attributes used to display deletions and insertions. It also lists the number of deletions, insertions, and moves that were made. The list of changes details all of the changes made in the document.

When you compare and review a document, the document that contains the comparison markings is opened in review mode. For more information about reviewing documents, see "Reviewing documents." In addition, you can restore a document to the way it was before the comparison.

 How to


To compare a document

1	Click File [image] Document [image] Compare.

2	In the With box, type the folder and filename of the file you want to compare.

If you want to browse for the file, click the Browse button.

3	In the Show markings in area, enable one of the following options:

•	New document [image] displays comparison results in a new document

•	Current document [image] displays comparison results in the active document

4	Click Compare only.

 Related topics


To generate a compare summary

1	Click File [image] Document [image] Compare.

2	Click Settings [image] Compare only.

3	In the Document compare settings dialog box, click the Options tab.

4	In the Summary of comparison area, enable one of the following options:

•	None [image] inserts no comparison summary

•	Insert at beginning [image] inserts the comparison summary at the beginning of the document

•	Insert at end [image] inserts the comparison summary at the end of the document

 Related topics


To generate a list of changes

1	Click File [image] Document [image] Compare.

2	Click Settings [image] Compare only.

3	In the Document compare settings dialog box, click the Options tab.

4	In the List of changes area, enable one of the following options:

•	None [image] displays no revision list

•	Show surrounding context [image] displays a revision list that details the changes in the context of the document

•	Show change only [image] displays a revision list that includes only the changes made to the document

 Related topics


To compare and review a document

1	Click File [image] Document [image] Compare.

2	In the With box, type the folder and filename of the file you want to compare.

If you want to browse for the file, click the Browse button.

3	In the Show markings in area, enable one of the following options:

•	New document [image] displays comparison results in a new document

•	Current document [image] displays comparison results in the active document

4	Click Compare/Review.

 Related topics


To restore a document

1	Click File [image] Document [image] Remove markings.

2	Enable one of the following options:

•	Remove redline markings and strikeout text [image] restores the current document to the way it was before the comparison

•	Remove strikeout text only [image] keeps the markings for added and moved text but removes markings for deleted text

•	Remove document compare deletions only [image] removes only markings for deleted text

•	Remove all document compare markings [image] removes all markings, insertions, deletions, and moves

 Related topics


Controlling document comparison

When comparing documents, you can control how the comparison is done. You can choose to compare document text by word or by character. You can also include substructure text in a document comparison. For example, you can include headers, footers, and comments in a comparison. Conversely, you can exclude text from a document comparison.

 How to


To compare document text by word or by character

1	Click File [image] Document [image] Compare.

2	Click Settings [image] Compare only.

3	In the Document compare settings dialog box, click the Options tab.

4	In the Marking precision area, enable one of the following options:

•	Word [image] compares document text word-by-word

•	Character [image] compares document text character-by-character

 Tip

•	If you plan on comparing and reviewing the document, you can specify marking precision, such as comparing a document word-by-word or character-by-character, by clicking Settings [image] Compare then review.

 Related topics


To include substructure text in a document comparison

1	Click File [image] Document [image] Compare.

2	Click Settings [image] Compare only.

3	In the Document compare settings dialog box, click the Options tab.

4	In the Include in comparison area, enable any the following check boxes:

•	Headers/Footers [image] includes headers and footers in a document comparison

•	Comments [image] compares information in comments

•	Expand master documents [image] expands all subdocuments associated with the file

 Tip

•	If you plan on comparing and reviewing the document, you can specify which text to include in the comparison by clicking Settings [image] Compare then review.

 Related topics


To exclude text from a document comparison

1	Click File [image] Document [image] Compare.

2	Click Settings [image] Compare only.

3	In the Document compare settings dialog box, click the Options tab.

4	In the Characters to enclose text to skip in comparison box, type a character.

 Tip

•	If you plan on comparing and reviewing the document, you can specify which text to exclude from a document by clicking Settings [image] Compare then review.

 Related topics


Changing the settings for document review and compare

You can change the settings used for comparing and reviewing documents. You can change the appearance of inserted text, deleted text, text that was moved, and redline text. WordPerfect also lets you use margin ticks to indicate which lines of text have changed; you can assign a marking character, and choose the margins in which to display them.

 How to


To change the appearance of inserted text

1	Click File [image] Document [image] Compare.

2	Click Settings [image] Compare only.

3	Click the Insertions tab.

4	In the Appearance area, enable one or more of the following check boxes:

•	Bold

•	Italic

•	Underline

•	Double underline

•	Redline

5	Open the Color picker, and click a color on the color palette.

6	In the Enclose text with area, enable an option.

 Related topics


To change the appearance of deleted text

1	Click File [image] Document [image] Compare.

2	Click Settings [image] Compare only.

3	Click the Deletions tab.

4	In the Appearance area, enable one or more of the following check boxes:

•	Bold

•	Italic

•	Underline

•	Double underline

•	Redline

•	Strikeout

5	Open the Color picker, and click a color.

6	In the Enclose text with area, enable an option.

7	In the Show deleted text as area, enable one of the following options:

•	Full text [image] displays all of the deleted text

•	Abbreviated [image] displays a portion of the deleted text with ellipses

•	No text [image] hides the deleted text

•	Character [image] replaces the deleted text with a character of your choice

 Related topics


To change the appearance of text that is moved

1	Click File [image] Document [image] Compare.

2	Click Settings [image] Compare only.

3	Click the Moves tab.

4	In the Show moves at area, enable one of the following options:

•	Both locations

•	New location

•	Don't show moves

5	Open the Color picker, and click a color.

 Related topics


To change the appearance of redline text

1	Click File [image] Document [image] Redline method.

2	Enable one of the following options:

•	Printer default setting [image] uses the redline method specific to your printer (usually a shaded background)

•	Mark left margin [image] uses the redline markings to redline text in the left margin

•	Mark alternating margins [image] marks redline text in the left margin for even-numbered pages and in the right margin for odd-numbered pages

•	Mark right margin [image] uses the redline markings to redline text in the right margin

 Tip

•	In the Redline character box, you can specify the redline character you want to display . This option is not available if you chose the Printer default setting option.

 Related topics


To display margin ticks for document review

1	Click Document [image] Review.

2	Enable the Place marker in margin of lines with edited text check box.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	Mark left margin

•	Mark alternating margins

•	Mark right margin

4	In the Marking character box, type the character to use as a margin tick.

 Related topics


Adding, editing, and deleting comments

You can add comments to document text, footnotes, endnotes, and outlines. Comments exist outside the main document body and can contain text and formatting, such as font style, justification, margins, tabs, and color. For more information about formatting text, see "Formatting text." In addition, you can edit and delete comments.

 How to


To add a comment

1	Click in the document where you want the comment to display.

2	Click Insert [image] Comment [image] Create.

3	Type the comment text.

4	Click File [image] Close to return to the main document.

When you return to the main document, an comment icon is displayed in the left margin next to line where the comment is inserted. In draft view, comments display as shaded text in the text of a document.

 Tip

•	You can return to the main text document from the comment window by pressing Ctrl + F4.

 Related topics


To edit a comment

1	Click in the line where the comment is inserted.

2	Click Insert [image] Comment [image] Edit.

If you prefer, you can right-click the comment icon and click Edit.

3	Edit the comment.

4	Click one of the following to edit other comments in the document:

•	Next

•	Previous

5	Click File [image] Close to return to the main document.

 Related topics


To delete a comment

•	Right-click a comment or comment icon, and click Delete.

 Related topics


Displaying, hiding, and viewing comments

If you create comments, you can choose to display or hide the comments. If you display a comment, an icon is displayed in the left margin next to line where the comment is inserted. In draft view, comments display as shaded text in the text of a document. You can assign a user name, initials, and color to a comment and view that information, along with the author name and creation date and time.

By default, comments do not print with the document; however, you can convert them to text in the document and then print them. For information about converting comments, see "Converting text to comments and comments to text." For information about printing comments, see "Specifying items to print."

 How to


To display or hide comments

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Display.

3	Click the Document tab.

4	In the Show area, enable the Margin icons check box.

If you want to hide comments, disable the Margin icons check box.

 Notes

•	In draft view, comments display as shaded text in the body of a document; in page view and two pages view, comments display as icons in the left margin. For more information about view modes, see "Viewing and navigating."

•	When user information is assigned to a comment, the comment icon displays as a box with the initials specified in Environment settings; otherwise, the comment icon displays as a balloon.

 Related topics


To assign a user name, initials, and color to a comment

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Environment.

3	Click the General tab.

4	In the User information area, type your name and initials.

If you want to assign a user color for comments, open the User color picker, and click a color.

 Related topics


To view comment information

•	Right-click the comment icon, and click Information.

 Related topics


Converting text to comments and comments to text

You can convert text to a comment and comments to text. By default, comments do not print with the document. However, you can convert them to text in the document and then print them. For information about printing comments, see "Specifying items to print."

 How to


To convert text to a comment

1	Select the text you want to convert to a comment.

2	Click Insert [image] Comment [image] Create.

 Note

•	In draft view, comments display as shaded text in the main text of a document; in page view and two pages view, comments display as icons in the left margin. For more information about view modes, see "Viewing and navigating."

 Related topics


To convert a comment to text

1	Click in the line where the comment is inserted.

2	Click Insert [image] Comment [image] Convert to text.

 Related topics


Adding digital signatures

WordPerfect allows you to add digital signatures to documents. A signed document with a valid digital signature ensures that the document has not been altered since it was signed and identifies the entity to whom the certificate was issued.

To digitally sign a document, you must first obtain a digital certificate and install it on your computer. When you have completed a document, you can digitally sign it. For information about installing a digital certificate, consult the certification authority.

A digital signature is valid if it has not expired and has been distributed by a valid authority. You can view of a digital certificate installed on a computer, view information about a digital signature for a signed document, and choose a method for viewing the signature's validity. If you check the parent certificate, WordPerfect checks the intermediate certificates of authority listed in your browser. If you check the root certificate, WordPerfect checks the highest level of authority or trusted root certificates of authority listed in your browser. If you check the certificate authority, WordPerfect accesses the Internet to determine if a certification authority is valid. If you choose none of these methods, WordPerfect checks if the file had been altered since it was signed.

 How to


To sign a document with a digital signature

1	Click File [image] Signature [image] Sign document.

2	Choose a digital signature from the Sign document using list box.

 Notes

•	If the digital signature is valid, the Signature valid button appears on the application bar. If the digital signature is invalid, the Signature invalid button appears on the application bar. If the digital signature cannot be verified, the Certificate not verified button appears on the application bar.

•	You must have a valid certificate to sign a document with a digital signature.

 Tip

•	You can sign a document with a digital signature by clicking the No signature button on the application bar.

 Related topics


To view the certificate for a digital signature

1	Click File [image] Signature [image] Sign document.

2	Choose a digital signature from the Sign document using list.

3	Click View.

 Related topics


To view information about a digital signature for a signed document

•	Click File [image] Signature [image] View signature.

If the signature is valid, you can view the certificate by clicking View certificate.

 Related topics


To select a validation method for a digital signature

1	Click File [image] Signature [image] Sign document.

2	Choose a digital signature from the Sign document using list box.

3	Click View.

4	In the Certificate dialog box, click the Validation tab.

5	In the Validation method area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Check the certificate authority (using the Internet) [image] connects to the Internet

•	Check parent certificates [image] checks the parent or root certificates

 Note

•	You must enable the Check parent certificates check box to enable the Check root certificate check box.

 Related topics


Reference: Editing documents

This topic provides additional information about the specific codes that you can search for using the find and replace functionality in WordPerfect.

 How to


List of specific find and replace codes

You can search for the following codes using the find and replace functionality.

Code	Represents
Bot mar	Bottom margin
Font	Font
Font size	Font size
HAdv	Horizontal advance
Just	Justification
Lft Mar	Left margin
Lft Mar Adj	Left margin adjustment
Ln Spacing	Line spacing
Ovrstk	Overstrike
Rgt Mar	Right margin
Rgt Mar Adj	Right margin adjustment
Style	Document style
Top Mar	Top margin
VAdv	Vertical advance
 Related topics


Creating and editing envelopes and labels

WordPerfect lets you create and edit envelopes and labels.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	creating envelopes

•	editing envelopes

•	using labels files

•	creating labels

•	changing default settings for labels

•	creating and editing label definitions


Creating envelopes

You can create an envelope using the return and mailing addresses you type, or you can choose return and mailing addresses from a CorelCENTRAL Address Book or a Microsoft Outlook address book. If you want to insert an address from an Outlook address book, you must choose Outlook as the default address book. For more information about using Microsoft Outlook, see "Using Microsoft Outlook address book in WordPerfect."

You can also create a custom address format.

 How to


To create an envelope

1	Click Format [image] Envelope.

2	Click in the From box, and type the return address.

3	Click in the To box, and type the mailing address.

 Note

•	Envelopes are added to the end of a document as a page.

 Related topics


To insert an address from an address book

1	Click Format [image] Envelope.

2	Click the Address Book button in one of the following areas:

•	Return address

•	Mailing address

3	In the address book, click an address entry to add it to the envelope.

4	In the Format address dialog box, choose a format from the Format list box.

 Note

•	The most recently used return address becomes the default return address for future documents.

 Tip

•	You can also select an address for an existing envelope by clicking the Return address or Mailing address button on the property bar.

 Related topics


To create a custom address format

1	Click Format [image] Envelope.

2	Click the Address Book button in one of the following areas:

•	Return address

•	Mailing address

3	In the address book, click an address entry.

4	In the Format address dialog box, click Custom.

5	In the Format (arrange fields) list box, position the cursor where you want to insert an address field.

6	Click a field from the Fields list box.

7	Click Insert.

Repeat steps 6-8 for each field you want to insert.

8	Click OK.

9	In the Custom format name dialog box, type a name for the format.

 Related topics


Editing envelopes

You can change the position of the return and mailing addresses on an envelope. You can change the size of an envelope. If you don't want to choose from preset sizes provided with WordPerfect you can create a size definition. You can insert a POSTNET bar code on an envelope, using an 11-digit delivery point bar code, a 9-digit ZIP code, or a 5-digit ZIP code.

 How to


To change the position of addresses on an envelope

1	Click Format [image] Envelope.

2	Click Address positions.

3	In the Return address position area, type values in the following boxes:

•	From left

•	From top

4	In the Mailing address position area, type values in the following boxes:

•	From left

•	From top

 Related topics


To change the size of an envelope

1	Click Format [image] Envelope.

2	Choose a size from the Default envelope list box.

 Tip

•	You can also change the size of an envelope by clicking the Envelope size button on the property bar, and choosing a new envelope size.

 Related topics


To create a size definition for an envelope

1	Click Format [image] Envelope.

2	Click Create new definition.

3	In the Name box, type a name for the page definition.

4	Choose an envelope size from the Size list box.

 Tip

•	You can also create a size definition by clicking the Envelope size button on the property bar and clicking Page setup.

•	You can also define the envelope size by typing values in the Width and Height boxes.

 Related topics


To insert a POSTNET bar code on an envelope

1	Click Insert [image] Other [image] Bar code.

2	Type a bar code or ZIP code in the Bar code digits box.

3	In the Position area, enable one of the following options:

•	At cursor position [image] insets the bar code at the cursor

•	Position bar code above address [image] inserts the bar code above the mailing address

•	Position bar code below address [image] inserts the bar code below the mailing address

 Related topics


Using labels files

You can select a labels file. You can create a labels file of your own or edit the name and description of an existing labels file. You can also delete a labels file.

 How to


To select a labels file

1	Click Format [image] Labels.

2	Click Change.

3	Choose a labels file from the Filename list box.

4	Click Select.

 Related topics


To create a labels file

1	Click Format [image] Labels.

2	Click Change.

3	Click Create.

4	Type a filename in the Filename box.

5	Type a description in the Description box.

 Note

•	Each labels file contains label definitions. You cannot copy definitions to another labels file; you must re-create a definition to add it to another file. For more information about creating label definitions see "To create a label definition."

•	Labels files are saved with a .lab filename extension.

 Related topics


To edit a labels file name and description

1	Click Format [image] Labels.

2	Click Change.

3	In the Label file dialog box, click Edit.

4	Type a new filename in the Filename box.

5	Type a new description in the Description box.

 Related topics


To delete a labels file

1	Click Format [image] Labels.

2	Click Change.

3	In the Label file dialog box, click the file you want to delete.

4	Click Delete.

 Related topics


Creating labels

You can create mailing labels by inserting addresses from a CorelCENTRAL Address Book or a Microsoft Outlook address book. If you want to insert an address from an Outlook address book, you must choose Outlook as the default address book. For more information about using Microsoft Outlook, see "Using Microsoft Outlook address book in WordPerfect."

You can insert a POSTNET bar code on a label. For example you can use an 11-digit delivery point bar code, a 5-digit ZIP code, or a 9-digit ZIP code.

 How to


To insert an address for a label

1	Click Format [image] Labels.

2	Choose a label definition, from the Labels list box.

3	Click Select.

4	On the label, click where you want to insert an address.

5	Click Tools [image] Address book.

6	In the address book, click an address entry.

7	In the Format address dialog box, choose a format from the Format list box.

A preview of the address is displayed in the window to the right of the Format list box.

 Tip

•	To create labels containing text in addition to the address, you can use the Merge command. For more information, see "Merging with address books."

 Related topics


To insert a POSTNET bar code on a label

1	Click Format [image] Labels.

2	Choose a label definition, from the Labels list box.

3	Click Select.

4	Click Insert [image] Other [image] Bar code.

5	Type a bar code or ZIP code, in the Bar code digits box.

6	In the Position area, enable one of the following options:

•	None [image] inserts the bar code at the cursor

•	Position bar code above address [image] inserts the bar code above the mailing address

•	Position bar code below address [image] inserts the bar code below the mailing address

 Related topics


Changing default settings for labels

You can change the default labels file and choose the type of labels to display as the default.

 How to


To change the default labels file

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Files.

3	In the Files settings dialog box, click the Labels tab.

4	Type a filename and path, in the Default label file box.

If you want to include the new default file in your Favorites folder, enable the Update favorites with changes check box.

 Related topics


To choose the type of labels to display as the default

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Files.

3	In the Files settings dialog box , click the Labels tab.

4	In the Default labels to display area, enable one of the following options:

•	Laser [image] displays label definitions for sheets of paper to be fed through a laser printer

•	Tractor-fed [image] displays label definitions for sheets with holes along the sides to guide the labels through the printer

•	Both [image] displays label definitions for both Laser and Tractor-fed sheets of paper

 Related topics


Creating and editing label definitions

You can create a label definition. You can discontinue labels. When you discontinue labels before filling an entire page, blank labels are added to complete the page. For example, if you type twenty-one labels on a thirty-label page, nine blank labels are added. You can also delete label definitions in a labels file

You can edit a label definition by changing the appearance, location, and label sheet size for labels. You can also choose label definitions. For information about choosing label definitions, see "Printing envelopes and labels."

 How to


To create a label definition

1	Click Format [image] Labels.

2	Click Create.

3	In the Create labels dialog box, type a description in the Label description box.

 Related topics


To discontinue labels

1	Click Format [image] Labels.

2	Click Off.

 Related topics


To delete a label definition from a labels file

1	Click Format [image] Labels.

2	In the List labels for area, enable one of the following options:

•	Laser [image] displays label definitions for sheets of paper to be fed through a laser printer

•	Tractor-fed [image] displays label definitions for sheets with holes along the sides to guide the labels through the printer

•	Both [image] displays label definitions for both laser and tractor-fed sheets of paper

3	Choose a label definition, from the Labels list box.

4	Click Delete.

 Note

•	If you delete a label definition from a labels file, you cannot recover it.

 Related topics


To edit the appearance of a label

1	Click Format [image] Labels.

2	Choose a label definition from the Labels list box.

3	Click Edit.

4	In the Label size area, type a value in the all of the following boxes:

•	Width

•	Height.

5	In the Label margins area, type values in all of the following boxes:

•	Left [image] lets you specify the distance from the left edge of the label

•	Right [image] lets you specify the distance from the right edge of the label

•	Top [image] lets you specify the distance from the top of the label

•	Bottom [image] lets you specify the distance from the bottom of the label

 Related topics


To edit the location of labels on a page

1	Click Format [image] Labels.

2	Choose a label definition from the Labels list box.

3	Click Edit.

4	In the Labels per page area, type a value in any of the following boxes:

•	Columns

•	Rows

5	In the Space between labels area, type a value in any of the following boxes:

•	Columns

•	Rows

6	In the Top left label area, type a value in any of the following boxes:

•	Top edge

•	Left edge

 Note

•	An error message appears if the label size multiplied by the labels per page exceeds the label sheet size, if the total size of both margins exceeds the size of the label, and if the distance between labels or top left label amounts is too big for all labels to fit on a page.

 Related topics


To edit a label sheet size

1	Click Format [image] Labels.

2	Choose a label definition from the Labels list box.

3	Click Edit.

4	In the Edit labels dialog box, click Change.

5	Modify any of the settings in the Edit page definition dialog box.

 Related topics


Working with files

File management is an important part of any project. You can open many different file formats in WordPerfect. You can also insert files into documents, create document summaries, assign passwords to documents, and more.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	opening and previewing files

•	inserting files into active documents

•	using document summaries

•	using password protection

•	e-mailing documents

•	using conversion settings

•	saving and closing documents

For more information about working with files, see "Using WordPerfect Office file management boxes."


Opening and previewing files

You can open WordPerfect documents, including those created using previous versions of WordPerfect, and with other word-processing applications. When you open a document created with another word-processing application, it is converted to a WordPerfect document. You can also preview files before opening them in WordPerfect.

You can specify delimiters, characters, and Windows metafile options when you convert documents to WordPerfect. For more information about conversion options, see "Using conversion settings."

 How to


To open a file

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Choose All files from the File type list box.

3	Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored.

4	Click a file.

5	Click Open.

You can also
Open multiple files	Hold down Ctrl, and click the files you want to open. Click Open.
Open a range of files	Click the first file in the range. Hold down Shift, and click the last file in the range. Click Open.
Open a copy of a file	Click a file. Click Open as copy.
Open a recently opened file	Click File, and click a file.
 Tip

•	If a file created using another word-processing application does not display correctly when it is converted to a WordPerfect document, it may be because the original file format is not supported by WordPerfect. Open the file in its native word-processing application, save it in a file format supported by WordPerfect, and open it again in WordPerfect. For more information about the file formats supported by WordPerfect, see "Import and export file formats for WordPerfect."

 Related topics


To preview a file

1	Click File [image] Open.

If the menu bar does not display in the Open file dialog box, click the Toggle menu on/off button.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored.

3	Click a file.

4	Click View [image] Preview [image] No preview.

A bullet beside No preview indicates that file previewing is disabled. If you want to preview a file, ensure that the bullet is hidden.

You can also
Preview a file in a separate window	Click View [image] Preview [image] Use separate window.
 Related topics


Inserting files into active documents

You can insert a copy of a file into an active document.

 How to


To insert a file into an active document

1	Click where you want to insert the file.

2	Click Insert [image] File.

3	Choose All files from the File type list box.

4	Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored.

5	Click a file.

6	Click Insert.

 Note

•	For information about opening files, see "Opening and previewing files."

 Related topics


Using document summaries

You can use document summaries to record information about documents, such as a title, subject, author, keywords, and comments. If you publish a document to the Internet, the summary information is transferred to the corresponding fields in the Web document.

You can customize a document summary by hiding or displaying specific fields.

You can also automate a document summary in several ways; for example, you can set WordPerfect to prompt you to create a document summary each time you save or close a document.

You can also view a document summary.

 How to


To record summary information about a document

1	Click File [image] Properties.

2	Click the Summary tab.

3	Type text in any of the boxes.

 Note

•	You can customize a document summary by hiding or displaying specific fields. For more information, see "To customize a document summary."

 Related topics


To customize a document summary

1	Click File [image] Properties.

2	Click the Summary tab.

3	Click Setup.

4	In the Document summary setup dialog box, enable any of the check boxes in the Select fields list.

The fields display in the Fields to display box.

You can also
Move a document summary field	Drag a field up or down in the Fields to display list.
Use a specific document summary as the default	Click Use as default.
Remove all fields from a document summary	Click Clear all.
 Related topics


To automate a document summary

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Summary.

If you want to include information to identify the subject of the document, type text in the Subject search text box in the Options area.

3	In the Default descriptive type box, type a descriptive name for the document.

4	Enable the Create summary on save/exit check box.

You can also
Use the descriptive name as the filename	Enable the On open, use the descriptive name for the new filename check box.
Use the filename as the descriptive name	Enable the When saving a document, use the filename for the descriptive name check box.
 Related topics


To view a document summary

1	Click File [image] Properties.

2	Click the Information tab.

 Related topics


Using password protection

WordPerfect lets you assign a password to a document, to prevent it from being opened by unauthorized users. You can open a password-protected document if you know the password. Once you open a password-protected document, you can disable the password.

For more information about opening files, see "Opening and previewing files."

 How to


To assign a password to a document

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Enable the Password protect check box.

3	Click Save.

4	In the Password area of the Password protection dialog box, type a password in the Type password for document box.

5	Type the password in the Retype password to confirm box.

6	In the Protection options area, enable one of the following options:

•	Enhanced password protection [image] provides case-sensitive password protection for greater security

•	Original password protection [image] provides case-insensitive password protection such as that used by WPWin 6.0 and WPDOS 6.0a

 Note

•	If you assign a password to a document, any backup or temporary files created of the document are also password-protected.

 Related topics


To open a password-protected document

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored.

3	Click the file.

4	Click Open.

5	In the Password dialog box, type the password in the Enter password for file box.

 Related topics


To remove a password from a document

1	Open a password-protected document.

2	Click File [image] Save as.

3	Disable the Password protect check box.

4	Click Save.

 Note

•	For information about opening a password-protected document, see "To open a password-protected document."

 Tip

•	You can also remove a password from a document by saving it in another file format.

 Related topics


E-mailing documents

WordPerfect lets you e-mail documents, and selected text in open documents, using the default e-mail application installed on your computer.

 How to


To e-mail a document

1	Click File [image]  Open.

If the menu bar does not display in the File open dialog box, click the Toggle menu on/off button.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the file you want to e-mail is stored.

3	Right-click the file, and click Send to [image] Mail recipient.

4	In the Choose profile dialog box, choose a profile from the Profile name list box.

The default e-mail application starts.

5	Send the e-mail.

You can also
E-mail an open document	Click File [image] Send to [image] Mail recipient. Choose a profile from the Profile name list box. Send the e-mail.
 Note

•	For information about sending e-mail, see the documentation for the e-mail application installed on your computer.

 Related topics


To e-mail selected text from an open document

1	Select the text you want to e-mail.

2	File [image] Send to [image] Mail recipient.

3	Click Yes.

4	In the Save dialog box, enable the Selected text option.

5	Click OK.

6	In the Save file dialog box, type a name in the Filename box.

7	Click Save.

8	In the Choose profile dialog box, choose a profile from the Profile name list box.

The default e-mail application starts.

9	Send the e-mail.

 Note

•	For information about sending e-mail, see the documentation for the e-mail application installed on your computer.

 Related topics


Using conversion settings

WordPerfect lets you specify document conversion settings. You can also specify Windows metafile (WMF) graphics conversion settings; for example, when you convert a document to WordPerfect, you can specify that any Windows metafile graphics it contains either remain in their original format, or be converted to WordPerfect graphic (WPG) format.

You can also specify DOS and Windows code page settings. A code page is a table in DOS or Windows that defines which ASCII or ANSI character set is used in a document. When you save a document, you can change the code page, and thus the character set, for the document.

When WordPerfect converts documents from other file formats, it matches the fonts in the original document as closely as possible; however, you can also use conversion settings to specify default fonts for the WordPerfect 4.2, DCA, and DisplayWrite documents that you convert to WordPerfect.

 How to


To specify document conversion settings

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Convert.

3	Click the Convert tab.

4	Click Options, and click Document.

5	In the Page size area of the Document settings dialog box, type a value in each of the following boxes:

•	Width

•	Height

6	In the Page margins area, type values in each of the following boxes:

•	Left

•	Right

•	Top

•	Bottom

You can also
Specify a unit of measurement for document conversions	Click the Units of measure button, and click an option.
Specify a decimal alignment character for document conversions	Type a character in the Alignment character box.
Specify an underline style for text	Enable any of the check boxes in the Underline area.
Specify a language	Click Language. In the Language dialog box, choose a language from the Current language box.
 Related topics


To specify Windows metafile (WMF) graphics conversion settings

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Convert.

3	Click the Convert tab.

4	In the Windows metafile options area, enable one of the following options:

•	Retain metafile (.WMF) format

•	Convert to WordPerfect (.WPG) format

•	Retain in both .WMF and .WPG formats

 Related topics


To specify DOS and Windows code page settings

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Convert.

3	Click the Convert tab.

4	Click Options [image] Code pages.

5	In the Code page setting dialog box, choose a code page setting from each of the following list boxes:

•	DOS code page

•	Windows code page

You can also
Specify a code page setting for files converted to WordPerfect	Choose a code page setting from the Input file code page list box.
Specify a code page setting for files converted from WordPerfect to another file format	Choose a code page setting from the Output file code page list box.
 Related topics


To specify font conversion settings for WordPerfect 4.2 fonts

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Convert.

3	Click the Convert tab.

4	Click Options, and click WP 4.2 fonts.

5	In the Font settings dialog box, choose a font from the Fonts list.

6	Click Edit.

7	In the Edit WordPerfect 4.2 font dialog box, choose a font style from the Typeface box.

8	Type a value in the Pitch box.

 Related topics


Saving and closing documents

By default, you can save documents in WordPerfect 6/7/8/9/10/11 format. This ensures cross-platform compatibility for documents saved in WordPerfect 6.x and later, and lets you save a document in an earlier version of WordPerfect. You can also save documents in formats other than WordPerfect, such as Microsoft Word.

WordPerfect lets you save documents in compound file format. When you save a document in compound file format, OLE compound document information is wrapped around the WordPerfect document. This lets you open documents that contain OLE objects more quickly; however, if a document contains embedded objects, saving it in compound file format will increase its size, and the time required to open and save the file.

You can save selected text or graphics in a new WordPerfect document.

WordPerfect lets you create backup copies of documents. This helps to prevent you from losing your work if you close a document before saving it, or if a power failure occurs. For added protection, you can also save a copy of a document to a floppy disk.

You can close documents.

 How to


To save a document

1	Click File [image] Save.

2	Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the file.

If you want to save a file in a format other than WordPerfect, choose a file format from the File type list box.

3	Type a name in the Filename box.

4	Click Save.

You can also
Save changes to a document	Click File [image] Save.
Rename a file	Right-click the file, and click Rename. Type a new name in the Filename box.
 Note

•	A filename cannot exceed 255 characters.

 Related topics


To save selected text or a graphic in a new document

1	Select the text or graphic you want to save in a new document.

2	Click File [image] Save.

3	In the Save area, enable one of the following options:

•	Selected text

•	Selected graphic

4	Click OK.

5	In the Save file dialog box, choose the drive and folder where you want to save the file.

6	Type a name in the Filename box.

7	Click Save.

 Related topics


To save a document in compound file format

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Type a name in the Filename  box.

3	Choose WordPerfect compound file from the File type list box.

4	Click Save.

 Note

•	If a file is password protected, WordPerfect saves OLE object information in WordPerfect format, rather than compound file format. This prevents others from viewing embedded objects in a password-protected file by using an OLE-enabled application.

 Related topics


To set timed document backups

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Files.

3	In the Files settings dialog box, click the Document tab.

4	Click Select.

5	Enable the Enable the Timed document backup every check box.

6	Type a value in the minutes box.

You can also
Save backup files in a specific folder	In the Backup folder box, click the Browse button. Choose the drive and folder where you want to save backup files.
Save a backup file each time you save a document	Enable the Save original document as a backup at each save check box.
 Related topics


To save a document to a floppy disk

1	Insert a floppy disk into the disk drive.

2	Click File [image] Send to [image] 3½ floppy.

 Related topics


To close a document

•	Click File [image] Close.

 Related topics


Formatting pages

WordPerfect lets you format a document by modifying the physical arrangement of information on pages. For example, you can adjust page size, margins, and tabs. You can also add columns to documents. When formatting pages, you can modify the format of an entire page or a portion of a page.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	setting page margins

•	choosing page size and orientation

•	customizing page sizes

•	specifying single-sided or double-sided pages for a document

•	forcing a new page

•	using hard and soft returns

•	centering text vertically

•	viewing page count information

•	adjusting paragraph spacing

•	changing line spacing and height

•	adding tab stops

•	changing the alignment of tab stops

•	moving tab stops

•	removing and restoring tab stops

•	inserting leaders and specifying leader characters

•	inserting hard tabs using codes

•	creating and deleting columns

•	changing column spacing and gutter width

•	inserting a vertical line between columns

•	inserting and editing delay codes


Setting page margins

WordPerfect lets you set margins using various methods. You can set margins by using guidelines. Guidelines are vertical or horizontal dotted lines that are displayed on pages. You can also set margins using exact measurements or the ruler.

All margin settings affect the current page and subsequent pages until you change them.

 How to


To set the margins using the margin guidelines

1	Click View [image] Guidelines.

2	Enable the Margins check box.

3	Point to one of the following guidelines:

•	left vertical dotted guideline

•	right vertical dotted guideline

•	upper horizontal dotted guideline

•	lower horizontal dotted guideline

The pointer changes to a double-sided arrow.

4	Drag the guideline to a new position.

 Related topics


To set the margins using exact measurements

1	Click in the document where you want the margin changes to start.

2	Click Format [image] Margins.

3	Click the Page setup tab.

4	In the Document margins area, type values in any of the following boxes:

•	Left [image] lets you specify where the left margin starts

•	Right [image] lets you specify where the right margin starts

•	Top [image] lets you specify where the top margin starts

•	Bottom [image] lets you specify where the bottom margin starts

You can also
Set all margins to the last margin value edited	In the Document margins area, click Equal.
Set all margins to the minimum size allowed by the current printer	In the Document margins area, click Minimum.
 Tip

•	You can also set margins by clicking File [image] Page setup.

 Related topics


To set the margins using the ruler

1	Point to the Margin marker to the left or right of the ruler.

The pointer changes to a double-sided arrow.

2	Drag the Margin marker to a new location on the ruler.

 Related topics


Choosing page size and orientation

When creating documents, you can choose the size and orientation of pages. The page size and orientation determines how a printer formats and prints pages. You can choose from preset page sizes, or you can create your own. For more information about creating custom page sizes, see "Customizing page sizes."

Page sizes are matched to the printer you have selected. A size may not be available when you change to another printer or a different computer. If the same size is not available, WordPerfect finds the best match for a page size, selecting from those available with the other printer. If the match does not work, you may need to customize a page size.

 How to


To select a preset page size

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Page setup tab.

3	From the Page definition list box, choose one of the following:

•	Printer page types [image] lists all page size options for installed printers

•	Standard page types [image] lists all page size options for most printers

4	Choose a page definition from the Page definition list.

5	In the Page definition applies to area, enable one of the following options:

•	Current and following pages [image] applies the page definitions to the current and following pages

•	Current page only [image] applies the page definitions to the current page only

 Note

•	If you apply the page size definition to the current page only, WordPerfect inserts a delay code in the next page. For more information about delay codes, see "Inserting and editing delay codes."

 Related topics


To specify page orientation

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Page setup tab.

3	In the Orientation area, enable one of the following options:

•	Portrait [image] prints the document on pages that have a higher length than width

•	Landscape [image] prints the document on pages that have greater width than height

 Related topics


Customizing page sizes

If you require a page size that is not available in WordPerfect, you can create a custom page size. When you create a custom page size, it is added to the printer's page size selection as a preset. You can do this by creating a page size or modifying a preset page size. When you create a custom page size, it is added to the printer's page size selection. Therefore, you can apply the custom size to more than one document. If you no longer require the custom or modified page sizes, you can delete the page size or restore the default page sizes.

In addition, you can divide a physical page into several logical pages. Dividing pages is useful when you want to create small documents, such as pamphlets, raffle tickets, or business cards.

As you edit a document, each logical page is treated as a separate page. The document window also changes to show the dimensions of the logical page. After you fill a logical page, the text continues on the next logical page.

 How to


To create a custom page size

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Page setup tab.

3	Click Add.

4	In the Add new form dialog box, type a name for the new page size in the Name box.

5	Choose a predefined paper type from the Type list box.

6	Choose a predefined paper size from the Size list box.

If you want to create a page size definition from a nonstandard paper size, choose User defined size from the Size list box.

7	Type values in the following boxes:

•	Width

•	Height

8	Choose a paper source from the Source list box.

You can also
Display the available page size definitions for all the installed printers	In the Show page size for area, enable the All printers option.
Display the available page size definitions for the printer you have selected	In the Show page size for area, enable the Current printer only option.
Specify a vertical printing adjustment	In the Printing adjustment area, choose an adjustment from the Vertical list box. Type a value in the box.
Specify a horizontal printing adjustment	In the Printing adjustment area, choose an adjustment from the Horizontal list box. Type a value in the box.
 Notes

•	The paper source is not saved as part of the document. It must be redefined for each document.

•	All printers have a nonprintable zone. If information is formatted to print in this area, it will not print. To shift information out of the nonprintable zone, you must specify printing adjustments.

 Related topics


To modify a preset page size

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Page setup tab.

3	Choose a page definition from the Page definition list.

4	Click Edit.

5	Modify any of the settings.

 Related topics


To delete a page size

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Page setup tab.

3	From the Page definition list box, choose one of the following:

•	Printer page types [image] lists all page size options for installed printers

•	Standard page types [image] lists all page size options for most printers

4	Choose a page definition from the Page definition list box.

5	Click Delete.

 Note

•	When you delete a page size definition, you can no longer use that definition; a document can print with a similar page definition, but it may not be an exact match.

 Related topics


To restore default page sizes

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Page setup tab.

3	From the Page definition list box, choose one of the following:

•	Printer page types [image] lists all page size options for installed printers

•	Standard page types [image] lists all page size options for most printers

4	Click Restore.

 Note

•	If you choose Standard page types and click Restore, only the Windows standard options are restored.

 Related topics


To divide a page

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Layout tab.

3	In the Divide pages area, type a value in one of the following boxes:

•	Columns [image] lets you divide a page into a specified number of columns

•	Rows [image] lets you divide a page into a specified number of rows

 Related topics


Specifying single-sided or double-sided pages for a document

You can set either single- or double-sided pages for a document. For example, if you are printing a book, you would specify double-sided pages. You can set a margin for binding single-sided documents at the top, bottom, or along a side. The settings you choose determine how much margin space is allowed for binding.

You can also set margins for binding double-sided documents. Before setting margins for printing double-sided documents, please read your printer's documentation. The margins you set will depend on how the printer prints double-sided documents.

 How to


To set single-sided pages for a document

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Layout tab.

3	In the Two-sided printing area, enable the Off option.

 Related topics


To set double-sided pages for a document

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Layout tab.

3	In the Two-sided printing area, enable one of the following options:

•	Book (side to side) [image] lets you print the document for binding at the side of a page, such as binding a book

•	Tablet (top to bottom) [image] lets you print the document for binding the top of a page, such as binding a flip chart or a tablet

 Related topics


To set a margin for binding single-sided documents

1	Click Format [image] Margins.

2	Click the Layout tab.

3	In the Two-sided printing area, enable the Off option.

4	Type a value in the Increase margin for box.

5	In the Binding area, enable one of the following options:

•	Left [image] lets you increase the left margin for binding purposes

•	Right [image] lets you increase the right margin for binding purposes

•	Top [image] lets you increase the top margin for binding purposes

•	Bottom [image] lets you increase the bottom margin for binding purposes

 Tip

•	You can alternate page binding between left and right or top and bottom by enabling the Alternating check box.

 Related topics


To set a margin for binding double-sided documents

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Layout tab.

3	In the Two-sided printing area, enable one of the following options:

•	Book (side to side) [image] lets you print the document for binding at the side of a page, such as a book

•	Tablet (top to bottom) [image] lets you print the document for binding at the side of a page, such as a tablet or a flip chart

4	Type a value in the Increase margin for box.

5	In the Two-sided binding area, enable one of the following options:

•	Inside [image] lets you change the amount of space for binding on the inside margin

•	Outside [image] lets you change the amount of space for binding on the outside margin

 Related topics


Forcing a new page

You can start a new page at any point in a document.

 How to


To force a new page

1	Click where you want to start a new page.

2	Click Insert [image] New page.

 Note

•	In draft view, a new page break is displayed as a double line.

 Tip

•	You can also force a new page by pressing Ctrl + Enter.

 Related topics


Using hard and soft returns

You can change the text flow in a document by using hard or soft returns. You can start a new line manually by inserting a hard return. A soft return wraps text to the next line and is inserted automatically by WordPerfect when the line extends beyond the right margin.

 How to


To insert a hard return

•	At the end of a line or paragraph, press Enter.

 Notes

•	A hard return displays as an [HRt] code in the Reveal Codes window. For more information about Reveal Codes, see "Displaying Reveal Codes."

•	You can also view hard returns by clicking View [image] Show ¶.

 Related topics


To insert a soft return

•	As you type, WordPerfect automatically inserts a soft return at the end of each line.

 Notes

•	A soft return displays as an [SRt] code in the Reveal Codes window. For more information about Reveal Codes, see "Displaying Reveal Codes."

 Related topics


Centering text vertically

You can center the content vertically, from top to bottom, on a page and on all subsequent pages.

 How to


To center text vertically

1	Click Format [image] Page [image] Center.

2	Enable one of the following options:

•	Center page [image] centers the content vertically on the page

•	Current and subsequent pages [image] centers the content on the current page and all subsequent pages

•	No centering [image] inserts text as you type it from the top margin down, without centering it vertically

 Related topics


Viewing page count information

You can view the page count of a document. In addition, you can view information such as paragraph, word, or character count.

 How to


To view the total page count

1	Click File [image] Properties.

2	Click the Information tab.

 Tip

•	You can also add the Count pages button to a toolbar and press the button to see the total page count. The Count pages button is in the Features categories list box. For information about adding buttons to toolbars, see "To add a button to a toolbar."

 Related topics


Adjusting paragraph spacing

WordPerfect lets you adjust the amount of space between the page margins and the paragraph text. You can also control the amount of space between paragraphs. For more information about changing line spacing, see "Changing line spacing and height."

 How to


To adjust the spacing between the page margins and the paragraph text

1	Click Format [image] Paragraph [image] Format.

2	Choose from the following:

•	First line indent [image] sets the spacing between the left page margin and the first word of a paragraph

•	Left margin adjustment [image] sets the spacing between the left page margin and the paragraph text

•	Right margin adjustment [image] sets the spacing between the right page margin and the paragraph text

 Tips

•	You can adjust the left margin by dragging the Left margin adjust marker on the ruler.

•	You can adjust the right margin by dragging the Right margin adjust marker on the ruler.

 Related topics


To control the amount of space between paragraphs

1	Click Format [image] Paragraph [image] Format.

2	In the Spacing between paragraphs area, enable the Number of lines option.

3	Type a value in the Number of lines box.

If you prefer specifying the distance in points, enable the Distance in points option and type a value in the box.

 Related topics


Changing line spacing and height

You can adjust the spacing between lines of text and adjust the height of a line. Line height refers to the distance between the top of one line of text and the top of the next line of text. By default, the line height is set according to the font being used, but if you need to, you can change it.

 How to


To change the spacing between lines of text

1	Click in the line of text where you want the line spacing change to start.

If you want to limit the spacing change to a specific section of text, select the text.

2	Click Format [image] Line [image] Spacing.

3	Type a value in the Spacing box.

 Related topics


To change the line height

1	Click in the line of text where you want the line height change to begin.

If you want to limit the line height change to a specific section of text, select the text.

2	Click Format [image] Line [image] Height.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	Automatic [image] defines the line height according to the font being used

•	Fixed [image] lets you specify the height of the line regardless of the font being used

•	At least [image] lets you specify the minimum height of the line

 Related topics


Adding tab stops

Tab stops let you determine where the cursor moves to when you tab forward or tab back in a document. You can add tab stops to a document using exact measurements or using the ruler. You can also copy a tab stop using the ruler or add tab stops at evenly spaced intervals.

 How to


To add a tab stop using exact measurements

1	Click a paragraph.

2	Click Format [image] Line [image] Tab set.

3	Choose a tab type from the Tab type list box.

4	Type a value in the Tab position box.

5	Enable one of the following options:

•	From left margin (relative) [image] measures the distance of the tab stop relative to the left margin. When the left margin changes, the tab stop adjusts accordingly.

•	From left edge of paper (absolute) [image] measures the distance of the tab stop from the left edge of the page. When the left margin changes, the tab stop remains fixed.

6	Click Set.

 Related topics


To add a tab stop using the ruler

1	Click a paragraph.

2	Click the Tab button, and choose a tab style.

3	On the tab bar, which displays under the ruler, click where you want to add a tab stop.

 Note

•	For the tab bar to appear, the ruler must be displayed.

 Related topics


To copy a tab stop using the ruler

1	Click a paragraph.

2	Hold down Ctrl, and drag the tab stop to another position on the ruler.

 Related topics


To add tab stops at evenly spaced intervals

1	Click a paragraph.

2	Click Format [image] Line [image] Tab set.

3	Click Clear all.

4	Enable the Repeat every check box, and type a value in the box.

5	Click Set.

 Notes

•	When you add a tab stop, the Margin icon is displayed in the left margin. Clicking the Margin icon displays a ruler with the settings for the paragraph.

•	For information about displaying the margin icon, see "To hide or display nonprinting items."

 Tip

•	You can also set tab stop intervals by double-clicking a tab stop on the ruler.

 Related topics


Changing the alignment of tab stops

When using a tab stop, you can specify the tab alignment, which is useful when you want to arrange a column of text in a specific way, such as right-justified or left-justified. You can also specify a decimal alignment. For example, you can align a column of numbers at the decimal point. Tab alignment is also used to create dot leaders. For more information about dot leaders, see "Inserting leaders and specifying leader characters."

 How to


To change the alignment of a tab stop

1	Click a paragraph.

2	Click Format [image] Line [image] Tab set.

3	Choose a tab type from the Tab type list box.

4	Click Set.

 Tip

•	You can also change the alignment of a tab stop by double-clicking the tab stop on the ruler, choosing a tab type from the Tab type list box, and clicking Set.

 Related topics


To specify a decimal alignment

1	Click a paragraph.

2	Click Format [image] Line [image] Tab set.

3	Choose Decimal from the Tab type list box.

4	In the Decimal alignment area, type a character in the Character to align on box.

5	Click Set.

 Related topics


Moving tab stops

WordPerfect lets you move a tab stop. You can position a tab stop relative to the left margin or from the left edge of a page. You can also move a tab stop or multiple tab stops. As you move a tab stop, you can make it automatically align to the ruler gridlines; this is referred to as snapping.

 How to


To move a tab stop

1	Click in a paragraph.

2	Drag the tab stop to a new position on the ruler.

 Tip

•	You can also change the position of a tab stop by double-clicking the tab stop on the ruler.

 Related topics


To move multiple tab stops

1	Click in a paragraph.

2	Hold down Shift and drag across the tab stops on the tab bar to select them.

3	Drag the tab stops to a new position.

 Related topics


To make a tab stop snap to ruler gridlines

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Display.

3	In the Display settings dialog box, click the Ruler tab.

4	Enable the Tabs snap to ruler grid check box.

 Related topics


Removing and restoring tab stops

You can remove one tab stop or multiple tab stops. If you've modified the tab stops, you can restore the default tab settings.

 How to


To remove a tab stop

1	Click a paragraph.

2	Click Format [image] Line [image] Tab set.

3	Click one of the following:

•	Clear [image] clears the first tab stop to the left edge of the ruler

•	Clear all [image] clears all tab stops

4	Click Set.

 Tips

•	You can remove a tab stop by dragging it off the ruler.

•	You can also remove all tab stops by right-clicking a tab stop, and clicking Clear all tabs.

 Related topics


To restore the default tab settings

•	Right-click a paragraph, and click Default tab settings.

 Related topics


Inserting leaders and specifying leader characters

You can set a tab stop with a leader character. A leader is a string of characters that appears between items separated by tab stops. In the following example, the leader characters are the periods between "Item 1," "Item 2," and "Item 3."

Item 1 ....... Item 2 ....... Item 3

A leader helps draw the eye from one tab stop to the next, usually illustrating a relationship between information at the tab stops. For example, you can use leaders in a table of contents to show the page number that corresponds to a title.

The default leader character is a period; however, you can specify other leader characters.

 How to


To set a tab stop with a leader character

1	Click a paragraph.

2	Click Format [image] Line [image] Tab set.

3	From the Tab type list box, choose one of the following:

•	Dot left [image] inserts periods in the empty space to the left of the tab stop

•	Dot center [image] inserts periods in the empty space surrounding the centered text

•	Dot right [image] inserts periods in the empty space to the right of the tab stop

•	Dot decimal [image] inserts periods in the empty space surrounding the decimal-aligned text

4	Click Set.

 Related topics


To specify a leader character

1	Click a paragraph.

2	Click Format [image] Line [image] Tab set.

3	Type a new keyboard character in the Dot leader character box.

4	Type a number in the Spaces between characters box.

5	Click Set.

 Tip

•	You can change a leader character to a non-keyboard character or symbol by pressing Ctrl + W, choosing a character or symbol from the Symbol list, and clicking Insert.

 Related topics


Inserting hard tabs using codes

You can use codes to insert hard tabs and to insert hard tabs with dot leaders. Use a hard tab when you need to insert a tab without changing the tab type. For example, you can add a hard tab to one line in a paragraph and not change the tabs set for the other lines. You can also insert a hard tab with a dot leader. Hard tabs are not affected when you change regular tab settings.

 How to


To insert a hard tab

1	Click the beginning of a line.

2	Click Format [image] Line [image] Other codes.

3	In the Hard tabs area, enable one of the following options:

•	Left [Hd left tab] [image] inserts a hard tab code that aligns text on the left

•	Center [Hd center tab] [image] inserts a hard tab code that aligns text at the center

•	Right [Hd right tab] [image] inserts a hard tab code that aligns text on the right

•	Decimal [Hd dec tab] [image] inserts a hard tab code that aligns text at the decimal

4	Click Insert.

 Related topics


To insert a hard tab with a dot leader

1	Click the beginning of a line.

2	Click Format [image] Line [image] Other codes.

3	In the Hard tabs with dot leaders area, enable one of the following options:

•	Left [...Hd left tab] [image] inserts a hard tab with a dot leader code that aligns text on the left

•	Center [...Hd center tab] [image] inserts a hard tab with a dot leader code that aligns text at the center

•	Right [...Hd right tab] [image] inserts a hard tab with a dot leader code that aligns text on the right

•	Decimal [...Hd dec tab] [image] inserts a hard tab with a dot leader code that aligns text at the decimal

4	Click Insert.

 Related topics


Creating and deleting columns

You can use columns to divide text vertically on a page. You can use four types of columns in documents: newspaper, balanced newspaper, parallel, and parallel with block protect. You can add columns to documents to create newsletters, glossaries, scripts, or inventory lists. You can discontinue columns when they are complete. You can also delete columns and quickly move through columns.

This is an example of newspaper columns. Text in newspaper columns flows down the column to the bottom of a page or column break and starts again at the top of the next column.

This an example of balanced newspaper columns. Balanced newspaper columns are similar to regular newspaper columns, but each column is adjusted on the page so that all columns are equal in length.

This an example of parallel columns. The parallel column text is grouped across the page in a row. The next row starts below the longest column of the previous row. Parallel columns are useful for resumes, scripts, charts, inventory lists, or lists where columns span multiple pages.

This an example of parallel columns with block protect. Parallel columns with block protect keep each row of columns together. If a column in one row becomes so long that it moves across a page break, the entire row moves to the next page. You can also use tables to create this type of column. For information about working with tables, see "Using tables and charts."

 How to


To create columns

1	Click a page.

2	Click Format [image] Columns.

3	Type a value in the Number of columns box.

4	In the Type of columns area, enable one of the following options:

•	Newspaper [image] makes text flow down a column to the bottom of a page or column break and continues it at the top of the next column

•	Balanced newspaper [image] adjusts newspaper columns so that columns are of equal length

•	Parallel [image] groups columns across the page in rows, and starts subsequent rows below the longest column of the previous row

•	Parallel w/block protect [image] keeps all rows of the columns together across page breaks

 Tip

•	You can also apply columns to a page by clicking the Columns button on the toolbar.

 Related topics


To discontinue columns

1	Click where you want columns to discontinue.

2	Click Format [image] Columns.

3	Click Discontinue.

 Tip

•	Press Ctrl + Enter to end one column and start the next column.

 Related topics


To delete all columns

1	Click in the top-left corner of the first column.

2	Click Format [image] Columns.

3	Click Discontinue.

 Tip

•	You can also delete columns by dragging the COL DEF code out of the Reveal Codes window.

 Related topics


To navigate columns

To move to	Press
The top of a column	Alt + Home
The last line of a column	Alt + End
The previous column	Alt + Left Arrow
The next column	Alt + Right Arrow
 Related topics


Changing column spacing and gutter width

You can specify column width and the amount of space, which is also referred to as the gutter, that's displayed between columns. In addition, you can adjust the column width using the column guidelines and adjust the gutter width using the ruler.

 How to


To specify column and gutter width using exact measurements

1	Click Format [image] Columns.

2	In the Column widths area, type a width value in the Column 1 box.

3	In the Space box, type a value representing the width of white space you want between column 1 and column 2.

If you want to preserve the width of the column or space regardless of the width or margin changes in other columns, enable the Space option's Fixed check box.

4	Type a width value in the Column 2 box.

If you have more than two columns, type a value in each of the subsequent Column and Space boxes.

 Note

•	The gutter width value that displays in the Space box is the same value that displays in the Space between box. Adjustments to the gutter space setting can be made in either box.

 Tips

•	You can change the column width by pointing to the gutter between column guidelines and dragging left or right to resize the columns.

•	If you are setting the space between parallel columns, or parallel columns with block protect, you can specify the number of lines between rows in the Extra line spacing in parallel columns box.

 Related topics


To change column width using column guidelines

•	Drag the column guideline to change the column width.

 Related topics


To change gutter width using the ruler

•	Drag a margin marker to a new location.

 Tip

•	You can change the gutter width by double-clicking the gray space between column width markers, and typing a number in the Space between box.

 Related topics


Inserting a vertical line between columns

You can change the appearance of columns by inserting a vertical line between the columns. This creates a visual separation between the columns.

 How to


To insert a vertical line between columns

1	Select a column.

2	Click Format [image] Columns.

3	Click Border/Fill.

4	In the Column border/fill dialog box, click the Border tab.

5	Choose Column between from the Available border styles list.

If you want to apply the vertical line to only to a selected column group, enable the Apply border to current column group only check box.

 Notes

•	If you disable the Apply border to current column group only check box, the vertical line separates all columns on the active page and all subsequent pages in the document.

•	You can change the color, line style, or drop shadow of the line between the columns. For more information about applying color, line style, or a drop shadow, see "Applying borders and fills."

 Related topics


Inserting and editing delay codes

You can insert and edit delay codes. Delay codes allow you to suppress open codes by specifying that the open codes take effect after a specified number of pages. Open codes can include codes for line numbering, fonts, tab settings, and margins. For example, if on page 3 you delay a code by two pages, the code takes effect on page 5.

You can delay any open codes; however, you cannot delay paired codes. Paired codes are codes that have two codes [image] one at the start of the entry and one at the end of the entry. For example, bold, italics, tables, indent, and alignment codes are paired codes.

 How to


To insert a delay code

1	Click the page where you want to delay codes.

2	Click Format [image] Page [image] Delay codes.

3	In the Number of pages to skip before applying codes box, type the number of pages for which you want to delay codes.

4	Click OK.

5	Choose font and formatting options from the Delay codes toolbar.

6	Click the Close button on the Delay codes toolbar.

 Note

•	The delay code remains at the top of the document or follows a hard page break. A delay code displays as [Delay:#], where # is the number of pages the code is delayed.

 Related topics


To edit a delay code

1	Click View [image] Reveal Codes.

2	Double-click a delay code.

3	Modify any delay code options.

4	Click the Close button on the Delay codes toolbar.

 Related topics


Formatting text

In WordPerfect, you can use a variety of formatting tools to control the design and arrangement of text.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	modifying font settings

•	copying the format of text

•	using font mapping

•	using character maps for non-Roman languages

•	creating subscript and superscript text

•	using hidden text

•	highlighting text

•	reversing the color of text and background

•	working with drop caps

•	inserting characters and symbols

•	importing objects

•	indenting text

•	justifying text

•	centering text vertically

•	keeping text together

•	correcting capitalization

•	editing quotation marks

•	correcting the spacing between words and sentences

•	making text fit a specific number of pages

•	changing the spacing between letters and words

•	changing the spacing between lines and paragraphs

•	advancing text to a different position

•	using baseline placement for typesetting

•	hyphenating text

•	setting hyphenation prompts and notifications

•	changing hyphen options and position

•	inserting and changing hyphens by using codes


Modifying font settings

You can apply formatting to text to change the font and its attributes, such as style, size, and color.

You can also apply relative font sizes, which allows you to format text relative to the specified font size. Suppose you want to add a heading to a document that has a 12-point paragraph font. If you select the heading text and specify a large relative font size, the text displays proportionately larger that the 12-point font.

Using Corel RealTime Preview lets you view text fonts and sizes before you apply them. For example, you can view text as it will display in various fonts before choosing which is the most suitable. If you do not want to preview fonts and their sizes, you can disable Corel RealTime Preview.

WordPerfect lets you format text using recent font settings, including the font and its size. You can also change the default font and font size for the active document or for all documents.

The following image displays examples of different fonts and font styles.

 How to


To change the font

1	Click in the document.

2	Click Format [image] Font.

3	Click the Font tab.

4	Choose a font from the Face list.

You can also
Change the font style	In the Appearance area, enable any of the check boxes.
Change the font size	Choose a font size from the Size list box.
Change the relative font size	Click Relative size, and click a font size.
Change the font color	Open the Color picker, and click a color.
 Tip

•	You can also change the font color by clicking the Font color button on the property bar, and clicking a color.

•	You can also change the underline font style by opening the Underline picker on the property bar and clicking an underline style.

 Related topics


To change the font using Corel RealTime Preview

1	Click in a document.

2	Open the Font face list box on the property bar, and point to a font.

Changes to the font display in the font face preview window.

3	Choose a font from the Font face list box.

 Tip

•	You can change the font size using Corel RealTime Preview by opening the Font size list box on the property bar, viewing the font sizes in the font size preview window, and choosing a font size.

 Related topics


To disable Corel RealTime Preview

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click the Display icon.

3	Click the Document tab.

4	In the Show area, disable the RealTime Preview check box.

 Note

•	Corel RealTime Preview is enabled by default.

 Related topics


To reuse a recent font

1	Select the text you want to format.

2	Click the QuickFonts button on the property bar, and choose a font from the list.

 Note

•	The QuickFonts list displays the 10 most recently used fonts.

 Related topics


To change the default font and font size

1	Click File [image] Document [image] Default font.

2	Choose a font from the Face list.

3	Choose a font size from the Size list box.

If you want to change the default font and font size for all new documents, click Settings, and click Set as default for all documents.

 Note

•	You must install a printer before you can change the default font.

 Tip

•	You can view the available attributes for each font by clicking the plus sign (+) to the left of a font in the Face list.

 Related topics


Copying the format of text

You can copy the format of text and apply it to other text in a document. If you want to copy selected text, then formatting attributes, such as font, font size, and font style, are all copied. If you want to copy the heading in a paragraph, the paragraph style as well as the font and its attributes are copied.

When you copy the format of text, you automatically create a text style. Changing text that has been formatted using a text style also changes other text in the document that uses that style. For information about text styles, see "Applying and editing text styles."

 How to


To copy the format of text

1	Click in the text whose format you want to copy.

2	Click Format [image] QuickFormat.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	Selected characters [image] copies the format of the font and its attributes

•	Headings [image] copies the format of the paragraph and its styles, and the font and its attributes

4	Click OK.

5	Drag the QuickFormat paintbrush pointer over the text to which you want to copy the format.

6	Click Format [image] QuickFormat.

QuickFormat is disabled when no check mark displays beside the QuickFormat menu command.

 Tip

•	You can also enable or disable QuickFormat by clicking the QuickFormat button.

 Related topics


Using font mapping

You can control font substitutions by changing them for specific font attributes, styles, character sets, and print orientations. This is known as font mapping.

You can use font mapping to

•	change the printer font settings

•	specify a replacement font when a certain font is not available on the printer

•	change the display font settings

•	display a document in a different font, style, or size than the one used to print it

•	apply a non-Roman alphabet font

 How to


To change printer font settings

1	Click Format [image] Font.

2	Click Settings, and click Edit font mapping.

3	In the Edit printer/document font mapping dialog box, click the Automatic font change tab.

4	In the Printer font area, choose the current printer font from the Face list.

5	In the Print font area, choose the font substitute from the Face list.

You can also
Change relative sizes, appearance attributes, character sets, or print orientations	Choose a setting from the Automatic font change list.
Restore the default font settings	Enable the Automatic selection check box.
 Related topics


To change replacement font settings

1	Click Format [image] Font.

2	Click Settings [image] Edit font mapping.

3	Click the Automatic font change tab.

4	In the Printer font area, choose a typeface from the Face list.

5	In the Extra large printer font area, choose a typeface from the Face list.

6	Choose one of the following:

•	To change settings for font sizes and styles, enable the Map individual styles check box.

•	To change relative sizes, appearance attributes, character sets, or print orientations, choose an option in the Automatic font change list.

7	Choose the replacement font settings from the corresponding Face list.

 Note

•	When substituting fonts, WordPerfect changes the [Font...] code (visible in the Reveal Codes window) to reflect both font names. The font name that WordPerfect used to replace the original font appears first, followed by the original font in square brackets. For information about Reveal Codes, see "Displaying Reveal Codes."

 Tip

•	To restore the default settings, enable the Automatic selection check box.

 Related topics


To change display font settings

1	Click Format [image] Font.

2	Click Settings, and click Edit font mapping.

3	In the Edit printer/document font mapping dialog box, click the Display tab.

4	From the Face list box in the Printer font area, choose the font for which you want to specify a substitute.

5	In the Display font area, choose the font substitute from the Face list box.

The display font appears onscreen when the printer font is used.

If you want to map specific font styles and sizes for your display font, enable the Map individual styles check box.

 Notes

•	If you do not map specific font styles and sizes for your display font, they will be selected for you based on the existing text.

 Tip

•	If the current font is a printer font, you can replace it with a graphics font (ATM, TrueType, etc.), which may produce a sharper display resolution.

 Related topics


To change document and printer font substitutions

1	Click Format [image] Font.

2	Click Settings, and click Edit font mapping.

3	In the Edit printer/document font mapping dialog box, click the Document tab.

4	In the Document font area, choose a font from the Face list box.

5	Choose a size from the Size list box.

6	In the Printer font area, choose a font substitute from the Face list box.

7	Choose a style substitute from the Style list box.

8	Choose a size substitute from the Size list box.

You can also
Prevent font substitutions when opening a document.	Click Tools [image] Settings. Click the Environment icon. Click the General tab. Disable the Reformat documents for the WordPerfect default printer on open checkbox. Click OK.
Restore default document font mapping settings	Click Format [image] Font. Click Settings [image] Edit font mapping. Click the Document tab. Enable the Automatic selection check box.
 Related topics


To use a non-Roman alphabet font

1	Click Format [image] Font.

2	Click Settings, and click Edit font mapping.

3	In the Edit printer/document font mapping dialog box, click the Code pages tab.

4	In the Printer font area, choose a typeface from the Face list box.

5	In the Code pages area, choose an alphabet font from the Code page list box.

 Note

•	It is recommended to edit the Code pages mapping table only if you are using a font that does not match your computer's code page.

 Related topics


Using character maps for non-Roman languages

You can use a character map to reduce document size when you edit documents in non-Roman alphabets, such as Greek or Cyrillic. You can choose a character map for the current document and for all new documents created with the default template.

 How to


To choose a character map for the current document

1	Click Tools [image] Language [image] Character mapping.

2	Choose a character map from the Character map list.

3	Click Apply.

4	Click Close.

 Related topics


To choose a character map for all new documents created with the default template

1	Click File [image] Document [image] Current document style.

2	Click Tools [image] Language [image] Character mapping.

3	In the Document character map dialog box, choose a character map from the Character map list.

4	Click Apply.

5	Click Close.

6	In the Styles editor dialog box, enable the Use as default check box.

 Related topics


Creating subscript and superscript text

You can create subscript and superscript text to use with footnotes, endnotes, and ordinals. QuickOrdinals automatically replaces ordinals, such as 1st or 2nd, with superscript text. QuickOrdinals can be disabled.

 How to


To create subscript or superscript text

1	Select the text.

2	Click Format [image] Font.

3	Click the Font tab.

4	Click Position, and click one of the following:

•	Subscript [image] positions the text below the baseline of other characters in a word or line of text

•	Superscript [image] positions the text above the height of other characters in a word or line of text

 Related topics


To disable QuickOrdinals

1	Click Tools [image] QuickCorrect.

2	Click the Format As-You-Go tab.

3	In the Format As-You-Go choices area, disable the QuickOrdinals check box.

 Note

•	QuickOrdinals is enabled by default.

 Related topics


Using hidden text

You can hide or display hidden text in a WordPerfect document. When you hide hidden text, you cannot view it in a document or print it. When hidden text is displayed, it displays the same way as document text. You can insert hidden text in a document. Converting document text to hidden text and hidden text to document text can also be performed.

 How to


To hide or display hidden text

•	Click View [image] Hidden text.

A check mark beside the Hidden text menu command indicates that hidden text is displayed.

 Related topics


To insert hidden text

1	Click View [image] Hidden text.

2	Click Format [image] Font.

3	In the Appearance area, enable the Hidden check box.

4	Click OK.

5	Type the text.

 Note

•	If you delete a hidden code in the Reveal Codes window when hidden text is not displayed in the document, you delete the text. For information about Reveal Codes, see "Displaying Reveal Codes."

 Related topics


To convert hidden text to document text

1	Select the hidden text.

2	Click Format [image] Font.

3	In the Appearance area, disable the Hidden check box.

 Tips

•	You can also convert hidden text in a document by dragging the Hidden code out of the Reveal Codes window. For information about Reveal Codes, see "Displaying Reveal Codes."

•	You can convert document text to hidden text by selecting the document text, clicking Format [image] Font, and enabling the Hidden check box.

 Related topics


Highlighting text

Highlighting text adds a bar of transparent color over text, which is useful for editing documents or for distinguishing words and paragraphs. You can highlight and remove the highlighting from part or all of a document, and you can change the highlight color. You can also hide highlighting in a document.

 How to


To highlight text

1	Click Tools [image] Highlight [image] On.

The cursor changes to a highlighting pen.

2	Select the text.

3	Click Tools [image] Highlight [image] On.

Highlighting is disabled when no check mark displays beside the On menu command.

 Tip

•	You can also highlight text by selecting text and clicking the Highlight button.

 Related topics


To remove highlighting from text

1	Select the highlighted text.

2	Click Tools [image] Highlight [image] Remove.

 Tip

•	You can also remove highlighting by clicking anywhere in the highlighted text and clicking the Highlight button. Highlighting is removed from the entire highlighted section.

 Related topics


To change the highlight color

1	Click Tools [image] Highlight [image] Color.

2	Open the Color picker, and click a color.

3	Type a value in the Shading box.

Higher values darken the highlight color. Lower values lighten it.

 Note

•	The color change does not apply to text that has already been highlighted. To change the color of highlighted text, you must first select the text.

 Tip

•	You can also change the highlight color by opening the Highlight picker on the toolbar, and clicking a color.

 Related topics


To hide highlighting

•	Click Tools [image] Highlight [image] Print/show.

The absence of a check mark beside the Print/show menu command indicates that highlighting is hidden.

 Note

•	Highlighting is displayed by default.

 Related topics


Reversing the color of text and background

You can reverse the color of the text and background so that light-colored characters are visible against a dark background.

 How to


To reverse the color of text and background

1	Click View [image] Toolbars.

2	In the Available toolbars list, enable the Shipping macros check box.

3	Click OK.

4	Select the text.

5	Click the Reverse text button on the Shipping macros toolbar.

6	In the Reverse text options dialog box, choose a text color from the Text color list box.

7	In the Fill style/color area, choose a fill style from the Fill style list box.

8	Choose a fill color from the Color list box.

9	In the Text options area, enable one of the following options:

•	Place selected text in text box [image] reverses only selected text

•	Apply attributes to whole paragraph [image] reverses the paragraph in which the cursor is positioned

 Note

•	If the text is difficult to read, you can add bold attributes to make the letters thicker. For information about formatting text, see "Modifying font settings."

 Related topics


Working with drop caps

Drop caps are letters that you can use to decorate text at the beginning of a line or paragraph. You can add and remove drop caps from a document, and you can edit their size, position, and style.

The following image shows a paragraph without a drop cap (on the left) and a paragraph with a drop cap (on the right).

 How to


To add or remove a drop cap

To	Do the following
Add a drop cap to a blank line	Click in a document. Click Format [image] Paragraph [image] Drop cap. Type a letter.
Add a drop cap to an existing paragraph	Click at the beginning of a paragraph. Click Format [image] Paragraph [image] Drop cap.
Remove a drop cap	Click before a drop cap. Click the Drop cap style button on the property bar. In the Style area, click No drop cap.
 Tip

•	You can also remove a drop cap by clicking the Drop cap style picker and clicking the No drop cap style.

 Related topics


To change the size of a drop cap

1	Click before a drop cap.

2	Click the Drop cap size button on the property bar.

3	In the Height area, type a value in the Lines box.

 Tip

•	You can also change the size of a drop cap by clicking the Drop cap size picker on the property bar and clicking a drop cap size.

 Related topics


To determine the space between a drop cap and the first line in the paragraph

1	Click before a drop cap.

2	Click Format [image] Paragraph [image] Drop cap.

3	In the Move paragraph down area, type a value in the Lines box.

 Related topics


To change the position of a drop cap

1	Click before a drop cap.

2	Click the Drop cap position button on the property bar.

3	In the Position area, type a value in the Position drop cap in margin box.

 Tip

•	You can also specify the position of a drop cap by moving the slider in the Position area.

•	You can also change the position of a drop cap by clicking the Drop cap position picker on the property bar and clicking a drop cap position.

 Related topics


To change the style of a drop cap

1	Click before a drop cap.

2	Click the Drop cap style button on the property bar.

3	In the Style area, click one of the following:

•	No drop cap

•	Drop cap in margin

•	50% in margin

•	Drop cap in text

You can also
Change the font of a drop cap	Click before a drop cap. Click the Drop cap font button on the property bar. Choose a font from the Face list. In the Appearance area, enable any of the attribute check boxes.
Change the color of a drop cap	Click before a drop cap. Click the Drop cap font button on the property bar. Open the Color picker, and click a color. Type a percentage in the Shading box.
 Tip

•	You can also change the style of a drop cap by clicking the Drop cap style picker on the property bar and clicking a drop cap style.

 Related topics


Inserting characters and symbols

You can insert characters, such as iconic symbols, phonetic characters, and characters from other alphabets, into your document. You can also find some characters and symbols quickly by composing two-character combinations using letters, numbers, or symbols found on every standard keyboard.

The following table lists character combinations and the resulting symbols, characters, or diacritical marks.

Mark	Characters	Result
' Acute	'e	é
, Cedilla	,c	ç
^ Circumflex	^a	â
` Grave	`e	è
@ Ring above	@a	å
/ Slash	/o	ø
~ Tilde	~n	ñ
" Umlaut	"u	ü
The following table lists the character combinations, the result, and the number combination to use.

Characters	Result	Number
AE	Æ	1,36
ae	æ	1,37
ox	¤	4,24
ss	ß	1,23
L-	£	4,11
P|	¶	4,5
<<	«	4,9
>>	»	4,10
Y=	¥	4,12
c/	¢	4,19
+-	±	6,1
<=	£	6,2
>=	³	6,3
tm	ä	4,41
ro	®	4,22
co	©	4,23
/2	½	4,17
/4	¼	4,18
**	·	4,0
ao	å	1,35
a=	ª	4,15
o=	º	4,16
??	¿	4,8
!!	¡	4,7
n-	-	4,33
m-		4,34
Creating custom symbols is another option. You can do so by superimposing two or more characters or symbols to create one character or symbol using the overstrike feature. The following image shows the number 7 combined with a hyphen to create a new character.

For example, you can combine characters to create mathematical symbols, language symbols, and other character combinations. You can also edit a custom symbol.

 How to


To insert a character or symbol

1	Click in the document where you want to insert a character or symbol.

2	Click Insert [image] Symbol.

3	Choose a symbol type or a character set from the Set list box.

4	Choose a symbol from the Symbols list.

5	Click one of the following:

•	Insert [image] inserts the symbol and leaves the Symbols dialog box open

•	Insert and close [image] inserts the symbol and closes the Symbols dialog box

 Notes

•	Depending on the font you are using, some WordPerfect characters may not display in the document window. These characters are represented by a hollow box on your screen; however, they will display and print correctly if your printer supports graphics.

•	You can view all available characters by printing Charmap.wpd, a document stored in the Programs folder.

 Tips

•	You can also insert a symbol by clicking the Symbols button on the property bar and clicking a symbol. If the Symbols button is not visible on the property bar, you can add it. For information about adding a button to the property bar, see "Customizing the property bar."

•	You can also insert a character or symbol by pressing Ctrl + W.

 Related topics


To insert a character or symbol quickly

1	Click in the document where you want to insert a character or symbol.

2	Click Insert [image] Symbol.

3	Type a number combination in the Number box.

4	Click one of the following:

•	Insert [image] inserts the symbol and leaves the Symbols dialog box open

•	Insert and close [image] inserts the symbol and closes the Symbols dialog box

 Related topics


To create a custom overstrike symbol

1	Click in a document.

2	Click Format [image] Typesetting [image] Overstrike.

3	In the Overstrike characters list box, type the characters you want to use as an overstrike, without spaces, in any order.

If you want to use other symbols as part of the overstrike symbol, press Ctrl + W, and insert a symbol.

4	Choose attributes for the symbol from the Overstrike characters list box.

 Related topics


To edit a custom overstrike symbol

1	Click Format [image] Typesetting [image] Overstrike.

2	Click one of the following:

•	Previous [image] displays the previous overstrike symbol

•	Next [image] displays the next overstrike symbol

3	In the Overstrike characters list box, edit the symbol.

4	Choose attributes for the symbol from the Overstrike characters list box.

 Note

•	Previous and Next show only the custom symbols in the active document.

 Tip

•	You can also edit a custom overstrike symbol by double-clicking an overstrike code in the Reveal Codes window. For information about Reveal Codes, see "Displaying Reveal Codes."

 Related topics


Importing objects

You can import an object into a WordPerfect document. The object can be text, graphics, sound clips, video clips, or spreadsheet cells [image] anything that you can copy from one application to another.

By importing an object in a document, you copy it from one application to the same application or another Windows application. You can use this method when you do not plan to make changes to the object. You can also select a specific format when you import an object from another application into WordPerfect.

 How to


To import an object

1	Select the object.

2	Click Edit [image] Copy.

3	Click in the document to which you want to copy the object.

4	Click Edit [image] Paste.

 Related topics


To import an object using a specific format

1	Select the object.

2	Click Edit [image] Copy.

3	Click in the document to which you want to copy the object.

4	Click Edit [image] Paste special.

5	Enable one of the following options:

•	Paste [image] to embed the object with no connection to its origin

•	Paste link [image] to insert the object with a link to the original document

6	Choose a paste format from the As list.

 Related topics


Indenting text

Indenting arranges text on a page by moving one or more lines to the left or the right of the paragraph margin. You can indent a line or paragraph manually or you can indent lines or paragraphs using the ruler or automatically.

To move the first line of a paragraph farther to the left than subsequent lines, you can apply a hanging indent. To indent an entire paragraph one tab stop from both the left and right margins, you can apply a double indent. A double indent is often used to format lengthy quotations.

The following image shows the indent options that WordPerfect provides: 1) a paragraph that is not indented, 2) an indented paragraph, 3) a paragraph to which a double indent has been applied, and 4) a paragraph to which a hanging indent has been applied.

 How to


To apply a single indent to text

To indent	Do the following
A line of text	Click at the beginning of a line of text. Press Tab.
A paragraph	Click at the beginning of a paragraph. Click Format [image] Paragraph [image] Indent.
The first line of a paragraph using the ruler	Click in a paragraph. Drag the First line indent marker to a new position on the ruler.
The first line of every paragraph automatically	Click in a paragraph. Click Format [image] Paragraph [image] Format. In the First line indent box, type a value to specify the distance to indent.
 Related topics


To apply a hanging or double indent

1	Click at the beginning of a paragraph.

2	Click Format [image] Paragraph, and click one of the following:

•	Hanging indent [image] indents all but the first line in the paragraph

•	Double indent [image] indents the paragraph equally from both margins

 Tip

•	You can also apply a hanging indent by clicking at the beginning of any line in a paragraph, except the first line, and pressing Tab.

 Related topics


To remove an indent

1	Click at the beginning of a line of text.

2	Press Shift + Tab.

 Related topics


Justifying text

You can justify text in a document. Doing so aligns the text horizontally between the left and right margins of the page.

The following image shows the justification options that WordPerfect provides: 1) a left-justified paragraph, 2) a right-justified paragraph, 3) a center-justified paragraph, 4) a fully justified paragraph, and 5) a paragraph with all lines justified.

 How to


To justify text

1	Click in a paragraph.

2	Click Format [image] Justification, and click one of the following:

•	Left [image] aligns text evenly with the left margin

•	Right [image] aligns text evenly with the right margin

•	Center [image] centers text between the right and left margins

•	Full [image] aligns text, excluding the last line, along both the right and left margins

•	All [image] aligns text, including the last line, along both the right and left margins

 Note

•	Justification is applied to all text from the cursor location forward. If you want to apply justification to a word, line, or paragraph, you must first select the text.

 Tip

•	You can also justify text by clicking the Justification picker on the property bar and clicking a justification.

 Related topics


Centering text vertically

You can center the content vertically, from top to bottom, on a page and on all subsequent pages.

 How to


To center text vertically

1	Click Format [image] Page [image] Center.

2	Enable one of the following options:

•	Center page [image] centers the content vertically on the page

•	Current and subsequent pages [image] centers the content on the current page and all subsequent pages

•	No centering [image] inserts text as you type it from the top margin down, without centering it vertically

 Related topics


Keeping text together

To keep words together, you can insert a hard space between them. You can also prevent the first and last lines of a paragraph from being separated from the rest of the paragraph across a page break.

You can also insert a line break to begin a new line without ending the paragraph.

 How to


To keep words together

1	Click between two words.

2	Click Format [image] Line [image] Other codes.

3	Enable the Hard space [HSpace] option.

4	Click Insert.

 Related topics


To keep a paragraph together

1	Click at the beginning of a paragraph.

2	Click Format [image] Keep text together.

3	In the Widow/orphan area, enable the Prevent the first and last lines of paragraphs from being separated across pages check box.

You can also
Keep several lines of text together	In the Conditional end of page area, enable the Number of lines to keep together check box, and type the number of lines you want to keep together, including any blank lines.
Keep selected text from dividing between pages	In the Block protect area, enable the Keep selected text together on same page check box.
 Note

•	If you keep several consecutive paragraphs together, you must separate each paragraph by at least one soft or hard return; otherwise, they are treated as one large block of text.

 Related topics


To insert a line break

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the Edit button.

4	Click the Features tab.

5	Choose Insert from the Feature categories list box.

6	Choose Line Break from the Features list box.

7	Click the Add button.

8	Click the Line Break button.

 Tip

•	You can also press Ctrl + Shift + L to insert a line break.

 Related topics


Correcting capitalization

You can quickly change a word or selected text to all uppercase or lowercase letters, or to lowercase letters with initial caps.

Lowercase and initial capitals exceptions are as follows:

•	Words beginning with "I", such as, "I'm," "I'd," "I've," and the first word in each sentence, remain capitalized when you convert text to lowercase.

•	When you convert text to initial capitals, the first letter of each word is capitalized, except for articles, prepositions, conjunctions, and some pronouns. If you want to specify additional capitalization exceptions, you can edit the Wt9xx.icr file (where xx is a language code) in Program files\Corel\Shared\Writing tools\9.0.

You can change capitalization after the end of a sentence. You can specify that, when you change capitalization after the end of a sentence, the entry is automatically added as an exception item. You can also remove exception items.

 How to


To change capitalization

1	Select the text for which you want to change capitalization.

2	Click Edit [image] Convert case, and click one of the following:

•	Lowercase [image] changes all letters to lowercase

•	Uppercase [image] changes all letters to uppercase

•	Initial capitals [image] changes only the first letter of each word to uppercase

 Notes

•	You can add buttons to the toolbar for capitalization. For information about toolbars, see "Customizing toolbars."

 Tip

•	You can also change the selected text to uppercase or lowercase by pressing Ctrl + K.

 Related topics


To automatically correct capitalization

1	Click Tools [image] QuickCorrect.

2	Click the Format-As-You-Go tab.

3	In the Sentence corrections area, enable the Capitalize next letter after end-of-sentence punctuation check box.

You can also
Automatically correct two initial capital letters in a sentence	Enable the Correct two irregular capitals (make a second letter lowercase) check box.
Automatically correct Caps lock capitalization	Enable the CapsFix check box.
Automatically correct capitalization after a period	Click Exceptions. In the Do not capitalize next letter after this word box, type a word. Click Add entry. Click Close.
 Related topics


To add exceptions to capitalization exception list

1	Click Tools [image] QuickCorrect.

2	Click the Format-As-You-Go tab.

3	In the Sentence corrections area, click Exceptions.

4	In the Exceptions list dialog box, type a word in the Do not capitalize next letter after this word box.

5	Click Add entry.

6	Click Close.

You can also
Automatically add exceptions to the exception list	Enable the Add exceptions when you correct them in document check box.
Remove exceptions from the exception list	From the Exception list box, choose the word that you want to delete. Click Delete entry.
 Related topics


Editing quotation marks

You can use SmartQuotes to change the appearance of double, single, and straight quotes in a document.

 How to


To edit quotation marks

1	Click Tools [image] QuickCorrect.

2	Click the SmartQuotes tab.

3	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Use double quotation marks as you type [image] inserts double quotes for opening and closing quotes

•	Use single quotation marks as you type [image] inserts single quotes for opening and closing quotes

•	Use straight quotation marks after numbers - 6' [image] lets you use straight quotes, rather than curly quotes, when the quote character follows a number

If you enabled the Use double quotation marks as you type check box, choose a quote type from the Open and Close list boxes.

If you enabled the Use single quotation marks as you type check box, choose a quote type from the Open and Close list boxes.

 Related topics


Correcting the spacing between words and sentences

WordPerfect lets you correct the spacing between words and sentences. You can delete double spaces between words in a sentence, and you can convert one space between sentences to two or two spaces to one.

 How to


To automatically delete double spaces between words in a sentence

1	Click Tools [image] QuickCorrect.

2	Click the Format As-You-Go tab.

3	In the Sentence corrections area, enable the Change two spaces to one space between words check box.

 Related topics


To automatically convert spaces between sentences

1	Click Tools [image] QuickCorrect.

2	Click the Format As-You-Go tab.

3	In the End of sentence corrections area, enable one of the following options:

•	Change one space to two spaces between sentences

•	Change two spaces to one space between sentences

 Related topics


Making text fit a specific number of pages

You can make selected text or all text in a document fit a specific number of pages.

 How to


To make text fit a specific number of pages

1	Click in a document.

2	Click Format [image] Make it fit.

3	Type a value in the Desired number of pages box.

The number of pages you set must be within 50 percent of the document's current page count.

4	In the Items to adjust area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Left margin

•	Right margin

•	Top margin

•	Bottom margin

•	Font size

•	Line spacing

5	Click Make it fit.

 Tip

•	To make only a certain block of text fit, select the text.

 Related topics


Changing the spacing between letters and words

Word and letter spacing adjustments affect the distance between all letters, whether or not they are kerned. You can change the spacing between letters, and between words in fully justified text. In fully justified text, which is text that is aligned on the left and right margins, you can change the space that appears between letters by compressing and expanding the letters to fit on a line.

Kerning is the process of adjusting the space between letter pairs. Certain letter pairs appear to have more space between them than others because of the shape and slant of each letter. Automatic kerning adjusts the distance between all occurrences of certain letter pairs depending on the font used. Large font sizes tend to make the distance between certain letter pairs more obvious. You can enable automatic kerning or use manual kerning in WordPerfect. Manual kerning lets you change the spacing between one instance of a kern pair that you select.

 How to


To change spacing between letters

1	Click between two letters.

2	Click Format [image] Typesetting [image] Word/letter spacing.

3	In the Letter spacing area, enable one of the following options:

•	Normal [image] determines the settings for the spacing used between letters, based on the font used

•	Percent of optimal [image] uses a percentage of the Optimal (default) spacing.

 Notes

•	The default setting for compressing text is 60%. This means that the space between words in justified text can be compressed to at least 60% of the original space. The default setting for expanding text is 400%. This means that the space between words in justified text will be expanded to at least 400% of the original space.

•	Specifying values of less than 100 for the percentage of optimal spacing decreases the space between words. Values of more than 100 increase the space between words.

 Tips

•	You can also set the spacing by typing a value in the Set pitch box to specify the number of characters per inch.

•	You can change the spacing between words by enabling options in the Word spacing area.

 Related topics


To adjust spacing between words in fully justified text

1	Click Format [image] Typesetting [image] Word/letter spacing.

2	Type a value in the Compress to box.

This value specifies the maximum percent of distance between text.

3	Type a value in the Expand to box.

This value specifies the maximum percent by which the distance between words can increase.

 Related topics


To enable automatic kerning

1	Click Format [image] Typesetting [image] Word/letter spacing.

2	Enable the Automatic kerning check box.

 Related topics


To use manual kerning

1	Click between the two letters.

2	Click Format [image] Typesetting [image] Manual kerning.

3	Choose a unit of measure from the Units of measure list box.

4	Type a value in the Add/remove space box.

Positive values increase the distance between letters, and negative values decrease it.

 Related topics


Changing the spacing between lines and paragraphs

The space between lines, or the amount of white space that appears between the bottom of one line and the top of the next line, is referred to as leading. You can change the leading by changing the line spacing, changing the line height to a fixed size, and changing the space between paragraphs.

 How to


To adjust the leading

1	Click in a paragraph.

2	Click Format [image] Typesetting [image] Word/letter spacing.

3	Enable the Adjust leading check box.

4	Type a value in the Between lines box.

A positive value increases the leading; a negative value decreases it.

 Related topics


To change the line spacing

1	Click in a paragraph.

2	Click Format [image] Line [image] Spacing.

3	Type a value in the Spacing box.

 Tip

•	You can also change the line spacing of selected text.

 Related topics


To change the line height to a fixed size

1	Click in a paragraph.

2	Click Format [image] Line [image] Height.

3	Enable the Fixed option, and type a value in the box.

 Note

•	Line height is determined by multiplying the current line height by the number you specify.

 Tip

•	You can also change the line height of selected text.

 Related topics


To change the space between paragraphs

1	Click in a paragraph.

2	Click Format [image] Paragraph [image] Format.

3	In the Spacing between paragraphs area, enable one of the following options:

•	Number of lines [image] inserts the number of lines you specify

•	Distance in points [image] inserts the spacing you specify measured in points

 Note

•	There are 72 points in 1 inch.

 Related topics


Advancing text to a different position

You can move text horizontally or vertically a certain distance relative to the cursor or place text at an absolute position on the page. You can also delete an advance.

 How to


To advance a certain distance from the cursor

1	Click in front of the text you want to advance.

2	Click Format [image] Typesetting [image] Advance.

3	In the Horizontal position area, enable one of the following options:

•	Left from insertion point [image] moves the cursor to the left of its current position by the distance you specify

•	Right from insertion point [image] moves the cursor to the right of its current position by the distance you specify

4	Type a value in the Horizontal distance list box.

5	In the Vertical position area, enable one of the following options:

•	Up from insertion point [image] moves the cursor above its current position by the distance you specify

•	Down from insertion point [image] moves the cursor down from its current position by the distance you specify

6	Type a value in the Vertical distance list box.

 Related topics


To advance to an absolute position on the page

1	Click in front of the text you want to advance.

2	Click Format [image] Typesetting [image] Advance.

2	Enable any of the following options:

•	From left edge of page [image] moves the cursor from the left edge of the page by the distance you type in the Horizontal distance box.

•	From top of page [image] moves the cursor from the top of the page by the distance you type in the Vertical distance box.

 Notes

•	The Text above position check box is enabled automatically when you enable the From top of page option. If you want to place the advanced text below the position measured from the top margin of the page, disable this check box.

•	When you advance text from the top of the page, the distance is measured from the baseline of the first line of text. For information about baselines and baseline placement, see "Using baseline placement for typesetting."

•	You cannot advance text past the edges of the page.

 Related topics


To delete an advance

1	Click View [image] Reveal Codes.

2	Drag the Advance code out of the Reveal Codes window.

 Note

•	For more information about Reveal Codes, see "Displaying Reveal codes."

 Related topics


Using baseline placement for typesetting

The baseline is the invisible horizontal line on which characters sit. The top of the first line of text is placed even with the top margin. This way, the first baseline of the top line is a specified distance below the top margin. The distance between the top margin and the first baseline varies, depending on which font and size you are using.

You can set the first baseline on the page to become the top margin, rather than have the baseline vary according to the font size used in the first line of text on the page.

 How to


To set the baseline placement

1	Click Format [image] Typesetting [image] Word/letter spacing.

2	Enable the Baseline placement for typesetting check box.

 Note

•	When Baseline placement for typesetting is enabled, the first baseline occurs at the same location on every page.

 Related topics


Hyphenating text

Hyphenation divides words that span the hyphenation zone, a narrow area that surrounds the right margin of a document. You can enable automatic hyphenation. You can also change the width of the hyphenation zone. Increasing the hyphenation zone hyphenates fewer words, and decreasing the hyphenation zone hyphenates more words. As well, you can create a nonbreaking hyphen.

 How to


To enable automatic hyphenation

1	Click in a document.

2	Click Tools [image] Language [image] Hyphenation.

3	Enable the Turn hyphenation on check box.

 Related topics


To change the width of the hyphenation zone

1	Click in a document.

2	Click Tools [image] Language [image] Hyphenation.

3	Type a value in the Percent left box.

4	Type a value in the Percent right box.

 Note

•	If hyphenation is enabled before you change the hyphenation zone percentages, you may be prompted to rehyphenate some words in the active document.

 Related topics


To insert a nonbreaking hyphen

•	Press Ctrl + hyphen (–).

 Related topics


Setting hyphenation prompts and notifications

Setting a prompt for hyphenation lets you choose whether to be prompted when a word needs hyphenation. You can also set a notification sound when a word needs hyphenation.

 How to


To set a prompt for hyphenation

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click the Environment icon.

3	In the Environment settings dialog box, click the Prompts tab.

4	In the Prompt area, choose one of the following settings from the On hyphenation list box:

•	Always [image] displays a prompt every time a word is hyphenated

•	Never [image] never displays a prompt when a word is hyphenated

•	When required [image] displays a prompt when a word must be hyphenated but is not found in the main word list

5	Click OK.

6	Click Close.

 Note

•	Prompting when required is enabled by default.

 Related topics


To set a sound notification for hyphenation

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Environment.

3	In the Environment settings dialog box, click the Prompts tab.

4	In the Beep area, enable the On hyphenation check box.

5	Click OK.

6	Click Close.

 Note

•	Beep notification is enabled by default.

 Related topics


Changing hyphen options and position

You can choose how words are hyphenated. Words can be separated with a hyphen, space, or soft return. You can also ignore the hyphenation prompt and let the word wrap to the next line. You can change the position of hyphens in words.

Hyphenation options are available only when automatic hyphenation is enabled and when the document is set to prompt you when a word needs hyphenation. For information about enabling hyphenation, see "Hyphenating text." For information about hyphenation prompts, see "Setting hyphenation prompts and notifications."

 How to


To choose a hyphenation option

1	Type text in a document.

The Position hyphen dialog box displays when a hyphen is required.

2	Click one of the following:

•	Insert hyphen [image] inserts a hyphen, which displays and prints only when the word spans the hyphenation zone

•	Insert space [image] divides the word by adding a space between the letters you specify

•	Hyphenation SRt [image] divides the word by putting a soft return between the letters you specify when the word spans the hyphenation zone

•	Ignore word [image] prevents the word from being hyphenated

•	Suspend hyphenation [image] halts hyphenation temporarily

 Note

•	When the prompt for hyphenation is set to Never, the Position hyphen dialog box does not display. For information about setting a prompt for hyphenation, see "To set a prompt for hyphenation."

 Related topics


To position the hyphen in a word

1	Type text in a document.

The Position hyphen dialog box displays when a hyphen is required.

2	Click in the Use mouse or arrow keys to position hyphen box, and press any of the following keys:

•	Left arrow [image] moves the hyphen to the left of the displayed word

•	Right arrow [image] moves the hyphen to the right of the displayed word

 Tip

•	To reposition the hyphen, click where you want the hyphen to display in the word in the Use mouse or arrow keys to position hyphen box.

 Related topics


Inserting and changing hyphens by using codes

You can insert hyphens, soft hyphens, and soft returns by using codes. You can also use codes to keep the text together on either side of a hyphen.

 How to


To insert hyphenation by using codes

1	Click in a word.

2	Click Format [image] Line [image] Other codes.

3	In the Divide word with area, enable one of the following options:

•	Hyphen [- Hyphen] [image] inserts a hyphen in the word

•	Soft hyphen [- Soft hyphen] [image] divides the word with a hyphen only when the word spans the hyphenation zone

•	Hyphenation soft return [HyphSRt] [image] divides the word without using a hyphen only when the word spans the hyphenation zone

4	Click Insert.

 Related topics


To keep hyphenated text together by using codes

1	Click in a word.

2	Click Format [image] Line [image] Other codes.

3	In the Do not divide word area, enable the Hyphen character - option.

4	Click Insert.

 Related topics


Getting started

This chapter tells you how to perform basic operations in WordPerfect. You can explore the work area and gain a better understanding of the basic tools and features available for creating powerful word processing documents.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	exploring the work area

•	understanding the components of a document

•	creating and opening documents

•	entering or inserting text

•	selecting and deleting text

•	inserting graphics

•	adding the date and time to a document

•	saving documents

•	using the Corel Application Recovery Manager

•	closing documents and quitting WordPerfect


Exploring the work area

The work area in WordPerfect includes everything you see on your screen when you start the application. The large open area is the document window.

The menu bar, located at the top of the work area just below the title bar, provides access to most of the WordPerfect commands.

Toolbars

Many menu commands can be accessed through toolbars, located below the menu bar.

The following illustration shows the WordPerfect toolbar.

The property bar is a context-sensitive toolbar that displays buttons and options related to the task you are performing. For example, when text is selected, the property bar contains only text-related commands.

The following illustration shows the property bar.

By default, the property bar is located above the document window.

The application bar

The application bar displays information about the status of the active WordPerfect document. By default, the application bar is located below the document window.

When you open a file, a document button with the name of the file displays on the application bar. You can use document buttons to quickly move between the documents. For more information about moving between documents, see "Navigating documents."

The following illustration shows document buttons on the application bar.

The following illustration shows items on the right side of the application bar.


Understanding the components of a document

A WordPerfect document consists of one or more of the following components.

Text

Text can be typed directly into WordPerfect or imported from text editors or other word-processing applications. For more information about adding text to a document, see "Entering or inserting text."

Graphics

Graphics include shapes, drawings, pictures, and clipart. A shape is any object created using WordPerfect drawing tools. A drawing is created using Corel Presentations menus and tools.

A picture is a bitmap, or graphic image, that has been imported into a WordPerfect document. Pictures can be imported using a scanner, from a CD, or from photo-editing programs, such as Corel PHOTO-PAINT. Clipart images are images that can be brought into Corel applications and used as they are or edited. For more information about adding graphics to a document, see "Inserting graphics."

Styles

A style is a collection of formatting attributes applied to characters, paragraphs, or documents. By formatting items with styles, you ensure consistent formatting throughout a document. Whenever you change the formatting in a style, you change the appearance of all items that use that style. For more information about formatting with styles, see "Creating and saving text styles."

Templates

A template is a preformatted document that can be used as a guide for creating a new document. Every document created in WordPerfect is based on a template or a project template. When you open WordPerfect, the blank document you see is based on the default template. Project templates include fax cover sheets, memos, newsletters, and brochures. For more information about templates, see "Creating documents using project templates."

Macros

Macros are used to automate application tasks. For example, you can use WordPerfect macros to set margins, select a font, or create a merge file. For more information about macros, see "Recordings, macros, and automation features."


Creating and opening documents

You can create a document in WordPerfect using the default template, a blank document that includes formatting elements such as margin settings, tab settings, and toolbars. WordPerfect also includes ready-made project templates that you can open and use to create a wide range of documents, including letters, fax cover sheets, calendars, and business cards. For more information about templates, see "Creating documents using project templates."

You can open word-processing documents that were created in WordPerfect or in another application. The advantage of opening, rather than importing a document created in another application, is that many of the formatting attributes in the original document, such as page size, margins, font properties, bullets, and underlining, are preserved. Some of the features not supported include embedded pictures, hidden text, interline spacing, kerning, macros, multiple page layouts (the first one in the document is used throughout), and OLE objects. For more information about importing files, see "Import and export file formats for WordPerfect" in the reference information section of the online Help.

 How to


To create a document using the default template

•	Click File [image] New.

 Tip

•	You can also create a document using the default template by clicking the New blank document button on the toolbar.

 Related topics


To create a document using a project template

1	Click File [image] New from project.

2	From the list box, choose the type of project you want to create.

3	Choose a project from the list.

4	Click Create.

 Tip

•	You can use the PerfectExpert panel to modify the project. To display the PerfectExpert panel click Help [image] PerfectExpert.

 Related topics


To open a document

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the document is stored.

3	Choose a file.

4	Click Open.

 Tips

•	You can also open a document by clicking the Open button on the toolbar.

•	If you know where a file is located, you can type the full path and filename in the File name list box.

 Related topics


Entering or inserting text

You can enter text in the document window. You can use the shadow cursor to show where the text will be positioned.

You can also enter text in a text box so that it displays in a separate frame.

You can insert text from another file. If you have more than one document opened, you can insert text from one document to another document using the application bar.

 How to


To enter text in a document window

1	Click in the document window.

2	Type text.

 Related topics


To enter text using the shadow cursor

1	Click View [image] Shadow cursor.

A check mark next to the menu command indicates that the shadow cursor is enabled.

2	Click anywhere on the page.

3	Type text.

 Note

•	The shadow cursor changes appearance to show how text will be aligned when you start typing. Small arrows beside the shadow cursor point in different directions when text is left-justified, centered, or right-justified.

 Related topics


To enter text in a text box

1	Click Insert [image] Text box.

2	Type text.

 Related topics


To insert text from another document

1	Click where you want to insert the text.

2	Click Insert [image] File.

3	Choose the drive and folder where the document is stored.

4	Choose a file.

5	Click Insert.

 Related topics


To insert text from another document using the application bar

1	Select the text you want to insert.

2	Drag the selected text to the button on the application bar that displays the name of the document into which you want to insert the text, but don't release the mouse button.

This document opens in the document window.

3	Point to where you want to insert the text, and release the mouse button.

 Note

•	For more information about using the application bar, see "Customizing the application bar."

 Tip

•	The text you select is removed from the document. You can copy the text by holding down Ctrl while dragging.

 Related topics


Selecting and deleting text

You can select text, a tabular column, a rectangular block of text, or a range of text. You can also deselect text, delete text, and set selection options.

 How to


To select text

To select	Do the following
A character or word	Drag across a character or word.
A sentence	Click in a sentence. Click Edit [image] Select [image] Sentence.
A paragraph	Click in a paragraph. Click Edit [image] Select [image] Paragraph.
A page	Click on a page. Click Edit [image] Select [image] Page.
A document	Click Edit [image] Select [image] All.
 Related topics


To select a tabular column

1	Select the text from the first character in the tabular column to the last character in the tabular column.

2	Click Edit [image] Select [image] Tabular column.

 Related topics


To select a rectangular block of text

1	Select the text from the upper left corner to the lower left corner of the block.

2	Click Edit [image] Select [image] Rectangle.

 Related topics


To select a range of text in a document

1	Click Edit [image] Select [image] Section.

2	From the Select list, choose one of the following options:

•	Page [image] lets you select certain pages

•	Secondary page [image] lets you select certain secondary pages

•	Chapter [image] lets you select certain chapters

•	Volume [image] lets you select certain volumes

3	Type a value in the Range box.

 Related topics


To deselect text

•	Click anywhere outside the selected text.

 Related topics


To delete text

1	Select the text you want to delete.

2	Press Delete.

 Tip

•	You can also delete text by clicking after the text you want to delete, and pressing Backspace.

 Related topics


To set the selection options for a document

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Environment.

3	In the Environment settings dialog box, click the General tab.

4	Enable the Automatically select whole words when dragging to select text check box.

 Related topics


Inserting graphics

You can create basic shapes, such as circles, rectangles, lines, polygons, and polylines, in a document.

The following illustration shows examples of preset shapes: 1) basic shapes and, 2) flowchart shapes.

You can also create more complex drawings. When you create a drawing in WordPerfect, you use Corel Presentations. You can add circles, lines, boxes, and other shapes, or you can add objects to the drawing. For more information about creating a drawing, refer to the Corel Presentations online Help.

WordPerfect also lets you insert clipart and pictures from a CD into documents. You can insert any of more than 250 pictures stored on the WordPerfect Office CD.

 How to


To create a shape

1	Click Insert [image] Shapes.

2	Enable one of the following options:

•	Lines [image] lets you create shapes such as straight or curved lines

•	Basic [image] lets you create shapes such as circles, rectangles, or cubes

•	Arrows [image] lets you create various types of arrows

•	Flowchart [image] lets you create shapes used in flowcharts

•	Stars [image] lets you create various types of stars

•	Callout [image] lets you create callouts, which can be used to enclose text

•	Action [image] lets you create shapes used to denote action

3	Open the Shape picker, and click a shape.

4	Click OK.

5	Drag to draw the shape.

 Tips

•	You can create a square by holding down Shift while you draw a rectangle.

•	You can insert precise horizontal, vertical, and diagonal lines by holding down Shift while you draw a line.

 Related topics


To create a drawing

1	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Draw picture.

The Corel Presentations application starts.

2	Create the drawing using Corel Presentations menus and tools.

3	Click outside the drawing.

 Related topics


To insert a clipart image

1	Click where you want to insert a clipart image.

2	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Clipart.

3	Choose a clipart category from the list.

4	Choose the image from the list.

5	Click Insert.

 Related topics


To insert a picture from a CD

1	Insert the WordPerfect Office CD into your CD drive.

2	Click where you want to insert a picture.

3	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] From file.

4	Choose the CD drive from the Look in list box.

5	Open the Corel\WordPerfect Office 11\Graphics\Photos folder.

Pictures have .jpg filename extensions.

6	Double-click the filename of a picture.

 Tip

•	To preview a picture before you insert it, click the Toggle preview button, and click the picture filename.

 Related topics


Adding the date and time to a document

You can insert the date and time into a document. The format of the date and time text can be edited.

You can also create a custom format for the date and time.

 How to


To insert the date or time

1	Click where you want to add the date or time.

2	Click Insert [image] Date/time.

3	Choose a format from the Date/time formats list.

If you want the date or time to be updated when you open or print the document, enable the Keep the inserted date current check box.

4	Click Insert.

 Tips

•	You can insert the date as text by pressing Ctrl + D.

•	You can insert the date as a code that is updated when you open or print the document by pressing Ctrl + Shift + D.

 Related topics


To edit the date or time format

1	Select the date or time.

2	Click Insert [image] Date/time.

3	Choose a new format from the Date/time formats list box.

4	Click Apply format.

 Related topics


To create a custom date and time format

1	Click Insert [image] Date/time.

2	Click New format.

3	In the Custom data/time format dialog box, delete the codes in the Edit date/time format box.

4	Click any of the following tabs:

•	Year [image] lets you insert a year format

•	Month [image] lets you insert a month format

•	Day [image] lets you insert a day format

•	Time [image] lets you insert a time format

5	Choose a code from the Code list.

6	Click Insert.

 Notes

•	The Date/time sample box shows how the format will look in the document.

•	You can change the language used when you insert the date and time. For information about changing the language, see "Changing the language for WordPerfect."

 Related topics


Saving documents

You can save a document. When you save a document for the first time, you assign it a name and choose a folder in which to store it. Any changes you make to the document after that are saved to that location. You can create a new copy of the document by saving it to a new location.

 How to


To save a document

1	Click File [image] Save.

2	Choose the drive and folder where you want to store the document.

3	Type a name for the document in the File name box.

If you want to embed the fonts in the document, enable the Embed fonts using TrueDoc check box.

4	Click Save.

 Notes

•	If you have already saved the document, you will not be prompted to specify the drive, folder and filename.

•	Embedding ensures that the information for all of the fonts used in a document is saved with the document. You may want to embed fonts if you are using an unusual font or if you want to ensure that the font you are using displays properly.

 Tip

•	You can also save a document by pressing F3 or by clicking the Save button on the toolbar.

 Related topics


To save a document to a new location

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	From the Save in list box, choose the drive and folder where you want to store the document.

If you want to embed the fonts in the document, enable the Embed fonts using TrueDoc check box.

3	Click Save.

 Note

•	Embedding ensures that the information for all of the fonts used in a document is saved with the document. You may want to embed fonts if you are using an unusual font or if you want to ensure that the font you are using displays properly.

 Tip

•	You can save the document with a new name by typing a new name in the File name box.

 Related topics


Using the Corel Application Recovery Manager

Corel Application Recovery Manager (C.A.R.M.) is an online wizard that allows you to save a document and exit WordPerfect if the program ever becomes unstable. You can also send an online report to Corel that documents the nature of the problem and the events that led to it.

The C.A.R.M. wizard opens automatically at program failure and then offers three courses of action:

•	save the document and close the application

•	exit the application without saving the document

•	continue working

With the last option, there is no guarantee that you can recover any work in your document after the last time you saved.

After you have made a selection, you can report the details of the problem to Corel with an attached program log. Your report will be a vital part of Corel's product improvement plans.


Closing documents and quitting WordPerfect

You can close the active document or all documents and leave WordPerfect open. You can also quit WordPerfect, which closes the application along with all of the documents you have open.

 How to


To close a document

•	Click File [image] Close.

 Note

•	You are prompted to save any modified documents before closing.

 Tip

•	You can also close a document by clicking the Close button on the menu bar.

 Related topics


To close all documents

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Play.

2	Choose closeall.wcm from the list.

3	Click Play.

 Note

•	You are prompted to save any modified documents before closing.

 Related topics


To quit WordPerfect

•	Click File [image] Quit.

 Note

•	You are prompted to save any modified documents before quitting.

 Related topics


Glossary

About

Additional objects template

The CorelCENTRAL Address Book

API

Assignments

Autoscroll

Block

Block-Make-It-Fit

Block protect

Bookmarks

Browse buttons

CMYK

Cell

Characters

Class

Clipart

Clipboard

Code page

Comments

Condense Master

Conditional end of page

Conditions

Constant

Content

Copy

Codes

Command name

Corel RealTime Preview

CV*.DLL

Data file

Datasheet

Data source

Data table file

Data text file

Date/Time

DDE

Declare

Default font

Default settings

Default printer

Delimiters

Depreciation keywords

.DLL

Dots per inch (DPI)

Draft

Editing level styles

Ellipse

Embedded fonts

Enhanced charting module

Enhanced shapes

Enumerations

Event

Event-driven Programming

.EXE

Expand Master

Families

Field

File conversion

File management dialog boxes

Filename extension

Find

Find Next or Find Previous

Floating cell

Font

Foreign files

Form document

Formulas

Functions

Generate

GIF file format

Global

Glyphs

Gradient fills

Gutter

Growth/Amortization Keywords

HLS

.HLP

HTML

Hyperlink

Hyphenation zone

Improved accessibility

Indirect

In-Place activation

In-Place editing

Install-As-You-Go

Kerning

Leading

Link

Line height

List

Local

Logical page

Loops

Main word lists

Macros

Macro Command Browser

Menus

Merge codes

Merge data file

Multiple page printing

Native files

Network path

.NLI

Normal

Object

Object Oriented Programming

OLE

OLE Automation server

OLE Object Command

Ordinals

Page view

Pane

Parameters

Pattern

PerfectExpert

Physical page

Pixel

Polygon

Polyline

PostScript

Persist

Print

Printer metrics

Print Preview

Product commands

Programming commands

Project

Project categories

Project template

Prompts

Property

QuickFinder

QuickMacro

QuickMark

QuickMenu

QuickSpots

QuickStyle

QuickTips

QuickWords

RGB

Range

Record

Recorded macro

Rectangular block

Resolution

Reveal codes

Scalable

Scrap file

Separators

SGML editor

Shortcut

Shadow cursor

Skewed table cells

Solid fills

Source application

SpeedLinks

System variables

Styles

Subdocument

Subroutines

Subscript

Superscript

Tab definition

Table of authorities

Tabular column

Template

TextArt

Text styles

Thumbnail format

Tokens

Trellix 2 Integration

Triggers

TrueType font

URL

.UWL

Value

View as

Visual Basic for Applications

Watermark

.WCM

.WPD

.WPG

.WPT

Wildcards

Windows Metafile

WYSIWYG

XML capabilities


A


About

Displays information about the available Viewers and the types of files they can view.


Additional objects template

The additional objects template is a second default template that stores objects such as keyboards, menus, template macros, toolbars, and styles. You can use these objects in addition to or in place of those on your default template.


The CorelCENTRAL Address Book

The CorelCENTRAL Address Book is a standalone application that lets you keep all address information in one place. It can store names, addresses, user IDs, and related information to use on envelopes, labels, letters, templates, mass mailings (merge), and email (with a modem or network connection). You can also dial phone and fax numbers from the CorelCENTRAL Address Book.


API

An interface between the operating system and application programs, which includes the way the application programs interact with the operating system, and the services the operating system makes available to the programs.


Application Programming Interface

An interface between the operating system and application programs, which includes the way the application programs interact with the operating system, and the services the operating system makes available to the programs.


Assignments

Assignment statements assign the value of an expression to a variable.


Autoscroll

Autoscroll lets you scroll through a document without using the arrow keys or the scroll bars. When you point the Autoscroll arrow in the direction you want to move, you can scroll through the document. The scrolling speed increases when you move the arrow further from the Autoscroll tool and slows when you move the arrow closer to the Autoscroll tool.


B


Background Color

WordPerfect uses only the background color when using patterns. A shading value will be applied only to the foreground color; WordPerfect does not mix the foreground and background colors like Microsoft Word.


Backup

The last saved version of a document. You can set WordPerfect to make a copy of your document automatically.


Block

A block can be the address or name of a range of cells, or anything that returns the cell address or name of a range.


Block-Make-It-Fit

WordPerfect enhances the Make-It-Fit feature available in previous versions to allow you to fit sections of your document into a specified number of pages without affecting other areas where fitting specifications may be different.


Block Protect

Block protect keeps selected text together so that it is not divided between pages.


Boilerplate


Bookmarks

WordPerfect converts Bookmarks, but only preserves the Go To feature. Since WordPerfect cannot nest or overlap Bookmarks, a bookmark may not span all the text that is associated with it.


Borders

WordPerfect converts Auto Color to Black.


Borders

Color borders currently do not convert. Check the borders in the paragraph feature for a full description of which borders convert to WordPerfect borders.


Box Character

WordPerfect converts the check box to a box character. WordPerfect fills the box character, depending on whether the Microsoft Word check box is full or empty.


Browse buttons

The browse buttons make navigation within a document more intuitive. WordPerfect lets you navigate through a document in the same way that you navigate through an Internet document.


Bullets

When you convert a Microsoft Word document to WordPerfect, WordPerfect places the bullet character in a style and inserts a tab after the character to give the proper effect.


C


CMYK

A color mode made up of cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y), and black (K). In the CMYK color mode, color values are expressed as percentages, so a value of 100 for any ink means that it is being applied at full saturation. Used in most full-color commercial printing, CMYK is like CMY, but the addition of black allows for true blacks and a wider tonal range. The CMYK color mode is based on the CMYK color model.


Cell

A cell may be the address or name of a cell in the table, or anything that returns the address or name of a cell.


Characters

Characters indicate what text encapsulates (surrounds) field data and if any text should be removed from the incoming data.


Class

In object-oriented programming, a class is an object type that has the same properties and methods.


Clipart

Images that can be brought into Corel applications and edited or used as is. Corel offers a large selection of clipart in many formats.


Clipboard

A place in memory that holds cut or copied information. Items remain in the Clipboard until they are either replaced with other cut or copied items or until you exit from Windows.


Code page

A code page is a table in the DOS or Windows operating systems that defines which ASCII or ANSI character set is used in a document. Different ASCII or ANSI character sets are used for different languages.


Codes

Codes are hidden in the background in WordPerfect and are used to control formatting functions within a document.


Command name

Indicates which feature the command activates. Some commands consist only of a command name, such as FileOpenDlg().


Comments

Comment statements contain notes and other information that do not affect macro play. Use comment statements to explain the purpose of your macro, describe its components, or prevent a statement from playing. A comment begins either with // and ends with a hard return [HRt] or with /* and ends with */.


Condense Master

Use the Condense Master command to close subdocuments in a master document.


Conditional end of page

Conditional end of page keeps lines of text together on the same page. WordPerfect lets you specify the number of lines you want to keep together.


Conditions

Conditional statements play a statement or group of statements when a specified condition is met. A group of statements is known as a statement block. A statement block is played depending on which option the user chooses. Conditional statements include Case, If, and Switch.


Constant

A constant variable is a variable whose value cannot change at run-time. A constant can be a number, such as 25 or 3.6; a character, such as a or $; or a character string, such as "this is a string."


Content

Displays a file with text wrapped to fit in the Viewer window.


Copy

Lets you copy to the Clipboard any selected text in a file you are viewing. You can select one or more consecutive lines. If the selected text includes part of a table, the entire table is copied.


Corel RealTime Preview

Corel RealTime Preview lets you scroll through and preview several different formatting options, such as fonts, lines, tables, borders, and shading, to see what they look like, without applying those changes to your document.


CV*.DLL

Conversion files necessary to import and export to different file formats.


D


Data file

A WordPerfect data file supplies information to the form document during a merge. You can arrange the information in either a text or table format. (In previous versions of WordPerfect a data file was known as a secondary merge file.)


Data source

A data source supplies information to a form document during a merge. You can use a WordPerfect data file or The CorelCENTRAL Address Book as a data source. You can also use keyboard input, an ODBC data source, a database file from another application, a spreadsheet file, an ASCII Delimited Text file, or a data file in another word processing format.


Data table file

A data file provides data to the form file during a merge. You can create a data file in either text or table format. When the data file is arranged in text format, information is separated into fields and records. (In previous versions of WordPerfect, a data file was known as a secondary merge file.)


Data text file

A data file provides data to the form file during a merge. You can create a data file in either text or table format. When the data file is arranged in text format, information is separated into fields and records. When the data file is arranged in table format, each column of the table contains a field. Each row contains a record. (In previous versions of WordPerfect a data file was known as a secondary merge file.)


Datasheet

A datasheet appears in its own window in the drawing window when you create a data chart. Use it as a spreadsheet to enter, edit, or import the data the chart displays.


Date

WordPerfect converts Microsoft Word date formats to equivalent WordPerfect date formats.


Date/Time

Every date and time from January 1, 1900, to October 19, 65493, is assigned a consecutive number in WordPerfect. A date or a time argument can be a date or time number, or anything that returns a date or time number. See the DATEVALUE and HMS functions later in this appendix for details on date and time numbers.


DDE

DDE can link a file created by a Windows application that supports DDE and a WordPerfect document. This connection lets you transfer information from the source file into the WordPerfect document. If both files are open, the transferred information can be updated automatically when information changes in the source file.


Declare

The Declare command creates local variables and arrays. Local variables and arrays pertain to the current macro only. An array can have up to 10 dimensions and up to 32, 767 elements per dimension, depending on the amount of available memory.


Default font

A default font is a font that WordPerfect automatically uses if you do not specify otherwise. You can change the default font in WordPerfect to the font of your choice.


Default printer

The printing device that is used automatically when you choose the Print command. You can have only one default printer selected at a time.


Default settings

Preset options built into a program. Unless you alter these options, each new document you create uses the default settings.


Default tab stop

The WordPerfect definition starts at 0 and sets a tab stop at the default distance from the previous tab until the right margin is reached.


Delimited text file

A delimited text file contains data stored as text. Each field is separated by a comma, and each record ends with a carriage return or line feed. Character strings are enclosed in quotation marks. Delimited text files facilitate communication between database systems that use different formats.


Delimiters

Delimiters are characters that separate and/or enclose (delimit) each field and record.


Depreciation Keywords

The following table contains explanations that apply only to the argument keywords of the three depreciation functions (DDB, SLN, and SYD).

Keyword	Represents
Cost	The amount paid for an asset.
Life	The number of periods it takes to depreciate the asset to its salvage value.
Period	The time period for which you want to find the depreciation. Use the same time increments you use in the Life argument.
Salvage	The value of an asset at the end of its life.


Digital certificate

A digital certificate can be obtained from a certification authority. It identifies the entity to whom the certificate was issued as well as information about the certificate's validity.


Digital signature

A digital authentication that you can attach to electronic documents. A valid digital signature is an implementation of a digital certificate. It identifies that the document has not been altered since it was signed and identifies the entity to whom the certificate was issued.


Display metrics

Line endings are determined by screen resolution and the appearance of the text on screen.


Display Paragraph Number

WordPerfect replaces AUTONUM, AUTONUMGL, and AUTONUMOUT with Paragraph Numbering if all heading levels in the Microsoft Word document are Arabic, followed by a period, with the previous level attached (i.e., 1.1, 1.2 etc.).


.DLL

DLL, Dynamic Link Library, is an application file necessary to run WordPerfect.


Dots per inch (DPI)

Printer resolution is measured in dots per inch. Typical desktop laser printers print at 300 dpi, whereas image setters are capable of printing at resolutions of 1270 or 2540 dpi. Printers with higher dpi capabilities produce smoother and cleaner output. The term dpi is also used to measure scanning resolution and to indicate bitmap resolution.

See also Resolution.


Draft

Displays a file with limited attributes. For example, it displays a file in one font even if the file contains multiple fonts, and it displays boxes representing graphics images rather than displaying the images themselves.


E


Editing level styles

When you organize text using bulleted lists, numbered lists, and outlines, you can create a level style. For example, you can create a style that formats all level two headings in bold italic. In WordPerfect, you can edit a level style that you have created, but you cannot edit any of the preset styles provided with WordPerfect.


Ellipse

An oval or a circle.


Embedded Fonts

WordPerfect lets you use the Embedded Font feature. If you choose Embedded Fonts when saving your document, your fonts will be compressed and saved with the file data. Now your favorite fonts will go wherever your file goes for the presentation that you expect.


Enhanced charting module

The enhanced charting module provides additional chart types and capabilities.


Enhanced file conversion

WordPerfect continues to use the same file format as its predecessors [image] Corel WordPerfect 6, 6.1, 7, and 8 [image] without requiring any conversion from these previous versions. Keeping the same file format lets you convert Microsoft Word and Lotus AmiPro documents while retaining all document data from open to save.


Enhanced multiple page printing

WordPerfect includes additional options for printing multiple pages. You can specify the number of copies you wish to print and whether you want the copies collated. Collating is useful when printing multipage documents. When you enable the Collate check box, a complete copy of each document is printed before the next document is printed; when collating is disabled, all the copies of the first page are printed before the copies of the second page are printed.


Enhanced shapes

WordPerfect provides over 100 new shapes. You can choose a shape from any of the new shape palettes or use the Basic Shapes, Arrows, Stars, Banners, and Flowcharting tools. Action buttons prompt the assignment of an action; Call out shapes have pointers that can be anchored anywhere in the document. All shapes have the new Text In Shapes feature, which allows text to be added into the shape on the fly.


Enumerations

Enumerations are used to set parameter values when parameter values are limited to a specific set of values. For example, the Backup command turns timed document backup on or off. It has one parameter named State with two enumerations, Off! and On!.


Event

An occurrence that is significant to a program and which may call for a response from the program.


Event-driven Programming

A program that waits for an event to occur and responds to it instead of going through a program line by line.


.EXE

Application file. Necessary to run WordPerfect.


Expand master

Use the Expand master command to open subdocuments in a master document.


F


Families

Families refers to the levels of text used in an outline. For example, all level 3 text would be considered a "family." You can show and hide families of text. When you hide a family, or level, all subordinate levels are also hidden.


Field

A field is the smallest unit of information in a data file that can be referenced in a merge. A field can be one character or many. In a text file, each field is separated by an ENDFIELD marker. In a table file, each individual field is a cell, or a field group is a column. It is recommended that you use no more than 512 fields per record.


File management dialog boxes

File management dialog boxes allow you to open, save, delete, and rename files and folders. These dialog boxes include Open, Insert file, Play or Record macro, and Save as.


Filename extension

Filename extensions identify file types and file formats. For example, the .wpd extension identifies a file as a WordPerfect file, and the .shw extension identifies a file as a Corel Presentations slide show file. Each application saves its files with a default extension unless you specify another one.


Find

Locates words or phrases in a file.


Find Next or Find Previous

Lets you search for the next or previous occurrence of the text you specified. These options display only if you have used Find to locate text.


Floating Cell

A floating cell is a cell that exists outside of a table. Floating cells refer to data in tables or in other floating cells. The information in a floating cell updates whenever you update the information it refers to. A floating cell can contain formulas, text, or numbers.


Font

Allows you to select a font in which to display document text. This option displays only if you select Draft as the view mode.


Font Color

The Auto color is converted to black except when the background color is black, in which case it is converted to white.


Foreground Color

WordPerfect uses only the background color when using patterns. A shading value will be applied only to the foreground color, and WordPerfect does not mix the foreground and background colors like Microsoft Word.


Foreign files

Foreign files are files that were created in another application (that is, apart from the application you are currently using).


Form document

A form document provides the repeated information and layout for a merged document. It can contain text, graphics, and page formatting for each merged document, as well as field names and merge codes. (In previous versions of WordPerfect, a form document was known as a form file or a primary merge file.)


Formulas

An arithmetic operation or mathematical expression.


Functions

A mathematical expression that depends on and varies with another expression: for example, height is a function of age.


G


Generate

Use the Generate command to create an updated index, list, table of contents, cross-reference, or table of authorities in a document.


GIF file format

GIF was developed as a cross-platform graphic standard and is supported by all graphical browsers. GIF supports up to 8-bit color (256 possible colors) and lets you store custom palettes with your image. GIF offers several advanced graphic options, including transparent background, image interlacing, and animation.

GIF files provide compression without losing any information. When you convert to .GIF, all the file information is stored with the image, and the GIF file looks exactly like the graphic you created. Because there is limited decompression required, GIF files display fairly quickly on screen. The GIF format also supports the use of image maps.


Global

The Global command creates variables and arrays that pertain to the current macro and to the macros called by the Run and Chain commands.


Glyphs

Glyphs are small, pink, diamond-shaped handles that can be dragged to alter the form of a shape. You can use glyphs to alter the depth of most 3D shapes or to change the width and height allocations for some shapes.


Gradient fills

A complex fill that displays a progression between two colors that follow a linear, radial, conical, or square path. By using gradient fills, you can create a direct blend from one color to another or a cascade of different colors. You can also use predefined gradient fills to create neon tubes, metal cylinders, and a variety of similar effects.


Graphics Box

Box contains a graphic or a graphic on disk depending on whether the graphic in the Include Picture command is present in the document.


Growth/Amortization Keywords

The following table contains explanations that apply only to the argument keywords of the five growth/amortization functions (FV, PMT, PV, RATE, and TERM). These functions let you solve any of 22 possible growth/amortization cases.

Keyword	Represents
Future Value (FV)	The value of an investment or loan at the end of the specified periods.
Payment	The amount periodically paid or earned on a loan or investment.
Periods	The number of periods for the investment or loan. If the Payment argument is included, the Periods argument must be based on the frequency of the payment (for example, number of months if payments are monthly).
Present Value (PV)	The initial amount invested or loaned.
Rate	The rate of interest for the investment or loan. Type the rate followed by the percent operator (for example, 7.5%). You must base the rate on the same period as the Payment and Periods arguments. If those arguments are based on a period other than a year, you must adjust the rate accordingly. For example, if payments are made monthly, divide the rate by 12 (for example, 7.5%/12).
Type	When the payment is made (at the beginning or end of the period). A non-zero value for Type indicates that payment is made at the beginning of the period. A value of zero indicates that payment is made at the end of the period. The default value for the Type argument is zero. If the Payment argument is zero, the Type argument has no effect on the calculation. The Type argument requires that you enter all cash inflows as positive numbers and outflows as negative numbers. If you do not include the Type argument, all arguments must be positive numbers and all results will be positive.


Gutter

The gutter is the white space that appears between columns.


H


HLS

Hue, lightness, and saturation are the components of the HLS color model, an alternative to RGB. Hue determines color (yellow, orange, red, etc.), lightness determines perceived intensity (lighter or darker color), and saturation determines color depth (from dull to intense). The circular visual selector defines the hue value (0 to 360) and the saturation value (0 to 100); the vertical visual selector defines the lightness value (0 to 100).


Hanging indent

WordPerfect uses the Left margin adjustment command and the First line indent command to create the Hanging indent command. A tab definition will also be generated with a tab set at the location of the left indent. As in Microsoft Word, a tab between the first line indent and the left indent will stop at the left indent location.


Hanging indent

The Hanging indent command may be affected by the first line and left indents that are already set.


Headers/footers

WordPerfect has two header and two footer settings: Header/footer A and Header/footer B. When you enable the Place on every page option, headers and footers on every page automatically convert to Header/footer A. When you enable the Place on odd page option, headers and footers on odd pages automatically convert to Header/footer A. When you enable the Place on even page option, headers and footers on even pages automatically convert to Header/footer B.


.HLP

HLP [image] an application help file (like the WordPerfect online Help) [image] provides user assistance and information.


Highlighting pen

Marks the selected text with color so that it is highlighted.


HTML

Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) is the World Wide Web authoring standard. HTML is comprised of markup tags that define the structure and components of a document. The tags are used to tag text and integrate resources (such as pictures, sound, video, and animation) when creating a Web page.


Hyperlink

A hyperlink is an element in an electronic document, typically represented by underlined text or a graphic, that connects the document to another location, which can be in the same document or in an entirely different document. Usually, you activate hyperlinks by clicking on them.


Hypertext

WordPerfect creates a hypertext link when you convert a Microsoft Word file with a Macro button. Since the macro name is a Microsoft Word macro, it cannot be used in WordPerfect.


Hyphenation zone

The hyphenation zone is a narrow area surrounding the right margin of a document. Hyphenation divides words that span the hyphenation zone. You can move the boundaries of the hyphenation zone to hyphenate more or fewer words.


I


Improved accessibility

WordPerfect continues to work towards accessibility requirements, including the support of High-Contrast mode, providing keystrokes to the majority of features, using standard user interface controls which make Third Party accessibility tools compatible with Corel applications, supporting large font mode, and providing options under settings to provide flexibility in functionality.


Index

Microsoft Word has many index (XE) options. WordPerfect only converts text that is in the XE field command. WordPerfect automatically converts the index using the WordPerfect default settings.


Indirect

The Indirect command creates a variable name out of a combination of character strings and/or Macro concepts using up to 25 numbers. Indirect can also create a Label name out of a combination of character strings and/or numbers. Indirect can be used in most places where you can use a label.


In-Place Activation

WordPerfect now uses the new In-Place Activation feature to help further integrate 3rd Party applications into WordPerfect Office 2000. By double-clicking on an OLE object, the editing or development environment native to that object is initiated inside WordPerfect, providing seamless integration of 3rd Party applications.


In-Place Editing

In-Place Editing lets you edit an object without switching to a different window. Buttons and list boxes temporarily change to work specifically with that object.


Install-As-You-Go

Install-As-You-Go helps you minimize the hard disk space required by WordPerfect Office applications by including only the bare necessities. If a non-installed item is selected, you will be asked if you want to install it.


J


K


Kerning

Kerning reduces the spacing between two consecutive characters. With certain letter pairs, such as "AV", moving the letters closer together improves their appearance when printed. WordPerfect provides both automatic and manual kerning.


L


Language

Some languages are not supported by WordPerfect and will become "unknown" language commands.


Leading

Leading is the amount of white space that appears between lines.


Levels 1-8

WordPerfect converts Level 9 to Level 8.


Line height

The distance between the top of one line of text and the top of the next line of text. Line height is set according to the font being used.


Line spacing

Line spacing works differently in WordPerfect than it does in Microsoft Word. This may cause a larger spread between paragraphs where a font size change takes place.


Link

A connection between a source application and your document. When you change the information in the source application, the linked information updates automatically in your document.


List

A list is any combination of cell references, range references, numbers, formulas, functions, or logical statements with list items separated by commas. A list can also be empty. For example, the following functions contain lists.

AVE(a1,b2,c3,d4,e5)

MAX(a1,interest,SUM(a3:b5),PI( ))

Unless otherwise noted, a list will use only references to cells or ranges that contain numbers. If the address of a range of cells is included in the list, empty cells or cells that contain text in the range are ignored.

The order of items in a list is meaningful only in the CONCAT, IRR, NPV, QUOTIENT, and SUBTRACT functions.


Lists

Microsoft Word has many table of figures options. WordPerfect only converts text that is in the TC field command.


Local

The Local command creates local variables and arrays (they pertain only to the current macro).


Logical page

A defined area inside a physical page (the sheet of paper you print on). You can have several logical pages on one physical page. For instance, if you are printing labels, the sheet or roll of labels is called the physical page; each individual label is called a logical page.


Loops

Loops statements play a statement or statement block a specified number of times until an expression is true or while an expression is true. The macro then exits the loop and continues to the next statement. Loop statements include For, ForNext, ForEach, Repeat, and While.


M


Macros

A macro is a routine, which is often activated by a key, symbol, or name, that represents a list of commands, actions, or keystrokes. Many programs allow you to create macros so that you can enter a single character or word to perform a whole series of actions.


Macro Command Browser

The Macro Command Browser allows you to select and insert macro commands into the macro you are writing.


Main word list

A large list of specialized words used by Spell Checker for a particular language, profession, or company.


Master document


Menus

The menus in WordPerfect have undergone significant restructuring to improve access to the most frequently used features. The menus are also standardized across WordPerfect Office applications to make learning each application easier. Right-click the menu to select a menu similar to one you used in a previous version of WordPerfect.

•	The Tables and Graphics menus are not available any more; the editing features for tables and graphics are now available on the Property Bar. Click a table or graphic to display the Tables or Graphics Property Bar.

•	The File, Publish As and File, Send menus are consolidated as File, Send To.

•	The Outline and Bullets & Numbering features are consolidated in Insert, Outline/Bullets & Numbering.

•	The abbreviations feature is renamed QuickWords and is moved to Tools, QuickWords.

•	Help Online, which was used to access additional technical and product information, is renamed Corel Web site.

•	Initial Document Style is renamed and is moved to File, Document, Current Document Style.

•	Initial Document Font is renamed and is moved to File, Document, Default Font.


Merge codes

Merge codes or merge commands are similar to programming commands. Merge codes are inserted into a form document or data text file and are recognized by WordPerfect as instructions on how to perform the merge or where to place the information from the data source.


Merge data file

A WordPerfect data file supplies information to the form document during a merge. You can arrange the information in either a text or table format. (In previous versions of WordPerfect, a data file was known as a secondary merge file.)


Multiple

The At Least feature is converted to a percentage of the line height. Some differences may occur. Varying the font size in a line that has the At Least line spacing set will cause a new line spacing command to be generated to guarantee the correct percentage when the line ends.


N


Native files

Native files are files that were created in the application you are currently using.


New Bottom Margin

WordPerfect positions footers from Microsoft Word at the Bottom Margin. This causes the last line of text to start at a position that is not the specified Bottom Margin.


Network path

The path for a file includes a drive letter and usually at least one folder. For example, in C:\WORK\LETTERS\JONES.WPD, the path for the file named JONES.WPD is C:\WORK\LETTERS. C: is the drive letter, and the WORK folder contains the LETTERS subfolder which contains the file named JONES.WPD.

A network path includes the server and volume name followed by a folder and subfolder or file. The Look In box on file management dialog boxes displays the volume name followed by the server name and the drive it is mapped to; for example, Users on 'Corp' (O:).


Newspaper-style columns

Columns in which text-wrap causes text to flow downward from paragraph to paragraph in the first left-hand column. The text flow continues at the top of the next column to the right and repeats with subsequent text.


New Top Margin

WordPerfect positions headers from Microsoft Word at the Top Margin. This causes the first line of text to start at a position that is different from the specified Top Margin.


.NLI

Ask the PerfectExpert help files. Allows you to search for help information using your own words.


Normal

Displays the file content, format, and attributes as accurately as possible, including multiple fonts and graphics images.


O


Object

In object-oriented programming, an object is a data item with instructions for the operations to be performed on it.


Object Oriented Programming

A style of programming that places emphasis on creating and using objects.


OLE

Object Linking and Embedding lets you combine information created in different Windows applications in one document. You can include text, charts, graphics, spreadsheets, sound clips, or video clips in your WordPerfect documents.

The information (or object) can be linked so that information in your document updates when the source file changes, or it can be embedded or inserted as a one-time copy.

WordPerfect also supports OLE Automation.


OLE Automation server

The Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) architecture is based on a model of client-server (also known as container-component or controller-component) associations. This model is based on the interaction between two applications in which one application (the client or container) makes requests to the other (the server or client) to perform an action. With OLE Automation, the application acting as the server exposes one or more automation components which allow other applications (controller or client) to manipulate them.


OLE Object Command

Commands for OLE objects are called methods, and they perform tasks on an OLE object in a specific OLE Automation server. A method is a command or function that performs an action on that object.


Ordinals

Ordinals are numbers used to define position in an ordered series. For example, first, second, third, etc.


P


Page view

Displays a file as it will look on a printed page. The text is generally too small to read, but you will be able to see the page layout.


Pane

A window can be divided into two or more parts. These parts are called panes. To see an example of panes, you can run the Windows Explorer. To switch between panes without using the mouse, you can press F6 or SHIFT + F6.

In WordPerfect, panes are used in the WP 5.1-7 Equation Editor, and used when displaying some Property Bars such as the List Property Bar.


Parameters

Provide more information about the command, such as which options of a feature are active. Parameters are always enclosed in parentheses; for example, Backup (State:On!).


Pattern

The patterns in Microsoft Word and WordPerfect are not the same. The patterns in Microsoft Word are converted to a WordPerfect pattern that is similar in style and appearance.


PerfectExpert

WordPerfect comes with its own built-in expert, which is ready to help you with any task. The PerfectExpert includes the best features of Quick Tasks, templates, and Coaches, combined with information from online Help and the power of a natural language interface to help you with everyday tasks. The PerfectExpert lets you quickly create complex documents using professionally designed templates.


Persist

The Persist command creates variables and arrays that pertain to any PerfectScript macro as long as PerfectScript is running Special variables.


Physical page

The sheet of paper on which you print. The term physical page is used to distinguish between the paper on a page and the actual printing area. The physical page can be divided into several logical pages. For instance, if you are printing labels, the sheet or roll of labels is called the physical page; each individual label is called a logical page.


Pixel

Abbreviation for picture element. Pixels are dots on a computer or television screen that combine to form an image. Computer images are created as an array of such dots, each having a specific color.

See also Resolution.


Polygon

A shape with three or more sides. Polygons can be simple (such as a triangle or a pentagon) or complex (such as a star shape).


Polyline

A continuous line composed of one or more line segments.


PostScript

A page-description language used to send instructions to a PostScript printer. All the objects in a print job are represented by lines of PostScript code that the printer uses to reproduce your work.


Print

Lets you print all or part of a document.


Printer metrics

Printer metrics use printer resolution information to determine line endings.


Printing Offset

WordPerfect calculates the difference between the Microsoft Word Mirror Margins; the Printing Offset creates new left and right margin commands.


Print Preview

Although WordPerfect creates documents in a WYSIWYG environment, many users have requested a Print Preview option. WordPerfect lets you view your document as a single page or double pages. Print Preview is fully compatible with Corel RealTime Preview, which lets you experiment with formatting options, such as fonts, lines, tables, borders, and shading, without applying them to your document. Print Preview is also fully editable; therefore, you do not have to switch back to regular view to make changes to your document.


Product commands

Product commands perform product tasks in a specific application. Product commands that report information (return a value) about the state of an application or feature are sometimes called system variables.


Programming commands

Programming commands work across applications. They generally control macro functions. They can specify conditions under which other macro commands or statements will operate (Case, If Else Endif, Switch EndSwitch). They can also repeat macro commands or statements a specified number of times or until certain conditions are met (For Endfor, Repeat Until, While EndWhile). They can also invoke or jump to a specified subroutine (statement block) with Call or Go.


Project

Projects are the pre-existing templates included with WordPerfect.


Project categories

Project categories are groups of templates and projects that allow you to store your templates and projects together under a common name.


Project template

A project template is a shell that consists of such elements as chapters, styles, margin definitions, and graphic objects. This shell provides the layout for your publication and you provide the content. You can create your own project templates, or you can use the project templates that were shipped with WordPerfect.


Prompts

Prompts bring up a Template information dialog box that requests information from the user.


Properties

Properties control the appearance and behavior of an object.


Q


QuickFinder

You can use the Find button on file management dialog boxes to find files that meet the criteria you specify. For example, you can search for a file type (such as *.wpd) or the file content (such as "WordPerfect").


QuickFonts

Changes the current font to recently used font setting for such things as typeface, size, and appearance attributes like bold and italics.


QuickMacro

QuickMacros are macros that you cannot save or use again; you do not assign a name to a QuickMacro.


QuickMark

A QuickMark is a bookmark that determines where the insertion point appears when you open a document or after WordPerfect fills the template prompts. You can place QuickMarks in templates and documents.


QuickMenu

A QuickMenu is a useful pop-up menu that provides options specific to a certain object in the document or document window. Right-click an object, such as a paragraph, graphic, or toolbar, to display the QuickMenu for that particular object.


QuickSpots

QuickSpots provided direct access to editing features for certain objects in a document, such as paragraphs or tables. WordPerfect improves on this idea by including more than 20 different Property Bars that appear when you click on a particular object. Property Bars change to fit your immediate needs. For example, click a table, and the Property Bar displays buttons for table editing tools. Click a graphic, and the Property Bar displays graphics editing tools.


QuickStyle

A shortcut method used to create a new style based on the format of text at the insertion point.


QuickTips

QuickTips provide information about icons and buttons on the toolbars, and about the menu commands. QuickTips display in a balloon when you point to a button or a menu command.


QuickWords

QuickWords are abbreviations that automatically expand when you press the ENTER key, the TAB key, or the SPACEBAR key and insert text or formatting elements, such as columns, borders, graphic boxes, or various font attributes. You can use as many as two words in your abbreviation.


R


RGB

A color mode that contains three components: red (R), green (G), and blue (B). The RGB color mode is based on the RGB color model. In the RGB color mode, a value between 0 and 255 is assigned to each channel of red, green, and blue. An RGB color with the component values 0:25:118, for example, contains no red, some green, and more blue, and results in a slightly greenish blue. Monitors, scanners, and the human eye use RGB to produce or detect color.


Range

A range is a rectangular group of cells. In a spreadsheet or table, a range is defined by an upper left cell and a lower right cell. A colon or period is used to separate the two cell addresses. For example, a range can be defined as A1:C5 or A1.C5.


Record

A record is a series of relevant fields of information stored in a data source. A record can contain one field or many. (It is recommended that you use no more than 512 fields per record.) In a text file, each record is separated by an ENDRECORD marker. In a table file, each record is a row. In the CorelCENTRAL Address Book, a record (or an entry) is a row of information.


Recorded macro

A recorded macro includes only product commands. Some macro commands are not recordable and need to be typed in or inserted using the Macro Command Browser. When you play a recorded macro, each action is played in recorded order.


Rectangular block

A selection of text in columns that can be separated by spaces or tabs.


Resolution

Printer resolution, or clarity, is measured in Dots Per Inch (dpi).

See also Dots Per Inch (DPI).


Reveal codes

Reveal codes are hidden codes that track formatting functions and functions, such as TAB and ENTER, used in WordPerfect documents. Codes can be viewed, deleted, moved, and edited in a Reveal Codes window, which you can keep displayed.


S


Scalable

A scalable font is a font size that can be changed to a size you want. All True Type and PostScript fonts are scalable. When you select a font that is not scalable, WordPerfect automatically substitutes the font size closest to the one you've chosen.


Scrap file

A scrap file is created when you drag part of a document to the desktop.


Section Start Continuous

WordPerfect does not have sections like Microsoft Word. When you convert a Microsoft Word file to a WordPerfect file, WordPerfect converts section breaks to equivalent breaks in WordPerfect. For example, New Page in Microsoft Word becomes a Page Break in WordPerfect.


Separators

Separators mark the parameters in a command. Semicolons separate individual parameters; parentheses enclose a series of parameters; and braces enclose a series of repeating parameters.


SGML Editor

WordPerfect lets you create SGML documents in a familiar WordPerfect environment. WordPerfect lets you edit, markup text, and validate tags in SGML documents. You can also employ WordPerfect writing tools, such as Spell Check and QuickCorrect. You can hide SGML codes in the document window and use WordPerfect text formatting to make SGML documents easier to read on screen. The SGML editor also provides the following capabilities:

•	structures views of the document, providing a WYSIWYG view on one side of the screen and a tree view on the other

•	enhanced graphics that let you import and export markups with the SGML document

•	writing tools

•	compare features

•	automatic mapping for International Standards Organization (ISO) characters during the DTD compiling process to map multinational characters to the appropriate characters in the SGML Editor. Manual character mapping does not fall within the ISO character sets.

•	enhanced importing and exporting capabilities


Shadow cursor

The Shadow cursor is a thin gray line that appears beside your cursor. As you work in a document, the insertion point changes to a "Shadow cursor" when you point to text or to white space. This cursor shows where the insertion point will go when you click the mouse. When the Shadow cursor appears in the white space of your document, you can click anywhere to start typing text. You can also drag to insert clipart, a text box, or a table.


Shapes

WordPerfect converts all Drawing Objects to equivalent Shapes, except Braced Brackets.


Shortcut

A shortcut is a method of reaching a file quickly. For instance, you can create a shortcut on your desktop to a frequently used file.


Single Underline

In WordPerfect, the foreground color to highlight pen is double-underlined.


Skewed table cells

You can skew the top row or the left or right column of a table. Unless you specify otherwise, any text that you type in a skewed cell will be skewed as well. You can also change the angle of the skew and specify other skew options.


Small caps

WordPerfect does not support the All caps attribute.


Solid fills

A solid fill is an uniform fill. For example, black, white, or a shade of gray, or a pattern that is consistent throughout the fill.


Source application

The application in which an embedded or linked object was created.


Special character

WordPerfect converts special characters to equivalent symbols.


SpeedLinks

SpeedLinks lets you create Internet links [image] highlighted text in a World Wide Web document that helps you jump to another part of the same document or to another document on the World Wide Web. When you type text that begins with "www," "ftp," "http," or "mailto," SpeedLinks automatically converts the text to an Internet link.


Styles

WordPerfect does not support the Enter Key Inserts Style. ENTER inserts the same style.


Subdocument

A subdocument is an individual file that can be linked to a master document.


Subroutine

A subroutine is a series of instructions that can be referenced and repeated when necessary.


Subscript

Subscript is text that sits below the invisible horizontal line, known as the baseline. Subscript text uses a small font.


Superscript

Superscript text sits above the invisible horizontal line, known as the baseline, and uses a small font.


Symbols

WordPerfect converts a check box to a box character and a checked box to a filled-in box character. WordPerfect does not convert any other Form Fields.


Symbols

Microsoft Word symbols that do not have an equivalent symbol in WordPerfect are automatically converted to a font change and the WordPerfect character that has the character set of 12.


System variables

System variables contain current system information such as the current chart type or the default directory. In WordPerfect, system variables begin with a question mark. For example, vMacroPath := ?PathMacros assigns the path and name of the default WordPerfect macros directory to a variable named vMacroPath.


T


Tab definition

If a tab definition has more than one type of leader character, the leader characters of the right-most tab will be used as the leader character for the previous tabs.

If there is a space for Microsoft Word default tab sets between the last defined tab stop and the right margin, they will also be defined in the tab definition.


Table of authorities

Microsoft Word has many table of authorities (TA) options. WordPerfect only converts text that is in the TA field command. WordPerfect converts the table of authorities with the page numbers right justified with dot leaders.


Tabular column

A vertical section of text that is aligned using a tab or an indent. The text aligns at the tab stop for each column.


Template

A template is a shell that consists of elements such as chapters, styles, margin definitions, and graphic objects. This shell provides the layout for your publication and you provide the content. The templates in WordPerfect are known as project templates.


TextArt

TextArt lets you transform words into designs. You can use multiple lines of text and rotation operations to create interesting logos, decorations, or signs. The TextArt Gallery lets you use either 2D TextArt styles or 3D TextArt styles.


Text After

The Outline Definition cannot contain certain characters in Text Before or Text After. The characters (A, a, I, I, X, x, l) are not allowed. WordPerfect places the font and font size commands before and after the Display Paragraph Number commands to imitate the display in Microsoft Word.


Text Before

The Outline Definition cannot contain certain characters in Text Before or Text After. The characters (A, a, I, I, X, x, l) are not allowed. WordPerfect places the font and font size commands before and after the Display Paragraph Number commands to imitate the display in Microsoft Word.


Text styles

Styles are design elements that can be applied to text. Formatting features, such as font, bold, italics, for example, can be saved in a style to reuse as many times as you want. You can combine different formatting features that come with WordPerfect to create your own text style.


Text wrapping

The text that wraps around the box is normally converted to wrap around the larger side. When a box is positioned in the center of a column and there is sufficient room between the box and both margins, the wrapping may be set to both sides. This works similarly in Microsoft Word.


Thumbnail format

Thumbnail format lets you print miniature pictures of the individual pages of your document on one piece of paper. You can print up to sixty-four pictures on one page. You can specify how thumbnail pages are printed on the page: left to right (Across) or top to bottom (Down).


Time

WordPerfect converts Microsoft Word time formats to equivalent WordPerfect time formats.


Tokens

A token is a single element of a programming language. A token can be a keyword, a punctuation mark, or an operator.


Trellix 2 Integration

Trellix 2 Integration lets you create and organize professional, effective documents that can be published to HTML. Trellix can make long, complicated documents easy to understand and navigate; the integrated navigation map lets you visualize and access any part of your document quickly. Trellix documents resemble web pages, with easy-to-create links, and you can add spreadsheets, graphics, and other files.


Triggers

Triggers are commands that you can insert in documents that will automatically run macros.


TrueType fonts

Fonts that print as vectors or bitmaps depending on the capabilities of your printer. TrueType fonts print as they appear on screen and can be resized to any height.


U


Uniform Naming Convention (UNC)

Also known as the Universal Naming Convention. UNC is a system of specifying the location of PC resources on a network. The name of the server is followed by the name of shared directories. For example, to access the file text.htm in the blue directory on the server, sky, you can use the path \\sky\blue\text.htm. See also "URL."


User word list

A list of words and phrases that Spell Checker and Grammatik use when checking for errors. You can add words to the user word list so that these writing tools will skip, replace, or display alternatives for them. For example, you can specify replacements for words you often mistype or misspell. Also, you can add words (such as your name) that you don't want Spell Checker or Grammatik to flag as incorrect. The user word list complements the main word list.


URL (Uniform Resource Locator)

The global address of documents and other resources on the Internet. Web browsers use a URL to display resources.

A URL identifies the protocol used to access the resource (for example, http or ftp) and the name of the server on which the resource resides (for example, http://www.corel.com). It may also specify the path to a resource, such as a file.


.UWL

User word list. Contains the list for Spell Checker to use, such as English US, English UK, or medical terms.


V


Value

A value can be a number, a text string, NA (an empty cell), or anything that returns a number, text string, or NA. All text strings must be enclosed in single or double quotation marks. Below are a few examples of values:

A3	"Payment"
25	'Total Costs'
interest	SIN(SUM(a3:b5))
customer	CONCAT("Value", " ", "1")
In the above examples, "Payment" and 'Total Costs' are text strings; interest and customer are names for cells or ranges. Most functions assign a value of 0 to an empty or blank cell.


Variable

Variables allow you to write flexible programs and macros. You can use variables to represent data instead of entering data directly into a macro. When you execute a macro, the variables are replaced with real data, which allows the same macro to process different sets of data. A variable must have a name, known as the variable name, and a data type. A variable's data type indicates whether a variable is a character or text, an integer, or a floating-point number.


View As

Lists alternate file formats for viewing files, such as the file's native format, Hex, or ANSI.


Visual Basic for Applications integration

Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) lets you develop VBA applications to control WordPerfect through the OLE Automation Type Library. The main object exposed by WordPerfect is the PerfectScript object, which consists of all the functions currently available in the PerfectScript language, making it easier for those familiar with PerfectScript to modify existing scripts and to understand the syntax and parameters required to program the PerfectScript object's methods. These VBA projects are stored within the application document and are easily distributed.


W


Watermark

A watermark is usually a faint picture on paper that looks as if it is a part of the background and is often used in letterhead or on official documents.


.WCM

WordPerfect macro files.


.WPD

WordPerfect document files.


.WPG

WordPerfect graphics files.


.WPT

WordPerfect template files. A template is a document file with customized format, content, and features.


Wildcards

Wildcards are symbols you can use to replace parts of a filename that you are searching for. You can also use wildcards to find files with similar filenames. Wildcards allow you to search for a file when you know only part of the filename.


Windows Metafile (WMF)

The Windows Metafile (.wmf) file format, developed by Microsoft Corporation, can contain vectors and bitmaps. It is supported by Windows and several Windows-based graphics applications up to a 24-bit color depth.


Word and Letter Spacing

Small differences may occur in font spacing because the character spacing in Microsoft Word is in point units and the Word and Letter Spacing in WordPerfect is a percentage of the font size.


WYSIWYG

What you see is what you get.


X


XML Capabilities

XML (eXtensible Markup Language) provides a platform and application-independent environment for defining document architecture and document markup. WordPerfect lets you create, validate, and save XML documents in a familiar WYSIWYG environment. A structured tree view, shown in a separate window, provides an easy-to-read layout of the full document. WordPerfect automatically inserts and maintains tag pairs to create XML files. WordPerfect provides an editing environment that includes wizards, automatic element insertion, and automatic generation of documents, which makes document creation quick and easy. You can customize menus, toolbars, and keyboard mapping to create your own working environment. WordPerfect incorporates the Document Type Definition (DTD), layout information, and mapping files into a single WordPerfect template.

For more information about XML, see the WordPerfect online Help.


Y


Z


Bullets, outlines, and numbering

Microsoft Word and WordPerfect have different bullet types. Bullets export as round bullets. Microsoft Word has a feature called Number Position, accessed from Format, Bullets and Numbering, Outline Numbered, Customize, Number Position. This feature sets number alignment (right, left, or center) in numbered lists. This feature is not available in WordPerfect.


Character spacing

Character spacing in Microsoft Word is almost the same as character spacing in WordPerfect. Microsoft Word does not support

•	word spacing

•	word spacing justification limits

•	kerning


Colors

WordPerfect does not have an automatic color like Microsoft Word does. WordPerfect supports full RGB colors; Microsoft Word offers 16 colors. WordPerfect uses a color distance formula to map from its colors to the 16 colors available in Microsoft Word. Any color with high RGB is mapped to white.


Comments

Microsoft Word does not support comments in headers or footers, footnotes or endnotes, or subdocuments. It supports comments in the main document only.


Cross-references

WordPerfect and Microsoft Word handle cross-references differently. WordPerfect defines multiple tags as targets, then generates the cross-reference, which has references to all the targets. Microsoft Word requires numbered lists, bookmarks, footnotes, etc. Bookmark names cannot be duplicated.

There are two conversion options:

•	Create a tag for each bookmark, then tell Microsoft Word to generate the cross-reference for each bookmark.

This option can be used only for tags defined before the cross-reference command in WordPerfect. Forward references are not supported.

•	Convert the generated cross-references to plain text.

WordPerfect uses this option.


Fields

Microsoft Word does not support the following date and time field options:

•	capitalized weekday

•	capitalized weekday abbreviation

•	capitalized month

•	capitalized month abbreviation

•	roman numbers for year

•	lead space

•	zero for months/days/hours/minutes/seconds

•	"p" and "P" abbreviation for PM, "a" and "A" abbreviation for AM


Footnotes and endnotes

Microsoft Word does not allow two different sections to display footnotes on the same page. Microsoft Word breaks the page at the second section; however, it does not insert a hard page break. This is Microsoft Word formatter behavior. When you import, WordPerfect cannot duplicate this behavior because there is no way to know whether two sections have footnotes on the same page.


Footnotes and endnotes

Footnote and endnote line separator properties cannot be changed in Microsoft Word. In WordPerfect, you can set the space before or after the separator, the length of the separator, and the position of the separator. Microsoft Word always shows the separator line, and the style of the separator line cannot be changed.

Unlike Microsoft Word, WordPerfect has spacing between footnotes and endnotes. However, WordPerfect conversion does not let you manually set numbers for footnotes and endnotes; it supports only automatically running numbers. In Microsoft Word, the footnote numbers must be sequential. The only way to export manual numbering from WordPerfect to Microsoft Word is to set manual numbering from the beginning. For example, if the first five footnotes are automatically numbered and the rest of the numbers are manually numbered, they will not export correctly.

Microsoft Word does not allow two different sections to display footnotes on the same page. Microsoft Word breaks the page at the second section; however, it does not insert a hard page break. This is Microsoft Word formatter behavior. When you export, you must break sections when you change margins, disable columns, and alter headers and footers.


Gutter binding

You can change the gutter binding only once at the beginning of a document. Multiple changes to the gutter binding are not supported.


Index, table of contents, and table of authorities

Microsoft Word provides different ways to generate indexes, tables of contents, and tables of authorities. WordPerfect does not support many of these features, so when one of these tables is regenerated in WordPerfect, the formatting may change.


Index

WordPerfect supports the following page number positions for indexes: Text[SPACE]#, Text[TAB]#, and Text[COMMASPACE]#. All other positions are converted to the Microsoft Word default Text[DOTTEDTAB]#.

WordPerfect does not convert page number format because Microsoft Word does not support page number format for indexes. WordPerfect does not convert Use-dash-to-show-consecutive-pages features because they are not available in Microsoft Word. Concordance files are not converted because concordance files work differently in Microsoft Word.


Justification

Microsoft Word does not support or directly export flush right and flush center justification between margins. In WordPerfect, these features let you start with left-justified text, then change the formatting to center- or right-justified text. WordPerfect exports the flush right and the flush center features by using a right or center tab set and exporting the tab. To achieve complete conversion, WordPerfect clears the tab set and provides a tab set with only a right or center tab. These features are used in tables of contents, tables of authorities, and indexes.


Language identification

Language identification is the same in Microsoft Word and WordPerfect. If a language match is not available in WordPerfect, WordPerfect converts the language to English or tries to get the closest match.


Line numbering

Line numbering is almost the same in Microsoft Word and WordPerfect, with one exception. Microsoft Word does not support the starting line number; therefore, even if you change the line numbering format, the starting line number does not change. The previous last number is taken into consideration for the next number.


Lists

WordPerfect supports the following page number positions in lists: No Numbering, Text[SPACE]#, and Text[TAB]#). All other positions are converted to the Microsoft Word default Text[DOTTEDTAB]#, except for the Text[DOTTEDTAB]#, which is converted to Text[TAB]#. WordPerfect does not convert page number formats because Microsoft Word does not support such formats for lists. List box captions are not exported to Microsoft Word.


Outlines

Outline definitions created in Microsoft Word 95 may not be converted correctly if the numbers are too large. Microsoft Word has a setting that tells you if a tab follows the number. This works correctly in WordPerfect unless the number is larger than the space between the margin and the left indent. If the file was originally a Microsoft Word 6 document, outline definitions function differently: no tab is generated by Microsoft Word.


Pictures

You can convert pictures from a WordPerfect document to a Microsoft Word document. Certain features, such as wrapping the picture in a frame and various text wrapping features, are not supported. The wrapping that is supported is the same as it is for textboxes. For advanced wrapping, Microsoft Word uses office shapes, which WordPerfect does not export.


RTF font sizes

WordPerfect exports fractional point sizes for fonts, such as 14.2. For Rich Text Format, WordPerfect exports only point sizes in increments of 0.5. WordPerfect rounds off point sizes to the nearest 0.5 point. Rounding off also affects text that is relatively sized, such as fine or large text, because the font size is scaled during export.


RTF styles

When you import a Rich Text Format file, WordPerfect creates 27 outline styles and nine outline levels. For each outline level, Wordperfec creates tab after number, space after number, and nothing after number (level_1.....level_9, levsl_1.....level_9, and levnl_1.....level_9).


Sort key

A sort key is a rule which defines how information is sorted.


Sort operator

A sort operator is a symbol that instructs the soft to perform an action on an expression.


Styles

Microsoft Word Styles convert to the appropriate WordPerfect Style. In general, converting Styles works well; however, when Microsoft Word Styles interact with direct commands in WordPerfect, the formatting may not be exactly the same as it was in the original document. Style names are truncated to 12 characters, ensuring that the generated style names are unique.


Subdocuments

WordPerfect uses the INCLUDE field to export subdocuments to Microsoft Word. Reimporting a subdocument converts it again to a subdocument. WordPerfect converts expanded and collapsed subdocuments without any loss of information.


Table of authorities

WordPerfect does not convert page number positions and page number formats for table of authorities. You can use the dash to show consecutive pages.


Table of contents

Microsoft Word has many table of contents (TC) options. WordPerfect converts only text that is in the TC field command or in styles Heading 1 through Heading 9. WordPerfect provides only five levels in the table of contents. As a result, levels 6 through 9 automatically become a level 5 entry. When users convert a file, WordPerfect uses default style settings to create a table of contents.

WordPerfect places text in the TC field command in hidden text with the Mark for table of contents commands around it. Because the text is hidden, you must display hidden text before you generate a new table of contents. If you do not display the hidden text when generating a new table of contents, these entries are not placed in the table of contents.


Table of contents

The page number position in tables of contents is not converted in Microsoft Word. WordPerfect lets you specify page number positions for each level. Microsoft Word lets you specify one definition for the entire table of contents.


Tables

WordPerfect lets you set left and right margins in columns. Microsoft Word deals with this as spacing between columns that is the same for every row. You can convert left and right margins by taking the minimum of all the margins in the row and exporting the minimum as the spacing.

Shading and fills in tables are exported. You can export WordPerfect patterns to Microsoft Word patterns. All patterns that don't map are exported as the Trellis pattern. The foreground and background colors have the same limitations as the other colors (mapping from RGB to the 16 color table of Microsoft Word). If the converted foreground and background colors are the same and the original (WordPerfect) foreground and background colors are not, WordPerfect exports the background color as Automatic. If WordPerfect finds a table whose columns do not fit in the page margins, the formatter adjusts the table. However, the original column widths are exported. In Microsoft Word, the tables reach beyond the page margins.


Tabs and indents

Microsoft Word has first line indents and paragraph indents. WordPerfect lets you add an indent anywhere in a paragraph. Lines following that indent are indented.

If you specify a first line indent, and then apply a few indents before typing text, WordPerfect makes the first line indent equal 0 and indents the paragraph.

The left and right margin adjustments in WordPerfect are translated to indents in Microsoft Word during import and export.


Text boxes

WordPerfect converts text boxes to frames in Microsoft Word. Microsoft Word frames support most of the functionality of text boxes, but only two types of text wrapping. The following information is lost or may convert incorrectly when you convert Microsoft Word text boxes:

•	some text wrapping information

•	properties, such as Box Stays On Page and Vertical Positioning Of Text

•	nested text boxes

•	linked text boxes


Text rotation

WordPerfect supports 180 degree rotation, which is not supported in Microsoft Word.


Underline

WordPerfect supports underlining formats, such as wave, double, and line dash dot, and underlining colors. Unlike in WordPerfect, in Microsoft Word, the color of the underline and the color of the text are the same.

The following types of underlining formats are not supported in Microsoft Word:

•	text and spaces

•	text only

•	text and tabs


Working with hyperlinks

Hyperlinks allow you to cross-reference an online document dynamically. If you want to cross-reference a section within an active document, you can add a hyperlink so that users can jump automatically to that section rather than scroll to it.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	creating hyperlinks

•	using hyperlinks

•	editing hyperlinks

•	using SpeedLink


Creating hyperlinks

WordPerfect lets you create hyperlinks. Hyperlinks can be created that allow readers to jump to a file or to a bookmark within the same document.

If you are publishing to HTML, WordPerfect lets you create a hyperlink that opens in a separate frame.

 How to


To create a hyperlink to a file

1	Select text or a graphic.

2	Click Tools [image] Hyperlink.

3	Type a path and filename in the Document/Macro box.

 Note

•	You can use a macro file as a hyperlink. However, because browsers usually cannot play WordPerfect macros, hyperlinks to macros are not recommended in documents that will be published to the Web.

 Tips

•	You can also create a hyperlink to a Web address by typing a URL in the Document/macro box. If you want to browse for the URL, click Browse Web.

•	You can browse for a file by clicking Browse in the Document/Macro box.

 Related topics


To create a hyperlink to a bookmark

1	Select text or a graphic.

2	Click Tools [image] Hyperlink.

3	Choose a bookmark from the Bookmark list box.

 Note

•	For more information about using bookmarks, see "Using bookmarks and QuickMarks."

 Related topics


To create a hyperlink that opens in a separate frame

1	Select text or a graphic.

2	Click Tools [image] Hyperlink.

3	Type a path and filename in the Document/Macro box.

If you want to link to a bookmark, choose a bookmark from the Bookmark list box.

4	Type the name of the frame in the Target frame box.

 Note

•	You can use a macro file as a hyperlink. However, because browsers usually cannot play WordPerfect macros, hyperlinks to macros are not recommended in documents that will be published to the Web.

 Tips

•	You can also create a hyperlink to a Web address by typing a URL in the Document/macro box. If you want to browse for the URL, click Browse Web.

•	You can browse for a file by clicking Browse in the Document/macro box.

 Related topics


Using hyperlinks

Hyperlinks let you dynamically cross-reference information within a document and between documents. WordPerfect allows you to activate hyperlinks within a document so that you can jump from one location to another. You can also navigate between hyperlinks to find the link you need.

You can change and reset the color of hypertext in a WordPerfect document.

You can also change other attributes of the hypertext style. For more information about text styles, see "Applying and editing text styles."

 How to


To activate hyperlinks in a document

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Environment.

3	In the Environment settings dialog box, click the General tab.

4	Enable the Activate hyperlinks check box.

 Tip

•	You can deactivate hyperlinks in a document by disabling the Active hyperlinks check box.

 Related topics


To jump to a hyperlink

•	Click the text or graphic specified as the link.

 Related topics


To navigate between hyperlinks

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Environment.

3	In the Environment settings dialog box, click the General tab.

4	Disable the Activate hyperlinks check box.

5	Click OK.

6	Click a hyperlink.

7	Click any of the following buttons on the property bar:

•	Hyperlink previous [image] moves the cursor to the previous hyperlink

•	Hyperlink next [image] moves the cursor to the next hyperlink

 Tip

•	If you want to navigate between hyperlinks, you can also right-click a toolbar, click Hyperlink tools, and click the Hyperlink previous or Hyperlink next button on the property bar. For information about using toolbars, see "Customizing toolbars."

 Related topics


To change the color of hypertext

1	Click Format [image] Styles.

2	Choose Hypertext from the Available styles list.

For the Hypertext option to display, the document must contain a hypertext link.

3	Click Edit.

4	In the Styles editor dialog box, click in the Color code in the Contents box.

5	Click Format [image] Font.

6	In the Font properties dialog box, open the Color picker, and click a color.

7	Click OK.

8	Click OK in the Styles editor dialog box.

9	Click Close in the Styles dialog box.

 Note

•	For information about working with text, see "Modifying font settings."

 Related topics


To reset hypertext color to the default settings

1	Click Format [image] Styles.

2	Choose Hypertext from the Available styles list.

For the Hypertext option to display, the document must contain a hypertext link.

3	Click Options [image] Reset.

 Notes

•	All hypertext in a document has the same style.

•	Changing the hypertext style does not affect the appearance of hypertext buttons.

 Related topics


Editing hyperlinks

When a URL, a bookmark, or the name of a document has changed, you can edit the hyperlink destination. You can also edit the text used for a hyperlink and delete a hyperlink.

 How to


To edit a hyperlink

1	Right-click a link.

2	Click Edit hyperlink.

3	Edit the URL or path and filename in the Document/Macro box.

 Related topics


To edit hyperlink text

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Environment.

3	In the Environment settings dialog box, click the General tab.

4	Disable the Activate hyperlinks check box.

5	Click OK.

6	Edit a hyperlink.

 Note

•	When you edit a hyperlink, you deactivate all hyperlinks in a document. For information on activating hyperlinks in a document, see "To activate hyperlinks in a document."

 Related topics


To delete a hyperlink

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Environment.

3	In the Environment settings dialog box, click the General tab.

4	Disable the Activate hyperlinks check box.

5	Click OK.

6	In the Settings dialog box, click Close.

7	Select the button, graphic, or underlined hypertext you want to delete.

8	Press Delete.

 Notes

•	When you delete a hyperlink, you deactivate all hyperlinks in a document. For information on activating hyperlinks in a document, see "To activate hyperlinks in a document."

•	Deleting a hyperlink deletes the associated text or graphic.

 Related topics


Using SpeedLink

You can use SpeedLink to automatically create hyperlinks in a document, as long as SpeedLink and hyperlinks are activated. When you type text that begins with "www," "ftp," "http," or "mailto," WordPerfect marks that text as hypertext. You can also disable SpeedLink. For information about activating hyperlinks, see "Using hyperlinks."

WordPerfect contains predefined SpeedLink shortcuts. When you type the shortcut in a document, WordPerfect automatically creates a hyperlink. You can also create, edit, and delete SpeedLink entries.

 How to


To activate SpeedLink

1	Click Tools [image] QuickCorrect.

2	Click the SpeedLinks tab.

3	Enable the Format words as hyperlinks when you type them check box.

 Related topics


To disable SpeedLink

1	Click Tools [image] QuickCorrect.

2	Click the SpeedLinks tab.

3	Disable the Format words as hyperlinks when you type them check box.

 Related topics


To automatically create links in a document

•	Type text that begins with "www", "ftp", "http", or "mailto."

WordPerfect marks the SpeedLink text in blue and underlines it.

 Note

•	You must activate SpeedLink before you automatically create links in a document. For information on activating SpeedLink, see To activate Speedlink."

 Related topics


To add a hyperlink using SpeedLink

1	Click Tools [image] QuickCorrect.

2	Click the SpeedLinks tab.

3	Choose a link from the list of registered links.

4	Click Insert entry.

 Tip

•	In a document, you can also type @ followed by a SpeedLink entry you have created. For information on creating a new SpeedLink entry, see "To create a new SpeedLink entry."

 Related topics


To create a new SpeedLink entry

1	Click Tools [image] QuickCorrect.

2	Click the SpeedLinks tab.

3	In the Link word box, type the entry that you want to be linked, followed by a space.

WordPerfect automatically adds @ in front of the SpeedLink entry.

4	In the Location to link to list box, type the destination for the SpeedLink.

5	Click Add entry.

 Note

•	You must type a space after the text for WordPerfect to recognize it as a SpeedLink entry.

 Tip

•	If you want to use quotation marks in the SpeedLink entry, click the SmartQuotes tab, and enable the Use double quotation marks as you type check box.

 Related topics


To edit a SpeedLink entry

1	Click Tools [image] QuickCorrect.

2	Click the SpeedLinks tab.

3	From the list of registered links, choose the entry you want to replace.

4	Select the text in the Link word box.

5	Type a new entry in the Link word box.

6	Click Replace entry.

 Tip

•	If you want to edit the destination of a SpeedLink, select the text in the Location to link to box, and type  a new destination.

 Related topics


To delete a SpeedLink entry

1	Click Tools [image] QuickCorrect.

2	Click the SpeedLinks tab.

3	Choose a link from the list of registered links.

4	Click Delete entry.

 Related topics


Linking and embedding

WordPerfect supports object linking and embedding (OLE). Object linking and embedding is the process of inserting an object created in one application (the server) into another application (the client). An object can be text, a graphic, a chart, a spreadsheet, a sound or video clip, or any file created by an OLE-compliant application. To share information with Windows applications created before Windows 95, you  must use Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) instead of OLE.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	linking and embedding objects

•	linking and embedding data created in other formats as regular text

•	linking and embedding TextArt images

•	linking and embedding video

•	linking, embedding, and using sound

•	changing links

•	updating links and editing OLE objects

•	changing and hiding link icons


Linking and embedding objects

WordPerfect lets you link and embed objects from any application registered with Windows as being OLE- or DDE-compliant. You can also link or embed selected information from a file.

When you link information, it resides in the source (server) file where it was created. It displays in WordPerfect (the client file) in a graphic frame or as an icon. If you change the object in the source file, you can update the link in the WordPerfect file too. Linking is useful when you want to be able to edit an object in a single location and have the edits reflected in the linked locations as well. The server application is used to create and edit linked OLE objects, either in the source application or in WordPerfect. If you want to edit DDE linked information, the server application must be used.

When you embed an object in a WordPerfect document, it is contained completely in the document file. The information is copied to WordPerfect but retains all the properties of the source application. An embedded object increases the size of a file and is not updated when you make changes in the source file. Embedding is useful if you want to insert an object and not have it change when its source file changes. You can embed an object in WordPerfect by creating a new object or by dragging the object into WordPerfect. You can embed multiple copies of an object by creating a Windows scrap file. You can also embed documents located on the Internet in a WordPerfect file as an object.

 How to


To link or embed a file as an object

1	Click Insert [image] Object.

2	Enable the Create from file option.

If you want to link an object, enable the Link check box.

3	Type a path and filename in the File box.

If you want to display the object as an icon, enable the Display as icon check box.

 Notes

•	If the Display object as icon in document check box is disabled, a DDE link is created.

•	You can also link and embed HTML documents that use a standard filename, also known as the Uniform Naming Convention (UNC).

 Related topics


To link or embed selected information as an object

1	Select the information that you want to embed in a WordPerfect document.

2	Click Edit [image] Copy.

3	In WordPerfect, click where you want to insert the information.

4	Click Edit [image] Paste special.

5	Enable one of the following options:

•	Paste [image] embeds the information

•	Paste link [image] links the information

6	From the As list box, choose a format for the embedded information.

 Notes

•	If the Paste link option is disabled, the source application does not support linking, or the application is not registered properly with Windows. In this case, you can only insert a copy of the information. For information about copy and paste, see "Cutting, copying, and pasting text and graphics."

•	If the information is embedded rather than copied, the Result area indicates that the information can be activated by the source application.

 Related topics


To embed an object by dragging

1	Open the WordPerfect document into which you want to drag the object.

2	Select an object that you want to drag into the WordPerfect document.

3	Hold down CTRL, and drag the object to the WordPerfect icon on the Windows taskbar.

WordPerfect opens as the active window.

4	Position the object in the WordPerfect document, and release the mouse button and CTRL.

 Tip

•	If WordPerfect and the other application are displayed, you can drag the object from the other application into the WordPerfect document.

 Related topics


To embed a new object

1	Click Insert [image] Object.

2	Enable the Create new option.

3	Choose an object type from the Object type box.

4	Create the object.

5	Click outside the OLE box.

 Related topics


To embed a scrap file

1	Select text or an object.

2	Resize the application window so that you can see part of the Windows desktop.

3	Drag the object to the Windows desktop or to any folder in Windows Explorer.

The dragged object becomes a file with the word Scrap in its filename.

4	Drag the scrap file into any open document.

 Note

•	If you drag a scrap file into WordPerfect or another application that support the .rtf file format, the scrap file is inserted as text. Otherwise, it is inserted as an embedded OLE object. For information about objects, see "Linking and embedding objects."

 Related topics


To embed Internet documents

1	Click Insert [image] Object [image] Create new.

2	From the Object type list box, choose an object type for an OLE-enabled browser.

3	Click OK.

4	Type the URL of the Internet document in the Location box.

5	Click outside the Internet object to return to the document window.

If you want to update the document, double-click the Internet document.

 Note

•	The Microsoft Windows dialog box used to insert objects does not recognize Universal Resource Locators (URLs), such as http://www.corel.com, as valid filenames.

 Tip

•	You can also use browser bookmarks to browse to a Web site. For more information, see the documentation for your browser.

 Related topics


Linking and embedding data created in other formats as regular text

WordPerfect lets you link or embed spreadsheet, database, and ASCII- or ANSI-delimited text files as regular WordPerfect text. The information displays without a frame as a seamless part of a WordPerfect document.

 How to


To link or embed spreadsheet data as regular text

1	Click where you want to insert the data.

2	Click Insert [image] Spreadsheet/database, and click one of the following:

•	Create link [image] links spreadsheet data

•	Import [image] embeds spreadsheet data

3	Choose Spreadsheet from the Data type list box.

4	Choose Text from the Import as list box.

5	Type a path and filename in the Filename box.

6	From the Named ranges list, choose a named range to convert.

You can also
Choose a range to convert	Type a range in the Range box.
Import to a table	Choose Table from the Import as list box.
Create a merge data text file	Choose Merge data file from the Import as list box.
 Note

•	You must remove all passwords in order to import a password-protected file.

 Related topics


To link or embed a database as regular text

1	Click where you want to insert the data.

2	Click Insert [image] Spreadsheet/database, and click one of the following:

•	Create link [image] links database data

•	Import [image] embeds database data

3	Choose a database format from the Data type list box.

4	Choose Text from the Import as list box.

5	Type a path and filename in the Filename box.

6	From the Fields box, choose the fields to import.

If you want to use fieldnames as column headings, enable the Use field names as headings check box.

If you want to specify field and record delimiters, click Query.

You can also
Import to a table	Choose Table from the Import as list box. If you want to automatically size table columns, enable the Size table columns to fit data after import check box.
Create a merge data text file	Choose Merge data file from the Import as list box.
 Notes

•	If you are importing an SQL database, you must first log in to the database server.

•	You must remove all passwords in order to import a password-protected file.

 Related topics


To link or embed a delimited text file

1	Click where you want to insert the text file.

2	Click Insert [image] Spreadsheet/database, and click one of the following:

•	Create link [image] links a text file

•	Import [image] embeds a text file

3	Choose ASCII delimited text from the Data type list box.

4	Choose Text from the Import as or Link as list box.

5	Type a path and filename in the Filename box.

6	Choose options for delimiters and characters.

If you want to create fields based on the data in the first line, enable the First record contains fieldnames check box.

You can also
Import to a table	Choose Table from the Import as list box. If you want to automatically size table columns, enable the Size table columns to fit data after import check box.
Create a merge data text file	Choose Merge data file from the Import as list box.
 Notes

•	Each record must contain the same number of delimited characters (fields).

•	If you create a merge data text file, the imported fieldnames are based on the data in the first line.

 Related topics


Linking and embedding TextArt images

An image created with TextArt is an OLE object. You can link or embed an existing TextArt image or create a new TextArt image in a WordPerfect document. For more information about working with TextArt, see Using TextArt in the WordPerfect online Help.

 How to


To link or embed a TextArt image

1	Select a TextArt image.

2	Click Edit [image] Copy.

3	In WordPerfect, click where you want to insert a TextArt image.

4	Click Edit [image] Paste special.

5	Enable one of the following options:

•	Paste [image] embeds a TextArt image

•	Paste link [image] links a TextArt image

6	From the As list box, choose a format for the embedded image.

 Related topics


To create an embedded TextArt image

1	Click where you want to insert a TextArt image.

2	Click Insert [image] Object.

3	Click Create new.

4	Choose TextArt document from the Object type list box.

5	Click OK.

6	Create a new TextArt image.

7	Click outside the OLE box.

 Note

•	For information about working with TextArt, see Using TextArt in the WordPerfect online Help.

 Related topics


Linking and embedding video

WordPerfect lets you link or embed a video clip as an OLE object. When you link the file, you can update the video clip when the source file changes. When you embed the file, you insert a copy of it in a document. For information about updating a linked object, see "Updating links and editing OLE objects."

The type of video formats available depends on what is registered in the Windows Registry as being OLE-compliant. Formats include Video for Windows (.avi files) and may also include QuickTime Movie and Active Movie types. For more information, see the documentation for Windows and the video application.

 How to


To link or embed a video clip

1	Click Insert [image] Object.

2	Click Create from file.

If you want to link a video clip, enable the Link check box.

3	Type a filename in the File box.

If you want to display a video clip as an icon, enable the Display as icon check box.

 Notes

•	By default, WordPerfect represents the video clip in a document by displaying the first frame of the video clip.

•	Double-clicking a video clip plays the clip. Once in play, a control bar displays across the bottom of the file.

 Related topics


Linking, embedding, and using sound

You can link or embed a sound clip in a WordPerfect document. You can also play or record a sound clip in a document. If you want to rename a linked or embedded sound clip, you can edit its description. If you want to type the speech recorded in a sound clip, you can transcribe the sound clip using WordPerfect.

You can add digital (.wav) and MIDI (.mid or .rmi) sound files to WordPerfect documents. This allows you to include sound effects, music, and voice recordings and create multimedia documents for presentations, educational materials, product tutorials, and more.

To use sound in a WordPerfect document, you must have a sound device (usually a sound card) properly installed on your computer. If you want to create or play sound files, you will also need a microphone or another input device as well as an application for recording sound.

Depending on your hardware configuration, you can use two types of sound files with WordPerfect: MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) or digital audio. With the proper hardware, you can create sound files. You can also purchase sound files to use with WordPerfect. Before you purchase either MIDI or digital files, make sure that the files are compatible with your sound device.

 How to


To link or embed a sound clip

1	Click Insert [image] Sound.

2	Click Insert.

3	In the Name box, type a name or brief description of the sound clip.

4	In the File box, type the filename of the sound file.

5	Enable the Store in document option.

If you want to link a sound clip, enable the Link to file on disk check box.

 Note

•	The sound file is saved as part of the document, increasing the document size.

 Related topics


To play a sound clip

1	Click Insert [image] Sound.

2	Choose a sound clip from the Sound clips in document list.

3	Click the Play button.

You can also
Fast forward a sound clip	Click the Fast forward button.
Rewind a sound clip	Click the Rewind button.
Pause a sound clip	Click the Pause button.
 Tips

•	You can also click the Sound button in the left margin of the document to play the sound clip.

•	You can also double-click the sound clip to play it.

 Related topics


To edit the description of a linked or embedded sound clip

1	Click Insert [image] Sound.

2	Click Edit description.

3	Type a description in the Name box.

 Related topics


To transcribe a sound clip

1	Click Insert [image] Sound.

2	Click Transcribe.

3	Click the Play button on the Sound toolbar.

You can also
Fast forward a sound clip	Click the Fast forward button on the Sound toolbar.
Rewind a sound clip	Click the Rewind button on the Sound toolbar.
Replay the last sequence of the sound clip	Click the Replay button on the Sound toolbar.
 Related topics


To record a sound clip

1	Click Insert [image] Sound, and click Record.

2	Record the sound using a microphone or other input device.

3	Click File [image] Save as.

4	Type a name for the clip in the Filename box.

5	Close the Sound Recorder.

 Note

•	Sound is recorded by using the Windows Sound Recorder. For more information, see the Windows documentation.

 Related topics


Changing links

WordPerfect lets you update the source of a linked object, or a linked spreadsheet or database inserted as regular text. For example, if you move the source file, you can specify its new location. You can also break a link and keep the current copy of the information in a document. This may be useful if you do not want to update a link with its source file. If the linked information is not needed anymore in a WordPerfect document, you can delete the link and the linked information.

 How to


To change the source of a linked object

1	Deselect all objects in the document.

2	Click Edit [image] Links.

3	Choose the object from the Links list box

4	Click Change source.

5	Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored.

 Note

•	Most objects are inserted as OLE links. Whether an object is inserted as an OLE or DDE link depends on the registration in Windows of the source application, and the format you selected when you inserted the object.

 Tip

•	If you want to view the linked object, click Open source.

 Related topics


To change the source of a spreadsheet or database linked as regular text

1	Click between the link markers in a WordPerfect document.

2	Click Insert [image] Spreadsheet/database [image] Edit link.

3	Choose a format from the Data type list box.

4	Choose a format for the linked information from the Import as list box.

5	Type the path and filename in the Filename box.

 Note

•	When you change or update a link, you lose formatting made to the data in WordPerfect.

 Related topics


To break a link and keep the information in a document

1	Click Edit [image] Links.

2	Choose a link from the Links list box.

3	Click Break link.

 Tip

•	You can break a DDE link by deleting the DDE Link codes in the Reveal Codes window. For more information about Reveal Codes, see "Displaying Reveal Codes."

 Related topics


To delete a link and the linked information

1	Select a link.

2	Click Edit [image] Cut.

 Tip

•	You can also delete a link and its linked information by deleting the [Box:Linked Object] code in the Reveal Codes window.

 Related topics


Updating links and editing OLE objects

WordPerfect lets you update links to keep the information in a WordPerfect document current with its source file. You can manually update a linked spreadsheet or database as regular text, or have WordPerfect automatically update it when you open the document. You can also manually update a linked or embedded OLE object in a WordPerfect document, or have WordPerfect automatically update it when you open the document. By default, WordPerfect automatically updates the link when you open the document.

An embedded object is a copy of the source information. Although there is no link between the object embedded in a WordPerfect document and the source file, the embedded object retains the properties of its source application. Using the controls of the source application from WordPerfect, you can update an embedded object by editing it.

 How to


To manually update a spreadsheet or database linked as regular text

1	Save the source file in the source application.

2	Click Insert [image] Spreadsheet/database [image] Update.

 Related topics


To update a spreadsheet or database linked as regular text when you open the document

1	Save the source file in the source application.

2	Click Insert [image] Spreadsheet/database [image] Options.

3	Enable the Update when document opens check box.

 Related topics


To update a linked object manually

1	Click Edit [image] Links.

2	Choose a link from the Links list box.

3	Click Manual.

4	Click Update now.

 Note

•	To update a DDE link, the source file must be open in the source application.

 Related topics


To update a linked object when you open a document

1	Click Edit [image] Links.

2	Choose a link from the Links list box.

3	Click Automatic.

 Related topics


To edit a linked or embedded OLE object

1	Select the object.

2	Click Edit [image] [object name] [image] Edit.

If you want to open the object in a separate window, click Edit [image] [object name] [image] Open.

3	Make any changes.

4	Click outside the object box.

 Note

•	You can edit most embedded objects by double-clicking them. However, if you double-click a sound or video clip, the clip plays.

 Tip

•	You can also edit an object by right-clicking the object, and clicking [object name] [image] Edit.

 Related topics


Changing and hiding link icons

When you display a linked or embedded object as an icon, WordPerfect provides a default icon and label. You can enter a different label and choose an icon from a file saved in a .ico, .exe, or .pll file. This must be done when you link or embed the object.

For a spreadsheet or database linked as regular text, you can hide the link markers shown in the margin.

 How to


To choose the icon or label displayed for a linked or embedded object

1	Click Insert [image] Object.

2	Enable the Create from file option.

3	Type a path and filename in the File box.

If you want to link an object, enable the Link check box.

4	Enable the Display as icon check box.

5	Click Change icon.

6	In the Change icon dialog box, enable the From file option, and type the path and filename containing the new icon in the box beside it.

7	Press TAB.

8	Click the icon you want displayed.

9	In the Label box, type a name for the icon.

 Related topics


To hide link icons for a spreadsheet or database linked as regular text

1	Click Insert [image] Spreadsheet/database [image] Options.

2	Disable the Show link icons check box.

 Note

•	The link icons do not appear when you print even if they display in the document window.

 Related topics


Using bulleted lists, numbered lists, and outlines

In WordPerfect, you can organize text by using bullets, numbers, or outlines. Bullets help to differentiate items in a list or add emphasis to selected paragraphs. You can use bullets to mark list items that have no particular order. Numbered lists and outlines help you organize and display information and are used to show the relationship between ideas.

Bulleted lists, numbered lists, and outlines can include several levels of numbering. For example, you can number first-level items 1, 2, 3, and second-level items a, b, c. You can also use outline or legal styles, such as 1, a, i, or 1, 1.1, or 1.1.1.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	creating and applying bulleted lists

•	creating numbered lists

•	editing lists and outlines

•	arranging items in bulleted lists, numbered lists, and outlines


Creating and applying bulleted lists

The following image shows examples of preset bullet formats.

The following image shows characters that can be used as QuickBullets.

You can replace a bullet with a custom symbol, such as a heart, star, or check mark. You can also apply a bullet format to existing text. You can also create a list that uses check boxes.

 How to


To create a bulleted list

1	Click in a document.

2	Click Insert [image] Outline/bullets & numbering.

3	Click the Bullets tab.

4	Choose a bullet style from the Bullets list.

5	Click OK.

6	Type text, and press Enter.

Perform this step for each entry in the list.

 Tips

•	You can also create a bulleted list by opening the Bullets picker on the toolbar, and clicking a bullet format.

•	You can discontinue a bulleted list by pressing Backspace.

 Related topics


To enable QuickBullets

1	Click Tools [image] QuickCorrect.

2	Click the Format As-You-Go tab.

3	In the Format As-You-Go choices area, enable the QuickBullets check box.

 Note

•	QuickBullets are disabled by default.

 Related topics


To create a bulleted list by using QuickBullets

1	Click in a document.

2	Type a QuickBullet character.

3	Press Tab.

4	Type the text, and press Enter.

Perform this step for each entry in the list.

 Notes

•	To use QuickBullets, they must first be enabled. For information about enabling QuickBullets, see "To enable QuickBullets."

•	If you do not want one of the characters in the QuickBullets list to begin a bulleted list, add it to the QuickCorrect list. For information about QuickCorrect, see "Correcting misspelled words automatically."

 Tip

•	You can discontinue a bulleted list by pressing Backspace.

 Related topics


To create a custom symbol bullet

1	Click in a document.

2	Click Insert [image] Outline/bullets & numbering.

3	Click the Bullets tab.

4	Click More bullets.

5	In the Symbols dialog box, choose a set of symbols from the Set list box.

6	Choose a symbol from the Symbols list.

7	Click Insert and close.

 Related topics


To apply a bullet format to existing text

1	Select the text to which you want to apply the bullet format.

2	Click Insert [image] Outline/bullets & numbering.

3	Click the Bullets tab.

4	Choose a bullet style from the Bullets list.

 Tips

•	You can also add a bullet to existing text by clicking at the beginning of a line, opening the Bullets picker on the toolbar, and clicking a bullet format.

•	You can type body text between list items by pressing Enter twice, and pressing the Up arrow to type on the line that begins without a bullet.

 Related topics


To create a list using check boxes

1	Click View [image] Toolbars.

2	In the Available toolbars area, enable the Shipping macros check box.

3	Click OK.

4	Click at the beginning of a new line.

5	Click the Check box button on the Shipping macros toolbar.

6	Press Tab.

7	Type text, and press Enter.

 Related topics


Creating numbered lists

You can create a numbered list in a document, or you can use QuickNumbers to create lists as you type.

The following image shows examples of preset number formats.

You can number existing text. You can also renumber an existing numbered list.

 How to


To create a numbered list

1	Click in a document.

2	Click Insert [image] Outline/bullets & numbering.

3	Click the Numbers tab.

4	Choose a number style from the Numbers list.

5	Click OK.

6	Type text, and press Enter.

Perform this step for each entry in the list.

 Tips

•	You can also create a numbered list by opening the Numbers picker on the toolbar and clicking a numbering format.

•	You can discontinue a numbered list by pressing Backspace.

 Related topics


To create a numbered list by using QuickNumbers

1	At the beginning of a new line, type a number followed by a closing parenthesis or hyphen.

2	Press Tab.

3	Type the text for the first list item, and press Enter.

For a paragraph, let the text wrap at the end of the line instead of inserting a hard return.

Perform this step for each entry in the list.

4	Press Backspace.

 Notes

•	To use QuickNumbers, you must enable QuickBullets. For information about enabling QuickBullets, see "To enable QuickBullets."

•	When you use QuickNumbers, you create your own numbering style. The most recently used numbering styles display on the Numbers tab of the Bullets and numbering dialog box.

 Tip

•	You can discontinue a numbered list by pressing Backspace.

 Related topics


To number existing text

1	Select the text you want to number.

2	Open the Numbering picker on the toolbar, and click a numbering format.

 Related topics


To renumber a numbered list

1	Click in a list or outline.

2	Click the Set paragraph number button on the property bar.

3	Type the new number in the Paragraph number box.

The number you change and all numbers following it are renumbered accordingly.

 Tips

•	You can also renumber paragraphs by pressing Ctrl + Shift + F5. For more information, see "Numbering paragraphs."

•	If the numbering you want to change is indented from the left margin, type "?" for each indention level in the Paragraph number box before you type the new number. For example, if the text is indented two levels from the margin, type "??" followed by the new number.

 Related topics


Editing lists and outlines

You can add a list or outline within an existing list without disrupting the flow of numbers or bullets. Numbered lists and outlines can include several levels of numbering. For example, you can number first-level items 1, 2, 3, and second-level items a, b, c. You can remove bullets and numbers from lists individually.

You can change a bulleted list to a numbered list or a numbered list to a bulleted list.

 How to


To add a list or outline within another list

1	Click in a list or outline.

2	Press Enter.

3	Press Backspace.

4	Click Insert [image] Outline/bullets & numbering.

5	Click one of the following tabs:

•	Numbers [image] lets you add a numbered list

•	Bullets [image] lets you add a bulleted list

6	Choose a style from the list.

7	Enable the Insert new outline/list within current outline/list option.

8	Click OK.

9	Type text.

 Note

•	The style of the first list or outline is chosen by default for the added list or outline.

 Related topics


To remove a bullet or number from a list

1	Click at the beginning of a bulleted or numbered line.

2	Press Backspace.

 Related topics


To change a bulleted list to a numbered list

1	Click in a bulleted list.

2	Click Insert [image] Outline/bullets & numbering.

3	Click the Numbers tab.

4	Choose a style from the Numbers list.

5	Enable the Apply selected layout to current outline/list option.

 Related topics


To change a numbered list to a bulleted list

1	Click in a numbered list.

2	Click Insert [image] Outline/bullets & numbering.

3	Click the Bullets tab.

4	Choose a style from the Bullets list.

5	Enable the Apply selected layout to current outline/list option.

 Related topics


To adjust the space between tabs in outlines and lists

1	Click Insert [image] Outline/bullets & numbering.

2	Enable the Set tabs every check box.

3	Type a number in the Set tabs every box.

 Related topics


Arranging items in bulleted lists, numbered lists, and outlines

You can arrange the items in bulleted lists, numbered lists, and outlines by changing the level and the order in which the items display. In addition, you can create an outline from text, which lets you apply different levels to text.

 How to


To change the level of a list item

1	Click in the text of an item.

2	Click one of the following buttons on the property bar:

•	Promote [image] moves the item to a higher level (less indented)

•	Demote [image] moves the item to a lower level (more indented)

 Related topics


To change the order of a list item

1	Select the text whose order you want to change.

2	Click one of the following buttons on the property bar:

•	Move up [image] moves the item up one position on the list

•	Move down [image] moves the item down one position on the list

 Tip

•	You can also change the order of a list item by clicking the Show icons button on the property bar, and dragging the symbol for the item up or down.

 Related topics


To create an outline from text

1	Click in a document.

2	Click Insert [image] Outline/bullets & numbering.

3	Click the Text tab.

4	From the Text list, choose one of the following options:

•	Heading

•	Quotations

•	Definitions

5	Click OK.

6	Type text, and press Enter.

 Related topics


Using master documents

In WordPerfect, managing large documents, such as reports with many sections and books with numerous chapters, can be accomplished by storing the sections and chapters in separate files that are linked together through a master document. The separate files are known as subdocuments.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	working with master documents and subdocuments


Working with master documents and subdocuments

The following illustration shows 1) a master document and 2) subdocuments that are linked to the master document.

You can use master documents and subdocuments when a document

•	is so large that finding and replacing, generating, and editing the document is slow, or difficult, or both.

•	is being managed by multiple people. By dividing the document into a master document/subdocument structure, you can assign specific subdocuments to each person; it becomes impossible for them to overwrite another person's work or make unauthorized changes.

•	consists of many boilerplate items. By placing different boilerplate items in separate subdocument files, you can assemble the boilerplate when required.

You can create a master document as you would any other WordPerfect document. Upon doing so, you can link subdocuments to the master document. Each subdocument is also a regular WordPerfect document that contains common components. You can then expand selected or all of the subdocuments in the master document, to perform such functions as checking the spelling. As well, you can save and condense the subdocuments in the master document. When subdocuments are condensed, you see only the information or text that exists within the master document. Finally, you can remove any subdocument links from the master document by using Reveal Codes. For information about Reveal Codes, see "Displaying Reveal Codes."

 How to


To create a master document

1	Open a new document.

2	Apply any font settings and format settings.

3	Type any introductory text.

 Related topics


To link a subdocument to a master document

1	Click in the master document.

2	Click File [image] Document [image] Subdocument.

3	Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored.

4	Type a filename in the Filename box.

5	Click Include.

 Note

•	Master document formatting codes apply to subdocuments, except where different codes are found in a subdocument. Master document styles override subdocument styles.

 Tip

•	You can also link a subdocument to a master document by clicking the Subdocument button on the Reference toolbar. For information about toolbars, see "Customizing toolbars."

 Related topics


To expand selected subdocuments in a master document

1	Click File [image] Document [image] Expand master.

2	In the Subdocuments list, disable the check box beside each subdocument you do not want to open.

 Note

•	By default, all subdocuments are selected for expansion in the Expand master document dialog box.

 Related topics


To expand all subdocuments in a master document, including disabled subdocuments

1	Click File [image] Document [image] Expand master.

2	Click Mark/clear.

3	Click Mark all.

 Related topics


To condense and save subdocuments in a master document

1	Click File [image] Document [image] Condense master.

2	Disable the check box beside each subdocument you do not want to condense or save.

 Notes

•	By default, all subdocuments are selected for condensing and saving in the Condense/save subdocuments dialog box.

•	If you do not save all of the subdocuments prior to saving the master document, you will lose any changes made to the subdocuments.

 Related topics


To remove a subdocument link from a master document

1	Click View [image] Reveal Codes.

2	Drag the [Subdoc] code out of the Reveal Codes window.

 Note

•	When you remove a subdocument link from a master document, the subdocument file reverts to a normal WordPerfect file.

 Related topics


Merging documents

When you perform a merge, you combine a form document and a data source to form a new series of documents. The merge reproduces copies of the form document, with each copy containing information from a specific record in the data source.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	creating data for a merge

•	working with form documents for a merge

•	associating merge files

•	performing a merge

•	converting merge files

•	sorting, viewing, and finding data in data files

•	editing merge data files

•	selecting specific data for merges

•	merging with address books

•	changing merge options

•	using merge commands

You can program a merge by adding merge commands. For more information, see Reference: The Merge toolbar and programming commands in the online Help.


Creating data for a merge

When you merge documents, you produce copies of a form document. Each copy contains specific information from a record in a data source, such as a data file, an address book, or keyboard input.

When you use a WordPerfect data file as the data source, you can create either a data text file or a data table file. In both types of data files, information is organized into records and fields. For example, a record may include a name, address, telephone number, and other contact information. Each item within the record, for example, name and address, is recognized as a field. It is recommended that you use no more than 512 fields per record.

When you create a data text file, each field is marked by the ENDFIELD code and each record by the ENDRECORD code. The following graphic shows a data text file containing 1) ENDFIELD codes and 2) ENDRECORD codes.

When you create a data table file, fields and records are arranged in columns and rows. Each column contains a field. Each row contains a record. The following graphic shows a data table file containing 1) records, 2) fields, and 3) field names.

You can retrieve data from other file formats and use them as data files in WordPerfect. For example, you can retrieve and convert a database file, a spreadsheet file, an ODBC data source, or a text file. For information about converting files, see "Opening and previewing files."

You can also use an address book as a merge data source. For information, see "Merging with address books."

When you create a data file, WordPerfect automatically inserts a Merge toolbar into the merge data file. For more information about the Merge toolbar, see "Using the Merge toolbar."

 How to


To create a data file for a merge

1	Click Tools [image] Merge.

2	Click Data source [image] Create data file.

If you have typed in the active document, enable one of the following options in the Data File Source dialog box:

•	Use file in the active window [image] uses the active document

•	New document window [image] creates a new document

3	Click OK.

4	Type the name of a field in the Name a field box.

If you want to create a data table file, enable the Format records in a table check box.

5	Click Add.

6	Click any of the following to organize a selected field:

•	Replace [image] replaces the name of the selected field

•	Delete [image] deletes the selected field

•	Move up [image] moves the selected field up in the Fields used in merge list

•	Move down [image] moves the selected field down in the Fields used in merge list

7	Click OK.

8	In the Create or edit data in record area, type the data for each record.

9	Click Close, and click Yes.

You can also
Number the fields in an empty data file	Click OK in the Create data file dialog box. Specify the number of fields in the Number of fields in each record box.
 Note

•	It is recommended that you use no more than 512 fields per record.

 Tips

•	To add a line to a field, press Ctrl + Enter.

•	Press Tab to move to the next field.

 Related topics


Working with form documents for a merge

A form document provides the pattern and layout for a merged document. It can contain text, formatting, graphics, and merge commands. You create form documents the same way you create regular documents; however, instead of typing specific information, you insert a command which can be replaced by information from a data source when you perform the merge. For more information about inserting merge commands, see "Using merge commands."

The following graphic shows a form document containing 1) FIELD codes where the name and address of the recipient are inserted and 2) text for a letter.

At the top of the document window, WordPerfect inserts the Merge toolbar to give you greater control over a merge. For more information about the Merge toolbar, see "Using the Merge toolbar."

You can create a form document for labels and merged text that is oriented sideways. WordPerfect also lets you create a form document that you can personalize during a keyboard merge. A keyboard merge lets you enter information into the form document each time you need to send it. For more information about the KEYBOARD command, see Merge programming commands. in the online Help.

If you do not want to create a new series of merged documents, you can send all of the merged data to a table. After you perform the merge, all of the merged output will be formatted into a single table with each column representing a field.

 How to


To create a form document for a merge

1	Click Tools [image] Merge.

2	Click Form document [image] Create form document.

If you have typed in the active document, enable one of the following options:

•	Use file in active window [image] uses the active document

•	New document window [image] creates a new document

3	Click OK.

4	Enable one of the following:

•	Associate a data file [image] specifies the path and filename for the file

•	Associate an address book [image] specifies an address book

•	Associate an ODBC data source [image] lets you select the ODBC source to use

•	No association [image] does not associate any data file

5	Type text, and insert merge commands in the form document.

6	Insert fields in the form document.

 Notes

•	For information about inserting merge commands, see "To insert a merge command."

•	For information about inserting fields, see "To insert a field in a form document for a merge."

 Related topics


To insert a field in a form document for a merge

1	Click Insert field on the Merge toolbar.

2	Click where you want data to be filled in from a data source.

3	In the Field box, specify the field.

4	Click Insert.

 Related topics


To create labels for a merge

1	Click Tools [image] Merge.

2	Click Form document [image] Create form document.

If you have typed in the current document, enable one of the following options:

•	Use file in active window [image] uses the active document

•	New document window [image] creates a new document

3	In the Associate form and data dialog box, enable the Associate an address book option, and choose an address book from the list box.

4	Click OK.

5	Click Format [image] Labels on the WordPerfect menu bar.

6	In the List labels for area, enable one of the following label options:

•	Laser printed [image] displays laser label options

•	Tractor-fed [image] displays tractor-fed label options

•	Both [image] displays laser and tractor-fed label options

7	Choose a label style from the Labels list, and click Select.

8	Insert fields in the form document.

 Notes

•	For information about inserting fields, see "To insert a field in a form document for a merge."

•	You can merge selected records from an address book. For information, see "To merge selected records from an address book."

 Related topics


To create sideways text for a merge

1	Click Tools [image] Merge.

2	Click Form document [image] Create form document.

If you have typed in the active document, enable one of the following options:

•	Use file in active window [image] uses the active document

•	New document window [image] creates a new document

3	Click OK.

4	Click one of the following options:

•	Associate a data file [image] specifies the path and filename for the associated data file

•	Associate an address book [image] specifies an address book

•	Associate an ODBC data source [image] lets you select the ODBC source

•	No association [image] does not associate any data file

5	Click OK.

6	Click Insert [image] Text box on the WordPerfect menu bar.

7	Insert fields in the form document, and click Close.

8	Select the text box.

9	Right-click the text box, and click Content.

10	 Enable a rotation option in the Rotate text counterclockwise area.

 Note

•	For information about inserting fields, see "To insert a field in a form document for a merge."

 Related topics


To create a form document for a keyboard merge

1	Click Tools [image] Merge.

2	Click Form document [image] Create form document.

If you have typed in the active document, enable one of the following options:

•	Use file in active window [image] uses the active document

•	New document window [image] creates a new document

3	Click OK.

4	Enable one of the following options:

•	Associate a data file [image] specifies a path and filename for the associated data file

•	Associate an address book [image] specifies an address book

•	Associate an ODBC data source [image] lets you select the ODBC source

•	No association [image] does not associate any data file

5	Click OK.

6	Click where you want to insert a keyboard prompt.

7	On the Merge toolbar, click Insert merge code, and choose Keyboard.

8	Type a user prompt for the information to be entered.

 Related topics


To create a table for a merge

1	Click Tools [image] Merge.

2	Click Form document [image] Create form document.

If you have typed in the active document, enable one of the following options:

•	Use file in active window [image] uses the active document

•	New document window [image] creates a new document

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	Associate a data file [image] specifies the path and filename for the associated data file

•	Associate an address book [image] specifies an address book

•	Associate an ODBC data source [image] lets you select the ODBC source

•	No association [image] does not associate any data file

4	Click Table [image] Create on the WordPerfect menu bar.

5	Type the specified values in the following boxes:

•	Columns [image] number of columns

•	Rows [image] 2

6	Click Create, and type a heading in each cell of the first row.

7	Right-click the table, click Format, and click the Table tab.

8	Enable the Insert new rows automatically check box, and click OK.

9	Insert fields in the second row of the table, and click Close.

10	Click at the end of the last cell in the second row, and click Insert merge code on the Merge toolbar.

Choose REPEATROW from the Merge codes list; click Insert; and click Close.

 Note

•	After merging, the table expands one row for each record in the associated data file.

 Tip

•	Press Tab to move to the next cell.

 Related topics


Associating merge files

When you merge documents, you must link the name of a data source to a form document. This is called associating a data source. You can associate a data source with a form document, or you can associate a form document with a data file, such as an ODBC data source. The association is always stored in the form document.

If the data source changes, you can associate a different data file. You can also go to an associated form document from its data file or to an associated data file from its form document.

 How to


To associate a data file with a form document

1	Open a data file.

2	Click Go to form on the Merge toolbar.

3	Click one of the following:

•	Select [image] associates an existing form document

•	Create [image] creates a new form document

 Note

•	The association is stored in the form document.

 Related topics


To associate a form document with a data source

1	Open a form document that has no association with a data source.

2	Click Go to data on the Merge toolbar.

3	Click one of the following:

•	Select [image] associates a data file

•	Create [image] creates and names a new data file or form file

•	Address book [image] associates an address book

•	ODBC [image] associates a ODBC data source

 Note

•	For information about associating an ODBC data source, see "To associate a form document with an ODBC data source."

 Related topics


To associate a form document with an ODBC data source

1	Open a form document that has no association with a data source.

2	Click Go to data on the Merge toolbar.

3	Click ODBC.

If prompted, log in to the database.

4	Choose a location from the Data source list box.

5	From the Table list box, choose a table in the database that contains the merge data.

 Note

•	For more information about logging in to an ODBC database, see the online Help for the Microsoft SQL Server ODBC driver.

 Related topics


To go to the associated data file

1	Open a form document.

2	On the Merge toolbar, click Go to data.

 Note

•	If there is no associated data file, you can select an existing data file or create a new one. For information about associating a data source, see "To associate a form document with a data source." For information about creating a data file, see "To create a data file for a merge."

 Related topics


To go to the associated form document

1	Open a data file.

2	On the Merge toolbar, click Go to form.

 Notes

•	The associated form document must be open.

•	The association is stored in the form document.

 Related topics


To change the associated data source

1	Open a form document.

2	Click Insert field on the Merge toolbar.

3	Click Data source, and click a data file.

 Related topics


Performing a merge

When you perform a merge, you combine a form document and a data source to create a new series of documents. WordPerfect provides a variety of output options for the new documents. For example, you can save it to disk, print it, or add it to the active document. The following image shows 1) a data source document, 2) a form document, and 3) merged documents.

You can perform a keyboard merge and add information at the time of the merge. When you perform the keyboard merge, WordPerfect pauses the merge as specified in the form document and waits for you to enter information from the keyboard.

You can create envelopes as you merge a form document (such as a letter), or you can create merged envelopes on their own. An envelope is created for each record selected in the data source. For more information about working with envelopes, see "Creating envelopes."

You can also send each merged document as email.

Please note that it is recommended that you use no more than 512 fields per record.

 How to


To perform a merge

1	Click Tools [image] Merge.

2	Click Form document, and choose the location of the form file to merge.

3	Click Data source, and choose the location of the data file to merge.

4	Click Output, and choose one of the following:

•	Current document

•	New document

•	Printer

5	Click Merge.

You can also
Stop a merge in progress	Press ESC.
Save the merged file to disk	Click Output [image] File on disk. Choose the folder, drive, and where you want to save the file. Type a filename in the Filename list box. Click Select.
 Tip

•	You can also perform a keyboard merge by clicking Merge on the Merge toolbar. For more information about using the Merge toolbar, see "Using the Merge toolbar."

 Related topics


To merge to envelopes

1	Click Tools [image] Merge.

2	Click Form document, and choose the location of the form document.

If you are merging envelopes only, click Current document as the location of the form file.

3	Click Data source, and choose the location of the data file.

4	Click Envelopes.

5	Insert fields in the form document.

6	Click Close.

7	Click Continue merge on the Merge toolbar.

8	Click Output, and choose a location for the merged file.

 Notes

•	The merged envelopes are placed at the end of the merged file.

•	If there is an existing envelope for this document, you can edit, cancel, or define the envelope. For more information about creating envelopes, see "Creating envelopes."

 Related topics


To perform a keyboard merge

1	Open a form or data file containing the KEYBOARD merge command.

2	Click Tools [image] Merge.

3	Click Form document, and choose the location of the form file.

4	Click Data source, and choose the location of the data file.

5	Click Output, and choose a location for the merged file.

6	Click Merge.

7	When the merge pauses at the KEYBOARD command, type the information as prompted.

8	Click Continue merge on the Merge toolbar.

You can also
Skip a record	Review the data in the Next record list box on the Merge toolbar. Click Skip next record.
Stop a keyboard merge	Click Stop on the Merge toolbar.
 Tip

•	To continue the merge to the end of the active record and ignore all other merge commands, click Quit on the Merge toolbar.

 Related topics


To merge to e-mail

1	Click Tools [image] Merge.

2	Click Form document, and choose the location of the form file to merge.

3	Click Data source, and choose the location of the data file to merge.

4	Click Output, and choose E-mail.

5	Choose the field containing the email address from the Select field name of e-mail address list box.

6	In the Subject line box, type the subject line for the merged email message.

7	Click OK.

8	Click Merge.

9	Choose a profile from the Profile name list box.

 Related topics


Converting merge files

You can convert form documents and data files to regular WordPerfect documents. When a file is converted, it is no longer recognized as a form document or a data file for a merge, and the Merge toolbar is removed. For information about the Merge toolbar, see "Using the Merge toolbar." You can also convert a table to a data text file.

When you use a data file that is not formatted for a merge, WordPerfect imports and converts it for the merge. You can use the file one time and not save it as a merge file, or you can save the file in WordPerfect format so that you can use it again.

You can also import data in other forms, such as a spreadsheet, database, or text file, into a data text file for a merge. For more information, see "To link or embed spreadsheet data as regular text," "To link or embed a database as regular text," and "To link or embed a delimited text file."

It is recommended that you use no more than 512 fields per record.

 How to


To convert a form document or data file to a regular document

1	Open a data file or a form document.

2	On the Merge toolbar, click Options, and choose Remove merge bar.

One of the following dialog boxes displays:

•	The file will not be recognized as a merge file [image] indicates that the active file will not be recognized as a merge form document or merge data file

•	Data file association will be lost [image] indicates that the active file will not be recognized as a merge form document and will not be associated with any data file

 Note

•	After the Merge toolbar has been removed, you cannot click Undo to display it again. You need to re-create the merge file.

 Related topics


To convert a table to a data text file for a merge

1	Select a table.

2	Press BACKSPACE.

3	Enable the Convert table contents option.

4	Click OK.

5	Enable the Convert text to merge data file (.dat) option.

If you want to convert the cells in the first row to field names, enable the Use text as first row as field names check box.

 Related topics


Sorting, viewing, and finding data in data files

You can sort a data file. Using the Quick data entry feature in WordPerfect, you can scroll through the records and fields in a data file to view them. You can also find records that contain specific text.

 How to


To sort a data file

1	On the Merge toolbar, click Options, and choose Sort.

2	Choose a criteria from the Sort by box.

3	Click Sort.

The table is sorted alphabetically or numerically in ascending order based on the first cell in each row.

 Note

•	For more information about sorting records, see "Working with records."

 Related topics


To view records in a data file using Quick data entry

1	Click Quick entry on the Merge toolbar.

2	Click one of the following:

•	First

•	Previous

•	Next

•	Last

3	Click Close.

 Related topics


To view a field in a data file using Quick data entry

1	Click Quick entry on the Merge toolbar.

2	Click any of the following:

•	Next field [image] moves the cursor to the next field

•	Previous field [image] moves the cursor to the previous field

 Related topics


To find text in a data file using Quick data entry

1	Click Quick entry on the Merge toolbar.

2	Click Find, and type the text to match in the Find box.

3	Click one of the following:

•	Find next [image] moves to the next record containing the text specified

•	Find previous [image] moves to the previous record containing the text specified

 Notes

•	Depending on which record is displayed, Find next or Find previous may be grayed.

•	If no record is found, the first record in the data file displays.

 Related topics


Editing merge data files

A data file organizes data for a merge into fields and records. There are different ways to edit a data file depending on how the data file is formatted. A data file can be formatted as either a data text file or a data table file. In a data table file, information is organized in a table. Each column of the table contains a field, and each row contains a record. You can add and delete columns and rows from a data table.

In a data text file, fields are separated by an ENDFIELD code. Records are separated by an ENDRECORD code and a hard page break. WordPerfect lets you add fields to and delete fields from records. You can also add field names and records to data text files.

Using Quick data entry, you can add and delete fields or records in both data text files and data table files. You can also edit the contents of fields in records.

It is recommended that you use no more than 512 fields per record.

 How to


To add a column to a data table

1	Click in a column next to where you want to add a new column.

2	On the Merge toolbar, click Column, and choose Insert.

3	Type the name of the new field in the Field name box.

4	Click one of the following:

•	Before current field [image] inserts the new field before the selected column

•	After current field [image] inserts the new field after the selected column

•	After last field [image] inserts the new field as the last column in the table

 Note

•	It is recommended that you use no more than 512 fields per record.

 Related topics


To delete a column from a data table

1	Click in a column.

2	Click Column on the Merge toolbar.

3	Choose DELETE.

 Related topics


To add a row to a data table

1	Click in a row next to where you want to add a new row.

2	On the Merge toolbar, click Row, and choose Insert.

3	Click one of the following:

•	Add row above current row

•	Add row below current row

•	Add row to end of table

 Related topics


To delete a row from a data table

1	Click in a row.

2	On the Merge toolbar, click Row and choose Delete.

 Related topics


To add or delete a field from a data text file record

To	Do the following
Add a field	Click where you want to add the field. Type data, and click End field on the Merge toolbar.
Delete a field	Select the text and the ENDFIELD merge code. Press DELETE.
 Note

•	It is recommended that you use no more than 512 fields per record.

 Related topics


To add or delete a field name from a data text file

To	Do the following
Add a field name	Click where you want to add a field. The cursor must be within the parentheses of the Fieldnames code. Type the new field name followed by a semicolon.
Delete a field name	Click within the parentheses of the Fieldnames code. Select the field name and following semicolon. Press DELETE.
 Notes

•	A semicolon, but no spaces, separates each field name.

•	You need to manually add or delete fields from records. For information, see "To add or delete a field from a data text file record."

•	It is recommended that you use no more than 512 fields per record.

 Related topics


To add a record to a data text file

1	Type the text for the first field.

2	Click End field on the Merge toolbar.

3	Click after the last ENDFIELD code of the record.

4	Click End record on the Merge toolbar.

You can also
Delete a record from a data text file	Select the record, including the ENDFIELD and ENDRECORD codes and the hard page break at the end of the record. Press DELETE.
Print a data text file	Click Tools [image] Merge. On the Merge toolbar, click Options, and choose Print.
 Related topics


To add a field to a data file using Quick data entry

1	Click Quick Entry on the Merge toolbar.

2	Click Field names.

3	Type the field name in the Field name box.

4	Click one of the following:

•	Add [image] adds the new field after the selected field

•	Add before [image] adds the new field before the selected field

You can also
Replace a field name in a data file	Choose a field from the Fields used in merge list box. Click Replace.
Delete a field from a data file	Choose a field from the Fields used in merge list box. Click Delete.
 Notes

•	If you replace a field name, information in that field will be deleted from each record in the data file. For example, if you replace "Address" with "Street Address," all data in the "Address" field in all records will be deleted.

•	If you delete a field name, information in that field will be deleted from each record in the data file.

•	It is recommended that you use no more than 512 fields per record.

 Related topics


To add a record to a data file using Quick data entry

1	Click Quick entry on the Merge toolbar.

2	Click New record.

3	Type the data for a field.

4	Click Close.

You can also
Delete the displayed record	Click Delete record.
 Tip

•	Press Enter to move to the next field.

 Related topics


To edit fields using Quick data entry

1	Click Quick entry on the Merge toolbar.

2	Click in the field you want to edit.

If you want to edit dimmed fields, enable the Allow editing of dimmed fields check box.

3	Type text.

 Notes

•	If you edit fields with functions, the functions are deleted.

•	For information about finding data in a data file, see "Sorting, viewing, and finding data in data files."

 Related topics


Selecting specific data for merges

When you merge documents, you produce copies of the form document. Each copy contains specific information from a record in the data source. If you do not want to merge all the records in a data source, you can limit a merge to certain records in the data file by marking a range of records that you want to merge or by specifying conditions for records.

 It is recommended that you use no more than 512 fields per record.

 How to


To mark records for a merge

1	Click Tools [image] Merge.

2	Click Form document, and choose the location of the form file.

3	Click Data source, and choose the location of the data file.

4	Click Records.

5	Enable the Mark records option in the Selection method area.

6	Type the range of records to display in the Display records from boxes.

7	Choose the first field to display in the First field to display box.

8	Click Update record list.

9	Click OK.

You can also
Mark individual records	Enable the records in the Record list box.
Select all records	Click Mark all records in list.
Clear all marked records	Click Unmark all records in list.
 Related topics


To specify conditions for a merge

1	Click Tools [image] Merge.

2	Click Perform merge.

3	Click Form document, and choose the location of the form file.

4	Click Data source, and choose the location of the data file.

5	Click Records.

6	Enable the Specify conditions option in the Selection method area.

7	Select a field from the Field list box.

8	Type the selection criteria in the Condition text boxes.

If you want to see examples of selection criteria, click Example.

9	Click OK.

You can also
Choose a range of records	Enable the Record number range check box. In the From box, type the first record in the range. In the To box, type the last number in the range.
Reset conditions	Click Clear all.
 Related topics


Merging with address books

When you use an address book as the data source for a merge, you do not have to create a data file. You can merge all records or select specific records from an address book and merge them directly to letters, envelopes, labels, or form documents. By default, WordPerfect lets you access Directory Server, MAPI, and Windows address books through the Microsoft Outlook address book. For more information about using Microsoft Outlook, see "Using Microsoft Outlook address book in WordPerfect."

You can also create a merge data file by using the records in an address book. WordPerfect lets you create a data file by using all records or selected ones. When you merge information from an address book, the records are interpreted as a merge data file at the time of the merge. If you want to save address book information as a merge data file, you can use the adrs2mrg.wcm macro included with WordPerfect. For more information about macros, see "Recordings, macros, and automation features."

You can merge envelopes with a form document by using an address book. You can also insert address book records as labels.

It is recommended that you use no more than 512 fields per record.

 How to


To merge using an address book

1	In a form document, click Tools [image] Merge.

2	Click Data source. Choose Address book, and choose an address book from the enabled list box.

3	Click Output, and choose a format for the merged file.

4	Click Merge.

 Note

•	If you have selected records from an address book before starting the merge, those are the records that merge unless you specify others.

 Related topics


To merge selected records from an address book

1	Click Tools [image] Merge.

2	Click Form document, and choose the location of the form document.

3	Click Data source, choose Address book, and choose an address book from the list box.

4	Click Records.

5	Hold down Ctrl, click each entry to use, and click OK.

6	In the Format address dialog box, click OK.

7	Click Output, and choose a format for the merged file.

8	Click Merge.

 Related topics


To create a merge data file from an address book

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Play.

2	Choose adrs2mrg.wcm.

3	Click Play.

4	Enable the All records from address book option.

5	Choose an address book from the Select address book list box.

6	Click OK.

 Related topics


To create a merge data file from selected address book records

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Play.

2	Choose adrs2mrg.wcm, and click Play.

3	Enable the Selected records option.

4	Click Select records, and click OK.

5	In the list of categories, double-click the type of address book, and click an address book.

6	Hold down Ctrl, click each entry you want to use, and click Insert.

7	In the Format address dialog box, click OK.

8	In the Address book to merge dialog box, click OK.

 Note

•	If the adrs2mrg.wcm macro is not listed, you need to install it.

 Related topics


To merge envelopes and a form document with an address book

1	Click Tools [image] Merge.

2	Click Data source, choose Address book, and choose an address book from the list box.

3	Click Envelopes.

If there is an existing envelope for this document, you can edit, cancel, or define the envelope.

4	Click where you want to insert a field.

5	Click Insert field on the Merge toolbar, choose a field, and click Insert.

6	Click Close.

7	Click Continue on the Merge toolbar.

8	Click Form document, and choose the location of the form file.

9	Click Output, choose the location for the merged file, and click Merge.

You can also
Merge only envelopes using an address book	Open a blank form document.
Print envelopes using an address book	Click Output, and choose Printer. Click Merge.
Reset envelope, form, and data options	Click Reset in the Merge dialog box.
 Notes

•	When you merge envelopes with an address book, you cannot add graphics to the envelope. Only the return address, the recipient's address, and a bar code can be used. You can add extra text, such as "Air Mail," below the return address or above the recipient's address. The extra text prints in the same font as the addresses. For more information about creating envelopes, see "Creating envelopes."

•	The merged envelopes are placed at the end of the merged file.

 Related topics


To insert an address book record as a label

1	In a new document window, click Tools [image] Merge.

If you have typed in the document, enable the New document window option in the Create merge file dialog box.

2	In the Associate form and data dialog box, enable the Associate an address book option, and choose an address book from the list box.

3	Click Format [image] Labels on the WordPerfect menu bar.

4	In the List labels for area, enable one of the following label options:

•	Laser printed [image] displays laser label options

•	Tractor fed [image] displays tractor fed label options

•	Both [image] displays both laser and tractor fed label options

5	Choose a label format from the Labels list, and click Select.

6	Click where you want to insert the address label.

7	Click Tools [image] Address book.

8	Choose an address, and click Insert.

9	In the Format address dialog box, choose a format from the Format list box.

 Related topics


Changing merge options

When you perform a merge, you combine a form document with a data source to form a new set of documents. You can change the default file extensions for merge forms and data files.

Merge options can be changed. For example, you can specify the number of copies to produce for each merged document. WordPerfect lets you separate each merged record with a page break and insert a blank line for each empty field. You can also reset all of the options to the default.

 How to


To specify an extension for merge filenames

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Double-click Files.

3	In the Files settings dialog box, click the Merge/Macro tab.

4	Disable the following check boxes:

•	Use default form file extension on open and save

•	Use default data file extension on open and save

5	Type an extension in the following boxes:

•	Use default form file extension on open and save [image] specifies the file extension for form files. The default is .frm.

•	Use default data file extension on open and save [image] specifies the file extension for data files. The default is .dat.

 Related topics


To change merge options

To	Do the following
Specify the number of copies for each merged record	Click Tools [image] Merge. Click Options. Type a value in the Number of copies for each record box.
Separate merged documents with a page break	Click Tools [image] Merge. Click Options. Enable the Separate each merged document with a page break check box.
Insert a blank line for an empty field	Click Tools [image] Merge. Click Options. Choose Leave blank line from the If field is empty in data source list box.
Remove a blank line representing an empty field	Click Tools [image] Merge. Click Options. Choose Remove blank line in the If field is empty in data source list box.
Reset merge options to the default	Click Tools [image] Merge. Click Reset.
 Note

•	If Reset is disabled in the Perform merge dialog box, all options (envelope, form, and data) are set to the default.

 Related topics


Using merge commands

Merge commands (or merge codes) help you customize and automate a merge. Merge commands instruct WordPerfect how to combine data sources and form documents. Like macro commands, they resemble programming languages in the use of a language (syntax), variables, and logical operations.

You can customize a merge by inserting merge commands. For example, if you add the DATE command to a letter, WordPerfect will replace the [DATE] code with the current date. You can also delete, display, or hide merge commands.

The following graphic shows merge codes in red and the text you type in black. WordPerfect performs a specific function for each merge command. Some codes are accessible as buttons on the Merge toolbar. Other merge commands require careful placement and the correct use of parameters and other commands.

The POSTNET command can be inserted into a form document. A POSTNET bar code is a postal symbol used for addresses in the United States. WordPerfect inserts the POSTNET bar code for the specified ZIP code. You can insert the same POSTNET bar code for all of the records in a merge, or you can insert a different code for each record in a data file.

 How to


To insert a merge command

1	On the Merge toolbar, click Insert merge code, and click More.

2	Click where you want to insert a merge code.

3	Choose a merge code from the Merge codes list box.

4	Click Insert.

If prompted, type parameters, and click OK.

 Note

•	For more information, see Reference: The Merge toolbar and programming commands in the online Help.

 Related topics


To delete a merge command

1	Click at the beginning or end of a merge command.

2	Press DELETE.

 Note

•	When you delete merge commands, WordPerfect will remove the code and parentheses, leaving prompts and parameters.

 Related topics


To display or hide a merge command

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Display.

3	In the Display settings dialog box, click the Merge tab.

4	Enable one of the following options:

•	Display merge codes [image] displays the merge commands

•	Display merge codes as markers [image] displays command markers only

•	Hide merge codes [image] does not display commands

 Tip

•	You can also click Options on the Merge toolbar to display or hide merge codes.

 Related topics


To display or hide a merge command for a keyboard merge

1	Click Tools [image] Merge.

2	Click Options.

3	Choose one of the following options from the Display merge codes list box:

•	Show codes [image] displays the merge commands

•	Hide codes [image] does not display commands

•	Show as markers [image] displays command markers only

 Related topics


To merge a single POSTNET bar command in a form document

1	On the Merge toolbar, click Insert merge code, and click More.

2	Click where you want to insert the POSTNET bar command.

3	Choose POSTNET(string) from the Merge codes list box.

4	Click Insert.

5	Type the ZIP code between the parentheses of the POSTNET command.

6	Click Close.

 Related topics


To insert a merge field for a POSTNET bar command

1	Click Insert merge code, and click More on the Merge toolbar.

2	Click where you want to insert the POSTNET bar code.

3	Choose POSTNET(string) from the Insert merge codes list box.

4	Click Insert.

5	Click between the parentheses of the POSTNET command.

6	Click Insert field on the Merge toolbar.

7	In the Field names box, choose the field containing the ZIP code.

8	Click Insert and close.

 Note

•	To choose a field, you must have associated a data source with the form document. If not, you can type the name of the field, making sure that it matches the field name in the data source. For information about data sources, see "Associating merge files." For information about form documents, see "Working with form documents for a merge."

 Related topics


Moving between Microsoft Word and WordPerfect

WordPerfect lets you open files created in Microsoft Word. Because WordPerfect and Microsoft Word documents share similar formatting and layout, you can open Microsoft Word documents in WordPerfect, while retaining most of the formatting. When you open a Microsoft Word document in WordPerfect, WordPerfect converts it automatically. However, occasionally, some information in the converted document may not display as it did in its original format.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	opening Microsoft Word documents in WordPerfect

•	saving WordPerfect documents as Microsoft Word documents

•	using the Microsoft Word toolbar

•	using Microsoft Word shortcut keys in WordPerfect

•	comparing Microsoft Word and WordPerfect features

For more information about how WordPerfect converts Microsoft Word documents, see "Reference: Moving between Microsoft Word and WordPerfect,"

For more information about the additional file formats that can be imported and exported from WordPerfect, see "Import and export file formats for WordPerfect."


Opening Microsoft Word documents in WordPerfect

WordPerfect lets you open documents created using the following versions of Microsoft Word.

•	Microsoft Word 1.0 for MS-DOS

•	Microsoft Word 1.1 for MS-DOS

•	Microsoft Word 1.2 for MS-DOS

•	Microsoft Word 2.0 for MS-DOS

•	Microsoft Word 4.0 for MS-DOS

•	Microsoft Word 5.0 for MS-DOS

•	Microsoft Word 5.5 for MS-DOS

•	Microsoft Word 6.0 for Windows

•	Microsoft Word 7.0 (Microsoft Office 95)

•	Microsoft Word 97

•	Microsoft Word 2000

•	Microsoft Word version 2002 (Microsoft Office XP)

You can also insert a Microsoft Word document into a WordPerfect document.

 How to


To open a Microsoft Word document

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored.

3	Click a filename.

Microsoft Word documents use the .doc filename extension.

4	Click Open.

 Note

•	When you open a Microsoft Word document in WordPerfect, some information in the file may not be displayed in the same way after it is converted. For more information, see "Reference: Moving between Microsoft Word and WordPerfect."

 Related topics


To insert a Microsoft Word file into a WordPerfect document

1	Click Insert [image] File.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored.

3	Click a filename.

4	Click Insert.

 Related topics


Saving WordPerfect documents as Microsoft Word documents

You can save WordPerfect documents as Microsoft Word documents.

 How to


To save a WordPerfect document as a Microsoft Word document

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the file.

3	Type the filename in the Filename box.

4	Choose a version of Microsoft Word from the File type list box.

5	Click Save.

 Note

•	When you save a WordPerfect document as a Microsoft Word document, some of the formatting in the document may no longer display properly. For more information, see "Reference: Moving between Microsoft Word and WordPerfect."

 Related topics


Using the Microsoft Word toolbar

You can use the Microsoft Word 97 toolbar in WordPerfect.

 How to


To display the Microsoft Word 97 toolbar in WordPerfect

1	Click View [image] Toolbars.

2	Enable the Microsoft Word 97 check box.

 Related topics


Using Microsoft Word shortcut keys in WordPerfect

The following table lists the Microsoft Word shortcut keys and the WordPerfect equivalents. You can customize your shortcut keys to reflect Microsoft Word or WordPerfect settings. For more information about customizing shortcut keys in WordPerfect, see "Choosing and creating shortcut keys."

Microsoft Word shortcut key	WordPerfect command	WordPerfect shortcut key
Ctrl + E	Align center	Shift + F7
Ctrl + B	Bold, turn on/turn off	Ctrl + B
Ctrl + F4	Close document	Ctrl + F4
Ctrl + C	Copy the selection to the Clipboard	Ctrl + C
Alt + F4	Exit	Alt + F4
Ctrl + D	Font, change	F9
F7	Grammar, check and correct	Alt + Shift + F1
Ctrl + Enter	Hard page break	Ctrl + Enter
Enter	Hard return	Enter
F1	Help	F1
Ctrl +	Hyphen, hard	Ctrl + Hyphen
Ctrl + Shift + Hyphen	Hyphen, soft	Ctrl + Shift + Hyphen
Ctrl + M	Indent current paragraph one tab stop	F7
Ctrl + I	Italic, turn on/turn off	Ctrl + I
Ctrl + V	Insert Clipboard contents at the cursor	Ctrl + V
Ctrl + G	Jump to a specified place in the document	Ctrl + G
Ctrl + E	Justify center	Ctrl + E
Ctrl + J	Justify full	Ctrl + J
Ctrl + L	Justify left	Ctrl + L
Ctrl + R	Justify right	Ctrl + R
Shift + Enter	Line break	Ctrl + Shift + L
Ctrl + T	Margin release (hanging indent)	Ctrl + F7
Ctrl + Home	Move the cursor to the beginning of the document	Ctrl + Home
Home	Move the cursor to the beginning of a line	Home
Page down	Move the cursor to the bottom of the screen	Page down
Up arrow	Move one cell up in a table	Alt + Up arrow
Down arrow	Move one cell down in a table	Alt + Down arrow
Right arrow or Tab	Move one cell right in a table	Alt + Right arrow or Tab
Left arrow or Tab	Move one cell left in a table	Alt + Left arrow or Tab
Right arrow	Move one column to the left	Alt + Right arrow
Left arrow	Move one column to the right	Alt + Left arrow
Ctrl + X	Move selection to the Clipboard	Ctrl + X
Ctrl + N	New document	Ctrl + Shift + N
Ctrl + Enter	New page	Ctrl + Enter
Ctrl + O	Open document	Ctrl + O
Ctrl + P	Print	Ctrl + P
Ctrl + Y	Reverse the last undo	Ctrl + Shift + Z
Ctrl + S	Save	Ctrl + S
F12	Save as	F3
Ctrl + Shift + F	Search (backward)	Ctrl + Shift + F
Ctrl + F	Search (forward)	Ctrl + F
F7	Spelling, check and correct	Ctrl + F1
Shift + F7	Open thesaurus	Alt + F1
Ctrl + U	Underline, turn on/turn off	Ctrl + U
Insert	Typeover	Insert
Ctrl + Z	Undo	Ctrl + Z
For a complete list of all WordPerfect shortcut keys, see "Using shortcut keys."


Comparing Microsoft Word and WordPerfect features

The following table lists Microsoft Word features, and their equivalent WordPerfect features.

You can locate a Microsoft Word feature and click the associated WordPerfect feature to learn how to use it in WordPerfect.

Microsoft Word feature	WordPerfect feature
Annotation	Comment
AutoCorrect	QuickCorrect
AutoShapes	Shapes
AutoText	QuickWords
Automatic save	Backup
Break	New page
Bullets and numbers	Bulleted, numbered, and alphabetical lists
Change case	Convert case
Character	Font appearance
Charting	Chart
Compare versions	Document review
Create envelope	Envelopes
Customize	Settings
Drawing	Draw
Footers	Headers/footers
Frame	Graphics
Full screen	Hide bars
Grammar	Grammatik
Grammar as you type	Grammar As-You-Go
Headers	Headers/footers
Hyperlink	Hyperlink
Indentation	Indent
Index and tables	Reference
Keep lines together	Keep text together
Keep with next	Conditional end of page
Merge documents or Mail merge	Merge
Merge cells	Join
Options	Settings
Page alignment	Center page
Paragraph alignment	Justification
Protect document	Keep text together
Right-aligned text	Flush right
Sorting	Sort
Spelling	Spelling checker
Spelling as you type	Spell-As-You-Go
Summary info	Document summary
Table AutoFormat	SpeedFormat
Tabs	Tab set
Text direction	Rotate text
Track changes	Document review
Vertical alignment	Center page
WordArt	TextArt
Word count	Properties


Reference: Moving between Microsoft Word and WordPerfect

The goal of converting files is to create a document in WordPerfect that looks and functions as it did in Microsoft Word. Unfortunately, it is not always possible to create an identical document.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	importing fonts and font styles

•	importing paragraph formatting

•	importing field commands

•	importing page formatting

•	exporting fonts and font styles

•	export page features

•	export paragraph features

•	export formatting features

•	export field commands

 How to


Importing fonts and font styles

The following table contains the comparable font and font styles available in Microsoft Word and WordPerfect, and notes about how each application handles fonts and font styles.

Import to WordPerfect	From Microsoft Word	Notes
Underline	Underline	WordPerfect supports underlining formats, such as wave, double, and line dash dot, and colored underlining. In Microsoft Word, however, the colors of the underlining and the text are the same. The following types of underlining formats are not supported in Microsoft Word: text and spaces, text only, and text and tabs.
Small caps	SmallCaps
Small caps	AllCaps	Import as small caps because WordPerfect does not have AllCaps.
Strikeout	Strikethrough
Word and letter spacing	Spacing	Character spacing in Microsoft Word is almost the same as character spacing in WordPerfect. Microsoft Word does not support: word spacing, word spacing justification limits, or kerning.
	Animated text	WordPerfect does not have an animated text feature, so text is lost.
Advance	Position
	Kerning
Color	Color	WordPerfect does not have an automatic color as Microsoft Word does. WordPerfect supports full RGB colors; Microsoft Word offers 16 colors. WordPerfect uses a color distance formula to map from its colors to the 16 colors available in Microsoft Word. Any color with high RGB is mapped to white.
	Highlight colors
Single underline	Text borders Box shadow 3D custom	Not applicable
Font size	Font size	WordPerfect has font sizes in increments of one tenth; Microsoft Word uses half points. Sizes are rounded to the nearest point size allowed.
 Related topics


Importing paragraph formatting

The following table contains paragraph features for Microsoft Word and WordPerfect that help you import files more effectively.

Import to WordPerfect	From Microsoft Word	Notes
Left margin adj Right margin adj First line indent	Left indent Right indent First line indent	WordPerfect lets you add an indent anywhere in the paragraph (lines following that indent will be indented). If there is only a first-line indent, the rest of the paragraph is unaffected. If you specify a first-line indent and then hit a few indents before typing text, this is treated as a paragraph indent. If there is an indent in the paragraph after text has been typed, the paragraph indent adjusts the first-line indent to be where it was before the new indent appears, and a tab is added for the indent.
Advance	Spacing before
Spacing between paragraphs	Spacing after
Justification Left Center Right Full	Alignment Left Center Right Justified	WordPerfect converts all to full justification.
Line spacing Multiple At least Fixed line height	Line spacing Multiple At least Exactly	WordPerfect treats line height and line spacing as two separate issues, while Microsoft Word treats them both as line spacing. When exporting to Microsoft Word and both are specified, the second one is used as the line spacing in Microsoft Word.
Tab definition Left Center Right Decimal Left ...Leader Leader ____Leader	Tabs Left Center Right Decimal Bar ...Leader Leader ____Leader	Microsoft Word has first-line indents and paragraph indents. WordPerfect lets you add an indent anywhere in a paragraph. Lines following that indent are indented. If you specify a first-line indent, and then apply a few indents before typing text, WordPerfect makes the first-line indent equal 0 and indents the paragraph. The left and right margin adjustments in WordPerfect are translated to indents in Microsoft Word during import and export.
Tab definition	Default tab stop
Widow/orphan	Widow/orphan control
Block protect	Keep lines together Keep with next	WordPerfect has the option to keep the text together at text level (block), while Microsoft Word can only keep text together at paragraph level.
Conditional end of page		Not supported in Microsoft Word.
Hard page break	Page break before paragraph
	Suppress line numbers
	Don't hyphenate
Borders Single Single Thick Thick Extra thick Extra thick Double Double Double Dotted Dashed Shadow Color Inside spacing	Borders ¾ point 1½ points 2¼ points 3 points 4½ points 6 points ¾ point double 1½ points double 2¼ points double Dotted Dash Shadow Color From text Art borders
Shading Shading percentage Pattern Foreground color Background color	Shading Shading amount Pattern Foreground color Background color	WordPerfect maps what it can from its set of patterns to match those used in Microsoft Word. All other patterns are exported as the Trellis pattern. The foreground and background colors have the same limitations as the other colors (mapping from RGB to the 16-color table of Microsoft Word). If the converted foreground and background colors are the same and the original WordPerfect foreground and background colors were not the same, WordPerfect exports the background color as Automatic. WordPerfect has page, column, and paragraph shading, while Microsoft Word has only paragraph shading. Paragraph, column, and page shading are exported as paragraph shading.
Bullets	Bullets	When you open a Microsoft Word document in WordPerfect, WordPerfect assigns a style to the bullet character and inserts a tab after the character. WordPerfect does not convert the distance of the bullet from the text or the alignment features, but sets it to the ½-inch default. Microsoft Word 97 has a feature called Number Position, which sets number alignment (right, left, or center) in numbered lists. This feature is not available in WordPerfect 10.
Outline definition Font size Alignment Distance from text	Numbered Size
Outline definition Font size	Multilevel numbering Size Alignment Distance from text
Outline definition	Heading numbering
 Related topics


Importing page formatting

The following table contains page formatting features available in Microsoft Word and WordPerfect, and notes about how each application handles formatting.

Import to WordPerfect	From Microsoft Word	Notes
Newspaper columns Number of Width Spacing Column border	Columns Number of Width Spacing Line between Columns	Microsoft Word does not support columns in headers, footers, or parallel columns, and so they are exported as tables. Microsoft Word does not support column shading, and so it is converted as paragraph shading.
New top margin	Header position
Binding	Gutter	You can change the gutter binding only once at the beginning of a document. Multiple changes to the gutter binding are not supported.
Printing offset	Mirror margins
	Paper source
Vertical alignment Top Center Top	Vertical alignment Top Center Justified
Line numbering Start at From left edge of page Numbering interval Restart page Restart numbering Continuous	Line numbering Start at From text Count by Restart page Restart section Continuous	Line Numbering is almost the same in WordPerfect and Microsoft Word, but Microsoft Word does not support the starting line number. Therefore, even if you change the line numbering format, the starting line number does not change. The previous last number is taken into consideration for the next number.
Column break Page break Force odd Force even	Continuous section Start New column New page Odd page Even page
Headers/footers Odd/even Odd	Headers/footers Different odd and even Different first page
 Related topics


Importing custom formatting features

The following table contains custom formatting features available in Microsoft Word and WordPerfect, and notes about how each application handles formatting.

Import to WordPerfect	From Microsoft Word	Notes
Hidden text	Annotation
	Templates
Footnotes Bottom of page Beneath text Number format Arabic ROMAN roman ALPHA alpha Asterisks Custom mark Start at Numbering Continuous Restart each page Restart Numbering 2"-line separator	Footnotes Bottom of page Beneath text Number format Arabic ROMAN roman ALPHA alpha Asterisks Custom mark Start at Numbering Continuous Restart each page Restart each section Separator line Continuation message Continuation line	Footnote and endnote line-separator properties cannot be changed in Microsoft Word 97. In WordPerfect, you can set the space before or after the separator, as well as the length and position of the separator. Microsoft Word always shows the separator line, and the style of the separator line cannot be changed. Unlike Microsoft Word, WordPerfect has spacing between footnotes and endnotes. WordPerfect conversion, however, does not let you manually set numbers for footnotes and endnotes; it supports only automatically running numbers. In Microsoft Word 97, the footnote numbers must be sequential. The only way to export manual numbering from WordPerfect to Microsoft Word 97 is to set manual numbering from the beginning. For example, if the first five footnotes are automatically numbered and the rest of the numbers are manually numbered, they will not export correctly. Microsoft Word does not allow two different sections to display footnotes on the same page. Microsoft Word breaks the page at the second section; however, it does not insert a hard page break. This is Microsoft Word behavior. When you export, you must break sections when you change margins, disable columns, or alter headers and footers.
Endnotes Print endnotes here Restart numbering	Endnotes End of section Restart each section	See Footnotes section above.
Shapes	Drawing objects	You can convert graphics from a WordPerfect document to a Microsoft Word document. Certain features, such as wrapping the picture in a frame, are not supported. The wrapping that is supported is the same as it is for text boxes. For advanced wrapping, Microsoft Word uses office shapes, which WordPerfect does not support. WordPerfect converts text boxes to frames in Microsoft Word. Microsoft Word frames support most of the functionality of text boxes but only two types of text wrapping. The following information is lost or may convert incorrectly when you convert Microsoft Word text boxes: some text wrapping information; properties, such as box stays on page and vertical positioning of text; nested text boxes; linked text boxes.
	Cross-references	WordPerfect and Microsoft Word handle cross-references differently. WordPerfect defines multiple tags as targets, and then generates the cross-reference, which references all the targets. Microsoft Word requires numbered lists, bookmarks, footnotes, and so on. Bookmark names cannot be duplicated. There are two conversion options: 1) Create a tag for each bookmark, and have Microsoft Word generate the cross-reference for each bookmark. This option can be used only for tags defined before the cross-reference command in WordPerfect. Forward references are not supported. 2) Convert the generated cross-references to plain text. WordPerfect uses this option.
Styles Paragraph Paired	Styles Paragraph Character	WordPerfect supports many more features in Styles than Microsoft Word. Features that cannot be expressed in a Microsoft Word Style are applied directly to the document whenever the style is used. WordPerfect does not support the Enter Key Inserts Style function. Pressing Enter inserts the same style.
Graphics styles
Index	Index	WordPerfect supports the following page number positions for indexes: Text[SPACE]#, Text[TAB]#, and Text[COMMASPACE]#. All other positions are converted to the Microsoft Word default Text[DOTTEDTAB]#. WordPerfect does not convert the page number format because Microsoft Word does not support page number format for indexes. WordPerfect does not convert Use-dash-to-show-consecutive-pages features because they are not available in Microsoft Word. Concordance files are not converted because concordance files work differently in Microsoft Word.
Table of authorities	Table of authorities	WordPerfect does not convert page number positions and page number formats for tables of authorities. You can use the dash to show consecutive pages.
Lists	Table of figures	WordPerfect supports the following page number positions in lists: No numbering, Text[SPACE]#, and Text[TAB]#. All other positions are converted to the Microsoft Word default Text[DOTTEDTAB]#, except for the Text[DOTTEDTAB]#, which is converted to Text[TAB]#. WordPerfect does not convert page number formats because Microsoft Word does not support such formats for lists. List box captions are not exported to Microsoft Word.
Table of contents	Table of contents	The page number position in Tables of contents is not converted in Microsoft Word. WordPerfect lets you specify page number positions for each level. Microsoft Word lets you specify one definition for the entire Table of contents.
	Routing Slip
Descriptive name Abstract	Title Manager Company Category Comments Other fields Users defined Fields
Graphics box	Picture	There are the same limitations as there are with shapes (wrapping).
Object	Object	There are the same limitations as there are with shapes (wrapping).
Language	Language	Language identification is the same in Microsoft Word and WordPerfect. If a language match is not available in WordPerfect, WordPerfect converts the language to English or tries to get the closest match.
Boxes Borders Horizontal position Page Left Center Right Left Right Value Margin Left Center Right Left Right Value Column Left Center Right Left Right Value	Frames Borders Horizontal position Page Left Center Right Inside Outside Value Margin Left Center Right Inside Outside Value Column Left Center Right Inside Outside Value
Boxes Vertical position Page Top Center Bottom Value Margin Top Center Bottom Value Paragraph Value Size Text wrapping Neither side Larger side Captions	Frames Vertical position Page Top Center Bottom Value Margin Top  Center Bottom Value Paragraph Value Size Text wrapping None Wrapping Captions
Page numbers	Page numbers	In Microsoft Word, page numbers are part of the header, footer; page number formats, or on/off are section specific. In some cases suppressing or changing formats of page numbers will show up on the following page (compared to WordPerfect) in Microsoft Word.
Tables Borders Cell height Cell width	Tables Borders Formulas Number format Cell height Cell width	WordPerfect lets you set left and right margins in columns. Microsoft Word deals with this as spacing between columns that is the same for every row. You can convert left and right margins by taking the minimum of all the margins in the row and exporting the minimum as the spacing. Shading and fills in tables are exported. You can export WordPerfect patterns to Microsoft Word patterns. All patterns that do not map are exported as the Trellis pattern. The foreground and background colors have the same limitations as the other colors (mapping from RGB to the 16-color table of Microsoft Word). If the converted foreground and background are the same and the original WordPerfect foreground and background colors are not, WordPerfect exports the background color as Automatic. If WordPerfect finds a table whose columns do not fit in the page margins, the tables are adjusted. However, the original column widths are exported. In Microsoft Word, the tables reach beyond the page margins.
Symbols (formerly called WordPerfect characters)	Form fields
Symbols (formerly called WordPerfect characters)	Special character	WordPerfect symbols are exported using a font, character combination. To see the symbol in Microsoft Word, the WordPerfect font must be installed.
Hard Break	Page Break
Hard Columns	Column Break
Normal Text	Caption
 Related topics


Importing field commands

The following table contains field commands for Microsoft Word, and their equivalents once they are imported into WordPerfect, and notes about how each application handles formatting.

Import to WordPerfect	From Microsoft Word	Notes
Advance	ADVANCE field
	ASK field
	AUTHOR field
Display Paragraph Number	AUTONUM field
Display Paragraph Number	AUTONUMLGL field
Display Paragraph Number	AUTONUMOUT field
	AUTOTEXT field
Barcode	BARCODE field
	COMMENTS field
	COMPARE field
	CREATEDATE
	DATABASE field
Date	DATE field	Microsoft Word 97 does not support the following date and time field options: capitalized weekday; capitalized weekday abbreviation; capitalized month; capitalized month abbreviation; Roman numbers for year; lead space; zeroformonths/days/hours/minutes/seconds; "p" and "P" abbreviation for P.M., "a" and "A" abbreviation for A.M..
DDE start and end	DDE field
DDE start and end	DDEHOT field
	DOCPROPERTY field
	EDITTIME field
	EXPRESSION field
	FILENAME field
	FILESIZE field
	FILLIN field
Box character	FORMCHECKBOX field
	FORMLISTBOX field
	FORMTEXTBOX field
Object box	EMBED field
	EQ field
	GLOSSARY field
Hypertext	GOTO BUTTON field
	IF field
Graphics box	IMPORT field
Subdocument	INCLUDE field
Graphics box	INCLUDEPICTURE field
	INCLUDETEXT field
Index definition	INDEX field
	INFO field
	KEYWORDS field
	LASTSAVEDBY field
Object box	LINK field
Hypertext	MACROBUTTON field
	MERGEFIELD field
	MERGEREC field
	MERGESEQ field
	NEXT field
	NEXTIF field
	NOTEREF field
	NUMCHARS field
	NUMPAGES field
	NUMWORDS field
Page number	PAGE field
	PAGEREF field
	PRINT field
	PRINTDATE field
	PRIVATE field
	QUOTE field
	REF field
	RD field
	REVNUM field
	SAVEDATE field
	SECTION field
	SECTIONPAGES field
	SEQ field
	SET field
	SKIPIF field
	STYLEREF field
	SUBJECT field
Symbol (formerly called WordPerfect characters)	SYMBOL field
Table of authorities entry	TA field
Table of contents or list entry	TC field
Define table of authorities	TOA field
Define table of contents	TOC field
	TEMPLATE field
Date/time command	TIME field
	TITLE field
	USERADDRESS field
	USERINITIAL field
	USERNAME field
Index entry	XE field
 Related topics


Exporting fonts and font styles

The following table contains font and font styles exported from WordPerfect to Microsoft Word, and notes about how each application handles the formatting.

Export from WordPerfect	To Microsoft Word	Notes
Underline	Underline	All forms of underlining convert.
Small caps	SmallCaps
Small caps	AllCaps	Convert to small caps because WordPerfect does not have AllCaps.
Strikeout	Strikethrough	Double strikeout is not supported in WordPerfect and is converted to single strikeout.
Redlining	Redlining	Only used in Microsoft Word for Revision mode.
Word and letter spacing	Spacing
	Animated text
Advance	Position
	Kerning
	Highlight colors
Single underline	Text borders Box shadow 3D custom	All are converted to single underline for individual words, but paragraph borders do work.
 Related topics


Export paragraph features

The following table contains paragraph features for Microsoft Word and WordPerfect that help you export files more effectively.

Export from WordPerfect	To Microsoft Word	Notes
Left margin adj Right margin adj First line indent	Left indent Right indent First line indent
Hanging indent	Hanging indent	WordPerfect uses left margin adjustment and first-line adjustment to create a hanging indent. WordPerfect also creates a tab definition, which is automatically set at the left indent. WordPerfect inserts a tab between the first-line indent and the left indent that stops at the left indent. The Don't add automatic Tab stop for hanging option in Microsoft Word is respected on import.
Advance	Spacing before
Spacing between paragraphs	Spacing after
Justification Left Center Right Full	Alignment Left Center Right Justified	Microsoft Word does not support the all justification feature.
Line spacing Multiple At least Fixed line height	Line spacing Multiple At least Exactly
Tab definition Left Center Right Decimal Left ...Leader Leader ____Leader	Tabs Left Center Right Decimal Bar ...Leader Leader ____Leader	In Microsoft Word, if there is a space for the default tab sets between the last defined tab stop and the right margin, WordPerfect defines them in the tab definition.
Tab definition	Default tab stop	The tab definition starts at 0 and sets a tab stop at the default distance between the previous tab and the right margin.
Widow/orphan	Widow/orphan control
Block protect	Keep lines together Keep with next	WordPerfect places the block protect around the current paragraph and the next paragraph. If you do not have the Keep lines together option enabled, WordPerfect may break the text in a different location.
Conditional end of page		Not applicable.
Hard page break	Page break before paragraph
	Suppress line numbers	WordPerfect does not convert suppress line numbers; line numbers continue.
	Don't hyphenate	WordPerfect does not convert this feature.
Borders Single Single Thick Thick Extra thick Extra thick Double Double Double Dotted Dashed Shadow Color Inside spacing	Borders ¾ point 1½ points 2¼ points 3 points 4½ points 6 points ¾ point double 1½ points double 2¼ points double Dotted Dash Shadow Color From text Art borders	WordPerfect converts Auto Color to black. Shadow Borders do convert, but there can be minor variances in the direction of the shadow. WordPerfect does not convert Art Borders; the border is lost.
Shading Shading percentage Pattern Foreground color Background color	Shading Shading amount Pattern Foreground color Background color	The patterns in Microsoft Word and the patterns in WordPerfect are not the same, though the patterns in Microsoft Word convert to a WordPerfect pattern that is similar in style. WordPerfect uses only the background color when using patterns. A shading value applies only to the foreground color. Unlike Microsoft Word, WordPerfect does not mix the background and foreground colors.
Bullets	Bullets	WordPerfect and Microsoft Word have different bullet types. Bullets export as round bullets.
Outline definition Text before Number type Font Size Alignment Distance from text Hanging indent Start At	Numbered Text before Number type Size Hanging indent Start At	The outline definition cannot contain the following characters in text before or text after: A, al, I, X, or x 1. WordPerfect places the font and font size commands before and after the display paragraph number commands to imitate the display in Microsoft Word. The hanging indent may be affected by the first line and left indents that are already set. WordPerfect does not convert alignment and distance from text. Distance is set to the ½-inch default.
Outline definition Levels 1-9 Text before Number type ALPHA alpha ROMAN roman Arabic Text after Font Font size Color Hanging indent Start at	Multilevel numbering Levels 1-9 Text before Number type ALPHA alpha ROMAN roman Arabic Text after Font Size Color Alignment Distance from text Hanging indent Start at	WordPerfect converts Level 9 to Level 8. The outline definition cannot contain the following characters in text before or text after: A, al, I, X, or x 1. WordPerfect places the font and font size commands before and after the display paragraph number commands to imitate the display in Microsoft Word. The hanging indent may be affected by the first line and left indents that are already set. WordPerfect does not convert alignment and distance from text. Distance is set to the ½-inch default.
Outline definition	Heading numbering	See multilevel numbering for more information.
 Related topics


Export page features

The following table contains page features for Microsoft Word and WordPerfect that help you export files more effectively.

Export from WordPerfect	To Microsoft Word	Notes
Newspaper columns Number of Width Spacing Column border	Columns Number of Width Spacing Line between Columns
New top margin	Header position	WordPerfect positions Microsoft Word footers at the bottom margin. This causes the last line of text to start at a position that is not the specified bottom margin. WordPerfect adds a tab between the number and the text in the footer.
Binding	Gutter
Printing offset	Mirror margins	WordPerfect calculates the difference between the Microsoft Word mirror margins. The printing offset creates new left and right margin commands.
	Paper source	WordPerfect does not convert paper source. The paper source is lost.
Vertical alignment Top Center Top	Vertical alignment Top Center Justified
Line numbering Start at From left edge of page Numbering interval Restart page Restart numbering Continuous	Line numbering Start at From text Count by Restart page Restart section Continuous
Column break Page break Force odd Force even	Continuous section Start New column New page Odd page Even page	WordPerfect does not have sections like Microsoft Word. When users convert a Microsoft Word file to a WordPerfect file, WordPerfect converts section breaks to equivalent breaks in WordPerfect. For example, new page in Microsoft Word becomes a page break in WordPerfect.
Headers/footers Odd/even Odd	Headers/footers Different odd and even Different first page	WordPerfect has two header and two footer settings: Header/footer A and Header/footer B. When you enable the Place on every page option, headers and footers on every page automatically convert to Header/footer A; when you enable the Place on every odd page option, headers and footers on odd pages automatically convert to Header/footer A; when you enable the Place on even page option, headers and footers automatically convert to Header/footer B.
 Related topics


Export formatting features

The following table contains formatting features for Microsoft Word and WordPerfect that help you export files more effectively.

Export from WordPerfect	To Microsoft Word	Notes
Hidden text	Annotation
	Templates	WordPerfect does not convert templates.
Footnotes Bottom of page Beneath text Number format Arabic ROMAN roman ALPHA alpha Asterisks Custom mark Start at Numbering Continuous Restart each page Restart Numbering 2" line separator	Footnotes Bottom of page Beneath text Number format Arabic ROMAN roman ALPHA alpha Asterisks Custom mark Start at Numbering Continuous Restart each page Restart each section Separator line Continuation message Continuation line	WordPerfect does not convert continuation messages or separator lines.
Endnotes Print endnotes here End of document Number format Arabic ROMAN roman ALPHA alpha Asterisks Custom mark Start at Numbering Continuous Restart numbering	Endnotes End of section End of document Number format Arabic ROMAN roman ALPHA alpha Asterisks Custom mark Start at Numbering Continuous Restart each section
Shapes	Drawing objects	WordPerfect converts all drawing objects, except braced brackets, to equivalent shapes.
Bookmarks	Bookmarks	WordPerfect converts bookmarks but preserves only the Go To feature. Because WordPerfect cannot nest or overlap bookmarks, a bookmark may not span all the text with which it is associated.
	Cross-references	WordPerfect does not convert cross-references.
Styles Paragraph Paired	Styles Paragraph Character	Microsoft Word styles convert to the appropriate WordPerfect style. Generally, converting styles works well; however, when Microsoft Word styles interact with direct commands in WordPerfect, the formatting may not be exactly the same as in the original document. Style names are truncated to 12 characters [image] WordPerfect ensures that the names are unique.
Graphics styles		WordPerfect exports the graphics style as a part of the exported graphic.
Index	Index	Microsoft Word has many index options. WordPerfect converts only text that is in the XE field command. WordPerfect automatically converts the index by using WordPerfect default settings.
Table of authorities	Table of authorities	Microsoft Word has many table of authorities options. WordPerfect converts only text that is in the TA field command. WordPerfect converts the table of authorities with the page numbers right justified with dot leaders.
Lists	Table of figures	Microsoft Word has many table of figures options. WordPerfect converts only text that is in the TC field.
Table of contents	Table of contents	Microsoft Word has many table of contents options. WordPerfect only converts text that is in the TC field command or styles heading 1 through heading 9. WordPerfect provides only five levels in the table of contents. As a result, levels 6 through 9 automatically become level 5 entries. When users convert a file, WordPerfect uses default style settings to create a table of contents. WordPerfect places text in the TC field command in hidden text with the mark for table of contents commands around it. Because the text is hidden, you must display hidden text before generating a new table of contents. If you do not display the hidden text when generating a new table of contents, these entries will not be placed in the table of contents.
	Routing slip	WordPerfect does not convert routing slips.
Document summary Descriptive name Subject Author Keywords Abstract	Document summary Title Subject Author Manager Company Category Keywords Comments Other fields Users defined Fields	WordPerfect does not convert the document summary for manager, company, or category.
Graphics box	Picture
Language	Language	WordPerfect does not support all languages. If WordPerfect does not support the language, it shows unknown language commands.
Boxes Borders Horizontal position Page Left Center Right Left Right Value Margin Left Center Right Left Right Value Column Left Center Right Left Right Value	Frames Borders Horizontal position Page Left Center Right Inside Outside Value Margin Left Center Right Inside Outside Value Column Left Center Right Inside Outside Value	WordPerfect does not convert color borders.
Boxes Neither side Larger side Captions	Frames None Wrapping Captions	WordPerfect converts text that wraps around the box to wrap around the larger side. When you position a box in the center of a column and there is sufficient room between the box and both margins, you can set the text wrapping to both sides.
Date	Date	WordPerfect converts Microsoft Word date formats to equivalent WordPerfect date formats.
Time	Time	WordPerfect converts Microsoft Word time formats to equivalent WordPerfect time formats.
Tables	Tables Formulas Number format	WordPerfect does not convert formulas or number formats; WordPerfect converts the formula result and places it in the cell as text.
Symbols (formerly called WordPerfect characters)	Form fields	WordPerfect converts a check box to a box character and a checked box to an enabled box character. WordPerfect does not convert any other form fields.
Symbols (formerly called WordPerfect characters)	Special character	WordPerfect converts special characters to equivalent symbols.
Hard break	Page break
Hard columns	Column break
Normal text	Caption
 Related topics


Export field commands

The following table contains field commands for Microsoft Word and WordPerfect that help you export files more effectively.

Export from WordPerfect	To Microsoft Word	Notes
Advance	ADVANCE field
	ASK field	WordPerfect does not convert the ASK field.
	AUTHOR field	WordPerfect does not convert the AUTHOR field to results text.
Display paragraph number	AUTONUM field	WordPerfect replaces AUTONUM with Paragraph Numbering if all heading levels in the Microsoft Word document are Arabic, followed by a period, with the previous level attached (for example, 1.1, 1.2, and so on).
Display paragraph number	AUTONUMLGL field	WordPerfect replaces AUTONUMLGL with paragraph numbering if all heading levels in the Microsoft Word document are Arabic, followed by a period, with the previous level attached (for example, 1.1, 1.2, and so on).
Display paragraph number	AUTONUMOUT field	WordPerfect uses default paragraph numbering to convert AUTONUMOUT from Microsoft Word documents.
	AUTOTEXT field	WordPerfect does not convert the AUTOTEXT field.
Barcode	BARCODE field
	COMMENTS field	WordPerfect does not convert comments.
	COMPARE field	WordPerfect converts only the results.
	CREATEDATE	WordPerfect converts only the results.
	DATABASE field	WordPerfect does not convert the DATABASE field.
Date	DATE field
DDE start and end	DDE field
DDE start and end	DDEHOT field
	DOCPROPERTY field	WordPerfect converts only the results.
	EDITTIME field	WordPerfect converts only the results.
	EXPRESSION field	WordPerfect converts only the results.
	FILENAME field	WordPerfect converts only the results.
	FILESIZE field	WordPerfect converts only the results.
	FILLIN field	WordPerfect does not convert the FILLIN field.
Box character	FORMCHECKBOX field	WordPerfect converts the check box to a box character. WordPerfect enables the box character, depending on whether the Microsoft Word check box is enabled or disabled.
	FORMLISTBOX field	WordPerfect does not convert the FORMLISTBOX field.
	FORMTEXTBOX field	WordPerfect does not convert the FORMTEXTBOX field
Object box	EMBED field
	EQ field	WordPerfect converts only the results.
	GLOSSARY field	WordPerfect does not convert the GLOSSARY field.
Hypertext	GOTO BUTTON field
	IF field	WordPerfect converts only the results.
Graphics box	IMPORT field	The box contains graphics on a disk.
Subdocument	INCLUDE field
Graphics box	INCLUDEPICTURE field	Box contains a graphic or a graphic on disk, depending whether the graphic in the INCLUDEPICTURE command is present in the document.
	INCLUDETEXT field	WordPerfect converts only the results.
Index definition	INDEX field
	INFO field	WordPerfect converts only the results.
	KEYWORDS field	WordPerfect converts only the results.
	LASTSAVEDBY field	WordPerfect converts only the results.
Object box	LINK field
Hypertext	MACROBUTTON field	WordPerfect creates a hypertext link when you convert a Microsoft Word file with MACROBUTTON. Since the macro name is a Microsoft Word macro, it cannot be used in WordPerfect.
	MERGEFIELD field	WordPerfect converts only the results.
	MERGEREC field	WordPerfect converts only the results.
	MERGESEQ field	WordPerfect converts only the results.
	NEXT field	WordPerfect does not convert the NEXT field.
	NEXTIF field	WordPerfect does not convert the NEXTIF field.
	NOTEREF field	WordPerfect converts only the results.
	NUMCHARS field	WordPerfect converts only the results.
	NUMPAGES field	WordPerfect converts only the results.
	NUMWORDS field	WordPerfect converts only the results.
Page number	PAGE field
	PAGEREF field	WordPerfect converts only the results.
	PRINT field	WordPerfect does not convert the PRINT field.
	PRINTDATE field	WordPerfect converts only the results.
	PRIVATE field	WordPerfect does not convert the PRIVATE field.
	QUOTE field	WordPerfect does not convert the QUOTE field.
	REF field	WordPerfect does not convert the REF field.
	RD field	WordPerfect does not convert the RD field.
	REVNUM field	WordPerfect does not convert the REVNUM field.
	SAVEDATE field	WordPerfect does not convert the SAVEDATE field.
	SECTION field	WordPerfect converts only the results.
	SECTIONPAGES field	WordPerfect does not convert the SECTIONPAGES field.
	SEQ field	WordPerfect does not convert the SEQ field.
	SET field	WordPerfect does not convert the SET field.
	SKIPIF field	WordPerfect does not convert the SKIPIF field.
	STYLEREF field	WordPerfect does not convert the STYLEREF field.
	SUBJECT field	WordPerfect does not convert the SUBJECT field.
Symbol (formerly called WordPerfect Characters)	SYMBOL field	Microsoft Word symbols that do not have an equivalent symbol in WordPerfect are automatically converted to a different font and the WordPerfect character that has the character set 12.
Table of authorities entry	TA field
Table of contents or list entry	TC field
Define table of authorities	TOA field
Define table of contents	TOC field
	TEMPLATE field	WordPerfect does not convert the TEMPLATE field.
Date/time command	TIME field
	TITLE field	WordPerfect converts only the results.
	USERADDRESS field	WordPerfect converts only the results.
	USERINITIAL field	WordPerfect converts only the results.
	USERNAME field	WordPerfect converts only the results.
Index entry	XE field
 Related topics


Printing

WordPerfect allows you to print a variety of documents including envelopes and labels.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	setting up a printer

•	using print settings

•	setting up a print job

•	previewing a print job

•	printing documents

•	printing double-sided documents

•	laying out a print job

•	controlling a print job

•	specifying items to print

•	printing document details

•	printing envelopes and labels

•	printing graphics

•	printing booklets

•	using printer commands

•	printing files to a disk

•	sending faxes

For more information about printing, see "Reference: Printing."


Setting up a printer

Before you can print a WordPerfect document, you must have a printer installed on your computer. For more information about installing a printer, refer to the Windows documentation.

Once you have installed one or more printers, you can configure them in a number of ways. You can add a printer, select a printer, and select the default printer for WordPerfect. You can also change printer properties and reformat documents for the default printer.

WordPerfect also lets you disable printer metrics. Printer metrics are used to determine line ending. If you disable printer metrics, printer fonts will not be visible in your list of fonts.

 How to


To add a printer

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Main tab.

3	Click Printers.

4	In the Printers dialog box, double-click Add printer.

5	Follow the steps in the Add printer wizard.

 Note

•	For more information about installing a printer refer to your Windows documentation.

 Related topics


To select a printer

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Main tab.

3	Choose a printer from the Name list box.

 Related topics


To select a printer as the default printer for WordPerfect

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Main tab.

3	In the Name list box, choose the printer you want as the default.

4	Click Edit settings.

5	From the Named settings dialog box, choose Default from the Name for current settings list box.

6	Click Replace.

 Note

•	WordPerfect no longer uses WordPerfect printer drivers (.prs files). When you retrieve documents created with old printer drivers, documents are reformatted for the Windows printer you have selected.

 Related topics


To change printer properties

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Main tab.

3	From the Name list box, choose the printer for which you want to change the properties.

4	Click Properties.

5	Change the printer properties.

 Note

•	WordPerfect no longer uses WordPerfect printer drivers (.prs files). When you retrieve documents created with old printer drivers, documents are reformatted for the Windows printer you have selected.

 Related topics


To reformat documents for the default printer

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Environment.

3	In the Environment settings dialog box, click the General tab.

4	Enable the Reformat documents for the WordPerfect default printer on open check box.

 Note

•	When you disable the Reformat documents for the WordPerfect default printer on open check box, WordPerfect looks for the printer with which the document was formatted. If that printer is not available, WordPerfect reformats the document for the current printer if necessary.

 Related topics


To disable printer metrics

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Convert.

3	In the Convert settings dialog box, click the Compatibility tab.

4	In the Options area, enable the Do not format document using print metrics check box.

 Related topics


Using print settings

Print settings remain effective until they are changed or you close the document. You can replace default print settings. You can also retrieve the settings and restore the default settings. You can retrieve default settings only if you have not replaced the default settings. By saving a configuration of print settings and assigning it a name, WordPerfect allows you to create named printer settings.

 How to


To replace default print settings

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Change any print settings.

3	Click the Main tab.

4	Click Edit settings.

5	In the Named settings dialog box, choose Default from the Name for current settings list box.

6	Click Replace.

 Related topics


To retrieve default print settings

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Change any print settings.

3	Click the Main tab.

4	Click Edit settings.

5	In the Named settings dialog box, choose Default from the Name for current settings list box.

6	Click Retrieve.

 Note

•	You can retrieve default settings only if you have not replaced the default settings.

 Related topics


To restore default print settings

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Change any print settings.

3	Click the Main tab.

4	Click Edit settings.

5	In the Named settings dialog box, choose Default from the Name for current settings list box.

6	Click Restore.

 Related topics


To create named printer settings

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Change any settings.

3	Click the Main tab.

4	Click Edit settings.

5	In the Named settings dialog box, type a name for the current settings in the Name for current settings list box.

6	Click Add.

7	From the Settings to save list, choose the types of settings you want to save.

If you want to save printer properties with the named printer settings, enable the Use printer properties from [system default] check box. You can choose to save the current printer properties with the named setting or retrieve the printer properties each time you apply the named setting.

You can also
Retrieve a named printer setting	Choose a setting from the Name for current settings list box. Click Retrieve.
Delete a named printer setting	Choose the setting from the Name for current settings list box. Click Delete.
 Note

•	For information about changing printer properties, see "To change printer properties."

 Related topics


Setting up a print job

Before you print a document, you must choose and properly configure the appropriate printing device driver. To find out how best to set up the printing device driver, consult the manufacturer's documentation for the printing device, the Windows documentation, or the service bureau that will print the work.

WordPerfect lets you set landscape or portrait orientation for printing. You can print documents in reverse order. You can also specify where paper is fed into the printer.

 How to


To set landscape or portrait orientation

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Page setup tab.

3	In the Orientation area, enable one of the following options:

•	Portrait [image] prints text and graphics on a page whose height is greater than its width

•	Landscape [image] prints text and graphics on a page whose width is greater than its height

 Related topics


To print document pages in reverse order

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Main tab.

3	Enable the Print in reverse order check box.

 Related topics


To specify where paper is fed into the printer

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Advanced tab.

3	In the Advanced options area, choose one of the following options from the Paper feed list box:

•	Left [image] specifies that the paper is being inserted at the left of the printer

•	Center [image] specifies that the paper is being inserted at the center of the printer

•	Right [image] specifies that the paper is being inserted at the right of the printer

 Related topics


Previewing a print job

Documents sometimes print differently than they appear on the screen. WordPerfect allows you to view a document the way it would print, without having to print it. While previewing a document, you can edit text, adjust margins, and print a document.

You can also print a document while in Print Preview mode.

 How to


To preview a print job

•	Click File [image] Print preview.

A check mark beside the Print preview command indicates that the print job is in print preview mode.

 Related topics


To edit text in print preview mode

1	In print preview mode, click the beginning of the text you want to edit.

2	Click View [image] Zoom.

3	Enable the 150% option.

4	Edit the text.

 Related topics


To adjust margins in print preview mode

1	Click the paragraph or page where you want the margin changes to start.

Adjustments to margins apply to the line in which the cursor is located and all subsequent lines.

2	Click Format [image] Margins.

3	Click the Page setup tab.

4	In the Document margins area, type values in the following boxes:

•	Left

•	Right

•	Top

•	Bottom

You can also
Set all margins equal to the last margin value edited	In the Document margins area, click Equal.
Set all margins to the minimum size allowed by the current printer	In the Document margins area, click Miniumum.
 Note

•	Most printers have an area around the edge of the page that they cannot print to. WordPerfect does not allow smaller margins than your printer can accommodate.

 Tip

•	If you want to change the margins for specified text, select the text.

 Related topics


To print from print preview

1	In print preview mode, click File [image] Print.

2	Click Print.

 Related topics


Printing documents

In addition to printing a document, you can print hidden text and print multiple copies of a file. You can also specify a default printer font for all new documents.

WordPerfect allows you to print a document saved on disk or on a network drive.

 How to


To print a document

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Main tab.

3	Choose a printer from the Name box.

4	In the Print range area, enable one of the following options:

•	Full document [image] prints the entire document

•	Current page [image] prints the page where the cursor is located

•	Pages [image] prints the pages specified in the page box

•	Selected text [image] prints the selected text in the document (only available if text is selected)

•	Document summary [image] prints only the document summary (only available if there is a document summary)

5	Click Print.

 Note

•	For information about printing specific pages, see "Printing multiple pages."

 Related topics


To print hidden text

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Display.

3	In the Display settings dialog box, enable the Hidden text check box.

4	Click OK.

5	Click Close.

6	Click File [image] Print.

 Related topics


To print multiple copies

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Main tab.

3	In the Number of copies box, type the number of copies you want to print.

If you want your copies collated, enable the Collate check box.

4	Click Print.

 Related topics


To specify a default printer font for all new documents

1	Click File [image] Document [image] Default font.

2	In the Document default font dialog box, choose a font from the Face list.

3	Choose a size from the Size list box.

 Note

•	The font settings you select in the Default font dialog box affect all documents created. However, if you change font settings in a document, those changes take precedence over the default printer font. For more information about font settings, see "Modifying font settings."

 Related topics


To print a document saved on disk or on a network drive

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Advanced tab.

3	Enable the Document on disk check box.

4	Click Browse.

5	In the Open file dialog box, choose the drive and folder where the document is stored.

6	Double-click the document name.

7	Click Print.

 Related topics


Printing double-sided documents

If your printer supports printing on both sides of the page, you can print double-sided from WordPerfect automatically. If your printer doesn't support double-sided printing, you can still print double-sided manually.

If a document contains printing codes specifying that a document is to be printed double-sided, but you want to print single-sided, you can override the codes.

 How to


To print a double-sided document automatically

1	Click File [image] Print.

Make sure that the printer you want to use is displayed in the Name list box. If it is not, choose the correct printer.

2	Click the Layout tab.

3	In the Automatic (printer supports two-sided printing) area, enable one of the following options:

•	Book (Side to side) [image] prints the document for binding the long edge of the page (like a book)

•	Tablet (Top to bottom) [image] prints the document for binding the short edge of the page (like a flip chart or tablet)

4	Click Print.

 Related topics


To print a double-sided document manually

1	Click File [image] Print.

Make sure that the printer you want to use is displayed in the Name list box. If it is not, choose the correct printer.

2	Click the Layout tab.

3	In the Manual (two steps) area, enable one of the following options:

•	Step 1: print odd pages

•	Step 2: print even pages

If you are printing the second side of the document, enable the option not used for the first side of the document.

4	Click Print.

5	When printing is complete, turn the pages over and reload them in the paper tray.

6	Repeat steps 1 to 4.

 Notes

•	Before printing a document, you may want to print a double-sided test page.

•	Some printer manufacturers discourage reinserting a page into the printer if it has been used for printing. Please refer to your printer documentation for more information.

 Related topics


To override two-sided printing codes

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Layout tab.

3	In the Two-sided printing area, enable the Off option.

 Related topics


Laying out a print job

WordPerfect allows you to specify the layout of a print job.

You can scale a print job, so that the printed area on the page is smaller or larger than normal. When scaling, you can choose to maintain the aspect ratio, so that the page height and width increase or decrease proportionally and the output is not distorted.

You can also adjust a print job to fit the output page by specifying the output orientation and margins.

You can tile a print job, so that portions of each page are printed on separate sheets of paper. You can then assemble the pages into one large sheet. This is useful for printing documents, such as banners, that are larger than the printer paper.

You can also print a document in thumbnail format. Thumbnails are miniature pictures of individual pages. Several thumbnails are printed on each piece of printer paper.

With WordPerfect, you can adjust advanced print options as well. You can print in color, print text only, print text as graphics, and control a number of other options.

 How to


To scale a print job

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Layout tab.

3	Enable the Scale/Tiling option.

4	In the Size area, type a value in the Width box.

If you do not want to maintain the aspect ratio, disable the Maintain aspect ratio check box, and type a value in the Length box.

5	Click Print.

 Note

•	If you enlarge a document by more than 100%, the document will be printed on multiple pages. The # of tiles list box shows the number of pages that will be used when you print the document.

 Tip

•	You can preview the layout of your document by clicking the Layout preview button in the Print dialog box.

 Related topics


To adjust a print job to fit the selected page

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Layout tab.

3	Enable the Fit to output page option.

4	Click Output page.

5	In the Layout dialog box, choose a page definition from the list.

6	In the Orientation area, enable one of the following options:

•	Portrait [image] prints text and graphics on a page whose height is greater than its width

•	Landscape [image] prints text and graphics on a page whose width is greater than its height

7	In the Margins area, type values in the following boxes:

•	Left

•	Right

•	Top

•	Bottom

8	Click OK.

9	Click Print.

 Tip

•	You can preview the layout of your document by clicking the Layout preview button in the Print dialog box.

 Related topics


To tile a print job

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Layout tab.

3	Enable the Scale/Tiling option.

4	Enable the Print tiled pages check box.

5	In the # of tiles area, type values in the following boxes:

•	Row

•	Column

 Tips

•	If the # of tiles column box is grayed, disable the Maintain aspect ratio check box.

•	You can preview the layout of your document by clicking the Layout preview button in the Print dialog box.

 Related topics


To print a document in thumbnail format

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Layout tab.

3	Enable the Thumbnails option.

4	Type a value in the Thumbnail boxes, to specify the number of thumbnails.

5	In the Page ordering area, enable one of the following options:

•	Down [image] prints slides consecutively in columns

•	Across [image] prints slides consecutively in rows

6	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Show borders [image] prints page borders around each thumbnail

•	Show index [image] prints the page number for each thumbnail

7	Click Print.

 Tip

•	You can preview the layout of your document by clicking the Layout preview button in the Print dialog box.

 Related topics


To adjust the advanced print options

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Advanced tab.

3	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Print in color [image] prints document in color

•	Print text only [image] prints only the text of a document

•	Print text as graphics [image] prints text as graphics rather than as fonts downloaded to the printer

•	Print Reveal Codes [image] prints only the information displayed in the Reveal Codes window

•	Include document summary [image] prints the document summary if one has been created

•	Use graphic transparency [image] allows you to apply a transparency for a graphic if the printer used does not provide support for a transparency

•	Keep print history [image] keeps a record of print jobs

•	Reset number of copies each time [image] resets the number of copies after each print job is complete

 Notes

•	The Use graphic transparency option is enabled by default.

•	For information about specifying a transparent color for a bitmap, see "To select a transparent color for a bitmap."

 Related topics


Controlling a print job

Once you have created a print history and submitted a print job, WordPerfect allows you to control the print job. For information about creating a print history, see "To adjust the advanced print options."

You can view the status of print jobs, so that you know where they are in the print queue and whether they are progressing normally.

You can view the history of print jobs sent to the printer during your current WordPerfect session. Print jobs display in the history list in the order they were sent to the printer, with the most recent job at the top.

You can also pause print jobs, although on network printers you can only pause your own print jobs. You can resume printing a paused print job, and you can cancel a print job.

 How to


To view the status or history of a print job

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Main tab.

3	Click Status.

 Tip

•	If you cannot view the history, make sure the Hide completed jobs command is disabled.

 Related topics


To pause a print job

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Main tab.

3	Click Status.

4	In the Print history and status dialog box, choose a document from the list.

5	Click Document [image] Pause printing.

 Related topics


To resume a print job

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Main tab.

3	Click Status.

4	In the Print history and status dialog box, choose a document from the list.

5	Click Printer [image] System printers.

6	In the Printers dialog box, double-click the active printer.

7	In the active printer dialog box, click Document [image] Resume.

 Related topics


To cancel a print job

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Main tab.

3	Click Status.

4	In the Print history and status dialog box, choose a document from the list.

5	Click Document [image] Cancel printing.

 Notes

•	On a network printer, you can cancel only your own print jobs.

•	You can cancel the job in the Windows print queue, in your network print queue, or at your printer. For more information about each of these options, see the respective product documentation.

 Related topics


Specifying items to print

WordPerfect allows you to print the current page of a document. You can also print sections of a document, such as specific volumes or chapters.

You can print specific pages or selected text. WordPerfect also allows you to print document summaries and comments. For more information about creating document summaries, see "Using document summaries." For more information about comments, see "Adding, editing, and deleting comments."

 How to


To print only the current page

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Main tab.

3	Enable the Current page option.

4	Click Print.

 Related topics


To print sections of a document

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Advanced tab.

3	Type a number or a combination of numbers in any of the following list boxes:

•	Page(s)/Label(s) [image] prints the specified pages

•	Secondary pages [image] prints the specified secondary pages

•	Chapters [image] prints the specified pages in the specified chapters

•	Volumes [image] prints the specified pages in the specified volumes

4	Click Print.

 Notes

•	The Volumes setting takes precedence over all other settings, followed by chapters, secondary pages, and then page(s)/label(s). For example, if you type 2 in the Volumes box, only pages and chapters within volume 2 will print, even if you have specified pages and chapters that are located in other parts of the document.

•	For more information about printing pages in sections, see "Printing sections."

 Tip

•	You can click the down arrow in the Secondary pages, Chapters, or Volumes list boxes to see a list of range patterns. Click the pattern you want, delete the supplied page numbers, and type the pages you want. You can also type a page range yourself if you are familiar with the patterns.

 Related topics


To print specific pages

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Main tab.

3	Enable the Pages option.

4	In the Pages box, type the pages you want to print.

A hyphen (-) between numbers defines a range of sequential pages (for example, 1-5 prints pages 1 to 5). A comma (,) between numbers defines a series of non-sequential pages (for example, 1, 5 prints pages 1 and 5 only). Any combination of hyphens and commas is supported (for example, 1-3, 5, 7, 10-12 prints the following pages: 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 11, and 12).

5	Click Print.

 Note

•	For more information about printing specific pages, see "Printing multiple pages."

 Related topics


To print selected text

1	Select the text you want to print.

2	Click File [image] Print.

3	Click Print.

 Related topics


To print the document summary

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Enable the Document summary option.

3	Click Print.

 Note

•	If there is no document summary created for the document you are using, the Document summary option is grayed. For information about creating document summaries, see "Using document summaries."

 Related topics


To print a comment

1	Click immediately after the comment.

2	Click Insert [image] Comment [image] Edit.

3	Click File [image] Print.

 Note

•	Any comments that have been converted to document text will print when the document is printed.

 Related topics


Printing document details

You can print file information for a document, which gets printed at the bottom of the page. In addition, you can show crop/fold marks when you print a document, so that you can clearly identify the edges of the printed area for such things as using a paper cutter.

You can print documents with codes displayed. Documents will print as they display in Reveal Codes view. For more information on displaying Reveal Codes, see "Displaying Reveal codes."

 How to


To print file information

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Layout tab.

3	In the Details area, enable the Print file information check box.

4	Click Print.

 Related topics


To print crop/fold marks

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Layout tab.

3	In the Details area, enable the Show crop/fold marks check box.

4	Click Print.

 Related topics


To print codes in a document

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Advanced tab.

3	In the Advanced options area, enable the Print Reveal Codes check box.

 Notes

•	When you print codes in a document, the printed document does not contain any information other than the codes and the text. For example, graphics and file information are not printed.

•	For information on displaying Reveal Codes, see "Displaying Reveal Codes."

 Related topics


Printing envelopes and labels

To print on different sizes of paper, you must select a page size definition so the printer can format and print a document as you want. For information about creating page size definitions, see "Choosing page size and orientation."

You can print envelopes in WordPerfect. WordPerfect allows you to print different sizes of envelopes. For information about creating envelopes, see "Creating envelopes."

You can select a label size. You can also print labels. For more information about printing labels see "Printing labels."

 How to


To print an envelope

1	Click the page of a document that is set up as an envelope.

2	Click File [image] Print.

3	Click the Main tab.

4	Click Print.

 Tip

•	You can also print an envelope by clicking the Print envelope button on the property bar.

 Related topics


To select a label size

1	Click the page where you want labels to begin.

2	Click Format [image] Labels.

3	In the List labels for area, enable one of the following options:

•	Laser printed [image] you are using a laser printer

•	Tractor fed [image] you are using a tractor-fed printer

•	Both [image] you are using a tractor-fed laser printer

4	Choose a label definition from the Labels list.

5	Click Select.

 Related topics


To print a label

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Advanced tab.

3	In the Page(s)/Label(s) list box, type the number of each label or a range of labels.

For example, to print label 3, type 3; to print labels 3 and 8, type 3, 8; to print label 3 through the end of the document, type 3-.

4	Click Print.

 Notes

•	The screen changes so that the first label is displayed and the rest of the document window is shaded. As you fill the labels with text, more label "pages" display in the window.

•	Labels that reach the edge of the sheet may not print correctly on printers with a wide nonprinting zone. Also, printing the same label on different printers may give different results. You must adjust the label size to account for the printer's nonprinting zone.

 Related topics


Printing graphics

The appearance of the graphics you print is determined partly by a process called dithering, which combines several differently colored pixels to create a new color or shade. With WordPerfect, you can change the dither method, the dither source, and halftone options for printing graphics. For more information about dithering, see "Dithering methods."

WordPerfect allows you to print color graphics, provided you have a color printer installed.

You can also print fonts as graphics This is useful if you do not want to download the font to the printer. This option can also be useful if you are having trouble printing reversed text (white text on a black background).

 How to


To change the dither method used for printing graphics

1	Right-click a graphic, and click Image tools.

2	Click Edit attributes.

3	In the Image settings dialog box, click Print parameters.

4	In the Dither method area, enable one of the following options:

•	Error diffusion [image] prints using a random pattern of dots, which provides superior blending and image detail in bitmap images

•	Ordered dither [image] prints using an ordered pattern of dots, which works well with both bitmap and vector images

•	Halftoning [image] prints using evenly spaced dots of variable diameter, which provides sharper image detail with bitmap images

 Note

•	Some dither method options are available only from certain printers.

 Related topics


To change the dither source used for printing graphics

1	Right-click a graphic, click Image tools.

2	Click Edit attributes.

3	In the Image settings dialog box, click Print parameters.

4	In the Dither source area, enable one of the following options:

•	WordPerfect

•	Printer

 Note

•	You should probably use the printer's settings as the dither source, which are enabled by default, unless these settings provide poor printing results.

 Related topics


To change a graphic's halftone options

1	Right-click a graphic, click Image tools.

2	Click Edit attributes.

3	In the Image settings dialog box, click Print parameters.

4	In the Dither method area, enable the Halftoning option.

5	In the Halftone options area, type a value in any of the following boxes:

•	Angle [image] changes the angle of the line screening

•	Lines per inch [image] changes the number of lines per inch in the halftone option

 Notes

•	Either option may be unavailable, depending on the printer driver selected.

•	Halftone options are available only for PostScript printers.

 Related topics


To print in color

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Main tab.

3	In the Print range area, enable one of the following options:

•	Full document [image] prints the entire document

•	Current page [image] prints the page where the cursor is located

•	Pages [image] prints the range of pages specified in the text boxes

•	Selected text [image] prints the selected text in the document (only available if text is selected)

•	Document summary [image] prints only the document summary (only available if there is a document summary)

4	Choose a color printer from the Name list box.

5	Click the Advanced tab.

6	Enable the Print in color check box.

7	Click Print.

 Notes

•	The Print in color check box may be enabled by default when you choose a color printer.

•	If you have a color printer selected, but the Print in color check box is grayed, click Properties on the Print tab, and make sure that the color settings are correct for your printer.

 Related topics


To print fonts as graphics

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Advanced tab.

3	Enable the Print text as graphics check box.

4	Click Print.

 Related topics


Printing booklets

When you divide pages to print in a booklet style (with pages folded in half), you can print with the pages numbered and ordered automatically.

 How to


To print a booklet

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Layout tab.

3	In the Two-sided printing area, enable the Print as booklet check box.

4	Click Print.

 Notes

•	The booklet option is available only when the document has divided pages.

•	In order to print a booklet properly, the physical page must be subdivided into two logical pages. For information about dividing pages, see "Specifying single-sided or double-sided pages for a document."

 Related topics


Using printer commands

You can control your printer using printer commands. Printer commands vary according to the printer installed. Check your printer documentation for information about printer commands to let you use the special functions of your printer.

You can insert printer commands into a document from a printer command file. For more information about printer commands, see "Printer commands."

WordPerfect allows you to insert a code that pauses the printer at the cursor.

After you send a printer command to the printer, you can reset the printer (using another printer command) to the printer's default values to restore normal printer functions. For more information about your printer's default values, see the printer manual.

 How to


To insert printer commands into a document from a printer command file

1	Click where you want to insert the printer command.

2	Click Format [image] Typesetting [image] Printer command.

3	In the Printer command dialog box, enable the Printer command filename option.

4	Click Browse.

5	Choose the drive and folder where the printer command file is stored.

6	Double-click the printer command filename.

 Related topics


To pause the printer at the cursor

1	Click where you want to pause the printer.

2	Click Format [image] Typesetting [image] Printer command.

3	Enable the Pause printer check box.

 Related topics


To reset the printer

1	Click where you want to insert the printer command.

2	Click Format [image] Typesetting [image] Printer command.

3	In the Printer command dialog box, enable the Command option.

4	In the Command box, type the printer's default values to insert in the document.

 Related topics


Printing files to a disk

You can print a WordPerfect document to a file on disk instead of to a printer. This is useful if you don't have a printer attached to your computer, or if you want to print the document on a printer other than the one attached to your computer. For more information about printing files to disk, see "Printing WordPerfect files to a disk."

 How to


To print a document to a file on disk

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Main tab.

Make sure the selected printer is the one you will send the document to.

3	Enable the Print to file check box.

4	Click Print.

5	In the Print to file dialog box, choose the file you want to print to.

6	Click Print.

 Note

•	To prevent overwriting the original document when you print a document to a file, be sure the new file has a different name than the current document.

 Tip

•	When you print a document to a file, the document can be printed directly from DOS to the printer it was formatted for. For example, if the file you printed to is named LETTER, saved to C:\, and the computer you are using is printing to LPT1, type copy/b c:\letter at a DOS prompt, then press Enter. You can also print the file using the DOS Print command. See the DOS reference manual for more information.

 Related topics


Sending faxes

WordPerfect allows you to fax documents if the fax drivers that came with your modem are installed. For information about installing fax drivers, consult the documentation included with your fax program. Before you can send a fax, you must select a fax driver.

You can fax a document from WordPerfect. When you fax a document, you can choose to fax the entire document or only specific pages or sections.

You can monitor the progress of a fax and view a list of the faxes sent during the current session . You can pause a fax. When you pause a fax, any other faxes in the list continue to transmit.

 How to


To select a fax driver

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Main tab.

3	Choose a fax driver from the Name list box.

 Related topics


To send a fax

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Main tab.

3	Choose a fax driver from the Name list box.

4	In the Print range area, enable one of the following options:

•	Full document [image] sends the entire document

•	Current page [image] sends the page where the cursor is located

•	Pages [image] sends the range of pages specified in the page box

•	Selected text [image] sends the selected text in the document (only available if text is selected)

•	Document summary [image] sends only the document summary (only available if a summary is created)

5	Click Fax.

Your fax program should launch to guide you through the faxing process.

 Related topics


To view the status of a fax

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	 Click the Main tab.

3	Click Status.

 Related topics


To pause a fax

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Main tab

3	Click Status.

4	In the Print history and status dialog box, choose a fax from the document list.

5	Click Document [image] Pause printing.

The absence of a check mark beside the Pause printing command indicates the fax is paused.

You can also
Resume sending a fax	Choose a fax from the document list. Click Document [image] Pause printing.
Cancel a fax	Choose a fax from the document list. Click Document [image] Cancel printing.
 Note

•	Fax jobs display in the order they were sent, with the current job at the top of the list.

 Related topics


Reference: Printing

This topic provides additional information about printing multiple pages, printing sections, printing labels, dithering methods, printer commands, and printing WordPerfect files to a disk.

 How to


Printing multiple pages

Some examples for printing multiple pages are listed in the table below.

To print	Type
Pages 3, 5, and 8	3,5,8
Pages 3 and 8	3,8
Page 3 through the end of the document	3-
The beginning of the document through page 3	-3
Pages 1 through 3 and 8	1-3,8
Pages 3, 5, and 9 through 15	3,5,9-15
You must type the page numbers in numerical order. For example, if you type 10, 1, 2, only page 10 will print. You can also print pages in reverse order. For more information about printing pages in reverse order, see "To print document pages in reverse order."

 Related topics


Printing sections

You can specify the current page, chapter, or volume number in a document and then print specific pages from each section.

For example, suppose a document has sections and page numbers as listed in the table below.

Section	Pages
Preface	i-vii
Chapter 1	1-12
Chapter 2	1-20
Chapter 3	1-10
Index	i-iii
Some examples for printing sections of this document are listed in the table below.

To print	In the Page(s)/Label(s) list box, type	In the Secondary pages, Chapters, or Volumes list boxes, type
Preface, page i	i
Chapter 1, page 1	1
Chapter 1, page 11	11	1
Chapter 2, page 13 (Chapter 1 has only 12 pages.)	13
Index, page i	i	2
Preface and chapter 1	-12
Chapter 1, page 1 through the end of the document	1-
Chapter 1, page 2 and chapter 2, page 2	2, 2:2
Chapter 1, page 1 though to chapter 2, page 3	1:1-2:3
Pages 4 through 7 of chapter 2	4-7	2
All of chapter 3	1-or999	3
All of the preface and index	i-vii,i-iii
Preface, pages i-ii	i-ii	1
 Notes

•	If no number is specified in the Volumes, Chapters, and Secondary pages list boxes, the first page of the document matching the page number (in Roman or Arabic) is printed.

•	A hyphen (-) between numbers defines a range of sequential pages (for example, 1-5 prints pages 1 to 5). A comma (,) between numbers defines a series of non-sequential pages (for example, 1, 5 prints pages 1 and 5 only). Any combination of hyphens and commas is supported (for example, 1-3, 5, 7, 10-12 prints the following pages: 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 11, and 12).

•	For more information about numbering pages, see "Inserting chapter, volume, and page total numbers."

 Related topics


Printing labels

Labels are set up in WordPerfect so that you can print to portions of a page. Essentially, label printing is set up in the same way as divided pages. The sheet or roll of labels is called the physical page, and each individual label is called a logical page.

WordPerfect includes many label definitions that are commonly used or that match commercially available labels. When you want to print labels or similar kinds of projects, browse the list to see if there is one that meets your needs.

The default labels file for the United States, Canada, and other countries that use Imperial measurements is Avery labels EN.LAB, where EN is the two-letter language code (such as en for English). The default labels file for countries that use the metric system is Avery labels A4.LAB. You can print the document with the label definition on another computer, but you cannot edit the definition itself.

Because the printer information is in the printer driver, the same document on a different computer will not necessarily have the same printer information. This could affect where information prints at the margin.

 Related topics


Dithering methods

Dithering places pixels with specific colors or values relative to other pixels of a specific color. The relationship of one colored pixel to another creates the appearance of additional colors that do not exist in the color palette.

With WordPerfect, you can control both the dithering method and the dithering source. Provided your printer supports these options, you can:

•	choose one of three color or grayscale blending methods (error diffusion, ordered dither, or halftone)

•	have dithering applied by WordPerfect or by your printer

Error diffusion scatters pixels irregularly, making edges and colors softer. Ordered dithering approximates color blends using fixed dot patterns; as a result, solid colors are emphasized and edges appear harder.

The halftone option is especially useful if you are making photocopies, since it can give your original image sharper detail. If you choose halftone dithering, you can further refine your selection, increasing the lines per inch (lpi) setting to increase image sharpness and reduce gray shading. You can use the dither source to specify where the bitmap or vector image is converted into the final format for printing. The image can be converted by WordPerfect or the printer. If you are using a PostScript printer, you can also specify the angle of line screening.

 Related topics


Printer commands

Printer commands vary according to the printer installed. Type printer commands using the syntax documented in your printer manual. To include a decimal value for a control code or character, enclose that value in angle brackets (such as <27> for ESC).

WordPerfect does not check that printer commands are valid. You will know that a command in the document or printer command file is invalid or incorrect only if the document fails to print correctly. If the text within a printer command is printed, this means that the printer does not recognize it as a printer command. Check your printer manual to be sure you have entered the command correctly.

 Related topics


Printing WordPerfect files to a disk

If a document will be printed by a service bureau, you can print it to a file and then deliver the file to the service bureau on a disk or as an e-mail attachment. The file can then be printed from another computer, whether or not that computer has a copy of WordPerfect installed.

Printing files to disk creates a PostScript file when you have a PostScript printer installed. PostScript is a page description language used to send instructions to a PostScript device about how to print each page. All the elements in a print job (for example, curves and text) are represented by lines of PostScript code that the printing device uses to produce the document.

PostScript is not the only method for sending instructions to a printing device, and some printing devices are not compatible with PostScript. However, there are several functions that are unavailable if you are not using the PostScript printing device language. For example, without PostScript, you cannot adjust color separations and halftone screens.

 Related topics


Publishing to the Web

WordPerfect lets you publish documents to HTML, XML, and to Portable Document Format (PDF). HTML documents can be viewed on the World Wide Web. PDF documents are viewed using the Adobe Acrobat Reader.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	publishing to HTML

•	publishing to XML

•	publishing to PDF

•	saving documents as PDF files

•	working with fonts in PDF files

•	editing PDF files

•	optimizing PDF files


Publishing to HTML

When you publish a document to HTML, WordPerfect saves it with a .htm filename extension. You can preview a document in a browser from within WordPerfect.

When you publish graphics to HTML, they are automatically converted to a commonly used Web format. You can also specify a graphics file format. If a graphic consists of few colors or sharp edges, such as in a line drawing, you may want to convert the graphic to the GIF format. If a graphic consists of broad tonal ranges, such as in photographs or scanned images, you may want to convert the graphic to the JPEG format.

 How to


To publish to HTML

1	Click File [image] Publish to [image] HTML.

2	Type a name in the HTML filename box.

3	Click Publish.

 Tip

•	You can also choose a file by clicking the Browse button in the HTML filename box.

 Related topics


To preview a Web document

•	Click View [image] Preview in browser.

 Related topics


To convert a graphic to GIF format

1	Right-click a graphic, and click HTML properties.

2	Click the Publish tab.

3	Enable the GIF option.

4	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Interlaced [image] lets the image appear interlaced

•	Transparency [image] lets you choose a transparency color by opening the Transparent color picker, and clicking a color.

 Related topics


To convert a graphic to JPEG format

1	Right-click a graphic, and click HTML properties.

2	Click the Publish tab.

3	Enable the JPEG option.

 Related topics


Publishing to XML

With WordPerfect, you can publish a document to XML, which allows you to reuse the content you created. The XML version of the WordPerfect document is based on the Docbook 4.2 XML DTD. For more information about the the Docbook 4.2 XML DTD, see http://www.docbook.org or http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.2/index.shtml.

Most of the WordPerfect document content is mapped to an equivalent element in the XML document; however, some of the content is not published to XML. In addition, subdocuments are not published as separate documents; they are integrated into one XML document.

For information about the WordPerfect document features that are supported when publishing to XML and how the document content is mapped to the Docbook elements, see "Publishing documents to XML."

 How to


To publish a file to XML

1	Click File [image] Publish to [image] XML.

2	Type a name in the XML filename box.

3	In the Graphic output options area, enable one of the following options:

•	GIF

•	JPEG

4	Click Publish.

You can also
Specify that a GIF image appears interlaced	Enable the Interlaced check box.
Specify that a GIF image be transparent	Enable the Transparent check box.
Specify the transparency color of GIF images	Open the Transparent color picker, and click a color.
Specify the quality of a JPEG image	Move the Quality slider, or type a value in the Quality box.
 Tip

•	You can also choose a file by clicking the Browse button in the XML filename box.

 Related topics


Publishing to PDF

WordPerfect lets you publish documents to PDF. Adobe Acrobat Reader allows you to print, view, and share PDF files. You can install Adobe Acrobat Reader from the WordPerfect Office CD.

You can publish the active document or a document to which you have access.

When you publish a table of contents, index, list, or table of authorities to PDF, WordPerfect numbers each marked heading or subheading sequentially. The entries display in the PDF as numbered bookmarks in the document.

 How to


To install Adobe Acrobat Reader

1	Insert the WordPerfect Office CD 2 into the CD drive.

If the Setup wizard does not start automatically, proceed to step 2; otherwise, proceed to step 4.

2	Click Start on the Windows taskbar, and click Run.

3	Type D:\SETUP, where D is the letter that corresponds to the CD drive.

4	Click Adobe Acrobat Reader setup.

5	Follow the instructions in the Adobe Acrobat Reader setup program.

 Related topics


To publish the active document to PDF

1	Click File [image] Publish to [image] PDF.

2	Click the General tab.

3	In the Filename list box, click Browse.

4	Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the file.

5	Type the filename in the Filename box.

6	Click Save.

7	In the Export range area, enable one of the following options:

•	Full document [image] publishes the entire file

•	Current page [image] publishes the active page only

•	Pages [image] publishes a portion of the file

•	Selection [image] publishes selected text

 Notes

•	The following document summary information is retained when you publish a document to PDF: title, subject, author, and keywords.

•	You can view the progress of a document on the PDF status bar. The status bar notifies you when a document has finished publishing.

 Tip

•	If you enable the Pages option in the Publish page number boxes, you can type the numbers of the pages that you want to publish. For example, typing 1-5 lets you publish pages 1 to 5, whereas typing 1,5 lets you publish pages 1 and 5.

 Related topics


Saving documents as PDF files

You can save a document as a PDF file. A PDF file can be viewed, shared, and printed on any platform provided that users have Adobe Acrobat or Adobe Reader installed on their computers. A PDF file can also be placed on an intranet or the World Wide Web.

When you save a document as a PDF file, you can choose from five preset PDF styles, which apply settings that are specific to a particular PDF style. For example, with PDF for the Web style, the resolution of the images in the PDF file will be optimized for the World Wide Web. You can also create a new PDF style or edit a preset style.

 How to


To save a document as a PDF file

1	Click File [image] Publish to [image] PDF.

2	Click the General tab.

3	From the PDF style list box, choose one of the following options:

•	PDF for document distribution [image] is best used for general document delivery. These documents can be printed on a laser or desktop printer.

•	PDF for the Web [image] uses JPEG bitmap compression, embeds fonts, and compresses text for publishing the document to the World Wide Web

•	PDF for editing [image] uses LZW compression, embeds all fonts, and includes hyperlinks, bookmarks, and thumbnails. It displays the PDF file with all the fonts, all of the images at full resolution, and hyperlinks, so that you can edit the file later

4	Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the file.

5	Type a filename in the Filename box.

6	Click Save.

 Related topics


To create a PDF style

1	Click File [image] Publish to [image] PDF.

2	Click the General tab.

3	Click Add.

4	In the Save PDF style dialog box, type a name for the style in the Save PDF style as list box.

 Tip

•	If you want to delete a PDF style, choose a style from the PDF style list box, and click Delete.

 Related topics


To edit a PDF style

1	Click File [image] Publish to [image] PDF.

2	Click the General tab.

3	Click Add.

4	In the Save PDF style dialog box, choose a style from the Save PDF style as list box.

 Note

•	When you edit a preset PDF style, you must save the preset style settings with a new name to prevent the original settings from being overwritten.

 Related topics


Working with fonts in PDF files

You can embed fonts in a PDF file, including base 14 fonts. Embedding fonts increases the file size but makes a PDF file more portable, since the fonts do not have to reside on other systems. When you embed base 14 fonts, WordPerfect adds them to your system, thus eliminating font variances on different systems. The base 14 PostScript fonts are resident on all PostScript devices.

You can also convert TrueType fonts to Type 1 fonts, which can increase file size if there are many fonts in a file. When you convert fonts, you can reduce file size by subsetting Type 1 fonts if you use only a smaller number of characters (for example English characters A to E).

You can also eliminate font variances on different computers by exporting text as curves. For example, if you are using unusual text characters, you can export the text as curves. This method does not use fonts, thus eliminating problems with font variances on different systems. Exporting text as curves increases the complexity of the file and can increase file size. For general document publication, embed fonts in a document rather than convert text to curves.

 How to


To embed fonts in a PDF file

1	Click File [image] Publish to [image] PDF.

2	Click the Objects tab.

3	Enable the Embed fonts in document check box.

If you want to install the basic fonts to your computer, enable the Embed base 14 fonts check box.

 Related topics


To convert TrueType fonts to Type 1 fonts

1	Click File [image] Publish to [image] PDF.

2	Click the Objects tab.

3	Enable the Convert TrueType to Type 1 check box.

If you want to reduce file size, you can create a subset of Type 1 fonts by enabling the Subset fonts check box and typing a percentage of fonts used in the Under % of charset box.

 Note

•	If you create a subset of Type 1 fonts, you should not edit or correct the PDF file using Adobe Acrobat, since the characters you add when editing may not be present in the file.

 Related topics


To export text as curves

1	Click File [image] Publish to [image] PDF.

2	Click the Objects tab.

3	Enable the Export all text as curves check box.

 Related topics


Editing PDF files

You can include hyperlinks and bookmarks in a PDF file. Hyperlinks are useful for adding jumps to other Web pages or to Internet URLs. Bookmarks allow you to link to specific areas in a PDF file. When the PDF file is first opened in Adobe Acrobat or Acrobat Reader, you can specify whether bookmarks are displayed.

You can reduce the size of a PDF file by compressing bitmaps. Bitmap compression is available for JPEG, LZW, or ZIP files. Bitmaps using JPEG compression have a quality scale ranging from 2 (high) to 255 (low). The higher the image quality, the larger the file size. Downsampling color, grayscale, or monochrome bitmaps also reduces file size.

ASCII and binary are encoding formats. When you publish a file to PDF, you can choose between exporting ASCII or binary files. ASCII creates files that are fully portable to all platforms. Binary creates smaller files that are less portable, since some platforms cannot handle the file format.

You can embed any type of file in a PDF file. For example, you can embed the WordPerfect file from which the PDF file was generated.

When you publish to PDF, you can choose the color model to apply to a file. WordPerfect lets you publish a PDF file with no color (grayscale) or use the RGB or CMYK color models. If you go to prepress, you may want to maximize color processing by selecting CMYK. If you post a PDF file to the World Wide Web, you may want to optimize the file size for the medium and choose RGB. Selecting grayscale produces the smallest PDF file of the three methods.

 How to


To include hyperlinks and bookmarks in a PDF file

1	Click File [image] Publish to [image] PDF.

2	Click the Document tab.

3	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Include hyperlinks

•	Generate bookmarks

If you want to display bookmarks on startup, enable the Bookmark option in the On start, display area.

 Related topics


To compress bitmaps in a PDF file

1	Click File [image] Publish to [image] PDF.

2	Click the Objects tab.

3	Choose one of the following from the Compression type list box:

•	LZW

•	JPEG

•	ZIP

 Tips

•	If you choose JPEG compression, you can specify the compression quality by moving the Quality factor slider.

•	You can compress text and line art in a PDF file by enabling the Compress text and line art check box.

 Related topics


To export a PDF file in an encoding format

1	Click File [image] Publish to [image] PDF.

2	Click the Objects tab.

3	In the Encoding area, enable one of the following options:

•	ASCII

•	Binary

 Related topics


To embed a file in a PDF file

1	Click File [image] Publish to [image] PDF.

2	Click the Advanced tab.

3	Enable the Embedded file check box.

4	Click Browse.

5	Choose the drive and folder where the file you want to embed is stored.

6	Double-click the filename.

 Related topics


To choose a color model

1	Click File [image] Publish to [image] PDF.

2	Click the Advanced tab.

3	Choose one of the following from the Output all objects as list box:

•	RGB

•	CMYK

•	Grayscale

•	Native

 Related topics


Optimizing PDF files

You can optimize PDF files for different versions of Adobe Acrobat or Acrobat Reader. You can select a compatibility to match the kind of viewer the recipients have. In WordPerfect, you can select from three compatabilities.

To optimize viewing of a PDF document on the Web, you can linearize a file to speed up processing time by loading one page at a time.

 How to


To select a compatibility

1	Click File [image] Publish to [image] PDF.

2	Click the General tab.

3	From the Compatibility list box, choose one of the following:

•	Acrobat 3.0

•	Acrobat 4.0

•	Acrobat 5.0

 Related topics


To linearize a PDF file

1	Click File [image] Publish to [image] PDF.

2	Click the Advanced tab.

3	Enable the Optimize for Web check box.

 Related topics


Reference: Publishing to the Web

This section contains detailed information about publishing documents to XML.

 How to


Publishing documents to XML

This section contains information about publishing WordPerfect documents using the Docbook 4.2 XML DTD. The section also lists the categories of items contained in a WordPerfect document and which Docbook DTD elements they are mapped to when publishing to XML.

The categories are as follows:

•	General document notes

•	Paragraph and text

•	Text attributes

•	Styles

•	Tables

•	Hyperlinks and bookmarks

•	Comments

•	Footnotes and endnotes

•	Chapters

•	Graphics

•	Textboxes and legacy equations (Equation editor 5.1 to 7.0)

•	Outlines

•	Table of Contents

•	Table of Authorities

•	Lists

•	Indexes

•	Cross-References

 Related topics


General document notes

When you publish a WordPerfect document to XML, each XML document begins with the standard <?xml?> processing instruction. Each XML document contains the following attributes: UTF encoding, UTF-8, and the XML specification version 1.0. In addition, each document contains a <!DOCTYPE> tag to specify that the Docbook 4.2 XML DTD is used by the xml document.

Each document will begin with the root element <book>. A book will consist of at least one chapter, which is contained in the <chapter> element.

If the WordPerfect document contains document properties, the XML document includes a <bookinfo> element. The elements contained within <bookinfo> contain the document properties. For information about document properties see "Using document summaries."

WordPerfect document summary content	Docbook element/attribute	Details
Abstract	<abstract>	<abstract> is a child of <bookinfo> and can contain 1 or many <para> elements. (One <para> element per hard return)
Author	<author>	<author> is a child of <bookinfo> and contains the document author's name.
Creation date	<date>	<date> is a child of bookinfo> and contains the document's creation date.
Keywords	<keywordset>	<keywordset> is a child of <bookinfo> and the parent of <keyword>. <keywordset> can contain 1 or many <keyword> elements.
	<keyword>	Each <keyword> element contains a keyword and space delimiter.
 Related topics


Paragraph and text

WordPerfect document content	Docbook element/attribute	Details
Paragraphs	<para>	Text is published as it appears in a WordPerfect document, except for extended characters (symbols). Characters or symbols are published using the entity value, which is similar to what happens in HTML.
 Related topics


Text attributes

The only text attributes that are published to XML are: bold, italic, underline, superscript, and subscript. All other attributes are ignored.

WordPerfect document content	Docbook element/attribute
Bold	<emphasis role="bold">
Italic	<emphasis role="italic">
Underline	<emphasis role="underline">
Superscript	<superscript>
Subscript	<subscript>
 Related topics


Styles

The only styles that are published to XML are heading styles (heading1 to heading9) and the address style.

All other styles are ignored when publishing a document to XML.

WordPerfect document content	Docbook element/attribute	Details
Heading1 to Heading9	<section role="headingx">	Where "x" is 1 to 9
Address style	<address>
 Note

•	The <section> element is not valid in tables, therefore, these features will not export in tables or anywhere else where <section> is invalid.

 Related topics


Tables

WordPerfect document content	Docbook element/attribute	Details
Tables	<table>	Each table contains one <tgroup> (table group) tag which is used to group all table elements.
Table names, for example TABLE A	<title>	The <title> element is a child of the <table> element .
Columns	<colspec>	Each column contains three attributes: colname, colwidth, and align.
	colname attribute of <colspec>	colname identifies a generated column name which may be used for cells that span horizontally
	colwidth attribute of <colspec>	colwidth specifies column width in inches.
	align attribute of <colspec>	align specifies column text alignment (justification).
Table headers	<thead>	<thead> is a child of the <tgroup> element. If applicable, it specifies the header rows in a table. Each <thead> element contains one or more <row> elements, one for each header row in the table. For information about table header rows, see "Creating table header rows and adjusting table rows."
Table rows	<row>	<row> can be a child of the <thead> or <tbody> element.
Table body	<tbody>	<tbody> is a child of the <tgroup> element. It contains all non-header rows. Each <tbody> element contains one or more <row> elements, one for each row in the table.
Table cells	<entry>	The <entry> element can contain the following attributes: align, valign, morerows, namest, and nameend.
	align attribute of <entry>	Specifies the text justification in a cell.
	valign attribute of <entry>	Specifies the vertical alignment in a cell.
	morerows attribute of <entry>	Specifies that the row spans vertically.
	namest of <entry>	Specifies the column name of the first column for column spanning.
	nameend of <entry>	Specifies the column name of the last column for column spanning.
 Related topics


Hyperlinks and bookmarks

WordPerfect document content	Docbook element/attribute	Details
Hyperlinks (internal)	<link>	Specifies that the hyperlink references a bookmark in the same document.
Bookmark name	linkend attribute of <link>	Specifies the name of a bookmark.
Hyperlinks (external)	<ulink>	Specifies that the hyperlink references an external document or any other URL. The <ulink> tag contains a url attribute.
	url attribute of <ulink>	Specifies a URL.
Bookmarks (no text selection)	<anchor>	Specifies a single bookmark.The <anchor> tag has an id attribute.
	id attribute of <anchor>	Specifies the bookmark name.
Bookmarks (with text selection)	<phrase>	Specifies a paired bookmark. The <phrase> tag has an id attribute.
	id attribute of <phrase>	Specifies the bookmark name.
 Related topics


Comments

WordPerfect document content	Docbook element/attribute	Details
Comments	<note>	The contents of comments are published to XML following the same rules as general WordPerfect document contents.
 Related topics


Footnotes and endnotes

The Docbook 4.2 XML DTD does not contain an element that is specific to endnotes, therefore, the endnotes are stored in the <footnote> element.

WordPerfect document content	Docbook element/attribute	Details
Footnotes	<footnote>
Endnotes	<footnote>	For endnotes, the <footnote> tag contains a role attribute.
	role attribute of <footnote>	Specifies that the footnote is an endnote.
 Related topics


Chapters

WordPerfect uses chapter numbers to create chapters. For each chapter number that appears in a document, a new chapter is created in an XML document using the <chapter> tag.

WordPerfect document content	Docbook element/attribute	Details
Chapters	<chapter>	The <chapter> tag is a child of the root element <book>. Each <chapter> tag has a label attribute.
	label attribute of <chapter>	Specifies the chapter number.
 Related topics


Graphics

WordPerfect document content	Docbook element/attribute	Details
Graphics box (anchored to a page or a paragraph)	<graphic>	The <graphic> element can contain the following attributes: align, valign, width, depth, and format.
Graphics box (anchored to a character)	<inlinegraphic>	The <inlinegraphic> element can contain the following attributes: align, valign, width, depth, and format.
	align attribute of <graphic> or <inlinegraphic>	Specifies the horizontal alignment of a graphic.
	valign attribute of <graphic> or <inlinegraphic>	Specifies the vertical alignment of a graphic.
	format attribute of <graphic> or <inlinegraphic>	Specifies that a graphic is a GIF or JPG. The value depends on the option chosen in the Publish to XML dialog box.
	width attribute of <graphic> or <inlinegraphic>	An optional attribute which specifies the width of a graphic in inches.
	depth attribute of <graphic> or <inlinegraphic>	An optional attribute which specifies the height of a graphic in inches.
 Note

•	A graphic can include an OLE object, but the OLE links will not work in the XML document. You can publish only the graphic portion of the OLE object.

 Related topics


Textboxes and legacy equations (Equation editor 5.1 to 7.0)

WordPerfect document content	Docbook element/attribute	Details
Text boxes	<section>	The <section> element has a role attribute of "textbox."
	role "textbox" attribute of <section>	Specifies that the <section> element plays the role of "textbox."
Equations	<section>	The <section> element has a role attribute of "legacy_equation" and a label attribute.
	role "legacy_equation" attribute of <section>	Specifies that the <section> element plays the role of "legacy_equation."
	label attribute of section	Defines the box anchoring type: paragraph, page, or inline.
 Note

•	The <section> element is not valid in tables, therefore, these features will not export in tables or anywhere else where <section> is invalid.

 Related topics


Outlines

WordPerfect document content	Docbook element/attribute	Details
Bulleted lists	<itemizedlist>
	mark attribute of <itemizedlist>	Specifies the bullet character.
Numbered lists	<orderedlist>
List items (bulleted or numbered)	<listitem>
	numeration attribute of <orderedlist>	Specifies the numbering type of the outline. For example, arabic or roman.
	continuation attribute of <orderedlist>	Specifies if the numbering continues from the previous outline or restarts.
	inheritnum attribute of <orderedlist>	Specifies if the numbering of the interior levels should contain the number of previous levels (for example, 4.2.3) or their own number (for example, 3).
 Related topics


Table of Contents

WordPerfect document content	Docbook element/attribute	Details
Table of contents	<toc>
	<tocpart>
	<tocchap>
Table of contents entries	<tocentry>	Includes a series of levels <toclevel1> to <toclevel5> which represent the levels found in the table of contents entries.
 Related topics


Table of authorities

Docbook does not have an equivalent element for tables of authorities.

WordPerfect document content	Docbook element/attribute	Details
Table of authorities	<section>	The <section> element has a role attribute of "TableofAuthority."
	role "TableofAuthority" attribute of <section>	Specifies that the <section> element plays the role of TableofAuthority.
Each entry in the table of authorities	<para>	The <para> element is a child of the <section> element. It contains a role attribute of "TOAEntry."
	role "TOAEntry" attribute of <para>	Specifies each entry in the table of authorities.
 Related topics


Lists

WordPerfect document content	Docbook element/attribute
Lists	<lot>
Each entry in the list	<lotentry>
 Related topics


Indexes

WordPerfect document content	Docbook element/attribute
Indexes	<index>
First level index entries	<primaryie>
Second level index entries	<secondaryie>
Combinations of first level and second level entries	<lotentry>
 Related topics


Cross-References

WordPerfect document content	Docbook element/attribute	Details
Cross-references	<xref>	Can contain a linkend attribute.
	linkend attribute of <xref>	Specifies the bookmark name of the anchor point that it references.
 Related topics


Sorting text and data

You can sort text and data in a current document or in a file on disk to organize information in a variety of ways.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	sorting

•	working with records

•	working with sort keys

•	creating and modifying sort definitions

You can use sort operators to define the expression for a sort. For information about sort operators, see "Sort operators."


Sorting

You can sort text by using the predefined sort definitions included in WordPerfect. The sorted text can be displayed on-screen or saved to a file.

By using sort definitions, you can sort text alphabetically or numerically. For example, you can alphabetize a word list, sort a table of students according to their grades, or create a chronological list of purchase dates. You can also set sort options to be able to undo a sort or to sort uppercase words before lowercase words.

You can sort by date. You can also sort items in reverse order so that the last displays first.

 How to


To sort text

1	Click Tools [image] Sort.

2	Click File to sort, and click a file.

3	Click Output to, and click a file.

4	From the Sort by list, choose one of the following:

•	First word in a paragraph [image] where each paragraph record ends with two or more hard returns

•	First word in a merge data fiIe [image] where each merge record ends with an ENDRECORD code

•	First cell in a table row [image] where each record is a row of cells

•	First word in a parallel column [image] where each record is a table column or parallel column

•	First word in a line [image] where each line record ends with a hard return

•	Date in a line [image] where each record ends with a hard return

•	Date in a table row [image] where each record is a row of cells

 Tip

•	You can sort only part of a document by selecting the text you want to sort.

 Related topics


To sort text alphabetically or numerically

1	Click Tools [image] Sort.

2	Click File to sort, and click a file.

3	Click Output to, and click a file.

4	Click New.

5	In the New sort dialog box, type a name in the Sort description box.

6	In the Sort by area, enable one of the following options:

•	Line (ends with one hard return) [image] sorts by line

•	Paragraph (ends with multiple hard returns) [image] sorts by paragraph

•	Merge record [image] sorts by merge record

•	Table row [image] sorts by table row

•	Parallel column row [image] sorts by table column or parallel column

•	Date [image] sorts by date

7	In the Keys (sorting rules) area, choose one of the following from the Type list box:

•	Alpha

•	Numeric

8	Choose one of the following from the Sort order list box:

•	Ascending [image] sorts from first to last or smallest to largest

•	Descending [image] sorts from last to first or largest to smallest

 Tip

•	You can sort only part of a document by selecting the text you want to sort.

 Related topics


To set sort options

1	Click Tools [image] Sort.

2	Click Options, and click one of the following:

•	Allow undo after sorting

•	Uppercase sorts before lowercase.

A check mark next to the command indicates that the command is enabled.

 Related topics


To sort dates

1	Click Tools [image] Sort.

2	Click File to sort, and click a file.

3	Click Output to, and click where you want to output the sorted text.

4	Click New.

5	In the New sort dialog box, type a name in the Sort description box.

6	In the Sort by area, enable the Line (ends with one hard return) option.

7	In the Keys (sorting rules) area, choose Date from the Type list box.

8	Choose one of the following from the Sort order list box:

•	Ascending [image] sorts from smallest to largest or first to last (1 to 9)

•	Descending [image] sorts from largest to smallest or last to first (9 to 1)

 Notes

•	You must define a sort key for each part of the date you want to sort. For information about defining a sort key, see "Working with sort keys."

•	When you enter a date, use forward slashes ( / ) or dashes ( - ) to separate the numbers in a date (for example, 12/25/59). WordPerfect interprets the date 12/25/59 as one word.

 Related topics


To sort by the last item in a list

1	Click Tools [image] Sort.

2	Do any of the following:

•	Click File to sort and choose a file.

•	Click Output to and choose where you want to output the sorted text.

3	Click New.

4	In the New sort dialog box, type a name in the Sort description box.

5	In the Sort by area, enable one of the following options:

•	Line (ends with one hard return) [image] sorts by line

•	Paragraph (ends with multiple hard returns) [image] sorts by paragraph

•	Merge record [image] sorts by merge record

•	Table row [image] sorts by table row

•	Parallel column row [image] sorts by table column or parallel column

•	Date [image] sorts by date

6	In the Keys (sorting rules) area, choose one of the following from the Type list box:

•	Alpha [image] sorts in alphanumeric order by letters and then by numbers

•	Numeric [image] sorts by numbers only

•	Date [image] sorts by date

7	In the Keys (sorting rules) area, choose one of the following from the Sort order list box:

•	Ascending [image] sorts from smallest to largest order or first to last (1 to 9)

•	Descending [image] sorts from largest to smallest order or last to first (9 to 1)

8	In the Keys (sorting rules) area, tab to the record subdivision boxes and type a value in one of the following boxes that corresponds to the part of the record you want to sort:

•	Line

•	Field

•	Word

•	Column

 Related topics


Working with records

You can sort records that meet certain criteria by using sort operators and sort keys. Sorting this way limits a sort to only the information you want.

When you combine sort operators and parameters, you create expressions (selection statements). For example, specifying "Smith" and "Nevada" lets you select only records that contain both words. For more information about using sort operators, see "Sort operators."

Each record contains the same categories of information, such as names with addresses, items in inventory, or client data. Text is divided into records, and records are subdivided into lines, words, fields, or columns depending on the text format. The subdivisions can be used to set criteria for the sort. The way records are divided depends on how the record is formatted, for example, in a table or in paragraphs.

The picture below illustrates that 1) each record on the list is sorted by the author's name, 2) each line is a record, and 3) tabs divide each record into four fields.

You can also extract records without sorting them. Extracting records allows you to collect the data you need and leave them in their original order.

 How to


To extract records without sorting

1	Click Tools [image] Sort.

2	Click File to sort and choose a file.

3	Click New.

4	In the New sort dialog box, type a name in the Sort description box.

5	In the Keys (sorting rules) area, tab to the record subdivision boxes and type a value in one of the following boxes that corresponds to the part of the record you want to sort:

•	Line

•	Field

•	Word

•	Column

If you want to define other sort criteria, type an expression in the Extract records box.

6	Enable the Extract records without sorting check box.

 Related topics


To specify sort criteria

1	Click Tools [image] Sort.

2	Click New.

3	In the New sort dialog box, type a name in the Sort description box.

4	In the Sort by area, enable one of the following options:

•	Line (ends with one hard return) [image] sorts by line

•	Paragraph (ends with multiple hard returns) [image] sorts by paragraph

•	Merge record [image] sorts by merge record

•	Table row [image] sorts by table row

•	Parallel column row [image] sorts by table column or parallel column

•	Date [image] sorts by date

5	In the Keys (sorting rules) area, choose one of the following from the Type list box:

•	Alpha [image] sorts in alphanumeric order by letter and then by number

•	Numeric [image] sorts by number only

•	Date [image] sorts by date

6	Choose one of the following from the Sort order list box:

•	Ascending [image] sorts from smallest to largest or first to last

•	Descending [image] sorts from largest to smallest or last to first

7	Tab to the record subdivision boxes and type a value in any of the following boxes:

•	Line

•	Field

•	Word

•	Column

If you want to further define a sort, type selection statements in the Extract records box.

 Notes

•	When you extract records, the original file remains unchanged; the output file contains only the records you specified.

•	Key 1 is sorted first, Key 2 is sorted next, and so on.

 Tips

•	You can also use parentheses to group parts of a selection statement.

•	You can sort only part of a document by selecting the text you want to sort.

 Related topics


Working with sort keys

You can add a sort key (or rule) to define how you want information sorted. You define the sort keys, and use them to specify which part of the record to sort and the order of the sort. The sort keys are applied in numerical order.

You can also edit a sort key definition, and delete a sort key.

 How to


To add a sort key

1	Click Tools [image] Sort.

2	Choose a sort definition from the Sort by list box.

3	Click Edit.

4	In the Keys (sorting rules) area, click a key.

5	In the Keys (sorting rules) area, click one of the following:

•	Add Key at end [image] adds a key to the end of the key list

•	Insert Key between [image] adds a key above the row in which the cursor is positioned

 Note

•	You can add up to nine sort keys.

 Related topics


To edit a sort key definition

1	Click Tools [image] Sort.

2	From the Sort by list box, choose a sort definition.

3	Click Edit.

4	In the Keys (sorting rules) area, click a key.

5	Modify any settings.

6	In the Keys (sorting rules) area, choose one of the following from the Type list box:

•	Alpha [image] sorts in alphanumeric order by letters and then by numbers

•	Numeric [image] sorts by numbers only

•	Date [image] sorts by date

7	In the Keys (sorting rules) area, choose one of the following from the Sort order list box:

•	Ascending [image] sorts from smallest to largest order or first to last (1 to 9)

•	Descending [image] sorts from largest to smallest order or last to first (9 to 1)

8	In the Keys (sorting rules) area, tab to the record subdivision boxes and type a value in one of the following boxes that corresponds to the part of the record you want to sort:

•	Line

•	Field

•	Word

 Related topics


To delete a sort key

1	Click Tools [image] Sort.

2	From the Sort by list box, choose a sort definition.

3	Click Edit.

4	Click a key.

5	Click Delete key.

 Related topics


Creating and modifying sort definitions

You can create a new sort definition, and you can edit, copy, or delete an existing sort definition.

When you define sort keys you are creating a sort definition. Sort keys (or rules) can define how you want information sorted. Sort keys determine which part of the record to sort and the order of the sort. The sort keys are applied in numerical order.

 How to


To create a sort definition

1	Click Tools [image] Sort.

2	Click New.

3	In the Sort description box type a name.

4	In the Sort by area, enable one of the following options:

•	Line (ends with one hard return) [image] sorts by line

•	Paragraph (ends with multiple hard returns) [image] sorts by paragraph

•	Merge record [image] sorts by merge record

•	Table row [image] sorts by table row

•	Parallel column row [image] sorts by table column or parallel column

•	Date [image] sorts by date

5	In the Keys (sorting rules) area, choose one of the following from the Type list box:

•	Alpha [image] sorts in alphanumeric order by letters and then by numbers

•	Numeric [image] sorts by numbers only

•	Date [image] sorts by date

6	In the Keys (sorting rules) area, choose one of the following from the Sort order list box:

•	Ascending [image] sorts from smallest to largest order or first to last (1 to 9)

•	Descending [image] sorts from largest to smallest order or last to first (9 to 1)

7	In the Keys (sorting rules) area, tab to the record subdivision boxes and type a value in one of the following boxes that corresponds to the part of the record you want to sort:

•	Line

•	Field

•	Word

•	Column

 Notes

•	When you create a new sort definition, it is saved in the Sort by list box.

•	You can customize a sort by using sort keys. For information about sort keys, see "Working with sort keys."

 Related topics


To edit a sort definition

1	Click Tools [image] Sort.

2	From the Sort by list box, choose a sort definition.

3	Click Edit.

4	In the Sort description box, type a new name.

5	Modify any settings.

6	In the Sort by area, enable one of the following options:

•	Line (ends with one hard return) [image] sorts by line

•	Paragraph (ends with multiple hard returns) [image] sorts by paragraph

•	Merge record [image] sorts by merge record

•	Table row [image] sorts by table row

•	Parallel column row [image] sorts by table column or parallel column

•	Date [image] sorts by date

7	In the Keys (sorting rules) area, choose one of the following from the Type list box:

•	Alpha [image] sorts in alphanumeric order by letters and then by numbers

•	Numeric [image] sorts by numbers only

•	Date [image] sorts by date

8	In the Keys (sorting rules) area, choose one of the following from the Sort order list box:

•	Ascending [image] sorts from smallest to largest order or first to last (1 to 9)

•	Descending [image] sorts from largest to smallest order or last to first (9 to 1)

9	In the Keys (sorting rules) area, tab to the record subdivision boxes and type a value in one of the following boxes that corresponds to the part of the record you want to sort:

•	Line

•	Field

•	Word

 Related topics


To copy a sort definition

1	Click Tools [image] Sort.

2	From the Sort by list box, choose a sort definition.

3	Click Copy.

4	In the Sort description box, type a new name.

 Related topics


To delete a sort definition

1	Click Tools [image] Sort.

2	From the Sort by list box, choose a sort definition.

3	Click Delete.

 Related topics


Reference: Sorting text and data

A sort operator is a symbol that instructs the soft to perform an action in an expression (selection statement). For example, the expression, key1=red & key3>5, extracts only the records where the information in the first sort key is red and the information in the third sort key is greater than five. When you define a sort definition, you can use sort operators.

 How to


Sort operators

When you define the criteria for a sort definition, you can use the sort operators listed in the following table.

Symbol	What It Does
|	Selects records that meet the conditions of either key.
&	Selects records that meet the conditions of both keys.
=	Selects records that have the same information in an indicated key.
<>	Selects records that do not match the information for an indicated key.
>	Selects records that have information greater than the information for an indicated key.
<	Selects records that have information less than the information for an indicated key.
>=	Selects records that have information greater than or equal to the information for an indicated key.
<=	Selects records that have information less than or equal to the information for an indicated key.
key g	Selects records that contain the word you specify anywhere in the record (global search).
 Notes

•	Each line of text is a field that can be divided into two or more fields using tabs and indents.

•	In merge records, fields end with the ENDFIELD code.

 Related topics


Using tables and charts

WordPerfect lets you create tables and charts.

Tables let you organize data in rows and columns of cells. Tables can contain text or graphics and can be formatted. You can use tables to present lists, schedules, financial data, comparisons, and summaries.

Charts can enhance the presentation of data in a document. You can use data charts to display comparisons, trends, and statistics, or you can use organization charts to display an organization's structure.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	creating tables

•	exporting tables to spreadsheets

•	selecting and moving table components

•	setting and inserting rows and columns in tables

•	joining and splitting table cells

•	deleting tables and table components

•	sorting data in tables

•	navigating named tables, table components, or floating cells

•	locking table cells

•	displaying table gridlines and formula indicators

•	adding diagonal lines to table cells

•	rotating table cell contents and skewing cells

•	adjusting table column widths

•	creating table header rows and adjusting table rows

•	applying fills, lines, and color to tables

•	applying borders to tables

•	creating table styles

•	changing text alignment

•	applying and customizing numeric formats

•	naming tables

•	using operators

•	entering formulas in tables

•	calculating formulas in tables

•	creating charts

For more information about table functions, see "Reference: Using tables and charts."


Creating tables

A table consists of rows, which run horizontally, and columns, which run vertically. Rows and columns intersect to create cells. A cell is like a small editing window in which you can insert text, graphics, numbers, or formulas. The cells in a table are labeled alphabetically from left to right and numerically from top to bottom.

The following image shows a table with: 1) rows and 2) columns.

You can create a table anywhere in a document window. When a table is in a graphics box, text can flow around the table.

You can create a floating cell, which is a single table cell that exists outside of a table. A floating cell can contain formulas, text, or numbers and can be linked to other parts of the document or to other documents to present a snapshot of information, such as a sales total.

You can create a table by importing a spreadsheet or database from applications like Quattro Pro, Lotus 1-2-3, and Microsoft Excel. You can also export a table to these applications.

You can also create a table by converting text. Tables can also be converted into text.

 How to


To create a table

1	Click Table [image] Create.

2	Type values in the following boxes:

•	Columns

•	Rows

3	Click Create.

You can also
Create a table in a graphics box	Enable the Drag to create a new table check box, click Create, and drag a rectangle anywhere in a document.
Create a floating cell	In the Create area, enable the Floating cell option.
 Tips

•	You can also create a table by clicking the Table QuickCreate button on the toolbar and dragging to specify the number of rows and columns for the table.

•	If the Shadow Cursor is enabled, you can create a table by dragging a rectangle and clicking Table in the QuickMenu.

 Related topics


To create a table by importing a spreadsheet or database

1	Click Insert [image] Spreadsheet/database [image] Import.

2	Choose a format from the Data type list box.

3	Choose Table from the Import as list box.

4	In the Filename box, type the folder and name of the file you want to import.

If you want to search for the file, click the Browse button and choose the drive and folder where the file is stored.

 Notes

•	When you import a spreadsheet workbook, WordPerfect imports only the first sheet.

•	A spreadsheet's functions will not work in WordPerfect after you import the spreadsheet.

 Related topics


To convert text to a table

1	Select tabular text.

2	Click Table [image] Convert.

3	In the Text delimiters area, enable one of the following options:

•	Commas [image] converts each comma in the text to a column

•	Tabs [image] converts each tab in the text to a column

•	Paragraphs [image] converts each paragraph mark in the text to a column

•	User defined [image] convert each defined item in the text to a column

If you enable the User defined option, you can type an item in the User defined box.

You can also
Make the column size match the size of the text	In the Format area, enable the Size column to fit option.
Make the columns equal size	In the Format area, enable the Equal column widths option.
Choose a table format	Click SpeedFormat.
 Note

•	Tables converted from tabular text may contain extra rows or cells. For information about joining extra rows or cells, see "Joining and splitting table cells." For information about deleting extra rows or cells, see "Deleting tables and table components."

 Tip

•	You can also convert a table to text. Select the table cells you want to convert, click Table [image] Convert, and enable the option you want to use.

 Related topics


To convert parallel columns to a table

1	Select parallel columns.

2	Click Table [image] Convert.

3	In the Text delimiters area, enable the Parallel column option.

 Related topics


Exporting tables to spreadsheets

You can export a table created in WordPerfect to a spreadsheet application, such as Quattro Pro, Lotus 1-2-3, or Microsoft Excel. If more than one table exists in the WordPerfect document, each table becomes one sheet in the spreadsheet application, with the first table becoming sheet one, the second table becoming sheet two, and so on.

 How to


To export a table to a spreadsheet

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the file.

3	Type a filename in the Filename box.

4	Choose a file type from the File type list box.

5	Click Save.

 Notes

•	When you want only one table in a document exported, you have to select the table before exporting it.

•	When you export a table, only the values and text in each cell are exported. Any formulas and functions within the cells are lost.

 Related topics


Selecting and moving table components

You must select a table or table component before you can perform a procedure, such as changing the number of rows or columns in the table or copying the format of one table cell to another. You can also select table components by using QuickSelect or Row/column indicators.

You can copy, cut, and paste table components. You can copy the format of a table cell and apply the formatting to another cell or group of cells. Formatting includes attributes, such as line style, line color, or fill, but does not include cell contents, such as text or formulas.

 How to


To select a table

1	Click anywhere in a table.

2	Click Edit [image] Select [image] Select table.

 Related topics


To select a table or table components by using QuickSelect

To select	Do the following
A cell	In the table, move the pointer until it changes to an arrow pointing upward or to the left, and click.
A row	In the table, move the pointer until it changes to an arrow pointing to the left, and double-click.
A column	In the table, move the pointer until it changes to an arrow pointing upward, and double-click.
The entire table	In the table, move the pointer until it changes to an arrow pointing upward or to the left, and triple-click.
 Tip

•	You can also select a cell by clicking in a cell and pressing SHIFT + F8.

 Related topics


To select rows, columns, or tables by using Row/column indicators

To select	Do the following
A row	Right-click in a table, and click Row/column indicators. Click the row indicator next to the row (for example, 1, 2, and so on).
A column	Right-click in a table, and click Row/column indicators. Click the column indicator above the column (for example, A, B, and so on).
The entire table	Right-click in a table, and click Row/column indicators. Click the rectangle in the top-left corner of the row and column indicators (the cursor becomes a double-headed corner arrow).
 Tip

•	You can also select rows, columns, and tables by clicking Table [image] Row/col indicators.

 Related topics


To copy table components

1	Select a range of cells, a row, or a column.

2	Click Edit [image] Copy.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	Selection [image] copies only the selected cells

•	Row [image] copies the selected row

•	Column [image] copies the selected column

•	Cell [image] copies the selected cell to the Clipboard, or down, or to the right a specified number of times

4	Click where you want to paste the cells, row, or column.

5	Click Edit [image] Paste.

 Tips

•	If you want to move a selected range of cells, a row, or a column, click Edit [image] Cut.

•	You can also copy table components by selecting a range of cells, a row, or a column, right-clicking, and clicking Copy.

 Related topics


To copy the format of a table cell

1	Click a formatted cell.

2	Click Format [image] QuickFormat.

A check mark beside the menu command indicates that the command is enabled.

3	Enable the Selected table cells option.

4	Click OK.

The pointer changes to the QuickFormat paintbrush cursor.

5	Click the cells you want to format.

 Tip

•	You can disable QuickFormat by clicking a cell and clicking Format [image] QuickFormat.

 Related topics


Setting and inserting rows and columns in tables

You can set the number of rows and columns in a table. You can also insert columns or rows in a table. New columns or rows have the same formatting as the column or row in which the cursor is positioned.

 How to


To set the number of rows and columns in a table

1	Select a table.

2	Click Table [image] Format.

3	Click the Table tab.

4	In the Table size area, type values in the following boxes:

•	Columns

•	Rows

 Tip

•	If you add columns and you want all the columns to be the same width, select a row and click Table [image] Equal column widths.

 Related topics


To insert a column or row in a table

1	Right-click where you want to insert the column or row, and click Insert.

2	Enable one of the following options:

•	Columns [image] lets you specify the number of columns you want to insert

•	Rows [image] lets you specify the number of rows you want to insert

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	Before [image] inserts new columns or rows before the row in which the cursor is positioned

•	After [image] inserts new columns or rows after the row in which the cursor is positioned

 Tips

•	If you insert a column, enable the Keep column widths the same check box to prevent the existing columns from changing width when the new column is added.

•	You can also insert a row by clicking the Insert row button on the property bar.

 Related topics


Joining and splitting table cells

You can join or split tables and table cells. Except for individually formatted cells, the second table acquires the formatting of the first table. When you join selected cells, the formatting of the top left cell is used for all the joined cells. You can also split any table horizontally into two tables. When you split table cells, each selected cell divides in two. The new cells have the same format as the original cell.

 How to


To join table cells

1	Select the cells you want to join.

2	Click Table [image] Join [image] Cell.

 Tip

•	You can also join table cells by clicking Table [image] Join [image] QuickJoin and selecting the cells you want to join.

 Related topics


To join two tables

1	Click View [image] Reveal Codes.

2	In the Reveal Codes window, delete all hard return codes and any other codes or text between the [Tbl Off] code of the first table and the [Tbl Def] code of the second table.

3	Click in the first table.

4	Click Table [image] Join [image] Table.

 Related topics


To split a table cell

1	Click in a cell.

2	Click Table [image] Split [image] Cell.

3	Enable one of the following options and type a value:

•	Columns [image] splits a table cell into columns

•	Rows [image] splits a table cell into rows

 Tips

•	You can also split table cells by clicking the QuickSplit row button, the QuickSplit column button, or the QuickSplit columns and rows button on the property bar, and clicking in a table cell. When the QuickSplit row button, the QuickSplit column button, or the QuickSplit columns and rows button appears pressed, you can also hold down SHIFT to toggle to the QuickJoin tool.

•	You can toggle back and forth between splitting cells and rows by clicking the QuickSplit row button or the QuickSplit column button, and holding down ALT.

 Related topics


To split a table

1	Click where you want to divide a table.

2	Click Table [image] Split [image] Table.

3	Click View [image] Reveal Codes.

4	In the Reveal Codes window, place the cursor between the [Tbl Off] code of the first table and the [Tbl Def] code of the second table, and press ENTER a few times to separate the two tables.

 Related topics


Deleting tables and table components

You can delete a row, column, or an entire table. If you want to maintain the table structure, you can delete the contents only or formulas only. When you delete a row, column, or an entire table, you can delete the data, the structure, or only the formulas.

 How to


To delete a table row or column

1	Select a row or column, and click Table [image] Delete.

2	Enable one of the following options:

•	Rows [image] lets you specify the number of rows to delete

•	Columns [image] lets you specify the number of columns to delete

If you want to delete only the contents of a row or column, enable the Cell contents only option.

 Related topics


To delete a table formula without deleting cell contents

1	Click in the cell containing a formula and click Table [image] Delete.

2	Enable the Formulas only option.

 Related topics


To delete the contents or structure of an entire table

1	Select a table.

2	Click Table [image] Delete.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	Entire table [image] deletes the contents and structure

•	Table contents only [image] deletes the contents

•	Formulas only [image] deletes the formulas

 Tip

•	You can also delete table contents by selecting a table, right-clicking, and clicking Delete.

 Related topics


Sorting data in tables

You can sort data in an individual column, in several columns, or in an entire table. For example, you can sort a list of names alphabetically, or you can sort a list of historical dates chronologically.

 How to


To sort data in a table column

1	Select a column.

2	Click the Sort table button on the property bar.

3	Choose one of the following options:

•	Alpha ascending [image] sorts data alphabetically from A to Z

•	Alpha descending [image] sorts data alphabetically from Z to A

•	Numeric ascending [image] sorts data numerically from lowest number to highest number

•	Numeric descending [image] sorts data numerically from highest number to lowest number

•	Dates ascending [image] sorts data chronologically from the oldest date to the most recent date

•	Dates descending [image] sorts data chronologically from the most recent date to the oldest date

 Note

•	If you use header rows in a table, they will not be sorted with the rest of the data in the table.

 Tip

•	You can sort more than one column at a time by selecting a group of columns or the entire table.

 Related topics


Navigating named tables, table components, or floating cells

You can go to named tables, table components, or floating cells in the active document.

 How to


To go to a named table

1	Click Edit [image] Go to.

2	Choose Table from the Go to what list.

3	Choose a table from the Select table list box.

4	Click Go to.

You can also
Go to a table component	Choose a table component from the Cell/range list box.
Go to a floating cell	Choose a floating cell from the Cell/range list box.
 Tip

•	You can also go to a named table, table component, or floating cell by clicking Table [image] Names.

 Related topics


Locking table cells

Locking a table cell prevents changes to the cell data. You can also disable a locked cell temporarily to edit the data in a cell.

 How to


To lock a table cell

1	Select a cell.

2	Click Table [image] Format.

3	Click the Cell tab.

4	In the Cell attributes area, enable the Lock cell to prevent changes check box.

 Related topics


To disable all locked table cells temporarily

1	Select a table.

2	Click Table [image] Format.

3	Click the Table tab.

4	Enable the Disable locks in all cells check box.

 Related topics


Displaying table gridlines and formula indicators

When a document contains many tables or heavily formatted tables, you can use table gridlines to make the document display faster.

Table gridlines are dimmed, dotted lines that replace lines and fill in a table. However, tables print with the lines and fill styles you have selected. You can choose to always display table gridlines.

You can also display the table formula indicators as blue markers in the bottom corner of a table cell.

 How to


To display table gridlines

•	Click View [image] Table gridlines.

A check mark next to the Table gridlines command indicates that the table gridlines are displayed.

 Related topics


To display table gridlines by default

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Display.

3	Click the Document tab.

4	In the Show area, enable the Table gridlines check box.

 Related topics


To display table formula indicators

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Display.

3	Click the Document tab.

4	In the Show area, enable the Table formula indicators check box.

 Related topics


Adding diagonal lines to table cells

You can add diagonal lines to a table cell. Diagonal lines divide the cell visually but do not split the cell in two. You can place data, such as dates and times, on both sides of the line in the cell.

 How to


To add diagonal lines to a table cell

1	Select a cell or a group of cells, and click Table [image] Format.

2	Click the Cell tab.

3	In the Draw diagonal line in cell area, enable one of the following options:

•	Upper right to lower left

•	Upper left to lower right

•	Both

 Note

•	The line style and color of the diagonal line is the same as the line style and color of the table lines; however, you cannot draw diagonal lines in some line styles, such as double lines.

 Related topics


Rotating table cell contents and skewing cells

You can rotate the contents of a table cell counterclockwise. Rotated text is placed in a text box.

You can skew (slant) the top row or the left or right column of a table. You can also change the skew angle and specify other skew options.

The following image shows several examples of skew table presets.

When you change the skew of the top row, you can square the edge of the first or last column to create a box effect. This prevents the cells from extending beyond the edge of the table.

 How to


To rotate table cell contents

1	Select a cell.

2	Click Table [image] Format.

3	Click the Cell tab.

4	Choose one of the following from the Rotate list box:

•	90 degrees

•	180 degrees

•	270 degrees

 Note

•	When you rotate a table cell containing a formula, the formula is permanently replaced by its result.

 Related topics


To edit rotated table cell contents

1	Right-click the contents in a rotated cell, and click Content.

2	Click Edit.

3	In the Text Box Editor, edit the text.

4	Click File [image] Close.

 Note

•	When you edit rotated text, the Text Box Editor displays the text in a separate editing window.

 Tip

•	You can also open the Text Box Editor by clicking the rotated cell contents.

 Related topics


To skew cells in a table

1	Select a table.

2	Click Table [image] Format.

3	Click the Skew tab.

4	Choose the cells you want skewed from the Skew settings list.

5	Click More.

6	From the Skew rows list box, choose one of the following:

•	None [image] lets you leave the top row unskewed

•	Top [image] lets you specify the skew angle for the top row

7	From the Skew columns list box, choose one of the following:

•	None [image] lets you leave the columns unskewed

•	Left column [image] lets you specify the skew angle for the left column

•	Right column [image] lets you specify the skew angle for the right column

You can also
Create a 90-degree angle with the first column and the top row	Enable the Square first column check box.
Create a 90-degree angle with the last column and the top row	Enable the Square last column check box.
Join the edge of the first or last column with the top row	Enable the Join corners check box.
Modify the skew angle of the top row, left column, or right column	Type a skew angle in the appropriate Angle box.
 Notes

•	The Square first column and Square last column check boxes are available only if the top row is skewed. The Join corners check box is available only if the left or right column is skewed.

•	You may need to increase the row height of a skewed row to accommodate the text. For information about changing the height of a row, see "To change the height of a table row."

 Tip

•	To prevent text from slanting, disable the Skew text check box.

 Related topics


Adjusting table column widths

You can specify an exact table column width, change unequal table columns so that they have equal widths, or change table column widths automatically.

 How to


To specify an exact table column width

1	Select a column.

2	Click Table [image] Format.

3	Click the Column tab.

4	In the Column width area, type a value in the Width box.

 Tip

•	Enable the Always keep width the same check box to maintain the current column width regardless of changes in the width of other columns or changes in the settings of left and right column margins.

 Related topics


To change unequal table columns to have equal widths

1	Select two or more cells from adjacent columns.

2	Click Table [image] Equal column widths.

 Related topics


To adjust table column widths automatically

1	Click in a table.

2	Click Table [image] Size column to fit.

 Note

•	The Size column to fit option changes a table column to the width of the widest text in the column cells.

 Related topics


Creating table header rows and adjusting table rows

You can create a table header row. A header row displays at the top of the page each time the table spans a page break.

You can allow a table row to continue across pages. You can also change the height of a table row and the number of text lines per row, and you can align a table between the left and right page margins.

 How to


To create a table header row

1	Select a row or several rows.

2	Click Table [image] Format.

3	Click the Row tab.

4	Enable the Header row check box.

 Related topics


To continue a table row across pages

1	Select a row or several rows

2	Click Table [image] Format.

3	Click the Row tab.

4	Enable the Divide row across pages check box.

 Related topics


To change the height of a table row

1	Select a row or several rows.

2	Click Table [image] Format.

3	Click the Row tab.

4	Enable one of the following options:

•	Single line only [image] sizes the row to fit one line of text, and hides extra text

•	Multiple lines [image] expands the row to fit more than one line of text

5	Enable one of the following options:

•	Automatic [image] lets you specify a height based on text height

•	Fixed [image] lets you specify a row height measurement

 Note

•	When you specify a fixed row height, the row stays at that height no matter how much text you insert in any cell in the row. As a result, some text might not display in a cell.

 Tip

•	You can also change a row's height by pointing to the top or bottom line until it changes into a double arrow, and dragging.

 Related topics


To set the horizontal position of a table

1	Select a table.

2	Click Table [image] Format.

3	Click the Table tab.

4	From the Table position on page list box, choose one of the following options:

•	Left [image] aligns the table to the left of the page

•	Right [image] aligns the table to the right of the page

•	Center [image] centers the table on the page

•	Full [image] aligns the table to fit across the page

 Note

•	If the table is not sized to fit the page margins, the table size remains unchanged when the margins change. To specify that a table resizes with the margins, choose Full from the Table position on page list box.

 Tip

•	You can also set the horizontal position by choosing From left edge from the Table position on page list box and typing a value.

 Related topics


Applying fills, lines, and color to tables

You can change the fill, line style, and line color of a cell, a group of cells, or an entire table. WordPerfect lets you create contrast between cells, rows, and columns by applying an alternating fill to a table. A fill style consists of a fill type and foreground and background colors. A fill type can be either a pattern, such as a checkerboard or fill percentage, or a gradient, which displays a progression between two colors that follows a linear, radial, conical, or square path.

You can apply an alternating fill to a table to create contrast between cells, rows, and columns.

The following image shows a table with an alternating fill applied.

A line style can include several lines together, such as a double line or triple line, and the lines can vary in thickness and style. A line style consists of lines that surround the selection (outside lines) and lines within the selection (inside lines). You can edit the two types of lines separately.

 How to


To change the fill of a table cell

1	Select a cell.

2	Click Table [image] Borders/fill.

3	Click the Cell tab.

If you want to change the fill of a group of table cells, enable one of the following options in the Apply lines to area:

•	Outside of current selection [image] lets you change attributes for the group of cells as if it were one cell

•	Each cell in selection [image] lets you change attributes for each selected cell in the group of cells

4	Click a fill style on the Fill palette.

5	Click a fill color on the Foreground or Background palettes.

You can also
Change the line style of a table cell	Click a line style on the Left, Right, Top, Bottom, or Outside line palettes.
Change the line color of a table cell	Click a line color on the Color palette.
 Related topics


To change the fill of all cells in a table

1	Select a table.

2	Click Table [image] Borders/fill.

3	Click the Table tab.

4	Click a fill style on the Pattern palette.

5	Click a fill color on the Foreground or Background palettes.

You can also
Change the line style of all table cells	Click a line style on the Line palette.
Change the line color of all table cells	Click a line color on the Color palette.
 Note

•	A fill style is set to None by default. You must choose a fill style for the foreground and background colors to take effect.

 Related topics


To apply an alternating fill to a table

1	Select a table, and click Table [image] Borders/fill.

2	Click the Table tab.

3	From the Type list box, choose one of the following options:

•	Rows

•	Columns

•	Both

4	In the Fill area, click a fill style on the Pattern palette.

5	In the Alternating fill area, click a fill style on the Pattern palette.

6	In the Fill area, click a fill color on the Foreground or Background palettes.

7	In the Alternating fill area, click a fill color on the Foreground or Background palettes.

8	In the Fill area, type the number of columns or rows for each fill style in the Span count box.

9	In the Alternating fill area, type the number of columns or rows for each fill style in the Span count box.

 Related topics


Applying borders to tables

You can add a border style to a table. You can choose one of the border styles provided with WordPerfect or create a custom border with line style, line color, drop shadow, and fill options, then name that style so that you can apply it to other tables in your document. You can also set a standard look for all tables in a document by defining a table style as the default setting. The line, fill, and border settings you create will be the default for other tables in this and other documents that use the same template.

 How to


To apply a border to a table

1	Select a table.

2	Click Table [image] Borders/fill.

3	Click the Table tab.

4	Click a border style on the Border palette.

 Related topics


To create a table border style

1	Select a table, and click Table [image] Borders/fill.

2	Click the Table tab.

3	Click Styles.

4	In the Graphics styles dialog box, click Create.

5	In the Create border style dialog box, type a name for the style in the Style name box.

6	Enable one of the following check boxes:

•	Left

•	Right

•	Top

•	Bottom

•	All

7	Click a line style on the Line style palette.

8	In the Border options area, click a line color on the Color palette.

9	In the Drop shadow area, choose a shadow type, color, and width.

 Tip

•	You can also to edit a table border style by choosing a style in the Graphics styles dialog box and clicking Edit.

 Related topics


To customize a table border style for the current table

1	Select a table.

2	Click Table [image] Borders/fill.

3	Click the Table tab.

4	Click a border style on the Border palette.

5	Click Custom.

6	In the Customize border dialog box, enable one of the following check boxes:

•	Left

•	Right

•	Top

•	Bottom

•	All

7	Click a line style on the Line style palette.

8	In the Border options area, click a line color on the Color palette.

9	In the Drop shadow area, choose a shadow type, color, and width.

 Related topics


To set a standard look for tables

1	Select a table, and click Table [image] Borders/fill.

2	Click the Table tab.

3	Click a border style on the Border palette.

4	In the Table border area, click a color on the Color palette.

5	Click a line style on the Line palette.

6	In the Default cell lines area, click a line color on the Color palette.

7	In the Fill area, click a fill style on the Pattern palette.

8	In the Fill area, click a fill color on the Foreground or Background palettes.

9	Click Default settings.

 Related topics


Creating table styles

WordPerfect lets you create a table style by using the formatting of a table from a document. When you save a table style, you can associate it with a specific template or with the active document only, or you can save it as a separate file. Saving a table style as a separate file is useful if you plan to use the table style with a different template or on a different computer.

You can also format a table by using a preset style. For example, you can give a table a new look by applying a business or decorative style.

You can rename and retrieve a table style that you have created and saved as a file; however, you cannot rename the preset table styles provided with WordPerfect.

You can also delete a table style that you have created and saved; however, you cannot delete the preset table styles provided with WordPerfect.

 How to


To format a table using a preset style

1	Select a table.

2	Click Table [image] SpeedFormat.

3	Choose a table style from the Available styles list box.

4	Click Apply.

 Related topics


To create a table style

1	Create a table that contains at least three rows and three columns.

2	Apply any text formatting, lines, borders, and fill that you want for the table style.

3	Select the table, and click Table [image] SpeedFormat.

4	Click Options [image] Setup.

5	In the Table style settings dialog box, enable the Current document option.

If you want to save a table style to a specific template, enable one of the following options:

•	Default template [image] associates the table style with the default template

•	Additional objects template [image] associates the table style with an additional objects template

6	Click OK.

7	Click Create.

8	In the Create table style dialog box, type a name for the new style.

 Related topics


To save a table style as a separate file

1	Create a table that contains at least three rows and three columns.

2	Apply any text formatting, lines, borders, and fill that you want for the table style.

3	Select the table, and click Table [image] SpeedFormat.

4	Click Options [image] Save as.

5	Type a path and filename in the Filename box.

 Related topics


To rename a table style

1	Select a table.

2	Click Table [image] SpeedFormat.

3	Choose a table style from the Available styles list box.

4	Click Options [image] Rename.

5	Type a new name in the Filename box.

 Related topics


To retrieve a table style

1	Select a table.

2	Click Table [image] SpeedFormat.

3	Click Options [image] Retrieve.

If you have styles saved in different locations, click Options [image] Setup, and click the location of the styles you want to retrieve.

4	Type a path and filename in the Filename box.

 Related topics


To delete a table style

1	Select a table.

2	Click Table [image] SpeedFormat.

3	Choose a table style from the Available styles list box.

4	Click Options [image] Delete.

 Related topics


Changing text alignment

WordPerfect lets you change the alignment of text in a cell, column, or table, and you can adjust the amount of white space around text in a cell. You can also customize how numbers are displayed and printed in a table or floating cell, and you can change the placement of decimal points in numbers.

 How to


To change the alignment of text in a cell

1	Select a cell, and click Table [image] Format.

2	Click the Cell tab.

3	Choose an alignment from the following list boxes:

•	Horizontal

•	Vertical

You can also
Change the alignment of text in a row	In the Properties for table format dialog box, click the Row tab. Choose an alignment from the following list boxes: Top Bottom
Change the alignment of text in a column	In the Properties for table format dialog box, click the Column tab. Choose an alignment option from the Horizontal list box.
Change the alignment of text in a table	In the Properties for table format dialog box, click the Table tab. Choose an alignment option from the Horizontal list box.
 Tip

•	To insert a tab in a table cell, press CTRL + TAB.

 Related topics


Applying and customizing numeric formats

Numeric formats determine how numbers are used, displayed, and printed in a table or floating cell. For example, you can format numbers as currency, and then customize the format so that it displays with or without the currency symbol or commas. WordPerfect lets you customize the date and time format by displaying numbers, text, or both.

You can also change the placement of decimal points in a table column or in an entire table. You can specify the number of digits that are placed after the decimal point, or you can place the decimal point at a specific distance from the right margin.

 How to


To apply a numeric format

1	Select a table.

2	Click Table [image] Numeric format.

3	Click one of the following tabs:

•	Cell [image] lets you define cell properties

•	Column [image] lets you define column properties

•	Table [image] lets you define table properties

4	Enable a numeric format option.

If you want to customize a numeric format, click Custom, and modify any options.

 Note

•	Customizing options vary depending on the numeric format you choose.

 Tips

•	To apply a numeric format to all new tables, click Use as default.

•	If you have already defined a numeric format for the current column, you can apply it to the current cell. To do this, enable the Use same format as column check box on the Cell page.

 Related topics


To customize a date/time format

1	Select a table.

2	Click Table [image] Numeric format.

3	Click one of the following tabs:

•	Cell [image] lets you define cell properties

•	Column [image] lets you define column properties

•	Table [image] lets you define table properties

4	Enable the Date/time option.

5	Click Custom.

6	Choose a format from the Date/time formats list box.

 Note

•	If you enter a two-digit year of 00 to 29, WordPerfect assumes you mean the year 2000 to 2029. If you enter a two-digit year of 30 to 99, WordPerfect assumes you mean 1930 to 1999. Use four-digit years to specify other dates.

 Related topics


To line up numbers on the decimal point

1	Select a table.

2	Click Table [image] Format.

3	Click one of the following tabs:

•	Column

•	Table

4	Enable one of the following decimal alignment options:

•	From right margin

•	Digits after decimal

 Related topics


Naming tables

You can name tables, floating cells, and table components, such as cells, a range of cells, rows, or columns. Naming a table or table component lets you reference it quickly. It is easier to remember a name, such as "Balance," than to remember a cell address. A name can contain letters, numbers, spaces, and the symbols #, $, ?, @, or _; however, the first character must be a letter, number, or underscore (_). You can also use text in a cell to name a table or table component.

You can edit and delete the names of tables, floating cells, and table components, such as cells, a range of cells, rows, or columns.

 How to


To name a table

1	Select a table.

2	Click Table [image] Names.

3	Choose the default table name from the Table/floating cell list box.

4	Click Edit.

5	In the Edit table name dialog box, type a name in the Name box.

 Related topics


To name a table component

1	Click a table component.

2	Click Table [image] Names.

3	Click Create.

4	In the Create table name dialog box, enable one of the following options:

•	Cell/range [image] specifies the cell or range in which the cursor is positioned

•	Row [image] specifies the row in which the cursor is positioned

•	Column [image] specifies the column in which the cursor is positioned

5	Type a name in the Enter name box.

 Related topics


To name table components using text in a cell

1	Select a cell that contains the text you want to use.

2	Click Table [image] Names.

3	Click Create.

4	In the Create table name dialog box, enable the Use text in current cell to name option.

5	Enable one of the following options:

•	Row [image] names the row in which the cursor is positioned

•	Column [image] names the column in which the cursor is positioned

•	Next cell to right [image] names the cell to the right of the cell in which the cursor is positioned

•	Next cell down [image] names the cell below the cell in which the cursor is positioned

 Related topics


To edit the name of a table component

1	Select a table component, and click Table [image] Names.

2	Choose the name of the table component from the Cell, row, column, or range list box.

3	Click Edit.

4	In the Edit table name dialog box, type a new name in the Name box.

If you want to delete a name, click Delete.

 Related topics


Using operators

You can use arithmetic and logical operators in table formulas. Logical operators compare two or more numeric or text values and return a result of 1 if the statement is true or 0 if the statement is false. You can also protect your formulas from being deleted accidentally. WordPerfect includes more than 90 preset functions for mathematical, engineering, or scientific calculations. For information about each function, see "Reference: Using tables and charts."

 How to


Arithmetic operators

Use the following arithmetic operators to create formulas in tables and floating cells.

Operator	What it does
+ (Addition)	Adds values.
- (Negation)	Makes values negative.
- (Subtraction)	Subtracts the value on the right from the value on the left.
* (Multiplication)	Multiplies values.
/ (Division)	Divides the value on the left by the value on the right.
= (Total)	Returns a total of the sums from the + operator.
% (Remainder)	Returns the remainder of the value on the left divided by the value on the right.
% (Percent)	Divides the value on the left of the operator by 100. Make sure that there is another operator or a separator following the Percent operator, or that the Percent operator is the last operator in the formula. If a percent sign (%) is between two values, it becomes the Remainder operator.
^ (Power)	Raises the value on the left to the power indicated by the value on the right.
! (Factorial)	Calculates the factorial of the number preceding it. Do not place an equal sign (=) following the Factorial operator; otherwise, it becomes the Not equal to operator sign.
 Related topics


Logical operators

You can use the following logical operators for calculations in tables or floating cells.

Operator	What it means or does
0	Equal to.
>	Greater than.
<	Less than.
< > or !=	Not equal to.
>=	Greater than or equal to.
<=	Less than or equal to.
& (AND)	When placed between two or more logical statements, returns a 1 if all the statements are true and a 0 if any of the statements are false.
! (NOT)	Inverts the meaning of a function or another operator.
| (OR)	When placed between two or more logical statements, returns a 1 if at least one of the statements is true and a 0 if all the statements are false.
^^ (XOR)	When placed between two or more logical statements, the EXclusive OR operator (XOR) returns a 1 if one or the other but not both of the statements in the formula are true (or if an odd number of statements are true). It returns a 0 if neither or both of the statements are true (or if an even number of the statements are true).
 Related topics


Entering formulas in tables

WordPerfect lets you add formulas or functions to tables. You can create formulas in tables by using arithmetic and logical operators. You can then insert the formulas in tables and floating cells. For more information about arithmetic and logical operators, see "Using operators."

The cells in a table are labeled alphabetically from left to right and numerically from top to bottom. When you use a cell address, a comma is used to separate individual cell references; for example, if you want to add the contents of B1 and B4, you would use the formula =SUM(B1,B4). A colon is used to separate two references in a range; for example, to add all of the contents of B1 through B4 you would use =SUM(B1:B4). Table cell references can be uppercase or lowercase.

You can insert and copy formulas and functions in table cells and floating cells. You can also type formulas directly into cells if you precede the initial symbols, functions, or numbers with + or =. However, it is best to enter formulas directly only if you know how to use functions and you remember the names you want to reference in formulas. Formulas you enter are calculated automatically when you move the insertion point out of the cell that contains the formula. You can also ignore a cell or a group of cells during calculations.

When you enter a formula in a table cell, an indicator will display in the lower right-hand corner of the cell. You can view the formula by pointing anywhere inside the cell. You can drag the formula indicator to another cell to copy the formula. You can also change the table settings if you do not want to show the table formula indicators.

 How to


To enter a formula in a table

1	Click Table [image] Formula toolbar.

2	Click in the Formula edit box to the right of the Accept the formula button.

3	Type cell addresses, operators, and values in the Formula edit box.

To insert the name of a table instead of a cell address, click Names on the Table formula toolbar, click a name, and click Insert.

4	Click one of the following:

•	Accept the formula [image] lets you insert the formula into the cell

•	Cancel changes [image] lets you cancel the formula or changes you have made

 Notes

•	WordPerfect does not recognize formulas in cells in which the numeric format is set to Text.

•	When you insert or cancel a formula, the Formula edit mode is disabled.

 Tip

•	You can also click the Formula toolbar button on the property bar to display the Table formula toolbar.

 Related topics


To create a function

1	Click Table [image] Formula toolbar.

2	Click in the cell in which you want to place the function.

3	Click the Functions button on the Table formula toolbar.

4	Choose a function type from the Type of functions to list list box.

5	Choose a specific function from the Functions list.

A description of each function displays in the section below the Type of functions to list and Functions lists.

6	Click Insert.

7	Type cell addresses, operators, and values of the function in the Formula edit box.

If you want to nest functions, type in the values of the initial function in the Formula edit box, and do the following:

•	Click the Functions button on the Table formula toolbar.

•	Choose a function type from the Type of functions to list list box.

•	Choose a function from the Functions list.

A nested function can be placed in any location within the previous function.

•	Type cell addresses, operators, and values of the nested function in the Formula edit box.

 Tip

•	In the Table functions dialog box, you can type the first few letters of a function to select it quickly.

 Related topics


To copy a table formula

1	Click in the cell that contains the formula you want to copy.

2	Click Table [image] Copy formula.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	To cell [image] lets you type the name of the cell in which you want to paste the formula

•	Down [image] lets you choose the direction from the list box, and type the number of times to paste the formula up, down, left, or right

 Tips

•	You can also click the Copy formula button on the Table formula toolbar. To display the Table formula toolbar, click Table [image] Formula toolbar.

•	You can also copy a table formula by dragging the table formula indicator from one cell to another.

 Related topics


To protect table formulas

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Environment.

3	Click the Prompts tab.

4	Enable the Confirm deletion of table formulas check box.

 Related topics


To disable the table formula indicators

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Display.

3	Click the Document tab.

4	In the Show area, disable the Table formula indicators check box.

 Note

•	By default, the Table formula indicators box is enabled.

 Related topics


Calculating formulas in tables

WordPerfect lets you perform spreadsheet calculations on table data. For example, you can calculate the sum of table cell values, list and use functions and names, calculate formulas, and fill in cells with incrementing patterns.

You can add values in a table quickly, and you can ignore a cell during calculations.

You can also fill a table with incrementing numbers or dates. A pattern of values must increment or decrement based on addition or subtraction. You cannot fill in a pattern of values that increment or decrement based on multiplication or division.

You can get more information about table formula errors, including a brief explanation of any ?? and ERR error symbols that display in a table as you calculate formulas.

 How to


To calculate a formula in a table

1	Click in a table.

2	Click Table [image] Calculate.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	Calculate table [image] calculates the table or floating cell in which the insertion point is positioned

•	Calculate tables in document [image] calculates all tables and floating cells in the document

 Related topics


To add values in a table quickly

1	Click the table cell below or to the right of the cells whose total you want to calculate.

2	Click Table [image] QuickSum.

 Note

•	If you click in a cell instead of selecting a range of cells, the calculated sum overwrites any values, formulas, or text in the cell.

 Tip

•	You can also add values by clicking the QuickSum button on the Table formula toolbar. To display the Table formula toolbar, click Table [image] Formula toolbar.

 Related topics


To ignore a table cell during calculations

1	Select a cell, and click Table [image] Format.

2	Click the Cell tab.

3	Enable the Ignore cell when calculating check box.

 Related topics


To fill a table with incrementing numbers or dates

1	Select the cells that contain the incremental or decremental pattern of values.

2	Click Table [image] QuickFill.

 Notes

•	You can extend the selection to include the cells in which you want to continue the pattern.

•	You can use Roman numerals, days of the week, months, or quarters, even if only one cell is used to establish the pattern. To repeat incremental or decremental numbers, however, you must select at least two cells with values to establish a pattern.

 Tip

•	You can also fill a table with incrementing numbers or dates by clicking the QuickFill button on the Table formula toolbar. To display the Table formula toolbar, click Table [image] Formula toolbar.

 Related topics


To get more information about table formula errors

1	Click a cell that contains an error.

2	Click the View error button on the Table formula toolbar.

 Related topics


Creating charts

WordPerfect lets you create and insert charts and graphs in a document. You can create a chart by using data in a table or a spreadsheet, or you can add data as you create the chart. A chart can be linked to a table so that the chart is updated whenever the table data changes. If you move the chart to a different place in the document, it maintains its association with the table.

The following image is an example of a data chart.

When you create a chart in WordPerfect, Corel Presentations menus and tools display. These menus and tools let you choose a chart type and edit the chart. You can choose from a variety of chart types, such as bar, line, and pie, and you can add chart attributes, such as a legend or frame. You can also use Corel Presentations to add text to charts; however, the text is saved as part of the chart, rather than with the document.

You can create an organization chart to display the structure of an organization or the relationships of people and positions.

The following image is an example of an organization chart.

You can edit and update charts and graphs. You can also edit the data that the chart is based on.

You can use the data in a table to create a chart containing the same information. When you create a chart from a table, the two are associated. You can specify that charts associated with tables automatically update when you make changes to the data in the tables.

For more information about charts, refer to the Corel Presentations online Help.

 How to


To create a data chart

1	Click where you want to insert a chart.

2	Click Insert [image] Chart.

3	Click Chart [image] Gallery, and choose a chart type.

4	In the Datasheet, click or double-click cells to edit their contents.

5	Click Chart [image] Layout/type.

6	In the Layout/type properties dialog box, choose style and appearance options.

7	Click Chart [image] Series.

8	In the Series properties dialog box, choose line and fill colors.

9	Click outside the chart to return to the document window.

 Tips

•	To import data from a spreadsheet or file, click Data [image] Import after Corel Presentations menus and tools display, and specify the filename of the document you want to import.

•	You can use this procedure to create a chart from a table. Create a table with the data to include in a chart and click in the table.

 Related topics


To insert an existing chart

1	Open the document that contains the chart using the application in which it was created (such as Corel Presentations or Quattro Pro).

2	Select the chart, and click Edit [image] Copy.

3	In the WordPerfect document, click Edit [image] Paste special.

 Related topics


To create an organization chart

1	Click where you want to insert the organization chart.

2	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Draw picture.

Corel Presentations menus and tools display, and a drawing frame displays in the document window.

3	Click Insert [image] Organization chart.

4	Click in the drawing frame.

5	Click a chart type.

6	Click OK.

7	Double-click a box in the chart, and type a name and title to replace the placeholder name.

8	Click outside the chart to return to the document window.

 Tip

•	You can also create an organization chart by playing the wp_org.wcm macro. Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Play, and double-click wp_org.wcm. For information about macros, see "Playing macros."

 Related topics


To edit or annotate a chart or graph

1	Right-click a chart or a graph, and click Chart object.

2	Enable one of the following options:

•	Edit [image] lets you edit the chart or graph in the active document

•	Open [image] lets you open the chart or graph to the full size of the screen

•	Annotate [image] lets you draw lines and add text to the chart or graph

 Tips

•	For in-place editing, you can also double-click the chart or graph.

•	For full-screen editing, you can also hold down ALT while double-clicking the chart or graph.

 Related topics


To edit chart data

•	Double-click a chart.

Corel Presentations menus and tools display.

To	Do the following
Edit the chart title	Double-click the title, change the text, and select the font, size, and other attributes you want to use.
Add a subtitle	Click Chart [image] Subtitle, and type the subtitle.
Change any other chart element	Right-click an item and click the Properties option.
 Note

•	You can display the datasheet by clicking View [image] Datasheet.

 Tip

•	You can update the chart that is based on the table in which you have edited data by right-clicking the chart and clicking Update chart from table.

 Related topics


To update charts associated with tables

1	Click in a table.

2	On the property bar, click Table [image] Calculate.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	Calculate table

•	Calculate tables in document

4	Enable the Update associated charts check box.

 Tip

•	To update charts associated with tables manually, right-click the chart, and click Update chart from table. Automatic calculation must be disabled to update a chart manually.

 Related topics


Reference: Using tables and charts

Using WordPerfect table functions

You can learn the basics of using table functions, descriptions of commonly used argument keywords, and definitions and examples of all the functions listed in the Table functions dialog box.

Each WordPerfect table function has a name and is followed by parentheses. If a function needs arguments (information), argument keywords display inside the parentheses.

For example, the CHOOSE function displays as

CHOOSE(Number, List)

in the Table functions dialog box. "Number" and "List" are the arguments of the function. The arguments are separated by a comma, and each argument is represented by a keyword that describes the type of information needed. Spaces are not needed between values, operators, and functions. Letters in addresses and functions can be uppercase or lowercase.

If a function needs no arguments, the function name is followed by empty parentheses:

COL( )

Brackets ( [ ] ) surrounding a keyword indicate that the keyword is optional and may be omitted:

CHAR([Set Number,] Number)

Do not include the brackets when entering the function.

 How to


Argument keyword descriptions

The following is a list of the most common argument keyword descriptions. You can click each one to find out more about it.

Block

Cell

Date/time

List

Value

Depreciation keywords

Growth/amortization keywords

 Related topics


WordPerfect table function listing

The following is a list of the WordPerfect table functions by category. You can click each one to find out more about it.

Date table functions

Mathematical table functions

Financial table functions

Logical table functions

Miscellaneous table functions

String table functions

 How to


Date table functions

Function
DATE( )	Returns the current date in the format you have selected for that cell, using Custom Date Types. If you have not selected a date format for the cell, the date will display in the document's current date format.
DATETEXT(Date)	Converts Date (a date value) into text (see DATEVALUE below). The format of the date text depends on the date setting in Custom Date Types or the document's current date format (see DATE above). DATETEXT(35711) = October 9, 1997
DATEVALUE(Text)	Returns the date value for the given text string. Each date from January 1, 1900, to April 19, 65493, is assigned a consecutive number in WordPerfect. The format of the date text depends on the setting in Custom Date Types or the document's current date format (see DATE above). You can use all digits in the year or only the last two when you enter the text string. If only two digits are given for the year, the function adds 1900 to the year. If no year is given, the function uses the current year. DATEVALUE("6/24/96") = 35239 DATEVALUE('5-19') = 35933 if the year is 1998 You can use MDY to calculate the date value from numeric values rather than a text string or to quickly calculate the date value for the current date.
DAY([Date Value])	Returns the day of the month (a number between 1 and 31) for the given date value. DAY(35603) = 23 35603 is the date value for June 23, 1997. For details about date values, see DATEVALUE above. If you do not include a date value, the function returns the current day.
HMS([Hour], [Minute], [Second])	Returns the specified or current time of day as a decimal number (time value). Hour must be an integer from 0 to 24, and the Minute and Second arguments must be integers from 0 to 59. HMS then converts the given time to a decimal number from 0 to 0.999988, with 0 equal to 12:00 midnight and 0.5 equal to 12:00 noon. HMS(9,42,38) = 0.404606 HMS may be entered in one of four ways: • HMS(Hour,Minute,Second) • HMS(Hour,Minute) • HMS(Hour) • HMS( ) If you include the hour with no minute or second argument, the function assumes the minute or second values to be zero. The hour, minute, and second arguments are optional. If none of them are specified, the function returns the decimal number converted from the current computer time. To calculate the decimal value of a time specified by a text string, use TIMEVALUE.
HOUR([Time Value])	Returns the hour of the given or current time. Only the decimal portion of a number is recognized. For details on time values, see HMS above. HOUR(0.404606) = 9, because 0.404606 is the decimal value for 9:42:38. The time value argument is optional. If no time value is specified, the function returns the current hour of the day based on the current computer time.
MDY([[Month, Day], [Year]])	Returns the date value of the specified month, day, and year. For details on date values, see DATEVALUE earlier in this appendix. The month must be a number from 1 to 12, the day must be a number from 1 to 31, and the year can be any year from 1900 through 65535. If you enter a two-digit number for the year, the function adds 1900 to the number (that is, 96 is the same as 1996). Because each piece of date information is treated as a separate argument, the names or addresses of cells containing appropriate numbers can be used for the month, day, and year entries. MDY can be entered in one of three ways: • MDY(Month,Day,Year) • MDY(Month,Day) • MDY( ) The date format depends on the settings in Custom Date Types or in the document's current date format. Any arguments that are not included are assumed to be the current month, day, or year. MDY(8,4,96) = 35280 MDY(8,4) = 35280 if the current year is 1996 MDY( ) = the current date value You can use DATEVALUE to calculate the date value from a text string rather than from numeric entries.
MINUTE([Time Value])	Returns the minute (0–59) of the specified or current time. The time must be given as a decimal number. For details on time numbers, see HMS earlier in this appendix. MINUTE(0.404606) = 42, because 0.404606 is the decimal value for 9:42:38. The time value argument is optional. If it is not specified, the function returns the current minute based on the current computer time.
MONTH([Date Value])	Returns the number of the month for the specified date value. For details on date values, see DATEVALUE earlier in this appendix. If you do not include a date value, the number of the current month is returned. MONTH(35280) = 8, because 35280 is the date value for August 4, 1996.
SECOND([Time Value])	Returns the second (0-59) of the given or current time. The time must be given as a time value. See HMS earlier in this appendix for details on time values. SECOND(0.404606) = 38, because 0.404606 is the decimal value for 9:42:38. The time value argument is optional. If it is not specified, the function returns the current second based on the current computer time.
TIME( )	Returns the current time as a text string. The time is updated each time the worksheet is recalculated. The time format depends on the settings in Custom Date Types or the document's current date format.
TIMETEXT(Time)	Returns the given time as a text string. TIMETEXT only uses the decimal portion of a number. See HMS earlier in this appendix for more information on time values. TIMETEXT(0.404606) = 9:42am The time format depends on the settings in Custom Date Types.
TIMEVALUE(Text)	Returns the decimal value of the time indicated by the given text string. See HMS earlier in this appendix for more information on time values. Text must be in one of the following formats: • "hour" • "hour:minute" • "hour:minute:second" The hour must be an integer from 0 to 24, and the minute and second must be integers from 0 to 59. You can also include "am" or "pm." TIMEVALUE("19:42:05") = 0.820891 To calculate a decimal value for a time entered as numbers rather than text, or to quickly calculate the decimal value of the current time, use HMS.
YEAR([Date Value])	Returns the year for the given Date Value. Returns the current year if no argument is included. See DATEVALUE earlier in this appendix for information about date values. Date Value can be any integer from 1 (January 1, 1900) to 23,227,139 (October 19, 65493). YEAR(35678) = 1997, because 35678 is the date value for September 6, 1997.
 Related topics


Mathematical table functions

Function
ABS(Number)	Returns the absolute value of the given number. Positive numbers remain positive; negative numbers become positive. ABS(–3) = 3
ACOS(Number)	Returns the arccosine (cos–1) of the given number. The result is an angle in radians from 0 to p. Number must be greater than or equal to –1 and less than or equal to 1. ACOS(.5) = 1.047198 (or p/3) Angles expressed in radians can be expressed in degrees using DEGREES. DEGREES(ACOS(.5)) = 60
ASIN(Number)	Returns the arcsine (sin–1) of the given number. The result is an angle in radians from –p/2 to p/2. Number must be greater than or equal to –1 and less than or equal to 1. ASIN(.5) = 0.523599 (or p/6) Angles expressed in radians can be expressed in degrees using DEGREES. DEGREES(ASIN(.5)) = 30
ATAN(Number)	Calculates the arctangent (tan–1) of the given number, returning an angle in radians from –p/2 to p/2. Number can be any value. ATAN(1) = 0.785398 (or p/4) Angles expressed in radians can be expressed in degrees using DEGREES. DEGREES(ATAN(1)) = 45
ATAN2(Xnumber, Ynumber)	Returns the arctangent (tan–1) of the angle represented by a point with the coordinates Xnumber and Ynumber. An angle is formed between the X axis and a line drawn from the indicated point (Xnumber, Ynumber) to the origin (0,0). The arctangent is then calculated on that angle. The result is a value in the range of –p( ) to p( ). ATAN2(3,4) = 0.927295
AVE(List)	Returns the average (mean) of a list of numbers. The average of the null set AVE( ) equals NA. AVE(15,2*10,SUM(1,2,4)) = 14
COS(Number)	Returns the cosine of the given number, which must be an angle in radians. COS(PI( )/3) = 0.5
DEGREES(Number)	Converts the angle represented by the given number from radians to degrees. DEGREES(PI( )/4) = 45 DEGREES is the inverse function of RADIANS. In other words, if DEGREES(PI( )/4) = 45, then RADIANS(45) = 0.785398 (or p/4).
EXP(Number)	Calculates the base of the natural logarithm, or "e" (2.7182818), to the power indicated by the given number. EXP(4) = 54.59815 EXP is the inverse function of LN. In other words, if EXP(4) = 54.59815, then LN(54.59815) = 4.
FACT(Number)	Returns the factorial of the specified number. The factorial of a number is the product of all the integers less than and equal to that number and greater than zero. For example, the factorial of 4 is 4 * 3 * 2 * 1 = 24. The smallest value that can be used is 0, and the largest value that can be used is 170. (The factorial of 0 equals 1.) FACT(3) = 6 Only the integer portion of a number with decimal places is used to perform the factorial function. For example, FACT(3.9) = 6, because 3! = 6. You can also use the Factorial operator (!) to calculate factorials.
* (GRAND TOTAL)	In the current column, adds the values in all cells above the formula cell that contain a TOTAL(=) calculation. (See = (TOTAL) later in this appendix.) This function is not listed in the Table Functions dialog box and it does not require you to type a name [image] just type an asterisk (*) to perform a grand total. You can also quickly sum values in cells using the QuickSum feature. For example, type an asterisk (*) in cell A40 to add the totals in the cells above A40.
INT(Number)	Deletes any fractional portion of the given number, returning only the integer portion. INT(25.77) = 25
LN(Number)	Calculates the natural logarithm of the given number. The number must be greater than zero. LN(2) = 0.693147 LN is the inverse function of EXP. In other words, if LN(2) = 0.693147, then EXP(0.693147) = 2.
LOG(Number1, Number2) or LOG(Number)	Calculates the logarithm of Number1 to the base specified by Number2. The numbers must be positive. If only one number is specified, the base 10 logarithm of that number is calculated. LOG(16,4) = 2 LOG(1000) = 3
MAX(List)	Returns the largest number in the given list of numbers. MAX(25,10,15) = 25 If you do not include any numbers (for example, MAX( )), the function returns NA.
MIN(List)	Returns the smallest number in the given list of numbers. MIN(25,10,15) = 10 If you do not include a list of numbers, MIN( ) returns NA.
MINUS(Number)	Returns the negative of the given number. If the number is already negative, a positive number is returned. MINUS(25) = –25 MINUS(–3) = 3 You can also use the Negation operator (–) to do the same thing.
MOD(Value1, Value2)	Returns the remainder after dividing Value1 by Value2. The values may be negative or positive. However, Value1 must have a greater absolute value than Value2 for MOD to work properly. MOD(6,2) = 0 MOD(7,2) = 1 MOD(–7,2) = –1 You can also use the remainder operator (%) to do the same thing. For more information, see "arithmetic operators" in the WordPerfect online Help.
PI( )	Returns the number 3.141592653589793. This is an approximation of the number p. SIN(PI( )/2) = 1
POWER(Num1, Num2)	Calculates Num1 raised to the power of Num2. POWER(3,2) = 9 You can also use the Power operator (^) to do the same thing. For more information, see "arithmetic operators" in the WordPerfect online Help.
PRODUCT(List)	Returns the product of all the numbers in the list. PRODUCT(2,3,4,A1:B4) = 1296 The result in this example above is the product of 2, 3, 4, and all the numbers in the range A1:B4. You can also use the Multiplication operator (*) to do the same thing. For more information, see "arithmetic operators" in the WordPerfect online Help.
QUOTIENT(List)	Divides the first number in the list by the second number, divides that result by the third number, divides that result by the fourth number, and so on. QUOTIENT(160,5,8,2.5) = 1.6 This example is calculated in the following order: ((160 / 5 = 32) / 8 = 4) / 2.5 = 1.6 You can also use the Division operator (/) to do the same thing. For more information, see "arithmetic operators" in the WordPerfect online Help.
RADIANS(Number)	Converts the given number from degrees to radians. RADIANS(90) = 1.570796 (or p/2) RADIANS is the inverse function of DEGREES. In other words, if RADIANS(90) = 1.570796, then DEGREES(1.570796) = 90.
RANDOM([Number])	Returns a random number greater than or equal to 0 and less than 1. You can manipulate RANDOM by using a number as the argument. If the given number is positive or there is no number argument, RANDOM returns the next random number in the sequence. If the given number is zero, RANDOM returns the previous random number again, without generating a new number in the sequence. If the given number is negative, RANDOM starts a new sequence of random numbers using the negative number to generate the starting number.
ROUND(Number, Precision)	Returns the Number rounded to the decimal place specified by Precision. Precision can be up to 15 decimal places. You can also specify a negative Precision, which rounds the number to the left of the decimal. A Precision value of –1 rounds to the nearest 10, –2 rounds to the nearest 100, and so on. ROUND(125.388,1) = 125.4 ROUND(125.388,–1) = 130
SIN(Number)	Returns the sine of the given number (an angle in radians). SIN(PI( )/6) = 0.5
SQRT(Number)	Returns the square root of the given number. The number must be positive (greater than zero). SQRT(25) = 5
STDEV(List)	Returns the standard deviation of a sample from the list of numbers. STDEV(25,15,20) = 5
STDEVP(List)	Returns the standard deviation of a population. STDEVP(25,15,20) = 4.082483
+ (SUBTOTAL)	Adds the numbers in the cells directly above the cell that contains the subtotal function. Note that this function is not listed in the Table Functions dialog box and does not require you to type a name [image] just type a plus sign (+) to perform a subtotal. You can also quickly sum values in cells using the QuickSum feature. For more information, see "QuickSum" in the WordPerfect online Help. Type + in cell A4 to add the values in the cells above A4.
SUBTRACT(List)	Subtracts the second number in the list from the first, then subtracts the third number from that result, the fourth from that result, and so on. SUBTRACT(57,22,6,18) = 11 The example above is calculated in the following order: ((57 – 22 = 35) – 6 = 29) – 18 = 11 You can also use the Subtraction operator, the minus sign (–), to do the same thing.
SUM(List)	Returns the sum of the numbers in the list. You can also specify a range of cells or use the name of a range of cells, as shown. SUM(25,10–2,3) = 36 SUM(a1:a10) SUM(bonus) You can also use the Addition operator, the plus sign (+), to do the same thing.
TAN(Number)	Returns the tangent of the given number (an angle in radians). TAN(PI( )/4) = 1
= (TOTAL)	In the current column, adds the values in all subtotal cells above the formula (subtotal cells contain a SUBTOTAL(+) calculation). See + (SUBTOTAL) earlier in this appendix. This function is not listed in the Table functions dialog box and does not require you to type a name [image] just type an equal sign (=) to perform a total. You can also quickly sum values in cells using the QuickSum feature. Type = in cell B35 to add the subtotals in the cells above B35.
VAR(List)	Returns the sample variance for a list of numbers. List must include at least two numbers. VAR(20,22,19,23,21) = 2.5
VARP(List)	Returns the population variance for a list of numbers. VARP(68,71,67,66) = 3.5 The list must include at least one number.
 Related topics


Financial table functions

Function
DDB(Cost, Salvage, Life, Period)	Returns the depreciation amount using the double-declining balance method of calculating depreciation. This method accelerates the rate of depreciation, so that more depreciation is written off in early periods than in later periods. The depreciation stops when the book value of the asset reaches the salvage value. In any one period, the book value equals the cost minus the total depreciation over all previous periods. DDB(5000,750,5,2) = 1200 In this example, the Cost of the asset is $5,000, the Life of the asset is 5 years, the Salvage value after 5 years is $750, and to find the amount of depreciation in the second year, a Period of 2 is used.
FV(Rate%, PV, Payment, Periods, [Type])	Returns the future value of an investment or loan. The example below finds the future value of an investment with no periodic payments. This investment is a six-month certificate of deposit (CD) with a $5000 deposit and an interest rate of 12.5%, compounded daily. The following formula finds the balance of the account at the end of the six months: FV(12.5%/365,–5000,0,365/2,0) = 5322.42 The interest rate percentage is divided by 365 because it is compounded daily. The period must also be expressed in days (365/2 equals six months). The present value (PV) is expressed as a negative number because you pay it at the beginning of the period. The result is positive because you get it back at the end of the period. The example below finds the future value of a loan after a specified number of periods. This loan is a $90,000 mortgage for 30 years at an annual interest rate of 11.75%. The monthly payment is $908.47 and is paid at the end of the period. The following formula finds the balance of the loan after 20 years: FV(.1175/12,90000,–908.47,20*12,0) = –63962.22 The interest rate is expressed as a decimal instead of a percentage. It is divided by 12 because it is compounded monthly. Because the rate is expressed in months, the period must also be expressed in months. The present value of the loan is a positive number because it is paid to you. The future value of the loan is returned as a negative number because it is money still owed on the loan.
IRR(List of Cashflows, Rate%)	Calculates the internal rate of return for a list (series) of cash flows. The first cash flow in the series is negative, representing the initial investment. An estimate of the rate of return (rate argument) must be specified as a percentage. IRR uses a sequence of estimates to calculate the internal rate of return. Because IRR uses approximations, you enter only an estimate for the second argument. In this example, the IRR for Project 4 is 7.07% (shown in cell H7). The Rate% used is 14%.
NPV(List, Rate%)	Calculates the net present value (the amount of money required now to produce the given cash flow in the future). The calculation is based on the specified interest rate. Each item in the list is the cash flow required at the end of a period. The cash flows must be listed in the order the periods occur (first period, second period, and so on). The period of the interest rate and the required cash flow must be the same. The interest rate can be entered as a decimal fraction (for example, .25) or as a percentage (for example, 25%). In this example, the numbers in cells B3, B4, and B5 are 15000, 20000, and 25000, respectively. NPV(B3:B5,12%) = 47,131.24
PMT(Rate%, PV, Periods, FV, [Type])	Returns the payment for a loan or investment. The following example finds the periodic payment needed to fully amortize (eliminate the balance of) a $125,000 mortgage for 30 years at an annual interest rate of 7.25%. To find the monthly payment made at the end of the period, use the following formula: PMT(7.25%/12,125000,30*12,0,0) = –852.72 The interest rate percentage is divided by 12 because it is compounded monthly, and therefore the period must also be expressed in months. The payment is negative because it is the amount paid to the lender, and the future value is 0 because the loan will be fully amortized. The type is 0 because payments occur at the end of the period. The following example finds the payment required for an investment with a specific present value to obtain a specific future value. The investment is a savings account that pays an annual interest rate of 8.5% with an initial deposit of $2,000. To find the required periodic deposit made at the end of the period to obtain a balance of $3,500 in 18 months, use the following formula: PMT(8.5%/12,–2000,18,3500,0) = –64.26 The interest rate percentage is divided by 12 because it is compounded monthly, and the period must also be expressed in months. The present value (PV) is negative because it is money that is paid into the savings account. The type is 0 because the payment is made at the end of the period. The resulting payment (PMT) is also negative because it is money that must also be paid into the savings account. The following example finds the periodic payment for an investment to obtain a specific future value with no present value. The investment is a profit-sharing program with your company in which a set amount is deducted from your paycheck at the end of each month. Your company offers an annual interest rate of 32%, and you want to have a balance of $1,500 in one year. To find the amount you need to have deducted from your paycheck, use the following formula: PMT(.32/12,0,12,1500,0) = –107.71 The interest rate in this example is expressed as a decimal. The rate is consistent with the period because both are expressed in months. The present value is 0, because you start with nothing. The resulting payment is negative, because you must pay it from your paycheck.
PV(Rate%, Payment, Periods, FV, [Type])	Returns the present value for a loan or investment. The following example finds the amount of a loan that you want to fully amortize at a given interest and payment rate and in a specific number of periods. The loan is a 30-year mortgage, with an annual interest rate of 7.125%. If you want to make payments of $850 at the end of each period, you can find the amount you can borrow by using the following formula: PV(7.125%/12,–850,30*12,0,0) = 126165.45 The interest rate percentage is divided by 12 because it is compounded monthly, and therefore the period must also be expressed in months. The payment is negative because it is the amount paid to the lender, and the future value is 0 because you want to fully amortize it. The type is 0 because payments occur at the end of the period. The following example finds what an investment's present value would have to be to reach a specified future value at a certain payment and period. The investment is a savings account that pays an annual interest rate of 5.5%. If you want to make a deposit of $45 at the end of each month and see a return of $2,500 after 18 months, use the following formula to find the amount you need to initially deposit: PV(.055/12,–45,18,2500,0) = –1526.68 The interest rate is expressed as a decimal. The rate is consistent with the period because both are expressed in months. Payment is a negative number because it is an amount paid into the account. The resulting present value is also negative because it must also be paid into the account. The FV is positive because it is money that you will receive from the account after 18 months.
RATE(PV, Payment, Periods, FV, [Type])	Returns the periodic interest rate for a loan or investment. The rate returned is based on the Periods. If the period is other than a year, you can adjust the result of the function to obtain the yearly rate. For example, if you use months to state the number of periods in this function, the result will be given as a monthly rate. To convert this monthly rate to a yearly rate, multiply the result by 12. The following example finds the interest rate required for an investment to obtain the specified future value with the specified payment and periods, with no present value. If you want to invest $50 at the end of each month for 2 years (24 months) and receive a return of $1,500, use the following formula to find the necessary monthly interest rate: RATE(0,–50,24,1500,0) = 0.018854 The period is expressed monthly (24), therefore the interest rate is also expressed monthly. Multiply the resultant rate (1.89%) by 12 to get the annual rate, approximately 22.6%. The payment is negative because it is an amount you must pay into the investment fund. The future value (FV) is positive because it will be paid to you. The type is 0 because payments occur at the end of each period. The following example finds the interest rate necessary for a loan to be fully amortized in the specified periods with the given present value and payment. An $8,000 loan is paid over 36 months, and you want to make payments of $270 at the end of each period. To find the required interest rate, use the following formula: RATE(8000,–270,36,0,0) = 0.01093 The period is expressed monthly (36), therefore the interest rate is also expressed monthly. Multiply the resulting rate (1.09%) by 12 to get the annual rate, approximately 13.1%. The payment is negative because it is an amount that you pay the lender. The type is 0 because payments occur at the end of each period. The present value of $8,000 is positive because it is an amount received from the lender and paid to you.
SLN(Cost, Salvage, Life)	Returns the straight-line depreciation amount for one period. The straight-line method takes the amount of depreciation for an asset (cost minus salvage) and divides it evenly over the life of the asset. SLN(5000,800,6) = 700 In this example the cost of the asset is $5,000, the life of the asset is 6 years, and the salvage value is $800 at the end of its life. The formula determines the amount of depreciation for each year.
SYD(Cost, Salvage, Life, Period)	Returns the sum-of-years digits depreciation amount for the specified period. This method accelerates the rate of depreciation, so that more of the asset is depreciated at the beginning of the asset's life than at the end. SYD(5000,800,6,4) = 600 In this example, the cost of the asset is $5,000, the life of the asset is 6 years, and the salvage value is $800. The period is 4 to find the depreciation amount for the fourth year.
TERM(Rate%, PV, Payment, FV, [Type])	Returns the term (number of periods) for a loan or investment. The example below finds the number of periods required for an investment to obtain the specified future value with the given interest rate and payment and with no present value. You will obtain $3,000 by depositing $50 at the end of each month in a savings account that pays a yearly interest rate of 8.5%. To find the number of periods (months) it will take to accumulate $3,000, use the following formula: TERM(8.5%/12,0,–50,3000,0) = 50.2 The interest rate percentage is divided by 12 because it is compounded monthly, and therefore the term is also months (50.2 months). The payment is negative because it is an amount to be paid into the investment. The future value is positive because it is an amount you will receive from the investment. The type is 0 because payments occur at the end of the period. The example below finds the number of periods needed for a loan to fully amortize with the specified interest rate, present value, and payment. The loan's present value is $8,000 and you want to make payments of $230 at the end of the period. If the current interest rate is 11.5%, use the following formula to determine the length of the loan: TERM(.115/12,8000,–230,0,0) = 42.5 The interest rate is expressed as a decimal and is divided by 12 because the period is monthly. Payment is a negative number because it is an amount you will pay to the lender. The present value is positive because it is an amount you will receive from the lender. The resultant term is expressed in months.
 Related topics


Logical table functions

Function
AND(List)	Returns the logical AND of the given list of numbers. A list of logical statements is placed between the parentheses. If all the statements are true, the number 1 (true) is returned. If any of the statements are false, 0 (false) is returned. AND(45>10,10+5=16,5<7) = 0 In the above list, the statement "10+5=16" is false, so 0 is returned. You can also use the And operator (&) to do the same thing. For more information, see "arithmetic operators" in the WordPerfect online Help.
FALSE( )	Returns the logical value 0 (false). Use FALSE with functions that require a logical value of 0 (false), such as IF. IF(B4<=100,True( ),False( )) = 0 when B4 contains a value greater than 100.
IF(Condition, Val1, Val2)	Returns Val1 or Val2, depending on whether the condition is true or false. The condition can be any logical statement. If the statement is true, Val1 is returned; if it is false, Val2 is returned. A value may be a number; text string; cell address or name; a function, such as NA, FALSE, or TRUE; or another formula. IF(2<3,'True',NA( )) = True IF(5*5<=0,25,10/2) = 5
ISERR(Cell)	Returns the number 1 (true) if any formula error ("??" or "ERR") is found in the given cell. If no error is found, 0 (false) is returned.
ISERR2(Cell)	Returns the number 1 (true) if a real formula error ("??") is found in the given cell. If no real formula error is found, returns a 0 (false). A real formula error is one that originates in the given cell and produces a "??" error message in the cell. An error ("ERR") that results from referencing another cell containing an error is not a real formula error. For example, if 2.5/0 is entered in cell F10 and F10+1 is entered in cell F11, a "??" message displays in cell F10 and an "ERR" message displays in cell F11. In this case, ISERR2(F10) returns 1 and ISERR2(F11) returns 0.
ISNA(List)	Determines if a cell or range is empty (or "NA"). The list may have one or more cell references. If the cells referred to in the list have no entries, the number 1 (true) is returned to the formula cell. If even one entry exists, 0 (false) is returned. ISNA(tax,B11:B20,A5) = 0 In this example, the cell named "tax" and cell A5 have no entries, but there is an entry in the range B11:B20, so 0 is returned.
ISTEXT(List)	Determines whether the cells referred to in the list contain text. If at least one of the cells in the list contains text and none of the cells contain numbers, 1 (true) is returned; if even one cell contains a number, 0 (false) is returned. ISTEXT(A4,company,E5:G9) = 1 In this example, 1 is returned, because cell A4, the cell named "company," and four of the cells in the range E5:G9 contain text, and none of the cells contain a number.
ISVALUE(List)	Determines whether the cells referred to in the list contain numbers. If at least one of the cells in the list contains a number and none of the cells contain text, 1 (true) is returned; if even one cell contains text, or if all the cells are empty, 0 (false) is returned. ISVALUE(C6,interest,D22:H26) = 0 In this example, cell C6 contains text, so 0 is returned.
NA( )	Returns the NA (not available) value [image] an empty cell. IF(2>3,'True',NA( )) = an empty cell
NOT(Number)	Returns the number 1 to the formula cell if the given number equals zero; otherwise, 0 is returned. NOT(25) = 0 NOT(2*0) = 1 You can also use the Not operator (!) to do the same thing. For more information, see "arithmetic operators" in the WordPerfect online Help.
OR(List)	Returns the logical OR of the given list of numbers. A list of logical statements is placed between the parentheses. If at least one of the statements is true, the number 1 is returned to the cell. If all of the statements are false, 0 is returned. OR(45>10,10+5>16,5>7) = 1 Even though two of the statements are false, the statement "45>10" is true, so 1 is returned. You can also use the Or operator (|) to do the same thing. For more information, see "arithmetic operators" in the WordPerfect online Help.
SIGN(Number)	Returns –1 if the number is negative, 1 if the number is positive, and 0 if the number is 0. SIGN(–2) = –1 SIGN(2) = 1
TRUE( )	Returns the logical value of 1 (true). IF(B5>200,True( ),False( )) = 1 if B5 contains a value greater than 200.
 Related topics


Miscellaneous table functions

Function
BLOCK(Col1, Row1, Col2, Row2)	Returns a list of values from a range of cells in the table. Col1 and Row1 numbers specify one corner of the range, and Col2 and Row2 specify the opposite corner. Because this function returns a list of values rather than a single result, it must be used inside a function that expects a list, such as AVE, CONCAT, or SUM. BLOCK( ) cannot be used to reference another table. The following example illustrates the use of BLOCK for the table shown below. CONCAT(BLOCK(2,2,2,6)) = ABCDSummum CONCAT returns the concatenated text strings from Col 2, Row 2 (cell B2) through Col 2, Row 6 (F2).
CELL(Col, Row) or CELL(Text)	Returns the value in the cell specified by the given column and row numbers, or by the text string that names the cell. These examples assume that cell B3 contains the number 15. CELL(2,3) = 15 With CELL(Text), the text string specifies the cell address. For example, if cell H1 contains "B3," then CELL("H1") = 15 CELL( ) cannot be used to reference another table.
CHOOSE(Number, List)	Finds the value or string in List that is specified by Number. If Number is negative, the search goes right to left. CHOOSE(2,10,11,12) = 11 CHOOSE(–1,"ten",11,"twelve") = twelve SUM(CHOOSE(1,A1:B2,C1:C3)) = total of cells A1 through B2 In the first example, the number "11" is the second (2) value in the list. In the second example, the text string "twelve" is the first value from the right end of the list (–1). In the third example, CHOOSE returns the first (1) range A1:B2 to SUM.
COL( )	Returns a number representing the column where the function is entered. Column A is "1," column B is "2," column C is "3," and so on. If COL( ) is entered in cell B10, 2 is returned.
COUNT(List)	Returns a count of all values (numeric and text) in the given List. If the list includes a range, each cell in the range that contains a value is counted. If a cell is NA, it is not counted. COUNT(2,'Total',A3,D4:D10) = 7 In this example, "7" is returned because 2 is a value, 'Total' is the name of a cell that contains a value, A3 contains a value, and four of the cells within the range contain values.
INDEX(Block, Col, Row)	Returns the number or text from the cell indicated by the column and row offsets within the given range. Use positive or negative numbers to refer to a column and row in the range. Positive numbers refer to columns from the left to right beginning with the first column of the specified range, and refer to rows from the top down beginning with the first row of the specified range. Negative numbers refer to columns from the right to left beginning with the last column in the range (column –1), and refer to rows from the bottom up beginning with row –1. INDEX(B3:F12,2,–3) In this example, the column and row numbers refer to the cell at the intersection of the second column from the left and the third row from the bottom of range B3:F12 (which is cell C10).
LOOKUP(Block, Value, [Offset])	Looks up a value (text or a number) in a block of cells in a table. Depending on how the table is set up, either the first column or the first row of the block is used as the index. If there are more rows than columns in the block, LOOKUP uses the first column as the index; if there are more columns than rows, the first row is used. For LOOKUP to work properly, the entries in the index column (or row) must be in numeric order or in alphabetic order if you are using text strings. The first argument of the function must be the name or coordinates of a range of cells. The range must include the index column (or row) and any portion of the table you want the function to look through. The second argument may be a number or a text string, depending on whether the table's index column (or row) consists of numbers or text strings. The third argument is optional and is discussed below. With the range and index value entered, LOOKUP looks through the index column (or row) for the given value. When the value is found, the function goes to the last column of that row (if using an index column) or the last row of that column (if using an index row), then it returns the number or text found there. The terms "last column" and "last row" refer to the last column or row in the specified range. If the given index value is not found, LOOKUP finds the closest value that is numerically or alphabetically lower in value. You can use the LOOKUP direction indicators ( < and > ) in the value argument to specify the direction (lower or higher) in which you want the function to look when an exact match is not found. For example, LOOKUP(A12:E20,117>) specifies that 117 or the next highest value is returned. If the value in LOOKUP is lower in value than the first value in the index column or row and you do not include the LOOKUP direction indicator, nothing is returned. LOOKUP is useful when you do not know the exact index value or if you only need an approximate value returned from the table. If you want the table value returned that corresponds to an exact index value, use MATCH. In the example below, cell A1 contains the function LOOKUP(A4:E12,117). Because there are more rows than columns in the specified block of the table, the first column is used as the table index. The function returns the value (3045) found in the last column of the row containing the lookup value (117). If the function contained 116 as the index value in the example above, LOOKUP would have returned the value (659) in the last column of the row that begins with the closest lower value (113). If you want the function to return the value of a cell other than the last cell in the column or row, use the optional offset argument. The offset argument may be zero, a positive number, or a negative number. An offset number of 0 returns the value in the index column (or row). A positive offset number (n) returns the value in the nth column to the right of the index column or the value in the nth row below the index row. A negative offset number (–n) returns the value in the nth column to the left of the index column or the value in the nth row above the index row. In the following example, 3 is entered as the offset number. LOOKUP(A4:E12,117,3) The value found in the third column to the right of the index column (African Adventure) is returned.
LOOKUP2(Block, Xvalue, Yvalue)	Looks up a value in a table. LOOKUP2 is similar to LOOKUP, except that the value to be returned is specified by X and Y coordinates. The first (top) row of the specified range becomes the "X-axis," and the first column becomes the "Y-axis." Like the index column or row in LOOKUP, the X row and Y column must be in numeric or alphabetic order for LOOKUP2 to work properly. You can, however, have an X row of numbers and a Y row of text values or vice versa. The X and Y values may be numbers or text strings, depending on whether the X row and Y column contain numbers or text strings. After entering LOOKUP2, the value in the table below the X value and across from the Y value is returned to the formula cell. If the exact X and/or Y values are not found in the X row and/or Y column, the function goes to the closest value that is numerically or alphabetically lower in value. You can use the LOOKUP direction indicators ( < and > ) to indicate in which direction you want the function to look when the exact value is not found. If you want only the table value returned that corresponds to the exact X and Y values given, use MATCH2. If the value in LOOKUP2 is lower in value than the first value in the index column or row and you do not include the LOOKUP direction operator, nothing is returned.
MATCH(Block, Value, [Offset])	Looks up a value in a table. MATCH is used in the same way as LOOKUP, except the specified value must match exactly a value in the index column or row. Otherwise, no value is returned. The only other difference is that the index column or row of a range used with MATCH does not need to be in alphabetic or numeric order.
MATCH2(Block, Xvalue, Yvalue)	Looks up a value in a table. MATCH2 is used in the same way as LOOKUP2, except that the specified X and Y values must match exactly an X and Y value in the X row and the Y column. Otherwise, no value is returned. The only other difference is that the index column or row of a range used with MATCH2 does not need to be in alphabetic or numeric order.
ROW( )	Returns the number of the row in which the function is entered. ROW( ) = 3 if the function is entered in cell B3.
 Related topics


String table functions

Function
CHAR([Set Number], Number)	Returns a text string of one character, corresponding to the ASCII or WordPerfect character set code given as the number. If no set number is given, character set 0 (ASCII characters) is used. CHAR(65) = A CHAR(1,23) = ß
CODE(Text)	Returns the WordPerfect character set code for the first character in a text string. CODE("Alphabet") = 65
CONCAT(List)	Combines or concatenates all text values in List into a single string. When you reference other cells, the function combines the displayed text, numbers, or formula results of those cells in the string. If you want spaces included in a concatenation, they must be inside quotation marks. CONCAT("Total"," ","Costs") = Total Costs
CURRENCY(Number)	Converts the given number to a text string in currency format. This function allows a number (after it has been converted) to be included in a text string. CURRENCY(36) = $36.00
FIND(Text1, Text2)	Returns the position of the first occurrence of the first text string (Text1) in the second text string (Text2). The position is returned as a number with position 1 being the first character. If Text1 was not found in Text2, 0 (false) is returned. FIND is not case sensitive, meaning a lowercase letter will match an uppercase letter and vice versa. FIND("Hat","shatter") = 2 FIND("me","shatter") = 0 In the first example, the text string "Hat" is found beginning at the second position in the second text string "shatter." The text string "me" in the second example is not found in the text string "shatter," so 0 is returned. FIND counts each character in a text string, including spaces, punctuation marks, and so on, as a position.
LEFT(Text, Count)	Returns the first Count characters in a text string. LEFT("New York",3) = New You can also give the count as a negative number. For example, LEFT("New York",–3) returns all the characters in the text string except the last three (New Y).
LENGTH(Text)	Returns the number of characters or length of a text string. LENGTH("home") = 4
LOWER(Text)	Returns the given Text string with all uppercase letters converted to lowercase. LOWER("THE Teacher") = the teacher
MID(Text, Position, Count)	Returns part of a text value to the formula cell. The function returns the portion of the text string beginning at the specified position, for the specified number (Count) of characters. The first character is position 1. MID('winter',1,3) = win You can also give the position and count as negative numbers. If you give a negative number for the position, it indicates a position the specified number of characters to the left of the last character in the text. For example, MID("winter",–3,2) returns te. The position of –3 starts the count 3 characters to the left of the last character (at t). The count value of 2 then begins at t and counts two characters, so the result is te. If you give a negative number for the count, MID returns all the characters starting with the character specified by Position and ending Count characters from the last character. For example, MID("winter",3,–1) returns nte. The position value of 3 will start the count on the third character (at n). The result is everything from n to the end of the text, excluding the number of characters specified by the count value (the r), so the result is nte.
PROPER(Text)	Returns each word in the given text string with the first letter in uppercase and the rest in lowercase. With PROPER, a word is considered any group of characters preceded by a space or a period. PROPER("my DOG") = My Dog
REPEAT(Text, Count)	Returns the given Text string duplicated Count times. REPEAT("top",3) = toptoptop
REPLACE(Text1, Position, Count, Text2)	Replaces part of Text1, starting at the Position indicated, takes out Count characters, then inserts Text2. (The first letter of Text1 is position 1.) REPLACE("national",4,3,"ur") = natural If Count is the same length as Text1, you can replace all of Text1 with Text2. By using 0 (zero) for Count, you can insert new text into Text1. If you specify a position just beyond Text1, you can add text onto the end of Text1. If you do not type any text for Text2, you can delete part of Text1.
RIGHT(Text, Count)RIGHTText Count	Returns the last Count characters in a text string. RIGHT("house",3) = use You can also give the count as a negative number. For example, RIGHT("house",–3) returns all the characters in the text string except the first three (se).
TEXT(Number, [Precision])	Converts a number to a text string. The Precision argument determines how many digits are displayed after the decimal point and should be a number from 0 to 15. TEXT(12.472,2) = 12.47 (as a text string) You can also use -1 as the precision argument to convert the number to a text string that displays all necessary digits (as many as 15).
TRIM(Text)	Returns the text string with no leading, trailing, or consecutive spaces. TRIM(" Here I am ") = Here I am
UPPER(Text)	Returns the text string with all letters in uppercase. UPPER("toTAL Costs") = TOTAL COSTS
VALUE(Text)	Converts the text value to a number, if possible, and returns the number as the result. VALUE("$34.23") = 34.23
 Related topics


Working with project templates

WordPerfect lets you use project templates to create documents. A template is a shell, or skeleton structure, that can consist of elements such as margins, styles, and graphics objects. You fill in the details and provide data to complete the project.

The following illustration shows examples of templates.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	creating documents using project templates

•	working with categories

•	editing and formatting project templates

•	automating project templates using prompts

•	using QuickMarks in project templates

•	adding objects to project templates

•	managing project templates

For more information about project templates, see "Working with PerfectExpert project templates."

WordPerfect Office provides a basic set of templates to get you started. To download additional templates, visit the Corel OfficeCommunity Web site.


Creating documents using project templates

WordPerfect lets you create documents using project templates.

 How to


To create a document using a project template

1	Click File [image] New from project.

2	Click the Create new tab.

3	Choose [WordPerfect] from the list box.

If [WordPerfect] is not displayed in the list box, click Options, and click Refresh projects.

4	Choose a project template from the list.

5	Click Create.

 Tip

•	Some WordPerfect project templates use prompts to guide you through the process of adding information to a document. For more information about prompts, see "Automating project templates using prompts."

 Related topics


Working with categories

Project templates are organized into preset categories. You can create categories in which to organize project templates, documents, and executable files. Adding an executable file, such as a slide show, to a category, lets you conveniently access that file as a template on which to base similar documents. If you intend to use a specific template often, you can add it to the Favorites category.

You can also copy or move project templates to other categories.

 How to


To create a category

1	Click File [image] New from project.

2	Click the Create new tab.

3	Click Options, and click Create category.

4	In the Create a category dialog box, type a category name in the Display name box.

If you want the category to display in the top section of the list box, type square brackets around the category name; for example, [Invitations].

You can also
Rename a category	Choose a category from the list box. Click Options, and click Rename category. Type a new name in the Display name box.
Delete a category	Choose a category from the list box. Click Options, and click Remove category.
 Related topics


To add a project template, document, or executable file to a category

1	Click File [image] New from project.

2	Click the Create new tab.

3	Choose a category from the list box.

4	Click Options, and click Add project.

5	Follow the instructions on your screen.

 Related topics


To add a project template to the Favorites category

1	Click File [image]  New from project.

2	Click the Create new tab.

3	Choose a category from the list box.

4	Choose a project template from the list.

5	Click Copy to favorites.

 Tip

•	You can view the contents of the Favorites folder. Click File [image]  New from project. Choose [Favorites] from the list box.

 Related topics


To copy or move a project template to another category

1	Click File [image] New from project.

2	Click the Create new tab.

3	Choose a category from the list box.

4	Choose a project template from the list.

5	Click Options, and click one of the following:

•	Copy project

•	Move project

6	Click a category.

 Related topics


Editing and formatting project templates

WordPerfect lets you add information to a project template. You can also edit the styles in a project template or additional objects template to customize the display of fonts, graphics, margins, and more.

You can copy the styles from one project template, additional objects template, or document, to another. You can also insert a project template into another project template or document.

You can edit any WordPerfect document. For more information, see "Editing documents."

 How to


To add information to a project template

1	Click File [image] New from project.

2	Choose a category from the list box.

3	Choose a project template from the list.

4	Click Options, and click Edit WP template.

5	Make changes to the project template.

 Related topics


To edit styles in a project template or additional objects template

1	Click File [image] New from project.

2	Choose a category from the list box.

3	Choose a project template from the list.

4	Click Create.

5	Click Format [image] Styles.

6	In the Styles dialog box, choose a style from the Available styles list.

7	Click Edit.

8	In the Styles editor dialog box, make changes in any of the boxes.

The style codes display in the Contents box.

You can also
Remove a style from a project template	Drag the code from the Contents box.
 Related topics


To copy styles

1	Click Format [image] Styles.

2	Click Options, and click Settings.

3	In the Available styles list area of the Style settings dialog box, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Styles in current document [image] to display all styles in the current document

•	Styles in default template [image] to display all styles in the default template

•	WordPerfect system styles [image] to display all WordPerfect styles

•	Styles from additional objects template [image] to display all styles in the additional objects template

4	Click OK.

5	In the Styles dialog box, choose a style from the Available styles list.

6	Click Options, and click Copy.

7	In the Copy to area of the Styles copy dialog box, enable one of the following options:

•	Current document [image] to copy the style to the current document

•	Default template [image] to copy the style to the default template

•	Additional objects template [image] to copy the style to the additional objects template

8	Click OK.

9	In the Styles duplicate dialog box, type a name in the Style name box.

 Tip

•	If you have not chosen an additional objects template, the Additional objects template option will not be available. For information about choosing an additional objects template, see "To choose an additional objects template."

 Related topics


To insert a project template into another project template or document

1	Click File [image] New from project.

2	Click Options, and click Create WP template.

3	Click Insert [image] File.

4	Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored.

5	Click a file.

6	Click Insert.

If you are prompted to allow WordPerfect to update the default template with the styles in the project template, click Yes.

 Related topics


Automating project templates using prompts

WordPerfect lets you use prompts in project templates to automate the process of creating documents; for example, you can use template prompts to let you know what kind of information you need to type in a document. You can also create personal information prompts that link to and extract personal information from an address book.

Prompts launch in the order in which they are inserted in a project template. You can move prompts so that they launch in the order you want.

When you create prompts in a template, it is recommended that you run the template to ensure that it has been set up correctly. For more information, see "To run a project template."

 How to


To create prompts

1	Click the Build prompts button on the Template toolbar.

If the Template toolbar is not displayed, click View [image] Toolbars. In the Available toolbars list, enable the Template check box.

2	In the Prompt builder dialog box, click Add.

3	In the Add template prompt dialog box, type a name for the prompt in the Prompt box.

If you want to link the prompt to a field in the default address book installed on your computer, choose a field from the Link to address book field list box.

You can also
Insert a prompt in the project template	Click where you want to insert a prompt. In the Prompt builder dialog box, click Paste.
Edit a prompt	In the Prompt builder dialog box, choose a prompt from the Template prompts list. Click Edit. Make changes in any of the boxes.
Delete a prompt	In the Prompt builder dialog box, choose a prompt from the Template prompts list. Click Delete.
 Note

•	Template prompts display in square brackets.

 Related topics


To insert a personal information prompt

1	Click the Build prompts button on the Template toolbar.

If the Template toolbar is not displayed, click View [image] Toolbars. In the Available toolbars list, enable the Template check box.

2	Click Personal.

3	Choose a field from the list.

If you want to display all available fields, enable the Show all available fields check box.

4	Click where you want to insert a prompt.

5	Click Paste.

 Note

•	Personal information prompts display in angle brackets.

 Related topics


To move prompts

1	Click the Build prompts button on the Template toolbar.

If the Template toolbar is not displayed, click View [image] Toolbars. In the Available toolbars list, enable the Template check box.

2	In the Prompts builder dialog box, choose a prompt from the Template prompts list.

3	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Move up

•	Move down

 Related topics


Using QuickMarks in project templates

WordPerfect lets you insert a QuickMark in a project template. QuickMarks can be used to save your place in a document when you quit WordPerfect.

If you want to mark multiple places in a document, you must use bookmarks. For more information about bookmarks and QuickMarks, see "Using bookmarks and QuickMarks."

 How to


To insert a QuickMark in a project template

1	Click where you want to insert a QuickMark.

2	Click Tools [image] Bookmark.

3	Click Set QuickMark.

You can also
Automatically insert a QuickMark each time you save a document	Enable the Set QuickMark on file save check box.
Automatically go the QuickMark each time you open a document	Enable the Go to QuickMark on file open check box.
 Related topics


Adding objects to project templates

WordPerfect lets you copy objects to project templates. You can also associate a feature in a project template with a menu or keyboard, so that the menu or keyboard displays when you use that feature. You can insert a trigger in a project template, so that a macro plays when you use a specific feature.

For more information about associating features with objects, see "Customizing WordPerfect." For more information about using triggers, see "Triggering macros from templates."

 How to


To copy an object to a project template

1	Click the Copy/Remove object button on the Template toolbar.

If the Template toolbar is not displayed, click View [image] Toolbars. In the Available toolbars list, enable the Template check box.

2	From the Template to copy from list box, choose the template from which you want to copy objects.

3	Choose an object type from the Object type list box.

4	Choose an object from the Source box.

5	Click Copy.

The object displays in the Destination [project template] list.

You can also
Copy all objects from the Source list	Click Copy all.
Remove an object from the Destination list	Click an object, and click Remove.
Remove all objects from the Destination list	Click Remove all.
 Related topics


To associate a feature with a menu or keyboard

1	Click the Associate button on the Template toolbar.

If the Template toolbar is not displayed, click View [image] Toolbars. Enable the Template check box in the Available toolbars list.

2	Enable the Features option.

3	Choose a feature from the Item to associate list.

4	Choose an option from one of the following list boxes:

•	Menus

•	Keyboards

 Note

•	Only features that you have created in a template, or copied to a template, display in the Item to associate list.

 Related topics


To trigger a macro with a feature

1	Click the Associate button on the Template toolbar.

If the Template toolbar is not displayed, click View [image] Toolbars. Enable the Template check box in the Available toolbars list.

2	Enable the Triggers option.

3	Choose a feature from the Item to associate list.

4	Choose a macro from the Macros list box.

 Related topics


Managing project templates

You can save a project template with a new name, and change a project template display name or description. Templates can be copied from earlier versions of WordPerfect.

You can also view a list of recent projects on which you have worked.

You can choose an additional objects template. This is a second default template that stores objects such as keyboards, menus, template macros, toolbars, and styles that you can use in addition to or in place of those in the default template. For example, a system administrator could use an additional objects template as a network template that would overwrite a user's default template.

If you have created prompts in a project template, it is recommended that you run the template to ensure that it has been set up correctly. When you run a template, WordPerfect automatically fills in the triggers, prompts, and macros that you have inserted into the project template.

 How to


To save a project template with a new name

1	Using a project template, create a document.

2	Click File [image] Save as.

3	Type a name in the Template name box.

You can also
Include a description of the template	Type text in the Description box.
Choose a category in which to store the template	Choose a category from the Template category list.
 Note

•	For information about creating a document using a project template, see "To create a document using a project template."

 Related topics


To change a project template display name or description

1	Click File [image] New from project.

2	Click the Create new tab.

3	Choose a category from the list box.

4	Choose a project template from the list.

5	Click Options, and click Project properties.

6	In the Modify a project dialog box, type text in either of the following boxes:

•	Display name [image] to change the project name

•	Description [image] to change the project description

 Note

•	The project description displays at the bottom of the Create new tab in the PerfectExpert dialog box.

 Related topics


To view a list of recent projects

1	Click File [image]  New from project.

2	Click the Work on tab.

3	Choose a WordPerfect Office application from the list box.

If you want to view a list of recent projects from all WordPerfect Office applications, choose [All applications] from the list box.

 Related topics


To copy a template from an earlier version of WordPerfect

1	Choose the drive and folder where the template you want to copy is stored.

2	Click the file.

3	Click Edit [image]  Copy.

4	Choose the drive and folder "X:\Program files\Corel\WordPerfect Office 11\Template\Custom WP templates," where "X" indicates the drive on which WordPerfect is installed.

5	Click Edit [image] Paste.

 Related topics


To choose an additional objects template

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Files.

3	Click the Template tab.

4	In the Additional template folder box, click the Browse button.

5	Choose the drive and folder where the template is stored.

6	Click Select.

7	In the Additional objects template box, click the Browse button.

8	Click the template you want to use as the additional objects template.

9	Click Open.

If you want to update the default template with styles from the additional objects template, enable the Update default template from additional objects template check box.

 Tip

•	It is not always recommended that you update the default template with the additional objects template. Updating might only be useful, for example, if many users on a network use the styles in the additional objects template. The network administrator could enable the Update default template from additional objects template check box to update each user's default template.

 Related topics


To run a project template

1	Click File [image] New from project.

2	Choose a category from the list box.

3	Choose a project template from the list.

4	Click Create.

If you are prompted to disable the macros in the project template, click No.

 Related topics


Integrating text and graphics

WordPerfect lets you integrate text and graphics. You can combine text and graphics by using text boxes, graphics boxes, and watermarks.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	inserting graphics boxes and text boxes

•	adding text to shapes

•	attaching and positioning boxes

•	modifying text box content

•	using watermarks

•	using box captions

For more information about integrating text and graphics, see "Reference: Integrating text and graphics."


Inserting graphics boxes and text boxes

WordPerfect lets you insert graphics boxes and text boxes in a document. You can insert a text box and type text into it, or you can select existing text and place a text box around it.

You can change the appearance of graphics boxes or text boxes by customizing the default template. The new style is applied to the boxes in the active document and in other documents that use the same template.

 How to


To insert a graphics box

1	Click where you want to insert a graphics box.

2	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Custom box.

3	Choose Image from the Style name list box.

 Related topics


To insert a text box

1	Click where you want to insert a text box.

2	Click Insert [image] Text box.

3	Click inside the text box, and type the text.

 Related topics


To place a text box around selected text

1	Select the text around which you want a text box.

2	Click Insert [image] Text box.

 Related topics


To change the appearance of a graphics or text box

1	Right-click a box, and click Edit box.

2	In the Edit box dialog box, click any of the following buttons:

•	Border — lets you apply a border to the box

•	Fill — lets you apply a fill to the box

•	Wrap text — lets you choose how to position, or wrap, text around the box

•	Position — lets you choose a page, paragraph, or character to which to attach a box, and the horizontal and vertical position of the box

•	Caption — lets you specify the box caption position, width, rotation, and numbering method and style

•	Content — lets you choose the content type and the content position

•	Size — lets you specify the width and height of the box

 Related topics


Adding text to shapes

You can add text to basic shapes, such as circles, rectangles, lines, polygons, and polylines.

 How to


To add text to a shape

1	Right-click a shape, and click Add text.

2	Type text.

 Notes

•	You cannot add text to a shape that has been rotated or skewed.

•	You cannot rotate or skew a shape once text has been added to the shape.

 Related topics


Attaching and positioning boxes

When you insert a graphics or text box in a document, the box is attached to a location on a page by default. As you add or delete text before the box, the box remains in the same position on that page and moves with that page. However, you can change the position of a box on a page.

You can attach a box to a character in a line so that the box moves just like any other character in the document. You can also attach a box to a paragraph so it moves with the paragraph. As you add or delete text before the box, the box moves automatically with the character or paragraph. You can also specify an exact position for a box within columns.

In addition, you can choose how the document text wraps around a box. For example, you can wrap text around one or both sides of a box, or around the image inside the box.

 How to


To change the position of a graphics or text box on a page

1	Right-click a box, and click Position.

2	Choose Page from the Attach box to list box.

3	From the From list box in the Horizontal area, choose an element from which to set the horizontal position of the box.

4	From the From list box in the Vertical area, choose an element from which to set the vertical position the box.

5	Type values in the following boxes:

•	Horizontal [image] lets you specify the horizontal position of the box

•	Vertical [image] lets you specify the vertical position of the box

If you want to anchor the box to a specific page, enable the Box stays on page check box. The box remains on the current page even if you add or remove information before the box.

 Related topics


To attach a graphics or text box to a character

1	Right-click a box, and click Position.

2	Choose Character from the Attach box to list box.

3	Enable a line position option.

If you want to prevent text on other lines from printing over the box, enable the Box changes text line height check box.

 Tip

•	When you create equations, you can enable the Custom option to precisely align the figures in the equation.

 Related topics


To attach a graphics or text box to a paragraph

1	Right-click a box, and click Position.

2	Choose Paragraph from the Attach box to list box.

3	From the From list box in the Horizontal area, choose an element from which to set the horizontal position of the box.

4	Type values in the following boxes:

•	Horizontal [image] lets you specify the horizontal position of the box

•	Vertical [image] lets you specify the vertical position of the box relative to the top of the paragraph

If you want the box to extend beyond table cell boundaries, enable the Box not limited by table cell check box.

 Related topics


To position a graphics or text box in columns

1	Right-click a box, and click Position.

2	Choose Page from the Attach box to list box.

3	From the Horizontal list box, choose one of the following:

•	Left column [image] attaches a box to the left column

•	Right column [image] attaches a box to the right column

•	Centered in columns [image] attaches a box to the center of the columns

4	Type a value in the Horizontal box.

This will specify the distance you want to offset the box from the location chosen.

 Note

•	If the column options fail to display, make sure the image is placed within the columns.

 Tips

•	You can attach a box to a specific number of columns by typing the starting and ending column numbers in the Across columns boxes.

•	If you want the image to span the specified columns, set the image size to Full width. For information, see "To resize a graphics box to specific measurements."

 Related topics


To wrap text around a graphics or text box

1	Right-click the content in the box, and click Wrap.

2	In the Wrapping type area, enable one of the following options:

•	Square [image] wraps the text around the edges of the box

•	Contour [image] wraps the text around the outline of the image

•	Neither side [image] wraps the text above and below the image

•	Behind text [image] places the image behind the text

•	In front of text [image] places the image on top of the text

3	In the Wrap text around area, enable one of the following options:

•	Largest side [image] wraps the text along the side of the image with the longest dimension

•	Left side [image] wraps the text along the left side of the image

•	Right side [image] wraps the text along the right side of the image

 Related topics


Modifying text box content

WordPerfect lets you modify text box content by editing text in a text box, changing the color of the text and the background in a text box, and rotating the text in a text box.

 How to


To edit text box text

1	Right-click a text box, and click Content.

2	Click Edit.

3	In the text box, edit the text.

4	Click File [image] Close.

 Related topics


To change the color of text in a text box

1	Select the text in a text box.

2	On the property bar, open the Font color picker, and click a color.

3	Click outside the text box.

4	Right-click the text box, and click Border/Fill.

5	Click the Fill tab.

6	Choose a dark fill style from the Available fill styles palette.

 Tip

•	You can also reverse the color of text that is found in a text box by using the reverse.wcm macro. For information about macros, see "Playing macros."

 Related topics


To rotate text in a text box

1	Right-click a text box, and click Content.

2	In the Rotate text counterclockwise area, enable one of the following options:

•	90 degrees

•	180 degrees

•	270 degrees

 Related topics


Using watermarks

You can insert a watermark, which is a lightly shaded image, behind text and other graphics on a page. Watermarks are used as a background for text. WordPerfect allows you to create watermarks from an image on file or from a clipart image. You can have a maximum of two watermarks in each document. You can adjust the shading of watermarks within each document. You can also suppress or delete a watermark.

 How to


To insert a watermark by using an image from a file

1	Click the top of the first page where you want the watermark to display.

2	Click Insert [image] Watermark.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	Watermark A

•	Watermark B

If you want to align the watermark with the document margins, enable the Align with document margins check box.

4	Click Create.

5	Click the Watermark placement button on the property bar.

6	Enable one of the following options:

•	Odd [image] prints the watermark on odd pages

•	Even [image] prints the watermark on even pages

•	Every [image] prints the watermark on all pages

7	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] From file.

8	Double-click the folder in which the image is stored, and double-click the image.

9	Click File [image] Close.

 Related topics


To insert a watermark by using a clipart image

1	Click the top of the first page where you want the watermark to display.

2	Click Insert [image] Watermark.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	Watermark A

•	Watermark B

If you want to align the watermark with the document margins, enable the Align with document margins check box.

4	Click Create.

5	Click the Watermark placement button on the property bar.

6	Enable one of the following options:

•	Odd [image] prints the watermark on odd pages

•	Even [image] prints the watermark on even pages

•	Every [image] prints the watermark on all pages

7	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Clipart.

8	Choose a clipart image, and click Insert.

9	Click File [image] Close.

 Tip

•	You can also insert a watermark using the watermrk.wcm macro included with WordPerfect. For more information about using macros, see "Playing macros."

 Related topics


To adjust the shading for a watermark

1	Click the top of the first page where the watermark displays.

2	Click Insert [image] Watermark.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	Watermark A

•	Watermark B

4	Click Edit.

5	Click the Watermark shading button on the property bar.

6	Type values in the following boxes:

•	Text shading

•	Image shading

7	Click OK.

8	Click File [image] Close.

 Note

•	The property bar provides select image-editing capabilities that let you change the appearance of an image, save the image, and use it as a watermark. For more information about editing an image, see "Changing the appearance of images."

 Related topics


To suppress a watermark

1	Click Format [image] Page [image] Suppress.

2	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Watermark A

•	Watermark B

 Related topics


To delete a watermark

1	Click the top of the first page where the watermark displays.

2	Click Insert [image] Watermark.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	Watermark A

•	Watermark B

4	Click Discontinue.

 Related topics


Using box captions

You can add a caption to both text boxes and graphics boxes. You can edit a caption to change the text and to add font attributes such as bold type. For more information about text-editing features, see "Formatting text."

You can change the width and position of a caption. You can also rotate captions.

The following illustration shows a rotated caption which displays to the left of a graphic.

Each box style has a different caption numbering style, called a counter. For example, all figure boxes are numbered in sequence and labeled "Figure." WordPerfect automatically adds counters and numbers captions. You can change the numbering style of a box caption. For more information about counters, see "Using counters." For information about creating styles, see "Working with styles."

 How to


To add a caption to a box

1	Right-click a box, and click Create caption.

2	Type the caption text.

 Tip

•	You can delete the caption number by selecting it and clicking Delete.

 Related topics


To edit caption text

1	Right-click a box, and click Edit caption.

2	Edit the text or the font attributes.

 Tip

•	You can also edit a caption by clicking the Caption button on the property bar.

 Related topics


To change caption text width

1	Right-click a box, and click Caption.

2	In the Caption width area, enable one of the following options:

•	Fixed [image] lets you specify a fixed width for a caption

•	Percent [image] lets you specify the width of a caption as a percentage of the width of a box

3	Type a width in the Fixed or Percent box.

 Tip

•	You can set the width of a caption automatically by enabling the Auto width option.

 Related topics


To change the position of a caption

1	Right-click a box, and click Caption.

2	In the Caption position area, choose an option from any of the following list boxes:

•	Side of box [image] lets you position the caption at the left, right, top, or bottom of a box

•	Border [image] lets you position the caption inside or outside of the box border

•	Position [image] lets you position a top or bottom caption at the left, right, or center of a box, or lets you position a side caption at the top, bottom, or center of a box

 Tip

•	You can offset the caption by a specific amount by enabling the Absolute offset or Percent offset option and typing a value in the box.

 Related topics


To rotate a box caption

1	Right-click a box, and click Caption.

2	In the Rotate caption area, enable one of the following options:

•	90 degrees

•	180 degrees

•	270 degrees

 Related topics


To change the numbering style of a caption

1	Right-click a box, and click Caption.

2	In the Caption numbering method and style area, click Change.

3	Choose a counter style from the Counters list.

4	Click Select.

 Note

•	The counter style you choose numbers the caption in sequence with other boxes using that counter style.

 Related topics


Reference: Integrating text and graphics

The following table lists the box styles, the corresponding caption numbering style, and an example of how the caption will display.

Box captions

Box	Default counter	How it displays
Image	Figure	Figure 1
Text box	Text	1
Equation	Equation	(1)
Figure	Figure	Figure 1
Table	Table	Table 1
User	User	1
OLE 2.0 box	Figure	Figure 1


Using graphics

WordPerfect lets you insert graphics, such as shapes, drawings, and clipart images, into documents. You can size, move, and modify graphics to suit your needs.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	creating graphics

•	inserting graphics

•	creating drawings

•	modifying shapes

•	modifying graphics

•	arranging graphics

•	aligning and distributing graphics

•	working with color

•	changing the appearance of images

•	positioning images


Creating graphics

You can create shapes in a WordPerfect document. A shape is any object created using WordPerfect drawing tools.

The following image is an example of a picture created using WordPerfect basic shapes.

You can create basic shapes, such as triangles, circles, or rectangles, as well as lines, arrows, stars, and more. You can also create polylines.

The following image shows examples of preset shapes: 1) basic shapes and 2) flowchart shapes.

WordPerfect lets you save a graphic as a separate files, which you can insert into other documents. For information about exporting files, see "Import and export file formats for WordPerfect."

You can delete graphics from a document. WordPerfect also allows you to hide or display graphics.

You can also apply graphic effects to text using TextArt. For information about TextArt, see Using TextArt. You can also create graphical representations of equations using the Equation Editor For information about the Equation Editor, see Using Equation Editor .

 How to


To create a shape

1	Click Insert [image] Shapes.

2	Enable one of the following options:

•	Lines [image] lets you create shapes such as straight or curved lines

•	Basic [image] lets you create shapes such as circles, rectangles, or cubes

•	Arrows [image] lets you create various types of arrows

•	Flowchart [image] lets you create shapes used in a flowchart

•	Stars [image] lets you create various types of stars

•	Callout [image] lets you create callouts, which can be used to enclose text

•	Action [image] lets you create shapes used to denote action

3	Open the shape picker, and click a shape.

4	Click OK.

5	Drag to draw the shape.

 Note

•	Enabling the lines option also allows you to create polylines. For more information about creating polylines, see "To create a polyline."

 Tips

•	You can insert precise horizontal, vertical, and diagonal lines by holding down Ctrl while you draw a line.

•	You can create a square by holding down Shift while you draw a rectangle.

 Related topics


To create a polyline

1	Click Insert [image] Shapes.

2	Enable the Lines option.

3	Open the shape picker, and click a polyline.

4	Click OK.

5	Drag and click to build the shape.

6	Double-click to complete the shape.

 Related topics


To save a graphic

1	Select a graphic.

2	Click File [image] Save as.

3	Enable the Selected image option.

4	Click OK.

5	In the Save image as dialog box, choose the drive and folder where you want to save the graphic.

6	Type a filename in the Filename box.

7	Choose a file type from the File type list box.

If you want to save fonts with a graphic, enable the Embed fonts check box.

8	Click Save.

 Related topics


To delete a graphic

1	Select a graphic.

2	Press Delete.

 Related topics


To hide or display graphics

•	Click View [image] Graphics.

A check mark next to the Graphics command indicates that graphics are displayed.

 Note

•	By default, graphics are visible in the document window.

 Related topics


Inserting graphics

You can insert clipart images into a WordPerfect document, such as those included with WordPerfect. Clipart images are images that can be brought into a WordPerfect document and edited or used as is. You can also insert pictures from the WordPerfect Office CD.

You can link to an image on disk. When you link to an image on disk, the location of the image, not the image itself is inserted into the document. This way, you can considerably reduce the size of the file, especially if the image is used in several places throughout the document.

Inserting Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) objects into a document lets Windows applications exchange information with each other. You can link or embed a picture that was created in another program in a WordPerfect document. If you link the picture, the same information exists in two files: the application where the picture was created (the source application) and the application where it was copied (the destination application). When you change the information in the source application, the information is updated in the destination application as well. When you embed a picture, the picture becomes part of the document. You can edit the picture directly, without affecting the source file. For more information about Object Linking and Embedding, see "Linking and embedding objects."

You can scan an image, such as a picture or drawing, directly into WordPerfect as a bitmap. You can also adjust the properties of your scanner.

 How to


To insert a clipart image

1	Click where you want to insert an image.

2	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Clipart.

The Scrapbook opens.

3	Browse through the folders in the Scrapbook until you find the image you want to insert.

4	Select the clipart image.

5	Click Insert.

 Tip

•	You can also insert a clipart image by dragging  the image from the Scrapbook into a document.

 Related topics


To insert a picture from the WordPerfect Office CD

1	Insert the WordPerfect Office CD into your CD drive.

2	Click where you want to insert a picture.

3	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] From file.

4	Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored.

Pictures have a .jpg filename extension.

5	Double-click a filename.

 Tips

•	You can also insert a picture by dragging. Enable the Shadow Cursor, drag across the area of the document in which you want the picture, and click Image from file in the QuickMenu.

•	You can preview a picture before you insert it by clicking Toggle preview, and clicking the picture filename.

 Related topics


To link to an image on disk

1	Click where you want to insert a link to an image.

2	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] From file.

3	Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored.

4	Click the image you want to link to the document.

5	Enable the Image on disk check box.

6	Click Insert.

If you want to display the name of the image file, right-click the image, and click Content.

 Tips

•	You can link to images copied from the Scrapbook by saving them to your hard disk.

 Related topics


To insert an OLE object

1	In the source application, save a file that contains an OLE object.

2	Select the object.

3	Click Edit [image] Copy.

4	Start WordPerfect.

5	Click Edit [image] Paste special.

6	Enable one of the following options:

•	Paste [image] embeds the object

•	Paste link [image] links the object between the two documents

 Note

•	The source file has to be saved before you can link to it. If the Paste link option is grayed in the Paste special dialog box, switch back to the source application and save the file, and copy the object again.

 Related topics


To scan images into WordPerfect

•	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Acquire image.

 Notes

•	See your scanner software documentation for instructions on manipulating the image and pasting it into WordPerfect.

•	You need a TWAIN-compatible driver connected to your computer in order to scan images.

 Related topics


To adjust the properties of your scanner

1	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Select image source.

2	Choose an image scanner from the Sources list.

3	Click Select.

4	Adjust any properties.

 Note

•	The dialog box will vary depending on the scanner you are using. See your scanner documentation for more information about the different options.

 Related topics


Creating drawings

WordPerfect lets you create complex drawings and modify them.

 How to


To create a drawing

1	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Draw picture.

Corel Presentations opens.

 Note

•	For more information about creating drawings in Corel Presentations, refer to the Corel Presentations Help.

 Related topics


To modify a drawing

1	Right-click the graphic, and click Edit image.

Corel Presentations opens.

2	Modify the drawing.

3	Click File [image] Save.

 Tip

•	You can also modify a drawing or clipart image by double-clicking it.

 Related topics


Modifying shapes

In WordPerfect, you can modify a shape in several ways; for example, you can add drop shadows, and change the color of lines, shadows, and fills.

You can skew or distort a shape. Some shapes can be altered using glyphs. The following image demonstrates the different forms a shape can take when altered using a glyph.

An ellipse can be altered using the mode toggle. The following image demonstrates the three forms an ellipse can take when altered using the mode toggle.

Lines and polylines can be modified using editing points.

 How to


To modify a shape

1	Double-click a shape.

2	Click one of the following tabs:

•	Fill [image] to change fill options

•	Line [image] to change line style options

•	Shadow [image] to change drop shadow options

3	Modify any settings.

 Tip

•	You can also modify a shape by using the property bar to change the attributes of a shape.

 Related topics


To skew a shape

1	Right-click a shape, and click Skew shape.

Small, green, diamond-shaped skewing handles display.

2	Drag a skewing handle until you obtain the effect.

 Related topics


To modify a shape by using a glyph

1	Select a shape.

2	Drag a glyph until you obtain the desired effect.

 Related topics


To modify an ellipse by using the mode toggle

1	Click an ellipse.

2	Click the mode toggle to shift between the different modes.

 Related topics


To modify a line or polyline by using editing points

1	Right-click a line or polyline, and click Edit points.

2	Drag any of the points until you obtain the desired effect.

 Related topics


Modifying graphics

WordPerfect lets you modify a graphic by sizing it and moving it.

 How to


To size a graphic

1	Select a graphic.

2	Drag a corner handle until the graphic is the size you want.

You can also
Stretch a graphic	Drag a side handle until you achieve the effect you want.
Size a graphic proportionally	Hold down Shift, and drag a handle.
 Related topics


To move a graphic by using the keyboard

1	Select a graphic.

2	Press any of the Arrow keys to move the graphic in the direction you want.

 Related topics


Arranging graphics

When two or more graphics overlap in a document, you can arrange their order by moving them in front of or behind the others in the stack. You can also move graphics behind text (like a watermark) or in front of text (like a sticky note). You can also select a graphic that is over or under another graphic.

You can group graphics so that they remain together when they are moved, sized, or edited. The following image is an example of grouped graphics.

 How to


To reorder overlapping graphics

1	Right-click a graphic.

2	Click Order, and click one of the following:

•	To front [image] moves a graphic in front of the overlapping graphics

•	To back [image] moves a graphic behind the overlapping graphics

•	Forward one [image] moves a graphic forward one layer

•	Back one [image] moves a graphic back one layer

 Tip

•	You can also reorder overlapping graphics by selecting a graphic, and clicking the Object(s) forward one  button or the Object(s) back one  button on the property bar.

 Related topics


To move a graphic behind or in front of text

1	Select a graphic.

2	Click the Graphics button on the property bar, and click one of the following:

•	In front of text [image] moves the selected graphic in front of the text

•	Behind text [image] moves the selected graphic behind the text

 Related topics


To navigate between graphics

1	Select a graphic.

2	On the property bar, click one of the following:

•	Next box [image] selects the next graphic box that displays in the document

•	Previous box [image] selects the previous graphic box that displays in the document

 Note

•	The Next box button and the Previous box button on the property bar are available only when there is more than one graphic in the document.

 Tip

•	You can also navigate between graphics by selecting a graphic, and pressing Tab.

 Related topics


To group graphics

1	Hold down Shift, and click the graphics you want to group.

2	Right-click one of the selected graphics, and click Group.

 Note

•	When you click one of the graphics, one set of sizing handles displays around the grouped graphics. You can size, move, or edit the group of graphics. For information about sizing and moving graphics, see "Modifying graphics."

 Tip

•	You can separate grouped graphics by right-clicking grouped graphics, and clicking Separate.

 Related topics


Aligning and distributing graphics

WordPerfect lets you align and distribute graphics in relation to themselves and the page. You can, for example, align a series of objects horizontally and vertically.

 How to


To align a graphic

1	Select a graphic.

2	Click Tools [image] Align and distribute.

3	Click the Align tab.

4	In the Horizontal alignment area, enable one of the following check boxes:

•	Left — aligns the graphic horizontally relative to the left margin

•	Center — centers the graphic horizontally relative to the right and left margins

•	Right — aligns the graphic horizontally relative to the right margin

5	In the Vertical alignment area, enable one of the following check boxes:

•	Top — aligns the graphic vertically relative to the top of the page

•	Center — centers the graphic vertically relative to the top and bottom of the page

•	Bottom — aligns the graphic vertically relative to the bottom of the page

6	In the Align in relation to page area, enable one of the following check boxes:

•	Edge of page [image] aligns objects with the edge of the page

•	Center of page [image] centers objects on the page

•	Edge of column [image] aligns objects with the edge of a column

•	Center of column [image] centers objects in a column

WordPerfect displays a warning explaining that the object's anchor position may be changed. If you wish to skip this warning, enable the Do not show this warning again check box.

 Tip

•	You can also align a series of objects by pressing Shift, and selecting the objects.

 Related topics


To distribute objects

1	Hold down Shift, and select the objects you want to distribute.

2	Click Tools [image] Align and distribute.

3	Click the Distribute tab.

4	In the Horizontal distribution area, enable one of the following check boxes:

•	Left [image] Distributes the selected graphics horizontally by spacing their left edges evenly

•	Center [image] Distributes the selected graphics horizontally by spacing their center points evenly

•	Right [image] Distributes the selected graphics horizontally by spacing the right edges evenly

•	Spacing [image] Distributes the selected graphics horizontally by placing equal spaces between them

5	In the Vertical distribution area, enable one of the following check boxes:

•	Top [image] Distributes the selected graphics vertically by spacing their top edges evenly

•	Center [image] Distributes the selected graphics vertically by spacing their center points evenly

•	Bottom [image] Distributes the selected graphics vertically by spacing the bottom edges evenly

•	Spacing [image] Distributes the selected graphics vertically by placing equal spaces between them

6	In the Distribute to area, enable one of the following check boxes:

•	Extent of selection [image] Distributes the selected graphics to the extent of the marquee box that surrounds them when they are selected

•	Extent of page [image] Distributes the selected graphics to the extent of the current page

•	Extent of column [image] Distributes the selected graphics to the extent of the column

WordPerfect displays a warning explaining that the object's anchor position may be changed. If you wish to skip this warning, enable the Do not show this warning again check box.

 Related topics


Working with color

You can create colors to use when working with fonts, highlighting, and graphics in WordPerfect. You can also use color models to create colors. Three color models are available: RGB, HLS, and CMYK. WordPerfect lets you preview color changes to a selection before the changes actually take place, and then apply the colors you created to graphics.

 How to


To create a color

1	Click Format [image] Font.

2	Click the Font tab.

3	Open the color picker, and click More.

4	Drag the pointer on the color wheel until the color you want displays on the luminosity bar.

5	Click the color on the luminosity bar.

6	Drag the pointer on the luminosity bar until the shade you want displays in the Current color box.

 Related topics


To create a color by using color models

1	Click Format [image] Font.

2	Click the Font tab.

3	Open the Color picker, and click More.

4	Choose a color model from the Color model list box.

5	In the Color values area, type values in the boxes until the color you want displays in the Current color box.

 Note

•	The color model you select determines the options available in the Color values boxes.

 Tip

•	You can open the Select color dialog box from any color palette in WordPerfect.

 Related topics


To preview color changes

1	Select a graphic.

2	On the property bar, click one of the following buttons:

•	Foreground color [image] lets you change the foreground color of a shape

•	Background color [image] lets you change the background color of a shape

•	Shadow color [image] lets you change the color of a drop shadow

•	Outline color [image] lets you change the color of a graphics line

3	Point to a color on the color palette.

When you pause on a color, a preview of the graphic in that color displays on the page.

If you want to apply the color to the graphic, click the color.

 Note

•	Corel RealTime Preview is enabled by default. For more information about Corel RealTime Preview see, "Modifying font settings."

 Related topics


Changing the appearance of images

WordPerfect includes tools that let you change the way an image looks. You can enlarge or reduce an image. You can crop an image. You can adjust the color attributes and change the fill for an image. You can also convert a color image to black and white. After you make changes, you can restore an image to its original appearance.

 How to


To enlarge or reduce an image

1	Right-click an image, and click Image tools.

2	Open the Zoom flyout, and click the Zoom in/zoom out tool.

A scroll bar displays at the right side of the image.

3	Click the arrows at the top or bottom of the scroll bar to enlarge or reduce the image.

 Tips

•	You can click the Zoom actual size tool in the Zoom flyout to restore the image to its original size.

•	You can use precise values to change the image size by clicking Edit attributes, enabling the Scale image option, and specifying a value in the Scale X and Scale Y boxes.

 Related topics


To crop an image

1	Right-click an image, and click Image tools.

2	Open the Zoom flyout, and click the Crop image tool.

3	Point to the image until the pointer changes to a magnifying glass.

4	Using the magnifying glass pointer, marquee select the part of the image that you want to crop.

The area you select fills the graphics box.

 Tip

•	Click the Zoom actual size tool in the Zoom flyout to restore the image to its original size.

 Related topics


To adjust color attributes for an image

To
Adjust the contrast	Right-click an image, and click Image tools. Open the Contrast picker, and click a contrast level.
Adjust the brightness	Right-click an image, and click Image tools. Open the Brightness picker, and click a brightness level.
Invert colors	Right-click an image, and click Image tools. Click Invert colors.
 Tips

•	Clicking Invert colors a second time returns the colors to their original values.

•	You can specify a precise value for brightness or contrast by clicking Edit attributes, enabling the Color attributes option, and specifying a value in the Contrast and Brightness boxes.

 Related topics


To change the fill for an image

1	Right-click an image, and click Image tools.

2	Open the Fill picker, and click one of the following attributes:

•	Normal [image] displays the image normally

•	Transparent [image] displays text or a background through the image

•	White [image] displays an outline of the image

 Related topics


To convert a color image to black and white

1	Right-click an image, and click Image tools.

2	Open the BW threshold picker, and click a gray value.

 Note

•	Any colors darker than the threshold become solid black. Any colors lighter than the threshold become solid white.

 Tip

•	You can specify a precise threshold value by clicking Edit attributes, enabling the B&W attributes option, and typing a value in the Threshold box. Higher numbers produce a darker image.

 Related topics


To restore an image to its original appearance

1	Right-click an image, and click Image tools.

2	Click Reset attributes.

 Related topics


Positioning images

WordPerfect allows you change the position of an image. You can move images that are placed in boxes. You can also flip an image, so that it displays its mirror image, or you can rotate an image. You can also change the center of rotation for an image.

 How to


To move an image inside a graphics box

1	Right-click an image, and click Image tools.

2	Click Move.

3	Drag the image to move it inside the graphics box.

 Tip

•	You can specify a precise horizontal and vertical position for the image by clicking Edit attributes, enabling the Move image option, and typing a value in the Horizontal or Vertical boxes.

 Related topics


To flip an image

1	Right-click an image, and click Image tools.

2	Click one of the following:

•	Vertical flip [image] flips or reverses the image on its vertical axis

•	Horizontal flip [image] flips or reverses the image on its horizontal axis

 Tip

•	You can also flip an image by clicking the Horizontal flip button or the Vertical flip button on the property bar.

 Related topics


To rotate an image

1	Right-click an image, and click Image tools.

2	Click Rotate.

Rotation handles display at each corner of the graphics box.

3	Drag a corner rotation handle in the direction you want to rotate the image.

 Tip

•	You can specify a precise angle of rotation for the image by clicking Edit attributes, enabling the Rotate image option, and typing a value in the Amount box.

 Related topics


To change the center of rotation for an image

1	Right-click an image, and click Image tools.

2	Click Rotate.

A center handle displays in the middle of the graphics box and on top of the image.

3	Drag the center handle to change the center of rotation.

 Related topics


Viewing and navigating

WordPerfect lets you customize the way you view and navigate documents.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	switching document views

•	changing document display settings

•	working with the ruler and ruler guides

•	using guidelines

•	displaying Reveal Codes

•	using the document map

•	navigating documents


Switching document views

In WordPerfect, you can view documents in four ways: draft, page, two pages, and browser preview.

In draft view, WordPerfect displays the body text of a document the way it will look when it is printed. Draft view does not display formatting such as headers, footers, and watermarks.

Page view displays a document with all of its formatting, the way it will look when it is printed.

Two pages view displays the same formatting as page view, except that two consecutive pages display side by side in the document window.

The browser preview displays a document in HTML format, suitable for an intranet or for the Web; however, WordPerfect codes with no equivalent HTML tags are either modified or deleted from the document. For more information about creating HTML documents, see "Publishing to HTML."

 How to


To switch the document view

•	Click View, and click one of the following:

•	Draft [image] to hide some document elements such as footers, page breaks, margins, and watermarks

•	Page [image] to display the document the way it will look when printed

•	Two pages [image] to display two consecutive pages in a document side by side

•	Preview in browser [image] to display a document in HTML format

You can also
Switch between Preview in browser and Page view	Click the Change view button.
Display the ruler in Two pages view	In Two pages view, click View [image] Ruler.
 Related topics


Changing document display settings

WordPerfect lets you change document display settings in several ways. You can enlarge or reduce the page display. As well, the document window can be minimized or maximized.

You can cascade or tile multiple open documents.

You can hide or display nonprinting items such as guidelines, hidden text, and formatting symbols. Nonprinting items display in the document window but do not display in the printed document. You can also hide or display graphics.

 How to


To enlarge or reduce the page display

1	Click View [image] Zoom.

2	Enable one of the following options:

•	Margin width [image] displays a complete line or block of text within a window with minimal white space to the right and left

•	Page width [image] displays the width of the page including margins in the window

•	Full page [image] displays all page margins in the document window

•	Other [image] lets you enter a custom zoom percentage

 Note

•	To enlarge or reduce the page display, the document must be in Draft or Page view.

 Related topics


To minimize or maximize the document window

•	Right-click the WordPerfect title bar, and click one of the following:

•	Minimize

•	Maximize

 Tip

•	If you want to restore a document window to its original size, right-click the title bar, and click Restore.

 Related topics


To cascade multiple documents

•	Click Window [image] Cascade.

 Related topics


To tile multiple documents

•	Click Window, and click one of the following:

•	Tile side by side

•	Tile top to bottom

 Related topics


To hide or display nonprinting items

To	Do the following
Hide or display margin icons	Click Tools [image] Settings. Click Display. Click the Document tab. In the Show area, enable or disable the Margin icons check box.
Hide or display table gridlines	Click View [image] Table gridlines. A check mark beside Table gridlines indicates that gridlines are displayed.
Hide or display hidden text	Click View [image] Hidden text. A check mark beside Hidden text indicates that hidden text is displayed.
Hide or display formatting symbols	Click View [image] Show ¶. A check mark beside Show ¶ indicates that formatting symbols are displayed.
Specify which formatting symbols display on your screen	Click Tools [image] Settings. Click Display. Click the Symbols tab. In the Symbols to display area, enable or disable any of the check boxes.
 Related topics


To hide or display graphics

•	Click View [image] Graphics.

A check mark beside Graphics indicates that graphics are displayed.

 Related topics


Working with the ruler and ruler guides

The ruler is used to display page format elements, such as margins, tabs, column gutters, and indentation. You can also use the ruler to set tabs, change margins, and indent paragraphs. The ruler has two parts: the line and the tab bar. The line resembles a ruler and contains graduated measurements for the area between the left and right margins. The tab bar, the white space in the lower part of the ruler, displays the triangular shaped tab marks.

Ruler guides are black dotted vertical lines that allow you to see where the settings for your margins and indentations are in relation to where the text displays on the page; for example, when you click a tab, the ruler guide and a box containing the tab's settings are displayed. You can display or hide the ruler and ruler guides.

You can use the ruler to add and delete tab stops in a document. For more information about tab stops, see "Adding tab stops."

 How to


To hide or display the ruler

•	Click View [image] Ruler.

A check mark beside Ruler indicates that the ruler is displayed.

 Related topics


To display ruler guides

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Display.

3	Click the Ruler tab.

4	Enable the Show ruler guides check box.

 Related topics


To add tabs using the ruler

1	Click a paragraph.

2	Open the Tab flyout, and click a tab style.

3	On the ruler, click the tab bar where you want the tab.

 Notes

•	When you change a tab setting, the Margin icon displays in the left margin.

•	When you add a tab stop, the tab set code is added to the Reveal Codes for the document. For more information about Reveal Codes, see "Displaying Reveal Codes."

 Tip

•	Click the Margin icon to display a Tab bar right above the cursor.

•	You can change a tab style. Right click a tab stop, and click a tab style.

 Related topics


To delete tabs using the ruler

1	Click a paragraph.

2	Drag the tab mark out of the ruler.

 Note

•	If you drag a tab over another tab, all the tabs between the dragged tab and the new position are deleted.

 Tip

•	You can also delete a tab by dragging the tab set code out of the Reveal Codes window.

 Related topics


Using guidelines

Guidelines are horizontal and vertical nonprinting lines that you can use to align tables, margins, columns, headers, and footers on a page.

You can display guidelines. You can also move guidelines. Guidelines must be displayed in a document before you can move them.

 How to


To display guidelines

1	Click View [image] Guidelines.

2	In the Display guidelines for area, enable one or more of the following check boxes:

•	Tables [image] displays guidelines that you can drag to change the width of table columns

•	Margins [image] displays guidelines that you can drag to change the width of margins

•	Columns [image] displays guidelines that you can drag to change the width of columns

•	Header/footer [image] displays guidelines that you can drag to change the widths of headers or footers

 Related topics


To move guidelines

1	Click View [image] Guidelines.

2	Enable the Drag to move guidelines check box.

3	Point to a guideline in the document until the pointer changes to a double-sided arrow.

4	Drag the guideline.

 Related topics


Displaying Reveal Codes

Reveal Codes are inserted when you add text and formatting to a document. Reveal Codes are hidden by default; however, they can be displayed in a separate window below the active document.

The following illustration shows how the cursor (in red) and codes display in the Reveal Codes window.

You can hide or display Reveal Codes. You can also customize the display of Reveal Codes; for example, you can specify the font style and color, and several other formatting options. In addition, you can print Reveal Codes. For more information about printing Reveal Codes, see "To adjust the advanced print options."

 How to


To hide or display Reveal Codes

•	Click View [image] Reveal Codes.

A check mark beside Reveal Codes indicates that Reveal Codes are displayed.

 Related topics


To customize the display of Reveal Codes

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Display.

3	Click the Reveal Codes tab.

4	In the Format area, enable or disable any of the following check boxes:

•	Wrap lines at window [image] to continue codes on the next line

•	Show spaces as bullets [image] to display a bullet for each space character

•	Show codes in detail [image] to display formatting information with codes

•	Auto-display codes in Go to dialog [image] to display the Reveal Codes window when a code match is found in a specific section of the document

You can also
Change the font	Click Font, and choose a font from the Face list box.
Change the font size	Choose a font size from the Size list box.
Change the font color	In the Color area, disable the Use system colors check box. Open the Text color flyout, and click a color.
Change the background color	In the Color area, disable the Use system colors check box. Open the Background color flyout, and click a color.
Use Windows system colors	In the Color area, enable the Use system colors check box.
 Related topics


Using the document map

The document map lets you use index, table of contents, or table of authorities reference markers to view and navigate long documents. The reference markers display in the document map window as hyperlinks corresponding to points in a document. For more information on reference markers, see "Working with reference tools."

You can display the document map in ordered list view or tree view. The ordered list view lists all the reference markers in the order in which they appear in the document. The tree view displays the reference markers in a hierarchical structure. For example, if a table of contents contains various levels, the first-level markers display in the list, and must open a marker to display the sub-level markers that it contains.

You can also refresh the document map to update any changes you have made to reference markers in a document.

 How to


To display the document map in ordered list view

1	Click View [image] Document map.

2	Choose a marker type from the Reference marker list box.

 Tip

•	You can navigate to a specific reference marker in a document by clicking a marker in the document map window.

 Related topics


To display the document map in tree view

1	Click View [image] Document map.

2	Choose a marker type from the Reference marker list box.

3	Click Tree view.

 Tip

•	You can disable structured view by clicking Tree view.

•	You can navigate to a specific reference marker in a document by clicking a marker in the document map window.

 Related topics


To refresh the document map

•	Click View [image] Refresh.

 Related topics


Navigating documents

WordPerfect lets you navigate documents in several ways. You can move to a specific section of a document, or you can scroll through a document. You can also display a document from a list of open documents. You can browse a document by insertion points, or by using a navigation control.

Menus and dialog boxes can be accessed using shortcut keys. For more information about shortcut keys, see "Using WordPerfect shortcut keys."

 How to


To move to a specific section of a document

1	Click Edit [image] Go to.

2	Choose an option from Go to what list box.

3	Choose any applicable options from the area to the left of the list box.

4	Click Go to.

 Note

•	You can also access the Go to dialog box by pressing Ctrl + G.

 Related topics


To scroll through a document

1	On the toolbar, click the Autoscroll button.

The pointer changes to the Autoscroll arrow.

2	Move the Autoscroll arrow in the direction you want to scroll.

 Note

•	The scrolling speed increases if you move the arrow further away from the Autoscroll tool.

 Tip

•	You can disable Autoscroll by clicking anywhere in the document.

 Related topics


To display a document from a list of open documents

•	Click Window, and click the filename of the document that you want to display.

A check mark beside a document path and filename indicates the active document.

 Related topics


To browse through insertion points in a document

•	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Back

•	Forward

 Related topics


To browse a document using a navigation control

1	On the vertical scroll bar, click the Browse button, and click a navigation control.

2	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Previous [image] moves the cursor to the previous occurrence of the selected navigation control

•	Next [image] moves the cursor to the next occurrence of the selected navigation control

 Related topics


Welcome to WordPerfect

WordPerfect is a powerful word-processing application that helps you produce newsletters, articles, reports, proposals, books, and other documents. WordPerfect lets you add graphics, tables, and charts to documents. You can publish to paper, electronic media, and the World Wide Web. WordPerfect allows you to format, structure, and edit documents at any time and gives you complete control over their design.

You can also benefit from the comprehensive online Help system, which offers assistance with any aspect of WordPerfect. This Help system includes accessing Corel technical services and support worldwide, printing a Help topic, and performing commands with the mouse, keyboard, and common buttons.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	Corel Corporation

•	using WordPerfect documentation

•	what's new in WordPerfect

•	what's different in WordPerfect


About Corel Corporation

Founded in 1985, Corel Corporation (www.corel.com) is a leading technology company specializing in content development (both text and graphics), business process management and XML-enabled enterprise solutions. The company's goal is to give consumers and enterprise customers the ability to create, exchange and instantly interact with content that is always relevant, accurate and available. With its headquarters in Ottawa, Canada, Corel's common stock trades on the Nasdaq Stock Market under the symbol CORL and on the Toronto Stock Exchange under the symbol COR.

 How to


To access the Corel Web site

You can access the Corel Web site directly from WordPerfect. The Corel Web site gives you information about projects and templates, printing, fonts, and macros. You can download fonts and macros from the Web site. You can also get technical support information, helpful tips and tricks, and information about training and certification.

Click	To get information about
Help [image] Corel on the Web [image] Corel Web site	Corel Web site.
Help [image] Corel on the Web [image] Printing info online	Printing
Help [image] Corel on the Web [image] Fonts online	Fonts
Help [image] Corel on the Web [image] Macros online	Macros
Help [image] Corel on the Web [image] Technical support	Technical support
Help [image] Corel on the Web [image] Tips and tricks	Tips and tricks
Help [image] Corel on the Web [image] Training and certification	Training and certification
 Related topics


Using WordPerfect documentation

WordPerfect includes online and paper documentation to help you learn and use the application efficiently. The following is a list of the types of Help that WordPerfect provides:

Online [image] lets you quickly retrieve all the information you need and then return to your work. Help displays in a separate window on your screen. For quick access, you can keep the Help window displayed on top of the application window. You can also print specific topics from the online Help system.

Context-sensitive Help [image] lets you view information that is relevant to the task you are currently performing. Context-sensitive Help provides help for menu commands, toolbar buttons, dialog boxes, and dialog box controls.

QuickTips [image] lets you view information about icons and buttons on the toolbars, and about the menu commands.

WordPerfect macros Help [image] gives you detailed information about working with macros.

WordPerfect Macros Command Center [image] gives you a complete listing of available macro commands, including PerfectScript macro commands.

PerfectExpert [image] guides you through basic tasks and helps you create detailed projects.

User Guide [image] If you use WordPerfect as part of WordPerfect Office, you can refer to the WordPerfect section of the WordPerfect Office User Guide for help.

Before you start using WordPerfect, it is important to understand the conventions used in the documentation. By reviewing the conventions, you will be able to use the mouse and the keyboard to create and edit documents more effectively.

Once you understand the documentation conventions, you can view online Help as you work in WordPerfect, or you can print online Help topics. You can access context-sensitive Help from the menus, dialog boxes, property bars, and all other toolbars.

WordPerfect also comes with its own built-in expert, which is ready to help you with many tasks. PerfectExpert includes the best features of QuickTasks, templates, and Coaches, combined with information from online Help and the power of a natural-language interface, to assist you with everyday tasks. PerfectExpert allows you to create complex documents quickly, using professionally designed templates.

You can access information about the application, license information, and your system. Application information consists of the application name, version number, serial number, and user name. This information doesn't change. You'll find it particularly useful if you ever need help from Corel Technical Support Services. System information consists of details about any of the following categories: system, display, printing, Corel .exe and .dll files, and system .dll files. You can save any system information in a text file called sysinfo.txt.

 How to


To follow documentation conventions

When instructed to	Do the following
Click File [image] New	Click the File menu with the mouse, and click New in the menu.
Click Format [image] Paragraph [image] Drop cap	Click the Format menu, click Paragraph, and click Drop cap in the submenu that displays.
Enable the [Y] check box	Click the [Y] check box to place a check mark or an "X" inside the box.
Disable the [Y] check box	Click the [Y] check box to remove the check mark or "X."
Select text	Drag to highlight text.
Click a paragraph	Click to place the cursor in the paragraph.
Click a page	Click anywhere on the page.
Right-click, and click Paste	Click the right mouse button, and click the Paste command in the submenu that displays.
Select a graphic	Click on the graphic
Press Enter	Press the Enter key on your keyboard.
Press Ctrl + Shift	Press the Control key and the Shift key at the same time.
 Related topics


To access online Help topics

1	Click Help [image] Help topics.

2	Click one of the following tabs:

•	Contents [image] lets you browse through topics by category

•	Index [image] provides a list of index entries, and lets you type the first few letters of the subject about which you want information

•	Find [image] lets you search for a particular word or phrase in the online Help

•	Corel Knowledge Base [image] lets you search for information on the Corel Web site

You can also
Access online Help for a menu item	Point to a menu item and press F1.
Access online Help for a toolbar button	Point to a toolbar button, press Shift + F1, and click the button.
Access WordPerfect macros Help	Click Help [image] Macro commands.
Access the WordPerfect Office Macro Command Center	Click Help [image] Macro commands, and double-click the WordPerfect Office Macro Command Reference Center book.
 Related topics


To print online Help topics

To	Do the following
Print an entire section	Click the Contents tab in the Help topics dialog box, choose the section you want to print, and click Print.
Print a selected topic	In the topic window, click File [image] Print topic.
 Related topics


To access context-sensitive Help

To get help for	Do the following
Menus	Point to a menu item for QuickTips information. You can also point to a menu item and press F1.
Toolbar buttons	Point to a toolbar button for QuickTips information. You can also point to a toolbar button, press Shift + F1, and click the button.
Dialog boxes	Click Help. You can also press F1.
Dialog box controls	Click the Context-sensitive Help button in an open dialog box, and click a control. You can also right-click a control.
 Related topics


To display PerfectExpert

•	Click Help [image] PerfectExpert.

A check mark next to the PerfectExpert command indicates that the command is enabled, and the PerfectExpert panel displays in the left side of the document window.

 Related topics


To view application and system information

To	Do the following
View application and system information	Click Help [image] About WordPerfect. In the About WordPerfect dialog box, click System info, and choose a category from the Choose a category list box.
View product and license information	Click Help [image] About WordPerfect. Click one of the following buttons to view information about that topic: • Copyright • License
Edit the serial number and personal identification number (PIN)	Click Help [image] About WordPerfect. Click PIN. In the PIN box, type the personal identification number.
 Note

•	The About WordPerfect dialog box displays the version number and registration information for your software.

 Tip

•	Click Save in the System info dialog box to store system information for printing. System information is saved as sysinfo.txt. A message box tells displays the location of the saved file.

 Related topics


What's new in WordPerfect

WordPerfect has new and enhanced features that let you create professional-looking documents. The following table shows the new features and what they do.

Feature	What it does
Publish to XML	Lets you publish new and existing WordPerfect documents to the XML format
WordPerfect Classic Mode	Lets you change your keyboard and environment to the WordPerfect 5.1 color and keystroke scheme
Document tracking	Lets you automatically route documents to other users using Outlook
Document map	Lets you navigate complex documents
Reveal Codes printing	Lets you print documents with the codes in place for easy troubleshooting
Conversion utility	Lets you quickly convert documents to the WordPerfect format
 Note

•	For a list of changed features in WordPerfect, see "What's different in WordPerfect."


What's different in WordPerfect

With every new version of WordPerfect, certain items are enhanced, others are renamed, and still others are found in a new location. The following table shows the items that have changed in WordPerfect.

Feature	What's different
Publish to PDF	Now supports Acrobat 5.0
Variables	Enhancements to the variables feature make it easier to store, retrieve, and reuse documents
Legal tools	Lets you create custom pleading templates, capture case data, and publish documents directly to EDGAR
Outlook Address Book	Lets you access data directly from an Outlook address book
RealTime Preview	Even more document modifications now work with RealTime Preview
Reference tools	Newly designed user interface makes creation of reference tools easier
 Note

•	For a list of new features in WordPerfect, see "What's new in WordPerfect."


·


Welcome to WP


The Context-sensitive help button displays information that is relevant to the task you are currently performing.


The Corel Web site button lets you go to the Corel Business Applications Community on the Web.


Moving between applications


Getting started


The Autoscroll button lets you enable Autoscroll.


The Change view button lets you switch between Page and Web view.


The New blank document button lets you create a blank WordPerfect document.


The Undo button lets you reverse the last change made to your document.


The Redo button lets you reinstate the last undo you performed.


The Back button lets you move the insertion point to its previous position.


The Forward button lets you redo the insertion point move.


The Zoom button lets you change the magnification of the active window.


The Cut button lets you move the selected text or graphics to the Clipboard.


The Copy button lets you copy the selected text or graphics to the Clipboard.


The Paste button lets you insert the Clipboard contents in your document.


The Open button lets you open an existing document into a new window.


The Save button lets you save the active document.


The Print button lets you print the active document.


The CorelCENTRAL Address Book button lets you access addresses from the Address Book.


Formatting pages


Margin markers indicate where page margins are located. Margin markers are located on the left and right ends of the ruler. When you point to a margin marker, the pointer changes to a double-sided arrow.


Margin markers indicate where page margins are located. Margin markers are located on the left and right ends of the ruler. When you point to a margin marker, the pointer changes to a double-sided arrow.


The Add new form button lets you create a page size definition.


The Edit form button lets you edit a page size definition.


The Delete form button lets you delete a page definition.


Formatting documents


The Bullets button lets you add and remove bullets.


The Numbering button lets you add and remove numbers for a numbered list.


The QuickFonts button lets you choose from a selection of recently used fonts.


The QuickFormat button lets you copy the format of text and headings and apply it to other text in a document.


The Highlight button lets you mark text with a bar of transparent color.


The Bold button adds bolding to text to make it stand out.


The Italic button adds italic to text to make it stand out.


The Underline button adds underlining to text to make it stand out.


The Reverse text button changes the color of the text and the background.


The Drop cap off button discontinues a drop cap letter.


The Drop cap position button lets you change the position of a drop cap letter.


The Drop cap size button lets you change the size of a drop cap letter.


The Drop cap style button lets you choose a drop cap style.


The Drop cap style picker lets you remove a drop cap or choose a drop cap style.


The Drop cap size picker lets you change the size of a drop cap letter.


The Drop cap position picker lets you change the position of a drop cap letter.


The Check box button lets you insert a check box in a document.


The Promote button moves the active list item to a higher level.


The Demote button moves the active list item to a lower level.


The Move up button moves the active list item up one position in the list.


The Move down button moves the active list item down one position in the list.


The Show icons button lets you show outline icons.


The Show levels button lets you show outline levels.


The Outline button lets you change the outline appearance.


The Show family button lets you show an outline family.


The Hide family button lets you hide an outline family.


The Set paragraph button lets you set a specific value for the paragraph number.


The Show/hide body button lets you switch between showing the body text and hiding the body text.


The Modify button lets you change the outline appearance.


The Drop cap font button lets you choose a drop cap font.


The Symbols button lets you choose a symbol to insert.


 The Underline picker lets you choose an underline style to apply.


 The Justification picker lets you choose a justification to apply.


 The Drop cap style picker lets you choose a drop cap style to apply.


 The Drop cap style button lets you change the style of a drop cap.


Editing documents


The Comments icon, which is visible in Page or Two Page view, represents comment text in a document. You can click the icon to see the comment; double-click the icon to edit the comment; and right-click the icon to see other options.


The Next button lets you move to the next comment.


The Previous button lets you go to the previous comment.


The Previous button lets you move to the previous change.


The Next button lets you move to the next change.


The Date button lets you insert a date in the comment.


The Show/hide button hides or displays margin markers.


The Display annotations shows the edited text with or without color markings, and is displayed by default.


The Insert current annotation button lets you accept the current change.


The Insert all annotations buttons lets you accept all the changes to a document.


The Delete the current annotation button lets you reject the current change.


The Delete all annotations button lets you reject all the changes to a document.


The Set color buttons lets you choose a color to use when reviewing documents.


The No signature button lets you sign a document with a digital signature.


The Signature valid button indicates that the digital signature is valid.


The Signature invalid button indicates that the digital signature is valid.


The Signature not verified button indicates that the digital signature cannot be verified as valid.


Page layout and design


The Margin icon lets you view the current tab settings.


The Columns button lets you create or discontinue columns.


The Return address button lets you insert a return address from the CorelCENTRAL Address Book.


The Mailing address button lets you insert a mailing address from the CorelCENTRAL Address Book.


The Envelope positions button lets you change the position of the return and mailing addresses.


The Envelope size button lets you choose a size for the envelope.


The Bar code button lets you create a POSTNET bar code.


Using tables and charts


The Table QuickCreate button lets you create a table where the cursor is positioned.


The QuickJoin button lets you combine table cells or rows by dragging.


The Insert row button lets you quickly insert a row into your table.


The QuickSplit row button lets you split rows by clicking or dragging.


The QuickSplit column button lets you split columns by clicking or dragging.


 The QuickSplit columns and rows button lets you split a table cell into rows and columns at the same time.


The Formula toolbar button lets you open the Formula toolbar. Using the Formula toolbar, you can view and edit formulas in a table.


The QuickSum button lets you quickly calculate the sum of the values in cells, columns and rows.


The QuickFill button lets you fill in values, such as a pattern of incrementing numbers, in a row, column, or range.


The Apply changes button accepts the formula and inserts it in the cell in which the cursor is positioned.


The Cancel changes button cancels any changes to the formula.


The Sort table button lets you sort the data in a table alphabetically or numerically.


Working with graphics


The Next box button lets you begin editing commands for the next box in the document.


The Previous box button lets you begin editing commands for the previous box in the document.


The Font color button lets you change the font color easily by opening a color palette.


The Vertical flip button lets you flip an image from left to right.


The Horizontal flip button lets you flip an image from top to bottom.


The Image tools button opens the Image tools palette. The Image tools palette has been redesigned. It now lists names for each of the image options to make them easier to identify.


The Caption button lets you begin editing a graphics box caption.


The Object(s) back one button moves the selected object back one layer in the document.


The Object(s) forward one button moves the selected object forward one layer in the document.


The Change folders button lets you browse to a different folder.


The Toggle preview button lets you enable or disable the preview window.


The Zoom in/zoom out button lets you enlarge and reduce the image.


The Crop image button lets you enlarge a selected portion of an image.


The Zoom actual size button lets you return an image to its original size.


The Watermark placement button lets you place the watermark image on odd pages, even pages, or every page.


The Watermark shading button lets you change the shading percentage to create a lighter or darker watermark image.


Managing long documents


The Close button lets you close an open screen window.


The Note number button lets you insert the active note number.


The Convert end to foot button lets you convert endnotes to footnotes in the active document.


The Convert foot to end button lets you convert footnotes to endnotes in the active document.


The Subdocument button lets you select a file to add to a master document.


The Expand master button lets you select the subdocuments to open in a master document.


The Condense master button lets you select the subdocuments to close in a master document.


The Generate button lets you create an updated list, index, cross-reference, table of contents, or table of authorities, in a document.


The Next button lets you move to the next header or footer.


The Previous button lets you go to the previous header or footer.


The Horizontal line button lets you insert a horizontal line in a header or footer. The line extends from the left margin to the right margin.


The Header/footer distance button lets you set the distance between text and the header or footer.


The Header/footer button lets you place a header or footer on odd or even pages.


The Browse button lets you search for the drive and the folder where the file is located.


The Page numbering button specifies the position and appearance of page numbers and sets the number.


Managing files


The Toggle menu on/off button lets you display the menu bar in the file management dialog box.


 The Browse button opens a file management dialog box, allowing you to search for a file, folder, or path.


Merging documents


Linking


The Sound button lets you play the sound clip.


The Play button lets you play a sound clip.


The Rewind button lets you move to the end of a sound clip.


The Fast forward button lets you move to the beginning of a sound clip.


The Replay button lets you replay the last sequence of a sound clip.


Link markers indicate the beginning and end of information linked as regular text.


Internet


The Columns button lets you create or discontinue columns.


The Font/size button lets you select a heading level or paragraph style in Web documents.


The Hyperlink previous button lets you move to the previous hyperlink in your document.


The Hyperlink next button lets you move to the next hyperlink in a document.


The Monospaced button lets you enable and disable monospaced text in Web documents.


The Remove wallpaper button lets you restore the default background to Web documents.


The Reset to original colors button lets you restore the default text colors to Web documents.


The Browse the web button lets you launch a browser.


The View in web browser button lets you format and view the current document as a Web document.


The New form button lets you create a form in Web documents.


The Horizontal line button lets you add a horizontal line to Web documents.


The Publish to HTML button lets you publish a document to HTML.


The Color button lets you open the color palette.


Templates


 The Browse button opens a file management dialog box, allowing you to search for a file, folder, or path.


The Toggle menu on/off button lets you display the menu bar in the file management dialog box.


Macros


The Stop button lets you stop recording or playing a macro.


The Record button lets you begin recording in the current document.


The Play button lets you play the current macro.


The Pause button lets you pause while recording or playing a macro.


 The Browse button opens a file management dialog box, allowing you to search for a file, folder, or path.


Customizing WP


The Reset keyboard/menu button restores the default WordPerfect keyboard or menu to its original settings.


Using bulleted lists, numbered lists and outlines


 The Numbers picker lets you choose a number style and create a numbered list.


Printing


 The Layout preview button lets you preview a print job.


 The Print envelope button lets you print an envelope.


Reference information: miscellaneous


 The Go to/from document manager button lets you switch back to the API of the DMS.


The What's this Help button displays information that is relevant to the task you are currently performing.


The Browse button lets you search for the drive and the folder where the file is located.


Other


The Tab button lets you choose a type of tab, set tabs, or delete tabs. It is located on the left side of the ruler. This illustration shows the default tab stop.


The First line indent marker is located on the ruler. It lets you set the indent for a paragraph or following paragraphs. By default, the marker is superimposed on the Left margin adjust marker and next to the Left margin marker on the ruler.


The Left margin adjust marker is located on the ruler. It lets you adjust the left margin for a paragraph or following paragraphs. By default, the marker is beneath the First line indent marker and next to the Left margin marker on the ruler.


The Right margin adjust marker is located on the ruler. It lets you adjust the right margin for a paragraph or following paragraphs. By default, the marker is next to the Right margin marker on the ruler.


The Tree view button lets you display the document map in a structured view. It allows you to display reference markers in the order in which they appear in the document.


Legal


The Pleading Expert Designer button opens the Pleading Expert Designer. The Pleading Expert designer is a wizard that guides you through the process of creating templates.


The Pleading Expert Filler button opens the Pleading Expert Filler. The Pleading Expert Filler guides you through the process capturing case data in templates.


Import and export file formats for WordPerfect

WordPerfect lets you import and export documents in a variety of file formats, such as word-processor, text, graphics, spreadsheet and database formats. For more information about importing and exporting Microsoft Word documents, see "Moving between Microsoft Word and WordPerfect."

In this section, you'll learn about

•	word-processor and text import formats

•	graphic file import formats

•	spreadsheet and database import formats

•	word-processor and text export formats

•	graphic file export formats

•	spreadsheet export formats


Word-processor and text import formats

•	Ami Pro 1.2, 1.2a, 1.2b, 2.0, or 3.0 (.sam)

•	ANSI (Windows) Delimited text (.txt)

•	ANSI (Windows) CR/LF to Srt (.txt)

•	ANSI (Windows) Text (.txt)

•	ASCII (DOS) Delimited Text (.txt)

•	ASCII (DOS) CR/LF to Srt (.txt)

•	ASCII DOS Text (.txt)

•	Borland Sprint

•	DisplayWrite 4.0, 4.2, or 5.0 (.doc)

•	Hypertext Markup Language (.htm)

•	IA5

•	IBM DCA FFT (.fft)

•	IBM DCA RFT (.rft)

•	Microsoft Word 4.0, 5.0, or 5.5 (.doc)

•	Microsoft Word for Windows 1.0, 1.1, or 1.1a (.doc)

•	Microsoft Word for Windows 1.2 or 1.2a (.doc)

•	Microsoft Word for Windows 2.0, 2.0a, 2.0b, or 2.0c (.doc)

•	Microsoft Word for Windows 5.0 (.doc)

•	Microsoft Word for Windows 6.0/7.0 (.doc)

•	Microsoft Word 97/2000 (.doc)

•	Microsoft Word 2002 (.doc)

•	MultiMate Advantage II 1.0 (.dox)

•	MultiMate 3.3 or 3.6 (.dox)

•	MultiMate 4.0 (.dox)

•	Navy DIF Standard (.dif)

•	Office Writer 6.0, 6.1, 6.11, or 6.2 (.wp)

•	Quick Finder Log

•	Professional Write 1.0 or 2.2 (.doc)

•	Rich Text Format (.rtf)

•	RTF Japanese (.rtf)

•	SGML

•	UNICODE Text (.txt)

•	Volkswriter 4 (.vw)

•	Windows Write (.wri)

•	WordPerfect 2.0 Macintosh (.wpm)

•	WordPerfect 2.1 Macintosh (.wpm)

•	WordPerfect 3.0 Macintosh (.wpm)

•	WordPerfect 3.1/3.5 Macintosh (.wpm)

•	WordPerfect 4.2 (.wp)

•	WordPerfect 5.0 (.wp)

•	WordPerfect 5.1/5.2 (.wp)

•	WordPerfect 5.1/5.2 Far East (.wp)

•	WordPerfect 6/7/8/9/10/11 (.wpd)

•	WordPerfect Compound File (.wpd)

•	WordStar 2000 1.0 (.wsd)

•	WordStar 2000 2.0 (.wsd)

•	WordStar 2000 3.0 (.wsd)

•	WordStar 3.3, 3.31, 3.4, or 4.0 (.wsd)

•	WordStar 5.0 (.wsd)

•	WordStar 5.5 (.wsd)

•	WordStar 7.0 (.wsd)

•	WP Works 2.0 Word Processor (.wpw)

•	XyWrite III Plus 3.55, 3.56, or 4.0 (.xy)

•	XML UTF-16 Big Endian

•	XML UTF-16 Little Endian

•	XML UTF-8

 How to


Graphic file import formats

•	Adobe Photoshop (.psd)

•	AutoCAD (.dxf)

•	CALS Compressed Bitmap (.cal)

•	CompuServe (.gif)

•	Computer Graphics Metafile (.cgm)

•	Corel PHOTO-PAINT 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 Image (.cpt)

•	CorelDRAW 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 (.cdr, .pat)

•	CorelDRAW , 4, 5, 6, 7 Template (.cdt)

•	Corel Presentations Exchange (.cmx)

•	Encapsulated PostScript (.eps)

•	Enhanced Windows Metafile (.emf)

•	FAX (.tif)

•	GEM Paint File (.img)

•	Harvard Graphics (.ch3, .sh3, .sy3, .prs, .tp3)

•	Hewlett-Packard Plotter Language (HPGL)(.plt)

•	Joint Photographic Experts Group (.jpg)

•	Kodak Photo CD (.pcd)

•	Lotus (.pic)

•	Macintosh PICT Graphic (.pct)

•	MacPaint Bitmap (.mac)

•	Micrografx Graphic (.drw)

•	Picture Publisher 4 (.pp4)

•	OS/2 Bitmap (.bmp)

•	PC Paintbrush Graphic (.pcx)

•	Portable Network Graphics (.png)

•	Presentations 2.0 Graphic (.wpg)

•	Presentations 2.0 Graphic Chart Style (.chs)

•	Scalable Vector Graphics (.svg)

•	Scitex CT Bitmap (.sct)

•	Tagged Image Format (.tif)

•	Truevision Targa (.tga)

•	Wavelet Compressed Bitmap (.wi)

•	Windows Bitmap (.bmp)

•	Windows Bitmap Cursor (.cur)

•	Windows Bitmap Resource (embedded image) (.exe)

•	Windows Metafile (.wmf)

•	Windows Icon (.ico)

•	WordPerfect Graphic 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 (.wpg)

•	WP Works 2.0 Paint (.wpw)

 How to


Spreadsheet and database import formats

•	Microsoft Excel 2.1 (Tabs and Spaces) (.xls)

•	Microsoft Excel 3.0, 3.1, 4.0, 5.0, 7.0, 97, 2000 (.xls)

•	Microsoft FoxPro 2.5 (.dbf)

•	Lotus 1-2-3 1.0 (.wks)

•	Lotus 1-2-3 2.0, 2.3, 2.4(.wk1)

•	Lotus 1-2-3 2E (.wke)

•	Lotus 1-2-3 2J, 2.1J, 2.2J

•	Lotus 1-2-3 3.0, 3.1 (.wk3)

•	Lotus 1-2-3 4.0 (.wk4)

•	Dbase 4, 5 (.dbf)

•	Quattro Pro 3.0, 4.0, 5.5 (.wb2)

•	Quattro Pro 1.0 and 1.0J for Windows (.wb1)

•	Quattro Pro 5.0 for Windows (.wb2)

•	Quattro Pro 6.0 (.wb2)

•	Quattro Pro 7/8 (.wb3)

•	Quattro Pro 9/10/11 (.qpw)

•	Paradox 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10 (.db)

 How to


Word-processor and text export formats

•	Ami Pro 1.2, 1.2a, 1.2b, 2.0, 3.0 (.sam)

•	ANSI (Windows) Delimited text (.txt)

•	ANSI (Windows) Generic Word Processor (.txt)

•	ANSI (Windows) Text (.txt)

•	ASCII (DOS) Delimited Text (.txt)

•	ASCII (DOS) Generic Word Processor (.txt)

•	ASCII DOS Text (.txt)

•	DisplayWrite 4.0, 4.2, 5.0 (.doc)

•	EDGAR

•	Hypertext Markup Language (.htm)

•	IBM DCA FFT (.fft)

•	IBM DCA RFT (.rft)

•	Microsoft Word 4.0, 5.0, or 5.5 (.doc)

•	Microsoft Word for Windows 1.0, 1.1, or 1.1a (.doc)

•	Microsoft Word for Windows 1.2 or 1.2a (.doc)

•	Microsoft Word for Windows 2.0, 2.0a, 2.0b, or 2.0c (.doc)

•	Microsoft Word for Windows 6.0/7.0 (.doc)

•	Microsoft Word 97/2000 (.doc)

•	Microsoft Word 2002 (.doc)

•	MultiMate Advantage II 1.0 (.dox)

•	MultiMate 3.3 or 3.6 (.dox)

•	MultiMate 4.0 (.dox)

•	Navy DIF Standard (.dif)

•	OfficeWriter 6.0, 6.1, 6.11, or 6.2 (.wp)

•	Professional Write 1.0 or 2.2 (.doc)

•	Rich Text Format (.rtf)

•	RTF Help File (.rtf)

•	RTF Japanese (.rtf)

•	Spreadsheet DIF (.dif)

•	UNICODE Text (.txt)

•	Volkswriter 4 (.vw)

•	Windows Write (.wri)

•	WordPerfect 4.2 (.wp4)

•	WordPerfect 5.0 (.wp5)

•	WordPerfect 5.1/5.2 (.wp5)

•	WordPerfect 5.1/5.2 Far East (.wp)

•	WordPerfect 6/7/8/9/10/11 (.wpd)

•	WordPerfect Compound File (.wpd)

•	WordStar 2000 1.0 (.wsd)

•	WordStar 2000 2.0 (.wsd)

•	WordStar 2000 3.0 (.wsd)

•	WordStar 3.3, 3.31, 3.4, or 4.0 (.wsd)

•	WordStar 5.0 (.wsd)

•	WordStar 5.5 (.wsd)

•	WordStar 6.0 (.wsd)

•	WordStar 7.0 (.wsd)

•	XyWrite III Plus 3.55, 3.56, or 4.0 (.xy)

 How to


Graphic file export formats

•	Presentations 2.0 Graphic (.wpg)

•	WordPerfect Graphic 5 (.wpg)

•	WordPerfect Graphic 6/7/8/9/10/11 (.wpg)

 How to


Spreadsheet export formats

•	Microsoft Excel 3.0 (.xls)

•	Microsoft Excel 4.0 (.xls)

•	Lotus 1-2-3 3.0 (.wk3)

•	Lotus 1-2-3 3.1 (.wk3)

•	Lotus 1-2-3 for Windows 1.0 (.wks)

•	Lotus 1-2-3 for Windows 4.0 (.wk4)

•	Quattro Pro 1.0 for Windows (.wb1)

•	Quattro Pro 5.0 for Windows (.wb2)

•	Corel Quattro Pro 6.0 (.wb2)

 How to


Reference


Microsoft IntelliMouse scrolling and zooming

WordPerfect provides scrolling and autoscrolling functionality for Microsoft IntelliMouse users.

The zoom control of the IntelliMouse wheel lets you change the magnification of a document by zooming in or out.

You can also change the IntelliMouse settings. This can be useful if you want to turn the IntelliMouse wheel on or off, or adjust the scroll settings.

 How to


To scroll using Microsoft IntelliMouse

•	Rotate the IntelliMouse wheel in the direction you want to scroll.

The scrolling increment is defined by your IntelliMouse settings.

 Note

•	The scrolling increment is defined by your IntelliMouse settings. For more information on IntelliMouse settings, see "To change IntelliMouse settings."

•	If you do not have a Microsoft Intellimouse, you can use the Autoscroll tool in WordPerfect. Autoscroll allows you to quickly scroll up, down, left, or right through a document. Users with a conventional mouse can access the Autoscroll button from the Zoom tool flyout. Intellimouse users can enable Autoscroll each time the Intellimouse wheel is clicked. For more information about using Autoscroll with a conventional mouse, see "Navigating documents."

 Related topics


To zoom in or out using Microsoft IntelliMouse

1	Hold down the Ctrl key.

2	Rotate the IntelliMouse wheel.

WordPerfect zooms in or out at intervals of 10% for each notch on the IntelliMouse wheel.

 Related topics


To change IntelliMouse settings

1	Click Start on the Windows taskbar.

2	Click Settings [image] Control panel, and double-click the Mouse icon.

3	In the Mouse properties dialog box, click the Wheel tab.

4	In the Wheel area, enable the Turn on the wheel check box.

5	Click Settings.

6	In the Settings for wheel dialog box, adjust the settings in the Scrolling area.

 Related topics


Using shortcut keys

WordPerfect can save you time accessing many of the dialog boxes and commands by using keystrokes. Included in this section are the default shortcut keys that come with WordPerfect.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	using WordPerfect shortcut keys


Using WordPerfect shortcut keys

You can use default shortcut keys for File, Edit, View, Insert, Format, Table, Tools, and Help menu commands. You can also use default shortcut keys for the property bar, navigation, and other commands. For information about customizing shortcut keys, see "Customizing WordPerfect."

You can use CUA or DOS keystrokes to move around in WordPerfect or to select text. If you are using the WPWin 7, WPWin 8, WPWin 9, or WPWin 10 keyboards, you use CUA keystrokes. If you are using the WPDOS 6.1 keyboard, you use DOS keystrokes.

 How to


To use File menu shortcut keys

Press	To
Ctrl + N	Create a new document (New)
(Ctrl + Shift + N) or (Ctrl + T)	Create a new document from a template (New from project)
(Ctrl + O) or (F4)	Open an existing document in a new window (Open)
Ctrl + F4	Close the current document window (Close)
(Ctrl + S) or (Shift + F3)	Save the current document (Save)
F3	Save the current document with a different name or file format (Save as)
(Ctrl + P) or (F5)	Specify how you want to print the document (Print)
Alt + F4	Quit WordPerfect (Exit)
 Related topics


To use Edit menu shortcut keys

Press	To
Ctrl + Z	Reverse the last change (Undo)
Ctrl + Shift + Z	Reverse the last undo (Redo)
Ctrl + X	Move the selection to the Clipboard (Cut)
Ctrl + C	Copy the selection to the Clipboard (Copy)
Ctrl + V	Insert the Clipboard contents at the cursor (Paste)
Ctrl + Shift + V	Insert the contents of the Clipboard into a document as a selected format (Paste special)
Ctrl + Alt + C	Insert the contents of the Clipboard into a document as unformatted text (Paste special)
Ctrl + A	Select all of the contents in an active document (Select [image] All)
Shift + F11	Change graphic box appearance, position, contents (Edit graphic box)
Ctrl + F	Search for words or codes and replace them with new words or codes (Find and replace)
Ctrl + G	Jump to a specified place in the active document (Go to)
 Related topics


To use View menu shortcut keys

Press	To
Ctrl + F5	Hide headers, footers, watermarks, and so on (Draft)
Alt + F5	Display headers, footers, watermarks, and so on (Page)
Alt + Shift + F3	Display or hide the ruler (Ruler)
Alt + Shift + F5	Display or hide all bars (Hide bars)
Ctrl + Shift + F3	Display or hide symbols for space, hard return, tab, and so on (Show)
Alt + F3	Display or hide all codes used in the document (Reveal Codes)
 Related topics


To use Insert menu shortcut keys

Press	To
Ctrl + W	Insert a symbol (Symbol)
Ctrl + F11	Create a line in a document from the left margin to the right margin (Line [image] Horizontal line)
Ctrl + Shift + F11	Create a line in a document from the top margin to the bottom margin (Line [image] Vertical line)
 Related topics


To use Format menu shortcut keys

Press	To
F9	Change the font (Font)
Shift + F7	Center the selected text, the current line only, or all text from the cursor forward (Line [image] Center)
Alt + F7	Right justify a line of text (Line [image] Flush right)
F7	Indent the current paragraph one tab stop (Paragraph [image] Indent)
Ctrl + F7	Indent all but the first line of the active paragraph one tab stop (Paragraph [image] Hanging indent)
Ctrl + Shift + F7	Indent the current paragraph equally from both margins (Paragraph [image] Double indent)
Ctrl + L	Align text on the left margin (Justification [image] Left)
Ctrl + R	Align text on the right margin (Justification [image] Right)
Ctrl + E	Center text between the margins (Justification [image] Center)
Ctrl + J	Align text on the left and right margins (Justification [image] Full)
Ctrl + F8	Change the left, right, top, and bottom margins (Margins)
Alt + F8	Create, edit, and select styles (Styles)
 Related topics


To use Table menu shortcut keys

Press	To
F12	Create a table or floating cell (Create)
Ctrl + F12	Format a table (Format)
Shift + F12	Add borders or fill to a table (Borders/fill)
Ctrl + Shift + F12	Fill a table with incrementing numbers or dates (QuickFill)
Ctrl + =	Add values in a table (QuickSum)
 Note

•	Some Table menu shortcut keys will not be available unless a table is first created.

 Related topics


To use Tools menu shortcut keys

Press	To
Ctrl + F1	Check and correct spelling (Spell checker)
Alt + Shift + F1	Check and correct grammar and spelling (Grammatik)
Alt + F1	Get synonyms, antonyms, definitions, and usage examples for a word (Thesaurus)
Alt + Ctrl + F1	Look up words in the dictionary (Dictionary)
Alt + F10	Play back a recorded series of commands (Macro [image] Play)
Ctrl + F10	Record a series of commands (Macro [image] Record)
Shift + F9	Create and combine data files and form files (Merge)
Alt + F9	Order text alphabetically or numerically (Sort)
Ctrl + F9	Generate a list, Index, cross-reference, table of contents, or table of authorities (Reference [image] Generate)
Alt + F12	Change WordPerfect settings (Settings)
 Related topics


To use Help menu shortcut keys

Press	To
F1	Display a list of Help topics (Help topics)
Shift + F1	Enable the What's This Help button
 Related topics


To use property bar shortcut keys

Press	To
Ctrl + B	Turn on/turn off bold
Ctrl + I	Turn on/turn off italic
Ctrl + U	Turn on/turn off underline
Alt + Ctrl + P	Find the previous occurrence of the current word or selection
Alt + Ctrl + N	Find the next occurrence of the current word or selection
 Related topics


To use navigation shortcut keys

Press	To
Tab	Move between controls in a dialog box; move between jumps in a Help window (press Enter to activate jumps)
Page up	Move up a screen
Page down	Move down a screen
Home	Move to the beginning of a line
Ctrl + Home	Move to the top of a document
Shift + Page up	Select the above screen
Shift + Page down	Select the screen below
Ctrl + Page up	Scroll to the left
Ctrl + Page down	Scroll to the right
Alt + Page up	Move to the previous page
Alt + Page down	Move to the next page
Alt + Shift + Page up	Select the previous page
Alt + Shift + Page down	Select the next page
End	Move to the end of a line
Shift + End	Select the end of a line
Ctrl + End	Move to the bottom of a document
Ctrl + Shift + End	Select the bottom of a document
Alt + End	Move to the bottom of a column
Alt + Shift + End	Select the bottom of a column
Left	Move left
Shift + Left	Select the previous character
Ctrl + Left	Move to the previous word
Ctrl + Shift + Left	Select the previous word
Alt + Left	Move to the previous column
Alt + Shift + Left	Select the previous column
Up	Move up
Shift + Up	Select the previous line
Ctrl + Up	Move to the previous paragraph
Ctrl + Shift + Up	Select the previous paragraph
Alt + Up	Move up one cell
Alt + Shift + Up	Select the above cell
Right	Move right
Shift + Right	Select the next character
Ctrl + Right	Move to the next word
Ctrl + Shift + Right	Select the next word
Alt + Right	Move to the next column
Alt + Shift + Right	Select the next column
Shift + F5	Zoom to the full page
F6	Move to the next pane
Shift + F6	Move to the previous pane
Ctrl + F6	Move to the next open document
Ctrl + Shift + F6	Move to the previous open document
Alt + F6	Move to the next window
Alt + Shift + F6	Move to the previous window
 Related topics


To use other shortcut keys

Keystroke	Function
F2	Find and replace
F4	Opens a file management dialog box from such dialog boxes as Publish to HTML, Compare documents, File settings, Define index, and Merge. To use F4, the cursor has to be positioned in a file management box; for example, if you are in the Publish to HTML dialog box (File [image] Publish to HTML), click in the HTML file name box and press F4 to open the Open file dialog box.
F8	Select
F11	From file
Insert	Typeover
Delete	Delete
Ctrl + Delete	Delete to end of line
Ctrl + Shift + Delete	Delete to end of page
Alt + Delete	Delete table row
Alt + Down arrow	Expand list box/access Browse
Alt + F2	Find previous
Alt + F11	Open Visual Basic Editor
Alt + Shift + F7	Tab hard decimal
Alt + Shift + F12	Calculate document
Alt + Shift + (underlined letter)	Perform a command from the List, Index, Cross-reference, Table of contents, or Table of authorities toolbar
Ctrl + F3	Redisplay
Ctrl + Shift + F5	Insert paragraph number
Ctrl + D	Date text
Ctrl + H	Outline body text
Ctrl + K	Case toggle
Ctrl + Q	Find quick mark
Ctrl + Shift + B	Insert bullet
Ctrl + Shift + C	Change the first letter in a paragraph to a drop capital
Ctrl + Shift + D	Automatic date
Ctrl + Shift + H	Print history
Ctrl + Shift + L	Insert line break
Ctrl + Shift + O	Define outline
Ctrl + Shift + P	Print document
Ctrl + Shift + Q	Set QuickMark
Ctrl + Shift + S	Save all
Ctrl + ,	Decrease width of table column
Ctrl + -	Character hyphenation
Ctrl + .	Increase width of table column
Ctrl + /	Cancel hyphenation
Ctrl + Shift + -	Soft hyphenation
Ctrl + Alt + 1	Inserts the Heading 1 style
Ctrl + Alt + 2	Inserts the Heading 2 style
Ctrl + Alt + 3	Inserts the Heading 3 style
Ctrl + Alt + 4	Inserts the Heading 4 style
Ctrl + Alt + 5	Inserts the Heading 5 style
Shift + F2	Find next
Shift + F8	Select cell
Shift + F10	Display pop-up menu
Ctrl	Prevents a docker from being docked
 Note

•	If you are using a French-Canadian keyboard and want to insert Heading styles, you must also press Shift with the other keys.

 Related topics


To move the cursor using CUA (WPWin10) and DOS keystrokes

To move the cursor to the	Press (CUA keystroke)	Press (DOS keystroke)
Beginning of a document	Ctrl + Home	Home, Home, Up Arrow
Beginning of a document (before codes)	Ctrl + Home	Home, Home, Home, Up Arrow
Beginning of a line	Home	Home, Home, Left Arrow
Beginning of a line (before codes)	Home, Home	Home, Home, Home, Left Arrow
Bottom of the screen	Page down	Home, Down arrow
End of the document	Ctrl + End	Home, Home, Down arrow
Next character	Right Arrow	Right Arrow
Next line down	Down arrow	Down arrow
Next page	Alt + Page down	Page down
Next word	Ctrl + Right Arrow	Ctrl + Right Arrow
Previous character	Left Arrow	Left Arrow
Previous line up	Up Arrow	Up Arrow
Previous page	Alt + Page up	Page up
Previous word	Ctrl + Left Arrow	Ctrl + Left Arrow
Specified page	Ctrl + G	Ctrl + Home
Previous document	Ctrl + Shift + F6	Shift + F3
Next document	Ctrl + F6	F3
Previous window	Ctrl + Shift + F6	Alt + Shift + F6
Next window	Ctrl + F6	Alt + F6
Previous pane	Shift + F6	Ctrl + Shift + F1
Next pane	F6	Ctrl + F1
 Related topics


To insert using CUA (WPWin10) and DOS keystrokes

To insert a	Press (CUA keystroke)	Press (DOS keystroke)
Back tab (margin release)	Shift + Tab	Shift + Tab
Hard page break	Ctrl + Enter	Ctrl + Enter
Hard return	Enter	Enter
Hard space	Ctrl + Space	Home, Space
Hyphen, hard	Ctrl + -	Home + -
Hyphen, soft	Ctrl + Shift + -	Ctrl + -
 Related topics


To delete using CUA (WPWin10) and DOS keystrokes

To delete the	Press (CUA keystroke)	Press (DOS keystroke)
Character to the left	Backspace	Backspace
Current character	Delete	Delete
Rest of a page	Ctrl + Shift + Delete	Ctrl + Page down
Rest of a line	Ctrl + Delete	Ctrl + End
Current word	Ctrl + Backspace	Ctrl + Backspace
 Related topics


To enable other editing keystrokes using CUA (WPWin10) and DOS keystrokes

Other editing keystrokes	Press... (CUA keystroke)	Press... (DOS keystroke)
Copy text to the Clipboard	Ctrl + C	Ctrl + Insert
Cut text to the Clipboard	Ctrl + X	Shift + Delete
Typeover	Insert	Insert
Cancel	Esc	Esc
Convert case of selected text	Ctrl + K	Ctrl + K
 Related topics


To perform functions in a column using CUA (WPWin10) and DOS keystrokes

While in a column, to	Press (CUA keystroke)	Press (DOS keystroke)
Move one column to the right	Alt + Right Arrow	Alt + Right Arrow
Move one column to the left	Alt + Left Arrow	Alt + Left Arrow
Move to the top of the column	Alt + Home	Alt + Home
Move to the bottom of the column on the current page	Alt + End	Alt + End
 Related topics


To perform functions in a dialog box using CUA (WPWin10) and DOS keystrokes

While in a dialog box, to	Press (CUA keystroke)	Press (DOS keystroke)
Move to the next control	Tab	Tab
Move to the previous control	Shift + Tab	Shift + Tab
Perform the default action	Enter	Enter
 Related topics


To perform functions in a table using CUA (WPWin10) and DOS keystrokes

While in a table, to	Press (CUA keystroke)	Press (DOS keystroke)
Move up one cell	Alt + Up Arrow	Alt + Up Arrow
Move down one cell	Alt + Down arrow	Alt + Down arrow
Move right one cell	Alt + Right Arrow or Tab	Alt + Right Arrow or Tab
Move left one cell	(Alt + Left Arrow) or (Shift + Tab)	(Alt + Left Arrow) or (Shift + Tab)
Move one tab space	Indent (F7)	Indent (F4)
Decrease column width	Ctrl + ,	Ctrl + ,
Increase column width	Ctrl + .	Ctrl + .
 Related topics


To select text using CUA (WPWin10) and DOS keystrokes

To select (block) text	Press F8, and then press (CUA keystroke)	Press Alt + F4 or F12, and then press (DOS keystroke)
Once character to the right or left	Right Arrow or Left Arrow	Right Arrow or Left Arrow
One line up or down	Up Arrow or Down arrow	Up Arrow or Down arrow
To the end of the line	End	End
To the beginning of the line	Home	Home, Home, Left Arrow
To the top of the screen	Page up	- (number pad)
To the bottom of the screen	Page down	+ (number pad)
To the first line on the previous page	Alt + Page up	Page up
To the first line on the next page	Alt + Page down	Page down
One word to the right or left	(Ctrl + Right Arrow) or (Ctrl + Left Arrow)	(Ctrl + Right Arrow) or (Ctrl + Left Arrow)
One paragraph up or down	(Ctrl + Up Arrow) or (Ctrl + Down arrow) or (press F8, then Shift + Enter)	(Ctrl + Up Arrow) or (Ctrl + Down arrow)
To the beginning of the document	Ctrl + Home	Home, Home, Up Arrow
To the end of the document	Ctrl + End	Home, Home, Down arrow
 Related topics


Reference


Using Open Document Management API

Open Document Management API (ODMA) is a standard managed by the Association for Information and Image Management (AIIM). A Document Management System (DMS) allows an install base to manage its documents. A DMS is a client-server application, from a server, that includes version control, security, project management, and file/content querying features. WordPerfect, Quattro Pro, and Corel Presentations use ODMA to integrate with a DMS, allowing it to take control of the Open and Save dialog boxes.

Most DMSs let you decide whether to use the API of the DMS or the native API of the current application. For instance, the DOCSOpen API has a menu option called "Native Application!" that switches you to the API of the current application; for example, the WordPerfect File Open or File Save/As dialog box. Use the Go To/From Document Manager button to switch back to the API of the DMS. This button is only available when the ODMA32.DLL is present in the \Windows\System (Windows 95 or 98) or \Windows\System32 (Windows NT) folder.

The path/filename attributed to a document saved via a DMS is obscure; for example, @PFDesktop/::ODMA/::ODMA/PCDOCS/SERVERNAME/1001/1. This is only the reference name used between your application and the DMS. This reference points to a document profile that acts like a library card and lets you retrieve your documents. The name you assigned to your document, such as "Corporate Newsletter, August 1998," appears in the application Title Bar, MRU list, Application Bar, Window menu, and wherever you find the path/filename displayed.

If Open Document Management API is installed on your system, a DMS API Open dialog box, such as the one shown below, opens by default. If the dialog box does not appear, ODMA is not installed on your system or is not properly set up, and you should call your in-house DMS administrator.

The following is an illustration of the Quick retrieve dialog box.

If ODMA is installed on your system, a DMS API Save dialog box, such as the one shown below, opens by default. If the dialog box does not appear, ODMA is not installed on your system or is not properly set up, and you should call your in-house DMS administrator.

The following is an illustration of the Document profile dialog box.

 How to


To open a file using ODMA

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	In the DMS API dialog box, double-click the file you want to open.

 Related topics


To switch back to the native application from ODMA

•	Click the Go to/from document manager button.

 Related topics


To save a file using ODMA

1	Click File [image] Save or Save as.

2	From the DMS options list box, choose the file format you want.

3	In the DMS save dialog box, e.g., the DOCSOpen "Document Profile" dialog box, type the required information.

 Notes

•	Each DMS dialog box differs in appearance and requires its own list of information to be filled out, such as the document name, author, document type, etc. The dialog box shown above shows typical examples of the descriptions you are asked to give.

•	In most cases, you are not asked for a path or filename. Instead, you are asked for the document description and other required information as determined by your DMS administrator.

 Related topics


Using Entrust

Entrust is an upgrade component for WordPerfect that lets you encrypt and digitally sign documents in WordPerfect using the Entrust security system. You need an Entrust server to use WordPerfect Entrust integration.

 How to


The Entrust Document security dialog box

The Document Security dialog box provides access to all of the built-in security functions for WordPerfect, using the buttons in the top row. For quicker access to any of these functions, you can add buttons for them to the WordPerfect toolbar. For information, see "The Entrust Settings dialog box."

When Entrust is installed, the Document Security menu item appears in the WordPerfect File menu. A corresponding button is also added to the toolbar.

 Related topics


The Entrust log on dialog box

The Entrust log on dialog box is used to log on to the Entrust security system. To log on, enter a user profile and a password. Entrust remembers up to six of the most recently used user profiles and lists these names in the User Profile list box. Entrust also associates your network logon ID with the last user profile you used to log on to Entrust. When you log on again, the same user profile is automatically entered in the User Profile field.

The Work offline check box lets you log on when access to the X.500 directory service is unavailable. If you are running Entrust in "Lite" mode, this check box is disabled.

If you have a logoff timeout interval set in your Entrust Client options, Entrust automatically logs you off the Entrust system if Entrust is not used for the specified amount of time. This guards against unauthorized use of your Entrust account while you are away from your desk or working in another application, such as WordPerfect. To stay logged on to Entrust while you are working in WordPerfect, ensure your timed document backup interval in WordPerfect is less than the Entrust logoff timeout interval. For example, if your timed document backup interval is set to 10 minutes and your Entrust logoff timeout interval is set to 5 minutes, then change the document backup to 4 minutes or the Entrust logoff timeout to 11 minutes. This way, your timed backup always occurs within the Entrust logoff timeout interval. Of course, this only works if your timed backup accesses an Entrust security function, such as encrypting or signing the file. If the document being backed up is not encrypted or signed, Entrust isn't called. Also keep in mind that a timed backup occurs only when a document has been modified since the last backup.

 Related topics


The Entrust Security information dialog box

The Security information dialog box displays security status information for each open document in WordPerfect. It provides information about whether a document is encrypted or signed, and, if signed, by whom and who the certifying authority is for the digital signature. If a document is extracted from an archive, the name of the archive file is included with the document name. You can use this information to determine what action needs to be taken to get a document in the state you want when it is saved and closed.

Click on any document in the list to make it the active document. Double-click a document to make it active and close the dialog box.

 Related topics


The Entrust Overwrite existing file dialog box

The Overwrite existing file dialog box appears when you extract a file from an archive and a file with the same name exists in the directory where you are extracting it. You can overwrite the existing file, extract it in a different location, or cancel the operation.

 Related topics


The Entrust Secure delete dialog box

The Secure delete dialog box is used to erase files completely from a disk using the Entrust secure delete mechanism. Files deleted in this manner cannot be recovered; therefore, be careful when selecting files to delete. After clicking the OK button, you are asked for confirmation before the delete process begins.

 Related topics


The Encrypt and sign dialog box

The Encrypt and sign dialog box can be used in several ways.

You can

•	encrypt and sign a document that is currently not encrypted or signed

•	change the current security mode of a document; for example, if a document is only signed and you want to encrypt it as well

•	select the recipients for an encrypted document

•	save a document in Entrust Client (archive) file format

•	save an encrypted or signed document without encryption and without a signature (original WordPerfect format)

The default option is determined by the default file save mode settings, specified in the Settings dialog box. If the default mode keeps each document in its current mode, then the option initially selected reflects the current state of the document. For example, if the document is currently encrypted and signed, the same option is selected as the default, or if the default file save mode is Sign only, this option is always selected as the default despite the document's current state. You can change the option if you wish to save the file in a different mode.

If you are encrypting a document for others, you must select the recipients. The Recipients box lists the currently selected recipients, if any. Only you and these recipients are able to read the document. Click Add to add new recipients to the list, or Remove to delete selected recipients from the list. The same list of recipients is used when saving any document with encryption; a separate list is not maintained for each document. If you are sending several documents to different individuals, you must change the list for each document before saving it.

 Related topics


The Entrust Recipients dialog box

The Recipients dialog box lets you select the names of recipients from several sources, such as

•	a personal address book

•	recipient lists

•	a public address book

•	an X.500 directory service that you access on a network

This dialog box is similar to the one you use in the Entrust Client when creating recipient lists. You can access it from either the main dialog box or from the Encrypt and sign dialog box. Its main purpose, however, is not to create recipient lists but to select the recipients for one or more documents. You must use the Entrust Client to create and edit recipient lists.

 Related topics


The Entrust Settings dialog box

The Settings dialog box lets you change the default security properties applied when documents are saved in WordPerfect. The first group of options sets the default file save mode that is best suited to the level of security in your department. The option you select determines how a file is saved when you use the File save command. It is also applied to the timed document backup file. You can override the default file save mode by selecting a different option in the Encrypt and sign dialog box.

Keep each document in its current mode is the most suitable option in many instances. When this option is selected, WordPerfect maintains the current security properties of each document you open and save using the File Save command. For example, if a document is unencrypted and unsigned, it remains that way until you decide to save it encrypted, signed, or both. If you change the security mode of a document, the document is maintained in that mode until you change it.

The last option in the File save mode group is used to restore encrypted or signed files to their original WordPerfect format, unencrypted and unsigned. You typically select this option only when you are preparing to remove Entrust from WordPerfect and need to convert all of your documents back to their original format. After setting this option, open each document that needs to be converted and save it.

The first option in the second group lets you select the Entrust archive format for encrypted and signed documents. Usually, these documents are saved in Entrust file format. This is the most secure method, since documents are encrypted in memory before they are saved to disk, including temporary and timed backup files. This can be especially important if these files are written to a network drive. However, if you need to exchange files with another user who does not have Entrust installed, select the Entrust archive format.

When you create or open an Entrust archive file in WordPerfect, a plain text file is also created; this is the file that appears in the document window. If you do not want these unsecured files to remain on your drive when the associated documents are closed, select the option to delete them. The Entrust secure delete method is used to erase the files. To delete the files, close the documents before you exit from WordPerfect. If you exit WordPerfect with the documents still open, the files cannot be deleted. A warning message is displayed when this occurs so that you can delete the files manually.

The option to display a warning message any time a file is saved unencrypted is useful if you occasionally need to disable encryption, but you must remember to turn it back on for sensitive documents.

 Related topics


The Entrust Toolbar buttons dialog box

The Toolbar buttons dialog box lets you select buttons to put on the WordPerfect toolbar for commonly used security functions. The top button is for the main dialog, which contains buttons for all of the other functions.

 Related topics


Using IFilter

The IFilter (WPDFILT.DLL) is a filter used by the Microsoft Index Server, which is a content-indexing program. The Microsoft Index Server indexes the documents on a server based on the keywords they contain. These indices are used to return your search queries. When you search for a particular string or phrase, the Index Server returns all the documents that contain the string or phrase. Microsoft Index Server can read only the following file types: .WPD, .HTML, .DOC, .XLS, .PPT, and .TXT.

IFilter lets you publish your WordPerfect documents on the Internet or intranet. You can search these documents the same way you search an HTML document, without having to convert your WordPerfect documents to HTML.

You can install this filter on the Web server machine. The filter detects all WordPerfect documents lying in the root or virtual root directories of the server, and helps to index them. This WordPerfect filter conforms to the index server specification set out by Microsoft.

 Related topics


To install the Microsoft Index Server

•	The IFilter is a self-extracting DLL, which automatically installs the filter in the right place and makes the corresponding registry entries.

 Related topics


Reference information

This section contains information on higher level functions in WordPerfect. You may find this information useful as you become more familiar with WordPerfect.

WordPerfect glossary

The WordPerfect glossary contains definitions of words used within the application.

WordPerfect PerfectExpert Help

In addition to helping you set up your document, PerfectExpert can help you prepare yourself before creating documents. Using the Help, you can learn how to write documents for school, work, or personal use. PerfectExpert Help also gives you tips on writing and giving speeches, as well as how to make your presentations, documents, greeting cards, signs, and more look professional.

Using WordPerfect shortcut keys

WordPerfect can save you time accessing many of the dialog boxes and commands by using keystrokes or by clicking buttons on the various toolbars. You can customize many of the keyboard shortcuts and create buttons for other commands. Included in this section are the default shortcuts that come with WordPerfect.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	using WordPerfect shortcut keys

Startup switches for WordPerfect

Startup switches are commands that allow you to control what happens when WordPerfect starts. Some of these commands are for your convenience, but others may be necessary to run WordPerfect on your particular system.

In section, you'll learn about

•	using WordPerfect startup switches

•	starting WordPerfect using a startup switch

•	setting a permanent startup switch for WordPerfect

Import and export file formats for WordPerfect

WordPerfect lets you import and export documents in a variety of file formats, such as word-processor, text, graphics, spreadsheet and database formats. For more information about importing and exporting Microsoft Word documents, see "Moving between Microsoft Word and WordPerfect."

In this section, you'll learn about

•	word-processor and text import formats

•	graphic file import formats

•	spreadsheet and database import formats

•	word-processor and text export formats

•	graphic file export formats

•	spreadsheet export formats

WordPerfect Macros Help

This section gives more detailed information about working with macros. For a complete listing of available macro commands, including PerfectScript macro commands, double-click the WordPerfect Office Macro Command Reference Center book.

WordPerfect and Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications

This section gives more detailed information about working with macros.

WordPerfect open standards

WordPerfect supports the following open standards: Open Document Management API, Entrust, and IFilter.

In this section, you'll learn about:

•	using Open Document Management API

•	using Entrust

•	using IFilter

Microsoft IntelliMouse support

WordPerfect is designed to work with the Microsoft IntelliMouse to give you enhanced zoom and scrolling features. The IntelliMouse wheel provides scrolling and rapid zooming capabilities. For the IntelliMouse to work correctly, it must be installed properly with the necessary software. For more information, see the Microsoft IntelliMouse documentation.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	Microsoft IntelliMouse scrolling and zooming


Reference


Startup switches for WordPerfect

Startup switches are commands that allow you to control what happens when WordPerfect starts. Some of these commands are for your convenience, but others may be necessary to run WordPerfect on your particular system. For example, you can ensure that WordPerfect always starts with the same startup switches by setting up a permanent startup switch.

In section, you'll learn about

•	using WordPerfect startup switches

•	starting WordPerfect using a startup switch

•	setting a permanent startup switch for WordPerfect

 How to


To use WordPerfect startup switches

Startup switch	Function
:	Starts WordPerfect without displaying the startup screen.
/d-path	Redirects the overflow files and temporary buffer files to the specified folder (for example, wpwin11 /d-x:\temp).
/DM=90	Reduces the size of the text displayed on screen to 90% of true WYSIWYG. This can fix some display problems, such as normal text appearing bolded or words appearing as if they run together.
"file extension" and "filename"	Opens the specified file from the documents folder that is specified in File Settings (for example, wpwin11 "x:\my documents\my letters\business.ltr"). You must include quotation marks around the file extension and filename.
filename/bk-bookmark name	Opens the specified file and moves to the specified bookmark (for example, wpwin11 business.ltr/bk-opening).
/fl	Tells WordPerfect to send text directly to the screen. This startup option corrects some display problems and may be required for using screen readers. It also prevents General Protection Faults and Invalid Page Faults that occur when opening or editing documents in WordPerfect with a 256-color graphics card driver. However, it may increase screen flickering.
/l-language code	Identifies which entry in the Language Resource File (wp.lrs) and which language .dll WordPerfect uses (for example, wpwin11 /l-DK).
/m-macroname	Starts the specified macro when .dll WordPerfect opens (for example, wpwin11 /m-x:\program files\corel\wordperfect office 11\macros\wpwin\heading1.wcm).
/mt-macroname	Starts the specified macro from the default template when .dll WordPerfect opens (for example, wpwin11 /mt-heading2.wcm).
/nb	Turns off original document backup option for the current session.
/recover	Rebuilds table information in the prefix of the document upon retrieval.
/u-name	Identifies the user initials for use on your network (for example, wpwin11 /u-GRB). This lets multiple users run WordPerfect on a network, although this option is not necessary for correct network operation.
 Related topics


To start WordPerfect using a startup switch

1	On the Windows taskbar, click Start [image] Run.

2	In the Open box, type wpwin11, followed by a space, and type the startup switches you want.

 Notes

•	If you use more than one startup switch, add a space between each command.

 Related topics


To set a permanent startup switch for WordPerfect

1	Create a shortcut to WordPerfect on your desktop.

2	Right-click the WordPerfect shortcut icon, and click Properties.

3	In the Target box, type the startup switches you want at the end of the command line.

Startup switches are placed outside any quotation marks in the command line.

 Notes

•	For information about creating a desktop shortcut, see the Windows online Help.

•	If you use more than one startup switch, add a space between each command.

 Related topics


Working with footnotes and endnotes

Footnotes and endnotes allow you to add reference information to a document, such as additional notes that accompany a topic or that provide references. Footnotes are displayed at the bottom of a page, while endnotes are found at the end of a document.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	inserting footnotes and endnotes

•	finding footnotes and endnotes

•	editing and deleting footnotes and endnotes

•	cutting, copying, and moving footnotes and endnotes

•	numbering footnotes and endnotes

•	modifying the text formatting of footnotes and endnotes

•	modifying the display of footnotes and endnotes on a page

•	converting footnotes to endnotes or endnotes to footnotes


Inserting footnotes and endnotes

When creating a document, WordPerfect allows you to insert footnotes or endnotes. A footnote is found below the text on a page or at the bottom of a page, whereas an endnote displays at the end of a document. When you insert endnotes or footnotes, a reference number or mark is inserted in the document text. That number or mark is linked to the corresponding information in the endnote or footnote. For more information about modifying footnote and endnote numbering, see "Numbering footnotes and endnotes."

 How to


To insert a footnote

1	Click where you want the footnote reference mark to display.

2	Click Insert [image] Footnote/endnote.

3	Enable the Footnote number option.

If you want to restart the footnote numbering at a specific number, type the number in the Footnote number box.

4	Click Create.

5	Type the footnote text.

If you want to align the footnotes with the document margins, enable the Align with document margins check box.

6	Click File [image] Close.

 Note

•	While working with a footnote, you do not have access to all available WordPerfect functions until you return to the body of the text.

 Tip

•	You can restore a deleted footnote number by clicking the Note number button on the property bar.

 Related topics


To insert an endnote

1	Click where you want the endnote reference mark to display.

2	Click Insert [image] Footnote/endnote.

3	Enable the Endnote number option.

4	Click Endnote placement.

5	Enable the Insert endnotes at insertion point option.

6	Click Create.

7	Type the endnote text.

If you want to align the endnotes with the document margins, enable the Align with document margins check box.

8	Click File [image] Close.

 Note

•	While working with a endnote, you do not have access to all the available WordPerfect functions until you return to the body of the text.

 Tips

•	You can restart the endnote numbering at a specific number by typing the number in the Endnote number box. When you enable the Insert endnotes at insertion point and restart numbering option, all endnotes up to the number you've specified display on one page, and then a note numbering starts over with 1 on a new page.

•	You can restore a deleted footnote number by clicking the Note number button on the property bar.

 Related topics


Finding footnotes and endnotes

WordPerfect lets you find specific footnotes or endnotes in a document. You can also search for footnote and endnote codes while in Reveal Codes. This provides you with a faster way of modifying specific footnote settings. For example, if you want to change the length of a footnote separator line, you can search for the "Footnote Sep Ln" code.

 How to


To find a footnote

1	Click Insert [image] Footnote/endnote.

2	Enable the Footnote number option.

3	In the Footnote number box, type the number of the footnote you want to find.

4	Click Edit.

 Related topics


To find an endnote

1	Click Insert [image] Footnote/endnote.

2	Enable the Endnote number option.

3	In the Endnote number box, type the number of the endnote you want to find.

4	Click Edit.

 Related topics


To find footnote codes

1	Press Alt + F3 to display Reveal Codes.

2	Click Edit [image] Find and replace.

3	Click Match [image] Codes.

4	Choose one of the following codes from the Find codes list box:

•	Footnote — represents a footnote

•	Footnote Cont Msg — represents a footnote "continued" message

•	Footnote Min — represents the minimum vertical space that is available for footnotes at the bottom of a page

•	Footnote Num Dec — represents the decrease footnote numbering setting for footnotes

•	Footnote Num Disp — represents footnote number style

•	Footnote Num Each Pg — represents the restart of footnote numbering on each page

•	Footnote Num Inc — represents the increase footnote numbering setting for footnotes

•	Footnote Num Meth — represents the footnote numbering method

•	Footnote Num Set — specifies new footnote number

•	Footnote Sep Ln — represents the footnote separator line

•	Footnote Space — represents the space between footnotes

•	Footnote Txt Pos — represents footnote text position

 Related topics


To find endnote codes

1	Press Alt + F3 to display Reveal Codes.

2	Click Edit [image] Find and replace.

3	Click Match [image] Codes.

4	Choose one of the following codes from the Find codes list box:

•	Endnote — represents an endnote

•	Endnote Min — represents the minimum amount of space that is available for an endnote at the bottom of a page

•	Endnote Num Dec — represents decrease endnote numbering setting for endnotes

•	Endnote Num Disp — represents endnote number style

•	Endnote Num Inc — represents increase endnote numbering setting for endnotes

•	Endnote Num Meth — represents the endnote numbering method

•	Endnote Num Set — specifies new endnote number

•	Endnote Placement — represents endnote placement

•	Endnote Space — represents space between endnotes

 Related topics


Editing and deleting footnotes and endnotes

Once you insert footnotes or endnotes in a document, you can edit the footnote or endnote text. You can also delete footnotes and endnotes from a document. When you delete a footnote or endnote number or mark, the note text for that footnote or endnote is automatically deleted. In addition, the footnotes and endnotes that follow are renumbered.

 How to


To edit a footnote

1	Click Insert [image] Footnote/endnote.

2	Enable the Footnote number option.

3	In the Footnote number box, type the number of the footnote you want to edit.

4	Click Edit.

5	Edit the footnote text.

6	Click File [image] Close.

 Tips

•	If you are using page view, you can edit the footnote text by clicking in the text.

•	You can restore a deleted footnote number by clicking the Note number button on the property bar.

 Related topics


To edit an endnote

1	Click Insert [image] Footnote/endnote.

2	Enable the Endnote number option.

3	In the Endnote number box, type the number of the endnote you want to edit.

4	Click Edit.

5	Edit the endnote text.

6	Click File [image] Close.

 Tips

•	If you are using page view, you can edit the text of the footnote or endnote by clicking in the text.

•	You can restore a deleted endnote number by clicking the Note number button on the property bar.

 Related topics


To delete a footnote or endnote

1	Select the footnote or endnote number or mark.

2	Press Delete.

 Related topics


Cutting, copying, and moving footnotes and endnotes

Both footnotes and endnotes can be cut, copied, or moved to other locations in a document. If you cut, copy, or move a footnote or endnote number or mark, both the mark and the reference text move to the new location. All footnotes or endnotes are renumbered to accommodate the change.

 How to


To cut or copy a footnote or endnote

1	Select the footnote or endnote number or mark.

2	Click one of the following:

•	Edit [image] Cut.

•	Edit [image] Copy.

3	In the document, click where you want to paste the footnote or endnote.

4	Click Edit [image] Paste.

 Related topics


To move a footnote or endnote

1	Select the footnote or endnote number or mark.

2	Drag the number or mark to a new location in the document.

 Related topics


Numbering footnotes and endnotes

You can change the numbering method of a footnote or endnote. For example, you can choose to display letters instead of numbers.

You can also control footnote or endnote numbering. You can choose by which amount the footnote or endnote numbers increase. In addition, you can specify to restart footnote or endnote numbering. Starting new numbers for footnotes and endnotes is useful when you want each chapter or section of a document to have its own footnotes or endnotes.

 How to


To change the numbering method of a footnote or endnote

1	Click Insert [image] Footnote/endnote.

2	Enable one of the following options:

•	Footnote number

•	Endnote number

3	Click Options, and click Advanced.

4	In the Numbering method area, choose a numbering method from the Method list box.

If you want to restart footnote numbering on every page, enable the Restart numbering on each page check box.

 Tip

•	If you choose Characters from the Method list box, you can specify any character in the symbols set by pressing Ctrl + W.

 Related topics


To control footnote or endnote numbering

1	Click Insert [image] Footnote/endnote.

2	Enable one of the following options:

•	Footnote number

•	Endnote number

3	Type the number of the first note in the Number box.

4	Click Options, and click Set number.

5	Enable one of the following options:

•	Increase by 1 — increases the footnote or endnote numbering by 1, starting with the number that displays in the Number box

•	Decrease by 1 — decreases the footnote or endnote numbering by 1, starting with the number that displays in the Number box

6	Click Create.

 Tip

•	You can specify a new starting number by typing it in the New number box.

 Related topics


Modifying the text formatting of footnotes and endnotes

You can change the formatting of footnote and endnote text, as well as that of the reference mark that displays in the document text.

 How to


To specify footnote or endnote number and text style

1	Click Insert [image] Footnote/endnote.

2	Enable one of the following options:

•	Footnote number option

•	Endnote number option

3	Click Options, and click Advanced.

4	In the Edit numbering style area, click one of the following:

•	In text [image] lets you specify a format for all footnote or endnote numbers that display in the document text

•	In note [image] lets you specify a format for footnote or endnote text

5	In the Styles editor dialog box, modify any attributes.

 Related topics


Modifying the display of footnotes and endnotes on a page

WordPerfect lets you modify the way footnotes and endnotes display on a page. You can change the amount of space between footnotes or endnotes. You can also change the position of footnotes on a page. For example, you can display footnotes immediately following the corresponding text on a page or at the bottom of a page. You can also choose to continue footnotes on the following page if there isn't enough room on a page. As well, you can adjust the separator line between document text and footnotes.

 How to


To change the amount of space between footnotes or endnotes

1	Click Insert [image] Footnote/endnote.

2	Enable one of the following options:

•	Footnote number

•	Endnote number

3	Click Options, and click Advanced.

4	Type a value in the Space between notes box.

 Related topics


To change the position of footnotes on a page

1	Click Insert [image] Footnote/endnote.

2	Enable the Footnote number option.

3	Click Options, and click Advanced.

4	In the Position area, enable one of the following options:

•	Place notes below text

•	Place notes at bottom of page

 Related topics


To continue footnotes on the following page

1	Click Insert [image] Footnote/endnote.

2	Enable the Footnote number option.

3	Click Options, and click Advanced.

4	In the Continued notes area, type a value in the Amount of note to keep together box.

This value specifies the minimum distance allowed for a footnote at the bottom of a page before the note is moved to the next page.

If you want to include a "continued..." message on the last footnote line of a page and the first footnote line of a new page, enable the Insert (continued...) message check box.

 Related topics


To adjust the separator line between document text and footnotes

1	Click Insert [image] Footnote/endnote.

2	Enable the Footnote number option.

3	Click Options, and click Separator.

4	In the Add space area, type a value in the Above line box.

This value specifies the amount of white space between the separator line and the document text above it.

5	Type a value in the Below line box.

This value specifies the amount of white space between the separator line and the footnote text below it.

6	In the Line format area, choose one of the following positions for the line from the Line position list box:

•	Left

•	Center

•	Right

7	Choose a line length from the Length of line list box.

8	Open the Line style picker, and click a line style on the line style palette.

You can also
Position the separator line between margins	Choose Full from the Line position list box.
Specify a specific line position	Choose Set from the Line position list box. Type a value in the From left edge box.
 Related topics


Converting footnotes to endnotes or endnotes to footnotes

Included with WordPerfect are macros that let you convert footnotes to endnotes and endnotes to footnotes. The macros are typically installed to the default macros folder.

 How to


To convert footnotes to endnotes or endnotes to footnotes

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Play.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the macros are stored.

3	Choose one of the following macros:

•	footend.wcm [image] converts footnotes to endnotes

•	endfoot.wcm [image] converts endnotes to footnotes

4	Click Play.

 Tip

•	You can also change footnotes to endnotes or endnotes to footnotes by clicking the Convert end to foot button or the Convert foot to end button on the Shipping macros toolbar. For information about customizing toolbars, see "Customizing toolbars."

 Related topics


Working with headers and footers

You can use headers and footers to display information such as titles, page numbers, dates, times, and document names.

The following picture shows a header, below the top margin of the page, and a footer, below the bottom margin of the page.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	creating and viewing headers and footers

•	inserting items into headers and footers

•	editing headers and footers


Creating and viewing headers and footers

You can create headers and footers in a document. You can also view headers and footers in page view or two pages view.

 How to


To create a header or footer

1	Click Insert [image] Header/Footer.

2	Enable one of the following options:

•	Header A

•	Header B

•	Footer A

•	Footer B

If you want to align the header or footer with the document margins, enable the Align with document margins check box.

3	Click Create.

4	Type the header or footer text.

 Note

•	You can use two different headers and two different footers on any page in a document; however, only two headers and two footers can be created on one page.

 Related topics


To view a header or footer

•	Click View, and click one of the following:

•	Page

•	Two pages

 Note

•	Headers and footers do not display in draft view. If you want to view a header or footer, the document must be open in page or two pages view. For more information about document views, see "Switching document views."

 Related topics


Inserting items into headers and footers

You can add a horizontal line to a header or footer to, for example, create a separation between the information in the header or footer and the document text. You can also insert the path and filename of the active document into a header or footer. If the document has never been saved, a code will be inserted instead, and the path and filename will not be displayed until you have saved the document. For more information about saving documents, see "Saving documents."

In addition, you can insert the date and time, or numbering, such as page, chapter, volume, or total pages, into a header or footer.

 How to


To add a horizontal line to a header or footer

1	Click where you want to add a horizontal line to a header or footer.

2	Click Insert [image] Line [image]  Horizontal line.

 Tip

•	You can also add a custom horizontal line to a header or footer. Click Insert [image] Line [image]  Custom line. Enable the Horizontal line option, and modify any of the settings in the Line attributes area. For more information about using custom horizontal lines, see "Using graphics lines."

 Related topics


To insert the filename of the active document into a header or footer

1	Click where you want to insert the filename into a header or footer.

2	Click Insert [image] Other, and click one of the following:

•	Filename

•	Path and filename

 Notes

•	If you rename the document, or move it to a different location on your computer, the header or footer updates automatically.

•	If the document has not been saved, a code is inserted in the header or footer. Once the document is saved, the filename will display. For information about saving documents, see "Saving documents."

 Related topics


To insert the date and time into a header or footer

1	Click where you want to insert the date or time into a header or footer.

2	Click Insert [image] Date/Time.

3	Choose a format from the Date/Time formats list.

4	Click Insert.

 Note

•	You can also create custom date and time formats. For more information, see "Adding the date and time to a document."

 Related topics


To insert numbering into a header or footer

1	Click where you want to insert numbering into a header or footer.

2	Click Format [image] Page [image] Insert page number.

3	Choose a numbering format from the Number list.

4	Click Insert.

 Related topics


Editing headers and footers

WordPerfect lets you edit the text in headers and footers. You can also adjust the distance below a header or above a footer. You can suppress headers and footers so that they do not display on a page and do not print. Discontinuing a header or footer removes it from the remainder of the document. You can also place a header or footer on odd or even pages of a document.

 How to


To edit the text in a header or footer

1	Click Insert [image] Header/Footer.

2	Enable one of the following options:

•	Header A

•	Header B

•	Footer A

•	Footer B

3	Click Edit.

4	Make any changes to the text.

5	Click File [image] Close.

 Tip

•	If the document is displayed in Page view or Two pages view, you can also edit the header or footer by clicking anywhere inside the header or footer. For more information about document views, see "Switching document views."

 Related topics


To adjust the distance below a header or above a footer

1	Click the Header/Footer distance button on the Header/Footer toolbar.

2	Type a value in the Distance between text and header/footer box.

 Related topics


To suppress a header or footer

1	Click Format [image] Page [image] Suppress.

2	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Header A

•	Header B

•	Footer A

•	Footer B

 Tip

•	You can also use delay codes to keep headers or footers from displaying on any page in a document, such as a title page. For more information about delay codes, see "Inserting and editing delay codes."

 Related topics


To discontinue a header or footer

1	Click Insert [image] Header/Footer.

2	Enable one of the following options:

•	Header A

•	Header B

•	Footer A

•	Footer B

3	Click Discontinue.

 Tip

•	You can also remove a header or footer from a document by dragging its associated code from the Reveal codes window. For information about Reveal Codes, see "Displaying Reveal Codes."

 Related topics


To place a header or footer on odd or even pages

1	Click Insert [image] Header/Footer.

2	Enable one of the following options:

•	Header A

•	Header B

•	Footer A

•	Footer B

3	Click Create.

4	Click the Header/Footer placement button on the Header/Footer toolbar.

5	Enable one of the following options:

•	Odd pages [image] places a header or footer on every odd page

•	Even pages [image] places a header or footer on every even page

•	Every page [image] places a header or footer on every page

 Related topics


Recordings, macros, and automation features

WordPerfect lets you create three types of macros:

•	WordPerfect [image] is stored in the document it applies to or in a macro library file. Create this macro when your task is contained within WordPerfect.

•	PerfectScript [image] is stored with a .wcm filename extension. This macro is useful if you want to interact with other WordPerfect Office applications, such as Quattro Pro and Corel Presentations.

•	Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) [image] lets you develop scripts that are saved in specific projects that use a robust version of the Visual Basic programming language. You can access the VBA editor from WordPerfect.

You can use macros to perform repetitive or complex tasks automatically. A macro performs a series of instructions. For example, you can create a macro that retrieves a file, gives it a new name, and saves it to another format. You can then play the macro to repeat the action.

A macro can consist of keystrokes, programming commands, product commands, and comments.The simplest way to create a macro is to "record" the keystrokes in WordPerfect. You can also write a macro if you want to include non-recordable tasks. (For example, you can define a macro to play until a certain event happens.)

In this section, you'll learn about:

•	using QuickMacros

•	recording, saving, and storing macros

•	playing macros

•	using macros included with WordPerfect

•	using toolbars for macros

•	using template macros

•	editing and deleting template macros

•	triggering macros from templates

•	customizing WordPerfect macros

•	assigning template macros to keystrokes, menus, and toolbars

•	associating toolbars with template features

•	writing and editing macros using PerfectScript

•	understanding macro commands and syntax

•	using macro conventions and formatting macros

•	recording macro commands into macros

•	inserting codes in macros

•	using macros from earlier versions of WordPerfect

•	using programming commands in macros

•	using parameters in macros

•	using variables in PerfectScript

•	using the macro command browser

•	using macro commands to retrieve information

•	using OLE object commands in macros

•	compiling macros

•	working from the PerfectScript utility

•	testing for errors from PerfectScript

•	editing and deleting macros

•	searching in macros

•	integrating with Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications

•	using the PerfectScript class to change WordPerfect documents

•	working with VBA methods

•	accessing and manipulating applications from other applications

•	using OLE Automation

•	understanding OLE Automation

•	using files with DDE Execute from previous versions of WordPerfect

•	getting online Help for macros

WordPerfect Office contains a minimal set of macros. To access more macros, visit our OfficeCommunity site on the World Wide Web.


Using QuickMacros

WordPerfect lets you create QuickMacros. A QuickMacro is a temporary macro that you can record without saving. WordPerfect stores a QuickMacro in your computer's memory for the current WordPerfect session only.

When you record a new QuickMacro, the existing QuickMacro is replaced. You cannot edit a QuickMacro or save it to a template.

 How to


To record a QuickMacro

1	Click Tools [image] Template macro [image] Record.

2	Click Record without entering a macro name in the Name box.

3	Perform the task you are recording.

4	Click Tools [image] Template macro [image] Record to stop recording the macro.

 Note

•	WordPerfect records both the keyboard and mouse actions you make; however, you must use the keyboard instead of the mouse to position the cursor in the document window.

 Related topics


To play a QuickMacro

1	Click Tools [image] Template macro [image] Play.

2	Click Play without entering a macro name in the Name box.

 Related topics


Recording, saving, and storing macros

Macros automate application tasks. For example, WordPerfect macros automate tasks, such as setting margins, selecting a font, or creating a merge file. Macro tasks consist of instructions, called statements. There are several kinds of statements: assignments, conditions, loops, comments, and commands. For example,

MarginLeft (1.0")

MarginRight (1.0")

are WordPerfect commands that set one-inch left and right margins. Each command represents one instruction or statement. The simplest macro consists of only one statement. Complex macros have hundreds of statements. The sequence of statements determines how a macro performs its tasks.

One way to create a macro is to record a task in WordPerfect. When you record a macro, you convert actions into macro commands. These are stored until you need them. Use the fewest number of steps necessary to perform your task.

To include programming commands, or non-recordable actions, you must edit the macro after you record it. For more information about editing macros, see "Editing and deleting macros."

You can instruct WordPerfect to pause while playing a macro if you want the macro to stop playing. This can be useful if you want to allow users time to type in text when they run the macro. When you play the macro, it runs until it reaches the PauseKey command.

WordPerfect allows you to store macros in any folder, including the default and supplemental macros folders. The default macros folder contains the macros with which WordPerfect was shipped. By default, WordPerfect's shipping macros are stored in X:\program files\corel\WordPerfect Office 11\macros\wpwin, where X represents the drive letter. You can use the supplemental macros folder as an additional folder to store macros.

 How to


To record a macro

1	 Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Record.

A check mark beside the Record command indicates that the command is enabled.

2	Type a name for the macro in the Filename box.

3	Click Record.

4	Perform the actions you want to record.

You can also
Pause recording a macro	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Pause.
Resume recording a macro	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Pause.
Stop recording a macro	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Record.
A check mark beside the Pause command indicates that the command is enabled.

 Notes

•	A macro is saved with a .wcm filename extension.

•	If you are recording a new macro, clicking Undo will still retain the step that you tried to undo.

 Related topics


To change the default macros folder

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Files.

3	Click the Merge/macro tab.

4	Click the Browse button in the Default macro folder box.

If you want to change the supplemental macros folder, click the Browse button in the Supplemental macro folder box.

5	Choose the drive and folder where you want to store the macros.

 Related topics


Playing macros

WordPerfect allows you to play and pause the play of macros. You can play a macro to repeat the sequence of steps for a task you want to perform. Before you can play a macro, however, it must be compiled with a compiler. For more information, see "Compiling macros."

 How to


To play a macro

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Play.

2	Choose the folder where the file is stored.

3	Double-click the macro filename.

 Notes

•	The Macro submenu displays the last nine macros you have played.

•	A macro you record may not play properly in every situation. Some macros depend on certain options or settings. When a macro cannot play, a message may display, indicating the reason and the line number(s) in the macro you can check.

 Tip

•	You can pause or resume playing a macro by clicking Tools [image] Macro [image] Pause.

 Related topics


To play a macro multiple times

1	Click Edit [image] Repeat next action.

2	Type a value in the Number of times to repeat next action box.

If you want WordPerfect to use this value as a default, click Use as default.

 Related topics


Using macros included with WordPerfect

WordPerfect comes with many predefined macros. The macros included with WordPerfect Office can be used as a basis for writing your own macro. For more information, see "Writing and editing macros using PerfectScript."

Many of the macros can be played by clicking buttons on the Shipping macros toolbar. For more information, see "Using toolbars for macros." For more information about playing macros, see "Playing macros."

 How to


Macros included with WordPerfect

Macro	Description
abbrev.wcm	Lets you insert the expanded forms of QuickWords.
adrs2mrg.wcm	Copies the address book (for automated templates) into a merge data file.
allfonts.wcm	Creates a document that lists every font available to the current printer and shows sample text in each font.
checkbox.wcm	Inserts a check box in the document that you can click to add or remove a check mark.
closeall.wcm	Closes all open documents and prompts you to save the modified ones.
ctrlm.wcm	Activates the macro command browser.
cvtdocs11.wcm	Lets you convert multiple documents from another document type to WordPerfect 11 format.
dcconvert.wcm	Converts "whole word" drop caps to "number of characters" drop caps for conversion to Microsoft Word.
endfoot.wcm	Converts endnotes to footnotes in the document or selected text. To run this macro, your cursor must be outside of the footnote or endnote box (that is, your cursor must be in the main body of the page).
expndall.wcm	Expands all QuickWords in the document.
filestmp.wcm	Places the filename and path of the current document in a header or footer.
flipenv.wcm	Creates an envelope rotated 180 degrees (text is upside down). On printers with a large trailing margin, this lets you print the return address 0.25" from the edge.
fontdn.wcm	Decreases the font size of the selected text by 2 points.
fontup.wcm	Increases the font size of the selected text by 2 points.
footend.wcm	Converts footnotes to endnotes in the document or in selected text.
longname.wcm	Changes the name of selected documents from the DOS (8.3) filename to a long filename based on the document summary description.
parabrk.wcm	Inserts symbols or small graphics as paragraph breaks. The graphics are centered on the blank line between paragraphs.
pleading.wcm	Creates lines and numbers for pleading documents.
prompts.wcm	Helps you create prompts for automated templates.
reverse.wcm	Creates white text on black background (or uses other color combinations) in selected text or table cells.
saveall.wcm	Prompts you to save open documents.
savetoa.wcm	Saves the current document and makes a copy of it on the diskette in drive A.
tconvert.wcm	Converts WordPerfect 6.0 templates that used the _autofil.wcm macro.
uawp11en.wcm	Used by PerfectExpert. Do not delete this macro from the macros folder.
wp_org.wcm	Creates an organization chart in WordPerfect.
wp_pr.wcm	Sends a WordPerfect outline to Corel Presentations.
 Note

•	In order to run the footend.wcm or endfoot.wcm macros, your cursor must be outside of the footnote or endnote box (that is, your cursor must be in the main body of the page).

 Related topics


Using toolbars for macros

WordPerfect has toolbars associated with macros, which you can use to: stop, record, play, and pause macros; insert system variables, product commands, and programming commands; save and compile a macro; insert merge and find and replace codes; change how a macro is saved; or close a macro.

 How to


To view a macro toolbar

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Toolbars tab.

4	In the Available toolbars list box, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Macro tools

•	Shipping macros

 Related topics


To view the Macro toolbar

•	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Macro toolbar.

A check mark beside the Macro toolbar command indicates that the command is enabled.

 Note

•	To access commands on the Macro toolbar or the Template macro toolbar, you must press ALT + SHIFT and the letter on the desired button. For example, to access the Codes button command, you must press ALT + SHIFT + O.

 Related topics


To view the Template macro toolbar

•	Click Tools [image] Template macro [image] Template macro toolbar.

A check mark beside the Template macro toolbar command indicates that the command is enabled.

 Related topics


To use the Macro toolbar

Click	To
Stop	Stop recording or playing a macro
Record	Begin recording in the current document
Play	Play the current macro
Pause	Pause while recording or playing a macro
Dialog Editor	Display the editor for customizing dialog boxes
Commands	Insert system variables, product commands, and programming commands at the cursor
Save & Compile	Save and compile the macro
Codes	Insert merge and Find & Replace codes
Options	Change how the macro is saved, close the macro, or hide the Macro toolbar
 Related topics


Using template macros

WordPerfect lets you add macros to a template. Template macros are macros attached to a template and are saved as part of that template file. They can be played only from that template and are not listed with standard macros.

There are three ways to add a macro to a template: you can add a template macro from another template; add a macro from a macro file stored on disk; or record a template macro from scratch.

You can record macros for specific templates and select specific templates as the default location to which you can record macros. You can only view the macros saved with the current template.

You can play a template macro. WordPerfect includes several templates with macros that are ready to use. You can pause a template macro if you need to interrupt the macro you are playing. You cannot play a template macro until you save and exit the template to which it is attached.

You can pause while playing a template macro. This can be useful if you want to allow users time to type in text when they run the template macro.

 How to


To add a template macro from another template

1	Click File [image] New from project.

2	Choose a category from the Category list box.

3	Choose a template from the Project list box.

4	Click Options [image] Edit WP template.

5	Click the Copy/remove object button on the Template toolbar.

6	In the Copy/remove template objects dialog box, choose the template that contains the macro from the Templates to copy from list box.

7	Choose Macros from the Object type list box.

If you want to add a macro from a macro file stored on disk, choose Macros on disk from the Object type list box, click the Browse button in the Macros on disk area, and choose the drive and folder in which the macro is stored.

8	From the Source list box, choose the macro you want to copy.

9	Click one of the following:

•	Copy [image] copies only selected items in the Source list box

•	Copy all [image] copies all items in the Source list box

 Tip

•	If the Template toolbar is not displayed, click View [image] Toolbars, and enable the Template check box.

 Related topics


To record a template macro from scratch

1	Click Tools [image] Template macro [image] Record.

2	Type the name of the macro in the Name box.

3	Click Location.

4	Enable one of the following options in the Macro location dialog box:

•	Current template [image] specifies the current template to record a template macro to

•	Default template [image] specifies the default template to record a template macro to

If you want to record a template macro to the enabled location by default, enable the Use as default check box.

5	Click OK.

6	Click Record.

7	Perform the task you want to record.

You can also
Pause a template macro you are recording	Click Tools [image] Template macro [image] Pause.
Resume recording a template macro	Click Tools [image] Template macro [image] Pause.
Stop recording a template macro	Click Tools [image] Template macro [image] Record.
View the macros that are saved with the current template	Click Tools [image] Template macro [image] Play.
The macros saved with the current template are listed in the Macros in template list box.

 Note

•	If you are recording a new macro, clicking Undo does not undo the most recent step performed; you will still retain the step that you tried to undo.

 Related topics


To play a template macro

1	Click File [image] New from project.

2	Choose a category from the Category list box.

3	Choose a template from the Project list box.

4	Click Create.

5	Click Tools [image] Template macro [image] Play.

6	Choose a macro from the Macros in template list.

The macro name displays in the Name box.

7	Click Play.

You can also
Pause a template macro	Click Tools [image] Template macro [image] Pause.
Resume playing a template macro	Click Tools [image] Template macro [image] Pause.
Play a template macro multiple times	Click Edit [image] Repeat next action, and type a value in the Number of times to repeat next action box.
 Tip

•	If you want to use the Number of times to repeat next action value as a default, click Use as default.

 Related topics


Editing and deleting template macros

By editing template macros, you can add, edit, or delete macro commands. The same rules of syntax and conventions that apply to macros apply to template macros. For more information, see "Writing and editing macros using PerfectScript," "Compiling macros," and "Editing and deleting macros."

 How to


To edit a template macro

1	Click File [image] New from project.

2	Choose a template from the Project list box.

3	Click Options [image] Edit WP template.

4	Click Tools [image] Template macro [image] Edit.

5	Choose a template macro from the Macros in template box.

6	Click Edit.

7	Edit any macro commands.

8	Click the Save & compile button on the Template macro toolbar.

9	Click Options [image] Close macro on the Template macro toolbar.

 Tip

•	To display the Template macro toolbar, click Tools [image] Template macro [image] Template macro toolbar.

 Related topics


To delete a template macro

1	Click Tools [image] Template macro [image] Edit.

2	Choose a template macro from the Macros in template box.

3	Click Delete.

 Note

•	You cannot delete template macros that are assigned to a toolbar, keyboard, or menu. WordPerfect deletes template macros from a template when you remove them from a toolbar, keyboard, or menu.

 Related topics


Triggering macros from templates

You can play a macro as you use a template. For example, if you use a template to create letters, you can set a PRE PRINT trigger in the template that runs a spell-check macro. The macro then lets you check the spelling of your letters just before they print.

You can use the following macro triggers.

Trigger	Description
POST CLOSE	Runs in the active window after you close a window.
POST NEW	Runs after you open a window by clicking File [image] New.
POST OPEN	Runs after you open a window by clicking File [image] Open.
POST PRINT	Runs after you send a print job to the printer.
POST STARTUP	Runs when you start WordPerfect. The macro must be associated with the default template.
POST SWITCH DOC	Runs in the active window after you switch from another window.
POST TABLES	Runs after you create a table structure in a document, but before you enter data in the table.
PRE CLOSE	Runs before you close the active window by clicking File [image] Close.
PRE NEW	Runs in the active window before you open another window by clicking File [image] New.
PRE OPEN	Runs in the active window before you open another window by clicking File [image] Open.
PRE PRINT	Runs after you click File [image] Print, but before the print job is generated.
PRE SWITCH DOC	Runs in the active window before you switch to another window.
PRE TABLES	Runs after you insert a table by clicking Insert [image] Table, but before the table structure is created in the current window.
Adding the TemplateFill macro command

The TemplateFill() macro command displays a dialog box that lets you enter template data. This dialog box varies depending on the fields required for the current template. If personal information is not specified, this command first prompts you to specify personal information regardless of what data the current template requires. If the current template does not require data other than personal information, and the personal information has been set, this command updates the personal information in the document without displaying the dialog box. If the current document is not based on an automated template, and the personal information has been set, this command does nothing.

Only macros that have been added to the template can be used with triggers. A trigger specifies when a macro plays in a template (for example, before you close a document).

Macros on disk cannot be associated with a trigger. Running the Prompt Builder associates the POST NEW trigger with <dofiller>, the feature that runs the Prompts dialog box. If the POST NEW trigger is associated with a template macro, use the TemplateFill() macro command in that template macro to activate the DoFiller feature.

If you want DoFiller to run when you are using a template macro, you need to add the TemplateFill macro command. The position of this command is important because macro execution is generally sequential. For example, if you want to insert a macro in a template that adds a date code to your document, you need to let the macro place the date code prior to your filling out the template prompts.

 How to


To insert a macro trigger in a template

1	Click File [image] New from project.

2	Choose a template from the Project list box.

3	Click Options [image] Edit WP template.

4	Click the Associate button on the Template toolbar.

5	Enable the Triggers option.

6	Choose a trigger from the Items to associate list box.

7	From the Macros list box, choose the macro you want to associate with the trigger.

 Note

•	Only template macros that you have created in that template or copied to that template display in the Macros list box.

 Related topics


To add the TemplateFill macro command

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Edit.

2	Double-click a filename.

3	Press CTRL + END to place the cursor at the end of the macro document.

4	Press ENTER.

5	Type TemplateFill().

6	Click Save & compile on the Template macro toolbar.

7	Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the macro.

8	Type the filename in the Filename box.

9	Click Options [image] Close macro on the Template macro toolbar.

 Related topics


Customizing WordPerfect macros

You can assign macros to keystrokes, menus, toolbars, and the property bar.

WordPerfect allows you to edit the name and QuickTips of a button, edit button images, and change the macro triggered by a button.

 How to


To assign a macro to a keystroke

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Keyboards tab.

4	Choose a keyboard from the Available keyboards list, and click Edit.

If you want to create a keyboard with the same initial settings as an existing keyboard, choose a keyboard, click Create, and type a name in the New keyboard name box.

5	In the Choose a shortcut key list box, choose a key to which you want to assign the template macro.

6	Click the Macros tab.

7	Click Assign macro to key.

8	In the Select macro dialog box, type the filename and path in the Filename box.

9	Click Select.

 Note

•	If you save a macro file without its full path, WordPerfect searches for the macro in the default folder, as specified on the Document page of the Files settings dialog box.

 Related topics


To assign a macro to a menu

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Menus tab.

4	Choose a menu from the Available menus list box.

5	Click Edit.

6	Click the Macros tab.

7	Click Add macro.

8	In the Select macro dialog box, type the filename and path in the Filename box.

9	Click Select.

You can also
Place the macro in a menu	Drag the new macro item over the menu. The blue line represents the macro.
Create a menu with the same initial settings as an existing menu	Click the Menus tab, and choose a menu from the Available menus list. Click Create, and type a name for the new menu in the New menu name box.
 Related topics


To assign a macro to a toolbar button

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Choose a toolbar from the Available toolbars list box.

4	Click Edit.

5	Click the Macros tab.

6	Click Add macro.

7	Type the macro path and filename in the Filename box.

8	Click Select.

 Related topics


To edit the name and QuickTips of a button

1	Right-click a button, and click Edit.

2	Right-click the button you want to edit, and click Customize.

3	Type text in any of the following boxes:

•	Button text [image] edits the text of the button

•	QuickTip [image] edits the QuickTips text of the button

 Note

•	If you save a macro file without its full path, WordPerfect searches for the macro in the default folder, as specified on the Document page of the Files settings dialog box.

 Related topics


To edit the image of a macro button

1	Right-click a button, and click Edit.

2	Make changes in any of the following areas:

•	Colors [image] lets you change the color of the button

•	Drawing mode [image] lets you choose between changing the image a single pixel at a time or filling the whole area

•	Zoomed image [image] lets you re-create the image

 Related topics


To assign a macro to the property bar

1	Click Tools [image] Settings, and click Customize.

2	Click the Property bars tab.

3	Choose a property bar from the Available property bars list box.

4	Click Edit.

5	Click the Macros tab.

6	Click Add macro.

7	Type the macro filename and path in the Filename box.

8	Click Select.

9	Drag the button that represents the macro to the property bar.

 Related topics


Assigning template macros to keystrokes, menus, and toolbars

You can assign template macros to a keystroke, a menu, and a toolbar button. When you press the assigned keystroke, click a menu item, or click a toolbar button, the macro is launched. You can assign template macros by using macros that you have created or macros that are included with WordPerfect.

You can also edit the current menu and create a menu with the same initial settings as an existing menu.

 How to


To assign a template macro to a keystroke

1	Click File [image] New from project.

2	Choose a template from the Project list box.

3	Click Options [image] Edit WP template.

4	Click Tools [image] Settings, and click Customize.

5	Click the Keyboards tab.

6	Choose a keyboard from the Available keyboards list, and click Edit.

7	Choose a key in the Choose a shortcut key list box.

If you want to remove a template macro from a keystroke, choose a key to remove from the template macro from the Choose a shortcut key list box, and click Remove assignment.

8	Click the Macros tab, and click Assign template macro to key.

9	Click a macro in the Macros in template list box, and click Select.

 Related topics


To create a keyboard with the same initial settings as an existing keyboard

1	Click File [image] New from project.

2	Choose a template from the Project list box.

3	Click Options [image] Edit WP template.

4	Click Tools [image] Settings, and click Customize.

5	Click the Keyboards tab.

6	Choose a keyboard from the Available keyboards list, and click Create.

7	Type a name for the new keyboard in the New keyboard name box.

8	Click Location.

9	Enable one of the following options:

•	Current template [image] saves the keyboard in the current template

•	Default template [image] saves the keyboard in the default template

 Related topics


To assign a template macro to a menu

1	Click File [image] New from project.

2	Choose a WordPerfect template, and click Options [image] Edit WP template.

3	Click Tools [image] Settings, and click Customize.

4	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Menus tab.

5	Choose a menu from the Available menus list, and click Edit.

6	Click the Macros tab, and click Add template macro.

7	Choose the template macro from the Macros in template list, and click Select.

8	Click OK.

9	Drag the button that represents the template macro to the menu.

 Related topics


To edit the current template menu

1	Right-click the current template menu.

2	Click Settings.

3	Click Edit.

 Related topics


To create a template menu with the same initial settings as an existing menu

1	Click File [image] New from project.

2	Choose a category from the Category list box.

3	Choose a template from the Project list box.

4	Click Options [image] Edit WP template.

5	Click Tools [image] Settings, and click Customize.

6	In the Customize settings dialog box, click the Menus tab.

7	Choose a menu from the Available menus list, and click Create.

8	In the Create Menu Bar dialog box, type a name for the new menu in the New menu name box.

9	Click Location, and enable one of the following options:

•	Current template [image] saves the menu in the current template

•	Default template [image] saves the menu in the default template

 Related topics


To assign a template macro to a toolbar button

1	Click File [image] New from project.

2	Choose a category from the Category list box.

3	Choose a template from the Project list box.

4	Click Options [image] Edit WP template.

5	Click Tools [image] Settings, and click Customize.

6	Click the Toolbars tab, enable a toolbar in the Available toolbars list box, and click Edit.

7	In the Toolbar editor dialog box, click the Macros tab, and click Add template macro.

8	In the Select template macro dialog box, click a macro in the Macros in template list box.

9	Click Select.

If you want the macro to display in a menu, drag the new macro menu item over the menu of your choice to the position you want. The blue line represents the macro.

 Related topics


To edit a toolbar button

1	Right-click any button, and click Edit.

If you want to customize a button, make any changes in the Toolbar editor dialog box.

2	Right-click the button you want to edit, and click Customize.

3	In the Customize button dialog box, type text in any of the following boxes:

•	Button text [image] edits the text of the button

•	QuickTip [image] edits the QuickTips text of the button

 Related topics


To edit the image of a toolbar button

1	Right-click any button, and click Edit.

2	Right-click the button you want to edit, and click Customize.

3	In the Image editor dialog box, click Edit, and make changes in any of the following areas:

•	Colors [image] allows you to change the color of a button

•	Drawing mode [image] allows you to choose between changing the image a single pixel at a time or filling the whole area

•	Zoomed image [image] allows you to re-create an image

 Related topics


Associating toolbars with template features

You can display a specific toolbar when you are working with specific features and macros. Toolbars, menus, and keyboards can be associated with a predefined list of features, which can be activated when the particular feature is used in a document.

You can also associate macros with various triggers that execute when a particular event occurs inside WordPerfect. There are 13 predefined triggers that you can associate with macros (for example, PRE NEW, POST NEW, PRE PRINT, and POST PRINT). For a list of macro triggers, see "Triggering macros from templates."

 How to


To use the Associate button with a template macro

1	Click File [image] New from project.

2	Choose a category from the Category list box.

3	Choose a template from the Project list box.

4	Click Options [image] Edit WP template.

5	Click the Associate button on the Template toolbar.

6	Enable the Triggers option.

7	Choose a trigger from the Items to associate list box.

8	Choose a macro from the Macros list box.

 Note

•	Only template macros that you have created in that template or copied to that template display in the Template macros list box.

 Related topics


Writing and editing macros using PerfectScript

PerfectScript macros are the common macro language for all applications in WordPerfect Office. PerfectScript is a command-based language. When you record a macro, you record the results of keystrokes or mouse selections instead of recording the keystrokes themselves. For example, instead of recording each keystroke required to change the top margin of a page to 2" (5.1 cm), the macro records the following command:

MarginTop(MarginWidth:2.0")

Recording and playing macros can speed up routine tasks, but the real power of macros is tapped when product commands are used together with PerfectScript programming commands. By using product commands and programming commands, the functionality of WordPerfect Office features is combined with the customizing, decision making, and iterative capabilities of a programming language. Using programming commands also makes it possible to include the functionality of other applications.

A written macro can include non-recordable statements, which cannot be included in recorded macros, that specify how a macro performs a task. You specify conditions for playing assignments, loops, and programming commands. Writing a macro provides greater flexibility to determine function than recording a macro. You can create a macro in WordPerfect and play it in the application for which it was written.

With PerfectScript, you can combine statements to automate routine tasks and simplify large ones. You write the macro using statements, compile the macro, and play the macro.

The PerfectScript programming language consists of WordPerfect application commands and functions, and programming statements and functions. PerfectScript can do more than perform your recorded WordPerfect commands [image] it can extend the functionality of WordPerfect in a number of ways, such as prompting you for input, displaying messages, controlling other Corel and Windows-based applications, and performing and repeating commands. You can also build complete applications or wizards so that, if you have limited experience using WordPerfect, you can still use some of the more complex actions.

PerfectScript lets you record, play, compile, and convert macros for all WordPerfect Office applications. PerfectScript starts automatically when you record or play a macro. If you play a macro for an application that is not running, PerfectScript automatically starts the application.

Installing the Software Developer's Kit

The Software Developer's Kit (SDK) is a set of tools that lets you customize WordPerfect Office applications for commercial or business use. For information about acquiring a WordPerfect Office Software Developer's Kit, visit Corel Solutions Partners.

The SDK includes the following components:

•	online Help for the SDK

•	OLE automation samples

•	PerfectScript tools

•	tools and utilities, including code generation wizards for third-party add-ons to WordPerfect, Quattro Pro, and Corel Presentations; utilities to monitor events in WordPerfect and Corel Presentations; and a file format parsing tool


Understanding macro commands and syntax

To edit and write macros, you must understand the PerfectScript programming language and the principles of computer programming. For most users, recording macro commands is more efficient than typing commands into the macro. WordPerfect opens a new blank window with another macro bar. After you have recorded keystrokes or commands, WordPerfect returns to the macro you are editing and inserts the newly recorded commands.

When you create macros using the macro command browser, the macro commands appear in a separate document, numbered. The first line of the macro identifies the program and default language that it uses. The remainder of the macro performs the reported instructions.

For more information about macro commands, see "Using macro conventions and formatting macros."

Understanding components of macro commands

Macro commands consist of four parts: a command name, parameters, enumerations, and separators. The table and example below display and describe these elements of syntax.

Macro command component	Description
Command name	Indicates which feature the command activates. Some commands consist only of a command name, such as FileOpenDlg().
Parameters	Provides more information about the command, such as which options of a feature are active. Parameters are always enclosed in parentheses; for example, Backup (State:On!).
Enumerations	Sets the value of a parameter (for example, State: On! or State: Off!). Enumerations always end with an exclamation point.
Separators	Marks the parameters in a command. Semicolons separate individual parameters; parentheses enclose a series of parameters; and braces enclose a series of repeating parameters.
For example:

MakeItFit (TargetPage:1;{Adjust: FitLeftMargin!};{Adjust: FitLineSpacing!})

The command in the above example has two parameters: TargetPage and Adjust. They are separated by a semicolon. Adjust is a repeating parameter with two enumerations specified: FitLeftMargin and FitLineSpacing. All the Adjust parameters are enclosed in braces to group them.

When you create macros using the macro command browser, the commands are inserted in the correct format. If you type a macro without the macro command browser, you must arrange macro commands and their elements in a precise order or syntax. Each macro command must be spelled correctly and must include all the required parameters and separators.

Using types of macro commands

There are three types of macro commands: product commands, OLE object commands, and programming commands. Product commands are specific to a product, such as WordPerfect or Quattro Pro. OLE object commands perform tasks on an OLE object. Programming commands work across applications; they are PerfectScript commands.

Command names often describe an action, such as Font, MarginLeft, Advance, and FootnoteOption, in WordPerfect; AlignObjectsLeft, BitmapBlur, SelectAllObjects, and ToolbarCopy in Corel Presentations; or Range in Microsoft Excel. Command names are not case sensitive and usually do not contain spaces. Exceptions include programming commands that call a subroutine, such as Case Call or OnCancel Call.

A macro can use more than one application product and OLE object. Commands to the non-default application or OLE object require a prefix, which is specified in an application or object statement. For example,

A1.AboutDlg ()

A1 (followed by a period) is the prefix. It tells the compiler to use the application or Object assigned A1 in a PerfectScript application or Object statement.

Understanding syntax

Syntax refers to the grammatical rules that govern the form of macro statements and expressions. For example, the syntax of the following statement, which types "John Doe," is correct:

Type(Text: "John Doe")

The syntax of the next example is incorrect and produces an error message because the statement lacks a closing parenthesis:

Type(Text: "John Doe"

If you find it difficult to distinguish different parts of a macro, remember that you can add extra line spaces, tabs, and even font changes to make the macro more readable. As long as the commands are written correctly, the macro compiler ignores extra spaces and lines.


Using macro conventions and formatting macros

When you create macros in WordPerfect, you must follow macro conventions for the macro to compile properly. However, you do not need to observe macro formatting conventions for a macro to compile correctly. These conventions are designed to improve the readability of your macro.

Macro conventions

Macro command syntax must be correct for a macro to compile. Understanding the following conventions used in WordPerfect macros will help you avoid common syntax errors:

You can enter programming commands in uppercase, lowercase, or mixed case. The compiler is not case sensitive. Product commands, such as AboutDlg or AddSlide, are shown in mixed case. WordPerfect system variables begin with ?, such as ?TextColorRed or ?FontUnderline. They are shown in mixed case, and they return information about the application environment.

Line wrapping does not affect macro execution. You should not insert spaces in a command name unless the space is part of the syntax. Do not use hard returns, tabs, or indents in a character expression (a character string enclosed in double quotation marks). You can use spaces, tabs, indents, and hard returns before and after commands, or between parameters, to make a macro easier to read. SmartQuotes in a macro create a compile-time syntax error. For more information about SmartQuotes, see "Editing quotation marks."

Formatting macros

You can type commands into a macro that is saved in a file or in a template. If you want to improve the readability of a macro, you can format it so that it includes tabs, spaces, and even font or text appearance changes. Formatting the macro does not affect how it works. For example, WordPerfect records the following macro in this format:

PosDocBottom()

Type(Text:"Sincerely")

HardReturn()

HardReturn()

HardReturn()

HardReturn()

Type(text:"Mrs. Jane Doe")

HardReturn()

Type(Text:"Vice President, Marketing")

However, if you type the commands yourself or edit an existing macro, you can format the macro the way you want. For example, you can format it as follows:

PosDocBottom()

Type(Text:"Sincerely")

HardReturn()

HardReturn()

HardReturn()

HardReturn()

Type(text:"Mrs. Jane Doe")

HardReturn()

Type(Text:"Vice President, Marketing")


Recording macro commands into macros

WordPerfect lets you record macro commands in a macro.

 How to


To record macro commands in a macro

1	Click where you want to insert the macro command.

2	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Record.

3	Type a name for the macro in the Filename box.

4	Click Record.

A blank document displays.

5	Perform the actions you want to record.

6	Click the Stop button on the Macro toolbar.

WordPerfect returns you to the macro document with the new macro command you recorded inserted.

 Related topics


Inserting codes in macros

When you insert a code in a macro, you must use straight double quotation marks around the code so that WordPerfect recognizes the code in the macro.

 How to


To insert a code in a macro

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Macro toolbar.

2	Click Codes on the Macro toolbar.

3	Click one of the following tabs:

•	Search [image] allows you to select search find codes

•	Merge [image] allows you to select merge find codes

•	Date [image] allows you to select date find codes

•	Other [image] allows you to select chapter, page, section page, total page, and volume number find codes

4	Choose a code from the Find codes list.

5	Click Insert.

6	Click Close.

 Related topics


Using macros from earlier versions of WordPerfect

You can update macros from earlier versions of WordPerfect. The structure of the macro language has not changed for WordPerfect versions 6 through 11. While later versions of the macro language include access to new WordPerfect features and some new commands for accessing existing features, most of the older product commands have been retained to maintain macro compatibility. Because some older product commands have changed, macros from versions 6 through 10 might need minor corrections when you compile them for the first time.

 How to


To update macros from earlier versions of WordPerfect

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Edit.

2	Choose a macro.

3	Click Edit.

4	Make any changes.

5	Click Save & compile on the Macro toolbar.

6	Note any errors listed by the macro compiler and make changes as needed.

 Related topics


Using programming commands in macros

Programming commands work across WordPerfect Office applications. They control macro functions by

•	specifying conditions under which other macro commands or statements operate (for example, Case, IfElse, Endif, Switch, and EndSwitch)

For example,

If (x = "A")

LineHeightDlg

Else

LineSpacingDlg

Endif

displays the Line height dialog box in WordPerfect if x equals the value "A". If x has another value, the subroutine displays the Line spacing dialog box. The If, Else, and Endif commands are programming commands. LineHeightDlg and LineSpacingDlg are product commands.

•	repeating macro commands or statements a specified number of times or until certain conditions are met (for example, For, Endfor, Repeat, Until, While, or EndWhile)

•	invoking or jumping to a specified subroutine with Call or Go

Programming commands and product commands are not case sensitive.

You can add blank lines to separate programming commands and subroutines, and you can indent lines to show levels of nested commands. Some macro commands cannot be recorded. You must type or insert them using the macro command browser. For information about the macro command browser, see "Using the macro command browser."


Using parameters in macros

Commands often require parameters, which are constant values (data). Parameters are passed to the compiler (which translates the macro so that it can be played in the application) or passed between subroutines. In this WordPerfect command,

Advance (Where: AdvanceDown!; Amount: 1.0")

Advance is the command name, Where and Amount are parameters, and AdvanceDown! and 1.0" are parameter data. This command advances the cursor down one inch. Parameter names, such as Where and Amount, are optional.

Data types

A data type represents information that is needed by a parameter or returned by a command (return value).

In the command syntax, data types are displayed in italics. For example, the enumerations for the Rotation parameter of BoxCaption Rotation are Degrees90!, Degrees180!, Degrees270!, and None!. Only these enumerations can replace the data type in the command syntax. Enumerations are identified by a trailing exclamation point. The most common data types in product commands are string, enumeration, and numeric. Programming commands frequently use variables.

Parameter names

Using parameter names is optional. For example, InhibitInput (State: Off!) works just like InhibitInput (Off!). Some product commands have no parameters. Their syntax is usually written with empty parameters, such as PosScreenUp (). Some programming commands and all system variables have no parameters. Their syntax is the command name alone, such as Pause and ?FeatureBar.

Italics

Italics in macros syntax indicate parameter names or types to be replaced with data. For example, the syntax of GraphicsLineLength is:

GraphicsLineLength (Length: measurement)

After you replace measurement with a number, the command might be:

GraphicsLineLength (Length: 21)

or

GraphicsLineLength (21)

Punctuation

You must enclose parameters in parentheses. A missing parenthesis is a common error that prevents macros from compiling. Parentheses are optional for commands without parameters, but must be used with user-defined functions and procedures.

Spaces between command names and the opening parenthesis of the parameter section, and after semicolons in parameters, are optional.

You must separate multiple parameters with semicolons (;). If you omit an optional parameter, include the semicolon in the syntax to keep following parameters in their correct positions. For example,

AbbreviationExpand (AbbreviationName:; Template: PersonalLibrary!)

or

AbbreviationExpand (; PersonalLibrary!)

Repeating parameters are enclosed in braces and are separated by semicolons. For example,

CASE (<test>: any ; {<Case>: any; <Label>: label; <Case>: and; <Label>: label...})

When data is supplied, the command could be

CASE (vChoice; {1; Exclaim; 2; Info; 3; Question; 4; Stop; 5; QuitMacro}; QuitMacro)

Product commands perform product tasks in a specific application. For example,

ShowSlide(Slide: 4)

displays the fourth slide in the current slide show in Corel Presentations.

Product commands are specific for each application. They perform various functions in that application, such as

•	displaying a dialog box, InitialCodesStyleDlg

•	specifying settings, such as styles, BorderBottomLine; user settings, PrefZoom; or attributes, Font

•	enabling and disabling features, InhibitInput or TableCellIgnoreCalculation

•	performing actions, such as inserting a file, FileInsert or code, PrinterCommand; renaming a bookmark BookmarkRename; converting comments to text CommentConvert; or moving the cursor PosColBottom

•	playing macros that are included with the application AddressMergeShippingMacro

Product commands that report information (return value) about the state of an application or feature are sometimes called system variables. In WordPerfect, system variables begin with a leading question mark, ?ColumnWidth. In Corel Presentations, they begin with a leading Env (EnvPaths). Some system variables in Corel Presentations have parameters as well as return values.

Product commands and programming commands are not case sensitive.


Using variables in PerfectScript

A variable acts as a place holder that represents a value, which can be text, numbers, or measurements, that you can use repeatedly in a macro. You can change or manipulate this value in the macro. WordPerfect allows you to use the commands, such as Constant, Declare, Global, Indirect, Local, and Persist, to create variables with different functions and actions.

Variables are typically preceded by the letter "v".

 How to


To assign a variable in PerfectScript

•	Type the Assign macro command where you want to define the variable.

For example, type Assign (vName;"Lori") to assign the text "Lori" to the variable "vName".

 Tip

•	You can type a colon followed by the equals sign (:=) as a shortcut to assigning a variable. For example, you could type vName:="Lori" for the above example.

 Related topics


Using the macro command browser

The macro command browser helps you insert macro product and programming commands in WordPerfect Office macros.

Product commands perform tasks that let you use WordPerfect Office features in macros. Many product commands require you to specify parameters and enumerations, which give the applications information about which options to use in dialog boxes and whether to hide or display certain features (for example, the ruler). You can use the macro command browser to specify the commands quickly.

 How to


To access macro commands

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Macro toolbar.

2	Click the Commands button on the Macro toolbar.

The PerfectScript commands dialog box displays.

 Related topics


To insert commands with the macro command browser

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Macro toolbar.

2	Click the Commands button on the Macro toolbar.

3	Choose a product from the Command type list box.

4	Choose items from any of the following list boxes:

•	Commands

•	Parameters

•	Enumeration

5	In the Command edit box type any additional parameters you need.

6	Click Insert.

7	Click Close.

 Notes

•	You can also insert system variables with the macro command browser. System variables contain current system information, such as the current chart type or the default directory. In WordPerfect, system variables begin with a question mark.

•	A parameter that is displayed in bold is a required parameter. The macro will not compile or run without it.

 Related topics


Recordings, macros, and automation features


Using macro commands to retrieve information

WordPerfect lets you create commands, such as MessageBox or GetString, that gather information for macros. You can use these types of commands, for example, to prompt the user to type in information. For information about the MessageBox command, see the PerfectScript Programming Macros Help in the PerfectScript macro command browser.

Using GetString, GetUnits, and GetNumber

You can use the GetString command to retrieve information, such as text or numbers, as text. The GetString command uses the following format:

GetString (Var;Prompt Text; Title; MaxLength)

The prompt text, title, and maximum parameter length are optional. You can use the GetUnits command if you want to provide WordPerfect with measurement information that can be used to move the cursor and set margins. If you want WordPerfect to use the information entered in a numeric expression (such as addition or subtraction), you can use the GetNumber command. Both the GetUnits and GetNumber commands are similar to the GetString command; however, they do not use maximum parameter length. The user can use any of the following abbreviations to represent units of measurement:

Unit of measurement	Abbreviation
WP Units (1200 per inch)	w
Points (72 per inch)	p
Millimeters	m
Centimeters	c
Inches	i or "
If the user doesn't type a unit of measurement with the number when prompted, WordPerfect uses WP Units as a default unit of measurement.


Using OLE object commands in macros

Commands for OLE objects are called methods, and they perform tasks on an OLE object in a specific OLE Automation server.

OLE object methods are specific for each object, such as "Excel.Application" or "Excel.Workbooks."

OLE object methods that return information about an object are called properties. Many properties have parameters as well as return values. In addition, many properties can be assigned a value, like the name of a variable, by placing them on the left-hand side of the assignment symbol ":=".


Compiling macros

You must compile a macro before you can play it. The programs that compile macros are called compilers. A macro compiler is used to compile or "translate" macros so that WordPerfect Office applications can play them. WordPerfect compiles a macro every time you save it.

Macros are written with an editor or word processor and saved as a source file. The macro compiler creates an object, which it saves in a hidden area of the source file (the macro compiler does not create a separate object file). When you edit the source file, the object is destroyed. The object is recreated each time the source file is compiled. A compiled source file (macro) contains instructions that are executed when you play the macro.

When you compile a macro, you might receive error messages which can indicate misspelled commands, missing parentheses or semicolons, and other syntax errors. If you receive an error message while the macro is compiling, you must correct all the errors before the macro will play. You can edit the macro to fix the errors.

WordPerfect macros have three types of errors: syntax errors, run-time errors, and logic errors.

Identifying syntax errors

Syntax errors appear when you are compiling a macro. The PerfectScript compiler flags unrecognizable commands, such as missing parentheses or semicolons and incorrectly spelled command names. For example, if you type Centr (WordPerfect command) instead of Center, a compile-time syntax error is displayed in a syntax error message box when you save and compile.

The compiler identifies syntax errors and suggests solutions. The error message displays information about the error and its location. The compiler makes a best guess and may not always be accurate. You must correct all errors before a macro can compile correctly. If you continue the compilation after an error is displayed, subsequent errors may be inaccurate.

Common syntax errors include

•	missing semicolons between parameters

•	missing parentheses

•	missing double quotation marks

•	missing command in a conditional or loop statement

•	misspelled macro command names

•	undefined calling statements

•	using commas between parameters instead of semicolons

Identifying runtime errors

Runtime is the same as execution time. Run-time errors occur while the macro is playing. Referencing a variable that has not been assigned a value causes a run-time error. Run-time error messages identify errors that occur while the macro plays and show where errors occur.

Identifying logic errors

When a macro does not produce the expected result, you may have a logic error. When a macro has a logic error, it plays without producing any error messages because WordPerfect accepts all of the macro commands.

Troubleshooting macro problems

The compiler can help you troubleshoot macro problems. If the compiler locates an error, a dialog box displays information about the problem. The compiler only directs you to the problem; it does not identify it.

The PerfectScript application has debugging features. For more information about PerfectScript, see the PerfectScript application online Help.

If you are writing or editing a macro, when you compile you change what is on screen to a language that PerfectScript can play. If you want PerfectScript to be able to read errors in the file, you must create a listing or log file. When you generate a listing file, PerfectScript saves it with a .wcl filename extension. If you want to debug PerfectScript macros using the PerfectScript debugger to tell you where the problems are located, you must set PerfectScript to produce a listing file every time you save and compile the macro. For more information about the PerfectScript debugger, see the PerfectScript online Help.

 How to


To compile a macro

•	Click the Save & compile button on the Macro toolbar.

If the Macro toolbar is not displayed, click Tools [image] Macro [image] Macro toolbar.

 Note

•	If a macro you compile has error messages, WordPerfect still saves it even if you do not fix the compile errors.

 Related topics


To set PerfectScript to generate a listing file when you compile a macro

1	On the Windows taskbar, click Start [image] Programs [image] WordPerfect Office 11 [image] Utilities [image] PerfectScript.

2	Click Tools [image] Settings.

3	Click the Compile tab.

4	Enable the Generate listing file check box.

 Related topics


To find macro errors using the PerfectScript debugger

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Edit.

2	Choose a macro.

3	Click Edit.

4	Click where you want WordPerfect to begin debugging the macro.

5	Type Step (On!).

If you want to display a debug window, type Display (On!).

6	Click the Save & compile button on the Macro toolbar.

7	Type a filename and path in the Listing filename box.

 Note

•	By default, listing files, which have a .wcl filename extension, are saved to the same location as the macro you are compiling.

 Related topics


Working from the PerfectScript utility

You can use PerfectScript either inside WordPerfect or from the PerfectScript utility, which is included with the WordPerfect Office utilities. You can also set the default macro folder and the PerfectScript editor. You must set the PerfectScript macro editor before you can edit a macro.

WordPerfect lets you test for errors from inside the PerfectScript utility. WordPerfect allows you several options for debugging macros. You can debug macros step-by-step so that the macro executes the current commands and stops at the next command. You can also debug macros with a breakpoint so that the macro executes all the commands in the macro until it reaches the breakpoint. Macro breakpoints are set by default to be the beginning of the macro, the end of the macro, and at any errors. WordPerfect also lets you debug a macro by briefly displaying or "animating" each command before it is executed.

Animation allows you to step through macros line by line, automatically bringing up the debugging dialog box at each step so you can check the variables and other calls. You can specify how long the debugger will pause before moving to the next step.

PerfectScript starts automatically when you record or play a macro from a Windows application that supports macros. If you play a macro for an application that is not running, PerfectScript automatically starts the application.

 How to


To start PerfectScript from the Windows Start menu

•	On the Windows taskbar, click Start [image] WordPerfect Office [image] Utilities [image] PerfectScript.

 Related topics


To set the default macro folder in PerfectScript

1	In PerfectScript, click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click the General tab.

3	In the Macro folder box, click the Browse button.

4	Choose the drive and folder where you want to store the macro.

5	Click Select.

 Related topics


To set the PerfectScript editor

1	In PerfectScript, click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click the Edit tab.

3	In the Editor path/filename box, click the Browse button.

4	Choose the drive and folder where the editor is stored.

5	Click Open.

 Tip

•	You can also edit macros by selecting a macro filename in Windows Explorer and clicking Edit from the QuickMenu.

 Related topics


Testing for errors from PerfectScript

WordPerfect lets you debug macros, step-by-step, with a breakpoint. You can also debug macros by briefly displaying or "animating" each command before it is executed.

 How to


To debug a macro step-by-step from PerfectScript

1	In PerfectScript, click File [image] Debug [image] Play.

2	Choose a macro.

3	Type a filename and path in the Listing filename box.

4	Click OK.

5	Click Debug [image] Step into.

 Note

•	You may need to repeat this procedure more than once, until the macro is debugged.

 Related topics


To set a macro breakpoint

1	Choose the line of the macro at which you want to insert a breakpoint.

2	Click Debug [image] Breakpoint [image] Add.

If you want to debug a macro with a breakpoint, click Debug [image] Continue.

 Related topics


To animate a macro

1	Click Edit [image] Settings.

2	Click the Debug tab.

3	In the Animate settings area, enable one of the following options:

•	'Runto' does 'step into' [image] executes the next single statement

•	'Runto' does 'step over' [image] executes the call of the label or routine without stopping until it has completed

4	Type a value in the Delay (seconds) box.

5	Click OK.

6	Click Debug [image] Animate.

 Tip

•	When correcting compilation errors, start at the beginning and first correct the errors that are obvious, leaving the others until later, as some of these errors may have been caused by an earlier error.

 Related topics


To view the meaning of commands from the PerfectScript Debugger

•	Point to a command line.

The command or variable name and definition display.

 Related topics


Editing and deleting macros

WordPerfect lets you edit and delete macros.

 How to


To edit a macro

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Edit.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the macro is stored.

3	Click Edit.

4	Make any editing changes.

5	Click the Save & compile button on the Macro toolbar.

6	Click Options [image] Close macro on the Macro toolbar.

 Related topics


To delete a macro

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Edit.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the macro is stored.

3	Click a macro.

4	Press DELETE.

 Related topics


Searching in macros

WordPerfect provides a macro with searching capabilities by recording a search in a macro. WordPerfect lets you use all of its find and replace functionality when you are searching in a macro. For more information about Find and Replace features, see "Finding and replacing text."

 How to


To record a search in a macro

1	In the edit view of the macro, click where you want the search to begin.

2	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Record.

3	Click Edit [image] Find and replace.

4	In the Find box, type the text for which you want to search.

5	In the Replace box, type the text with which you want to replace the found item.

6	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Record.

You can also
Search for codes	In the Find box, click Match [image] Codes, and insert the codes for which you want to search from the Codes dialog box.
Replace codes	In the Replace box, click Replace [image] Codes, and insert the codes that you want to use from the Codes dialog box.
 Related topics


Integrating with Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications

You can use Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) with WordPerfect Office. VBA is an object oriented programming language that lets you create VBA macros to automate tasks. You can, for example, create a macro in WordPerfect that changes the color of the headings. VBA is not part of the typical install of WordPerfect Office. To use VBA, you should do a custom install and enable Microsoft Visual Basic For Applications.

You can program and play a project or a global VBA macro in WordPerfect. You can play a project macro only from the document that was used to create it. If the macro does not perform the desired action, you can debug the macro.

You can edit a VBA macro. Editing a macro involves going directly to the start of the code, whereas debugging a macro involves stepping through each line of the code.

Debugging is an extremely important part of the programming process. Debugging lets you step through your code line by line to ensure that the macro executes properly. This feature of programming is known as single-stepping. For example, if you are at a point in the code where a variable is about to be assigned a value, you can step into this line of code to determine the value of the variable at run-time.

For more information about VBA, see the Microsoft Visual Basic Help in the Visual Basic Editor.

Event-driven programming

Visual Basic for Applications is an event-driven programming language. Most of the code you create is written to respond to an event. An event is an action that is recognized by VBA; for example, clicking a button or choosing an option from a list box. Unlike traditional procedural programming, in which the program starts at line 1 and executes line by line, event-driven programming executes code in response to events.

The difference between PerfectScript and VBA

Previously, you could only use the PerfectScript language to automate specific tasks. Both product commands and programming commands are used in conjunction with the PerfectScript language. The PerfectScript language is useful for developing simple macros. VBA offers more flexibility and power. When you use VBA to create macros, you are assisted by the Visual Basic compiler. The compiler helps you by providing context-sensitive Help when you are coding a VBA macro. You can combine the power of VBA with the PerfectScript product commands to create powerful macros. You must use the Visual Basic Editor to create VBA macros; however, PerfectScript macros are developed from the WordPerfect Editor. You can access the Visual Basic Editor only when you are working in an active document.

The PerfectScript class

All product commands used in WordPerfect, Quattro Pro, and Corel Presentations can be used in VBA macros. You must call the PerfectScript object to access a product command. An object is an instance of a class. All objects have properties; for example, the name of a document is a property that belongs to the document object. You can set or change an object's properties by calling certain methods. A method performs a specific action, such as inserting a table into a document. You can, for example, close a document by calling the Close method, or you can save a document by calling the Save method. The term "class" is a VBA programming term and means a collection of related methods, which are referred to as class members. The product commands are the class members that belong to the PerfectScript class. WordPerfect, Quattro Pro, and Corel Presentations have their own PerfectScript class because the class members, which are the product commands, are different depending on the application.

All members of the PerfectScript class will perform a specific action. For more information about product commands, see the macros manual.

The syntax for the product commands and the PerfectScript members is usually the same; however, there may be some differences.

Working in the VBA Editor

In most cases, the name of the class is the same as the name of the object. WordPerfect Office has one object, which is the document object. In WordPerfect, the name of the document object is ThisDocument, which is the same as the class. In Corel Presentations, the name of the document object is ThisSlideShow, which is the same as the class. In Quattro Pro, the name of the document object is ThisDocument, which is the same as the class. The document object is the host application that is open. In future versions, there will be many more objects, such as a table object or a cell object.

You can create a new object, such as a dialog box, which is known as a form. You can add controls, such as a check box or a text box. You can set the object's properties in the Property dialog box located in the Visual Basic Editor. You can also set the object's properties at run time by programming a method. For example, you can color a form red when you click on it. For more information about setting an object's properties, see the Microsoft Visual Basic Help in the Visual Basic Editor.

An experienced programmer can work directly with the Windows API (Application Programming Interface) and, for example, be able to determine how much disk space is free or gain access to the system's time and date values. Most VBA users will want to automate specific and repetitive tasks.

Accessing an Application from another Application's macro

You can access and change an application from another application's macro. For example, you could create and use a Quattro Pro object from a WordPerfect VBA macro. This allows you to change and save a Quattro Pro document from a WordPerfect VBA macro.

Creating VBA macros

You can create two kinds of VBA macros: a global and a project macro. You can play a global macro from more than one document; however, a project macro can be played only in the document which was used to create it.

You can create a project VBA macro by creating a public method for the ThisDocument object. The term public refers to the access level. If a method is public, it can be accessed from outside the class. This means that you can call it from the host application. If a method is private, only methods in the same class can access it. Every public method that belongs to the ThisDocument class is a project macro. You can create a VBA macro called ShowMessage and code one line as follows: MsgBox "Hello". This VBA macro calls a Message Box that displays the string "Hello."

Using VBA macros

You can store a VBA macro in the document by saving the document. Once you have saved the document, you can close and reopen the document and access the macro. After you have developed the macro, you should debug it. You can step through each macro line by line. This is a useful exercise to ensure that the macro will have the desired outcome. A project macro is not available if the document is closed. After you have debugged the macro, you can play the macro.

Assigning security

When you open WordPerfect Office documents created by other users, be aware that a document could contain a macro virus. As a screening measure, VBA includes a security mechanism to help manage document security. You determine the security level used when opening or loading documents and add-ins containing embedded VBA macros. You can review the assigned security level and collection of trusted certificates that come from reputable sources. A VBA developer can attach his digital signature to a macro which creates a certificate when the document is opened. The fact that a document has a digital signature does not automatically ensure the document to be free of viruses, so that the onus is on you to find out if the developer scans for viruses before adding his certificate to your trusted sources.

There are three security level settings available: High, Medium, and Low. With the High setting, you can open a signed VBA project from a trusted source with the macros enabled. Otherwise, the document is opened with the macros disabled. The default security setting is Medium. A Medium setting indicates that a warning displays if you try to load a VBA document that is not on your trusted source list. You can choose to open the document with the macros enabled or disabled. The Low setting allows you to open all VBA projects without applying any security (which disables all virus protection).

 How to


To start VBA from WordPerfect

•	Click Tools [image] Visual Basic [image] Visual Basic Editor.

 Note

•	The members of the PerfectScript class are applicable only to WordPerfect.

 Related topics


To display the VBA toolbar

1	Click View [image] Toolbars.

2	Enable the Visual Basic check box.

 Related topics


To create a VBA project macro in WordPerfect

1	Click Tools [image] Visual Basic [image] Visual Basic Editor.

2	Double-click Project (Document1) in the Project view.

3	Click Insert [image] User form.

4	Change the form so that it resembles the following diagram:

5	Change the name of the TextBox control to NameBox, as illustrated in the following list:

Command Button - CommandButton1

TextBox - NameBox

You can change all of the control's attributes, including the name of the control, in the Property dialog box located in the Visual Basic Editor.

6	Double-click the CommandButton1 control to create a new method for the UserForm1 class, and type the following lines of code in the CommandButton1_Click method:

Private Sub CommandButton1_Click()

Dim myname, Msg As String

myname = NameBox

Msg = "Hello " & myname

MsgBox Msg

End

End Sub

This code responds to the event that occurs when the command button is clicked.

7	Double-click the WordPerfect objects folder in the Project view.

8	Double-click ThisDocument, and type the following lines of code in the Editor box:

Public Sub ShowForm()

End Sub

This code adds a new method to the ThisDocument class. If you declare ShowForm as a Private method, you will not be able to run it from WordPerfect.

9	Type the following line of code in the ShowForm method:

Public Sub ShowForm()

UserForm1.Show

End Sub

 Related topics


To create a VBA global macro in WordPerfect

1	Click Tools [image] Visual Basic [image] Visual Basic Editor.

2	Double-click Global macros in the Project view.

3	Click Insert [image] User form.

4	Change the form so that it resembles the diagram below the procedure.

5	Change the name of the TextBox control to NameBox as illustrated in the following list:

Command Button - CommandButton1

TextBox - NameBox

You can change all of the control's attributes, including the name of the control, in the Property dialog box located in the Visual Basic Editor.

6	Double-click the CommandButton1 control to create a new method for the UserForm1 class, and type the following lines of code in the CommandButton1_Click method:

Private Sub CommandButton1_Click()

Dim myname, Msg As String

myname = NameBox

Msg = "Hello " & myname

MsgBox Msg

End

End Sub

This code responds to the event that occurs when the command button is clicked.

7	Double-click the WordPerfect objects folder in the Project view.

8	Double-click ThisDocument, and type the following lines of code in the Editor box:

Public Sub ShowForm()

End Sub

This code will add a new method to the ThisDocument class. If you declare ShowForm as a Private method, you will not be able to run it from WordPerfect.

9	Type the following line of code in the ShowForm method:

Public Sub ShowForm()

UserForm1.Show

End Sub

 Note

•	The name of this macro is ShowForm. For more information about VBA, see the Microsoft Visual Basic Help in the Visual Basic Editor.

 Related topics


To play a VBA macro in WordPerfect

1	Click Tools [image] Visual Basic [image] Play.

2	Choose one of the following macros from the Macros in list box:

•	ThisDocument [image] lets you play a project VBA macro

•	Global [image] lets you play a global VBA macro

3	Choose a macro from the Macro name list box.

4	Click Run.

 Tip

•	To start a VBA macro, you can also click the Play button on the Visual Basic toolbar.

 Related topics


To edit a VBA macro

1	Click Tools [image] Visual Basic [image] Play.

2	Choose a macro from the Macro name list box.

3	Click Edit.

4	Edit the code as necessary.

 Related topics


To debug a macro created in VBA

1	Click Tools [image] Visual Basic [image] Play.

2	Choose a macro from the Macro name list box.

3	Click Step into.

4	For each line of code you want to step into, click Debug [image] Step into.

5	Change the code as necessary.

 Note

•	After you have stepped into a line of code, you can point to a specific variable to determine the value of the variable.

 Related topics


Using the PerfectScript class to change WordPerfect documents

The PerfectScript class lets you automate specific and repetitive tasks. The members of the PerfectScript class are the product commands that are used in conjunction with the PerfectScript language.

 How to


To create a VBA macro that uses the PerfectScript class

1	Click Tools [image] Visual Basic [image] Visual Basic Editor.

2	Double-click Project(Document1), and double-click the WordPerfect objects folder in the Project view.

3	Double-click ThisDocument, and type the following lines of code in the Editor window:

Public Sub AddWatermark()

UserForm1.Show

End Sub

This code will add a new method, called AddWatermark, to the ThisDocument class. Userform1 is the name of the form object. The Show method will call Userform1.

4	Click Insert [image] User form, and change the form so that it resembles the following diagram:

The default names of the controls are used. Located on this form are a CommandButton and a ComboBox. You can change all of the control's attributes, including the name of the control, in the Property dialog box located in the Visual Basic Editor.

5	Double-click on the form to access the Editor window, choose General from the Object list box, and add the following code in the Editor window:

Dim myStyle As String

This code will create a string variable called myStyle.

6	Choose Userform from the Object list box.

7	Choose Initialize from the Procedure list box, and add the following code in the UserForm_Initialize method:

Private Sub UserForm_Initialize()

ComboBox1.AddItem "Rose"

ComboBox1.AddItem "World"

ComboBox1.AddItem "Ribbon"

End Sub

This code responds to the event that occurs when the form is initialized. This code adds three string items to the ComboBox1 control.

8	Double-click the CommandButton1 control to create a new method for the UserForm1 class, and type the following lines of code in the CommandButton1_Click method:

Private Sub CommandButton1_Click()

myStyle = ComboBox1

If myStyle = "" Then

MsgBox "You have not selected a style", vbExclamation

End If

'The user selected the rose watermark

If myStyle = "Rose" Then

PerfectScript.ClearDoc

PerfectScript.WatermarkA Create_WatermarkA_Action, OddPages_WatermarkA_Occurrence

PerfectScript.BoxCreate 6

PerfectScript.BoxContentType Image_BoxContentType_Content

PerfectScript.BoxImageRetrieve MakeInternal_BoxImageRetrieve_Action, "C:\rose2.wpg"

PerfectScript.ChangeWatermarkGraphicShade 25

PerfectScript.BoxUpdateDisplay

PerfectScript.BoxEnd Save_BoxEnd_State

PerfectScript.Close

End If

'The user selected the world watermark

If myStyle = "World" Then

PerfectScript.ClearDoc

PerfectScript.WatermarkA Create_WatermarkA_Action, OddPages_WatermarkA_Occurrence

PerfectScript.BoxCreate 6

PerfectScript.BoxContentType Image_BoxContentType_Content

PerfectScript.BoxImageRetrieve MakeInternal_BoxImageRetrieve_Action, "C:\World3.wpg"

PerfectScript.ChangeWatermarkGraphicShade 25

PerfectScript.BoxUpdateDisplay

PerfectScript.BoxEnd Save_BoxEnd_State

PerfectScript.Close

End If

'The user selected the ribbon watermark

If myStyle = "Ribbon" Then

PerfectScript.ClearDoc

PerfectScript.WatermarkA Create_WatermarkA_Action, OddPages_WatermarkA_Occurrence

PerfectScript.BoxCreate 6

PerfectScript.BoxContentType Image_BoxContentType_Content

PerfectScript.BoxImageRetrieve MakeInternal_BoxImageRetrieve_Action, "C:\ribb0002.wpg"

PerfectScript.ChangeWatermarkGraphicShade 25

PerfectScript.BoxUpdateDisplay

PerfectScript.BoxEnd Save_BoxEnd_State

PerfectScript.Close

End If

PerfectScript.ZoomToFullPage

Unload Me

End Sub

This code responds to the event that occurs when you click the command button. Be sure to enter the correct path to where the graphics files are located.

 Notes

•	In this procedure, a new method called AddWatermark is added to the ThisDocument class. This macro calls a form that lets you select a choice of three watermarks to insert into the odd pages of the document. PerfectScript class members can be accessed only by calling the PerfectScript object, which must be followed by a ".". You can call the AboutDlg method, which is a PerfectScript class member, by typing PerfectScript.AboutDlg.

•	You need three graphic files for this procedure. The names of these files are: world3.wpg, rose2.wpg, and ribb0002.wpg. These files are located in the C:\corel\WordPerfect Office 11\graphics\clipart\basic clipart folder. It is recommended that you place these files in the C:\ drive.

 Related topics


Working with VBA methods

You can use VBA to get system information, such as the system's date and time values. Retrieving the system's date and time values using VBA is very easy because all of the Windows functions are hidden, and all you have to do is call the appropriate VBA method.

 How to


To access the system's date and time values

1	Click Tools [image] Visual Basic [image] Visual Basic Editor.

2	Double-click Project(Document1) in the Project view.

3	Double-click the WordPerfect objects folder in the Project view.

4	Double-click ThisDocument, and type the following lines of code in the Editor box:

Public Sub ShowTime()

End Sub

This code will add a new method to the ThisDocument class. Make sure that the ShowTime method is declared public so that you can access this macro from WordPerfect.

5	Type the following new code in the ShowTime method to declare two new variables:

Public Sub ShowTime()

Dim myTime

Dim myDate As Date

End Sub

6	Type the following new code in the ShowTime method to populate the myTime and the myDate variables:

Public Sub ShowTime()

Dim myTime

Dim myDate As Date

myTime = Time

myDate = Date

End Sub

7	Type the following new code in the ShowTime method to convert the two variables to string data types:

Public Sub ShowTime()

Dim myTime

Dim myDate As Date

myTime = Time

myDate = Date

Dim myStrTime, myStrDate, Msg As String

myStrDate = Str(myDate)

myStrTime = Str(myTime)

End Sub

8	Type the following new code in the ShowTime method to populate and display the Msg variable:

Public Sub ShowTime()

Dim myTime

Dim myDate As Date

myTime = Time

myDate = Date

Dim myStrTime, myStrDate, Msg As String

myStrDate = Str(myDate)

myStrTime = Str(myTime)

Msg = "The date is " & myStrDateI & " and the time is " & myStrTime

MsgBox Msg

End Sub

 Note

•	For the purpose of this procedure, a message box was selected to display the date and time (myDate, myTime, myStrDate, and myStrTime); however, you can create a new form and display the time and date in this form. For more information about VBA, see Microsoft Visual Basic Help in the Visual Basic Editor.

 Related topics


Accessing and manipulating applications from other applications

You can create a VBA macro that will call another application. It is possible to program a VBA macro to open and change another application at run time. For example, you can create a Quattro Pro object from the WordPerfect VBA Editor. This lets you create a WordPerfect VBA macro that will change a Quattro Pro document.

 How to


To create a WordPerfect VBA Macro that will manipulate a Quattro Pro document

1	Open WordPerfect, and click Tools [image] Visual Basic [image] Visual Basic Editor.

2	Double-click Project (Document1) in the Project view.

3	Click Tools, choose Reference, enable QuattroPro, and click OK.

Every application has an object. Make sure you reference the right object.

4	Double-click the WordPerfect objects folder in the Project view.

5	Double-click ThisDocument, and type the following lines of code in the Editor box:

Public Sub CreateQPTable()

End Sub

This code will add a new method to the ThisDocument class. Make sure that CreateQPTable is declared public so that you can access this macro from WordPerfect.

6	Type the following lines of code in the CreateQPTable method:

Public Sub CreateQPTable()

Dim myQp as Object

Set myQp = CreateObject("QuattroPro.PerfectScript")

If myQp Is Nothing Then

MsgBox "The Quattro Pro Object is invalid", vbCritical

End If

This code creates a Quattro Pro PerfectScript object. After the object is created, it is tested to determine if memory has been allocated to it. A Message Box will inform you if the object is invalid.

7	Type the following lines of code in the CreateQPTable method:

Public Sub CreateQPTable()

Dim myQp as Object

Set myQp = CreateObject("QuattroPro.PerfectScript")

If myQp Is Nothing Then

MsgBox "The Quattro Pro Object does not exist", vbCritical

End If

'Populate the Quattro Pro document

myQp.FileNew "FileNew"

myQp.SetCellString "B1", "Jan"

myQp.SetCellString "C1", "Feb"

myQp.SetCellString "D1", "Mar"

myQp.SetCellString "A2", "TVs"

myQp.SetCellString "A3", "VCRs"

myQp.SetCellString "A4", "Radios

End Sub

This code will create a new Quattro Pro document and create an inventory table.

 Note

•	For the purpose of this procedure, a simple inventory table was created in a Quattro Pro document (myQP). You can run this macro from WordPerfect. For testing purposes, make sure that Quattro Pro is open. For more information about VBA, see Microsoft Visual Basic Help in the Visual Basic Editor.

 Related topics


Using OLE Automation

The Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) architecture is based on a model of client-server (also known as container-component or controller-component) associations. This model is based on the interaction between two applications in which one application (the client or container) makes requests to the other (the server or client) to perform an action. With OLE Automation, the application acting as the server exposes one or more automation components which allow other applications (controller or client) to manipulate them. For example, WordPerfect can execute a macro containing commands that open Microsoft Word, open a document into Microsoft Word, modify the formatting, resave the document, and close Microsoft Word. In this case, WordPerfect is the OLE automation controller and Microsoft Word is the OLE automation server, since it acts upon the requests made by WordPerfect. When Microsoft Word, Visual Basic for Applications (VBA), or any other OLE automation controller application opens WordPerfect and instructs it to perform certain specified tasks using OLE automation methods, WordPerfect is the OLE automation server and the controlling application becomes the OLE automation controller.

PerfectScript can send commands to WordPerfect, Corel Presentations, and Quattro Pro through OLE Automation. PerfectScript can also send commands to such applications as Microsoft Excel and Microsoft Word. These applications are called OLE Automation servers. PerfectScript is an OLE Automation controller. OLE Automation is not limited to these programs. PerfectScript can send commands to and control any OLE Automation server.

OLE Automation servers define objects. These objects have names that are registered with Windows. You can refer to an application's documentation for the names of objects they define. OLE objects can have methods and properties. A method is a command or function that performs an action on that object. A property is a value that the object has (like system variables in WordPerfect.) You can retrieve and set this value. An example of a method for the "Excel.Application" object is as follows:

Worksheets().Activate

A property of the "Excel.Application" object is as follows:

ActiveSheet.Name

Methods, like product commands, may require parameters, and may or may not return values. Unlike system variables in WordPerfect, you can set properties by placing the property name on the left-hand side of an assignment statement. Properties can also take parameters when being retrieved or when being set. This makes the retrieval of a property very similar to a method call.


Understanding OLE Automation

OLE Automation

OLE Automation for WordPerfect is a flexible and powerful feature you can use to quickly build applications that use WordPerfect components. OLE Automation is an integration standard that has developed to allow applications to "expose" their programmable objects so that other applications can access them. The exposed commands become an extension of the controlling programming language.

Applications that support OLE Automation are called OLE Automation servers. Programming applications that can use a server's scripting or macro commands are called OLE Automation controllers.

As shown in the following diagram, an OLE Automation server application exposes its programmable objects to the OLE Automation controller. The OLE Automation controller incorporates the server application's scripting or macro commands as part of its own language. The controller can send these commands back to the server.

You can use OLE Automation for long and complicated manual processes that transfer data between two or more applications. For example, you may have a manual process that puts data into a spreadsheet to be used to create a presentation graphic. The graphic is used in a word processing application. If you use OLE Automation, you may be able to create a program that automatically does these steps for you. OLE Automation gives you almost total control over a variety of different applications, letting you build the applications you need through its seamless integration capabilities.

At a basic level, you can think of OLE Automation as a way for applications to speak to and control each other through their own scripting or macro programming languages. For example, you could have WordPerfect speak to and control Microsoft Word, another OLE Automation server. Because WordPerfect, in this case the OLE Automation controller, is a desktop publishing application and does not know about the inner workings of Microsoft Word, the OLE Automation server, it needs a way to get information from the server.

Conversely, WordPerfect can be controlled by other OLE Automation applications through its PerfectScript application commands and a programming language. Some of the most widely used programming languages can support OLE automation, including Microsoft Visual Basic, Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications, and C++.

WordPerfect, PerfectScript, and OLE Automation

If you have ever used a script to send commands to WordPerfect or another Corel application, you've used OLE Automation. When you run a script that sends commands to a Corel application, you must use the WithObject statement to enable a programmable object in the application.

Any Corel application, including WordPerfect, that supports OLE Automation provides one programmable object that allows the PerfectScript controller to send it commands. The following table lists all of the Corel applications that support OLE Automation (and PerfectScript) and the name of their programmable object:

Corel application	Programmable object name
Corel Presentations	Presentation.PerfectScript
WordPerfect	WordPerfect.PerfectScript
Quattro Pro	QuattroPro.PerfectScript
CorelDRAW 8	CorelDraw.Automation
Corel PHOTO-PAINT 8	CorelPaint.Automation
Corel VENTURA 8	CorelVentura.Automation
Since the Corel applications listed above provide one programmable object, their documents cannot be directly accessed as objects from a controller. The Microsoft Visual Basic GetObject command, for example, cannot be used to access a Corel document. Additionally, Corel applications do not support properties and methods. The only way to access a Corel document through OLE Automation is by using PerfectScript application commands.

You can also use other scripting languages to call Corel OLE Automation applications. For example, you can call the WordPerfect object using a script created in Visual Basic. The following Visual Basic script creates a new WordPerfect document and inserts a footnote.

Private Sub Form_Load()

Dim objWP As Variant

Set objWP = CreateObject("WordPerfect.PerfectScript")

objWP.FootnoteCreate

objWP.Tab

objWP.Type "This was inserted with VB."

objWP.Quit

End Sub

As in the example above, the Microsoft Visual Basic commands, or any other OLE automation application commands, must be preceded by an application name and a period.

Other OLE Automation controllers

Rather than using only PerfectScript, you can use other applications as your OLE Automation controller. For example, you can use Microsoft Visual Basic, Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications, or Microsoft C++ as your OLE Automation controller for Corel applications. However, if you use a programming language other than PerfectScript to send commands to Corel applications, you cannot use PerfectScript programming statements and functions such as FOR...NEXT or MESSAGE, or Corel dialog box definition statements; you can only use the Corel application commands.

For information about commands and functions and PerfectScript OLE Automation overviews, see the online Help in the respective application. However, it does not provide procedural and reference information about programming by using OLE automation controllers other than PerfectScript. For more information about other OLE automation controllers, see the following reference sources:

•	Microsoft Visual Basic Programmer's Guide

•	Microsoft Windows Developer's Kit

•	Microsoft Office Developer's Kit

The PerfectScript command Quit is specifically for use with OLE Automation. If you are scripting languages such as Visual Basic, C, C++, Delphi, FoxPro, and Corel Script, you should use the Quit command at the end of the script. Because WordPerfect hosts VBA, the Quit command should not be used from VBA.


Using files with DDE Execute from previous versions of WordPerfect

Older versions of WordPerfect, such as WordPerfect 5.1 and WordPerfect 6.1, use Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) Execute to trade information or allow one application to instruct another to perform specific tasks.

To use DDE Execute you need to refer to:

•	the WordPerfect macros Help file for information about the ddeinitiate(), ddeexecute(), and ddeterminate() programming commands

•	the documentation for the other Windows applications; the information you need includes the service (application) name, topic name, and list of commands the application will accept through DDE Execute

Sending commands to other Windows applications

Using DDE you can create WordPerfect macros that send commands to control other applications running under Windows. For example, you can create a macro that launches a spreadsheet application, loads a file, and copies a range of cells to a table in WordPerfect.

Sending commands to WordPerfect

Other applications can also use DDE Execute to control WordPerfect. The application must first initiate a DDE conversation using the service (application) name of "WPWin11_Macros" and topic name of "Commands." Before terminating the conversation, the application can send DDE Execute strings made up of one or more WordPerfect macro commands. Note that WordPerfect accepts only product commands, not programming commands. These product commands cannot contain variables or expressions. See the WordPerfect Macros Help file for a list of product commands and descriptions.

Other applications can also send commands to WordPerfect as a DDE Request item in order to receive a string representing the command's return value. The application must send the DDE Execute string or DDE Request item in ANSI text format. WordPerfect returns the DDE Request result as an ANSI text string. If either a DDE Execute string or a DDE Request item returns an error, the application can send a DDE Request on the item "LastCmdError" to find out what error occurred. This item will return an ANSI text string containing a three-digit error code and a description of the error.

DDE Execute application names, services, and topics

Application	Service, Topic
WPWin	WPWin11_Macros,PS3Commands
Presentations	WPPresentations,Command
Quattro Pro	QPW, <full path and filename of open notebook>


Getting online Help for macros

You can get online Help for macros through the macro command browser and the context-sensitive Help.

You can easily display the lists of product and programming commands for all applications in WordPerfect Office by using the WordPerfect Macros Help and the WordPerfect Office Macro Command Reference Center.

WordPerfect gives you instant Help on any command as you edit a macro. In the macro command browser, a brief description of the macro command appears at the bottom of the dialog box.

Online Help for each command in the macro command browser is available.

 How to


To start WordPerfect Macros Help

•	Click Help [image] Macro commands.

 Related topics


To get more information about PerfectScript Commands

•	Click Help [image] Help topics.

 Related topics


To display Help while editing a macro

1	Click in a command.

2	Press F1.

 Related topics


To get Help in the macro command browser

1	Choose a command from the Commands list.

2	Right-click the command to view the Help topic associated with that command.

 Related topics


Applying borders and fills

Applying borders and fills lets you emphasize information, make it easier to read, and add visual appeal to a document.

The following image shows 1) a graphic, 2) a graphic to which a border was applied, 3) a graphic to which a border and a fill were applied, and 4) a graphic to which a border, fill, and drop shadow were applied.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	adding borders

•	editing borders

•	changing border space

•	changing the drop shadow

•	removing borders

•	applying fills


Adding borders

You can add a border around a graphics box, paragraph, column, or page.

 How to


To add a border to a graphics box

1	Right-click a graphics box, and click Border/fill.

2	Choose a border pattern from the Available border styles list.

 Related topics


To add a border to a paragraph

1	Click in a paragraph.

2	Click Format [image] Paragraph [image] Border/fill.

3	Choose a border pattern from the Available border styles list.

To apply the border only to the selected paragraph, enable the Apply border to current paragraph only check box.

 Note

•	If you disable the Apply border to current paragraph only check box, the border surrounds the current paragraph and all subsequent paragraphs in the document.

 Related topics


To add a border to a column

1	Click in a column.

2	Click Format [image] Columns.

3	Click Border/fill.

4	Choose a border pattern from the Available border styles list.

To apply the border only to the selected column, enable the Apply border to current column group only check box.

 Note

•	If you disable the Apply border to current column group only check box the border surrounds the current column and all subsequent columns in the document.

 Related topics


To add a border to a page

1	Click a page.

2	Click Format [image] Page [image] Border/fill.

3	From the Border type list box, choose one of the following:

•	Line [image] lets you choose a border from the preset line borders

•	Fancy [image] lets you choose a border from the default Fancy borders folder

4	Choose a border pattern from the Available border styles list.

To apply the border only to the current page, click the Apply border to current page only check box.

 Notes

•	If you disable the Apply border to current page only check box, the border will surround the current page and all subsequent pages in the document.

•	After you put a fancy border on a page, you can type text on the page as you usually would. However, the border doesn't change page margins. If you don't want to type over the border, you may need to move the page margins within the border.

 Tip

•	To browse for fancy borders located in other folders, click Change folders, and in the Filename box, type the filename of the folder to open.

 Related topics


Editing borders

You can edit the border style for a graphics box, paragraph, column, or page. You can also change the roundness of a graphics box border or a page text border.

 How to


To edit the border of a graphics box

1	Right-click a graphic, and click Border/fill.

2	Choose a border pattern from the Available border styles list.

3	Open the Color picker, and click a color.

4	Open the Line style picker, and click a line style.

 Related topics


To edit the border of a paragraph

1	Click in a paragraph.

2	Click Format [image] Paragraph [image] Border/fill.

3	Choose a border pattern from the Available border styles list.

4	Open the Color picker, and click a color.

5	Open the Line style picker, and click a line style.

 Related topics


To edit the border of a column

1	Click in a column.

2	Click Format [image] Columns.

3	Click Border/fill.

4	In the Column Border/fill dialog box, choose a border pattern from the Available border styles list.

5	Open the Color picker, and click a color.

6	Open the Line style picker, and click a line style.

 Related topics


To edit the border of a page

1	Click a page.

2	Click Format [image] Page [image] Border/fill.

3	Choose a border pattern from the Available border styles list.

4	Open the Color picker, and click a color.

5	Open the Line style picker, and click a line style.

If you want to adjust the spacing inside and outside the border, click the Advanced tab.

 Related topics


To change the roundness of a graphics box border

1	Right-click a graphic, and click Border/fill.

2	Click the Advanced tab.

3	Enable the Rounded corners check box.

 Tip

•	You can also change the roundness of a graphics box border by typing a value in the Corner radius box. The number 0 specifies square corners. As the number increases, the corner becomes more rounded.

 Related topics


To change the roundness of a page text border

1	Click Format [image] Page [image] Border/fill.

2	Click the Advanced tab.

3	Enable the Rounded corners check box.

 Tip

•	You can also change the roundness of a page text border by typing a value in the Corner radius box. The number 0 specifies square corners. As the number increases, the corner becomes more rounded.

 Related topics


Changing border space

You can change the border space for a graphics box, column, paragraph, or page border. Border space is the spacing between the border and the text surrounding the box, and between the border and the contents of the box.

 How to


To change the border space of a graphics box

1	Right-click a graphic, and click Border/fill.

2	Click the Advanced tab.

3	Click a spacing option on any of the following palettes

•	Inside

•	Outside

 Related topics


To change the border space for a column border

1	Click Format [image] Columns.

2	Click Border/fill.

3	In the Column border/fill dialog box, click the Advanced tab.

4	Click a spacing option on any of the following palettes

•	Inside

•	Outside

 Related topics


To change the border space of a paragraph or page border

1	Click Format, and click one of the following:

•	Paragraph [image] Border/fill [image] lets you change border space options for a paragraph

•	Page [image] Border/fill [image] lets you change border space options for a page

2	Click the Advanced tab.

3	Click a spacing option on any of the following palettes

•	Inside

•	Outside

 Related topics


Changing the drop shadow

You can change the drop shadow for a graphics box border, column border, or for a paragraph or page border.

 How to


To change the drop shadow of a graphics box border

1	Right-click a graphic, and click Border/fill.

2	Click the Shadow tab.

3	Click a direction on the Direction of shadow palette.

4	Type a height in the Shadow height box.

5	Type a width in the Shadow width box.

6	Open the Color picker, and click a color.

 Related topics


To change the drop shadow for a column border

1	Click Format [image] Columns.

2	Click Border/fill.

3	In the Column border/fill dialog box, click the Shadow tab.

4	Click a direction on the Direction of shadow palette.

5	Type a height in the Shadow height box.

6	Type a width in the Shadow width box.

7	Open the Color picker, and click a color.

 Related topics


To change the drop shadow of a paragraph or page border

1	Click Format, and click one of the following:

•	Paragraph [image] Border/fill [image] lets you change drop shadow options for a paragraph

•	Page [image] Border/fill [image] lets you change drop shadow options for a page

2	Click the Shadow tab.

3	Click a direction on the Direction of shadow palette.

4	Type a height in the Shadow height box.

5	Type a width in the Shadow width box.

6	Open the Color picker, and click a color.

 Related topics


Removing borders

You can remove a border from a graphics box, column, paragraph, or page.

 How to


To remove a border from a graphics box

1	Right-click a graphic, and click Border/fill.

2	Click Discontinue.

 Related topics


To remove a border from a column

1	Click a column border.

2	Click Format [image] Columns [image] Border/fill.

3	Click Discontinue.

 Related topics


To remove a border from a paragraph or page

1	Click a paragraph or page border.

2	Click Format, and click one of the following:

•	Paragraph [image] Border/fill [image] lets you change border options for a paragraph

•	Page [image] Border/fill [image] lets you change border options for a page

3	Click Discontinue.

 Related topics


Applying fills

You can add or edit a fill. You can add gradient fills to a graphics box, column, paragraph, or page.

 How to


To add or edit a fill

1	Right-click a graphic, and click Border/fill.

2	Click the Fill tab.

3	Choose a pattern from the Available fill styles list.

4	Click a color on any of the following palettes:

•	Foreground

•	Background

 Related topics


To add gradient fills to a graphics box

1	Right-click a graphic, and click Border/fill.

2	Click the Fill tab.

3	Click a color on any of the following palettes:

•	Foreground

•	Background

4	Click the Advanced tab.

5	Choose a type of fill from the Gradient list box.

You can also
Rotate the gradient	Type a value in the Rotation angle box.
Change the placement of shadows within the gradient	Type values in the Horizontal and Vertical offset boxes.
 Related topics


To add gradient fills for a column

1	Click Format [image] Columns.

2	Click Border/fill,

3	In the Column border/fill dialog box, click the Fill tab.

4	Click a color on any of the following palettes:

•	Foreground

•	Background

5	Click the Advanced tab.

6	Choose a type of fill from the Gradient list box.

You can also
Rotate the gradient	Type a value in the Rotation angle box.
Change the placement of shadows within the gradient	Type values in the Horizontal and Vertical offset boxes.
 Related topics


To add gradient fills for a paragraph or page

1	Click Format, and click one of the following:

•	Paragraph [image] Border/fill [image] lets you change gradient fill options for a paragraph

•	Page [image] Border/fill [image] lets you change gradient fill options for a page

2	Click the Fill tab.

3	Click a color on any of the following palettes:

•	Foreground

•	Background

4	Click the Advanced tab.

5	Choose a type of fill from the Gradient list box.

You can also
Rotate the gradient	Type a value in the Rotation angle box
Change the placement of shadows within the gradient	Type values in the Horizontal and Vertical offset boxes.
 Related topics


Working with styles

WordPerfect provides several preset styles ready for use. You can also create your own styles. A style is a collection of formatting attributes that you can apply to text or graphics. Styles for graphics boxes, borders, fills, and lines let you format a document quickly and consistently.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	creating and editing styles for lists

•	creating and saving text styles

•	applying and editing text styles

•	removing and restoring text styles

•	using variables

•	retrieving, copying, and finding variables

•	saving variables

•	using graphics styles

•	editing graphics styles

•	using graphics boxes

•	editing graphics boxes

•	using graphics lines

•	editing graphics lines

For more information about working with styles, see "Reference: Working with styles."


Creating and editing styles for lists

You can create styles for single-level and multilevel lists.

You can edit styles for single-level lists and for multilevel lists and outlines. You can also edit a heading, quotation, or definition outline style.

 How to


To create a format for a list

1	Click Insert [image] Outline/bullets & numbering.

2	Click one of the following tabs:

•	Numbers [image] lets you create styles for numbered lists

•	Bullets [image] lets you create styles for bulleted lists

3	Click Create.

4	In the Create format dialog box, type a name for the style in the List name box.

5	Type a description for the style in the Description box.

6	In the List type area, enable one of the following options:

•	Single level list [image] Lets you create a list with only one level

•	Multilevel list [image] Lets you create a list with multiple levels

7	Choose a style from the Based on list box.

If you want to add text before the list number, type the text in the Text before box.

8	Choose a number or bullet from the Number/bullet list box.

9	Choose a level from the Style list box.

The style you create is added to the style list.

You can also
Display only numbers in the window	In the Display area, enable the Numbers check box.
Display styles associated with each level in the window	In the Display area, enable the Styles check box.
Add zeros before a number	Choose a number from the Leading zeros list box.
Create a style	Click the Create style button.
 Related topics


To edit a format for a list

1	Click Insert [image] Outline/bullets & numbering.

2	Click one of the following tabs:

•	Numbers [image] lets you create styles for numbered lists

•	Bullets [image] lets you create styles for bulleted lists

3	Click Edit.

4	In the Create format dialog box, type a name for the style in the List name box.

5	Type a description for the style in the Description box.

6	In the List type area, enable one of the following options:

•	Single level list [image] Lets you create a list with only one level

•	Multilevel list [image] Lets you create a list with multiple levels

7	Choose a style from the Based on list box.

If you want to add text before the list number, type the text in the Text before box.

8	Choose a number or bullet from the Number/bullet list box.

9	Choose a level from the Style list box.

The style you create is added to the style list.

You can also
Display only numbers in the window	In the Display area, enable the Numbers check box.
Display styles associated with each level in the window	In the Display area, enable the Styles check box.
Add zeros before a number	Choose a number from the Leading zeros list box.
Create a style	Click the Create style button.
 Related topics


To edit a heading, quotation, or definition outline style

1	Click Insert [image] Outline/bullets & numbering.

2	Click the Text tab.

3	On the Text page, choose one of the following from the Description list:

•	Headings

•	Quotations

•	Definitions

4	Click Edit.

5	In the Create format dialog box, enable the Multilevel list (outline) option.

6	Choose a style from the Based on list box.

7	In the Text before list box, type the text to display before the heading, quotation, or definition on the selected level.

8	Choose a heading, quotation, or definition from the Style list box.

 Note

•	The appearance of the heading, quotation, or definition text is defined in the styles for the current template. For more information about styles, see "Creating and saving text styles."

 Tip

•	You can choose which levels and sublevels of text display by clicking the Show levels button on the property bar.

 Related topics


Creating and saving text styles

You can create text styles. Text styles are collections of formatting attributes that you can apply to selected text, paragraphs, or the entire document. Text styles you create are saved with the active document. You can create a QuickStyle for text. QuickStyles are styles created based on the formatting in effect at the cursor location. You can also create a QuickStyle for a paragraph.

Formatting text with styles ensures consistent formatting throughout a document. Whenever you change the formatting in a style, you change the appearance of all text that uses that style.

Styles can be used to automatically mark entries for a table of contents, index, or list. For information about including a table of contents code in a style, see "Marking entries for tables of contents." For information about including an index code, see "Marking index entries." For information about including a list code, see "Marking entries for lists of figures or tables."

You can save a text style. You can also specify where to save text styles. When you save a text style, you can associate it with a specific template or with the active document only, or you can save it as a separate file. Saving a text style as a separate file is useful if you plan to use the style with a different template or on a different computer.

 How to


To create a text style

1	Click Format [image] Styles.

2	Click Create.

3	In the Styles editor dialog box, type a name for the style in the Style name box.

You can create style names that contain up to 20 characters.

4	Type a description for the style in the Description box.

5	Choose a style from the Type list box.

6	Using the Styles editor toolbar and menu bar, apply any style attributes.

If you want to define what function the ENTER key performs when the style is applied, choose a style from the Enter key inserts style list box.

If you want to display the codes that take effect when a style ends, enable the Show "off codes" check box.

 Notes

•	Give each style a unique name; otherwise, when you combine documents that contain a style with the same name, one style is used and the other deleted in the new document.

•	The Reveal Codes check box is enabled by default and displays the codes for the style attributes in the Contents box.

 Tip

•	You can also define the style attributes by typing codes or text in the Contents box in the Styles editor dialog box.

 Related topics


To create a QuickStyle for text

1	Select the text for which you want to create a QuickStyle

2	Click Format [image] Styles.

3	Click QuickStyle.

4	In the QuickStyle dialog box, type a name for the style in the Style name box.

5	Type a description for the style in the Description box.

6	Enable the Character with automatic update option.

 Related topics


To create a QuickStyle for a paragraph

1	Click in a paragraph.

2	Click Format [image] Styles.

3	Click QuickStyle.

4	In the QuickStyle dialog box, type a name for the style in the Style name box.

5	Type a description for the style in the Description box.

6	Enable the Paragraph with automatic update option.

 Related topics


To save a text style

1	Click Format [image] Styles.

2	Click Options [image] Save as.

3	In the Save styles to dialog box, type a filename in the Filename box.

4	In the Style type area, enable one of the following options:

•	Both [image] includes both the styles you have created and the preset styles provided with WordPerfect

•	User styles [image] includes only the styles you have created

•	System styles [image] includes only the preset styles provided with WordPerfect

 Related topics


To specify where to save text styles

1	Click Format [image] Styles.

2	Click Options [image] Settings.

3	In the Save new styles to area, enable one of the following options:

•	Current document [image] associates the style with the active document

•	Default template [image] associates the style with the default template

•	Additional objects template [image] associates the style with an additional objects template

 Note

•	The Additional objects template option is available only if you have specified a second default template to use for additional objects such as keyboards, menus, template macros, toolbars, and styles.

 Related topics


Applying and editing text styles

You can apply a style to text in a document. For a list of text styles, see "Reference: Working with styles."

You can edit a text style.

You copy a text style to another template. Copying a text style is useful when you want to create a new style that has similar formatting options as an existing style. You can also retrieve a text style. When you retrieve a text style, the style is attached to the active document, allowing you to apply the style to text in the document.

You can also choose which styles are available.

 How to


To apply a text style

1	Click Format [image] Styles.

2	Choose a style from the Available styles list box.

3	Click Insert.

4	Type the text in the document.

5	Press Enter.

6	Press Backspace.

 Tip

•	You can also apply a text style but choosing a style from the Style list box on property bar. RealTime preview lets you view how the text style displays in your document before you accept the change.

 Related topics


To edit a text style

1	Click Format [image] Styles.

2	Choose a style from the Available styles list box.

3	Click Edit.

4	In the Styles editor dialog box use the Styles editor toolbar and menus to apply any style attributes.

If you want do define what function the Enter key performs when the style is applied, choose a style from the Enter key inserts style list box.

If you want to display the codes that take effect when a style ends, enable the Show "off codes" check box.

 Related topics


To copy a text style to another template

1	Click Format [image] Styles.

2	Choose a style from the Available styles list box.

3	Click Options [image] Copy.

4	Enable one of the following options:

•	Current document [image] associates the style with the active document

•	Default template [image] associates the style with the default template

•	Additional objects template [image] associates the style with an additional objects template

 Notes

•	If you  copy the style to the active document, you must specify a new name for the style.

•	The Additional objects template option is available only if you have specified a second default template to be used for additional objects, such as keyboards, menus, template macros, toolbars, and styles.

 Related topics


To retrieve a text style

1	Click Format [image] Styles.

2	Click Options [image] Retrieve.

3	Type a filename in the Filename box.

4	In the Style type area, enable one of the following options:

•	Both [image] retrieves both the styles you have created and the preset styles provided with WordPerfect

•	User styles [image] retrieves only the styles you have created

•	System styles [image] retrieves only the preset styles provided with WordPerfect

 Note

•	When you retrieve a file, the styles in that file are saved with the active document.

 Tip

•	You can also browse to a file by clicking the Browse button.

 Related topics


To select which styles are available

1	Click Format [image] Styles.

2	Click Options [image] Settings.

3	In the Style settings dialog box, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Styles in current document [image] displays the styles for features, such as footnotes, hypertext, and tables of contents, that are in the active document

•	Styles in default template [image] displays styles found in the default template file

•	WordPerfect system styles [image] displays all styles for features, such as headings, footnotes, hypertext, and tables of contents

4	Enable one of the following options to choose which WordPerfect system styles to include:

•	WordPerfect heading styles [image] displays only heading styles

•	WordPerfect heading styles and all other system styles [image] displays heading styles and styles for features such as headers, footers, and comments

 Related topics


Removing and restoring text styles

You can delete a text style that you have created but you cannot delete any of the preset styles provided with WordPerfect. When you delete a style, you can delete  the style codes only or both the style and formatting codes. For information about codes, see "Displaying Reveal Codes."

You can restore a text style to its default appearance Restoring the style resets it to the way it was when you installed WordPerfect.

 How to


To delete a text style

1	Click Format [image] Styles.

2	Choose a style from the Available styles list box.

3	Click Options [image] Delete.

4	In the Delete styles dialog box, choose a style from the Select styles to delete list box.

5	In the Delete styles from document area, enable one of the following options:

•	Including formatting codes [image] deletes the style codes and the formatting codes

•	Leave formatting codes in document [image] deletes only the style codes

 Tip

•	You can select multiple styles to delete by holding down CTRL and choosing the styles.

 Related topics


To restore a text style to its default appearance

1	Click Format [image] Styles.

2	Choose a style from the Available styles list box.

3	Click Options [image] Reset.

 Related topics


Using variables

Variables allow you to mark text that you know will change, for example dates, version numbers, or client names. WordPerfect allows you to create a variable. Once you have created a variable you can insert it in a document, edit it, or delete it. You can also chose to display the variables in a document.

 How to


To create a variable

1	Click Insert [image] Variable.

2	Click Create.

3	In the Variables editor dialog box, type a name for the variable in the Variable box.

4	Type a description in the Description box.

5	Using the Variables editor menu bar, apply the variable attributes you want.

 Note

•	When naming a variable, you cannot choose the name of an existing variable or style.

 Tips

•	If you want to display the codes that take effect when a variable ends, enable the Show "off codes" check box.

•	If you want to display Reveal Codes, enable the Reveal Codes check box.

 Related topics


To insert a variable

1	Position the cursor where you want to insert the variable.

2	Click Insert [image] Variable.

3	Choose a variable from the Variables list.

4	Click Insert.

 Tip

•	You can specify which variables you want to display in the Variables list by clicking Options [image] Settings, and enabling an option in the Available variables list area.

 Related topics


To edit a variable

1	Click Insert [image] Variable.

2	Choose a variable from the Variables list.

3	Click Edit.

4	Using the Variables editor menu bar, edit the variable attributes.

 Tip

•	You can specify which variables you want to display in the Variables list by clicking Options [image] Settings, and enabling an option in the Available variables list area.

 Related topics


To delete a variable

1	Click Insert [image] Variable.

2	Choose a variable from the Variables list.

3	Click Delete.

4	In the Delete variables dialog box, enable one of the following options:

•	Including formatting codes [image] deletes the variable and any codes that belong to the variable

•	Leave formatting codes in document [image] deletes the variable, but retains the codes that belong to the variable

 Tip

•	You can specify which variables you want to display in the Variables list by clicking Options [image] Settings, and enabling an option in the Available variables list area.

 Related topics


To view variables

•	Click View [image] Variables.

 Related topics


Retrieving, copying, and finding variables

WordPerfect lets you retrieve variables found in other documents. You can also copy variables from the current document or from the default or additional objects template. In addition, you can find variables that you previously inserted into a document.

 How to


To retrieve a variable

1	Click Insert [image] Variable.

2	Click Options [image] Retrieve.

3	Choose the drive and folder where the document is stored.

 Related topics


To copy a variable

1	Click Insert [image] Variable.

2	Choose a variable from the Variables list.

3	Click Copy.

4	In the Variable copy dialog box, enable one of the following options:

•	Current document [image] saves the styles you create to the current document

•	Default template [image] saves the styles you create to the default template

•	Additional objects template [image] saves the styles you create to the template file you chose as your additional objects template

If you enabled the Current document option, type a name for the duplicate variable in the Variable name box.

 Tips

•	You can specify a default or additional objects template by clicking Tools [image] Settings [image] Files, and click the Templates tab in the Files settings dialog box.

•	You can specify which variables you want to display in the Variables list by clicking Options [image] Settings, and enabling an option in the Available variables list area.

 Related topics


To find a variable

1	Click Insert [image] Variable.

2	Choose a variable from the Variables list.

3	Click Go to.

 Tip

•	You can specify which variables you want to display in the Variables list by clicking Options [image] Settings, and enabling an option in the Available variables list area.

 Related topics


Saving variables

WordPerfect allows you to save the variables you create. You can also specify where you want to save the variables by default.

 How to


To save a variable

1	Click Insert [image] Variable.

2	Click Options [image] Save as.

3	Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the variable.

4	Type a name in the Filename box.

 Related topics


To specify where to save new variables

1	Click Insert [image] Variable.

2	Click Options [image] Settings.

3	In the Save new variables to area, enable one of the following options:

•	Current document

•	Default template

•	Additional objects template

 Related topics


Using graphics styles

You can use the preset styles included with WordPerfect or you can create your own styles.

You can create graphics styles for boxes, borders, fills, and lines. You can save a graphics style. Saving graphics styles lets you use them again in other documents or templates.

You can delete a graphics style that you have created, but you cannot delete one of the preset graphics styles provided with WordPerfect.

Corel RealTime Preview lets you view changes to borders, fills, or line attributes before the changes actually take place. For example, you can view different border styles in a document before choosing which line style is the most suitable.

 How to


To create a graphics style

1	Click Format [image] Graphics styles.

2	Enable one of the following options:

•	Box

•	Border

•	Fill

•	Line

3	Click Create.

4	Type a name for the style in the Style name box.

5	Change the attributes of the graphics style.

 Related topics


To save a graphics style

1	Click Format [image] Graphics styles.

2	Enable one of the following options:

•	Box

•	Border

•	Fill

•	Line

3	Click Options [image] Save as.

4	Type a name for the style in the Filename box.

 Note

•	The file is saved to the default template folder, as specified in Tools [image] Settings. If none is specified, WordPerfect saves the styles where your Windows files are stored.

 Related topics


To delete a graphics style

1	Click Format [image] Graphics styles.

2	Enable one of the following options:

•	Box

•	Border

•	Fill

•	Line

3	Choose a style from the Styles list box.

4	Click Options [image] Delete.

 Related topics


To view changes to border, fill, or line attributes by using Corel RealTime Preview

1	Select a graphic.

2	On the property bar, click one of the following:

•	Border style [image] lets you change the border of a graphics box

•	Box fill [image] lets you change the fill of a graphics box

•	Line style [image] lets you change the style of a line

•	Line thickness [image] lets you change the thickness of a line

•	Shadow [image] lets you change the drop shadow of a graphics box or shape

3	Point to a style.

When you point to a style, a preview of the border, fill, or line in that style is displayed on the page.

If you want to apply a style to the selected graphic, click the style.

 Note

•	Corel RealTime Preview is enabled by default. For more information about Corel RealTime Preview, see "Modifying font settings."

 Related topics


Editing graphics styles

You can edit a graphics style to apply different formatting. When you edit a graphics style, all graphics boxes, borders, fills, and lines formatted with that style are updated.

You can copy a graphics style. Copying a graphics style is useful when you want to create a new style with similar formatting options as an existing style. You can also retrieve a graphics style. When you retrieve a graphics style, the style is attached to the active document, allowing you to apply the style to graphics boxes, borders, fills, or lines in the document.

You can rename a graphics style that you have created, but you cannot rename a preset graphics style.

You can restore a graphics style to its original configuration. Restoring  a graphics style returns the style to the way it was when you first installed WordPerfect.

 How to


To edit a graphics style

1	Click Format [image] Graphics styles.

2	Enable one of the following options:

•	Box

•	Border

•	Fill

•	Line

3	Choose a style from the Styles list box.

4	Click Edit.

5	Change the attributes of the graphics style.

 Related topics


To copy a graphics style

1	Click Format [image] Graphics styles.

2	Enable one of the following options:

•	Box

•	Border

•	Fill

•	Line

3	Choose a style from the Styles list box.

4	Click Options [image] Copy.

5	Type a name for the style in the New name box.

 Related topics


To retrieve a graphics style

1	Click Format [image] Graphics styles.

2	Enable one of the following options:

•	Box

•	Border

•	Fill

•	Line

3	Click Options [image] Retrieve.

4	In the Filename box, type the name of the file that contains the style you want to retrieve.

5	Click OK.

6	Enable one of the following options:

•	User [image] lets you retrieve styles you have created

•	System [image] lets you retrieve styles provided with WordPerfect

•	Both [image] lets you retrieve all styles

 Note

•	If you specify the name of a template file in the Filename box, all styles from that template are retrieved.

 Related topics


To rename a graphics style

1	Click Format [image] Graphics styles.

2	Enable one of the following options:

•	Box

•	Border

•	Fill

•	Line

3	Choose a style from the Styles list box.

4	Click Options [image] Rename.

5	Type a name for the style in the New name box.

 Related topics


To restore a graphics style to its default appearance

1	Click Format [image] Graphics styles.

2	Enable one of the following options:

•	Box

•	Border

•	Fill

•	Line

3	Choose a style from the Styles list box.

4	Click Options [image] Reset.

 Related topics


Using graphics boxes

When you insert an image into WordPerfect, it is placed inside a graphics box (sometimes called a frame). You can create graphics box and insert it into a document. You can select a graphics box using the document box number or using the counter number.

You can move a graphics box to a new location.

You can apply a graphics box style to a graphics box in a document. For a list of preset graphics box styles, see "Reference: Working with styles."

You can delete a graphics box and its contents.

 How to


To create and insert a custom graphics box

1	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Custom box.

2	Click Styles.

3	In the Box styles dialog box, click Create.

4	In the Create box style dialog box, type a name for the style in the Style name box.

5	Modify attributes for the style.

6	Click OK.

7	Click Close.

8	Choose the style you created from the Styles list box.

9	Click OK.

 Related topics


To select a graphics box

1	Click Edit [image] Edit graphic box.

2	Enable the Document box number option.

3	Type a value in the Document box number box.

 Tip

•	You can also select a graphics box by clicking it.

 Related topics


To select a graphics box using the counter number

1	Click Edit [image] Edit graphic box.

2	Enable the Counter number option.

3	Type a value in the Counter number box.

4	Choose a counter type from the Counter list.

 Related topics


To move a graphics box

1	Select a graphics box.

2	Drag the box to a new location.

 Note

•	If the graphics box is attached to a paragraph, a guideline and a pushpin indicate to which new paragraph it will attach. If the graphics box is attached to a character, a black vertical line next to the box shows where the box will move.

 Tip

•	You can also move a box by performing a cut-and-paste operation on the box. For information about performing a cut-and-paste operation, see "Cutting, copying, and pasting text and graphics."

 Related topics


To apply a graphics box style

1	Right-click a graphics box, and click Style.

2	Choose a style from the Styles list box.

 Related topics


To delete a graphics box

1	Select a graphics box.

2	Press DELETE

 Tip

•	You can also delete a graphics box by right-clicking it and clicking Delete box.

 Related topics


Editing graphics boxes

You can resize a graphics box proportionally. You can also use specific measurements to resize a graphics box. You can preserve the width/height ratio of an image when sizing a graphics box to keep the image from becoming distorted.

You can replace the contents of a graphics box without having to delete the box and start over. For example, you can replace an image with another image, text, an equation, or with an empty box.

You can change the position of an image inside a graphics box.

You can copy a graphics box format to other boxes. Formatting attributes, such as border, fill, text wrapping, caption, and size, are applied.

 How to


To resize a graphics box proportionally

1	Select a graphics box.

2	Drag the corner sizing handles.

Be sure to position the pointer directly on a handle when you drag.

 Tip

•	To change the height/width ratio of the box, use the middle sizing handles to resize the box. However, as you resize the box the image adjusts to fill the box and, consequently, the image may become distorted.

 Related topics


To resize a graphics box to specific measurements

1	Right-click a graphics box, and click Size.

2	In the Width area, enable the Set option, and type a value in the box.

3	In the Height area, enable the Set option, and type a value in the box.

 Tips

•	You can resize a graphics box to fill the width or height of a page column (from left to right margin) by enabling the Full option in the Width or Height area. A box with Full as its height is automatically attached to the page.

•	To prevent an image from becoming distorted, enable the Maintain proportions option in the Width or Height area.

 Related topics


To preserve the width/height ratio of an image

1	Right-click a graphic, and click Content.

2	Enable the Preserve image width/height ratio check box.

 Note

•	This procedure restores a distorted image to its correct proportions. However, the restored image may not fill the box.

 Related topics


To replace the contents of a graphics box

1	Right-click a graphic, and click Content.

2	Choose one of the following options from the Content type list box:

•	Image [image] lets you replace the current contents with an image

•	Text [image] lets you replace the current contents with text

•	Equation [image] lets you replace the current contents with an equation

•	Image on disk [image] lets you replace the current contents with an image on disk

•	OLE object [image] lets you replace the current contents with an OLE object

3	Type the filename of the new contents in the Filename box.

 Tip

•	If you want to delete the contents of the graphics box, choose Empty from the Content type list box.

 Related topics


To change the position of the contents inside a graphics box

1	Right-click a graphic, and click Content.

2	Choose one of the following options from the Horizontal position list box:

•	Left

•	Right

•	Centered

3	Choose one of the following options from the Vertical position list box:

•	Top

•	Bottom

•	Centered

 Related topics


To copy a graphics box format to other boxes

1	Right-click a formatted graphics box, and click QuickFormat.

2	Click the QuickFormat paintbrush pointer in the graphics boxes you want to format.

3	Click Format [image] QuickFormat.

 Related topics


Using graphics lines

Graphics lines separate text or graphics on a page to make a document visually appealing and easier to read.

You can insert preset horizontal and vertical lines that extend between margins. You can also create a custom graphics line with the exact style, position, length, spacing, thickness, and color you want before inserting it.

You can create a custom line style. You can also create a custom line pattern.

 How to


To insert a horizontal line

•	Click Insert [image] Line [image] Horizontal line.

 Related topics


To insert a vertical line

•	Click Insert [image] Line [image] Vertical line.

 Related topics


To create a custom graphics line

1	Click Insert [image] Line [image] Custom line.

2	Enable one of the following options:

•	Horizontal line

•	Vertical line

3	Change any of the line or position settings.

 Related topics


To create a custom line style

1	Click Insert [image] Line [image] Custom line.

2	Click Line styles.

3	Click Create.

4	Type a name for the new style in the Style name box.

5	Change the attributes for the line.

 Related topics


To create a custom line pattern

1	Click Insert [image] Line [image] Custom line.

2	Click Line styles.

3	In the Line styles dialog box, click Create.

4	In the Create line style dialog box, type a name for the new style in the Style name box.

5	Open the Pattern palette, and click Custom.

6	Change the attributes for the line pattern.

 Related topics


Editing graphics lines

You can edit a graphics line and you can also edit a custom line style.

You can move a graphics line and you can size a graphics line. You can also copy a graphics line.

You can delete an graphics line.

 How to


To edit a graphics line

1	Select a graphics line.

2	Right-click the line, and click one of the following:

•	Edit horizontal line

•	Edit vertical line

3	Change any of the line or position settings.

 Tips

•	You can also edit a graphics line by selecting it and clicking any settings on the property bar.

•	If you have overlapping lines, you can click View [image] Reveal Codes and double-click the graphics line code. For more information about Reveal Codes, see "Displaying Reveal Codes."

 Related topics


To edit a custom line style

1	Click Insert [image] Line [image] Custom line.

2	Click Line styles.

3	In the Line styles dialog box, choose a style to edit from the Styles list box.

4	Click Edit.

5	Change the attributes for the line.

 Tip

•	You can also edit a style without losing the original by copying the style and renaming it. For information about copying a style, see "Editing graphics styles."

 Related topics


To move a graphics line

1	Select a graphics line.

2	Drag the line to a new location on the page or in another document.

 Related topics


To size a graphics line

1	Select a graphics line.

2	Drag one of the sizing handles to enlarge or reduce the line length or width.

 Tip

•	You can use precise measurements to move or size the line, by right-clicking the line, and clicking Edit horizontal line or Edit vertical line.

 Related topics


To copy a graphics line

1	Select a graphics line.

2	Click Edit, and click one of the following:

•	Cut [image] removes the graphics line

•	Copy [image] copies the graphics line

3	Click where you want to paste the graphics line.

4	Click Edit [image] Paste.

 Tip

•	You can also right-click a graphics line, and click Cut, Copy, or Paste.

 Related topics


To delete a graphics line

1	Select a graphics line.

2	Press DELETE.

 Tip

•	You can also delete a graphics line by right-clicking a graphics line and clicking Delete.

 Related topics


Reference: Working with styles

The following is a list of the five kinds of text styles:

•	Character [image] applies to selected text

•	Automatic character [image] applies to selected text and is updated when you change the format of text that uses the style

•	Paragraph [image] applies to paragraphs

•	Automatic paragraph [image] applies to paragraphs and is updated when you change the format of a paragraph that uses the style

•	Document (open) [image] applies to all text in a document from the cursor forward

Graphics box styles

There are fourteen preset graphics box styles, each with a specific look and position on the page. The following table lists and describes the preset graphics box styles.

Graphics box style	Description
Button	Used to create a box that looks like a raised button, similar to buttons in dialog boxes. It can contain text or graphics, and it is often used to mark hyperlink jumps. It is anchored as a character.
Draw object	Similar to Image box that wraps behind text (like a watermark) and has no caption counter.
Draw object text	Similar to the Draw object style with content set to text. This box is commonly used for grouping text with a draw object.
Equation	Used with mathematical, scientific, or business formulas and expressions. The box extends the full width of the page or column. It has no borders.
Figure	Also used with images. However, it has a hairline border.
Image	Used with clipart images, charts, logos, or drawings. It does not have borders, so you can contour text around the image in the box.
Inline equation	Used to insert an equation or expression into a line of text. It has no borders and is anchored as a character.
Inline text	Used to insert text (in a box) in another line of text. It has no borders and is anchored as a character.
OLE 2.0 box	Used with OLE objects (such as images). It does not have borders.
Sticky note text	Box that resembles a sticky note with a yellow background, covering everything beneath it.
Table	Used for tables, spreadsheets, statistical data, or text. It has thick borders on the top and bottom of the box.
Text box	Used to separate text from the main document, such as for quotes and sidebars. It has thick borders on the top and bottom of the box.
User	Used for any graphic (clipart images, drawings, charts, text, equations, or tables). It has no borders.
Watermark	Used to add a background image behind the text on the page. It has no borders.


Numbering

WordPerfect allows you to count elements of a document. You can also change the appearance of numbering and use counters to count elements of a document.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	numbering pages

•	changing the appearance of page numbers

•	forcing, suppressing, and stopping page numbers

•	inserting chapter, volume, and page total numbers

•	numbering paragraphs

•	numbering lines in a document

•	changing the appearance and position of line numbering

•	using counters


Numbering pages

WordPerfect allows you to insert page numbers in a document and to choose where to position page numbers on a page. When you begin page numbering, you can also specify which number to begin with. For example, you may want the first page of a document to be labeled page 3 instead of page 1.

You can also insert secondary page numbers, which allow you to start a new page numbering scheme in a document. For example, suppose you are creating a document in WordPerfect, but in the middle of the document, you need to add maps that were not created in WordPerfect. The WordPerfect document is 10 pages, but the maps need to be added as pages 7 and 8. To accomplish this, you can start page numbering at 1 at the beginning of the document and insert a secondary page number, number 9, on the document's page 7. This would allow for the addition of the maps without disrupting the page numbering.

The following image displays various page numbering options: 1) no page number, 2) page number in the bottom-right corner, 3) page number at the bottom center, and 4) page number in the top-right corner.

 How to


To insert page numbers

1	Click Format [image] Page [image] Numbering.

2	From the Position list box, choose a position for the page numbers.

3	From the Page numbering format list, choose a format for the page numbers.

 Related topics


To specify an alternate starting page

1	Click Format [image] Page [image] Numbering.

2	Click Set value.

3	In the Values dialog box, click the Page tab.

4	Type a new page number in the Set page number box.

5	Enable one of the following options:

•	Always keep number the same [image] ensures that the number remains the same when the document is edited

•	Let number change as pages are added or deleted [image] lets the number change as the document is edited

 Tip

•	When you merge a multiple-page form document, you can restart the page numbering for each merged record by enabling the Always keep number the same option.

 Related topics


To insert a secondary page number

1	Click Format [image] Page [image] Insert page number.

2	Choose Secondary page from the list.

3	Click Value/Adjust.

4	In the Values dialog box, click the Secondary tab.

5	Choose a numbering format from the Secondary page number method list box.

6	Type a value in the Set secondary page number box.

7	Click Insert.

 Related topics


Changing the appearance of page numbers

You can change the font size and style, which includes attributes, such as bold or italic, of page numbers. In addition, you can also create custom page numbering formats. For example, you can add the name of a document or a chapter number to a page number.

If you no longer need the custom format, you can delete it. However, you cannot delete the default page numbering formats provided with WordPerfect.

 How to


To change the font attributes of page numbers

1	On a page, click where you want the font change to begin.

2	Click Format [image] Page [image] Numbering.

3	Click Font.

4	In the Page numbering font dialog box, choose a font from the Face list.

5	Choose a font size from the Size list box.

You can also
Change page number style	In the Appearance area, enable one or more check boxes.
Change page number color	Open the color picker, and click a color.
Change page number shading	Type a value in the Shading box.
 Related topics


To customize a page number format

1	Click Format [image] Page [image] Numbering.

2	Click Custom format.

3	In the Custom page numbering dialog box, delete the text that displays in the Custom page numbering format (numbering codes with text) box.

4	Choose a number format from one of the following lists:

•	Page

•	Total pgs

•	Chapter

•	Volume

•	Secondary pg

5	Click Insert in format.

6	Repeat steps 4 and 5 until the Custom page numbering format (numbering codes with text) box contains the numbers you want.

7	In the Custom page numbering format (numbering codes with text) box, type the text that you want to display with the number codes.

Examples

•	If you wanted to display the name of a document, Snowboarding 101, with the chapter number and page number, you would type Snowboarding 101 beside the number codes in the Custom page numbering format (numbering codes with text) box. The text in the box would appear as: Snowboarding 101 [Chpt #] [Page #].

•	If you wanted to include the words Chapter and Page in the customized format, you would type Snowboarding 101, Chapter, and Page beside the number codes in the Custom page numbering format (numbering codes with text) box. The text in the box would appear as: Snowboarding 101 Chapter [Chpt #] Page [Page #].

 Notes

•	The five most recently used formats display at the top of the Page numbering format list box so that you can quickly apply them to a document.

•	For each custom format you create, you can choose only one type of number from each list box.

 Related topics


To delete a page numbering format

1	Click Format [image] Page [image] Numbering.

2	Choose a format from the Page numbering format list box.

3	Press Delete.

 Related topics


Forcing, suppressing, and stopping page numbers

By forcing a page number, you can insert a new page or make sure that a certain page in a document always has an odd or even page number. In addition, you can suppress page numbering on one page in a document. You can also stop the page numbers so that they are removed from the entire document.

 How to


To force a page number

1	Click on the page where you want to force a page number.

2	Click Format [image] Page [image] Force page.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	None [image] numbers the page sequentially in the document. This is the default setting.

•	Current page odd [image] inserts a blank page when necessary to make sure the current page always has an odd page number

•	Current page even [image] inserts a blank page when necessary to make sure the current page always has an even page number

•	Start new page [image] inserts a new page

 Note

•	For information about forcing a chapter or section in a master document to start on an odd numbered page, see "Working with master documents and subdocuments."

 Related topics


To suppress a page number

1	Click Format [image] Page [image] Suppress.

2	Enable the Page numbering check box.

 Related topics


To stop page numbering

1	Click Format [image] Page [image] Numbering.

2	Choose No page numbering from the Position list box.

 Related topics


Inserting chapter, volume, and page total numbers

With WordPerfect, you can insert chapter and volume numbers, and a document's total number of pages.

When you insert the numbering for a chapter or volume, the numbering begins with the new number from that point forward.

In addition, for any document, you can insert the document's total number of pages, which is automatically updated as the document is edited.

 How to


To insert a chapter number

1	Click Format [image] Page [image] Insert page number.

2	Choose Chapter from the list.

3	Click Value/Adjust.

4	In the Values dialog box, click the Chapter tab.

5	Choose a numbering format from the Chapter number method list box.

6	Type a value in the Set chapter number box.

7	Click Insert.

You can also
Ensure that the chapter numbers remain the same even if you add or delete chapter numbers	Enable the Always keep number the same option.
Allow the chapter numbers to change when chapter numbers are added or deleted	Enable the Let number change as chapters are added or deleted option.
 Related topics


To insert a volume number

1	Click Format [image] Page [image] Insert page number.

2	Choose Volume from the list.

3	Click Value/Adjust.

4	In the Values dialog box, click the Volume tab.

5	Choose a numbering format from the Volume number method list box.

6	Type a value in the Set volume number box.

7	Click Insert.

You can also
Ensure that the volume numbers remain the same even if you add or delete volume numbers	Enable the Always keep number the same option.
Allow the volume numbers to change when volume numbers are added or deleted	Enable the Let number change as volumes are added or deleted option.
 Related topics


To insert a document's total number of pages

1	Click where you want to insert the total number of pages.

2	Click Format [image] Page [image] Insert page number.

3	Choose Total pages from the list.

4	Click Value/Adjust.

5	In the Values dialog box, click the Total pages tab.

6	Choose a numbering format from the Total pages method list box.

7	Click OK.

8	Click Insert.

9	Click Close.

 Related topics


Numbering paragraphs

You can insert paragraph numbers in a document.

 How to


To number a paragraph

1	Click where you want to insert the paragraph number.

2	Click Format [image] Paragraph [image] Paragraph numbering.

3	Type a level number in the Outline level box.

4	Type a starting number in the Start value box.

5	Choose a numbering format from the Number type list box.

If you want to specify that numbers update automatically if a paragraph is added or deleted, enable the Automatic check box.

 Note

•	You can also number a paragraph in a document by pressing CTRL + SHIFT + F5.

 Related topics


Numbering lines in a document

You can number the lines in a document, including newspaper columns. When you number lines, you can specify the numbering method and the starting line.

 How to


To number lines in a document

1	Click in a paragraph.

2	Click Format [image] Line [image] Numbering.

3	Enable the Turn line numbering on check box.

You can also
Choose a numbering method	Choose a numbering method from the Numbering method list box.
Set the starting line	Type a number in the Starting line number box.
Set the first printed line	Type a number in the First printed line number box.
Specify which line numbers to print	Type a number in the Numbering interval box.
Include blank lines when numbering	Enable the Count blank lines check box.
Restart line numbers on each page	Enable the Restart numbering on each page check box.
 Notes

•	Line numbering begins with the first line of the paragraph in which the cursor is positioned.

•	The line numbering settings you choose are displayed in the preview window in the bottom-right corner of the Line numbering dialog box.

 Related topics


To number lines in newspaper columns

1	Click in a column.

2	Click Format [image] Line [image] Numbering.

3	Enable the Turn line numbering on check box.

4	Enable the Number all newspaper columns check box.

5	In the Position of numbers area, enable the Outside left margin option.

6	Type a value in the Outside left margin box to specify the distance between the line numbers and the left edge of text in each column.

 Note

•	The line numbers for the column on the right cannot move farther left or right than the center of the space between columns.

 Related topics


Changing the appearance and position of line numbering

You can change the font size and style, which includes attributes such as bold or italic, of line numbers. You can also change the position of line numbers.

 How to


To change the font attributes of line numbers

1	Click in a paragraph.

2	Click Format [image] Line [image] Numbering.

3	Click Font.

4	In the Line numbering font dialog box, choose a font from the Face list.

5	Choose a font size from the Size list box.

You can also
Change line number style	In the Appearance area, enable one or more check boxes.
Change line number color	Open the color picker, and click a color.
Change line number shading	Type a value in the Shading box.
 Related topics


To change line number position

1	Click in a paragraph.

2	Click Format [image] Line [image] Numbering.

3	In the Position of numbers area, enable one of the following options:

•	From left edge of page — specifies the distance from the left edge of the page (or from the center of the space between columns) to the line number

•	Outside left margin — specifies the distance from the left margin to the line number

4	Type a position value in the box.

 Related topics


Using counters

WordPerfect uses several built-in counters to keep track of the total number of pages, paragraphs, lines, figures, and other numbered items in a document. You can count equation boxes, figure boxes, table boxes, text boxes, and user boxes. You can display counter numbers in a document. You can also set the initial counter value, this is useful if you want the starting value to be something other than one. In addition, you can create counters to number items, including chapters.

 How to


To display a counter number in a document

1	Click where you want to display the counter number.

2	Click Insert [image] Other [image] Counter.

3	Choose one of the following counters from the Counter list:

•	Equation box

•	Figure box

•	Table box

•	Text box

•	User box

If you created a custom counter, you can choose it.

4	Click Display in document.

You can also
Increase the counter by one and display it in the document	Click Increase and display.
Decrease the counter by one and display it in the document	Click Decrease and display.
 Note

•	For more information about creating counters, see To create a single level counter and To create a multiple level counter.

 Related topics


To set the initial counter value

1	Click where you want to set the value of the counter, such as at the beginning of the document.

2	Click Insert [image] Other [image] Counter.

3	Choose from the following counters in the Counter list:

•	Equation box

•	Figure box

•	Table box

•	Text box

•	User box

4	Click Value.

5	In the Set value/Number method dialog box, choose a numbering method from the Numbering method list box.

6	Type a new value in the Value box.

If you want the number to begin at 1, set the value to 0.

 Related topics


To create a single level counter

1	Click Insert [image] Other [image] Counter.

2	Click Create.

3	In the Create counter definition dialog box, type a counter name in the Counter name box.

4	Choose a numbering method from the Single level method list box.

 Related topics


To create a multiple level counter

1	Click Insert [image] Other [image] Counter.

2	Click Create.

3	In the Create counter definition dialog box, type a counter name in the Counter name box.

4	Type a value in the Number of levels box.

5	Type a level name in the 1 box.

6	Choose a numbering method for the level from the Numbering method list box.

7	Repeat steps 5 and 6 for each additional level.

 Related topics


To create a counter for chapters

1	Click Insert [image] Other [image] Counter.

2	Click Create.

3	In the Create counter definition dialog box, type Chapter in the Counter name box.

4	Choose a numbering method from the Single level method list box.

 Note

•	If you change the order of chapters or remove one from a document, the counters will reflect the changes and display the correct numbers.

 Related topics


Working with reference tools

Reference tools (tables of contents, tables of authorities, lists of figures or tables, indexes, and cross-references) are available to organize information within WordPerfect documents.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	creating and editing styles for tables of contents

•	marking entries for tables of contents

•	defining tables of contents

•	generating and updating tables of contents

•	creating and formatting section definitions for tables of authorities

•	creating and editing section definition styles for tables of authorities

•	marking entries for tables of authorities

•	defining tables of authorities

•	generating and updating tables of authorities

•	creating and formatting figure or table list definitions

•	creating and editing styles for lists of figures or tables

•	marking entries for lists of figures or tables

•	defining lists of figures or tables

•	generating and updating lists of figures or tables

•	creating and editing index styles

•	marking index entries

•	defining indexes

•	generating and updating indexes

•	finding and removing index codes from documents

•	marking targets and references for cross-references

•	cross-referencing graphics

•	generating and updating cross-references


Creating and editing styles for tables of contents

A table of contents provides an overview of a document's structure by listing its chapters, sections, and headings. The following illustration shows how a table of contents appears as an outline in a document.

There are predefined table of contents styles available in WordPerfect; however, you can also create your own style. Both predefined and custom table of contents styles can be edited.

 How to


To create a style for a table of contents

1	Click Format [image] Styles.

2	Click Create.

3	In the Styles editor dialog box, type a name for the style in the Style name box.

4	Type a description for the style in the Description box.

5	Choose Paragraph from the Type list box.

6	Using the Styles editor toolbar, apply any style attributes.

 Tip

•	You can apply styles that you've created to each level in a table of contents. For information about table of contents levels, see "To define a table of contents."

 Related topics


To edit a style for a table of contents

1	Click Format [image] Styles.

2	Choose a table of contents style from the Available styles list.

3	Click Edit.

4	Make any changes to the style.

 Related topics


Marking entries for tables of contents

Once you have determined what to include in the table of contents, you are ready to mark these entries, which can include chapter, section, heading, and subheading entries.

 How to


To mark entries for a table of contents

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Table of contents.

2	Select a word or phrase in the document.

3	Click Mark for the level at which to position the entry.

Choose from levels Mark 1 through Mark 5. Each mark corresponds to a level of indentation.

 Related topics


Defining tables of contents

To create a table of contents, you must define how it will display in the document by specifying such things as the number of levels, the position and the look of the page numbers, and the style of each level.

 How to


To define a table of contents

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Table of contents.

2	Click Define.

3	In the Define table of contents dialog box, type a value in the Number of levels (1-5) box.

4	For each level, choose a numbering position from the Position list box.

You can also
Apply different styles to each table of contents level	Click Styles. In the Table of contents styles dialog box, choose a level number from the Level list. Choose a style from the Styles list.
Wrap long entries in a table of contents	Enable the Display last level in wrapped format check box.
Customize page numbers in a table of contents	Click Page numbering. In the Page numbering format dialog box, enable the Custom page number format option. Click Insert. Click one of the page numbering options.
 Notes

•	If you are using secondary, chapter, volume, and total page numbers, you can put them together in the table of contents, for example, "Chapter 3, Page 98."

•	You can type text and punctuation between the page number codes, for example, [Page #] of [Tot Pages #].

 Related topics


Generating and updating tables of contents

Once you have marked the entries for a table of contents and defined how and where it will display, you can generate it. When you generate a table of contents, the document is searched for table of contents entry markers, and a reproduction of the information is inserted on the table of contents page in the document. When you first generate the table of contents, it is inserted where you have indicated. When you generate a table of contents, you also update it. The document is rescanned for each marked table of contents entry, all existing information is replaced, and the text is saved to the table of contents file.

When you publish a table of contents to PDF, WordPerfect numbers each marked heading or subheading sequentially. The entries display in the PDF as numbered bookmarks in the document.

 How to


To generate a table of contents

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Table of contents.

2	Click Generate.

3	In the Generate dialog box, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Save subdocuments [image] saves changes to subdocuments

•	Build hyperlinks [image] adds hyperlinks from the entries to related sections in the document

 Tip

•	You can ensure that a table of contents is generated before you save or print a document by clicking Tools [image] Reference [image] Table of contents, and enabling the Auto generate check box in the Reference tools dialog box. When you save or print a document, and if you have not generated the table of contents since last saving or printing, a warning is displayed.

 Related topics


Creating and formatting section definitions for tables of authorities

Tables of authorities can be divided into sections, such as cases, statutes, and regulations, and you can apply a different format to each section. Each section has an accompanying section definition, which defines the sections you want to include in a table of authorities. You can create and edit a section definition. As well, if you want to reuse a section definition, you can retrieve it to use in another document. If you no longer require a section definition, you can delete it.

 How to


To create a section definition for a table of authorities

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Table of authorities.

2	Click Define.

3	In the Define table of authorities dialog box, click Create.

4	In the Create table of authorities dialog box, type a name for the section definition in the Name box.

5	Choose a numbering position from the Position list box.

You can also
Customize page numbers	Click Page numbering. In the Page numbering format dialog box, enable the Custom page number format option. Click Insert. Click one of the page numbering options.
Display underlining in marked authorities	Enable the Include underlining in generated table check box.
Group page numbers	Enable the Use dash to show consecutive pages check box.
Use the section definition as the default	Click Use as default.
Apply a different style to a section definition	Click Change. In the Table of authorities style dialog box, choose a style from the Styles list box. Click Select.
 Tip

•	You can specify to always display the Generate dialog box when saving or printing a document by clicking Tools [image]  Reference [image] Table of authorities, and enabling the Auto generate check box.

 Related topics


To edit a table of authorities section definition

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Table of authorities.

2	Click Define.

3	In the Define table of authorities dialog box, choose a section definition from the Section name list.

4	Click Edit.

5	In the Edit table of authorities dialog box, make any changes to the section definition.

 Related topics


To retrieve a section definition

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Table of authorities.

2	Click Define.

3	In the Define table of authorities dialog box, click Retrieve.

4	In the Filename box of the Retrieve T.O.A. definitions dialog box, type the file path and filename of the document that contains the section definition.

5	In the Name list, enable the check box beside the section definition you want to retrieve.

 Related topics


To delete a section definition

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Table of authorities.

2	Click Define.

3	In the Define table of authorities dialog box, choose a section definition from the Section name list.

4	Click Delete.

 Related topics


Creating and editing section definition styles for tables of authorities

You can create a new style for a section definition. You can also edit a section definition style.

 How to


To create a style for a table of authorities section definition

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Table of authorities.

2	Click Define.

3	In the Define table of authorities dialog box, click Create.

4	In the Current style area, click Change.

5	In the Table of authorities style dialog box, click Create.

6	In the Styles editor dialog box, type a name for the style in the Style name box.

7	Type a description of the style in the Description box.

8	Choose a style type from the Type list box.

9	Using the Style editor toolbar, apply any style attributes.

 Tip

•	You can access additional style attributes by clicking the Down arrow at the end of the toolbar.

 Related topics


To edit the style of a table of authorities section definition

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Table of authorities.

2	Click Define.

3	In the Define table of authorities dialog box, click Create.

4	In the Current style area, click Change.

5	Choose a style from the Styles list.

6	Click Edit.

7	In the Styles editor dialog box, make any changes to the style.

 Related topics


Marking entries for tables of authorities

Once you have organized the information for a table of authorities, you can mark the entries you want to list in it. The first time you mark a full form entry, you are creating the text of the authority as you want it to appear in the table. This is called a full form entry. Once you create a full form entry, you can edit it.

As part of the full form, you can assign a short form or nickname to an authority, such as the first name in a case being cited. For all subsequent references to this authority, you can use the short form as an abbreviation. The short form makes it easy to mark several occurrences of the same authority.

You can mark authorities in the body of a document as well as in footnotes, endnotes, graphics boxes, and captions.

 How to


To create a full form entry

1	Select the text you want to mark as an authority.

2	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Table of authorities.

3	Click in the Short form box.

4	Choose an authority type from the Type list box.

5	Click Create.

 Tip

•	You can also display another word in place of the full form name by editing the text in the Section name list box.

 Related topics


To edit a full form entry

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Table of authorities.

2	Click Edit.

3	In the Edit full form dialog box, choose a full form entry from the Short form list.

 Related topics


To insert a short form entry

1	Click where you want to mark the occurrence of an authority.

2	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Table of authorities.

3	In the Mark authorities area, choose a short form from the Short form list box.

If the short form is not in the list, type a short form in the box.

4	Click Mark.

 Related topics


Defining tables of authorities

You must create and format the page on which a table of authorities displays. This usually involves creating a new page, typing a title for the table of authorities, and typing titles for the table of authorities sections. Then you must define the table of authorities, including the section definitions you've created for each section. For information about creating section definitions, see "Creating and formatting section definitions for tables of authorities."

 How to


To create a table of authorities page

1	Type a table of authorities title.

2	Press Enter.

3	Type a section title.

4	Press Enter twice.

 Related topics


To define a table of authorities

1	Click below a section title.

2	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Table of authorities.

3	Click Define.

4	In the Define table of authorities dialog box, choose a section definition from the Section name list.

5	Click Insert.

 Related topics


Generating and updating tables of authorities

After you have created table of authority section definitions, marked entries for a table of authorities, and defined the table of authorities and the page on which it will display, you can generate the table of authorities. When you generate it, the document is searched for table of authorities entry markers, and this information is reproduced where you defined the table of authorities. When you regenerate a table of authorities, all information in the existing table of authorities is updated.

When you publish a table of authorities to PDF, WordPerfect numbers each marked heading or subheading sequentially. The entries display in the PDF as numbered bookmarks in the document.

 How to


To generate and update a table of authorities

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Table of authorities.

2	Click Generate.

3	In the Generate dialog box, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Save subdocuments [image] saves changes to subdocuments

•	Build hyperlinks [image] adds hyperlinks from the entries to related sections in the document

 Tip

•	You can ensure that a table of authorities is generated before you save or print a document by clicking Tools [image] Reference [image] Table of authorities, and enabling the Auto generate check box in the Reference tools dialog box. When you save or print a document, and if you have not generated the reference tools since last saving or printing, a warning is displayed.

 Related topics


Creating and formatting figure or table list definitions

A list of figures or tables can include all of the captions and titles included in a document. A list of figures or tables can have a different format from other lists. Each list has an accompanying definition, which defines how the list will look in the document. You can create and edit a list definition. As well, if you want to reuse a list definition, you can retrieve it to use in another document. If you no longer require a list definition, you can delete it.

 How to


To create a list definition

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] List.

2	Click Define.

3	In the Define list dialog box, click Create.

4	In the Create list dialog box, type a name for the list in the List box.

5	Choose a numbering position from the Position list box.

You can also
Customize page numbers	Click Page numbering. In the Page numbering format dialog box, enable the Custom page number format option. Click Insert. Click one of the page numbering options.
Select the type of box caption to include in the list	Choose a box caption type from the List box captions automatically list box.
Apply a different style to a section definition	Click Change. In the List style dialog box, choose a style from the Styles list box. Click Select.
 Tips

•	If you are using secondary, chapter, volume, and total page numbers, you can insert more than one page number format from the list. For example, you can choose [chpt#][Page#] to show 3-98.

•	You can include text and punctuation with the page number codes.

•	You can specify to always display the Generate dialog box when saving or printing a document by enabling the Auto generate check box.

 Related topics


To edit a list definition

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] List.

2	Click Define.

3	In the Define list dialog box, click Edit.

4	In the Edit list dialog box, make any changes to the list.

 Related topics


To retrieve a list definition

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] List.

2	Click Define.

3	In the Define list dialog box, choose a list from the List name list.

4	Click Retrieve.

5	In the Filename box of the Retrieve list definitions dialog box, type the file path and filename of the document that contains the list definition.

6	In the Name list, enable the check box beside the list definition you want to retrieve.

 Related topics


To delete a list definition

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] List.

2	Click Define.

3	In the Define list dialog box, choose a list from the List name list.

4	Click Delete.

 Related topics


Creating and editing styles for lists of figures or tables

You can create a new style for a list of figures or tables. You can also edit a list style.

 How to


To create a style for a list of figures or tables

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] List.

2	Click Define.

3	In the Define list dialog box, click Create.

4	In the Create list dialog box, click Change.

5	In the List style dialog box, click Create.

6	In the Styles editor dialog box, type a name for the style in the Style name box.

7	Type a description of the style in the Description box.

8	Choose a style type from the Type list box.

9	Using the Styles editor toolbar, apply any style attributes.

 Related topics


To edit a list of figures or tables style

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] List.

2	Click Define.

3	In the Define list dialog box, click Create.

4	In the Create list dialog box, click Change.

5	In the List style dialog box, choose a style from the Styles list.

6	Click Edit.

7	In the Styles editor dialog box, make any changes to the style.

 Related topics


Marking entries for lists of figures or tables

Before you can generate a list, you must mark entries for it. You can mark figures, illustrations, or tables to include in the list. You can also mark a caption to include in a list of figures.

When you publish a list to PDF, WordPerfect numbers each marked heading or subheading sequentially. The entries display in the PDF as numbered bookmarks in the document.

 How to


To mark entries for a list of figures or tables

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] List.

2	Choose a list definition from the List list box.

3	Select a word or phrase in the document, such as the title of a table.

4	Click Mark.

 Related topics


To mark a caption for a list of figures

1	Right-click a graphic with a caption , and click Edit caption.

2	Click View [image] Reveal Codes.

3	Double-click the figure code in the Reveal Codes window.

4	In the Styles editor dialog box, use the toolbar to apply attributes to the caption.

5	Enable the Show 'off codes' check box.

Enabling the Show 'off codes' check box displays the codes for the attributes you apply.

6	Select all of the codes in the Contents box.

7	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] List.

8	Choose a list definition from the List list box.

9	Click Mark.

 Related topics


Defining lists of figures or tables

You must define the list of figures or tables by formatting the page on which you want the list to appear and inserting a list definition to determine how the list will look on the page.

 How to


To define a list of figures or tables

1	Type a title for the list.

2	Press Enter.

3	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] List.

4	Click Define.

5	In the Define list dialog box, choose a list definition from the List name list.

6	Click Insert.

 Related topics


Generating and updating lists of figures or tables

After you have marked the entries for a list and defined how the list will look in the document, you can generate the list. When you generate it, the document is searched for list entry markers, and this information is reproduced where you defined the list. When you regenerate a list, all information in the existing list is updated.

When you publish a list to PDF, WordPerfect numbers each marked heading or subheading sequentially. The entries display in the PDF as numbered bookmarks in the document.

 How to


To generate a list of figures or tables

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] List.

2	Click Generate.

3	In the Generate dialog box, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Save subdocuments [image] saves changes to subdocuments when the document is generated

•	Build hyperlinks [image] adds hyperlinks from the entries to related sections in the document when the document is generated

 Note

•	If you are updating a list, be sure to edit the marked text or the list definition and not the actual list. Otherwise, the changes will disappear when you regenerate the list.

 Tip

•	You can ensure that lists of figures or tables are generated before you save or print a document by clicking Tools [image] Reference [image] List, and enabling the Auto generate check box in the Reference tools dialog box. When you save or print a document, and if you have not generated the reference tools since last saving or printing, a warning is displayed.

 Related topics


Creating and editing index styles

You can create an index of information in a document to provide readers with a quick reference of topics and their page numbers. There are predefined index styles within WordPerfect, but you can also create your own styles. In addition, you can edit any predefined or custom styles.

 How to


To create an index style

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Index.

2	Click Define.

3	In the Define index dialog box, click Change.

4	In the Index styles dialog box, choose a level from the Level list.

5	Choose a style from the Styles list, and click Create.

6	In the Styles editor dialog box, type a name for the style in the Style name box.

7	Type a description for the style in the Description box.

8	Choose a style type from the Type list box.

9	Using the Style editor toolbar, apply any style attributes.

You can also
Apply style attributes	Using the Styles editor toolbar, apply any style attributes.
Define what the ENTER key does when the style is applied	Choose an option from the Enter key inserts style list box.
Display the codes that take effect when a style ends	Enable the Show 'off codes' check box.
 Tip

•	You can specify to always display the Generate dialog box when saving or printing a document by enabling the Auto generate check box.

 Related topics


To edit an index style

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Index.

2	Click Define.

3	In the Define index dialog box, click Change.

4	In the Index styles dialog box, choose a level from the Level list.

5	Choose a style from the Styles list.

6	Click Edit.

7	In the Styles editor dialog box, make any changes to the style.

 Related topics


Marking index entries

You can mark index entries automatically, using a concordance file, or manually.

When marking index entries automatically, a concordance file searches the document and automatically marks entries. A concordance file is a separate list of the words or phrases that you want to appear in an index. When you generate the index, WordPerfect searches the document being indexed for occurrences of the words or phrases in the concordance file and includes them as entries in the index. Using a concordance file eliminates the task of searching for and marking entries throughout the document. By default, each entry in the concordance file appears as a heading in the index. However, you can also mark an entry as a subheading. The capitalization you used in the concordance file, not the capitalization in the indexed document, determines how the index entries display once you generate the index.

When you mark an index entry manually, you must designate it as either a heading or a subheading entry.

 How to


To create a concordance file

1	Click File [image] New.

2	Type the words and phrases you want in the concordance file, and press Enter after each one.

3	Click File [image] Save as.

4	Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the file.

5	Type a filename in the Filename box.

6	Click Save.

 Related topics


To mark a heading or a subheading in a concordance file

1	Select a word.

2	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Index.

3	Choose the selected word from any of the following list boxes:

•	Heading

•	Subheading

4	Click Mark.

 Tip

•	You can mark a concordance entry twice, for use as both a heading and a subheading.

 Related topics


To mark an index entry manually

1	Select a word or phrase.

2	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Index.

3	Choose the word or phrase from the Heading list box.

4	Click Mark.

 Notes

•	Index entries are case-sensitive. A separate entry for each word is inserted into the index for each variation of the word you mark, resulting in multiple entries for the same word.

•	Heading entries are mandatory; subheading entries are optional.

 Tips

•	You can edit the text for an index entry and still reference the word you select. For example, if you select "cherries" in a document but want the index entry to be "fruit," you can type "fruit" in the Heading list box.

•	If you want to mark a subheading, choose the word or phrase from the Subheading list box.

 Related topics


Defining indexes

You must define where and how the index will display in a document. You can format the index page so that it has columns. For information about adding columns to a document, see "Creating and deleting columns."

You can also define the information included or excluded from a concordance file.

 How to


To define an index

1	Type an index title in the document.

2	Press Enter.

3	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Index.

4	Click Define.

5	In the Define index dialog box, choose a numbering position from the Position list box.

If you created a concordance file for the index, type the file path and filename in the Filename box.

You can also
Apply a custom page numbering format to the index	Click Page numbering. Enable the Custom page number format option. Choose Page Number from the Insert list box. Type any page number text in the box.
Use a dash to show consecutive pages	Enable the Use dash to show consecutive pages check box.
Apply different styles to each index level	Click Change. In the Index styles dialog box, choose Heading or Subheading from the Level list. Choose a style from the Styles list.
 Related topics


To define the information in a concordance file

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Index.

2	Click Define.

3	In the Define index dialog box, click Create in the Concordance file area.

4	In the Concordance file dialog box, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Headers/Footers [image] includes headers and footers in a concordance file

•	Footnotes/Endnotes [image] includes footnotes and endnotes in a concordance file

•	Text boxes [image] includes text boxes in a concordance file

You can also
Include capitalized phrases	Enable the Capitalized phrases check box.
Include quoted text	Enable the List quotes check box.
Remove minor words	Enable the Minor words check box.
Remove short words	Enable the Words less than check box. Type a value in the Characters box.
Remove numbers	Enable the Numbers check box.
 Related topics


Generating and updating indexes

After you have marked the entries for an index and defined how the index will look and where it displays, you can generate the index. When you generate an index, the document is searched for index entry markers, and this information is reproduced on the index page in the document. When you generate the index to update it, all existing information is updated.

When you publish an index to PDF, WordPerfect numbers each marked heading or subheading sequentially. The entries display in the PDF as numbered bookmarks in the document.

 How to


To generate an index

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Index.

2	Click Generate.

3	In the Generate dialog box, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Save subdocuments [image] saves changes to subdocuments

•	Build hyperlinks [image] adds hyperlinks from the entries to related sections in the document

 Note

•	The generated index uses the capitalization of the concordance file, not the capitalization in the document. For example, if you create a "butterfly" entry in the concordance file, and generate the concordance with a document that also includes "Butterfly," all occurrences of "butterfly" and "Butterfly" are listed under the "butterfly" index heading.

 Tip

•	You can ensure that the index is generated before you save or print a document by clicking Tools [image] Reference [image] Index, and enabling the Auto Generate check box in the Reference tools dialog box. When you save or print a document, and if you have not generated the reference tools since last saving or printing, a warning is displayed.

 Related topics


Finding and removing index codes from documents

Once you have marked index entries in a document, you can find and remove their codes using Reveal Codes. For information about Reveal Codes, see "Displaying Reveal Codes."

 How to


To find an index code in a document

1	Click View [image] Reveal codes.

2	Click Edit [image] Find and replace.

3	In the Find and replace dialog box, click Match [image] Codes.

4	In the Codes dialog box, choose Index from the Find codes list box.

5	Click Insert and close.

6	In the Find and replace dialog box, click Action [image] Position before.

7	Click Find next.

 Related topics


To delete an index code from a document

1	Click View [image] Reveal Codes.

2	Drag an index entry out of the Reveal Codes window.

 Related topics


Marking targets and references for cross-references

Cross-references are comprised of a target and a reference. The target is the item or text to which you are referring; the page number, figure, or footnote. The reference is the document text that you use to refer to the page number, figure, or footnote; it often displays as "See page 23."

You can cross-reference page numbers and chapter numbers, footnote and endnote numbers, caption numbers, graphics boxes, counter numbers, and paragraph and outline numbers. In order to create a cross-reference, you must mark first the target and then the reference. Before you generate a document, the cross-references are represented by question marks. When you generate the document, the cross-reference numbers display. For information about generating cross-references, see "Generating and updating cross-references."

When a document is published for the Web, page numbering disappears, making marked references unusable. HTML-enabled references let you create a cross-reference that applies to both paper and Web documents by specifying text before and after the reference, rather than specifying just a page number.

For advanced cross-referencing, you can cross-reference a single target with more than one reference type (for example, "See page 23, figure 2") and one or more targets with the same reference type (for example, "See pages 10, 24, 29").

In addition, you can change the options for HTML-enabled references to apply a different reference type and include preceding and following text.

 How to


To mark a target

1	Click at the end of a word or item that you want as the target.

2	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Cross-reference.

3	Choose a reference type from the Reference type list box.

4	Type an identifying name for the target in the Select target list box.

5	Click Mark target.

 Note

•	Clicking within the target text, rather than at the end of a word or item, allows the reference to remain correct if the text moves to a different page.

 Tips

•	If your target is a counter that displays and increments automatically, click before the counter when you mark it.

•	Once you have created a target name, you can reuse it for other targets by choosing it from the Select target list box.

 Related topics


To mark a reference

1	In a document, click where you want to add a reference.

2	Type any introductory text. For example, type "See page " or "See figure ".

3	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Cross-reference.

4	Choose a target from the Select target list box.

5	From the Format list box, choose one of the following:

•	Reference [image] lets you mark a reference for printed documents

•	HTML-enabled reference [image] lets you mark a reference for documents intended for the Web

6	Click Mark.

A question mark (?) displays where you have marked the reference.

 Note

•	You can cross-reference the same target as often as you want.

 Tip

•	You can add a location marker to the reference for a printed document by enabling the QuickSuffix check box.

 Related topics


To mark multiple references with one target

1	Click at the end of a word or item that you want as the target.

2	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Cross-reference.

3	Choose a reference type from the Reference type list box.

4	Type an identifying name for the target in the Select target list box.

5	Click Mark target.

6	Click in the document where you want the reference to display, and type any introductory text. For example, type "See page " or "See figure ".

7	From the Format list box, choose one of the following:

•	Reference [image] lets you mark a reference for printed documents

•	HTML-enabled reference [image] lets you mark a reference for documents intended for the Web

8	Choose the target from the Select target list box.

9	Click Mark.

A question mark (?) displays where you have marked the reference.

 Note

•	For each reference you want to mark, use the same target.

 Tips

•	You can mark multiple targets with one reference type by using the same identifying name. Choose the identifying name from the Select target list box.

•	You can add a location marker to the reference for a printed document by enabling the QuickSuffix check box.

 Related topics


To change options for HTML-enabled references

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Cross-reference.

2	Click Options.

3	In the Cross-reference options dialog box, choose a reference type from the Reference type list box.

4	Type text in the Preceding text box.

5	Type text in the Following text box.

 Related topics


Cross-referencing graphics

You can use two different formats to cross-reference graphics boxes. You can create a cross-reference that provides the entire caption number and formatting, or you can create a cross-reference that only provides the number of the graphics box without any other text.

 How to


To cross-reference a graphic caption

1	Right-click a graphic, click Edit caption, and click at the end of the caption text.

2	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Cross-reference.

3	Choose Caption number from the Reference type list box.

4	Type an identifying name for the target in the Select target list box.

5	Click Mark target.

6	Click in the document where you want the reference to display, and type any introductory text. For example, type "See page " or "See figure ".

7	From the Format list box, choose one of the following:

•	Reference [image] lets you mark a reference for printed documents

•	HTML-enabled reference [image] lets you mark a reference for documents intended for the Web

8	Choose a target from the Select target list box.

9	Click Mark.

A question mark (?) displays where you have marked the reference.

 Tip

•	You can add a location marker to the reference for a printed document by enabling the QuickSuffix check box.

 Related topics


To cross-reference only the number of a graphics box

1	Right-click a graphic, click Edit caption, and click at the end of the caption text.

2	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Cross-reference.

3	Choose Counter from the Reference type list box.

4	In the Counter dialog box, choose Figure box from the Counter to reference list.

5	In the Reference tools dialog box, type an identifying name for the target in the Select target list box.

6	Click Mark target.

7	Click in the document where you want the reference to display, and type any introductory text. For example, type "See page " or "See figure ".

8	From the Format list box, choose one of the following:

•	Reference [image] lets you mark a reference for printed documents

•	HTML-enabled reference [image] lets you mark a reference for documents intended for the Web

9	Choose a target from the Select target list box, and click Mark.

A question mark (?) displays where you have marked the reference.

 Tip

•	You can add a location marker to the cross-reference for a paper document by enabling the QuickSuffix check box.

 Related topics


Generating and updating cross-references

After you have marked targets and references, you can generate the cross-references. For the information in a cross-reference to update whenever you make a change, you must regenerate the cross-references.

On occasion, when you update a document, the links between a reference and a target are broken, creating a broken cross-reference. When you update the cross-references, any cross-references that are broken are represented by question marks. After you have regenerated the cross-references, you should search for broken cross-references. To fix broken cross references, mark the reference and target again, then regenerate the cross references. For information about marking for cross-references, see "Marking targets and references for cross-references."

 How to


To generate cross-references

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Cross-reference.

2	Click Generate.

3	In the Generate dialog box, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Save subdocuments [image] saves changes to subdocuments

•	Build hyperlinks [image] adds hyperlinks from the entries to related sections in the document

 Note

•	You can regenerate cross-references whenever you edit the document.

 Tip

•	You can ensure that cross-references are generated before you save or print a document by clicking Tools [image] Reference [image] Cross-reference, and enabling the Generate warning check box in the Reference tools dialog box. When you save or print a document, and if you have not generated the reference tools since last saving or printing, a warning will display.

 Related topics


Using Accessibility features

Corel is committed to supporting the special needs community. The company is a proud supporter of accessible software that promotes quality of life, employability, and independence for persons with disabilities. Corel is continually striving to enhance products so that they allow persons with disabilities to work more easily and efficiently with Corel applications.

In this section, you'll find information about the following Accessibility topics:

•	accessing WordPerfect documentation in ASCII text format

•	using the keyboard and keyboard shortcuts

•	customizing display and Help text options

•	working with text

•	choosing and creating menus

•	customizing toolbars

•	customizing the property bar and the application bar

•	using the Microsoft Intellimouse

Corel welcomes your feedback and suggestions. For more information, you can visit our Accessibility web page at http://corel.com/accessibility/index.htm If you have any comments or questions about Corel products and Accessibility, you can submit your messages to accessibilityproductmgr@corel.com.


Accessing WordPerfect documentation in ASCII text format

The documentation for WordPerfect and WordPerfect Office is available in ASCII text format.

 How to


To access WordPerfect documentation in ASCII text format

1	Insert the WordPerfect Office 11 CD into the CD drive.

2	On the Windows taskbar, click Start [image] Settings [image] Control panel.

3	Double-click the Add/Remove programs icon.

4	Choose WordPerfect Office 11 from the Currently installed programs list.

5	Click Change/Remove.

6	In the installation wizard, enable the Modify option.

7	Click Next.

8	Double-click WordPerfect Office 11 [image] Utilties [image] Accessible Help files.

9	Select the files and follow the instructions in the installation wizard.

The files are installed in the following location: Program files\Corel\WordPerfect Office 11\Shared\Help.

 Related topics


Using the keyboard and keyboard shortcuts

You can choose, create, and edit a custom keyboard by assigning features, keystrokes, applications, and macros to keys on the keyboard. You can also execute many WordPerfect operations using keyboard shortcut commands.

Customizing the keyboard

copying, restoring, renaming, and deleting keyboards

Using keyboard shortcuts

using WordPerfect shortcut keys

using File menu shortcut keys

using Edit menu shortcut keys

using View menu shortcut keys

using Insert menu shortcut keys

using Format menu shortcut keys

using Table menu shortcut keys

using Tools menu shortcut keys

using Help menu shortcut keys

using property bar shortcut keys

using navigation shortcut keys

using other shortcut keys

moving the cursor using CUA (WPWin10) and DOS keystrokes

inserting using CUA (WPWin10) and DOS keystrokes

deleting CUA (WPWin10) and DOS keystrokes

enabling other editing keystrokes using CUA (WPWin10) and DOS keystrokes

performing functions in a column using CUA (WPWin10) and DOS keystrokes

performing functions in a dialog box using CUA (WPWin10) and DOS keystrokes

performing functions in a table using CUA (WPWin10) and DOS keystrokes

selecting text using CUA (WPWin10) and DOS keystrokes

startup switches for WordPerfect

to set a permanent startup switch for WordPerfect


Customizing display and Help text options

WordPerfect lets you optimize on-screen display features. You can also change the font size and hyperlink colors for Help topics.

Customizing display options

changing user information, prompt settings and error notifications

customizing display and Help text options

saving workspace settings

displaying and hiding QuickTips on menus

enlarging or reducing the page display

changing document display settings

displaying Reveal Codes

changing shadow cursor and dragging settings

Customizing Help text options

changing font size and colors of the Help


Working with text

You can enter, select, and format text using time-saving tools, such as QuickWords and Format-As-You-Go. Using Spell-As-You-Go, Grammar-As-You-Go, and Prompt-As-You-Go, you can check and correct spelling and grammar as you type.

Entering, selecting, and formatting text

entering text using the Shadow Cursor

Selecting and deleting text

creating QuickWords

changing QuickWords

inserting QuickWords

expanding QuickWords

using SpeedLink

editing quotation marks

correcting the spacing between words and sentences

Using spelling and grammar tools

using Spell-As-You-Go

using Grammar-As-You-Go

using Prompt-As-You-Go


Choosing and creating menus

You can create, edit, and change the display of menus and toolbars in WordPerfect.

Customizing menus

choosing and creating menus

creating keyboard shortcuts

adding and removing menu items, separators, and drop-down menus

renaming, deleting and restoring menus

Customizing toolbars

customizing toolbars

customizing toolbar buttons and separators

copying, renaming, restoring, and deleting toolbars


Customizing the property bar and the application bar

You can edit and change the appearance of the property bar and the application bar in WordPerfect.

customizing the property bar

customizing the application bar


Using the Microsoft Intellimouse

You can use WordPerfect with Microsoft IntelliMouse. This allows you to use enhanced zoom and scrolling features.

For the IntelliMouse to work correctly, it must be installed properly with the necessary software or hardware. For more information about the Microsoft Intellimouse, see their accompanying documentation.

Using Microsoft Intellimouse

Microsoft Intellimouse scrolling and zooming

To change IntelliMouse settingsTo change IntelliMouse settings>proc4


Enable to create a table or floating cell. Tables are structured with rows and columns; a floating cell is a code in the text of a document that acts like a table cell and can be linked to a table.


Enable to create a table. Tables are structured with rows and columns.


Enable to create a floating cell. A floating cell is a code in the text of a document that acts like a table cell and can be linked to a table.


Specify the number of vertical columns for the table.


Specify the number of vertical columns for the table.


Specify the number of horizontal rows for the table.


Specify the number of horizontal rows for the table.


Shows the current table style. You can click SpeedFormat to see the available table styles.


Shows the current table style. You can click SpeedFormat to see the available table styles.


Enable this check box to create tables within graphics boxes. You can drag to create a table of any size wherever you click the shadow cursor, and text can flow around the table box. Clear this option to create tables at the cursor that span the page width. All tables can be moved and resized after you create them.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Choose a predefined table style.


Aligns cell data horizontally. Choosing Decimal align lines up data according to decimal point placement.


Aligns cell data horizontally. Choosing Decimal align lines up data according to decimal point placement.


Aligns cell data horizontally. Choosing Decimal align lines up data according to decimal point placement.


Applies the current column's justification settings to a cell.


Choose how you want to vertically align cell data.


Choose how you want to vertically align cell data.


Choose to rotate cell data. Data is rotated counterclockwise.


Select to rotate cell data. Data is rotated counterclockwise.


Lets you preview the alignment and rotation of cell contents.


Select line and fill options for the current cell or selected cells.


Specifies no diagonal lines to be drawn in the cell.


Specifies no diagonal lines to be drawn in the cell.


Draws a line in the cell from the upper right corner to the lower left corner.


Draws a line in the cell from the upper right corner to the lower left corner.


Draws a line in the cell from the upper left corner to the lower right corner.


Draws a line in the cell from the upper left corner to the lower right corner.


Draws two lines in a cell to create an X.


Draws two lines in a cell to create an X.


Select line and fill options for the current cell or selected cells.


Locks cell data. The cursor cannot be placed in a locked cell, and no changes can be made to the cell.


Specifies that the cell data be ignored during calculations.


Aligns cell data horizontally. Choosing Decimal align lines up data according to decimal point placement.


Aligns cell data horizontally. Choosing Decimal align lines up data according to decimal point placement.


Aligns cell data horizontally. Choosing Decimal align lines up data according to decimal point placement.


Specify where the decimal point will be placed and the number of digits to allow after a decimal point in a cell.


Specify where the decimal point will be placed in a cell. Use this option when justification is set to decimal align.


Specify where the decimal point will be placed in a cell. Use this option when justification is set to decimal align.


Specify the number of digits to allow after a decimal point in a cell. Use this option when justification is set to decimal align.


Specify the number of digits to allow after a decimal point in a cell. Use this option when justification is set to decimal align.


Specify the column width.


Specify the column width.


Specify the column width.


Keeps the column width the same regardless of changes to adjacent column widths or column margin settings.


Specify the width of white space inside the column cells.


Specify the width of white space inside the column cells on the left side.


Specify the width of white space inside the column cells on the left side.


Specify the width of white space inside the column cells on the right side.


Specify the width of white space inside the column cells on the right side.


Formats the current table row.


Allows the current row to span across a page break. You can continue the row on the next page instead of bumping the entire row to the next page.


Allows the current row to span across a page break. You can continue the row on the next page instead of bumping the entire row to the next page.


Specifies that the current row displays at the top of each new page when the table spans a page break.


Formats the current table row.


Allows only one line of data in each cell of the row.


Allows more than one line of data in each cell of the row.


Formats the current table row.


Allows the height of the data to determine the height of the cells in the row.


Specify a fixed height for each cell in the row. The cell remains that height no matter how much data is added.


Specify a fixed height for each cell in the row. The cell remains that height no matter how much data is added.


Formats the current table row.


Specify the width of white space inside the row's cells on the top.


Specify the width of white space inside the row's cells on the top.


Specify the width of white space inside the row's cells on the bottom.


Specify the width of white space inside the row's cells on the bottom.


Formats the current table.


Aligns cell data horizontally. Decimal align lines up data according to decimal point placement.


Aligns cell data horizontally. Decimal align lines up data according to decimal point placement.


Formats the current table.


Specify where the decimal point will be placed in a cell. Use this option when justification is set to decimal align.


Specify where the decimal point will be placed in a cell. Use this option when justification is set to decimal align.


Specify the number of digits to allow after a decimal point in a cell. Use this option when justification is set to decimal align.


Specify the number of digits to allow after a decimal point in a cell. Use this option when justification is set to decimal align.


Formats the current table.


Specify the number of columns in the table.


Specify the number of columns in the table.


Specify the number of rows in the table.


Specify the number of rows in the table.


Formats the current table.


Specify the horizontal position of the current table relative to side margins or the left edge of the page.


Specify the horizontal position of the current table relative to side margins or the left edge of the page.


Lets you set the formatting properties specified as the default for all future tables created in WordPerfect.


Formats the current table.


Specify the column width.


Specify the column width.


Keeps the column width the same regardless of changes to adjacent column widths or column margin settings.


Formats the current table.


Specify the width of white space inside the column cells on the left side.


Specify the width of white space inside the column cells on the left side.


Specify the width of white space inside the column cells on the right side.


Specify the width of white space inside the column cells on the right side.


Automatically inserts a new row when you press TAB in the last cell of a table.


Automatically inserts a new row when you press TAB in the last cell of a table.


Automatically inserts a new row when you press TAB in the last cell of a table.


Disables all cell locks in the current table.


Disables all cell locks in the current table.


Lets you specify skew settings for the current table.


Lets you specify skew settings for the current table.


Lets you edit skew rows, columns, and angles.


Lets you preview line and fill options for the current cell or selected cells.


Lets you specify skew settings for the current table.


Lets you skew the top row of the active table.


Lets you specify a skew angle for rows.


Lets you specify a skew angle for rows.


Enable to skew the text in the top row.


Enable to square the first column.


Enable to square the last column.


Lets you specify skew settings for the current table.


Lets you skew the left or right column.


Lets you specify a skew angle for columns.


Lets you specify a skew angle for columns.


Enable to skew the text at the same angle as the skewed columns.


Enable to join the corners of a table. You can only enable this check box if you have skewed the top row and left column and text of your table at a -45 degree angle.


Displays the current table with the specified skew options.


Apply the column numeric format to the current cell.


Change the numeric format for the current cell.


Change the number of digits displayed after the decimal point.


Change the number of digits displayed after the decimal point.


Displays numbers in the currency format but aligns the currency symbol at one edge of the column and the numbers at the other edge.


Displays numbers using the fixed format, but uses commas to separate thousands and displays negative numbers in parentheses.


Displays numbers with a currency symbol, thousands separators, a decimal align character, and to as many as 15 decimal places.


Converts numbers into the current date and time format.


Displays numbers with no thousands separator to as many as fifteen decimal places. If a number has fewer decimal places than you set, the empty decimal places are filled with zeros.


Shows the selected cells contain more than one numeric format. If only one numeric format is selected, this option is grayed.


Displays numbers with no thousands separator and no trailing zeros to the right of the decimal point.


Displays whole numbers only. Fractions are rounded to the nearest whole number.


Displays numbers as percent values with a percent symbol (%) to the number of decimal places you set, and without a thousands separator.


Displays numbers in scientific (exponential) notation to the number of decimal places you set.


Treats the contents of a cell as text. The cell cannot be used for calculations.


Preview the numeric format for the current cell.


Edits the selected numeric format.


Apply the selected numeric format to all new tables as they are created.


Change the numeric format for the current column.


Displays numbers in the currency format but aligns the currency symbol at one edge of the column and the numbers at the other edge.


Displays numbers using the fixed format, but uses commas to separate thousands and displays negative numbers in parentheses.


Displays numbers with a currency symbol, thousands separators, a decimal align character, and to as many as 15 decimal places.


Converts numbers into the current date and time format.


Displays numbers with no thousands separator to as many as fifteen decimal places. If a number has fewer decimal places than you set, the empty decimal places are filled with zeros.


Shows the selected cells contain more than one numeric format. If only one numeric format is selected, this option is grayed.


Change the number of digits displayed after the decimal point.


Change the number of digits displayed after the decimal point.


Displays numbers with no thousands separator and no trailing zeros to the right of the decimal point.


Displays whole numbers only. Fractions are rounded to the nearest whole number.


Displays numbers as percent values with a percent symbol (%) to the number of decimal places you set, and without a thousands separator.


Displays numbers in scientific (exponential) notation to the number of decimal places you set.


Treats the contents of a cell as text. The cell cannot be used for calculations.


Change the numeric format for the current column.


Edits the selected numeric format.


Apply the selected numeric format to all new tables as they are created.


Change the numeric format for the current table.


Change the number of digits displayed after the decimal point.


Change the number of digits displayed after the decimal point.


Displays numbers in the currency format but aligns the currency symbol at one edge of the column and the numbers at the other edge.


Displays numbers using the fixed format, but uses commas to separate thousands and displays negative numbers in parentheses.


Displays numbers with a currency symbol, thousands separators, a decimal align character, and to as many as 15 decimal places.


Converts numbers into the current date and time format.


Displays numbers with no thousands separator to as many as fifteen decimal places. If a number has fewer decimal places than you set, the empty decimal places are filled with zeros.


Shows the selected cells contain more than one numeric format. If only one numeric format is selected, this option is grayed.


Displays numbers with no thousands separator and no trailing zeros to the right of the decimal point.


Displays whole numbers only. Fractions are rounded to the nearest whole number.


Displays numbers as percent values with a percent symbol (%) to the number of decimal places you set, and without a thousands separator.


Displays numbers in scientific (exponential) notation to the number of decimal places you set.


Treats the contents of a cell as text. The cell cannot be used for calculations.


Change the numeric format for the current table.


Edits the selected numeric format.


Apply the selected numeric format to all new tables as they are created.


Customize the currency type you have selected.


Include a currency symbol for all numeric types.


Align the currency symbol at the left or right edge of the cell. Only available when the Use currency symbol check box is enabled.


Select a different currency symbol. To return to the default currency symbol, click Default.


Choose a different currency symbol. To return to the default currency symbol, click Default.


Allows commas in the numbers you type in cells. Does not affect the scientific numeric type.


Customize the negative number type you have selected.


Display negative numbers using a minus sign.


Display negative numbers using parentheses.


Display negative numbers using the CR or DR symbol.


Preview the number type you have selected.


Rounds cell values after the decimal when they are calculated.


Lets you customize the date/time format.


Select a different date/time format. To return to the original date/time format, click Current format.


Lets you preview the date/time format.


Select the style you want to apply to the current table.


Choose the style you want to apply to the current table.


Illustrates the selected table style.


Clears any existing table settings before applying the table style.


Applies the table style to the current cells of the table. If you add more rows or columns to the table, the style will not apply to those rows or columns.


Applies the table style to the current cells of the table. If you add more rows or columns to the table, the style will not apply to those rows or columns.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Creates a table style based on the format of the current table.


Allows you to delete, rename, retrieve, or save a table style. You can also specify the location of the table styles that are listed in the Table SpeedFormat dialog box.


Apply the current table style to all new tables as they are created.


Type the name of the table style.


Type the name of the table style.


Names the table style you have created with the format of the current table.


Names the table style you have created with the format of the current table.


Choose the location of the table styles that are listed in the Table SpeedFormat dialog box.


List the styles associated with the current document.


List the styles associated with the default template.


List the styles associated with the additional objects template, if you have one. Specify the location of the additional objects template in file settings.


Type a unique name for the style you are creating.


Saves the styles as a separate file. You can retrieve them into new documents. The styles are also stored with the document template.


Retrieves a style file or the styles from another document into the current document. When you do this, all styles in the style file or document are saved with the current document.


Saves the styles as a separate file. You can retrieve them into new documents. The styles are also stored with the document template.


Saves the styles as a separate file. You can retrieve them into new documents. The styles are also stored with the document template.


Choose line options for the current cell or selected cells.


Select the line style for the left line of the cell or selected cells.


Choose the line style for the left line of the cell or selected cells.


Shows what line style is selected for the current cell or selected cells. Mixed means more than one line style is selected. Default means the default line style is selected.


Choose the line style for the right line of the cell or selected cells.


Choose the line style for the right line of the cell or selected cells.


Shows what line style is selected for the current cell or selected cells. Mixed means more than one line style is selected. Default means the default line style is selected.


Choose the line style for the top line of the cell or selected cells.


Choose the line style for the top line of the cell or selected cells.


Shows what line style is selected for the current cell or selected cells. Mixed means more than one line style is selected. Default means the default line style is selected.


Choose the line style for the bottom line of the cell or selected cells.


Choose the line style for the bottom line of the cell or selected cells.


Shows what line style is selected for the current cell or selected cells. Mixed means more than one line style is selected. Default means the default line style is selected.


Choose the line style for the inside lines in a selection of cells. This is grayed if no cells are selected.


Choose the line style for the inside lines in a selection of cells. This is grayed if no cells are selected.


Shows what line style is selected for the current cell or selected cells. Mixed means more than one line style is selected. Default means the default line style is selected.


Choose the line style for the outside lines of a selection of cells.


Choose the line style for the outside lines of a selection of cells.


Shows what line style is selected for the current cell or selected cells. Mixed means more than one line style is selected. Default means the default line style is selected.


Choose a color.


Choose a color.


Select fill options for the current cell or selected cells.


Choose the fill style for the cell or selected cells.


Choose the fill style for the cell or selected cells.


Shows what fill style is selected for the current cell or selected cells. Mixed means more than one fill style is selected. Default means the default fill style is selected.


Choose the foreground color for the fill style.


Choose the foreground color for the fill style.


Choose the background color for the fill style.


Choose the background color for the fill style.


Lets you preview line and fill options for the active cell.


Create or edit border, line, and fill styles.


Choose border options for the current table.


Choose the border style for the current table.


Choose the border style for the current table.


Shows what border style is selected for the current table.


Choose the border color for the current table.


Choose the border color for the current table.


Customize the border style for the current table.


Choose fill options for the current table.


Choose the primary fill pattern for the current table.


Choose the primary fill pattern for the current table.


Shows what fill style is selected.


Choose the foreground color for the primary fill style in the current table.


Choose the foreground color for the primary fill style in the current table.


Choose the background color for the primary fill style in the current table.


Choose the background color for the primary fill style in the current table.


Specify the number of rows or columns you want the fill style applied to.


Specify the number of rows or columns you want the fill style applied to.


Choose line options for the current table.


Choose the line style for all lines in the current table.


Choose the line style for all lines in the current table.


Shows what table line style is selected.


Choose the color for all lines in the current table.


Choose the color for all lines in the current table.


Choose alternating fill options for the current table.


Choose to have alternating fill in rows, columns, or both.


Choose to have alternating fill in rows, columns, or both.


Select the alternating fill style for the current table.


Select the alternating fill style for the current table.


Select the alternating fill style for the current table.


Select the foreground color for the alternating fill style in the current table.


Select the foreground color for the alternating fill style in the current table.


Select the background color for the alternating fill style in the current table.


Select the background color for the alternating fill style in the current table.


Specify the number of rows or columns you want the fill style applied to.


Specify the number of rows or columns you want the fill style applied to.


Lets you preview border, line and fill options for the table.


Apply the current settings to all new tables when they are created.


Create or edit border, line, and fill styles.


Graphics boxes, lines, borders, and fill come with a predefined style (appearance). You can customize a style for use one time, or you can create a style for use with other graphics.


Defines the caption, position, size, border/fill, and settings used for a graphic image.


Defines the line that surrounds paragraphs, columns, pages, graphics, or drop caps.


Defines the line color, pattern, thickness, and spacing, for lines used in borders, tables, and graphics lines.


Defines the background shading, color, and pattern for a fill style that can be used for paragraphs, columns, pages, tables, and graphics.


Displays the box styles associated with the project template, both predefined styles and any you have created.


Displays the box styles associated with the project template, both predefined styles and any you have created.


Choose a location for the displayed styles. Styles are associated with the default project template unless you specify a different location.


Choose a location for the displayed styles. Styles are associated with the default project template unless you specify a different location.


Displays border, line, and fill styles.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Create a new style and add it to the list of styles for the selected template location.


Change the selected graphics style. The change applies to all occurrences of the style in the current and future documents. To update existing documents, you must copy the style into the template of each document.


Copy, delete, reset, rename, retrieve, or save styles.


Give the style a short name to help you identify it in the list of styles.


Create a line style.


Choose a color from the palette to change the color of the line.


Choose a color from the palette to change the color of the line.


Choose a predefined line pattern or create a customized line pattern by adjusting dash and space lengths.


Choose a predefined line pattern or create a customized line pattern by adjusting dash and space lengths.


Specify the width of the line.


Specify the width of the line.


Specify the amount of space between the line and the text below it.


Specify the amount of space between the line and the text below it.


Create a line style.


Adds another line (the same style as the current line) next to the current line.


Removes the line that has an arrow pointing to it in the box above.


After you add another line, you can move the arrow up to choose the line you want to edit or delete.


After you add another line, you can move the arrow down to choose the line you want to edit or delete.


Enable to make the corners of wavy lines squared.


Enable to make the corners of wavy lines pointed.


Lets you specify the line width of wavy lines.


Lets you specify the line width of wavy lines.


Shows how the line style will display.


Give the style a short name to help you identify it in the list of styles.


Edit a line style.


Choose a color from the palette to change the color of the line.


Choose a color from the palette to change the color of the line.


Choose a predefined line pattern or create a customized line pattern by adjusting dash and space lengths.


Choose a predefined line pattern or create a customized line pattern by adjusting dash and space lengths.


Specify the width of the line.


Specify the width of the line.


Specify the amount of space between the line and the text below it.


Specify the amount of space between the line and the text below it.


Edit a line style.


Enable to make the corners of wavy lines squared.


Enable to make the corners of wavy lines pointed.


Lets you specify the line width of wavy lines.


Lets you specify the line width of wavy lines.


Shows how the line style will display.


Adds another line (the same style as the current line) next to the current line.


Removes the line that has an arrow pointing to it in the box above.


After you add another line, you can move the arrow up to choose the line you want to edit.


After you add another line, you can move the arrow down to choose the line you want to edit.


Type a unique name for the style you are creating.


Type a unique name for the style you are creating.


Saves the styles as a separate file. You can retrieve them into new documents. The styles are also stored with the document template.


Retrieves a style file or the styles from another document into the current document. When you do this, all styles in the style file or document are saved with the current document.


Saves the styles as a separate file. You can retrieve them into new documents. The styles are also stored with the document template.


Saves the styles as a separate file. You can retrieve them into new documents. The styles are also stored with the document template.


Give the style a short name to help you identify it in the list of styles.


Give the style a short name to help you identify it in the list of styles.


Defines the line that surrounds paragraphs, columns, pages, graphics, or drop caps.


Enable the box sides you want to change. The Separator option is available only for paragraph and column borders. It inserts a horizontal line between paragraphs or a vertical line between columns.


Enable the box sides you want to change. The Separator option is available only for paragraph and column borders. It inserts a horizontal line between paragraphs or a vertical line between columns.


Enable the box sides you want to change. The Separator option is available only for paragraph and column borders. It inserts a horizontal line between paragraphs or a vertical line between columns.


Enable the box sides you want to change. The Separator option is available only for paragraph and column borders. It inserts a horizontal line between paragraphs or a vertical line between columns.


Enable the box sides you want to change. The Separator option is available only for paragraph and column borders. It inserts a horizontal line between paragraphs or a vertical line between columns.


Choose a line style for the border. To use a style not on the palette or list, click Line styles.


Choose a line style for the border. To use a style not on the palette or list, click Line styles.


Defines the line that surrounds paragraphs, columns, pages, graphics, or drop caps.


Choose a color from the palette. Enable the Use line style color check box if you want the line to be the color of the current line style.


Choose a color from the palette. Enable the Use line style color check box if you want the line to be the color of the current line style.


Specify a radius for rounded border corners. The higher the number the more rounded the corner.


Specify a radius for rounded border corners. The higher the number the more rounded the corner.


Illustrates how the border will look as you change the style.


Defines the line that surrounds paragraphs, columns, pages, graphics, or drop caps.


Specify the distance between the border and the inside contents. Enable the Show spacing check box to preview the distance.


Specify the distance between the border and the inside contents. Enable the Show spacing check box to preview the distance.


Specify the distance between the border and the surrounding contents. Enable the Show spacing check box to preview the distance.


Specify the distance between the border and the surrounding contents. Enable the Show spacing check box to preview the distance.


Enable this option to use standard spacing between the border and the inside contents and between the border and the surrounding contents. Enable the Show spacing check box to see the results.


View the inside and outside spacing width in the Preview box above.


Defines the line that surrounds paragraphs, columns, pages, graphics, or drop caps.


Choose the corner of the box where the drop shadow should display.


Choose the color for the shadow behind the border.


Specify how thick the shadow behind the border should be.


Enable to choose a height for a drop shadow.


Lets you choose a custom height for a drop shadow.


Lets you choose a custom height for a drop shadow.


Create, edit, or retrieve a line style.


Displays the box styles associated with the template, both predefined styles and any you have created.


Displays the box styles associated with the template, both predefined styles and any you have created.


Displays the box styles associated with the template, both predefined styles and any you have created.


Choose a location for the displayed styles. Styles are associated with the default template unless you specify a different location.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Create a new style and add it to the list of styles for the selected template location.


Change the selected graphics style. The change applies to all occurrences of the style in the current and future documents. To update existing documents, you must copy the style into the template of each document.


Copy, delete, reset, rename, retrieve, or save styles.


Inserts columns or rows in the table.


Inserts columns in the table.


Specify the number of columns in the table.


Inserts rows in the table.


Specify the number of rows in the table.


Inserts rows or columns before or after the cursor.


Inserts rows or columns before the cursor.


Inserts rows or columns after the cursor.


Insert columns or rows in the current table.


Shows the number of columns in the current table.


Shows the number of columns in the current table.


Shows the number of rows in the current table.


Shows the number of rows in the current table.


Inserts columns without changing the widths of any existing table columns.


Specify the number of columns to delete.


Specify the number of columns to delete.


Specify the number of rows to delete.


Specify the number of rows to delete.


Deletes the contents of the current cell.


Deletes formulas, but leaves formula results.


Deletes a part of the current table.


Displays the number of columns in the current table.


Displays the number of rows in the current table.


Splits the current cell into multiple columns or rows.


Splits the current cell into columns.


Specify a number of columns.


Splits the current cell into rows.


Specify a number of rows.


Converts cell contents into text, separating each cell contents by the delimiter you choose.


Separates cell contents with commas.


Separates cell contents with hard returns, placing the contents in separate paragraphs.


Separates cell contents with tabs.


Separates cell contents with a user-defined delimiter.


Converts text into a merge data file.


Converts the table cell contents of the first row into field names and assigns the cell contents of the remaining rows as values for those variables.


Identifies whether the item is a table or floating cell.


Lists the names in the selected table.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Name a cell, column, row, or range of cells.


Edit the name of a table, floating cell, row, column, cell, or range of cells.


Deletes the name of a table cell, range, row, or column. You cannot delete the names of tables or floating cells.


Moves the cursor to the table, floating cell, or table component you have selected in the list.


Insert a table component name into a formula.


Type a name for a cell, range, row, or column.


Applies the name to the cell or range of cells you enabled.


Applies the name to the row where the cursor is located.


Applies the name to the column where the cursor is located.


Uses the text in the current cell to name a row, column, the cell to the right, or the cell below. If you choose multiple cells, you can give adjacent columns, rows, or cells the same name.


Uses text from the current cells to name the row.


Uses text from the current cells to name the column.


Uses text from the current cell(s) to name the cell(s) to the right.


Uses text from the current cell(s) to name the cell(s) below.


Lists the address of the table component you are naming.


Automatically calculate all formulas in the current table, floating cell, or in the entire document. You can also turn the automatic calculation off.


Specifies that no automatic calculation will be made to table and floating cell formulas. Associated charts will not be automatically updated.


When enabled, automatically calculates formulas in the current table or floating cell. This happens when you move the cursor out of a cell or insert a formula using the Table formula toolbar.


When enabled, automatically calculates formulas in all tables or floating cells in the document. This happens when you move the cursor out of a cell or insert a formula using the Table formula toolbar.


Enable this check box to update any charts associated with tables each time the tables are calculated. An automatic calculation mode must be selected.


Calculates all formulas in the current table or floating cell.


Calculates all formulas in all tables and floating cells in the current document.


Displays the address of the current cell. The current cell's formula will be copied.


Displays the address of the current cell. The current cell's formula will be copied.


Specify where you want the formula copied.


Specify where you want the formula copied.


Specify where you want the formula copied.


Specify where you want the formula copied.


Specify how many times you want the formula copied.


Specify how many times you want the formula copied.


Select a border style for the left border of the current cell or selected cells.


Select a border style for the left border of the current cell or selected cells.


Select a border style for the right border of the current cell or selected cells.


Select a border style for the right border of the current cell or selected cells.


Select a border style for the top border of the current cell or selected cells.


Select a border style for the top border of the current cell or selected cells.


Select a border style for the bottom border of the current cell or selected cells.


Select a border style for the bottom border of the current cell or selected cells.


Select a border style for the inside borders of two or more selected cells.


Select a border style for the inside borders of two or more selected cells.


Select a border style for the outside border of the current cell or selected cells.


Select a border style for the outside border of the current cell or selected cells.


Select a fill style for the current cell or selected cells.


Select a fill style for the current cell or selected cells.


Select a numeric format for the current cell or selected cells.


Select a numeric format for the current cell or selected cells.


Displays the Properties for table format dialog box, in which you can make formatting changes for a cell, column, row, or entire table.


Displays either the Insert columns/rows dialog box or the Delete dialog box, in which you can make changes to table size and content.


Select whether to size table columns to accommodate text or to make all column widths equal.


Joins selected cells.


Splits the current cell or selected cells into multiple rows or columns.


Select the type of table functions you want listed in the list box.


Select the type of table functions you want listed in the list box.


Select the table function you want to insert.


Select the table function you want to insert.


Gives a short description of the selected table function.


Use a detailed name for the document that is longer than or different from the document's filename.


Use a detailed name for the document that is longer than or different from the document's filename.


The date you created the document.


Provides varied information about the current document. Type or edit information in any of the text boxes.


Provides varied information about the current document. Type or edit information in any of the text boxes.


Provides varied information about the current document. Type or edit information in any of the text boxes.


Provides varied information about the current document. Type or edit information in any of the text boxes.


Provides varied information about the current document. Type or edit information in any of the text boxes.


Provides varied information about the current document. Type or edit information in any of the text boxes.


Provides varied information about the current document. Type or edit information in any of the text boxes.


Provides varied information about the current document. Type or edit information in any of the text boxes.


Provides varied information about the current document. Type or edit information in any of the text boxes.


Provides varied information about the current document. Type or edit information in any of the text boxes.


Provides varied information about the current document. Type or edit information in any of the text boxes.


Provides varied information about the current document. Type or edit information in any of the text boxes.


Provides varied information about the current document. Type or edit information in any of the text boxes.


Provides varied information about the current document. Type or edit information in any of the text boxes.


Provides varied information about the current document. Type or edit information in any of the text boxes.


Provides varied information about the current document. Type or edit information in any of the text boxes.


Provides varied information about the current document. Type or edit information in any of the text boxes.


Provides varied information about the current document. Type or edit information in any of the text boxes.


Provides varied information about the current document. Type or edit information in any of the text boxes.


Provides varied information about the current document. Type or edit information in any of the text boxes.


Provides varied information about the current document. Type or edit information in any of the text boxes.


Provides varied information about the current document. Type or edit information in any of the text boxes.


Provides varied information about the current document. Type or edit information in any of the text boxes.


Provides varied information about the current document. Type or edit information in any of the text boxes.


Provides varied information about the current document. Type or edit information in any of the text boxes.


Provides varied information about the current document. Type or edit information in any of the text boxes.


Provides varied information about the current document. Type or edit information in any of the text boxes.


Provides varied information about the current document. Type or edit information in any of the text boxes.


Provides varied information about the current document. Type or edit information in any of the text boxes.


Provides varied information about the current document. Type or edit information in any of the text boxes.


Provides varied information about the current document. Type or edit information in any of the text boxes.


Provides varied information about the current document. Type or edit information in any of the text boxes.


Scroll up or down to view, type, or edit information in any of the text boxes.


Customize the fields of the document summary.


Print the summary information, delete it from the document, fill in some of the summary fields by extracting information from the document, or save the summary as a separate file.


Provides information about the document.


Provides information about the document.


Reports character count information for the current document.


Reports character count information for the current document.


Reports word count information for the current document.


Reports word count information for the current document.


Reports sentence count information for the current document.


Reports sentence count information for the current document.


Reports line count information for the current document.


Reports line count information for the current document.


Reports paragraph count information for the current document.


Reports paragraph count information for the current document.


Reports page count information for the current document.


Reports page count information for the current document.


Reports average word length information for the current document.


Reports average word length information for the current document.


Reports average words per sentence information for the current document.


Reports average words per sentence information for the current document.


Reports average words per sentence information for the current document.


Reports maximum words per sentence information for the current document.


Click fields to include in the Select fields list or to remove from the list.


Click fields to include in the Selected fields list or to remove from the list.


Lists the fields currently included in the summary.


Lists the fields currently included in the summary.


Remove all items from the Selected fields list.


Specifies that all new documents use this summary configuration as the default.


Highlight a field and drag it up or down the list to change the display order.


Specify the name of the template macro to play, record, edit, or save.


Shows which template contains the macros listed below.


Lists the template macros contained in the template specified in Location.


If you are recording a template macro, this button starts template macro record mode to record commands to the specified template macro. If you are playing a template macro, this button plays the specified template macro. If you are editing a template macro, this button retrieves the specified template macro and activates the Template macro toolbar. If you are saving a template macro, this button saves the template macro.


Deletes the specified template macro.


Specify the current or default template as the location of the template macros to play, record, edit, or save.


Use the options to specify the location of the template macro you want to play or record.


Specify the current template to record a template macro to or play a template macro from.


Specify the default template to record a template macro to or play a template macro from.


Specify whether to use the current or default template as the default location to play template macros from or record template macros to.


Lists Search, Merge, Date, and other macro codes.


Lists Search, Merge, Date, and other macro codes.


Inserts the selected macro code into your macro.


If someone has asked you to edit the document, click to choose a color to mark your changes and mark the changes you make. You can also type a user name and initials if this has not been specified.


If someone has asked you to edit the document, click to choose a color to mark your changes and mark the changes you make. You can also type a user name and initials if this has not been specified.


If you wrote the document, click to see the document with all the changes that others have made. You can accept or reject the changes. You can also type a user name and initials if this has not been specified.


If you wrote the document, click to see the document with all the changes that others have made. You can accept or reject the changes. You can also type a user name and initials if this has not been specified.


Enable the check box to place a marker in margins next to edited text.


Enable this option to place a marker in the left margin.


Enable this option to alternate markers in the left and right margins.


Enable this option to place a marker in the right margin.


Choose a marking character.


Choose a marking character.


Click Reviewer or Author to use the Document Review toolbar.


Type a name. The name is saved in the environment settings. It identifies the reviewer or author. If you are on a network, the user name and initials must be the same as those used on the network.


Type a name. The name is saved in the environment settings. It identifies the reviewer or author. If you are on a network, the user name and initials must be the same as those used on the network.


Type your initials. These initials are saved in the environment settings. They are used to identify changes to the document. If you are on a network, the initials must be the same as those used on the network.


Type your initials. These initials are saved in the environment settings. They are used to identify changes to the document. If you are on a network, the initials must be the same as those used on the network.


You can open the backup document and continue working on it, rename it so that you can work on it later, or delete the backup document.


You can open the backup document and continue working on it, rename it so that you can work on it later, or delete the backup document.


Open the backup file in WordPerfect.


Rename the backup document and start WordPerfect.


Delete the backup file and start WordPerfect.


Displays the path and filename of the active document which you are comparing.


Displays the path and filename of the active document which you are comparing.


Choose the path and filename of the document with which you are comparing the active document.


Choose the path and filename of the document with which you are comparing the active document.


Enable an option to show comparison results in a new document or the current document.


Enable to show comparison results in a new document.


Enable to show comparison results in the active document.


Lets you specify the user name and user initials. Performs document compare and then allows the user to review and edit additions or deletions.


Lets you compare the current and specified documents.


Opens the Compare-then-review-settings dialog box, which allows you to set document compare and review settings, and the Document compare settings dialog box, which allows you to set document compare settings.


Enable an option which allows you to compare document text word-by-word or character-by-character.


Enable to compare document text word-by-word.


Enable to compare document text character-by-character.


Lets you specify a character or characters that you can use to enclose text which you want to be omitted from document comparison. Because you must repeat the same character at the beginning and end of the omission, you cannot use open and close brackets to enclose text.


Displays the character or characters that you specified to enclose text to be omitted from the document comparison.


Specify headers and footers, comments, and subdocuments to be included in the document comparison.


Enable to include headers and footers in the document comparison.


Enable to include document comments in the document comparison.


Enable to include subdocuments in the document comparison.


Enable an option to insert a summary of your comparison at the beginning or end of the compare results, or to prevent WordPerfect from creating a summary at all.


Enable to prevent WordPerfect from creating a summary of the compare results.


Enable to insert a summary of your comparison at the beginning of the compare results.


Enable to insert a summary of your comparison at the end of the compare results.


Enable an option to show a few words before and after the changes that appear in the list of changes in the compare results, to show only the changes that appear in the list of changes in the compare results, or to prevent WordPerfect from creating a list of changes from the compare results.


Enable to prevent WordPerfect from creating a list of changes from the compare results.


Enable to show a few words before and after the changes that appear in the list of changes in the compare results.


Enable to show only the changes that appear in the list of changes in the compare results.


Enable a check box to change the appearance of compared text that has been inserted.


Enable to darken the font face of compared text.


Enable to slant the font face of compared text.


Enable to put a continuous line underneath text of compared text.


Enable to underline compared text with two continuous lines.


Enable to make compared text the color chosen in the color palette.


Lets you choose a color for compared text.


Lets you choose a color for compared text.


Enable an option to enclose inserted or deleted text in brackets, slashes, or nothing.


Enable to prevent WordPerfect from enclosing inserted or moved text in brackets.


Enable to enclose inserted or moved text in square brackets.


Enable to enclose inserted or moved text in curly brackets.


Enable to enclose inserted or moved text in slashes.


Enable to enclose inserted or moved text in angle brackets.


Displays the appearance and color of moved, inserted, or deleted text.


Enable a check box to change the appearance of compared text that has been deleted.


Enable to darken the font face of compared text.


Enable to slant the font face of compared text.


Enable to put a continuous line underneath text of compared text.


Enable to underline compared text with two continuous lines.


Enable to make compared text the color chosen in the color palette.


Enable to place a horizontal line through deleted text.


Lets you choose a color for the compared text from the color palette.


Lets you choose a color for the compared text from the color palette.


Enable an option to enclose inserted or deleted text in brackets, slashes, or nothing.


Enable to prevent WordPerfect from enclosing inserted or moved text in brackets.


Enable to enclose inserted or moved text in square brackets.


Enable to enclose inserted or moved text in curly brackets.


Enable to enclose inserted or moved text in slashes.


Enable to enclose inserted or moved text in angle brackets.


Enable an option to show all deleted text, or to represent deleted text with a character or with ellipses. You can also prevent WordPerfect from showing deleted text.


Enable to show all deleted text.


Enable to show passages of deleted text with ellipses.


Enable to prevent WordPerfect from showing deleted text.


Enable to represent deleted text with a character.


Lets you specify a character to represent deleted text.


Displays the appearance and color of moved, inserted, or deleted text.


Enable an option to display moved text in a new location or in both locations. You can also prevent moved text from showing.


Enable to display moved text in both locations.


Enable to display moved text in a new location.


Enable to prevent moved text from showing.


Lets you choose a color from the color palette.


Lets you choose a color from the color palette.


Displays the appearance and color of moved, inserted, or deleted text.


Enable a redline option specific to your printer, or enable an option which uses the redlining method to mark redlined text in the left or right margin, or in alternating margins.


Uses the redlining method specific to your printer (usually a shaded background).


Uses the redline character to mark redlined text in the left margin.


Marks redlined text in the left margin for even-numbered pages and in the right margin for odd-numbered pages.


Uses the redline character to mark redlined text in the right margin.


Type the character you want to mark redlined text. Not available for printer-dependent method. Use CTRL+W to insert a special character.


Type the character you want to mark redlined text. Not available for printer-dependent method. Use CTRL+W to insert a special character.


Displays the appearance and color of moved, inserted, or deleted text.


Enable an option which allows you to compare document text word-by-word or character-by-character.


Enable to compare document text word-by-word.


Enable to compare document text character-by-character.


Lets you specify a character or characters that you can use to enclose text which you want to be omitted from document comparison.


Lets you specify a character or characters that you can use to enclose text which you want to be omitted from document comparison. Because you must repeat the same character at the beginning and end of the omission, you cannot use open and close brackets to enclose text.


Displays the character or characters that you specified to enclose text to be omitted from the document comparison.


Specify headers and footers, comments, and subdocuments to be included in the document comparison.


Enable to include headers and footers in the document comparison.


Enable to include document comments in the document comparison.


Enable to include subdocuments in the document comparison.


Mark or unmark all the documents in the list.


Enable to return the document to its appearance before you compared it.


Enable to keep the redline markings for added and moved text but remove strikeout (deleted) text.


Enable to remove only the markings that resulted from deletions in your document comparison.


Enable to remove all markings that resulted from your document comparison.


Displays the name of the author of the document.


Displays the name of the author of the document.


Displays the comment user's initials.


Displays the comment user's initials.


Displays the color of the comment bubble chosen by the user.


Displays the color of the comment bubble chosen by the user.


Shows the creation date and time of the comment bubble.


Shows the creation date and time of the comment bubble.


 Specify the appearance of a generated index and whether to include concordance entries. Select a style to display numbers without dot leaders, in parentheses, or after a comma or space, or select a style to hide page numbers from the list box list.


Select a style to display numbers without dot leaders, in parentheses, or after a comma or space; or hide page numbers.


Select a style to display numbers without dot leaders, in parentheses, or after a comma or space; or hide page numbers.


Customize index page numbers. For example, add chapter or volume numbers or total page count to the page numbers.


Shows how the index will look when you generate it with the current settings.


Group consecutive page numbers instead of listing them separately. For example, 4-6 instead of 4, 5, 6.


Displays the names of the current heading and subheading styles. Click Change to select a different style or create your own.


This is the name of the current heading style. Click Change to select a different style or create your own.


This is the name of the current heading style. Click Change to select a different style or create your own.


This is the name of the current subheading style. Click Change to select a different style or create your own.


This is the name of the current subheading style. Click Change to select a different style or create your own.


Select a different style or create your own.


Specify the appearance of a generated index and whether to include concordance entries. Select a style to display numbers without dot leaders, in parentheses, or after a comma or space, or select a style to hide page numbers from the list box list.


To create a concordance or include concordance entries in the index, specify the concordance file you want to use.


To create a concordance or include concordance entries in the index, specify the concordance file you want to use.


Select to associate features with the toolbars, menus, or keyboards in the new template.


Select to associate triggers with template macros.


Lists the features you can associate with toolbars, menus, or keyboards, or lists the triggers you can associate with template macros.


Lists the template macros that you have created in that template or copied to it. Select the template macro to which you want to associate the selected trigger.


Lists the template macros that you have created in that template or copied to it. Select the template macro to which you want to associate the selected trigger.


Select the menu to which you want to associate the selected feature.


Select the menu to which you want to associate the selected feature.


Select the keyboard to which you want to associate the selected feature.


Select the keyboard to which you want to associate the selected feature.


Choose a character map to use for the current document.


Displays the current character map.


Displays the size of the document, in bytes.


Disables this dialog box for all subsequent sessions of WordPerfect.


Set the number of the graphics box you want to edit. The boxes in the document are ordered in the number they appear.


Set the number of the graphics box you want to edit. The boxes in the document are ordered in the number they appear.


This box lists the different graphics box counter types. Each type of box has a unique counter type. For example, to search only for text boxes, select the text counter type.


This box lists the different graphics box counter types. Each type of box has a unique counter type. For example, to search only for text boxes, select the text counter type.


This box lists the different graphics box counter types. Each type of box has a unique counter type. For example, to search only for text boxes, select the text counter type.


Enables the WordPerfect 5.1 blue scheme.


Lists all the sound clips that have been inserted in the document.


Lets you play, rewind, stop, or fast-forward the sound clip. If the options are grayed, no sound clips display in the list or no sound device is detected.


Lets you play, rewind, stop, or fast-forward the sound clip. If the options are grayed, no sound clips display in the list or no sound device is detected.


Lets you play, rewind, stop, or fast-forward the sound clip. If the options are grayed, no sound clips display in the list or no sound device is detected.


Lets you play, rewind, stop, or fast-forward the sound clip. If the options are grayed, no sound clips display in the list or no sound device is detected.


Lets you play, rewind, stop, or fast-forward the sound clip. If the options are grayed, no sound clips display in the list or no sound device is detected.


Displays the elapsed time as the sound clip is played.


Displays the elapsed time as the sound clip is played.


Displays the total time length of the sound clip.


Displays the total time length of the sound clip.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Adds a sound clip to your document.


Records a sound clip using Microsoft Sound Recorder.


Specify the name of the sound clip.


Displays the Sound clip property bar. If the options are grayed, no sound clips display in the list or no sound device is detected.


Deletes the sound clip from the list and the document.


Saves the sound clip as a separate file, if the sound clip is stored in the document.


Click to display an overview of the dialog box.


title bar needs a context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


Displays a descriptive name for the sound clip. You can edit the name.


Displays a descriptive name for the sound clip. You can edit the name.


Specify the filename of the sound clip you want to insert.


Specify the filename of the sound clip you want to insert.


Doesn't store the sound file as part of the document. This helps keep the document size small.


Stores the file as part of the document. This increases the file size of the document.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


title bar needs context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


Select spreadsheet, database, or delimited text file for the imported object.


Select spreadsheet, database, or delimited text file for the imported object.


Import the information as text, or into a table structure or merge data file.


Import the information as text, or into a table structure or merge data file.


Specify the name of the file to import.


Specify the name of the file to import.


Specify the name of a range to import or link to.


Specify the name of a range to import or link to.


Specify the name of a range to import or link to.


Opens the Define selection conditions dialog box. Lets you import specific records by defining selection criteria.


Lets you choose the fields to import from the source database file.


Lets you choose the fields to import from the source database file.


Enable to use database field names as headings.


Enable to automatically size table columns to fit data after import.


Lets you choose the field and record delimiters.


Lets you choose field delimiters.


Lets you choose field delimiters.


Lets you choose field delimiters.


Lets you choose record delimiters.


Lets you choose record delimiters.


Lets you choose record delimiters.


Lets you protect and remove characters during the conversion.


Encloses the field data between characters. Information between these characters is protected during the conversion.


Encloses the field data between characters. Information between these characters is protected during the conversion.


Encloses the field data between characters. Information between these characters is protected during the conversion.


Lets you identify characters that can be stripped from the incoming data.


Lets you identify characters that can be stripped from the incoming data.


Lets you identify characters that can be stripped from the incoming data.


Enable to use the data in the first record as fields.


Field - db not accessible in test build

Lets you identify the name or number of the fields where you want to specify conditions. If you specify more than one field, records on that horizontal line must meet each condition in each field.


Condition

Specify a single value, list, or range. You can also exclude values and use wildcard characters. If you specify more than one condition vertically, records that meet any of the conditions will be used.


Single value text

Include all records which match the specified field value. For example, type “Smith” in a Last name field to include only records with the last name of Smith.


List of values text

Include all records which match one of the specified field values. For example, type “Utah;Hawaii” in a State field to include only records from Utah or Hawaii.


Range of values text

Include all records which fall within the range of specified field values. For example, type “Ohio-Tennessee” in a State field to include all entries which fall alphabetically between and including Ohio and Tennessee.


Exclude values text

Include al records except the ones specified. For example, type “!Alaska;Hawaii” to include all states except Alaska and Hawaii.


Wildcards text

Type a wildcard character when you want to indicate multiple character values. For example, “?” is a placeholder for one character of any value.


*=zero or more characters text

Type “*” as a placeholder in a text string when you want to represent zero or more characters.


?=one character text

Type “?” as a placeholder in any text string when you want that character to represent any single character.


OK button

Exit the dialog box and save any changes.


Cancel button

Exit the dialog box without saving any changes.


Clear button

Deletes all the conditions you have specified.


Example button

See more examples of conditions you can specify.


Help button

Display information about the dialog box.


Click Example button to open Examples of selecting records db.

Background and More button and Help button

Shows examples of values you can type. The math values you type determine which records to include.


Close button

Close the dialog box and save all changes.


Click the More button to open the Examples of selecting records db

background.

Shows examples of values you can type. The math values you type determine which records to include.


Close button

Close the dialog box and save all changes.


Check Insert > SS/DB > Update db for context strings


title bar

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


background


Update the information in all the spreadsheet and database links each time you open the document in WordPerfect.


Display icons to indicate where the link begins and ends.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


title bar

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


Background

Lists counter definitions. You can create and modify counters and control how and when the number changes.


Lists the types of counters available. The list includes five predefined system counters that number boxes used in the Graphics and Equations features.


Displays the initial value for the counter.


Choose a counter type to insert. You can change but not delete the five predefined WordPerfect counters for boxes.


A dot next to a counter in the list indicates that it is a system counter. You cannot edit system counters.


Lists counter definitions. You can create, modify, and delete counters. You can also control how and when the number changes.


Changes the numbering method and value of the selected counter.


Define your own style of counter.


Change the counter selected in the list.


Choose a counter in the list, and delete it. You cannot delete the five WordPerfect box counters.


Change the value of the selected counter. For example, you can change a counter value from 1 to 7 or from A to D.


Increases the value of the selected counter by 1.


Decreases the value of the selected counter by 1.


Displays the current value of the selected counter at the cursor.


Increases the value of the selected counter by 1, and displays that value at the cursor.


Decreases the value of the selected counter by 1, and displays that value at the cursor.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


title bar - needs context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


background - needs context string

Define your own style of counter.


The name you type displays in the list of counters so you can identify and use it.


Type a name to identify the counter. You cannot edit the name of system counters.


Sets the type of numbering to use for a counter that has only one level of numbering.


Choose the type of numbering you want for a single-level counter.


Set the number of levels for numbering a counter (as in a four-level counter with the format I.A.i.a.).


Set the number of levels for numbering a counter (as in a four-level counter with the format I.A.i.a.).


Create level names and choose numbering style.


Name the levels in your counter definition. They are listed in order of how the numbers will display.


Lets you type a name and choose a numbering style for the first level counter.


Type the name used to identify the first level counter.


Lets you type a name and choose a numbering style for the second level counter.


Type the name used to identify the second level counter.


Lets you type a name and choose a numbering style for the third level counter.


Type the name used to identify the third level counter.


Lets you type a name and choose a numbering style for the fourth level counter.


Type the name used to identify the fourth level counter.


Lets you type a name and choose a numbering style for the fifth level counter.


Type the name used to identify the fifth level counter.


Choose a numbering method for each level of the counter you define.


Choose the type of numbering you want for the first counter level.


Choose the type of numbering you want for the second counter level.


Choose the type of numbering you want for the third counter level.


Choose the type of numbering you want for the fourth counter level.


Choose the type of numbering you want for the fifth counter level.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


title bar needs context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


Displays the name of the counter.


Lets you choose a numbering style for the counter.


Lets you choose a value for the counter.


Lets you choose a numbering style for the counter.


Specify the value you want for this counter. For example, you can change 1 to 6 or A to C.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


title bar needs context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


Displays the name of the counter.


Displays the name of the counter.


Displays the name of the counter level.


Lets you choose a numbering style and value for the first level counter.


Lets you choose a numbering style and value for the first level counter.


Lets you choose a numbering style and value for the second level counter.


Lets you choose a numbering style and value for the second level counter.


Lets you choose a numbering style and value for the third level counter.


Lets you choose a numbering style and value for the third level counter.


Lets you choose a numbering style and value for the fourth level counter.


Lets you choose a numbering style and value for the fourth level counter.


Lets you choose a numbering style and value for the fifth level counter.


Lets you choose a numbering style and value for the fifth level counter.


Lets you choose a numbering style for each counter level.


Lets you choose a numbering style for the first level counter.


Lets you choose a numbering style for the second level counter.


Lets you choose a numbering style for the third level counter.


Lets you choose a numbering style for the fourth level counter.


Lets you choose a numbering style for the fifth level counter.


Lets you choose a value for each counter level.


Lets you choose a value for the first counter level.


Lets you choose a value for the second counter level.


Lets you choose a value for the third counter level.


Lets you choose a value for the fourth counter level.


Lets you choose a value for the fifth counter level.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


title bar - needs context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


background/Enter … text - needs context string

Lets you create and position a POSTNET bar code.


Type a ZIP code to convert to a bar code. Click OK to insert the bar code in the document.


Type a ZIP code to convert to a bar code. Click OK to insert the bar code in the document.


Lets you position a POSTNET bar code.


Enable to insert a POSTNET bar code at the cursor.


Enable to insert a POSTNET bar code above the address.


Enable to insert a POSTNET bar code below the address.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


title bar - needs context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


background - needs context string

Use Merge to mass-produce letters, envelopes, mailing labels, memos, or other documents. Create a form file, and merge it with a data source such as a data file, address book, database, or keyboard input.


Use Merge to mass-produce letters, envelopes, mailing labels, memos, or other documents. Create a form file, and merge it with a data source such as a data file, address book, database, or keyboard input.


Specify the location of the form file. If you choose File On Disk, specify the folder and filename.


Specify the location of the form file. If you choose File On Disk, specify the folder and filename.


Specify the location of the data source. If you choose File on Disk, specify the folder and filename. If you choose Address Book, specify the address book from the drop-down list.


Specify the location of the data source. If you choose File on Disk, specify the folder and filename. If you choose Address Book, specify the address book from the drop-down list.


Choose the location of the merged file. If you choose File On Disk, specify a folder and filename. If you choose e-mail, specify the field for the e-mail address and the subject line for the merged messages.


Displays the location of the merged file.


Choose the records you want to merge. You can choose records from either a data file or an address book.


Creates an envelope for each merged record. Lets you specify an envelope size, return address, and fields for the mailing addresses.


Use Merge to mass-produce letters, envelopes, mailing labels, memos, or other documents. Create a form file, and merge it with a data source such as a data file, address book, database, or keyboard input.


Specify how you want the merged file or keyboard merge to display.


Reset all envelope settings, output options, and selected records selections.


Merges the specified form document and data source to the selected output.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Type a name for a field. For example, type last name, first name, street address, or city.


Type a name for a field. For example, type last name, first name, street address, or city.


Displays the fields that have been named.


Displays the fields that have been named.


Formats the data in a table; each row is a record; each column is a field. The top row contains the field names or numbers.


To create a data file, you must first name the fields (the smallest units) in the data file. For example, you might name the fields Last Name, First Name, Street Address, and so forth.


Type a field name and add it after the current selection.


Replace the currently selected field name with the name you type.


Delete the currently selected field name.


Moves the selected field up in the Fields used in merge list.


Moves the selected field down in the Fields used in merge list.


Lets you specify how many fields you want to create in the data file. When you do not  name fields, the fields are numbered for you.


Lets you specify how many fields you want to create in the data file. When you do not  name fields, the fields are numbered for you.


title bar needs context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


background needs context string

Specify conditions (math values) or mark the records you want to merge.


Displays the location and name of the current data file. You are choosing records from this file.


Displays the location and name of the current data file. You are choosing records from this file.


Lets you specify a range of record numbers, or lets you specify values in order to choose the records you want to merge.


Lets you mark each record that you want to merge.


Merge a range of records by specifying the first and last record.


Specify the first record number of the range.


Specify the first record number of the range.


Specify the last record number of the range.


Specify the last record number of the range.


Identify the name or number of the fields where you want to specify conditions. If you specify more than one field, records on that horizontal line must meet each condition in each field.


Identify the name or number of the fields where you want to specify conditions. If you specify more than one field, records on that horizontal line must meet each condition in each field.


Identify the name or number of the fields where you want to specify conditions. If you specify more than one field, records on that horizontal line must meet each condition in each field.


Identify the name or number of the fields where you want to specify conditions. If you specify more than one field, records on that horizontal line must meet each condition in each field.


Identify the name or number of the fields where you want to specify conditions. If you specify more than one field, records on that horizontal line must meet each condition in each field.


Identify the name or number of the fields where you want to specify conditions. If you specify more than one field, records on that horizontal line must meet each condition in each field.


Specify a single value, list, or range. You can also exclude values and use wildcard characters. If you specify more than one condition vertically, records that meet any of the conditions will be used.


Specify a single value, list, or range. You can also exclude values and use wildcard characters. If you specify more than one condition vertically, records that meet any of the conditions will be used.


Specify a single value, list, or range. You can also exclude values and use wildcard characters. If you specify more than one condition vertically, records that meet any of the conditions will be used.


Specify a single value, list, or range. You can also exclude values and use wildcard characters. If you specify more than one condition vertically, records that meet any of the conditions will be used.


Specify a single value, list, or range. You can also exclude values and use wildcard characters. If you specify more than one condition vertically, records that meet any of the conditions will be used.


Specify a single value, list, or range. You can also exclude values and use wildcard characters. If you specify more than one condition vertically, records that meet any of the conditions will be used.


Specify a single value, list, or range. You can also exclude values and use wildcard characters. If you specify more than one condition vertically, records that meet any of the conditions will be used.


Specify a single value, list, or range. You can also exclude values and use wildcard characters. If you specify more than one condition vertically, records that meet any of the conditions will be used.


Specify a single value, list, or range. You can also exclude values and use wildcard characters. If you specify more than one condition vertically, records that meet any of the conditions will be used.


Specify a single value, list, or range. You can also exclude values and use wildcard characters. If you specify more than one condition vertically, records that meet any of the conditions will be used.


Specify a single value, list, or range. You can also exclude values and use wildcard characters. If you specify more than one condition vertically, records that meet any of the conditions will be used.


Specify a single value, list, or range. You can also exclude values and use wildcard characters. If you specify more than one condition vertically, records that meet any of the conditions will be used.


Specify a single value, list, or range. You can also exclude values and use wildcard characters. If you specify more than one condition vertically, records that meet any of the conditions will be used.


Specify a single value, list, or range. You can also exclude values and use wildcard characters. If you specify more than one condition vertically, records that meet any of the conditions will be used.


Specify a single value, list, or range. You can also exclude values and use wildcard characters. If you specify more than one condition vertically, records that meet any of the conditions will be used.


Specify a single value, list, or range. You can also exclude values and use wildcard characters. If you specify more than one condition vertically, records that meet any of the conditions will be used.


Include all records which match the specified field value. For example, type "Smith" in a Last Name field to include only records with the last name of Smith.


Include all records which match the specified field value. For example, type "Smith" in a Last Name field to include only records with the last name of Smith.


Include all records which match one of the specified field values. For example, type "Utah;Hawaii" in a State field to include only records from Utah or Hawaii.


Include all records which match one of the specified field values. For example, type "Utah;Hawaii" in a State field to include only records from Utah or Hawaii.


Include all records which fall within the range of specified field values. For example, type "Ohio-Tennessee" in a State field to include all entries which fall alphabetically between and including Ohio and Tennessee.


Include all records which fall within the range of specified field values. For example, type "Ohio-Tennessee" in a State field to include all entries which fall alphabetically between and including Ohio and Tennessee.


Include all records except the ones specified. For example, type "!Alaska;Hawaii" to include all states except Alaska and Hawaii.


Include all records except the ones specified. For example, type "!Alaska;Hawaii" to include all states except Alaska and Hawaii.


Type a wildcard character when you want to indicate multiple character values. For example, "?" is a placeholder for one character of any value.


Type "*" as a placeholder in a text string when you want to represent zero or more characters.


Type "?" as a placeholder in any text string when you want that character to represent any single character.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Deletes all the conditions you have specified.


See more examples of conditions you can specify.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


title bar needs context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


background needs context string

Shows examples of values you can type. The values you type determine which records to include.


Identify the name or number of the fields where you want to specify conditions. If you specify more than one field, records on that horizontal line must meet each condition in each field.


Identify the name or number of the fields where you want to specify conditions. If you specify more than one field, records on that horizontal line must meet each condition in each field.


Identify the name or number of the fields where you want to specify conditions. If you specify more than one field, records on that horizontal line must meet each condition in each field.


Identify the name or number of the fields where you want to specify conditions. If you specify more than one field, records on that horizontal line must meet each condition in each field.


Identify the name or number of the fields where you want to specify conditions. If you specify more than one field, records on that horizontal line must meet each condition in each field.


Identify the name or number of the fields where you want to specify conditions. If you specify more than one field, records on that horizontal line must meet each condition in each field.


Specify a single value, list, or range. You can also exclude values and use wildcard characters. If you specify more than one condition vertically, records that meet any of the conditions will be used.


Specify a single value, list, or range. You can also exclude values and use wildcard characters. If you specify more than one condition vertically, records that meet any of the conditions will be used.


Specify a single value, list, or range. You can also exclude values and use wildcard characters. If you specify more than one condition vertically, records that meet any of the conditions will be used.


Specify a single value, list, or range. You can also exclude values and use wildcard characters. If you specify more than one condition vertically, records that meet any of the conditions will be used.


Specify a single value, list, or range. You can also exclude values and use wildcard characters. If you specify more than one condition vertically, records that meet any of the conditions will be used.


Specify a single value, list, or range. You can also exclude values and use wildcard characters. If you specify more than one condition vertically, records that meet any of the conditions will be used.


Specify a single value, list, or range. You can also exclude values and use wildcard characters. If you specify more than one condition vertically, records that meet any of the conditions will be used.


Specify a single value, list, or range. You can also exclude values and use wildcard characters. If you specify more than one condition vertically, records that meet any of the conditions will be used.


Specify a single value, list, or range. You can also exclude values and use wildcard characters. If you specify more than one condition vertically, records that meet any of the conditions will be used.


Specify a single value, list, or range. You can also exclude values and use wildcard characters. If you specify more than one condition vertically, records that meet any of the conditions will be used.


Specify a single value, list, or range. You can also exclude values and use wildcard characters. If you specify more than one condition vertically, records that meet any of the conditions will be used.


Specify a single value, list, or range. You can also exclude values and use wildcard characters. If you specify more than one condition vertically, records that meet any of the conditions will be used.


Specify a single value, list, or range. You can also exclude values and use wildcard characters. If you specify more than one condition vertically, records that meet any of the conditions will be used.


Specify a single value, list, or range. You can also exclude values and use wildcard characters. If you specify more than one condition vertically, records that meet any of the conditions will be used.


Specify a single value, list, or range. You can also exclude values and use wildcard characters. If you specify more than one condition vertically, records that meet any of the conditions will be used.


Specify a single value, list, or range. You can also exclude values and use wildcard characters. If you specify more than one condition vertically, records that meet any of the conditions will be used.


Describes records that will be merged. The math values you type determine which records to include.


Describes records that will be merged. The math values you type determine which records to include.


Describes records that will be merged. The math values you type determine which records to include.


Describes records that will be merged. The math values you type determine which records to include.


Describes records that will be merged. The math values you type determine which records to include.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Shows examples of values you can type. The values you type determine which records to include.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


title bar needs context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


background needs separate context string from Close button

Shows examples of values you can type. The math values you type determine which records to include.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


title bar - needs context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


Prompts you to type in the merged document.


Prompts you to type in the merged document.


title bar - needs context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


Background - needs context string

Associate either a data file or an address book with the form file you are creating. When you associate a data source, the form file is able to reference that source for the rest of the merge.


Specify a data file to associate with the form file you are creating. Enable the Associate A Data File option, and click the folder icon to choose the file.


Specify a data file to associate with the form file you are creating. Enable the Associate A Data File option, and click the folder icon to choose the file.


Enable this option once you have specified the address book you want to associate with the form file you are creating. Then choose an available book from the drop-down list that displays.


Choose an ODBC data source to associate with the form file you are creating. Click this option, and click Select ODBC Data Source to choose the data source.


Opens the Select ODBC data source dialog box. You can choose the location of the data source and data.


Choose No Association if you are creating a keyboard merge, or if you do not wish to associate a data file at this time.


Lets you associate a data file, an address book, or ODBC data source with the form file you are creating. When you associate a data source, the form file is able to reference that source for the rest of the merge.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


title bar

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


data source text and list box

Choose the location of the ODBC database that contains the data you want to use in your merge.


table text and list box

Choose the location of the table within the database that contains the merge data.


title bar - needs context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


Specify how you want the merged file to display.


Check this option if you want the document produced for each record in the data file to be separated by a page break.


Specify how many copies you want for each merged record.


Specify how many copies you want for each merged record.


Remove or leave a line in the merged document when the corresponding field in the data file is empty.


Remove or leave a line in the merged document when the corresponding field in the data file is empty.


Specify how you want the merged file or keyboard merge to display.


Show merge codes, hide merge codes, or show them as markers during a keyboard merge.


Show merge codes, hide merge codes, or show them as markers during a keyboard merge.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


title bar - needs context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


Type a field name or number, even though no data source is currently associated with this form file. You can create the association to a data source now or later. However, the field names or numbers you type now must correspond to the fields in the data source you associate later.


Type a field name or number, even though no data source is currently associated with this form file. You can create the association to a data source now or later. However, the field names or numbers you type now must correspond to the fields in the data source you associate later.


Type a field name or number, even though no data source is currently associated with this form file. You can create the association to a data source now or later. However, the field names or numbers you type now must correspond to the fields in the data source you associate later.


Type a field name or number, even though no data source is currently associated with this form file. You can create the association to a data source now or later. However, the field names or numbers you type now must correspond to the fields in the data source you associate later.


Displays the filename of the associated data file.


Displays the filename of the associated data file.


Lets you insert a field in a form document for a merge.


Lets you insert a field in a form document for a merge.


Choose an available field name. Displayed field names come from the associated data source.


Choose an available field name. Displayed field names come from the associated data source.


Click Insert to add the selected field name at the cursor.


Click Insert and Close to add the selected field name at the cursor and close the dialog box.


Change the associated data source. Specify a data file, or choose the address book you want.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


title bar - needs context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


background needs context string

Lets you insert merge commands in a form document.


Click the merge code you want, and click Insert. If needed, you will be prompted to provide variables, expressions, parameters, or text.


Click the merge code you want, and click Insert. If needed, you will be prompted to provide variables, expressions, parameters, or text.


Insert merge codes in a form document or data file. Merge codes are used to control the output of the merge. For example, you can insert a KEYBOARD command in a form document to prompt you to enter text in the document, and you can insert a BEEP command to sound a beep when the merge encounters a KEYBOARD command.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


title bar needs context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


background needs context string

Lets you type a type for a keyboard command in a merge.


Displays the current code.


Type text associated with the current code or provide additional merge code information. For example, type a message for a prompt, or specify a field name, merge expression, variable, or string.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Type text associated with the current code or provide additional merge code information. For example, type a message for a prompt, or specify a field name, merge expression, variable, or string.


Type text associated with the current code or provide additional merge code information. For example, type a message for a prompt, or specify a field name, merge expression, variable, or string.


Type text associated with the current code or provide additional merge code information. For example, type a message for a prompt, or specify a field name, merge expression, variable, or string.


Type text associated with the current code or provide additional merge code information. For example, type a message for a prompt, or specify a field name, merge expression, variable, or string.


Type text associated with the current code or provide additional merge code information. For example, type a message for a prompt, or specify a field name, merge expression, variable, or string.


Type text associated with the current code or provide additional merge code information. For example, type a message for a prompt, or specify a field name, merge expression, variable, or string.


Type text associated with the current code or provide additional merge code information. For example, type a message for a prompt, or specify a field name, merge expression, variable, or string.


Type text associated with the current code or provide additional merge code information. For example, type a message for a prompt, or specify a field name, merge expression, variable, or string.


Type text associated with the current code or provide additional merge code information. For example, type a message for a prompt, or specify a field name, merge expression, variable, or string.


Type text associated with the current code or provide additional merge code information. For example, type a message for a prompt, or specify a field name, merge expression, variable, or string.


Type text associated with the current code or provide additional merge code information. For example, type a message for a prompt, or specify a field name, merge expression, variable, or string.


Type text associated with the current code or provide additional merge code information. For example, type a message for a prompt, or specify a field name, merge expression, variable, or string.


Type text associated with the current code or provide additional merge code information. For example, type a message for a prompt, or specify a field name, merge expression, variable, or string.


Type text associated with the current code or provide additional merge code information. For example, type a message for a prompt, or specify a field name, merge expression, variable, or string.


Type text associated with the current code or provide additional merge code information. For example, type a message for a prompt, or specify a field name, merge expression, variable, or string.


Type text associated with the current code or provide additional merge code information. For example, type a message for a prompt, or specify a field name, merge expression, variable, or string.


Type text associated with the current code or provide additional merge code information. For example, type a message for a prompt, or specify a field name, merge expression, variable, or string.


Type text associated with the current code or provide additional merge code information. For example, type a message for a prompt, or specify a field name, merge expression, variable, or string.


Type text associated with the current code or provide additional merge code information. For example, type a message for a prompt, or specify a field name, merge expression, variable, or string.


Type text associated with the current code or provide additional merge code information. For example, type a message for a prompt, or specify a field name, merge expression, variable, or string.


Type text associated with the current code or provide additional merge code information. For example, type a message for a prompt, or specify a field name, merge expression, variable, or string.


Type text associated with the current code or provide additional merge code information. For example, type a message for a prompt, or specify a field name, merge expression, variable, or string.


Type text associated with the current code or provide additional merge code information. For example, type a message for a prompt, or specify a field name, merge expression, variable, or string.


Type text associated with the current code or provide additional merge code information. For example, type a message for a prompt, or specify a field name, merge expression, variable, or string.


Type text associated with the current code or provide additional merge code information. For example, type a message for a prompt, or specify a field name, merge expression, variable, or string.


Type text associated with the current code or provide additional merge code information. For example, type a message for a prompt, or specify a field name, merge expression, variable, or string.


title bar needs context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


Background needs context string

Use the Quick Data Entry dialog box to quickly enter records into the existing fields of the data file.


Fill in the fields for each record you want to create in the data file. Type in a field, and press Enter to move to the next field.


Fill in the fields for each record you want to create in the data file. Type in a field, and press Enter to move to the next field.


Fill in the fields for each record you want to create in the data file. Type in a field, and press Enter to move to the next field.


Fill in the fields for each record you want to create in the data file. Type in a field, and press Enter to move to the next field.


Fill in the fields for each record you want to create in the data file. Type in a field, and press Enter to move to the next field.


Fill in the fields for each record you want to create in the data file. Type in a field, and press Enter to move to the next field.


Fill in the fields for each record you want to create in the data file. Type in a field, and press Enter to move to the next field.


Fill in the fields for each record you want to create in the data file. Type in a field, and press Enter to move to the next field.


Fill in the fields for each record you want to create in the data file. Type in a field, and press Enter to move to the next field.


Fill in the fields for each record you want to create in the data file. Type in a field, and press Enter to move to the next field.


Fill in the fields for each record you want to create in the data file. Type in a field, and press Enter to move to the next field.


Fill in the fields for each record you want to create in the data file. Type in a field, and press Enter to move to the next field.


Fill in the fields for each record you want to create in the data file. Type in a field, and press Enter to move to the next field.


Fill in the fields for each record you want to create in the data file. Type in a field, and press Enter to move to the next field.


Fill in the fields for each record you want to create in the data file. Type in a field, and press Enter to move to the next field.


Fill in the fields for each record you want to create in the data file. Type in a field, and press Enter to move to the next field.


Display the first record in the data file.


Display the previous record in the data file.


Display the next record in the data file.


Display the last record in the data file.


Press CTRL + Enter to add a line to a field. Pressing Enter alone moves the cursor to the next field or record.


Makes it possible to edit fields containing functions. However, if you edit fields with functions, the functions will be lost.


Moves the cursor to the next field.


Moves the cursor to the previous field.


Moves the cursor to the first field in the next record.


Deletes all information in each field of the current record.


Locate a record by the information in a specific field. Place the cursor in the field you want to search, and click Find and type what you are looking for.


Change existing field names. If you delete a field containing data, the data will be lost.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Click Field names in the Quick data


title bar needs context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


Type a name for a field. For example, type last name, first name, street address, or city.


Type a name for a field. For example, type last name, first name, street address, or city.


The fields that have been named are displayed in this list.


The fields that have been named are displayed in this list.


To create a data file, you must first name the fields (the smallest units) in the data file. For example, you might name the fields Last Name, First Name, Street Address, and so forth.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Type a field name and add it after the current selection.


Type a field name, and add it before the currently selected field in the Field Name List.


Replace the currently selected field name with the name you type.


Delete the currently selected field name.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


title bar needs context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


background needs context string

No associated file exists. You can choose a data file, address book, or form file to associate at this time, or you can create a data or form file to associate.


No associated file exists. You can choose a data file, address book, or form file to associate at this time, or you can create a data or form file to associate.


Lets you choose a data file.


Create a data file and associate it to the current form file, or create a form file and associate it to the current data file.


Opens the Address Book and lets you choose an address book to associate with the current form file.


Opens the Select ODBC Data Source dialog box which lets you associate an ODBC database for a merge.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


title bar needs context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


background needs context string

To create a data file, you must name the file in order to save the association with the form file.


Type a name for a file that contains the data you want to merge.


Type a name for a file that contains the data you want to merge.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


title bar needs context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


background needs context string

Specify which watermark you want to create, edit, or discontinue. You can have two watermarks in a document.


Specify which watermark you want to create, edit, or discontinue. You can have two watermarks in a document.


Specify which watermark you want to create, edit, or discontinue. You can have two watermarks in a document.


Specify which watermark you want to create, edit, or discontinue. You can have two watermarks in a document.


Moves the cursor to the Watermark layer and opens the Watermark Property Bar so you can insert a graphic or type text for the watermark. If Create is grayed, you have already created that watermark.


Opens the Watermark feature bar so you can change the graphic or text and the format of the watermark.


Turns off the watermark from this point in the document on.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


title bar needs context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


background needs context string

Customize the appearance, length, and position of a graphics line.


Creates a line that extends left to right.


Creates a line that extends top to bottom.


Customize the appearance, length, and position of a graphics line.


Customize the appearance, length, and position of a graphics line.


Choose a line style for the border. To use a style not on the palette or list, click Line Styles.


Choose a line style for the border. To use a style not on the palette or list, click Line Styles.


Choose a color from the palette to change the color of the line.


Choose a color from the palette to change the color of the line.


Change the thickness of the line.


Change the thickness of the line.


Specify the amount of white space between the line and the text above it.


Specify the amount of white space between the line and the text above it.


Specify the amount of space between the line and the text below it.


Specify the amount of space between the line and the text below it.


Specify the length of the line.


Specify the length of the line.


Customize the appearance, length, and position of a graphics line.


Uses the thickness specified in the current line style.


Choose a position from the left or top edge of the page.


Choose a position, or choose Set and specify a distance from the left edge of the page. To extend the line from the left to right margin, choose Full.


Choose a position, or choose Set and specify a distance from the left edge of the page. To extend the line from the left to right margin, choose Full.


Choose a position, or choose Set and specify a distance from the left edge of the page. To extend the line from the left to right margin, choose Full.


Choose Baseline to place the bottom edge of the line on the text baseline, or choose Set and specify the distance between the line and the top of the page.


Choose Baseline to place the bottom edge of the line on the text baseline, or choose Set and specify the distance between the line and the top of the page.


Choose Baseline to place the bottom edge of the line on the text baseline, or choose Set and specify the distance between the line and the top of the page.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Create, edit, or retrieve a line style.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


title bar needs context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


background needs context string

Graphics boxes, lines, borders, and fill come with a predefined style (look). You can customize a style for use one time, or you can create a style for use with other graphics.


Displays the box styles associated with the template, both predefined styles and any you have created.


Displays the box styles associated with the template, both predefined styles and any you have created.


Choose a location for the displayed styles. Styles are associated with the default template unless you specify a different location.


Choose a location for the displayed styles. Styles are associated with the default template unless you specify a different location.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Create a new style and add it to the list of styles for the selected template location.


Change the selected graphics style. The change applies to all occurrences of the style in the current and future documents. To update existing documents, you must copy the style into the template of each document.


Copy, delete, reset, rename, retrieve, or save styles.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


title bar needs help

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


background needs help

Create or edit a line style.


Give the style a short name to help you identify it in the list of styles.


Give the style a short name to help you identify it in the list of styles.


Create or edit a line style.


Color text needs context string

Choose a color from the palette to change the color of the line.


Choose a color from the palette to change the color of the line.


Pattern text needs context string

Choose a predefined line pattern or create a customized line pattern by adjusting dash and space lengths.


Choose a predefined line pattern or create a customized line pattern by adjusting dash and space lengths.


Thickness text needs context string

Specify the width of the line.


Specify the width of the line.


Spacing below line text needs context string

Specify the amount of space between the line and the text below it.


Specify the amount of space between the line and the text below it.


Displays how the line style will display.


Adds another line (the same style as the current line) next to the current line.


Removes the line that has an arrow pointing to it in the box above.


After you add another line, you can move the arrow to choose the line you want to edit or delete.


After you add another line, you can move the arrow to choose the line you want to edit or delete.


Create or edit a line style.


Enable to make the corners of wavy lines squared.


Enable to make the corners of wavy lines pointed.


Wavy pen width text needs context string

Lets you specify the line width of wavy lines.


Lets you specify the line width of wavy lines.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


title bar needs context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


Type a unique name for the style you are creating.


Type a unique name for the style you are creating.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


title bar needs context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


Saves or retrieves the styles.

When you save, the styles are saved as a separate file. You can retrieve them into new documents. The styles are also stored with the document template.

When you retrieve, a style file or the styles from another document are retrieved to the current document. All styles in the style file or document are saved with the current document.


When you retrieve, a style file or the styles from another document are retrieved to the current document. All styles in the style file or document are saved with the current document.


When you save, the styles are saved as a separate file. You can retrieve them into new documents. The styles are also stored with the document template.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


title bar needs context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


background needs context string

Lets you choose an available object shape.


Enable to create straight or curved lines.


Lets you choose a line style.


Enable to create basic shapes, such as circles, rectangles, or cubes.


Lets you choose a basic shape.


Enable to create various types of arrows.


Lets you choose a type of arrow.


Enable to create shapes used in flowcharts.


Lets you choose a flowchart shape.


Enable to create various types of stars.


Lets you choose a type of star.


Enable to create callouts which can be used to enclose type.


Lets you choose a type of callout.


Enable to create shapes used to denote action.


Lets you choose a shape used to denote action.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


title bar needs help

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


Create or edit a hyperlink and specify the target frame.


Lets you create a hyperlink to a local file, macro, or URL.


Lets you create a hyperlink to a local file, macro, or URL.


Launch your registered browser, such as Netscape Navigator, and browse to the desired document. The URL address of the document is inserted into the Document text box when you close the browser.


Specify a bookmark in the current document as the hyperlink.


Specify a bookmark in the current document as the hyperlink.


Lets you specify the frame (pane) on a Web page in which the hyperlink displays. It is used for advanced HTML editing.


Lets you specify the frame (pane) on a Web page in which the hyperlink displays. It is used for advanced HTML editing.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


title bar needs context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


background needs context string

Set a bookmark or QuickMark in a document.


Lists all bookmarks in the current document.


Set a bookmark or QuickMark in a document.


Lists all bookmarks in the current document.


Places a QuickMark at the cursor in the current document.


Moves the cursor to the QuickMark in the current document.


Places a QuickMark at the cursor whenever you save a document so you can return to that location quickly.


Moves the cursor directly to the QuickMark each time you open this file.


Moves the cursor to the selected bookmark.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Moves the cursor to the bookmark and selects the associated text. This option is only available for bookmarks with selected text.


Names and inserts a new bookmark at the cursor.


Moves the selected bookmark from its previous location to the cursor.


Renames the selected bookmark.


Deletes the selected bookmark.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


title bar needs context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


background needs context string

Lets you name and choose text for a bookmark.


Specify a name that helps you identify the bookmark.


Specify a name that helps you identify the bookmark.


You can associate a bookmark with selected text. You can go to that bookmark and the text is automatically selected for you. To do this, choose the text before you create the bookmark and make sure this check box is selected.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


title bar needs context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


Specify a name that helps you identify the bookmark.


Specify a name that helps you identify the bookmark.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


title bar needs context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


Change settings that affect the document window.


Specify settings that are in effect each time you start WordPerfect. Right-click an option to get Help information.


Specify backup options and the location of certain types of files.


Specify settings for certain document summary tasks.


Specify how certain file types are imported to WordPerfect.


Change how the Application Bar looks. The Application Bar shows information about the documents open in WordPerfect.


Change the toolbar, property bar, or menus you see in the WordPerfect window, or change how keystrokes behave when running WordPerfect.


title bar needs context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


Document tab needs context string

Change settings that affect the document window.


Change settings that affect the document window.


Enable the items to show in the document window.


Show all table lines as dashed lines and turn off the display of any table fill.


Enable to show table formula indicators as blue markers in the bottom right corner of the cell.


Use the Windows system colors to display text and the document background.


Display graphics and graphics boxes in every document.


Enable to display hidden text in the document window.


Enable to display margin icons.


Enable to activate Corel RealTime Preview. Corel RealTime Preview lets you view changes to text before the changes actually take place.


Enable to display a scroll bar in the document window.


Enable to display the vertical scroll bar in the document window.


Enable to display the horizontal scroll bar in the document window.


Lets you display Browse by buttons at the top or bottom of the vertical scroll bar.


Lets you display Browse by buttons at the top or bottom of the vertical scroll bar.


Lets you change the color and shape of the shadow cursor.


Specify the color for the Shadow Cursor (the pointer that shows exactly where the cursor will go when you click the mouse).


Specify the color for the Shadow Cursor (the pointer that shows exactly where the cursor will go when you click the mouse).


Change the shape of the Shadow Cursor (the pointer that shows exactly where the cursor will go when you click the mouse).


Change the shape of the Shadow Cursor (the pointer that shows exactly where the cursor will go when you click the mouse).


Lets you enable an option where the Shadow Cursor displays. The Shadow Cursor can snap to margins, tab settings, indents, or spaces.


The Shadow Cursor snaps to the left or right margin, or to the center between margins. When you click in white space the cursor can only go to one of these positions.


The Shadow Cursor snaps to current tab settings. When you click in white space the cursor is placed at the nearest tab. Text continues from that position to the end of the line and continues at the beginning of the next line.


The Shadow Cursor snaps to the nearest indent. When you click in white space the cursor is placed at the nearest indent. Text continues from that position to the end of the line and continues at the beginning of the next line.


The Shadow Cursor snaps to the nearest space. When you click in white space the cursor is placed where you click. Tabs and spaces are added on the line before this position. The text you type continues to the end of the line, and starts again at the beginning of the next line.


Lets you specify the areas on the page where the Shadow Cursor displays.


The Shadow Cursor displays only in areas on the page where there is text. In text it points between letters, at tabs between words, and at blank lines.


The Shadow Cursor displays in the white space on the page, not in areas where you have added text or graphics. It snaps to (lines up with) the item you choose (margins, tabs, indents, or spaces).


The Shadow Cursor displays in all areas of the page. The pointer shape changes depending on whether it is in a text area or in white space.


Lets you change the units of measure displayed in dialog boxes, reveal codes, the application bar, and ruler.


Changes the units of measure used in dialog boxes and reveal codes.


Changes the units of measure used in dialog boxes and reveal codes.


Changes the units of measure displayed or used on the application bar or ruler.


Changes the units of measure displayed or used on the application bar or ruler.


Exit button needs context string

Exit the dialog box and save any changes.


Cancel button needs context string

Closes this dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Apply button needs context string.

Applies the current selections without closing the dialog box. You can see how the page looks before you finish making changes.


Help button needs context string.

Click this to display an overview of this dialog box.


Symbols tab and background need context strings.

Specify what symbols display in the document window.


Choose the symbols (special characters) you want to display in the document window.


Enable to display a symbol for a space in the document window.


Enable to display a symbol for a hard return in the document window.


Enable to display a symbol for a tab in the document window.


Enable to display a symbol for an indent in the document window.


Enable to display a symbol for centered text in the document window.


Enable to display a symbol for flush right formatting in the document window.


Enable to display a symbol for a soft hyphen in the document window.


Enable to display a symbol for an advance in the document window.


Enable to display a symbol for center page in the document window.


Reveal codes tab and background need context strings.

Change how reveal codes display in the document window.


Lets you change the text and background colors in the reveal codes window.


Use the default system colors for reveal codes.


Changes the text color in the reveal codes window.


Changes the text color in the reveal codes window.


Changes the background color of the reveal codes window.


Changes the background color of the reveal codes window.


Opens the Font Properties dialog box. The Font Properties dialog box lets you choose a font face and size for reveal codes.


Shows what reveal codes will look like in the document window.


Lets you change formatting options in the reveal codes window.


Prevents codes from running off the display window by dividing codes at the edge of the window.


Displays a diamond bullet for each space character.


Displays formatting information with codes in the reveal codes window.


Enable to open the reveal codes window when a successful match is made on a WP code in the Go To dialog.


Ruler tab and background need context strings.

Change how the ruler displays in the document window.


Lets you change ruler settings.


Makes tabs line up exactly (snap) to invisible grid lines in the document. Lines are spaced every millimeter or 1/16 of an inch.


When you move a tab or margin marker, shows a dotted vertical line that extends from the marker to the bottom of the document window.


Merge tab and background need context strings.

Choose how merge codes display in the document window.


Choose how merge codes display in the document window.


Displays merge codes as text in the document window.


Displays merge codes as markers in the document window.


Displays text without merge codes in the document window.


XML tab/background needs context string.

Change the appearance of XML codes.


Lets you change the appearance of XML codes.


Enable to display XML codes.


Enable to display XML codes as markers.


Enable to hide XML codes.


Lets you set the font size for XML codes.


Font size number box needs context string.

Lets you set the font size for XML codes.


Lets you display tag layout and tag attributes in reveal codes.


Enable to show the tag layout in reveal codes.


Enable to show the tag attributes in reveal codes.


Lets you change the appearance of XML codes.


Lets you change the appearance of XML elements.


Lets you choose a color for the background.


Lets you choose a color for the background.


Lets you choose a color for the text.


Lets you choose a color for the text.


Lets you change the appearance of XML entity references.


Lets you choose a color for the background.


Lets you choose a color for the background.


Lets you choose a color for the text.


Lets you choose a color for the text.


Lets you change the appearance of XML processing instructions.


Lets you choose a color for the background.


Lets you choose a color for the background.


Lets you choose a color for the text.


Lets you choose a color for the text.


Lets you change the appearance of XML marked sections.


Lets you choose a color for the background.


Lets you choose a color for the background.


Lets you choose a color for the text.


Lets you choose a color for the text.


Lets you change the appearance of WordPerfect data .


Lets you choose a color for the background.


Lets you choose a color for the background.


Lets you choose a color for the text.


Lets you choose a color for the text.


title bar needs context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


General tab needs context string.

Specify settings that are in effect each time you start WordPerfect. Right-click an option to get Help information.


Lets you change user information for WordPerfect.


Type the name you want to use in comments or document summaries.


Type the name you want to use in comments or document summaries.


Type the initials you want to use for comments and document summaries.


Type the initials you want to use for comments and document summaries.


Lets you choose a color for your comments.


Lets you choose a color for your comments.


Turns on all hyperlinks in your documents.


Adjusts opened documents to match the currently selected printer.


Enable to format a document before you save it.


Selects text word by word instead of character by character when you drag to choose text.


Enable to use WordPerfect 9 text selection. WordPerfect contains enhancements to make its method of selecting text using the keyboard or mouse more user-friendly, streamlined, and efficient.


Defines which character sets are used for importing and exporting files in different languages.


OK button needs context string.

Exit the dialog box and save any changes.


Cancel button needs context string.

Closes this dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Help button needs context string.

Click this to display an overview of this dialog box.

For Help on an item, click  at the top of the dialog box, and click the item.


Interface tab/background needs context string

Specify what language WordPerfect runs in, whether or not you want to save the work space or the names of the last documents you edited, and what kind of help displays for menu items.


Lets you choose items to display on menus.


Click to display the names of the most recently edited files on the File menu.


Click to display keyboard shortcuts for menu options.


Click to display QuickTips (Help prompts) in the document window.


Lets you save the workspace configuration when quiting WordPerfect.


Displays the same documents and window arrangement the next time you start WordPerfect.


Starts with a clean document every time.


Prompts you to save the current window arrangement each time you quit WordPerfect.


Choose the language you want to use for WordPerfect. This setting changes all on-screen text (dialog boxes, messages, etc.) and determines which language tools are used.


Choose the language you want to use for WordPerfect. This setting changes all on-screen text (dialog boxes, messages, etc.) and determines which language tools are used.


Prompts tab/background needs context string.

Specify when you want visual or audible prompts to alert you about specific actions in WordPerfect.


Lets you set visual prompts to alert you about specific actions in WordPerfect.


Specify when you want WordPerfect to prompt you for hyphenation. Choose Always to see a prompt every time a word is hyphenated. Choose When Required to see a prompt when a word must be hyphenated but is not found in the main word list (which contains hyphenation rules). Choose Never to let the hyphenation rules place hyphens every time.


Specify when you want WordPerfect to prompt you for hyphenation. Choose Always to see a prompt every time a word is hyphenated. Choose When Required to see a prompt when a word must be hyphenated but is not found in the main word list (which contains hyphenation rules). Choose Never to let the hyphenation rules place hyphens every time.


Choose to delete codes only when reveal codes is turned on and to note the position of hidden codes.


Choose to avoid accidentally typing text over the formulas in tables or floating cells.


Lets you set audible prompts to alert you about specific actions in WordPerfect.


WordPerfect beeps if an error occurs as you work.


WordPerfect beeps if a word must be hyphenated.


WordPerfect beeps if the text or codes you want to find are not found in the document.


Graphics tab/background needs a context string

Specify how you want to create new graphics and equations in your document.


Choose this option if you want to drag a box to specify the size of each new graphic. Clear it to insert standard-sized graphics. (You can change the size and position of a graphic after it is inserted.)


Choose this option if you want to drag a box to specify the size of each new graphic. Clear it to insert standard-sized graphics. (You can change the size and position of a graphic after it is inserted.)


Lets you choose the default equation editor.


Use the graphical equation editor to insert equations into your WordPerfect documents.


When you create or edit equations, use the WordPerfect equation editor that is used in previous versions.


Each time you create a new equation, WordPerfect prompts you to specify which equation editor to use. When you clear this check box the editor you choose above always opens.


XML tab needs context string.

Specify the import options for HTML, SGML, and XML.


Lets you choose import options for HTML, SGML, and XML.


Lets you specify that HTML documents be recognized as XML on import.


Prompts you to choose a file format when importing XML/SGML documents.


Generates paired tags where they do not exist and inserts omitted tags required by the WordPerfect template.


title bar needs context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


background needs context string

Choose code pages for importing and exporting files in different languages.


Code page settings text needs context string.

Lists available code page options.


DOS code page next needs context string.

Choose a code page for DOS files.


DOS code page box needs context string.

Choose a code page for DOS files.


Windows code page text needs context string.

Choose a code page for Windows files.


Windows code page box needs context string.

Choose a code page for Windows files.


Input file code page text needs context string.

Choose a code page for input files (files you convert to WordPerfect).


Input file code page box needs context string.

Choose a code page for input files (files you convert to WordPerfect).


Output file code page text needs context string.

Choose a code page for output files (files you save with a different code page).


Output file code page box needs context string.

Choose a code page for output files (files you save with a different code page).


title bar needs context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


Document tab needs context string

Specify backup options and where to store document files.


Specify the format you want to save most of your documents in. Choose WordPerfect 6/7/8/9/10/11 to share files with users of WordPerfect 6.x for DOS or Windows up to WordPerfect 11.

The Compound format fully integrates with the Windows 95 shell. Users running DOS or Windows 3.1 versions of WordPerfect cannot open files saved in the Compound format.


Specify the format you want to save most of your documents in. Choose WordPerfect 6/7/8/9/10/11 to share files with users of WordPerfect 6.x for DOS or Windows up to WordPerfect.

The Compound format fully integrates with the Windows 95 shell. Users running DOS or Windows 3.1 versions of WordPerfect cannot open files saved in the Compound format.


Specify the folder where document files are always saved, unless you choose another folder for a specific document.


Specify the folder where document files are always saved, unless you choose another folder for a specific document.


Specify a default file extension for documents you save. When you save a document for the first time, or when you use Save As to save with a different filename or format, this extension is automatically added to the filename. File extensions identify the file type and are identified with a specific application.


Specify a default file extension for documents you save. When you save a document for the first time, or when you use Save As to save with a different filename or format, this extension is automatically added to the filename. File extensions identify the file type and are identified with a specific application.


Specify the folder where timed backup files are stored.


Specify the folder where timed backup files are stored.


Guards against losing work because of power or equipment failure by backing up files regularly.


Specify an interval (in minutes) at which backup files are saved.


Specify an interval (in minutes) at which backup files are saved.


Guards against accidentally replacing a file that you did not intend to replace. Saves the edited version of the document with the original filename and the original version with a .BK! extension.


Check to use the Corel Open dialog rather than the standard MS Windows Open dialog. The Corel Open dialog provides quick access to your Favorites folder, the Internet, and QuickFinder. You can customize the look of the Corel Open dialog to suit your needs.


Automatically update Favorites with the folders you choose in File Settings.


When you save your document, it will be saved with its original file format.


View a complete listing of folders and files for all File Settings options.


OK button needs context string

Exit the dialog box and save any changes.


Cancel button needs context string

Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Apply button needs context string.

Saves changes you have made without closing the dialog box. You can choose other options.


Help button needs context string.

Click this to display an overview of this dialog box.


Template tab/background needs context string.

Specify template options and where to find template files.


Specify the folder that contains template files.


Specify the folder that contains template files.


Specify the name of the default template file.


Specify the name of the default template file.


Specify an additional folder that contains template files (such as a network folder).


Specify an additional folder that contains template files (such as a network folder).


Specify the filename for the additional objects template file.


Specify the filename for the additional objects template file.


Replaces the standard template with the additional objects template.


Automatically update Favorites with the folders you choose in File Settings.


View a complete listing of folders and files for all File Settings options.


Labels tab/background needs context string.

Specify labels options and where to find labels files.


Specify the default file for label definitions. The label definitions in this file are available when you choose labels.


Specify the default file for label definitions. The label definitions in this file are available when you choose labels.


Lets you choose the types of labels which are displayed by default.


Display labels designed for laser printers.


Display labels designed for tractor-fed printers.


Display labels designed for both printer types.


View a complete listing of folders and files for all File Settings options.


Automatically update Favorites with the folders you choose in File Settings.


Graphic tab/background needs context string.

Specify where to find graphics, fancy borders, and hyphenation files.


Specify the folder that contains graphics files.


Specify the folder that contains graphics files.


Specify an additional folder that contains graphics files (such as a network folder).


Specify an additional folder that contains graphics files (such as a network folder).


Specify the folder that contains fancy borders files.


Specify the folder that contains fancy borders files.


Automatically update Favorites with the folders you choose in File Settings.


View a complete listing of folders and files for all File Settings options.


Spreadsheet/Database tab/background needs context string.

Specify the default location for spreadsheet and database files.


Specify the folder that contains spreadsheet files.


Specify the folder that contains spreadsheet files.


Specify an additional folder that contains spreadsheet files (such as a network folder).


Specify an additional folder that contains spreadsheet files (such as a network folder).


Specify the folder that contains database files.


Specify the folder that contains database files.


Specify an additional folder that contains database files (such as a network folder).


Specify an additional folder that contains database files (such as a network folder).


Automatically update Favorites with the folders you choose in File Settings.


View a complete listing of folders and files for all File Settings options.


Merge/Macro tab/background needs context string.

Specify merge options and where to find macros files.


Specify a default extension for all merge form filenames.


Specify a default extension for all merge form filenames.


Specify a default extension for all merge data filenames.


Specify a default extension for all merge data filenames.


Specify the folder that contains macros files.


Specify the folder that contains macros files.


Specify an additional folder that contains macro files (such as on a network)


Specify an additional folder that contains macro files (such as on a network)


Automatically update Favorites with the folders you choose in File Settings.


View a complete listing of folders and files for all File Settings options.


XML tab/background needs context string.

Specify default folders and options for XML documents.


Lets you specify the location and folder for XML WordPerfect templates.


Lets you specify the location and folder for XML WordPerfect templates.


Lets you specify the XML WordPerfect template upon which all new XML WordPerfect templates are based. The default template XML.WPT defines the basic XML environment including XML toolbar and XML tree.


Lets you specify the XML WordPerfect template upon which all new XML WordPerfect templates are based. The default template XML.WPT defines the basic XML environment including XML toolbar and XML tree.


Displays the locations of the default folder, graphic folder, and catalog files.


Lets you specify the default location and folder for XML documents.


Lets you specify the default location and folder for XML documents.


Lets you specify the default location and folder for graphics associated with XML documents.


Lets you specify the default location and folder for graphics associated with XML documents.


Displays the active catalogs.


Displays the active catalogs.


Opens the Catalog File Manager where you can specify registered and active catalogs.


Enable to set the default save format as XML or SGML.


Enable to automatically update Favorites with the folders you choose in File Settings.


Lets you view a complete listing of folders and files for all File Settings options.


title bar needs context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


Shows the type of default and supplemental files and folders specified by File Settings.


Shows the location of default and supplemental files and folders specified by File Settings.


Shows the default document folder specified in the Files settings dialog box.


Shows the backup document folder specified in the Files settings dialog box.


Shows the default templates folder specified in the Files settings dialog box.


Shows the default template specified in the Files settings dialog box.


Shows the additional templates folder specified in the Files settings dialog box.


Shows the additional objects template specified in the Files settings dialog box.


Shows the default spreadsheets folder specified in the Files settings dialog box.


Shows the supplemental spreadsheet folder specified in the Files settings dialog box.


Shows the default database folder specified in the Files settings dialog box.


Shows the supplemental database folder specified in the Files settings dialog box.


Shows the default label file specified in the Files settings dialog box.


Shows the default graphics folder specified in the Files settings dialog box.


Shows the supplemental graphics folder specified in the Files settings dialog box.


Shows the default fancy borders folder specified in the Files settings dialog box.


Shows the default macro folder specified in the Files settings dialog box.


Shows the supplemental macro folder specified in the Files settings dialog box.


Shows the default XML template folder specified in the Files settings dialog box.


Shows the default project base template specified in the Files settings dialog box.


Shows the default document type folder specified in the Files settings dialog box.


Shows the catalog files specified in the Files settings dialog box.


Closes the dialog box.


title bar needs context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


Lets you choose text that identifies a document subject and the default descriptive type of document.


Specify the text that identifies a document subject. This text must display in the document for document summary to find the subject.


Specify the text that identifies a document subject. This text must display in the document for document summary to find the subject.


Specify a default Descriptive Type for document summaries, such as memo, letter, or invoice.


Specify a default Descriptive Type for document summaries, such as memo, letter, or invoice.


Create a document summary when you save or close a document. Displays the document summary dialog box when saving or closing.


Rename the file when you open a document. Uses the descriptive name from the document summary as the new filename.


Use the same name for filename and the document summary descriptive name. Inserts the filename as the descriptive name when the document is saved.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


title bar needs context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


Compatibility tab/background needs context string.

Lets you specify compatibility options such as formatting and printing options.


Lets you specify compatibility options such as formatting and printing options for a document.


Lets you specify compatibility options such as formatting and printing options for a document.


Lets you choose a file format for which to set compatibility options.


Lets you choose a file format for which to set compatibility options.


Enable an option to set the compatibility feature.

•	Allow boxes to be positioned outside of printable region [image] lets you position a box so that an area of the box exists outside the printable region of the document

•	Disable right hyphenation hot zone [image] wraps text to the next line if a word extends beyond the right margin

•	Do not format document using printer metrics [image] does not check with a printer when setting up a document, fonts, etc.

•	Format document based on WordPerfect 5.1 specifications [image] allows you to set vertical spacing for fonts based on point size rather than Adobe/TrueType font metrics, thus replicating the behavior of WordPerfect 5.1

•	Treat tabs like MS Word [image] advances text to the next tab stop even if the cursor is less than one character away from the next tab stop

•	Use WordPerfect 5.1 numbering format for letters (AA, AB, AC…) [image] replaces the WordPerfect letter numbering (i.e. A, B, C…Y, Z, AA, BB, CC…YY, ZZ, AAA, BBB…ZZZ, AAAA…) with the letter numbering for WordPerfect 5.1 (i.e. A, B, C…Y, Z, AA, AB, AC…AY, AZ, BA, BB…BZ, CA…)


Enable an option to set the compatibility feature.

•	Allow boxes to be positioned outside of printable region [image] lets you position a box so that an area of the box exists outside the printable region of the document

•	Disable right hyphenation hot zone [image] wraps text to the next line if a word extends beyond the right margin

•	Do not format document using printer metrics [image] does not check with a printer when setting up a document, fonts, etc.

•	Format document based on WordPerfect 5.1 specifications [image] allows you to set vertical spacing for fonts based on point size rather than Adobe/TrueType font metrics, thus replicating the behavior of WordPerfect 5.1

•	Treat tabs like MS Word [image] advances text to the next tab stop even if the cursor is less than one character away from the next tab stop

•	Use WordPerfect 5.1 numbering format for letters (AA, AB, AC…) [image] replaces the WordPerfect letter numbering (i.e. A, B, C…Y, Z, AA, BB, CC…YY, ZZ, AAA, BBB…ZZZ, AAAA…) with the letter numbering for WordPerfect 5.1 (i.e. A, B, C…Y, Z, AA, AB, AC…AY, AZ, BA, BB…BZ, CA…)


Clears all compatibility options.


Lets you modify the standard template with the compatibility options you have selected.


OK button needs context string.

Exit the dialog box and save any changes.


Cancel button needs context string.

Closes this dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Help button needs context string.

Click this to display an overview of this dialog box.


Convert tab needs context string

Lets you specify conversion options such as delimiter and character options, and Windows metafile options.

Specify how you want to convert graphics, fonts, and files from another format to WordPerfect format. You can also choose code pages and document settings.


Lets you choose field and record delimiters in an ASCII delimited text file.


Choose the character or code that separates fields in an ASCII delimited text file.


Choose the character or code that separates fields in an ASCII delimited text file.


Choose the character or code that separates fields in an ASCII delimited text file.


Choose the character or code that separates records in an ASCII delimited text file.


Choose the character or code that separates records in an ASCII delimited text file.


Choose the character or code that separates records in an ASCII delimited text file.


Specify the characters that enclose each field of data, and specify which characters to strip from an ASCII file during conversion.


Specify the characters that enclose each field of data in an ASCII file during conversion.


Specify the characters that enclose each field of data in an ASCII file during conversion.


Specify the characters that enclose each field of data in an ASCII file during conversion.


Specify the characters which characters to strip from an ASCII file during conversion.


Specify the characters which characters to strip from an ASCII file during conversion.


Specify the characters which characters to strip from an ASCII file during conversion.


Lets you choose Windows metafile options.


Retains only the original Windows metafile (.WMF) format and attributes. Use this if you will not use the document with WordPerfect for DOS or other platforms. The resulting Windows metafile image will not display if the document is edited using WordPerfect on non-Windows platforms.


Converts the graphic to WordPerfect graphics (.WPG) format. You can view and edit the graphic if you open the document in WordPerfect for DOS or other platforms. If you must convert the document to a non-WordPerfect format, check to see that .WPG graphics are supported by the new application.


Creates one graphic file that contains both WordPerfect graphic (.WPG) and Windows metafile (.WMF) formats. You can edit the document in WordPerfect for DOS or other non-Windows platforms, or convert the document to another non-WordPerfect format. The resulting graphic image uses more disk space than the .WMF-only or .WPG-only formats.


Specify how you want certain files imported into WordPerfect. You can change the code page, the characters recognized as delimiters in ASCII text files, how some graphics files are imported, and how fonts are converted from some file types.


title bar needs context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


background needs context string

Add, delete, move, or resize items on the application bar.


Choose the information and buttons you want to display on the application bar.


Choose the information and buttons you want to display on the application bar.


Choose the size for the text on the application bar.


Choose the size for the text on the application bar.


Choose the size for the text on the application bar.


Choose the size for the text on the application bar.


Describes the item you choose in the list above.


Describes the item you choose in the list above.


Move, delete, resize, or change options on the application bar.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Restores the default bar.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


title bar needs context string

Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


background needs context string

Lets you reinsert the last three deleted items in the document.


Closes the dialog box and inserts the displayed deletion.


Displays the deletion before the currently displayed deletion.


Displays the deletion after the currently displayed deletion.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Select the subdocuments you want to close (condense) and save.


Select the subdocuments you want to close (condense) and save.


Mark or unmark all the listed documents.


Change the character that marks redlined text and specify where it appears.


Uses the redlining method specific to your printer (usually a shaded background).


Uses the redline character to mark redlined text in the left margin.


Marks redlined text in the left margin for even-numbered pages and in the right margin for odd-numbered pages.


Uses the redline character to mark redlined text in the right margin.


Type the character you want to mark redlined text. Not available for Printer dependent method. Use CTRL+W to insert a special character.


Type the character you want to mark redlined text. Not available for Printer dependent method. Use CTRL+W to insert a special character.


Lets you choose a position relative to the margin for a drop cap.


No drop cap is inserted in the document.


No drop cap is inserted in the document.


Lets you insert a drop cap that displays entirely in the left margin.


Lets you insert a drop cap that displays entirely in the left margin.


Lets you insert a drop cap so that half of the drop cap displays in the left margin and half displays in the text.


Lets you insert a drop cap so that half of the drop cap displays in the left margin and half displays in the text.


Lets you insert a drop cap that displays entirely within the text.


Lets you insert a drop cap that displays entirely within the text.


Select the number of text lines you want indented at the right side of the drop cap.


Select the number of text lines you want indented at the right side of the drop cap.


Select the number of text lines you want indented at the right side of the drop cap.


Specify how many lines of text to move down (leave blank) at the right side of the drop cap, measured from the top of the drop cap. For example, if the drop cap is five lines high, you can move four lines down so the text is on the same line as the drop cap.


Specify how many lines of text to move down (leave blank) at the right side of the drop cap, measured from the top of the drop cap. For example, if the drop cap is five lines high, you can move four lines down so the text is on the same line as the drop cap.


Specify how many lines of text to move down (leave blank) at the right side of the drop cap, measured from the top of the drop cap. For example, if the drop cap is five lines high, you can move four lines down so the text is on the same line as the drop cap.


Specify how many characters to include in the drop cap, starting with the first letter of the current word. More than one word can be used, but spaces are not counted.


Specify how many characters to include in the drop cap, starting with the first letter of the current word. More than one word can be used, but spaces are not counted.


Specify how many characters to include in the drop cap, starting with the first letter of the current word. More than one word can be used, but spaces are not counted.


Enable to format the first word in the paragraph in a drop cap style.


Lets you position text surrounding a drop cap.


Places text around the drop cap. Disable this check box to place text through the drop cap area.


Moves a drop cap down slightly for those letters using diacritical elements, such as the acute accent.


Allows paragraph text to wrap around drop cap characters that extend below the text baseline, such as ornate characters or the letters g, j, p, q, or y.


Allows paragraph text to wrap around drop cap characters that extend below the text baseline, such as ornate characters or the letters g, j, p, q, or y.


Specify how much of the drop cap you want moved into the left margin. For example, specify 50% to place the drop cap half in the margin and half in the text.


Specify how much of the drop cap you want moved into the left margin. For example, specify 50% to place the drop cap half in the margin and half in the text.


Specify how much of the drop cap you want moved into the left margin. For example, specify 50% to place the drop cap half in the margin and half in the text.


Specify how much of the drop cap you want moved into the left margin. For example, specify 50% to place the drop cap half in the margin and half in the text.


Opens the Drop cap border/fill dialog box and lets you add a border or fill to the drop cap.


Displays the equation at half its printed size.


Displays the equation at three-fourths its printed size.


Displays the equation at its printed size.


Displays the equation at one-and-a-half times its printed size.


Displays the equation at twice its printed size.


Increases or decreases the display magnification of an equation so that the equation height fills the display window.


Increases or decreases the display magnification of an equation so that the equation width fills the display window.


Increases or decreases the display magnification of an equation so that it fills the display window.


Specify a zoom percentage.


Specify a zoom percentage.


Lets you select an equation editor.


Enable to open the WordPerfect equation editor.


Enable to open the WordPerfect 7 equation editor.


Provides information about choosing an equation editor.


Provides information about choosing an equation editor.


Provides information about choosing an equation editor.


Enable to display the Select equation editor dialog box when you create an equation.


Lets you know that you can choose a default equation editor in the Environment settings dialog box.


Displays the name and location of the backup folder.


Displays the name and location of the backup folder.


Displays the filename of the timed backup.


Displays the filename of the timed backup


Lets you rename the timed backup.


Lets you rename the timed backup.


Select a foreground color, a background color, and a pattern.


Choose a foreground color, a background color, and a gradient pattern (linear, circular, or rectangular), then specify any gradient options below.


Give the style a short name to help you identify it in the list of styles.


Give the style a short name to help you identify it in the list of styles.


Defines the background shading, color, and pattern for a fill style that can be used for paragraphs, columns, pages, tables, and graphics.


Select the foreground color for the fill style.


Select the foreground color for the fill style.


Select the background color for the fill style.


Select the background color for the fill style.


Select one of the predefined patterns.


Select one of the predefined patterns.


Defines the background shading, color, and pattern for a fill style that can be used for paragraphs, columns, pages, tables, and graphics.


Gradient text

Select a gradient pattern.


Select a gradient pattern.


Defines a circular, rectangular, or linear gradient.


Specify the vertical center of a circular or rectangular gradient, or the top of a linear gradient.


Specify the vertical center of a circular or rectangular gradient, or the top of a linear gradient.


Specify the horizontal center of a circular or rectangular gradient, or a rotated linear gradient.


Specify the horizontal center of a circular or rectangular gradient, or a rotated linear gradient.


Rotates a linear or rectangular gradient counter-clockwise inside the border.


Rotates a linear or rectangular gradient counter-clockwise inside the border.


Specify how smoothly the foreground and background colors are blended. A higher number of steps produces more smoothly blended colors.


Specify how smoothly the foreground and background colors are blended. A higher number of steps produces more smoothly blended colors.


Automatically calculates the number of steps for a given gradient type.


Displays the name of the current printer.


Displays the name of the current printer.


Lets you choose the current printer font face, style, and size. You can also change relative sizes, appearance attributes, character sets, or print orientations.


Lets you choose the current printer font.


Lets you choose the current printer font.


Lets you choose a font attribute.


Lets you choose a font attribute.


Lets you choose a font size.


Lets you choose a font size.


Displays the current font settings. To display size and style settings, enable the Map individual styles check box.


Displays the current font settings. To display size and style settings, enable the Map individual styles check box.


Enable the Map individual styles check box to display the current font size and style settings.


Lets you choose a relative size, appearance attribute, character set, or print orientation to change.


Lets you choose a relative size, appearance attribute, character set, or print orientation to change.


Specify font settings to automatically substitute when you change font attributes, sizes, character sets, or print orientations in a document.


Lets you choose a font face to change to.


Lets you choose a font face to change to.


Lets you choose a style to change to.


Lets you choose a style to change to.


Lets you choose a size to change to.


Lets you choose a size to change to.


Displays the current font settings.


Displays the current font settings.


Enable to restore default font settings.


Name of the current printer.


Name of the current printer.


To change the current printer font, select a font from the Face drop-down list.


To change the current printer font, select a font from the Face drop-down list.


To change the current printer font, select a font from the Face drop-down list.


Select a style to change to.


Select a style to change to.


Select a size to change to.


Select a size to change to.


To change the style and size settings of the current printer font, select Map individual styles, then specify changes.


Specify different font settings to display a document than are used to print it.


Select a display font face.


Select a display font face.


Select a display font style.


Select a display font style.


Select a display font size.


Select a display font size.


Name of the current display font.


Name of the current display font.


Restore default settings.


Name of the current printer.


Name of the current printer.


Change the default placement fonts when a font used in the document is not available on the current printer.


Name of the current document font.


Name of the current document font.


Select a size to change.


Select a size to change.


Name of the current font.


Name of the current font.


Name of the current Code Page.


Name of the current Code Page.


Change the default replacement fonts when a font used in the document is not available on the current printer.


Select a font face to change to.


Select a font face to change to.


Select a style to change to.


Select a style to change to.


Replacement font size used when the current document font is not available on the current printer.


Replacement font size used when the current document font is not available on the current printer.


Replacement font name.


Replacement font name.


Restore default settings.


Displays the name of the current printer.


Displays the name of the current printer.


Select a code page to print with a non-English alphabet font.


Select font settings to change to. Automatic selection restores default settings.


Select font settings to change to. Automatic selection restores default settings.


Name of the current font.


Name of the current font.


Select a code page to print with a non-English alphabet font.


Select a code page to print with a non-English alphabet font.


Select a code page to print with a non-English alphabet font.


Increases the current note number by 1.


Decreases the current note number by 1.


Lets you specify a new number for the current note.


Lets you specify the footnote number.


Lets you specify the footnote you want to edit.


Lets you specify the footnote you want to edit.


Lets you specify the endnote you want to edit.


Lets you specify the endnote you want to edit.


Displays the path and filename of the document summary that you can replace or append to.


Displays the path and filename of the document summary that you can replace or append to.


Prompts you to replace or append to the specified document summary.


Lets you replace the contents of the specified file.


Lets you add the document summary for the active file to the specified document summary.


Type the characters that you want combined and printed as a single overstrike character. Do not insert a space between the characters.


Type the characters that you want combined and printed as a single overstrike character. Do not insert a space between the characters.


Choose the code you want combined and printed as a single overstrike character.


Display the last overstrike in the document in the Overstrike characters box so you can edit it.


Display the next overstrike in the document in the Overstrike characters box so you can edit it.


Specify how many levels you want in the table of contents.


Specify how many levels you want in the table of contents.


Specify how you want a table of contents to look.


Displays the style level.


Displays the style level.


Displays the style level.


Displays the style level.


Displays the style level.


Displays the style level.


Displays the name of the style level.


Displays the name of the style level.


Displays the name of the style level.


Displays the name of the style level.


Displays the name of the style level.


Displays the name of the style level.


Specify a position for the page numbers at each level of the table of contents. You can display no page numbers, or you can display page numbers after the entries (separated by a space), in parentheses after the entries (separated by a space), flush right, or flush right with dot leaders.


Specify a position for the page numbers at each level of the table of contents. You can display no page numbers, or you can display page numbers after the entries (separated by a space), in parentheses after the entries (separated by a space), flush right, or flush right with dot leaders.


Specify a position for the page numbers at each level of the table of contents. You can display no page numbers, or you can display page numbers after the entries (separated by a space), in parentheses after the entries (separated by a space), flush right, or flush right with dot leaders.


Specify a position for the page numbers at each level of the table of contents. You can display no page numbers, or you can display page numbers after the entries (separated by a space), in parentheses after the entries (separated by a space), flush right, or flush right with dot leaders.


Specify a position for the page numbers at each level of the table of contents. You can display no page numbers, or you can display page numbers after the entries (separated by a space), in parentheses after the entries (separated by a space), flush right, or flush right with dot leaders.


Specify a position for the page numbers at each level of the table of contents. You can display no page numbers, or you can display page numbers after the entries (separated by a space), in parentheses after the entries (separated by a space), flush right, or flush right with dot leaders.


Change the current table of contents style.


Customize the way page numbers appear in the table of contents. This is useful when you use special numbering like volume, chapter, and secondary page numbers in a document.


Shows how the table of contents will display with the number of levels and position setting you have selected.


Shows how the table of contents will display with the number of levels and position setting you have selected.


Shows how the table of contents will display with the number of levels and position setting you have selected.


Shows how the table of contents will display with the number of levels and position setting you have selected.


Shows how the table of contents will display with the number of levels and position setting you have selected.


Shows how the table of contents will display with the number of levels and position setting you have selected.


Shows how the table of contents will display with the number of levels and position setting you have selected.


Shows how the table of contents will display with the number of levels and position setting you have selected.


Shows how the table of contents will display with the number of levels and position setting you have selected.


Shows how the table of contents will display with the number of levels and position setting you have selected.


Shows how the table of contents will display with the number of levels and position setting you have selected.


Shows how the table of contents will display with the number of levels and position setting you have selected.


Shows how the table of contents will display with the number of levels and position setting you have selected.


Shows how the table of contents will display with the number of levels and position setting you have selected.


Shows how the table of contents will display with the number of levels and position setting you have selected.


Indents the last level of your table of contents evenly.


Change the distance between words.


Normal uses the font manufacturer's settings for distance between words.


Specify a number greater than 100 to increase the distance (or less than 100 to decrease the distance) between words in the current selection or from the insertion point forward.


Specify a number greater than 100 to increase the distance (or less than 100 to decrease the distance) between words in the current selection or from the insertion point forward.


Specify the number of characters per inch. The percent of optimal number changes to match this setting.


Specify the number of characters per inch. The percent of optimal number changes to match this setting.


Change the distance between words.


For fully justified text, specify the maximum percent the distance between words can be reduced. If the words are too close together, increase the compression number.


For fully justified text, specify the maximum percent the distance between words can be reduced. If the words are too close together, increase the compression number.


For fully justified text, specify the maximum percent the distance between words can be reduced. If the words are too close together, increase the compression number.


For fully justified text, specify the maximum percent the distance between words can be increased. If the words are too close together, increase the expansion number.


For fully justified text, specify the maximum percent the distance between words can be increased. If the words are too close together, increase the expansion number.


For fully justified text, specify the maximum percent the distance between words can be increased. If the words are too close together, increase the expansion number.


Automatic Kerning adjusts the distance between predefined pairs of letters. The font determines which letter pairs are kerned.


Change the distance between letters.


Normal uses the font manufacturer's settings for the distance between letters.


Specify a number greater than 100 to increase the distance (or less than 100 to decrease the distance) between letters in the current selection or from the insertion point forward.


Specify a number greater than 100 to increase the distance (or less than 100 to decrease the distance) between letters in the current selection or from the insertion point forward.


Specify the number of characters per inch. The percent of optimal number changes to match this setting.


Specify the number of characters per inch. The percent of optimal number changes to match this setting.


Change the distance between lines of text.


To change the distance between lines of text or from the insertion point forward, click Adjust Leading, then specify an amount to increase (positive number) or decrease (negative number) the current setting.


To change the distance between lines of text or from the insertion point forward, click Adjust Leading, then specify an amount to increase (positive number) or decrease (negative number) the current setting.


To change the distance between lines of text or from the insertion point forward, click Adjust Leading, then specify an amount to increase (positive number) or decrease (negative number) the current setting.


Enable to make the first baseline occur at the same position on every page. If this option is not selected the first baseline varies depending on the font size of the first line of text.


Inserts the commands that let you take advantage of the special functions of your printer. For information about those commands, see your printer documentation.


Type the actual printer command to be inserted in the document.


Type the actual printer command to be inserted in the document.


Specify a file that contains several printer commands that you want to insert in the document.


Specify a file that contains several printer commands that you want to insert in the document.


Inserts a code that pauses the printer at the current insertion point location.


Displays merge codes in the Find codes list.


Select the codes you want to find or replace.


Select the codes you want to find or replace.


Inserts the selected code in the Find or replace with box.


Inserts the selected code in the Find and replace with box and closes the Codes dialog box.


Specify the name of the list definition.


Specify the name of the list definition.


Specify how the text and numbering will look.


Specify how the text and numbering will look.


Specify how the text and numbering will look.


Customize the page numbering of the list definition.


Shows how the list will display with the position setting you have selected.


Displays the style name of the currently selected list.


Displays the style name of the currently selected list.


Change the currently selected style.


Select the type of box captions you want to include in the list. Box captions do not have to be marked individually to be listed.


Select the type of box captions you want to include in the list. Box captions do not have to be marked individually to be listed.


Displays the total number of pages in the document.


Displays the total number of pages in the document.


Lets you choose from available code page options.


Select a code page for DOS files.


Select a code page for DOS files.


Select a code page for Windows files.


Select a code page for Windows files.


Select a code page for input files (files you convert to WordPerfect).


Select a code page for input files (files you convert to WordPerfect).


Select a code page for output files (files you save with a different code page).


Select a code page for output files (files you save with a different code page).


Select the default settings for converting text and word processing files to WordPerfect.


Select a default unit of measure for files you convert.


Select a default unit of measure for files you convert.


Displays the current default language of documents you convert.


Displays the current default language of documents you convert.


Select a default for displaying underlined text.


Underlines spaces between words for underlined text.


Underlines the spaces between tabs when text is underlined.


Select a default page width and height for converted documents.


Specify a default page width for documents you convert to WordPerfect.


Specify a default page width for documents you convert to WordPerfect.


Specify the default page height for converted documents.


Specify the default page height for converted documents.


Specify a default alignment character for decimal alignment.


Specify a default alignment character for decimal alignment.


Specify the default page margins for converted documents.


Specify a default left page margin.


Specify a default left page margin.


Specify a default right page margin.


Specify a default right page margin.


Specify a default top page margin.


Specify a default top page margin.


Specify a default bottom page margin.


Specify a default bottom page margin.


Select a default language for documents you convert to WordPerfect.


Specify which fonts are available when you convert to or from a Corel WordPerfect 4.2 document.


Specify which Corel WordPerfect 4.2 fonts are used for converting to or from a WordPerfect 4.2 document. Select a font and click Edit to change the font.


Lists font names and pitch (characters per inch) for Corel WordPerfect 4.2 fonts.


Lists font names and pitch (characters per inch) for Corel WordPerfect 4.2 fonts.


Lists font names and pitch (characters per inch) for Corel WordPerfect 4.2 fonts.


Change the typeface and pitch for a Corel WordPerfect 4.2 font.


Change the typeface and pitch for a Corel WordPerfect 4.2 font.


Displays the number assigned to the Corel WordPerfect 4.2 font you are editing. The number represents the order of the font in the Font Settings list.


Displays the number assigned to the Corel WordPerfect 4.2 font you are editing. The number represents the order of the font in the Font Settings list.


Select the Corel WordPerfect 4.2 typeface you want to use in file conversion.


Select the Corel WordPerfect 4.2 typeface you want to use in file conversion.


Specify the pitch (characters per inch) for the font you are editing.


Select the DCA or DisplayWrite fonts available for file conversion.


Select the DCA or DisplayWrite fonts available for file conversion.


Lists fonts names, point, and pitch for DCA or DisplayWrite fonts.


Lists fonts names, point, and pitch for DCA or DisplayWrite fonts.


Lists fonts names, point, and pitch for DCA or DisplayWrite fonts.


Lists fonts names, point, and pitch for DCA or DisplayWrite fonts.


Edit a DCA or DisplayWrite Font.


Change the number, typeface, point size, and pitch of a DCA or DisplayWrite font.


Specify the number assignment for the DCA or DisplayWrite font you are editing.


Displays the DCA or DisplayWrite font being edited.


Displays the DCA or DisplayWrite font being edited.


Specify the point size for the font you are editing.


Specify the pitch for the font you are editing.


Lets you customize pattern, gradient, texture, and picture fills.


Displays text and objects as outlines only, without any fill style.


Lets you choose a pattern for a fill.


Lets you customize a pattern fill.


Lets you choose a fill color.


Lets you choose a fill color.


Lets you choose a pattern color.


Lets you choose a pattern color.


Lets you reverse the foreground and background fill colors.


Lets you preview the fill.


Lets you choose a gradient for a fill.


Lets you customize a gradient fill.


Lets you choose a texture for a fill.


Lets you customize a texture fill.


Displays the name of the selected texture or filename for a fill.


Displays the name of the selected texture fill.


Lets you choose the drive and folder containing a file with a texture fill.


Lets you choose a texture for a fill.


Displays the name for a group of textures.


Lets you choose a picture for a fill.


Lets you customize a picture for a fill.


Displays the name of the selected picture or filename for a fill.


Displays the name for a group of pictures.


Lets you choose a line style.


Lets you choose a line style.


Lets you choose a color for a line.


Lets you choose a color for a line.


Lets you choose a preset line width, or you can type in a value in the line width box.


Lets you choose a preset line width, or you can type in a value in the line width box.


Lets you type a value for the width of the line.


Lets you choose a style for corners of a line.


Lets you choose a style for corners of a line.


Lets you choose a starting icon for a line.


Lets you choose a starting icon for a line.


Lets you choose an ending icon for a line.


Lets you choose an ending icon for a line.


Displays the line as it appears in the document.


Displays the line as it appears in the document..


Lets you choose and customize a drop shadow.


Displays the current fill as it will appear in the document.


Lets you adjust the vertical placement of a drop shadow.


Lets you adjust the horizontal placement of a drop shadow.


Lets you specify the horizontal placement of a drop shadow.


Lets you specify the horizontal placement of a drop shadow.


Lets you specify the vertical placement of a drop shadow.


Lets you specify the vertical placement of a drop shadow.


Lets you choose a color for a drop shadow.


Enable to make the shadow partially transparent.


Lets you choose a transparent color.


 Displays the pattern with the selected colors.


Enable to make the fill color transparent. Overlapping objects show through that color in the drawing window.


Displays the fill color.


Enable to make the pattern color transparent. Overlapping objects show through that color in the drawing window.


Displays the pattern color.


Lets you choose a fill method for a pattern.


Lets you apply a continuous fill.


Lets you apply a fill to alternating areas.


Displays the current pattern as it appears in the document.


Click this to display an overview of this dialog box.


Lets you choose a style of gradient.


Lets you choose a style of gradient.


Lets you specify the angle of the gradient. As the degree value increases, the gradient rotates counterclockwise in objects or on the page.


Lets you specify the angle of the gradient. As the degree value increases, the gradient rotates counterclockwise in objects or on the page.


Offset the gradient design horizontally or vertically.


Offset the gradient design horizontally.


Offset the gradient design horizontally.


Offset the gradient design vertically.


Offset the gradient design vertically.


Lets you choose the number of blending steps between two colors.


Enable to automatically assign the number of blending steps between the selected colors.


Lets you specify the number of blending steps between two colors.


Lets you specify the number of blending steps between two colors.


Lets you choose a continuous or alternating fill.


Lets you apply a continuous gradient.


Lets you apply a gradient to alternating areas.


Displays the gradient as it appears in the document.


Displays the fill method for the gradient.


Click this to display an overview of this dialog box.


Enable to repeat the texture in relation to the entire drawing window.


Enable to repeat the texture in relation to the entire drawing window.


Enable to repeat the texture within the object.


Enable to repeat the texture within the object.


Lets you choose a continuous or alternating fill.


Lets you apply a texture to a continuous area.


Lets you apply a texture to alternating areas.


Displays the fill method for the texture.


Click this to display an overview of this dialog box.


Click to change the style of fill method.


Enable to repeat the bitmap inside the object in offset horizontal rows until the object is filled.


Enable to repeat the bitmap inside the object in offset vertical columns until the object is filled.


Enable to repeat the bitmap inside the object in offset vertical columns until the object is filled.


Enable to make the bitmap smaller or larger to fit inside the object.


Enable to stack the bitmap inside the object until the object is filled.


Lets you apply a continuous or alternating fill for a texture.


Lets you apply a picture to a continuous area.


Lets you apply a picture to alternating areas.


Lets you customize a picture for a fill.


Displays the picture as it appears in the document.


Click this to display an overview of this dialog box.


Change the current color by clicking a color in the color wheel and an area in the vertical luminosity bar.


Shows the color model which you can use as the basis for mixing and creating colors.


Shows the color model which you can use as the basis for mixing and creating colors.


Lets you choose values for the selected color model.


Specify the proportion of red in the color with a value between 0 and 255. All colors at 0 make black, and all colors at 255 make white.


Specify the proportion of red in the color with a value between 0 and 255. All colors at 0 make black, and all colors at 255 make white.


Specify the proportion of green in the color with a value between 0 and 255. All colors at 0 make black, and all colors at 255 make white.


Specify the proportion of green in the color with a value between 0 and 255. All colors at 0 make black, and all colors at 255 make white.


Specify the proportion of blue in the color with a value between 0 and 255. All colors at 0 make black, and all colors at 255 make white.


Specify the proportion of blue in the color with a value between 0 and 255. All colors at 0 make black, and all colors at 255 make white.


Specify the color component value for the hue.


Specify the color component value for the hue.


Specify the color component value for the lightness.


Specify the color component value for the lightness.


Specify a color component value for the saturation.


Specify a color component value for the saturation.


Specify the proportion of cyan in the color with a value between 0 and 255. All colors at 0 make white, and all colors at 255 make black.


Specify the proportion of cyan in the color with a value between 0 and 255. All colors at 0 make white, and all colors at 255 make black.


Specify the proportion of magenta in the color with a value between 0 and 255. All colors at 0 make white, and all colors at 255 make black.


Specify the proportion of magenta in the color with a value between 0 and 255. All colors at 0 make white, and all colors at 255 make black.


Specify the proportion of yellow in the color with a value between 0 and 255. All colors at 0 make white, and all colors at 255 make black.


Specify the proportion of yellow in the color with a value between 0 and 255. All colors at 0 make white, and all colors at 255 make black.


Specify the proportion of black in the color with a value between 0 and 255. All colors at 0 make white, and all colors at 255 make black.


Specify the proportion of black in the color with a value between 0 and 255. All colors at 0 make white, and all colors at 255 make black.


Click to display an overview an overview about the functionality.


Lets you specify the value that the active control will use.


Displays the minimum, maximum, or smallest increment value you can specify in the Full value box.


Displays the minimum value you can specify in the Full value box.


Displays the maximum value you can specify in the Full value box.


Displays the smallest increment you can specify in the Full value box.


Displays a list of all installed fonts.


Displays a list of all installed fonts.


Displays how your current selections appear in the document.


Lets you choose a font size. Sizes are in points, 72 per inch. The larger the number, the larger the font.


Lets you choose a font size. Sizes are in points, 72 per inch. The larger the number, the larger the font.


Click the Color button, and choose a color for the chosen text.


Click the Color button, and choose a color for the chosen text.


Lets you choose the darkness of text color you want to apply to the chosen font.


Lets you choose the darkness of text color you want to apply to the chosen font.


Lets you choose how characters in the chosen font are positioned relative to other characters.


Lets you choose how characters in the chosen font are positioned relative to other characters.


Lets you choose how characters in the chosen font are sized relative to other characters.


Lets you choose how characters in the chosen font are sized relative to other characters.


Enable the appearance to apply to the chosen text.


Enable to bold the font.


Enable to italicize the font.


Enable to underline the font.


Enable to outline the font.


Enable to shadow the font.


Enable to have font in small caps.


Enable to have font in red.


Enable to have font in red.


Enable to hide the font.


Font settings change the appearance of text. Your changes are displayed in the Preview box.


Enable to the All button in order to have a continuous line underneath the text. Your changes are displayed in the Preview box.


Enable to the Text Only button in order to have a continuous line underneath the text. Your changes are displayed in the Preview box.


Enable to the Text & Spaces button in order to have a continuous line underneath the text. Your changes are displayed in the Preview box.


Enable to the Text & Tabs button in order to have a continuous line underneath the text. Your changes are displayed in the Preview box.


Click the Color button, and choose a color for the chosen text.


Click the Color button, and choose a color for the chosen text.


Enable for the chosen font in order to have the same color as text.


Lets you choose a line style.


Lets you choose a line style.


Type text and apply features in the document window.


Click to view the current tab settings.


Set color Choose the color used to mark your changes.


Set color button/toolbar Lets you examine the changes that others have made to a document. Each person's changes are marked in a different color. You can move from change to change and accept or reject each one, or you can accept or reject all changes.


Other user colors Lists the names of people reviewing the document and the color being used to mark their comments.


Other user colors box Lists the names of people reviewing the document and the color being used to mark their comments.


Show/hide margin markers button Display or hide margin markers.


Display annotations in normal text color button Turn on or off the color display of the changes that have been made in the document.


Close button Closes this dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Other user colors Lists the names of people reviewing the document and the color being used to mark their comments.


Go to previous annotation button Select the previous annotation.


Go to next annotation button Select the next annotation.


Insert the current annotation button Insert the currently-selected annotation into the text of the document.


Insert all the annotations button Inserts all annotations into the document text.


Delete the current annotation button Deletes the currently selected annotation.


Delete all annotations button Deletes all annotations from the document text.


Click this to display an overview of this toolbar.


Creates an envelope using the mailing address from your current document or using the return and mailing address you specify. If you want to create multiple envelopes with the same return addresses but different mailing addresses, you can use the merge feature.


Lets you enter and format a return address.


Opens the address book and lets you select an address.


Opens the Return address font dialog box and lets you change the font and font attributes for the address text.


Lets you edit or type the return address.


Enable to print the return address on the envelope.


Creates an envelope using the mailing address from your current document or using the return and mailing address you specify. If you want to create multiple envelopes with the same return addresses but different mailing addresses, you can use the merge feature.


Opens the address book and lets you select an address.


Lets you enter and format a mailing address.


Opens the POSTNET bar code dialog box and lets you insert a US Postnet bar code on the envelope.


Lets you create and position a POSTNET bar code.


Type a ZIP code to convert to a bar code. Click OK to insert the bar code in the document.


Lets you add a POSTNET bar code.


Lets you create and position a POSTNET bar code.


Enable to insert a POSTNET bar code at the cursor.


Enable to insert a POSTNET bar code at the cursor.


Enable to insert a POSTNET bar code above the address.


Enable to insert a POSTNET bar code below the address.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Opens the Mailing address font dialog box and lets you change the font and font attributes for the address text.


Lets you edit or type the mailing address.


Creates the envelope in a new document.


Prints the envelope without inserting it into a document.


Inserts the envelope on a new page at the end of the current document.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Creates an envelope using the mailing address from your current document or using the return and mailing address you specify. If you want to create multiple envelopes with the same return addresses but different mailing addresses, you can use the merge feature.


Lets you select an envelope paper size.


Lets you select an envelope paper size.


Displays the selected envelope paper size.


Displays the selected envelope paper size.


Opens the New page definition dialog box and lets you create an envelope definition if none of the listed definitions meet your needs.


Opens the Envelope positions dialog box and lets you adjust the starting locations of the return and mailing addresses.


Displays the size of the currently selected envelope.


Lets you specify return address position.


Lets you specify a value to represent the return address distance from the left edge of the page.


Lets you specify a value to represent the return address distance from the left edge of the page.


Lets you specify a value to represent the return address distance from the top edge of the page.


 Lets you specify a value to represent the return address distance from the top edge of the page.


Lets you specify mailing address position.


Lets you specify a value to represent the mailing address distance from the left edge of the page.


Lets you specify a value to represent the mailing address distance from the left edge of the page.


Lets you specify a value to represent the mailing address distance from the top edge of the page.


Lets you specify a value to represent the mailing address distance from the top edge of the page.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Click a format to select it, and click OK to make that format active. You can also delete formats you have created.


 Select an address format for addresses you insert into documents. You can select a format from the list or create your own.


 Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Deletes an address format from the list. You can only delete formats you have created.


Create a custom address format. For example, place the street address on the same line as the person's name to create a list of addresses.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Select an available field to insert into the address format you are creating. These fields are the ones defined in the address book. They are the smallest units in an address.


Click Insert to place a selected field in the Format box at the cursor.


Displays the arrangement of fields for the customized address. Each field is the smallest unit in an address. In the Format box, arrange the fields to get the address format you want.


Type a name for the custom address and click OK. The new address format is added to the Format list so you can use it in the future.


Create a custom address format. For example, place the street address on the same line as the person's name to create a list of addresses.


Displays the arrangement of fields for the customized address. Each field is the smallest unit in an address. In the Format box, arrange the fields to get the address format you want.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Allows you to preview the envelope.


Allows you to preview the envelope.


Allows you to preview the envelope.


Specifies an exact label definition. The label definition formats your document so that you can print on label sheets or rolls.


Laser labels are usually sheets of paper that are fed through a laser printer.


Tractor-fed labels are made on sheets with holes along the sides to guide the labels through the printer.


Sorts the list of labels by type (laser or tractor-fed) or displays all the label definitions in the label file (both).


Select a label definition from this list to format labels correctly.


Select a label definition from this list to format labels correctly.


Previews the currently selected label format.


Specifies an exact label definition. The label definition formats your document so that you can print on label sheets or rolls.


Displays the width and height of the label sheet.


Specify the width and height of individual labels.


Specify how labels are arranged in columns (up and down) and rows (left to right).


Tractor-fed labels are made on sheets with holes along the sides to guide the labels through the printer. Laser labels are usually sheets of paper that are fed through a laser printer.


Displays the current label file. The definitions listed in the Labels box above are contained in this file. Label files have a .lab filename extension.


Lets you choose another label file, which contains other label definitions.


Specifies the location of the label files. A label file contains a group of label definitions (which define the format of the labels).


Specifies the location of the label files. A label file contains a group of label definitions (which define the format of the labels).


Displays all available label files and descriptions. The default WordPerfect label file is Avery labels EN.LAB , where EN represents the two-character language code such as EN for English).


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Adds a new label file (containing a group of label definitions).


Type the name of the label file.


Type the name of the label file.


Type a description for the label file.


Type a description for the label file.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Type the name of the label file.


Type a description for the label file.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Deletes the currently selected label file.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Stops using the label definition. If you turn labels off before filling an entire sheet of labels, blank labels are inserted to fill the entire sheet.


Creates a new label definition that is saved with the current label file.


Describes the label. The label list is sorted by this description.


Creates a new label definition that is saved with the current label file.


Tractor-fed labels are made on sheets with holes along the sides to guide the labels through the printer. Laser labels are usually sheets of paper that are fed through a laser printer.


Tractor-fed labels are made on sheets with holes along the sides to guide the labels through the printer. Laser labels are usually sheets of paper that are fed through a laser printer.


Tractor-fed labels are made on sheets with holes along the sides to guide the labels through the printer. Laser labels are usually sheets of paper that are fed through a laser printer.


Creates a new label definition that is saved with the current label file.


Specifies a page size, paper location (bins, trays, and so on), printing orientation, and printing adjustments.


Creates a new label definition that is saved with the current label file.


Specify the width and height of individual labels.


Specify the width and height of individual labels.


Creates a new label definition that is saved with the current label file.


Specify the location of the top left label (measured from paper edge to label edge).


Specify the location of the top left label (measured from paper edge to label edge).


Creates a new label definition that is saved with the current label file.


Specify how labels are arranged in columns (up and down) and rows (left to right).


Specify how labels are arranged in columns (up and down) and rows (left to right).


Creates a new label definition that is saved with the current label file.


Specifies the horizontal distance between label columns and the vertical distance between label rows. If there is no space between labels, specify 0" and 0".


Specifies the horizontal distance between label columns and the vertical distance between label rows. If there is no space between labels, specify 0" and 0".


Creates a new label definition that is saved with the current label file.


Limit the printable area of each label by setting label margins.


Limit the printable area of each label by setting label margins.


Limit the printable area of each label by setting label margins.


Limit the printable area of each label by setting label margins.


Previews the new label definition.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Click to change the selected label definition


Describes the label. The label list is sorted by this description.


Creates a new label definition that is saved with the current label file.


Tractor-fed labels are made on sheets with holes along the sides to guide the labels through the printer. Laser labels are usually sheets of paper that are fed through a laser printer.


Tractor-fed labels are made on sheets with holes along the sides to guide the labels through the printer. Laser labels are usually sheets of paper that are fed through a laser printer.


Tractor-fed labels are made on sheets with holes along the sides to guide the labels through the printer. Laser labels are usually sheets of paper that are fed through a laser printer.


Creates a new label definition that is saved with the current label file.


Specifies a page size, paper location (bins, trays, and so on), printing orientation, and printing adjustments.


Creates a new label definition that is saved with the current label file.


Specify the width and height of individual labels.


Specify the width and height of individual labels.


Creates a new label definition that is saved with the current label file.


Specify the location of the top left label (measured from paper edge to label edge).


Specify the location of the top left label (measured from paper edge to label edge).


Creates a new label definition that is saved with the current label file.


Specify how labels are arranged in columns (up and down) and rows (left to right).


Specify how labels are arranged in columns (up and down) and rows (left to right).


Creates a new label definition that is saved with the current label file.


Specifies the horizontal distance between label columns and the vertical distance between label rows. If there is no space between labels, specify 0" and 0".


Specifies the horizontal distance between label columns and the vertical distance between label rows. If there is no space between labels, specify 0" and 0".


Creates a new label definition that is saved with the current label file.


Limit the printable area of each label by setting label margins.


Limit the printable area of each label by setting label margins.


Limit the printable area of each label by setting label margins.


Limit the printable area of each label by setting label margins.


Previews the new label definition.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Removes the label definition from the selected label file.


Click Yes to perform the action


Click No to cancel the action.


 Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Graphics boxes, lines, borders, and fill come with a predefined style (look). You can customize a style for use one time, or you can create a style for use with other graphics.


Defines the caption, position, size, border/fill, and settings used for a graphic image.


Defines the line that surrounds paragraphs, columns, pages, graphics, or drop caps.


Defines the line color, pattern, thickness, and spacing, for lines used in borders, tables, and graphics lines.


Defines the background shading, color, and pattern for a fill style that can be used for paragraphs, columns, pages, tables, and graphics.


Displays the box styles associated with the project template, both predefined styles and any you have created.


Select a location for the displayed styles. Styles are associated with the default project template unless you specify a different location.


Graphics boxes, lines, borders, and fill come with a predefined style (look). You can customize a style for use one time, or you can create a style for use with other graphics.


Displays border, line, and fill styles.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Create a new style and add it to the list of styles for the selected template location.


Graphics styles_Create box style db


Give the style a short name to help you identify it in the list of styles.


Add a caption to a graphics box to describe its contents.


Add a caption to a graphics box to describe its contents.


Choose the side of the box to place the caption on (left, right, top, or bottom).


Display the caption inside or outside the box border.


Place the caption at the left, right, or center of the side it is on.


Place the caption at the left, right, or center of the side it is on.


Shifts the caption from the position you have currently selected. A positive number moves the caption forward. A negative number moves the caption backward. For example, if the caption position is Left, 0.5" moves the caption one-half inch from the left margin.


Shift the caption text from its current position. Specify a percentage of the width or height of the box. For example, specify 25% to move the caption one-fourth of the length of the box.


Add a caption to a graphics box to describe its contents.


Adjusts the width of a caption based on the caption length and the width or height of the box.


Specify a width measurement for the caption. This cannot be larger than the width or height of the box.


Specify a caption width using a percentage of the width or height of the box. For example, specify 50% to make the caption half as long as the box.


Rotate a caption in a graphics box.


The caption runs parallel with the bottom of the box.


Rotates the caption 90 degrees, which makes the letters read vertically instead of horizontally.


Rotates the caption 180 degrees, which turns the letters upside down.


Rotates the box caption 270 degrees, which makes the letters read vertically instead of horizontally.


Preview a graphics box caption.


Places the insertion point in the caption so you can edit the text of the caption.


Add a caption to a graphics box to describe its contents.


Select a caption numbering method and style.


The current box numbering style. For example, the Figure numbering style is Figure 1, Figure 2, an so on.


Lists the types of counters available. The list includes five predefined system counters that number boxes used in the graphics and equations features.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


The current caption numbering style.


The current caption numbering style.


Select a style from the list that you want to apply, change, or save to a file.


Lists available styles in the current document.


Lets you preview the selected style from the Available styles list box.


Lets you preview the selected style from the Available styles list box.


Character styles affect the text between the style codes. Paragraph styles apply to entire paragraphs. Paragraph (auto) styles apply to paragraphs and are updated when you edit text within the style (rather than use the styles editor). Open styles apply to all text after the cursor.


The template where the styles are found. To change the location, click Options [image] Setup.


A brief description of the selected style.


Character styles affect the text between the style codes. Paragraph styles apply to entire paragraphs. Paragraph (auto) styles apply to paragraphs and are updated when you edit text within the style (rather than use the styles editor). Open styles apply to all text after the cursor.


The template where the styles are found. To change the location, click Options [image] Setup.


A brief description of the selected style.


Use Styles Editor to create a style and add it to this list.


Give the style a short name to help you identify it in the list of styles.


Give the style a short name to help you identify it in the list of styles.


Type a brief description to help you identify the style.


Type a brief description to help you identify the style.


Choose the style you would like to insert.


Choose the style you would like to insert.


Select a style type. A character style applies to selected text or text you type within the style codes. Paragraph styles apply to paragraphs. An open style applies to all text in your document from that point forward.


Select a style type. A character style applies to selected text or text you type within the style codes. Paragraph styles apply to paragraphs. An open style applies to all text in your document from that point forward.


Enable to update styles automatically whenever you make changes to them in a document. For instance, if you have this check box enabled and you change the font in a Heading 1 style from Times to Helvetica all of the Heading 1 styles in your document will use Helvetica automatically.


In the Contents box, insert the codes and text you want to use in the style. You can choose items from the Styles editor menu bar, press keystrokes, and type text.


Will illustrate the reveal code in the Contents box. To display only text, deselect this box.


Select this option to insert codes after a paired style ends. Add the codes in the Contents text box after the ON/OFF comment.


Select this option to make the selected style the default.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Use the styles editor to edit the selected style.


Create a style based on the format of text at the cursor.


Use the menu to edit a style


Type a name for the new style.


Type a brief description to help you identify the style.


Create a style based on the formatting in effect at the cursor.


Applies the style to the paragraph at the cursor. This is useful for headings.


Applies the style to selected text or text you are about to type.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Specify the source of styles for the list. Copy, delete, or reset a style, or save and retrieve styles.


Displays the styles found in the current document.


Displays the styles found in your default template file, as specified in the file settings.


Enable to display system styles.


Enable to display the styles for many WordPerfect features, such as footnotes, hypertext, and tables of contents. If you deselect this box, only the standard document styles (headings and initial style) and the styles you have created are displayed.


Enable to display WordPerfect system styles, such as styles for footnotes, hypertext, table of contents, headers and footers, numbering, and so on.


Displays the styles found in the template file that is listed as your additional objects template in the file settings.


Specify where to save new styles.


Saves the styles you create to the current document.


Saves the styles you create to the default template file, as specified in the file settings.


Saves the styles you create to the template file that is listed as your additional objects template in the file settings.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


You can copy styles to the current document, the default template, or the additional objects template. The default template and additional objects template are specified in the file settings.


Copies the styles to the document you currently have open.


Copies the styles to the template listed as the default template file in the file settings.


Copies styles to the template file listed as the additional objects template in the file settings.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Select a style to delete.


Choose whether to leave the codes that retain the formatting created by the style.


Deletes the style and any codes that are part of the style.


Deletes the style, but leaves the codes that are part of the style to preserve the format created by the style. For example, leaves any bolded items bolded.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


The name of the file you want to save styles to or retrieve them from.


The type of file you want to retrieve styles from.


 Include both styles you have created and styles for WordPerfect features.


 Include only the styles you have created.


Include only styles for WordPerfect features.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


The name of the file you want to save styles to.


The type of file you want to save styles to.


Include both styles you have created and styles for WordPerfect features.


Include only the styles you have created.


Include only styles for WordPerfect features.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Lets you insert the selected style from the Available styles list box.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


The current caption numbering style.


Select different numbering styles for captions.


Edit the contents of the box.


Select the contents type for the box. You can create an empty box, a box for text, an image, an equation, or for an image on disk or an OLE object. You must place the contents in the box.


Select the content position for the box.


Place the contents at the left, right, or center of the box.


Place the contents at the left, right, or center of the box.


Place the contents at the top, center, or bottom of the box.


Place the contents at the top, center, or bottom of the box.


Select the rotation of the box content


The text in a text box runs parallel with the top of the page.


Rotates the text in a text box 90 degrees.


Rotates the text in a text box 180 degrees (upside down).


Rotates the text in a text box 270 degrees.


Maintains the image's original proportions. When you select this the image does not become distorted, but it might not fill the entire box.


Enable to prevent the box from printing.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


You can attach a box to a page (the box stays where you put it on the page), paragraph (the box moves with the paragraph), or character (the box is positioned like a letter in the line of text).


You can attach a box to a page, paragraph, or character. The position is measured in relation to the page, paragraph, or the current line of text.


You can attach a box to a page (the box stays where you put it on the page).


Select an item (right margin, left margin, etc.), and set the horizontal distance between that item and the left side of the box.


Select an item (right margin, left margin, etc.), and set the horizontal distance between that item and the left side of the box.


Select the page location from which you want to measure the box position.


Select the page location from which you want to measure the box position.


Select an item (bottom margin, top of page, etc.), and set the vertical distance between that item and the top of the box.


Select an item (bottom margin, top of page, etc.), and set the vertical distance between that item and the top of the box.


Select the page location from which you want to measure the box position.


Select the page location from which you want to measure the box position.


Specify the columns across which you want to put the box. You must select a column position from the Horizontal pop-up list to put the box across columns.


Specify the columns across which you want to put the box. You must select a column position from the Horizontal pop-up list to put the box across columns.


Specify the columns across which you want to put the box. You must select a column position from the Horizontal pop-up list to put the box across columns.


Specify the columns across which you want to put the box. You must select a column position from the Horizontal pop-up list to put the box across columns.


Keeps the graphics box where you put it on the page. Text will flow around it as you edit the document, but the box will not move.


You can attach a box to a page (the box stays where you put it on the page), paragraph (the box moves with the paragraph), or character (the box is positioned like a letter in the line of text).


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


You can attach a box to a paragraph (the box moves with the paragraph).


 Select an item (right margin, left margin, etc.), and set the horizontal distance between that item and the left side of the box.


Select an item (right margin, left margin, etc.), and set the horizontal distance between that item and the left side of the box.


Select the page location from which you want to measure the box position.


Select the page location from which you want to measure the box position.


Set the vertical distance you want between the box and the top of the paragraph.


Set the vertical distance you want between the box and the top of the paragraph.


Set the vertical distance you want between the box and the top of the paragraph.


Enable to allow the box to change independently of any other cells in the table.


Enable to position box at the cursor.


You can attach a box to a character (the box is positioned like a letter in the line of text).


Put the top of the box even with the top of the text.


Centers the box so half is above the baseline and half below.


Enable to center the box with the baseline.


Place the bottom of the box on the baseline.


Enable to align the bottom of the box with the baseline.


Aligns the box contents with the baseline. For example, if an image is in the box, the bottom of the image lines up with the baseline.


Lets you place a character box in a precise vertical position on the line. This is useful in aligning the figures in an equation.


Set a number that represents the percentage of the box that you want to move above the baseline. For example, 0.50 centers the box, while 0.60 puts 60 percent of the box above the baseline.


Adjusts the line height to match the height of the box. This ensures that lines of text do not overwrite the graphic.


Enable to position the box at the left margin.


Enable to position the box at the right margin.


Graphics styles_create box styles size


Use measurements to size a graphics box.


Set the width of a graphics box.


Set a measurement for the box width.


Set a measurement for the box width.


Sizes the graphics box to the full page width, from the left to right margin. In a column, the box fills the width of a column.


Adjust the width of the box to keep the original proportions of the image.


Set the height of a graphics box.


Set a measurement for the box height.


Set a measurement for the box height.


Sizes the graphics box to the full page height, from the top to bottom margin.


Adjust the height of the box to keep the original proportions of the image.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


 Defines the line that surrounds paragraphs, columns, pages, graphics, or drop caps.


Removes the border.


Select a border. The currently selected border is displayed in the preview box.


The name of the currently selected border.


Select a border color. The border is displayed in that color in the preview box.


Select a border color. The border is displayed in that color in the preview box.


Choose the type of line used in the box border.


Choose the type of line used in the box border.


Displays the selected border as it will appear in the document.


Select a different fancy borders folder.


Select a different fancy borders folder.


Exit the dialog box and save any changes.


Exit the dialog box without saving any changes.


Save the changes you have made without exiting the dialog box. You can select other options.


Click this to display an overview of this dialog box.


Lets you choose and customize a drop shadow.


Select a direction for a drop shadow.


Lets you preview the drop shadow as it will appear in the document.


Lets you choose and customize a drop shadow.


Lets you specify the height for a drop shadow.


Lets you specify the height for a drop shadow.


Lets you specify the width for a drop shadow.


Lets you specify the width for a drop shadow.


Lets you select the color for a drop shadow.


Lets you select the color for a drop shadow.


Set spacing around the box border, set the drop shadow color and width, and select a gradient. Your selections are displayed in the preview box.


Set the space between the image and the edge of the box.


Set the space between the edge of the box and the text in the document.


Enable to create a box with rounded corners.


Select a gradient pattern for the background you have chosen.


Select a gradient pattern for the background you have chosen.


Offset the gradient design vertically. The preview box displays how the design will appear in the document.


Offset the gradient design vertically. The preview box displays how the design will appear in the document.


Offset the gradient design horizontally. The preview box displays how the design will appear in the document.


Offset the gradient design horizontally. The preview box displays how the design will appear in the document.


Rotate the gradient pattern in the background. The preview box displays the current pattern.


Rotate the gradient pattern in the background. The preview box displays the current pattern.


Determines how rounded the corners are for a border with rounded corners. The higher the number you set, the rounder the curve.


Determines how rounded the corners are for a border with rounded corners. The higher the number you set, the rounder the curve.


Displays the currently selected background as it will appear in the document.


Set the space between the image and the edge of the box.


Set the space between the edge of the box and the text in the document.


Select a background. The currently selected background is displayed in the Preview box.


The name of the currently selected fill or background.


Select a fill foreground color.


Select a color for the foreground you have chosen.


Select a background color for the fill you have chosen. The background color is displayed in the Preview box.


Select a background color for the fill you have chosen. The background color is displayed in the Preview box.


Choose a pattern for the background.


Choose a pattern for the background.


Displays the current fill as it will appear in the document.


Choose how to position (wrap) text around the graphics box.


 Choose how to position (wrap) text around the graphics box.


Text lines up straight against the left and right edges of the box.


 Shows the square wrapping type.


Text follows the contour of an image, which removes white space. Standard border lines are removed. If the box has rounded corners, text is contoured to the box. If the box has top and bottom lines, those lines stay intact.


Shows  the contour wrapping type.


Text does not flow around the graphics box. Space on both sides of the box is left blank.


Shows  the neither side wrapping type.


Text flows through the graphics box. This can print text over the image, as with a watermark.


Shows the behind text wrapping type.


Text flows behind the graphics box.


Shows the in front of text wrapping type.


Choose how to position (wrap) text around the graphics box.


Text flows on the side of the graphics box that has the most white space.


Shows text wrapped around the largest side of a graphics box.


Text flows on the left side of the graphics box.


Shows text wrapped around the left side of a graphics box.


Text flows on the right side of the graphics box.


Shows text wrapped around the right side of a graphics box.


Text flows on both sides of the graphics box.


Shows text wrapped around both sides of a graphics box.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Opens the Text box default style dialog box and lets you keep or change the default style for text in a text box.


Defines the caption, position, size, border/fill, and settings used for a graphic image.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Shows what the box is attached to. You can attach a box to a page, paragraph, or character. The position is measured in relation to the page, paragraph, or the current line of text.


Shows the contents type for the box.


Shows the box height.


Shows the graphics box position from a margin or edge of page for a box attached to a paragraph or page.


Shows the graphics box position from the top of a paragraph if the box is attached to a paragraph or shows the position from the margins if the box is attached to a page.


Shows the box width.


Give the style a short name to help you identify it in the list of styles.


The name of the style.


Add a caption to a graphics box to describe its contents.


Edit the contents of the box.


You can attach a box to a page (the box stays where you put it on the page), paragraph (the box moves with the paragraph), or character (the box is positioned like a letter in the line of text).


Use measurements to size a graphics box.


Defines the line that surrounds paragraphs, columns, pages, graphics, or drop caps.


Choose how to position (wrap) text around the graphics box.


Choose to let you change the style.


Change how the graphic images look in your document.


Enable to move the image in the graphics box.


Move the image in the graphics box.


Specify a value to move the image. A positive number moves the image right; a negative numbers moves the image left.


Specify a value to move the image. A positive number moves the image right; a negative numbers moves the image left.


Specify a value to move the image. A positive number moves the image up; a negative number moves the image down.


Specify a value to move the image. A positive number moves the image up; a negative number moves the image down.


Enable to change the size of the image.


Change the size of the image.


Specify a scale height in multiples of the original height. If scale height and width are not the same, the image will be distorted.


Specify a scale height in multiples of the original height. If scale height and width are not the same, the image will be distorted.


Specify a scale height in multiples of the original height. If scale height and width are not the same, the image will be distorted.


Specify a scale height in multiples of the original height. If scale height and width are not the same, the image will be distorted.


Specify a scale size in a multiple of the original size.


Specify a scale size in a multiple of the original size.


Enable  to rotate the image.


Rotate the image.


Specify the number of degrees you want to rotate an image. To rotate an image so that the top is at the left side, specify 90 degrees. To flip an image so that it is upside down, specify 180 degrees. To rotate an image so that the top is at the right side, specify 270 degrees.


Specify the number of degrees you want to rotate an image. To rotate an image so that the top is at the left side, specify 90 degrees. To flip an image so that it is upside down, specify 180 degrees. To rotate an image so that the top is at the right side, specify 270 degrees.


Enable to flip or reverse the image.


Flip or reverse the image.


Enable to flip or reverse the image on its horizontal axis.


Enable to flip or reverse the image on its vertical axis.


Enable to change the brightness or contrast, or invert the colors.


Change how the graphic images look in your document.


Enable to change the colors in an image to their complementary colors.


Click a button representing the contrast or specify a value from -1 (no contrast) to 1 (highest contrast).


. Click a button representing the contrast or specify a value from -1 (no contrast) to 1 (highest contrast).


Click a button representing the contrast or specify a value from -1 (no contrast) to 1 (highest contrast).


Click a button representing the brightness or specify a value between -1 (black) and 1 (white).


Click a button representing the brightness or specify a value between -1 (black) and 1 (white).


Click a button representing the brightness or specify a value between -1 (black) and 1 (white).


Enable to convert a color image to black and white and set the blackness threshold for the image.


 Convert a color image to black and white and set the blackness threshold for the image.


Enable to change the image to black and white.


Set the blackness threshold. Any color that is darker than the threshold is displayed as solid black.


Preview the blackness threshold. Any color that is darker than the threshold is displayed as solid black.


Set the blackness threshold. Any color that is darker than the threshold is displayed as solid black.


Enable to make an image transparent so that the background shows through the image, or convert an image to an outline with a white fill.


Make an image transparent so that the background shows through the image, or convert an image to an outline with a white fill.


Enable to show the normal fill color for the graphics image.


Show the normal fill color for the graphics image.


Enable to convert the image to an outline so the document background shows through.


Convert the image to an outline so the document background shows through.


Enable to convert the image to an outline and fill with white.


Convert the image to an outline and fill with white.


Enable to use the page color for the image background.


Use the page color for the image background.


Enable to use the page color for the image background.


Change how the graphic images look in your document.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Restore an image to its original appearance.


Select halftone options, or a dither method or source.


Change how the image will print. Select dither methods or sources, which define how images blend colors or shades of gray.


Use a random pattern of dots to create smoother transitions in color and gray-scale images. This method provides good image detail with bitmap images.


Use ordered patterns of pixels to simulate colors or shades of gray. This method is for use with bitmap or vector images.


Use evenly spaced dots of variable diameter to simulate colors or shades of gray. With bitmap or vector images, this method provides good image detail, produces good photocopies, and prints the most rapidly.


Use the default dither method for the printer you are using, and apply the method to all graphics.


Change how the image will print. Select dither methods or sources, which define how images blend colors or shades of gray.


Have WordPerfect enhance image colors.


Have the Windows printer driver or the printer enhance the image colors.


Let WordPerfect choose where the image is converted for final printing. Apply the dither source to all graphics.


Change how the image will print. Select halftone options, which define the clearness of the image.


Specify in degrees (0 - 360) the pattern orientation of a printed halftone image.


Enable to use the default angle for the printer you are using, and apply it to all graphics.


Use a lower value to increase the number of shades in a halftone image. Use a higher value to decrease the size of the dots in a halftone image, which improves image sharpness.


Enable to use the default lines per inch for the printer you are using, and apply this setting to all graphics.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Lists the name of the style that is currently being used to define the text in text boxes you create.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Opens the Styles dialog box and lets you change the default style for text in a text box.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Displays the settings for the current page.


Displays a list of all installed fonts.


This is how your current selections will appear.


Lets you choose a font size. Sizes are in points, 72 per inch. The larger the number, the larger the font.


Lets you choose a font size. Sizes are in points, 72 per inch. The larger the number, the larger the font.


Click the Color button, and choose a color for the chosen text.


Click the Color button, and choose a color for the chosen text.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Graphics styles_options


Copy, delete, reset, rename, retrieve, or save styles.


Type a unique name for the style you are creating.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Type a unique name for the style you are creating.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Saves the styles as a separate file. You can retrieve them into new documents. The styles are also stored with the document template.


Retrieves a style file or the styles from another document into the current document. When you do this, all styles in the style file or document are saved with the current document.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Saves the styles as a separate file. You can retrieve them into new documents. The styles are also stored with the document template.


Saves the styles as a separate file. You can retrieve them into new documents. The styles are also stored with the document template.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Shows what the box is attached to. You can attach a box to a page, paragraph, or character. The position is measured in relation to the page, paragraph, or the current line of text.


Shows the contents type for the box.


Shows the box height.


Shows the graphics box position from a margin or edge of page for a box attached to a paragraph or page.


Shows the graphics box position from the top of a paragraph if the box is attached to a paragraph or shows the position from the margins if the box is attached to a page.


Shows the box width.


Creates a line that extends left to right.


Creates a line that extends top to bottom.


Customize the appearance, length, and position of a graphics line.


Previews the graphics line.


Select a line style for the border. To use a style not on the palette or list, click Line styles.


Select a line style for the border. To use a style not on the palette or list, click Line styles.


Select a color from the palette to change the color of the line.


Select a color from the palette to change the color of the line.


Change the thickness of the line.


Change the thickness of the line.


Specify the amount of white space between the line and the text above it.


Specify the amount of white space between the line and the text above it.


Specify the amount of space between the line and the text below it.


Specify the amount of space between the line and the text below it.


Specify the length of the line.


Specify the length of the line.


Choose a position (left, right, or centered), or choose Set, and specify a distance from the left edge of the page. To extend the line from the left to right margin, choose Full.


Choose a position (left, right, or centered), or choose Set and specify a distance from the left edge of the page. To extend the line from the left to right margin, choose Full.


Choose Baseline to place the bottom edge of the line on the text baseline, or choose Set and specify the distance between the line and the top of the page.


Choose Baseline to place the bottom edge of the line on the text baseline, or choose Set and specify the distance between the line and the top of the page.


Previews line attributes.


Uses the thickness specified in the current line style.


Choose a position, or choose Set and specify a distance from the left edge of the page. To extend the line from the left to right margin, choose Full.


Choose a position, or choose Set and specify a distance from the left edge of the page. To extend the line from the left to right margin, choose Full.


Choose Baseline to place the bottom edge of the line on the text baseline, or choose Set and specify the distance between the line and the top of the page.


Choose a position, or choose Set and specify a distance from the left edge of the page. To extend the line from the left to right margin, choose Full.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Create, edit, or retrieve a line style.


Displays the box styles associated with the template, both predefined styles and any you have created.


Displays the box styles associated with the template, both predefined styles and any you have created.


Select a location for the displayed styles. Styles are associated with the default template unless you specify a different location.


Select a location for the displayed styles. Styles are associated with the default template unless you specify a different location.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Create a new style and add it to the list of styles for the selected template location.


Give the style a short name to help you identify it in the list of styles.


Create or edit a line style.


Select a color from the palette to change the color of the line.


Select a predefined line pattern or create a customized line pattern by adjusting dash and space lengths.


Specify the width of the line.


Specify the amount of space between the line and the text below it.


Displays how the line style will appear.


Adds another line (the same style as the current line) next to the current line.


Removes the line that has an arrow pointing to it in the box above.


After you add another line, you can move the arrow to select the line you want to edit or delete.


After you add another line, you can move the arrow to select the line you want to edit or delete.


Create or edit a line style.


Enable to make the corners of wavy lines squared.


Enable to make the corners of wavy lines pointed.


Lets you specify the line width of wavy lines.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Lists the name of the style.


Lists the name of the style.


Copy, delete, reset, rename, retrieve, or save styles.


Type a unique name for the style you are creating.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Saves the styles as a separate file. You can retrieve them into new documents. The styles are also stored with the document template.


Browse to choose a file from the select file dialog box.


Browse to choose a file from the select file dialog box.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Displays the measurements for the dashes and the spaces between the dashes.


Adds the measurements for another dash so you can make that dash different from the first dash. The two dash sizes will alternate in the line.


Removes a dash from the list. You need to have at least two dashes to use this option.


Specify the length of the dash.


Specify the amount of space between each dash.


Displays dash and space lengths for a line style.


Lets you choose a border. The Preview box displays the currently selected border.


Lets you choose an available border style.


Lets you choose a background fill. The Preview box displays the currently selected fill.


Lets you choose an available background fill.


Lets you choose how to position (wrap) text around the graphics box.


Lets you choose how to position (wrap) text around the graphics box. The Preview box displays how text wraps around the graphic box currently.


 Lets you attach a graphics box to a page, paragraph, or character. The position of the graphic box is measured in relation to the page, paragraph, or the current line of text.


 Displays the Box position dialog box. This dialog box lets you choose a page, paragraph, or character to which to attach a graphics box, and the horizontal and vertical position of the box.


Lets you choose and save a box style.


Lets you choose a preset graphics box style for the box surrounding a graphic.


Lets you save a custom graphics box with the attributes you want. After you choose a preset graphics box style, if you change the box size, border, fill, and so on you can save these changes as a style with a new name.


Displays the Box caption dialog box which lets you specify the graphic box caption position, width, rotation, and numbering method and style.


Displays the Box content dialog box which lets you choose the contents type for the box, and the content position. It also lets you rotate the text.


Displays the Box size dialog box which lets you specify the width and height of the graphic box.


Displays the Image tools dialog box, which lets you rotate, flip, and move an image. You can also convert a color image to black and white, adjust the contrast and brightness between image colors, adjust the fill, and edit contents and attributes.


Selects the previous graphic in the document.


Selects the next graphic in the document.


Rotate the image within the image box.


Move the image within the image box.


Flip or reverse the image on its vertical axis.


Flip or reverse the image on its horizontal axis.


Zoom in or out on the image, or display the image at its actual size.


Convert a color image to black and white and set the blackness threshold for the image. Gray values darker than the threshold are converted to black; lighter values are converted to white.


Adjust the contrast between the colors in the image.


Adjust the brightness of the image colors.


# HID_WDID_IMAGETOOLS_WDID_IMAGETOOLS_FILLKeep the image fill colors, make the image transparent so the background shows through the image, or convert the image to an outline with a white fill.


Change the colors in the image to their complementary colors.


Launch the OLE server for the image to use more extensive image editing and drawing capabilities.


Provides access to all attributes settings in one dialog box.


Restore the image to its original appearance.


Select the graphics box style you want to apply to the current box.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Type the text you want displayed when graphics are turned off in the browser.


Shows where the graphic is located on your computer or local network.


Browsers use Base URLs to locate images, Java applets, or sound clips inserted in the document with a relative path. For example, you might specify the base URL as http://myserver/mydocument for graphics files located in http://myserver/mydocument/graphics. This allows you move the HTML document itself without moving the folders containing the associated files.


Specify the format you want any non-GIF or non-JPEG images converted to.


Specify the format you want any non-GIF or non-JPEG images converted to.


Specify the format you want any non-GIF or non-JPEG images converted to.


Specify the quality level for the image.


Specify the quality level for the image.


Specify the quality level for the image.


Specify the quality level for the image.


Specify the quality level for the image.


Images typically appear top-to-bottom as they download. Click to download graphics so that a rough image appears first, with details  appearing as it downloads. It takes the same amount of time to download the image, but the image can actually be usable before all the details are downloaded.


Click to change the white space that appears around an image, such as a company logo, so it matches the page background.


Lets you choose a color that matches the page background color.


Click to choose a color that matches the page background color.


Closes this dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of this dialog box.


Create a link to other web documents or bookmarks.


Lets you create a link to a local file, macro, or URL.


Lets you create a link to a local file, macro, or URL.


Specify a bookmark in the current document as the link.


Specify a bookmark in the current document as the link.


Specify the frame of an HTML document as the destination for a link.


Launches the default browser.


Create a graphics box with any available box style. You can define or change the box style.


Create a graphics box with any available box style. You can define or change the box style.


When you select a box style, the window next to the list illustrates what that box looks like.


You can attach a box to a page, paragraph, or character. The position is measured in relation to the page, paragraph, or the current line of text.


Shows what the default content is for the box: empty, image, text, or equation. You can add any content type when you create and edit the box.


Shows the height of the box according to the selected box style.


Shows the graphics box position from a margin or edge of page for a box attached to a paragraph or page.


Shows where the box will be placed according to the selected box style. This position is in relation to the page or paragraph, or to the baseline for boxes placed as characters.


Shows the width of the box according to the selected box style.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Graphics boxes, lines, borders, and fill come with a predefined style (look). You can customize a style for use one time, or you can create a style for use with other graphics.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Displays the box styles associated with the template, both predefined styles and any you have created.


Displays the box styles associated with the template, both predefined styles and any you have created.


Displays the box styles associated with the template, both predefined styles and any you have created.


Select a location for the displayed styles. Styles are associated with the default template unless you specify a different location.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Create a new style and add it to the list of styles for the selected template location.


Change the selected graphics style. The change applies to all occurrences of the style in the current and future documents. To update existing documents, you must copy the style into the template of each document.


Copy, delete, reset, rename, retrieve, or save styles.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


The toolbar provides quick access to commonly used features. To change which toolbar displays or to add or delete buttons from the current toolbar, right-click the bar, then click Settings.


The toolbar provides quick access to commonly used features. To change which toolbar displays or to add or delete buttons from the current toolbar, right-click the bar, then click Settings.


Select a variable from the list that you want to insert, edit, or save to a file.


Lists available variables in the current document.


Lists available variables in the current document.


Lists available variables in the current document.


Lets you preview the selected variable from the Available variables list box.


Lets you preview the selected variable from the Available variables list box.


Use the variables editor to create a variable and add it to this list.


Use the variables editor to edit the selected variable.


Lets you copy variables from the current document or from the default or additional objects template.


Deletes the selected variable


Lets you find variables that you previously inserted into a document.


Lets you find variables that you previously inserted into a document.


Lets you retrieve a variable.


Lets you select where to save a variable.


Inserts the variable into the document.


Opens the variables Options menu.


Give the variable a short name to help you identify it in the list of variables.


Give the variable a short name to help you identify it in the list of variables.


Type a brief description to help you identify the variable.


Type a brief description to help you identify the variable.


In the Contents box, insert the codes and text you want to use in the variable. You can choose items from the variables editor menu, press keystrokes, and type text.


Will illustrate the reveal code in the Contents box. To display only text, deselect this box.


Select this option to insert codes after a paired style ends. Add the codes in the Contents text box after the ON/OFF comment.


Use the menu items to edit a variable.


Deletes the variable and any codes that are part of the variable.


Deletes the variable, but leaves the codes that are part of the variable to preserve the format created by the variable. For example, leaves any bolded items bolded.


The name of the file you want to retrieve the variable from or save the variable to.


The name of the file you want to retrieve the variable from or save the variable to.


The name of the file you want to retrieve the variable from or save the variable to.


Lets you copy variables from the current document or from the default or additional objects template.


Lets you save the styles you create to the current document.


Lets you save the styles you create to the default template.


Lets you save the styles you create to the template file you chose as your additional objects template.


Lets you copy variables from the current document or from the default or additional objects template.


Displays a list of variables you can delete.


Lets you specify options for deleting variables.


Lets you specify which variables you want to display in the Variables list.


Lets you specify which variables you want to display in the Variables list.


Lets you specify which variables you want to display in the Variables list.


Lets you specify which variables you want to display in the Variables list.


Lets you specify where to save new variables.


Lets you specify where to save new variables.


Lets you specify where to save new variables.


Lets you specify where to save new variables.


Lets you type a variable name.


Lets you type a variable name.


Distribute the selected objects horizontally by spacing their left edges, right edges, and center points evenly, or by placing equal spaces between them.


Enable to distribute the selected objects horizontally by spacing their left edges evenly.


Enable to distribute the selected objects horizontally by spacing their center points evenly.


Enable to distribute the selected objects horizontally by spacing their right edges evenly.


Enable to distribute the selected objects horizontally by placing equal spaces between them.


Distribute the selected objects vertically by spacing their top edges, bottom edges, and center points evenly, or by placing equal spaces between them.


Enable to distribute the selected objects vertically by spacing their top edges evenly.


Enable to distribute the selected objects vertically by spacing their center points evenly.


Enable to distribute the selected objects vertically by spacing their bottom edges evenly.


Enable to distribute the selected objects vertically by placing equal spaces between them.


Distribute objects to the extent of the selection, page, or column.


Enable to distribute the selected objects to the extent of the marquee box that surrounds them when they are selected.


Enable to distribute the selected objects to the extent of the current page.


Enable to distribute the selected objects to the extent of the column.


Cancels the current action.


Use the Scroll bar to slide the box to move through the text.


Lets you browse to the previous occurrence of a page, table, box, footnote, endnote, heading, edit position, and comment.


Lets you browse through a document by page, table, box, footnote, endnote, heading, edit position, and comment.


Lets you browse to the next occurrence of a page, table, box, footnote, endnote, heading, edit position, and comment.


Change the items on the menu or specify a new one.


The toolbar provides quick access to commonly used features. To change which toolbar displays or add or delete buttons from the current toolbar, right-click the bar then click Settings.


The Property Bar provides quick access to commonly used features. To change which items display, right-click the bar click Edit.


Drag the triangles to change the tabs. Drag the margin markers to adjust the margins.


TASK BAR, APPLICATION BAR, TITLE BAR (see Map 2)


Click to restore WordPerfect on your desktop.


Displays information about the documents open in WordPerfect. To change the items that appear on the Application Bar, right-click the bar click Settings.


Displays the application name and filename of the document.


Represents the linked spreadsheet/database. You can click the icon to see the path for the link.


A comment icon represents comment text when you view a document in Page or Two Page mode. You can click the icon to see comment text, double-click to edit the comment, or right-click to use other options.


Type the text or codes you want to find.


Type the text or codes you want to find.


Type the text with which you want to replace the old text.


Type the text with which you want to replace the old text.


Finds the next occurrence of the text, searching forward from the cursor.


Finds the first previous occurrence of the search text, searching backward from the cursor.


Selects the text the first time it is found, and replaces the text each time you click Replace.


Finds and replaces each occurrence of the text.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Lists the codes for which you can search.


Lists the codes for which you can search.


Specify the number of times to replace the search text.


Specify the number of times to replace the search text.


Lets you move the cursor to specific sections of your document.


Lets you move the cursor to specific sections of your document.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Finds the first occurrence in your document, searching forward from the cursor.


Finds the last occurrence in your document, searching backward from the cursor.


Finds the previous occurrence in your document.


Finds the next occurrence in your document, searching forward from the cursor.


Allows you to select a specific section of text in your document.


Allows you to select a specific range of text in your document.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Inserts a number for every line of text after the cursor.


Specify whether line numbers print as numbers, letters, or Roman numerals.


Specify whether line numbers print as numbers, letters, or Roman numerals.


Specify the number that is assigned to the first line.


Specify the number assigned to the first numbered line of text.


Specify the first line number to print.


Specify the first line number that prints. For example, specify 5 to start printing line numbers on line 5.


Specify the interval between printed line numbers. For example, specify 3 to print a line number on every third line.


Specify the interval between printed line numbers.


Specify the position of numbers on the page.


Specify the distance from the left edge of the page (or from the center of the space between columns) to the line number.


Specify the distance from the left edge of the page (or from the center of the space between columns) to the line number.


Specify the distance from the left margin to the line number.


Specify whether line numbers will begin again with the starting line number at the top of each page.


Click to include, or exclude, blank lines in line numbering.


Number the lines in each column in the document.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Lets you change the appearance and size of line numbers.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Displays the line numbering as it appears in the document.


Specify the outline level for paragraph numbers.


Specify the outline level for paragraph numbers.


Specify the start value for paragraph numbers.


Specify the start value for paragraph numbers.


Specify the number type for paragraph numbers.


Specify the number type for paragraph numbers.


Automatically starts new paragraph numbers.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Allows you to modify the format of paragraph numbers.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Specify an outline/list name for paragraph numbers.


Specify a description for paragraph numbers.


Specify the type of numbered list for paragraph numbers.


Specify single level list is for numbered paragraphs or bulleted lists.


Specify multi level list is for an outline or multi-level list.


Specify a definition for an outline/list.


Assign a specific number set for an outline/list.


 Assign a specific number set for an outline/list.


Specify the text to display before the number set.


Specify the text to display before the number set.


Specify the appearence of numbers in the number set.


Specify the appearance of numbers in the number set.


Specify the style of the number set.


Specify the style of the number set.


Specify the amount of leading zeros in the number set.


Specify the amount of leading zeros in the number set.


Specify the display of the number set.


Specify the display of the number set.


Create a custom style for a number set.


Edit a custom style for a number set.


Specify the part of the document to be edited.


Specify if Reveal codes are to be displayed.


Specify if a style is to be entered.


Automatically updates style when changed in the document.


Displays all codes in document.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


 #Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Specify a QuickWord for the selected text.


Lists the QuickWords you can type in the document. You can click a QuickWord in this list and click Insert In Text to insert the expanded form at the insertion point.


Displays the information represented by the QuickWord.


Inserts the expanded QuickWord when you type it and press the SPACEBAR, ENTER, or TAB. If a QuickWord is longer than two words it cannot be expanded as you type. If you do not select this option, you can expand a QuickWord in the document by selecting the QuickWord and pressing CTRL + SHIFT + A.


Add a QuickWord to the list. You must select the expanded form in the document before you can add the QuickWord to the list.


Remove a QuickWord from the list.


 Inserts the expanded form of the QuickWord in your document.


Specify whether you want the QuickWords expanded with or without formatting; rename an entry; or replace a QuickWord entry with different expanded text.


Type the incorrect spelling of a commonly misspelled or mistyped word, or type an abbreviated form of a word to be expanded.


Type the correct spelling of the misspelled or mistyped word, or type the expanded form of an abbreviation.


Adds the incorrect word (or abbreviation) and its replacement to the QuickCorrect list.


Removes the selected entry from the QuickCorrect list.


Inserts the correct spelling, or the expanded form of an abbreviation, as you type. This happens after you press the SPACEBAR, ENTER, or TAB.


If this option is enabled, mistyped words that have only one possible correction will be automatically replaced. Enable this option only if you are confident that your document uses words found in the standard word list. Unusual spellings and proper nouns might be changed automatically when you enable this option.


Automates frequently used formatting techniques so you can insert graphics lines, hanging indents, bulleted or numbered lists, em dashes, and other formatting using a few common keystrokes.


Capitalizes the first letter of every sentence.


Converts two initial capital letters in a word to an initial capital letter and lowercase second letter. For example, replace "PAris" with "Paris".


Eliminates double spaces between words in a sentence.


Automates frequently used formatting techniques so you can insert graphics lines, hanging indents, bulleted or numbered lists, em dashes, and other formatting using a few common keystrokes.


Makes no corrections at the end of sentences.


Automatically converts a single space at the end of a sentence to two spaces.


Automatically converts two spaces at the end of a sentence to one space.


Automates frequently used formatting techniques so you can insert graphics lines, hanging indents, bulleted or numbered lists, em dashes, and other formatting using a few common keystrokes.


Click an item to the right of the check box to view a description.


Specify the words you do not want recognized as the end of a sentence to avoid capitalizing the following word. For example, list frequently used abbreviations such as Corp. or Inc.


Specify the words you do not want recognized as the end of a sentence to avoid capitalizing the following word. For example, list frequently used abbreviations such as Corp. or Inc.


Specify the words you do not want recognized as the end of a sentence to avoid capitalizing the following word. For example, list frequently used abbreviations such as Corp. or Inc.


Specify the words you do not want recognized as the end of a sentence to avoid capitalizing the following word. For example, list frequently used abbreviations such as Corp. or Inc.


Specify the words you do not want recognized as the end of a sentence to avoid capitalizing the following word. For example, list frequently used abbreviations such as Corp. or Inc.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Reverses the selected editing action.


Restores the selected editing action. An action is listed under Redo only if you used Undo on it first.


Reverses the selected editing action.


Restores the selected editing action. An action is listed under Redo only if you used Undo on it first.


Specify the number of undo/redo items you have available, and specify whether undo/redo items are saved with the document.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Select the number of undo/redo items you want to have available.


Select the number of undo/redo items you want to have available.


Select to save the undo/redo history with all documents you create and edit.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Specify the number of times to repeat a keystroke or command.


Specify the number of times to repeat a keystroke or command.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Sets the number you specify as the default whenever you use Repeat.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Specify the number of columns you want on the page.


Specify the width of specific columns and of the white space between them.


Set the amount of white space you want between columns.


Set the amount of white space you want between columns.


Divide text in vertical blocks on a page and specify how they look.


Wraps text from the bottom of one column to the top of the next, like text in a newspaper article.


Wraps text from the bottom of one column to the top of the next, like text in a newspaper article. Each column is adjusted on the page so the columns are of equal length.


Text wraps from one column to the next across the page in rows. New rows start below the longest paragraph in the previous row.


Text wraps from one column to the next across the page in rows. Prevents text in each row from being divided across page breaks.


Divide text in vertical blocks on a page and specify how they look.


Specify the width of specific columns and of the white space between them.


Preserves the width of the specified column regardless of changes to other columns, and preserves the space between columns regardless of changes to other columns.


Specify the width of a specific column. Columns are counted from left to right.


Specify the width of specific columns and of the white space between them.


Preserves the width of the specified column regardless of changes to other columns, and preserves the space between columns regardless of changes to other columns.


Specify the amount of white space between specific columns.


Specify the amount of white space between specific columns.


Preserves the width of the specified column regardless of changes to other columns, and preserves the space between columns regardless of changes to other columns.


Specify the width of specific columns and of the white space between them.


Specify the width of specific columns and of the white space between them.


Preserves the width of the specified column regardless of changes to other columns, and preserves the space between columns regardless of changes to other columns.


Set the amount of white space between rows in parallel columns.


Set the amount of white space between rows in parallel columns.


Divide text in vertical blocks on a page and specify how they look.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Divide text in vertical blocks on a page and specify how they look.


Divide text in vertical blocks on a page and specify how they look.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Select a border. The currently selected border is displayed in the preview box.


Select a border. The currently selected border is displayed in the preview box.


The name of the currently selected border.


Select a border color. The border is displayed in that color in the preview box.


Select a border color.


Displays the selected color.


Choose the type of line used in the box border.


Choose the type of line used in the box border.


Check this box to apply the border to the current paragraph, column, or page. Otherwise, the border is applied to all subsequent paragraphs, columns, or pages.


Removes the border.


Lets you choose and customize a drop shadow.


Lets you choose a direction for a drop shadow.


Lets you preview the drop shadow as it will display in the document.


Lets you choose and customize a drop shadow.


Lets you specify the height for a drop shadow.


Lets you specify the height for a drop shadow.


Lets you specify the width for a drop shadow.


Lets you specify the width for a drop shadow.


Lets you select the color for a drop shadow.


Lets you select the color for a drop shadow.


Set spacing around the box border, set the drop shadow color and width, and select a gradient. Your selections are displayed in the preview window.


Set the space between the image and the edge of the box.


Set the space between the image and the edge of the box.


Set the space between the edge of the box and the text in the document.


Set the space between the edge of the box and the text in the document.


Select a gradient pattern for the background you have chosen.


Select a gradient pattern for the background you have chosen.


Offset the gradient design vertically. The preview shows how the design will display in the document.


Offset the gradient design vertically. The preview shows how the design will display in the document.


Offset the gradient design horizontally. The preview shows how the design will display in the document.


Offset the gradient design horizontally. The preview shows how the design will display in the document.


Rotate the gradient pattern in the background. The preview displays the current pattern.


Rotate the gradient pattern in the background. The preview displays the current pattern.


Shows the currently selected background as it will display in the document.


Select a background. The currently selected background is displayed in the preview box.


Select a fill. The currently selected fill is displayed in the preview box.


The name of the currently selected fill or background.


Select a fill foreground color.


Select a color for the foreground you have chosen.


Select a background color for the fill you have chosen. The background color is displayed in the preview box.


Select a background color for the fill you have chosen. The background color is displayed in the preview box.


Choose a pattern for the background.


Choose a pattern for the background.


Shows the current fill as it will display in the document.


Select a number type. Page, Chapter, and Volume insert a number for the current page, chapter, or volume. Secondary Page inserts a number for a second set of page numbers (for example, "Current page 6; previous page 5"). Total Pages inserts the number of total pages in the document (as in "page 5 of 17").


Displays the type of number that will be inserted. To change to a different number type, click Value/Adjust.


Shows the number value that will be inserted. To start with a value other than the current number, click Value/Adjust.


Select the type of number you want (page, chapter, volume, secondary page, or total page), and click Insert.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Reset the value of a number (for example, change 1 to 4), or change the numbering type (Arabic or Roman numerals, or letters).


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Select the type of numbers you want to use.


Select the type of numbers you want to use.


Change the value of a number (for example, change 1 to 14).


Change the value of a number (for example, change 1 to 14).


The page retains the same page number even if previous pages, chapters, or volumes are added or deleted.


The page number you set changes to keep numbering consistent. You can insert unnumbered pages later (such as pages with charts or pictures) and still account for them with page numbering. For example, if you are on page 4 and set the number to 6, and add and delete text in the document, that new page number you specified will always be two higher than the last numbered page.


Select the type of numbers you want to use.


Select the type of numbers you want to use.


Select the type of numbers you want to use.


Select the type of numbers you want to use.


Change the value of a number (for example, change 1 to 14).


Change the value of a number (for example, change 1 to 14).


The page retains the same page number even if previous pages, chapters, or volumes are added or deleted.


The page number you set changes to keep numbering consistent. You can insert unnumbered pages later (such as pages with charts or pictures) and still account for them with page numbering. For example, if you are on page 4 and set the number to 6, and add and delete text in the document, that new page number you specified will always be two higher than the last numbered page.


Select the type of numbers you want to use.


Select the type of numbers you want to use.


Change the value of a number (for example, change 1 to 14).


Change the value of a number (for example, change 1 to 14).


The page retains the same page number even if previous pages, chapters, or volumes are added or deleted.


The page number you set changes to keep numbering consistent. You can insert unnumbered pages later (such as pages with charts or pictures) and still account for them with page numbering. For example, if you are on page 4 and set the number to 6, and add and delete text in the document, that new page number you specified will always be two higher than the last numbered page.


Select the type of numbers you want to use.


Select the type of numbers you want to use.


Change the value of a number (for example, change 1 to 14).


Change the value of a number (for example, change 1 to 14).


The page retains the same page number even if previous pages, chapters, or volumes are added or deleted.


The page number you set changes to keep numbering consistent. You can insert unnumbered pages later (such as pages with charts or pictures) and still account for them with page numbering. For example, if you are on page 4 and set the number to 6, and add and delete text in the document, that new page number you specified will always be two higher than the last numbered page.


Select the type of page numbers you want and where you want them placed on the page.


Select the position on the page for page numbers. The sample facing pages illustrate where the page numbers will display.


Select a page numbering format from this list. The preview box shows how the format will look in your document.


Select a page numbering format from this list. The preview box shows how the format will look in your document.


Displays the text and codes contained in the selected format.


Select the type of page numbers you want and where you want them placed on the page.


Select the type of page numbers you want and where you want them placed on the page.


Create your own format for page numbering.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Select a font for page numbers.


Reset the page number value. For example, change page 3 to page 5.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Create your own format for page numbering.


Change the value of a number (for example, change 1 to 14).


Inserts a number for the total number of pages in the document, as in "page 6 of 10." Select a number style, and click Insert.


Inserts the number of the current chapter, as in "Chapter 4, Page 12." Select a number style and click Insert.


Inserts the number of the current volume, as in "Vol. II, Chapter 4, Page 23." Select a numbering style, and click Insert.


Inserts a number for a second set of page numbers, as in "page 7; previous page 6". Select a number style, and click Insert. Another example of secondary pages is numbering all pages in a multi-volume set of documents and using a second set of numbers to number the pages within each volume.


Change the value of a number (for example, change 1 to 14).


Inserts a number for the total number of pages in the document, as in "page 6 of 10." Select a number style, and click Insert.


Inserts the number of the current chapter, as in "Chapter 4, Page 12." Select a number style and click Insert.


Inserts the number of the current volume, as in "Vol. II, Chapter 4, Page 23." Select a numbering style, and click Insert.


Inserts a number for a second set of page numbers, as in "page 7; previous page 6". Select a number style, and click Insert. Another example of secondary pages is numbering all pages in a multi-volume set of documents and using a second set of numbers to number the pages within each volume.


Inserts the selected number format into your custom format.


Type text and insert any numbers to create a custom page numbering format.


Create your own format for page numbering.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Lets you set the value for the active page, chapter, volume, or secondary page.


Lets you specify a value for the active page, chapter, volume, or secondary page.


Enable to keep the value for the page, chapter, volume, or secondary page the same as the value specified in the Set page number box. If you add or delete pages, chapters, volumes, or secondary pages, this value will not change.


Enable to update the numbering for the active page, chapter, volume, or secondary page as you add or delete information.


 Lets you set the value for the active page, chapter, volume, or secondary page.


Lets you specify a value for the active page, chapter, volume, or secondary page.


Enable to keep the value for the page, chapter, volume, or secondary page the same as the value specified in the Set page number box. If you add or delete pages, chapters, volumes, or secondary pages, this value will not change.


Enable to update the numbering for the active page, chapter, volume, or secondary page as you add or delete information.


Lets you set the value for the active page, chapter, volume, or secondary page.


Lets you specify a value for the active page, chapter, volume, or secondary page.


Enable to keep the value for the page, chapter, volume, or secondary page the same as the value specified in the Set page number box. If you add or delete pages, chapters, volumes, or secondary pages, this value will not change.


Enable to update the numbering for the active page, chapter, volume, or secondary page as you add or delete information.


Lets you set the value for the active page, chapter, volume, or secondary page.


Lets you specify a value for the active page, chapter, volume, or secondary page.


Enable to keep the value for the page, chapter, volume, or secondary page the same as the value specified in the Set page number box. If you add or delete pages, chapters, volumes, or secondary pages, this value will not change.


Enable to update the numbering for the active page, chapter, volume, or secondary page as you add or delete information.


Displays the name of the selected numbering or outline type.


Click the numbering or outline type you want to use to organize text in your document.


Click the numbering or outline type you want to use to organize text in your document.


Enable to apply the selected layout to the current outline or list.


Starts a new outline or list at the cursor.


Enable to insert a new outline or list within the current outline or list.


Resumes a list or outline you started earlier in your document.


Click the Numbers tab to select a numbering style for lists or outlines. Click the Bullets tab to select a bullet style. Click the Text tab to create headings, quotations, or definitions. Enable the Set tabs every check box to specify the distance you want between tab settings.


Click the Numbers tab to select a numbering style for lists or outlines. Click the Bullets tab to select a bullet style. Click the Text tab to create headings, quotations, or definitions. Enable the Set tabs every check box to specify the distance you want between tab settings.


Create a list or outline style.


Edit the selected list or outline style.


Specify the source of styles for the list. Copy, delete, or reset a style, or save and retrieve styles.


Displays the name of the selected bulleted list type.


Describes the selected bulleted list type.


Click the type of bulleted list you want to use.


Enable to apply the layout you chose to the current outline or list.


Enable to start a new bulleted list at the cursor.


Enable to insert a new outline or list within the current outline or list.


Select a different bullet character for a bulleted list. You can select that type of bulleted list from this dialog box.


Displays the name of the current selection.


Displays the name of the current selection.


Displays a description for current selection.


Describes the current selection.


Click the style you want to use to organize text in your document.


Allows you to choose from a number of styles for your document.


Displays the styles found in the current document.


Displays the styles found in your default template file, as specified in the file settings.


Enable to display system styles.


Enable to display the styles for many WordPerfect features, such as footnotes, hypertext, and tables of contents. If you deselect this box, only the standard document styles (headings and initial style) and the styles you have created are displayed.


Enable to display WordPerfect system styles, such as styles for footnotes, hypertext, table of contents, headers and footers, numbering, and so on.


Displays the styles found in the template file that is listed as your additional objects template in the file settings.


Allows you to save new styles to different locations.


Saves the styles you create to the current document.


Saves the styles you create to the default template file, as specified in the file settings.


Saves the styles you create to the template file that is listed as your additional objects template in the file settings.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


The name of the file you want to save styles to or retrieve them from.


The name of the file you want to save styles to or retrieve them from.


The name of the file you want to save styles to or retrieve them from.


Include both styles you have created and styles for WordPerfect features.


Include only the styles you have created.


Include only styles for WordPerfect features.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


The name of the file you want to save styles to or retrieve them from.


The name of the file you want to save styles to or retrieve them from.


The name of the file you want to save styles to or retrieve them from.


Include both styles you have created and styles for WordPerfect features.


Include only the styles you have created.


Include only styles for WordPerfect features.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


You can copy styles to the current document, the default template, or the additional objects template. The default template and additional objects template are specified in the file settings.


Copies the styles to the document you currently have open.


Copies the styles to the template listed as the default template file in the file settings.


Copies styles to the template file listed as the additional objects template in the file settings.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Specify a word you want to use as a hyperlink each time you type it. An at sign (@) is automatically added to the word. You must type the word with the at sign to create a hyperlink.


Specify the location of the hyperlink. You can specify a URL for an Internet document or a document on your hard disk or local network.


Specify the location of the hyperlink. You can specify a URL for an Internet document or a document on your hard disk or local network.


Shows the words that are automatically converted to hyperlinks when you type them.


Inserts the SpeedLink after you type the link word and press the SPACEBAR, ENTER, or TAB.


Adds the word to the SpeedLinks list.


Deletes the selected word from the SpeedLinks list.


Inserts the selected SpeedLink word into the document.


Specify the characters you want to use for quotation marks. You can automatically turn straight quotes into curly quotes.


Convert double quotes to open and close double quotes.


Select the character you want to use for open quotes. Press CTRL + W to view additional characters.


Select the character you want to use for open quotes. Press CTRL + W to view additional characters.


Select the character you want to use for close quotes. Press CTRL + W to view additional characters.


Select the character you want to use for close quotes. Press CTRL + W to view additional characters.


Convert single quotes to open and close single quotes.


Select the character you want to use for open quotes. Press CTRL + W to view additional characters.


Select the character you want to use for open quotes. Press CTRL + W to view additional characters.


Select the character you want to use for close quotes. Press CTRL + W to view additional characters.


Select the character you want to use for close quotes. Press CTRL + W to view additional characters.


Use straight quotes rather than curly quotes when the quote character follows a number.


Lists the types of counters available. The list includes five predefined system counters that number boxes used in the graphics and equations features.


Select a counter type to insert. You can change but not delete the five predefined WordPerfect counters for boxes.


Define a style of counter.


Define your own style of counter.


Change the counter selected in the list.


Select a counter in the list, and delete it. You cannot delete the five WordPerfect box counters.


Lists counter definitions. You can create and modify counters and control how and when the number changes.


Change the value of the selected counter. For example, you can change a counter value from 1 to 7 or from A to D.


Increases the value of the selected counter by 1.


Decreases the value of the selected counter by 1.


Displays the current value of the selected counter at the cursor.


Increases the value of the selected counter by 1, and displays that value at the cursor.


Decreases the value of the selected counter by 1, and displays that value at the cursor.


A dot next to a counter in the list indicates that it is a system counter. You cannot edit system counters.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


The name you type displays in the list of counters so you can identify and use it.


Sets the type of numbering to use for a counter that has only one level of numbering.


Select the type of numbering you want for a single-level counter.


Set the number of levels for numbering a counter (as in a four-level counter with the format I.A.i.a.).


Set the number of levels for numbering a counter (as in a four-level counter with the format I.A.i.a.).


Define your own style of counter.


Name the levels in your counter definition. They are listed in order of how the numbers will display.


Select the name you want for the first counter level.


Select the name you want for the second counter level.


Select the name you want for the third counter level.


Select the name you want for the fourth counter level.


Select the name you want for the fifth counter level.


Select a numbering method for each level of the counter you define.


Select the type of numbering you want for the first counter level.


Select the type of numbering you want for the second counter level.


Select the type of numbering you want for the third counter level.


Select the type of numbering you want for the fourth counter level.


Select the type of numbering you want for the fifth counter level.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


The name you type displays in the list of counters so you can identify and use it.


Sets the type of numbering to use for a counter that has only one level of numbering.


Select the type of numbering you want for a single-level counter.


Set the number of levels for numbering a counter (as in a four-level counter with the format I.A.i.a.).


Set the number of levels for numbering a counter (as in a four-level counter with the format I.A.i.a.).


Define your own style of counter.


Name the levels in your counter definition. They are listed in order of how the numbers will display.


Select the type of numbering you want for the first counter level.


Select the type of numbering you want for the second counter level.


Select the type of numbering you want for the third counter level.


Select the type of numbering you want for the fourth counter level.


Select the type of numbering you want for the fifth counter level.


Select a numbering method for each level of the counter you define.


Select the type of numbering you want for the first counter level.


Select the type of numbering you want for the second counter level.


Select the type of numbering you want for the third counter level.


Select the type of numbering you want for the fourth counter level.


Select the type of numbering you want for the fifth counter level.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


 Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


Displays the name of the counter.


Choose the kind of numbers for the counter.


Choose the kind of numbers for the counter.


Specify the value you want for this counter. For example, you can change 1 to 6 or A to C.


Specify the value you want for this counter. For example, you can change 1 to 6 or A to C.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Displays the document at 50% of actual size.


Displays the document at 75% of actual size.


Displays the document at actual size.


Displays the document at 150% of actual size.


Displays the document at 150% of actual size.


Displays a complete line or block of text within a window, with minimal white space to the right and left.


Displays the width of the page, including margins, within a window.


Displays all page margins in the document window.


Specify the size ratio of the document. The number can be between 25% and 400%.


Specify the size ratio of the document. The number can be between 25% and 400%.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Selects the highlighted toolbar, keyboard, or menu and displays it in the document window.


Selects the highlighted toolbar, keyboard, or menu and displays it in the document window.


Lists the template associated with the selected toolbar, property bar, keyboard, or menus. WP11xx.wpt is the default WordPerfect template (where xx is the two-character language code).


Lists the template associated with the selected toolbar, property bar, keyboard, or menus. WP11xx.wpt is the default WordPerfect template (where xx is the two-character language code).


Add a custom toolbar, keyboard, or menu.


Change the items on the selected toolbar, keyboard, or menu.


Copy a toolbar, keyboard, or menu from one template to another.


Assign a new name to the selected toolbar, menu, or keyboard.


Assign a new name to the selected toolbar, menu, or keyboard.


Shows the name of the template and current name of the toolbar, menu, or keyboard.


Shows the name of the template and current name of the toolbar, menu, or keyboard.


Assign a new name to the selected toolbar, menu, or keyboard.


Shows the name of the template and current name of the toolbar, menu, or keyboard.


Shows the name of the template and current name of the toolbar, menu, or keyboard.


Restore the selected toolbar, property bar, menu, or keyboard to its original state.


Change how the buttons look and where they display in the WordPerfect window.


Type a name for the toolbar, menu, or keyboard.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Specify the template location.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Specify where you want to save the toolbar, menu, or keyboard. Save it with the current template (the one used by the active document) or the default template (the one you use for all new documents). If you have selected an additional objects template, you can save the toolbar, menu, or keyboard with that template.


Save the toolbar, keyboard, or menu with the current template (the template the active document uses).


Displays the name of the current template.


Save the toolbar, menu, or keyboard with the default template (the one used for all new documents).


Displays the name of the default template.


Specify where you want to save the toolbar, menu, or keyboard. Save it with the current template (the one used by the active document) or the default template (the one you use for all new documents). If you have selected an additional objects template, you can save the toolbar, menu, or keyboard with that template.


Specify where you want to save the toolbar, menu, or keyboard. Save it with the current template (the one used by the active document) or the default template (the one you use for all new documents). If you have selected an additional objects template, you can save the toolbar, menu, or keyboard with that template.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Copy a toolbar, keyboard, or menu from one template to another.


Copy a toolbar, keyboard, or menu from one template to another.


Click an item to copy it to another template. Press CTRL as you click to select more than one item. Press SHIFT as you click to select several that are together.


Click an item to copy it to another template. Press CTRL as you click to select more than one item. Press SHIFT as you click to select several that are together.


Copy a toolbar, keyboard, or menu from one template to another.


Copy a toolbar, keyboard, or menu from one template to another.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Change how the toolbar or property bar looks, and change its position in the document window.


Displays only text on the buttons.


Displays only the icon on the buttons.


Displays text and icon on the buttons.


Change how the toolbar or property bar looks, and change its position in the document window.


Display the toolbar or property bar on the left side of the document window.


Displays the toolbar or property bar on the right side of the document window.


Display the toolbar or property bar at the top of the document window.


Display the toolbar or property bar at the bottom of the document window.


Display the toolbar or property bar as a palette in the document window.


Change how the toolbar or property bar looks, and change its position in the document window.


Select the relative size of text for buttons on the toolbar or property bar.


Select the relative size of text for buttons on the toolbar or property bar.


Select the relative size of text for buttons on the toolbar or property bar.


Displays icons larger than normal.


Displays the scroll bar if the toolbar extends beyond the screen.


Determines how many rows of buttons display at the top of the document window.


Determines how many rows of buttons display at the top of the document window.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Selects the highlighted toolbar, keyboard, or menu and displays it in the document window.


Select which toolbar, property bar, or menu displays in the document window, or select the keystrokes you want to use.


Lists the template associated with the selected toolbar, property bar, keyboard, or menus. Wp11xx.wpt is the default WordPerfect template (where xx is the two-character language code).


Lists the template associated with the selected toolbar, property bar, keyboard, or menus. Wp11xx.wpt is the default WordPerfect template (where xx is the two-character language code).


Change the items on the selected toolbar, keyboard, or menu.


Restore the selected toolbar, property bar, menu, or keyboard to its original state.


Change how the buttons look and where they display in the WordPerfect window.


Change how the toolbar or property bar looks, and change its position in the document window.


Displays only text on the buttons.


Displays only the icon on the buttons.


Displays both the icon and text on the buttons.


Change how the toolbar or property bar looks, and change its position in the document window.


Display the toolbar or property bar on the left side of the document window.


Displays the toolbar or property bar on the right side of the document window.


Display the toolbar or property bar at the top of the document window.


Display the toolbar or property bar at the bottom of the document window.


Display the toolbar or property bar as a palette in the document window.


Change how the toolbar or property bar looks, and change its position in the document window.


Select the relative size of text for buttons on the toolbar or property bar.


Select the relative size of text for buttons on the toolbar or property bar.


Select the relative size of text for buttons on the toolbar or property bar.


Displays icons larger than normal.


Displays the scroll bar if the toolbar extends beyond the screen.


Determines how many rows of buttons display at the top of the document window.


Determines how many rows of buttons display at the top of the document window.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Selects the highlighted toolbar, keyboard, or menu and displays it in the document window.


Select which toolbar, property bar, or menu displays in the document window, or select the keystrokes you want to use.


Lists the template associated with the selected toolbar, property bar, keyboard, or menus. Wp11xx.wpt is the default WordPerfect template (where xx is the two-character language code).


Lists the template associated with the selected toolbar, property bar, keyboard, or menus. Wp11xx.wpt is the default WordPerfect template (where xx is the two-character language code).


Displays the item selected.


Displays the menu or keyboard currently associated with the template.


Selects the highlighted toolbar, keyboard, or menu and displays it in the document window.


Add a custom toolbar, keyboard, or menu.


Change the items on the selected toolbar, keyboard, or menu.


Copy a toolbar, keyboard, or menu from one template to another.


Assign a new name to the selected toolbar, menu, or keyboard.


Restore the selected toolbar, property bar, menu, or keyboard to its original state.


Type a name for the toolbar, menu, or keyboard.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Specify the template location.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Specify where you want to save the toolbar, menu, or keyboard. Save it with the current template (the one used by the active document) or the default template (the one you use for all new documents). If you have selected an additional objects template, you can save the toolbar, menu, or keyboard with that template.


Save the toolbar, keyboard, or menu with the current template (the template the active document uses).


Displays the name of the current template.


Save the toolbar, menu, or keyboard with the default template (the one used for all new documents).


Displays the name of the default template.


Specify where you want to save the toolbar, menu, or keyboard. Save it with the current template (the one used by the active document) or the default template (the one you use for all new documents). If you have selected an additional objects template, you can save the toolbar, menu, or keyboard with that template.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Copy a toolbar, keyboard, or menu from one template to another.


Copy a toolbar, keyboard, or menu from one template to another.


Click an item to copy it to another template. Press CTRL as you click to select more than one item. Press SHIFT as you click to select several that are together.


Click an item to copy it to another template. Press CTRL as you click to select more than one item. Press SHIFT as you click to select several that are together.


Copy a toolbar, keyboard, or menu from one template to another.


Copy a toolbar, keyboard, or menu from one template to another.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Selects the highlighted toolbar, keyboard, or menu and displays it in the document window.


Select which toolbar, property bar, or menu displays in the document window, or select the keystrokes you want to use.


Lists the template associated with the selected toolbar, property bar, keyboard, or menus. Wp11xx.wpt is the default WordPerfect template (where xx is the two-character language code).


Lists the template associated with the selected toolbar, property bar, keyboard, or menus. Wp11xx.wpt is the default WordPerfect template (where xx is the two-character language code).


Displays the item selected.


 Displays the menu or keyboard currently associated with the template.


Selects the highlighted toolbar, keyboard, or menu and displays it in the document window.


Add a custom toolbar, keyboard, or menu.


Change the items on the selected toolbar, keyboard, or menu.


Copy a toolbar, keyboard, or menu from one template to another.


Assign a new name to the selected toolbar, menu, or keyboard.


Restore the selected toolbar, property bar, menu, or keyboard to its original state.


Type a name for the toolbar, menu, or keyboard.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Specify the template location.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Specify where you want to save the toolbar, menu, or keyboard. Save it with the current template (the one used by the active document) or the default template (the one you use for all new documents). If you have selected an additional objects template, you can save the toolbar, menu, or keyboard with that template.


Save the toolbar, keyboard, or menu with the current template (the template the active document uses).


Displays the name of the current template.


Save the toolbar, menu, or keyboard with the default template (the one used for all new documents).


Displays the name of the current template.


Specify where you want to save the toolbar, menu, or keyboard. Save it with the current template (the one used by the active document) or the default template (the one you use for all new documents). If you have selected an additional objects template, you can save the toolbar, menu, or keyboard with that template.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Copy a toolbar, keyboard, or menu from one template to another.


Copy a toolbar, keyboard, or menu from one template to another.


Click an item to copy it to another template. Press CTRL as you click to select more than one item. Press SHIFT as you click to select several that are together.


Click an item to copy it to another template. Press CTRL as you click to select more than one item. Press SHIFT as you click to select several that are together.


Copy a toolbar, keyboard, or menu from one template to another.


Copy a toolbar, keyboard, or menu from one template to another.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Specify the location of the data to be sorted.


Specify the location of the data to be sorted.


Specify the location to display the sorted data in.


Specify the location to display the sorted data in.


Select a system or user-defined sorting rule.


Select a system or user-defined sorting rule.


Define a new sort definition.


Change an existing sort definition. If you want to change an existing definition but also keep the original definition, click Copy.


Change an existing definition but also keep the original definition.


Deletes the selected sort definition.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click Allow undo after sorting to return sorted text to its original order after you have sorted it. Click Uppercase sorts before lowercase to sort uppercase letters before lowercase letters.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Allows you to sort data by different methods.


Sorts by line. Each line ends with a hard return.


Sorts by paragraph. Each paragraph ends with two or more hard returns.


Sorts by merge record. Each merge record ends with an ENDRECORD code.


Sorts by table row. Each row of table cells is a record.


Sorts by table column or by parallel column. Each table row is a record. Each "cell" of a parallel column is treated as a record.


Sort the key alphanumerically or numerically. An alphanumeric key sorts by letters, and then by digits. A numeric key sorts by numbers only, and sorts by the number value. In an alphanumeric sort, 837 is sorted before 93; in a numeric sort, 93 is sorted before 837. Specifies the order of the sort. Ascending order sorts from first to last (A-Z or 1-9) and Descending order sorts from last to first (Z-A or 9-1).


Click to begin defining the key.


Sort the key alphanumerically or numerically. An alphanumeric key sorts by letters, and then by digits. A numeric key sorts by numbers only, and sorts by the number value. In an alphanumeric sort, 837 is sorted before 93; in a numeric sort, 93 is sorted before 837.


Specifies the order of the sort. Ascending order sorts from first to last (A-Z or 1-9) and Descending order sorts from last to first (Z-A or 9-1).


Specifies the field.


Specifies the line.


Specifies the line.


Specifies the word.


Click to begin defining the key.


Click to begin defining the key.


Click to begin defining the key.


Click to begin defining the key.


Click to begin defining the key.


Click to begin defining the key.


Click to begin defining the key.


Click to begin defining the key.


Click to begin defining the key.


Sort the key alphanumerically or numerically. An alphanumeric key sorts by letters, and then by digits. A numeric key sorts by numbers only, and sorts by the number value. In an alphanumeric sort, 837 is sorted before 93; in a numeric sort, 93 is sorted before 837.


Sort the key alphanumerically or numerically. An alphanumeric key sorts by letters, and then by digits. A numeric key sorts by numbers only, and sorts by the number value. In an alphanumeric sort, 837 is sorted before 93; in a numeric sort, 93 is sorted before 837.


Sort the key alphanumerically or numerically. An alphanumeric key sorts by letters, and then by digits. A numeric key sorts by numbers only, and sorts by the number value. In an alphanumeric sort, 837 is sorted before 93; in a numeric sort, 93 is sorted before 837.


Sort the key alphanumerically or numerically. An alphanumeric key sorts by letters, and then by digits. A numeric key sorts by numbers only, and sorts by the number value. In an alphanumeric sort, 837 is sorted before 93; in a numeric sort, 93 is sorted before 837.


SSort the key alphanumerically or numerically. An alphanumeric key sorts by letters, and then by digits. A numeric key sorts by numbers only, and sorts by the number value. In an alphanumeric sort, 837 is sorted before 93; in a numeric sort, 93 is sorted before 837.


Sort the key alphanumerically or numerically. An alphanumeric key sorts by letters, and then by digits. A numeric key sorts by numbers only, and sorts by the number value. In an alphanumeric sort, 837 is sorted before 93; in a numeric sort, 93 is sorted before 837.


SSort the key alphanumerically or numerically. An alphanumeric key sorts by letters, and then by digits. A numeric key sorts by numbers only, and sorts by the number value. In an alphanumeric sort, 837 is sorted before 93; in a numeric sort, 93 is sorted before 837.


Sort the key alphanumerically or numerically. An alphanumeric key sorts by letters, and then by digits. A numeric key sorts by numbers only, and sorts by the number value. In an alphanumeric sort, 837 is sorted before 93; in a numeric sort, 93 is sorted before 837.


Sort the key alphanumerically or numerically. An alphanumeric key sorts by letters, and then by digits. A numeric key sorts by numbers only, and sorts by the number value. In an alphanumeric sort, 837 is sorted before 93; in a numeric sort, 93 is sorted before 837.


Specifies the order of the sort. Ascending order sorts from first to last (A-Z or 1-9) and descending order sorts from last to first (Z-A or 9-1).


Specifies the order of the sort. Ascending order sorts from first to last (A-Z or 1-9) and descending order sorts from last to first (Z-A or 9-1).


Specifies the order of the sort. Ascending order sorts from first to last (A-Z or 1-9) and descending order sorts from last to first (Z-A or 9-1).


Specifies the order of the sort. Ascending order sorts from first to last (A-Z or 1-9) and descending order sorts from last to first (Z-A or 9-1).


Specifies the order of the sort. Ascending order sorts from first to last (A-Z or 1-9) and descending order sorts from last to first (Z-A or 9-1).


Specifies the order of the sort. Ascending order sorts from first to last (A-Z or 1-9) and descending order sorts from last to first (Z-A or 9-1).


Specifies the order of the sort. Ascending order sorts from first to last (A-Z or 1-9) and descending order sorts from last to first (Z-A or 9-1).


Specifies the order of the sort. Ascending order sorts from first to last (A-Z or 1-9) and descending order sorts from last to first (Z-A or 9-1).


Specifies the order of the sort. Ascending order sorts from first to last (A-Z or 1-9) and descending order sorts from last to first (Z-A or 9-1).


Allows you to scroll between keys.


Adds a key after the last key.


Inserts a key below the key with the pointer next to it.


Deletes the key with the pointer next to it.


Selects records and lists them in the order they display in the file.


Lists the operators you can assign to each key.


This is a sample search string


Selects records but does not sort them. They are listed in the order they display in the file.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Select Spreadsheet or a type of database for the imported object.


Select Spreadsheet or a type of database for the imported object.


Import the information as text, or into a table structure or merge data file.


Import the information as text, or into a table structure or merge data file.


Specify the name of the file to import.


Specify the name of the file to import.


Specify the name of a range to import or link to.


Specify the name of a range to import or link to.


Specify the name of a range to import or link to.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Move any guideline by dragging the arrow pointer. When this option is not selected, you can make changes only by using menus or toolbar buttons.


View dotted lines in tables, margins, columns, and headers/footers where lines are turned off. You can drag guidelines to change their width.


View dotted lines in tables where lines are turned off. You can drag table guidelines to change the width of table columns.


View dotted lines that you can drag to change the width of document margins.


View dotted lines that you can drag to change column width.


View dotted lines that you can drag to change the distance between the body text and the header or footer.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Set the distance to indent the first line of the paragraph.


Set the distance to indent the first line of the paragraph.


Set the distance you want to increase the left margin past the regular page margin. This applies only to the paragraphs using this format.


Set the distance you want to increase the left margin past the regular page margin. This applies only to the paragraphs using this format.


Set the distance you want to increase the right margin past the regular page margin. This applies only to the paragraphs using this format.


Set the distance you want to increase the right margin past the regular page margin. This applies only to the paragraphs using this format.


Adjust paragraph margins, the spacing between paragraphs, and the distance that the first line of a paragraph is indented.


Will determine the number of lines that are allowed between paragraphs.


Will determine the number of lines that are allowed between paragraphs.


Specify the number of points you want between paragraphs. There are 72 points in one inch.


Specify the number of points you want between paragraphs. There are 72 points in one inch.


Adjust paragraph margins, the spacing between paragraphs, and the distance that the first line of a paragraph is indented.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Return to the default paragraph format settings.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Select a border. The currently selected border is displayed in the preview box.


Select a border. The currently selected border is displayed in the preview box.


The name of the currently selected border.


Select a border color. The border is displayed in that color in the preview box.


Select a border color. The border is displayed in that color in the preview box.


Choose the type of line used in the box border.


Choose the type of line used in the box border.


Shows the selected border as it will display in the document.


Check this box to apply the border to the current paragraph, column, or page. Otherwise, the border is applied to all subsequent paragraphs, columns, or pages.


Removes the border.


Change the current color by clicking a color in the color wheel and an area in the vertical luminosity bar.


Displays the currently selected color. Click on the color wheel to select a color. Drag the small square on the light-to-dark sliding scale to lighten or darken the color. To make precise adjustments, select a color model and change the associated number values. Click OK to add the color to the color palette.


Displays the currently selected color. Click on the color wheel to select a color. Drag the small square on the light-to-dark sliding scale to lighten or darken the color. To make precise adjustments, select a color model and change the associated number values. Click OK to add the color to the color palette.


Displays the currently selected color. Click on the color wheel to select a color. Drag the small square on the light-to-dark sliding scale to lighten or darken the color. To make precise adjustments, select a color model and change the associated number values. Click OK to add the color to the color palette.


Shows the color model which you can use as the basis for mixing and creating colors.


Shows the color model which you can use as the basis for mixing and creating colors.


Specify the proportion of red, green and blue in the color with a value between 0 and 255.


Specify the proportion of red in the color with a value between 0 and 255. All colors at 0 make black, and all colors at 255 make white.


Specify the proportion of red in the color with a value between 0 and 255. All colors at 0 make black, and all colors at 255 make white.


Specify the proportion of green in the color with a value between 0 and 255. All colors at 0 make black, and all colors at 255 make white.


Specify the proportion of green in the color with a value between 0 and 255. All colors at 0 make black, and all colors at 255 make white.


Specify the proportion of blue in the color with a value between 0 and 255. All colors at 0 make black, and all colors at 255 make white.


Specify the proportion of blue in the color with a value between 0 and 255. All colors at 0 make black, and all colors at 255 make white.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Lets you choose and customize a drop shadow.


Lets you preview the drop shadow as it will display in the document.


Lets you adjust the height of a drop shadow.


Lets you adjust the width of a drop shadow.


Lets you choose and customize a drop shadow.


Lets you specify the height for a drop shadow.


Lets you specify the height for a drop shadow.


Lets you specify the width for a drop shadow.


Lets you specify the width for a drop shadow.


Lets you select the color for a drop shadow.


Lets you select the color for a drop shadow.


Set spacing around the box border, set the drop shadow color and width, and select a gradient. Your selections are displayed in the preview window.


Set the space between the image and the edge of the box.


Set the space between the image and the edge of the box.


Set the space between the edge of the box and the text in the document.


Set the space between the edge of the box and the text in the document.


Select a gradient pattern for the background you have chosen.


Select a gradient pattern for the background you have chosen.


Offset the gradient design vertically. The preview box shows how the design will display in the document.


Offset the gradient design vertically. The preview box shows how the design will display in the document.


Offset the gradient design horizontally. The preview box shows how the design will display in the document.


Offset the gradient design horizontally. The preview box shows how the design will display in the document.


Rotate the gradient pattern in the background. The preview displays the current pattern.


Rotate the gradient pattern in the background. The preview displays the current pattern.


Shows the currently selected background as it will display in the document.


Select a background. The currently selected background is displayed in the preview box.


Select a background. The currently selected background is displayed in the preview box.


The name of the currently selected fill or background.


Select a fill foreground color.


Select a color for the foreground you have chosen.


Select a background color for the fill you have chosen. The background color is displayed in the preview box.


Select a background color for the fill you have chosen. The background color is displayed in the preview box.


Choose a pattern for the background.


Choose a pattern for the background.


Shows the current fill as it will display in the document.


Gives a description of the sort.


Sort by line, paragraph, merge record, table row, or parallel column row.


Sorts by line. Each line ends with a hard return.


Sorts by paragraph. Each paragraph ends with two or more hard returns.


Sorts by merge record. Each merge record ends with an ENDRECORD code.


Sorts by table row. Each row of table cells is a record.


Sorts by table column or by parallel column. Each table row is a record. Each "cell" of a parallel column is treated as a record.


Sort the key alphanumerically or numerically. An alphanumeric key sorts by letters, and then by digits. A numeric key sorts by numbers only, and sorts by the number value. In an alphanumeric sort, 837 is sorted before 93; in a numeric sort, 93 is sorted before 837. Specifies the order of the sort. Ascending order sorts from first to last (A-Z or 1-9) and descending order sorts from last to first (Z-A or 9-1).


Click to begin defining the key.


Click to begin defining the key.


Click to begin defining the key.


Click to begin defining the key.


Click to begin defining the key.


Click to begin defining the key.


Click to begin defining the key.


Click to begin defining the key.


Click to begin defining the key.


Sort the key alphanumerically or numerically. An alphanumeric key sorts by letters, and then by digits. A numeric key sorts by numbers only, and sorts by the number value. In an alphanumeric sort, 837 is sorted before 93; in a numeric sort, 93 is sorted before 837.


Sort the key alphanumerically or numerically. An alphanumeric key sorts by letters, and then by digits. A numeric key sorts by numbers only, and sorts by the number value. In an alphanumeric sort, 837 is sorted before 93; in a numeric sort, 93 is sorted before 837.


Sort the key alphanumerically or numerically. An alphanumeric key sorts by letters, and then by digits. A numeric key sorts by numbers only, and sorts by the number value. In an alphanumeric sort, 837 is sorted before 93; in a numeric sort, 93 is sorted before 837.


Sort the key alphanumerically or numerically. An alphanumeric key sorts by letters, and then by digits. A numeric key sorts by numbers only, and sorts by the number value. In an alphanumeric sort, 837 is sorted before 93; in a numeric sort, 93 is sorted before 837.


Sort the key alphanumerically or numerically. An alphanumeric key sorts by letters, and then by digits. A numeric key sorts by numbers only, and sorts by the number value. In an alphanumeric sort, 837 is sorted before 93; in a numeric sort, 93 is sorted before 837.


Sort the key alphanumerically or numerically. An alphanumeric key sorts by letters, and then by digits. A numeric key sorts by numbers only, and sorts by the number value. In an alphanumeric sort, 837 is sorted before 93; in a numeric sort, 93 is sorted before 837.


Sort the key alphanumerically or numerically. An alphanumeric key sorts by letters, and then by digits. A numeric key sorts by numbers only, and sorts by the number value. In an alphanumeric sort, 837 is sorted before 93; in a numeric sort, 93 is sorted before 837.


Sort the key alphanumerically or numerically. An alphanumeric key sorts by letters, and then by digits. A numeric key sorts by numbers only, and sorts by the number value. In an alphanumeric sort, 837 is sorted before 93; in a numeric sort, 93 is sorted before 837.


Sort the key alphanumerically or numerically. An alphanumeric key sorts by letters, and then by digits. A numeric key sorts by numbers only, and sorts by the number value. In an alphanumeric sort, 837 is sorted before 93; in a numeric sort, 93 is sorted before 837.


Specifies the order of the sort. Ascending order sorts from first to last (A-Z or 1-9) and descending order sorts from last to first (Z-A or 9-1).


Specifies the order of the sort. Ascending order sorts from first to last (A-Z or 1-9) and descending order sorts from last to first (Z-A or 9-1).


Specifies the order of the sort. Ascending order sorts from first to last (A-Z or 1-9) and descending order sorts from last to first (Z-A or 9-1).


Specifies the order of the sort. Ascending order sorts from first to last (A-Z or 1-9) and descending order sorts from last to first (Z-A or 9-1).


Specifies the order of the sort. Ascending order sorts from first to last (A-Z or 1-9) and descending order sorts from last to first (Z-A or 9-1).


Specifies the order of the sort. Ascending order sorts from first to last (A-Z or 1-9) and descending order sorts from last to first (Z-A or 9-1).


Specifies the order of the sort. Ascending order sorts from first to last (A-Z or 1-9) and descending order sorts from last to first (Z-A or 9-1).


Specifies the order of the sort. Ascending order sorts from first to last (A-Z or 1-9) and descending order sorts from last to first (Z-A or 9-1).


Specifies the order of the sort. Ascending order sorts from first to last (A-Z or 1-9) and descending order sorts from last to first (Z-A or 9-1).


Specify a specific field to sort.


Specify a specific line to sort.


Specify a specific word to sort.


Allows you to scroll to a specific key.


Adds a key after the last key.


Inserts a key below the key with the pointer next to it.


Deletes the key with the pointer next to it.


Selects records and lists them in the order they display in the file.


Selects records but does not sort them. They are listed in the order they display in the file.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Center the text vertically on a page.


Center the text on this page.


Center the text on this page and all subsequent pages in the document.


Insert text as you type it from the top margin down, without centering it vertically.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Keep page elements from printing on the current page only.


Enable the items you want to turn off on the current page or enable the All check box to suppress all the items.


Enable the items you want to turn off on the current page or enable the All check box to suppress all the items.


Enable the items you want to turn off on the current page or enable the All check box to suppress all the items.


Enable the items you want to turn off on the current page or enable the All check box to suppress all the items.


Enable the items you want to turn off on the current page or enable the All check box to suppress all the items.


Enable the items you want to turn off on the current page or enable the All check box to suppress all the items.


Enable the items you want to turn off on the current page or enable the All check box to suppress all the items.


Enable the items you want to turn off on the current page or enable the All check box to suppress all the items.


Prints the page number at the bottom center of the page instead of suppressing it.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Applies features and inserts codes a specific number of pages after the current page.


Applies features and inserts codes a specific number of pages after the current page.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Number the page sequentially in the document.


Insert a blank page when necessary to make sure the current page always has an odd page number.


Insert a blank page when necessary to make sure the current page always has an even page number.


Start a new page at the cursor.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Select a border type.


Select a border type.


Removes the border.


Choose a border.


Choose a border.


The name of the currently selected border.


Choose a border color.


Choose a border color.


Choose the type of line used in the box border.


Choose the type of line used in the box border.


Shows the selected border as it will display in the document.


Check this box to apply the border to the current paragraph, column, or page. Otherwise, the border is applied to all subsequent paragraphs, columns, or pages.


Lets you choose and customize a drop shadow.


Lets you choose a direction for a drop shadow.


Lets you preview the drop shadow as it will display in the document.


Lets you choose and customize a drop shadow.


Lets you specify the height for a drop shadow.


Lets you specify the height for a drop shadow.


Lets you specify the width for a drop shadow.


Lets you specify the width for a drop shadow.


Lets you select the color for a drop shadow.


Lets you select the color for a drop shadow.


Set spacing around the box border, set the drop shadow color and width, and select a gradient. Your selections are displayed in the preview window.


Set the space between the image and the edge of the box.


Set the space between the image and the edge of the box.


Set the space between the edge of the box and the text in the document.


Set the space between the edge of the box and the text in the document.


Set spacing around the box border, set the drop shadow color and width, and select a gradient. Your selections are displayed in the preview window.


Choose a gradient pattern for the background you have chosen.


Choose a gradient pattern for the background you have chosen.


Offset the gradient design vertically. The preview shows how the design will display in the document.


Offset the gradient design vertically. The preview shows how the design will display in the document.


Offset the gradient design horizontally. The preview shows how the design will display in the document.


Offset the gradient design horizontally. The preview shows how the design will display in the document.


Rotate the gradient pattern in the background. The preview displays the current pattern.


Rotate the gradient pattern in the background. The preview displays the current pattern.


Shows the currently selected background as it will display in the document.


Determines how rounded the corners are for a border with rounded corners. The higher the number you set, the rounder the curve.


Determines how rounded the corners are for a border with rounded corners. The higher the number you set, the rounder the curve.


Choose a fill style. The currently selected fill style is displayed in the Preview box.


Choose a fill style. The currently selected fill style is displayed in the Preview box.


The name of the currently selected fill or background.


Choose a fill foreground color.


Choose a fill foreground color.


Choose a background color for the fill you have chosen. The background color is displayed in the preview box.


Choose a background color for the fill you have chosen. The background color is displayed in the preview box.


Choose a pattern for the background.


Choose a pattern for the background.


Shows the current fill as it will display in the document.


Copies formatting from one area of text to another. Headings that are formatted with QuickFormat are "linked" together so that you can update them automatically.


Copies formatting from one area of text to another. Headings that are formatted with QuickFormat are "linked" together so that you can update them automatically.


Copies the format of text at the insertion point so that you can apply the format to other text.


Copies the format of the heading at the cursor so that you can apply the format to other headings.


Copies the format of the heading at the insertion point so that you can apply the format to other headings.


Copies formatting from one area of text to another. Headings that are formatted with QuickFormat are "linked" together so that you can update them automatically.


Copies the format of table cells you have selected so that you can apply the format to other table cells.


Copies formatting from one area of text to another. Headings that are formatted with QuickFormat are "linked" together so that you can update them automatically.


Copies the format of the current table so you can apply the format to other tables.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Stops automatically updating headings that use the same QuickFormat style.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


An example of the current date and time format.


The current date and time format.


Choose a date and time format.


Choose a date and time format.


Insert a date code that automatically updates when you open or print the document (CTRL+SHIFT+D).


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Choose a date and time format, or create a new format.


Create a new date and time format, and add it to the list.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Specify the name of the template macro to play, record, edit, or save.


Shows which template contains the macros listed below.


If you are recording a template macro, this button starts template macro record mode to record commands to the specified template macro. If you are playing a template macro, this button plays the specified template macro. If you are editing a template macro, this button retrieves the specified template macro and activates the Template macro toolbar. If you are saving a template macro, this button saves the template macro.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Deletes the specified template macro.


Specify the current or default template as the location of the template macros to play, record, edit, or save.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Use the options to specify the location of the template macro you want to play or record.


Specify the current template to record a template macro to or play a template macro from.


Specify the default template to record a template macro to or play a template macro from.


Specify whether to use the current or default template as the default location to play template macros from or record template macros to.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Specify which header or footer you want to create, edit, or discontinue. You can have two headers or footers on a page.


Select the header you want to create, edit, or discontinue. You can have two headers on a page.


Select the header you want to create, edit, or discontinue. You can have two headers on a page.


Select the footer you want to create, edit, or discontinue. You can have two footers on a page.


Select the footer you want to create, edit, or discontinue. You can have two footers on a page.


Positions the cursor in the header or footer and opens the Header/footer property bar so you can create the text and format of the header or footer.


Positions the cursor in the header or footer and opens the Header/footer property bar so that you can change the text and format of the header or footer.


Turns off the header or footer from this point in the document on.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Lets you specify the note you want to create or edit.


Restarts footnote numbering at the numbering you specify.


Lets you specify the note you want to create or edit.


Restarts endnote numbering at the numbering you specify.


Lets you change the location of your endnotes in your document.


Create a footnote or endnote.


Edit the footnote or endnote you have specified.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Start new numbering at the current footnote or endnote, change the separator line between document text and footnotes, and change advanced footnote/endnote options.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Places the endnotes at the cursor, if you do not want endnotes to print at the end of the document.


Places the endnotes at the cursor and restarts the numbering of subsequent endnotes.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Increases the current note number by 1.


Decreases the current note number by 1.


Restarts endnote numbering at the numbering you specify.


Restarts endnote numbering at the numbering you specify.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Lets you choose numbers, letters, or characters for numbering endnotes.


Lets you choose numbers, letters, or characters for numbering endnotes.


Lets you choose numbers, letters, or characters for numbering endnotes.


If you choose characters as the numbering method, you can type a character or press CTRL + W to select a non-keyboard symbol.


If you choose characters as the numbering method, you can type a character or press CTRL + W to select a non-keyboard symbol.


Lets you specify the amount of space between the endnotes at the end of the document.


Lets you specify the amount of space between the endnotes at the end of the document.


Opens the Styles Editor dialog box to let you specify a format for endnote numbers in the endnotes section of the document.


Opens the Styles editor dialog box to let you specify a format for endnote numbers in the endnotes section of the document.


Opens the Styles editor dialog box to let you specify a format for endnote numbers in the endnotes section of the document.


Customizes the format of the endnote. For example, you can change the spacing between endnotes and select a numbering method.


Lets you specify the minimum amount of space that must be available for an endnote at the bottom of a page. If the specified amount of space is not available for an endnote near the bottom margin of a page, the endnote moves to the next page.


Lets you specify the minimum amount of space that must be available for an endnote at the bottom of a page. If the specified amount of space is not available for an endnote near the bottom margin of a page, the endnote moves to the next page.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Specifies settings for tabs, such as type and position.


Specify the type of tab setting you want to add.


Specify the type of tab setting you want to add


Specify the position of the tab setting you want to add or clear. The position is measured from the left margin or left edge of the paper.


Specify the position of the tab setting you want to add or clear. The position is measured from the left margin or left edge of the paper.


Select how to position tab settings. If you specify left margin and later change the left margin, tab settings stay the same distance from the new left margin. If you specify left edge and later change the left margin, tab settings do not change.


Select how to position tab settings. If you specify left margin and later change the left margin, tab settings stay the same distance from the new left margin. If you specify left edge and later change the left margin, tab settings do not change.


Clear all tab settings, specify a new left-most tab setting in the position box, and click this to specify the distance you want between tab settings.


Clear all tab settings, specify a new left-most tab setting in the position box, and click this to specify the distance you want between tab settings.


Specifies settings for tabs, such as type and position.


Specify the character used for dot leaders. Press CTRL+W to specify a Corel symbol.


Specify the number of spaces you want between dot leader characters.


Specify the number of spaces you want between dot leader characters.


Specify the character used for alignment on decimal tab settings. Press CTRL+W to specify a Corel symbol.


Adds the tab setting you have specified.


Clears the tab setting you have specified.


Clears all tab settings.


Resets the tab settings to the WordPerfect default.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Use the default line height for the current font. Line height is the distance between the top of one line of text and the top of the next line of text.


Specify the line height as a fixed distance regardless of the font being used. The line height is the distance between the top of one line of text and the top of the next line of text.


Specify the line height as a fixed distance regardless of the font being used. The line height is the distance between the top of one line of text and the top of the next line of text.


Enable to specify the minimum line height. The line height is the distance between the top of one line of text and the top of the next line of text. The line height increases automatically if the font size is larger than the minimum line height.


Lets you specify the minimum line height. The line height is the distance between the top of one line of text and the top of the next line of text. The line height increases automatically if the font size is larger than the minimum line height.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Set the amount of white space between lines of text, measured as a multiple of the line height. For example, specify 1.5 to space lines one and a half times the usual line height.


Set the amount of white space between lines of text, measured as a multiple of the line height. For example, specify 1.5 to space lines one and a half times the usual line height.


Set the amount of white space between lines of text, measured as a multiple of the line height. For example, specify 1.5 to space lines one and a half times the usual line height.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Insert specific kinds of tab codes, hyphenation codes, hard space codes, and end centering/alignment codes. Also, set the character used to separate thousands in numeric displays.


Keeps the words on both sides of the space together on the same line. Use this when you do not want a phrase divided between lines.


If you used a center line, this code stops centering from the cursor position to the end of the line. If you used a right tab, this code discontinues right-aligning from the cursor to the end of the line.


Inserts a tab for use one time only; hard tabs remain even if you change tab settings.


Inserts a tab for use one time only; hard tabs remain even if you change tab settings.


Inserts a tab for use one time only; hard tabs remain even if you change tab settings.


Inserts a tab for use one time only; hard tabs remain even if you change tab settings.


Inserts a hard tab code that aligns text on a decimal (.). This is commonly used to line up numeric figures, such as currency.


Inserts a tab with dot leaders for use one time only; hard tabs remain even if you change tab settings.


Inserts a tab with dot leaders for use one time only; hard tabs remain even if you change tab settings.


Inserts a tab with dot leaders for use one time only; hard tabs remain even if you change tab settings.


Inserts a tab with dot leaders for use one time only; hard tabs remain even if you change tab settings.


Inserts a tab with dot leaders for use one time only; hard tabs remain even if you change tab settings.


Insert specific kinds of tab codes, hyphenation codes, hard space codes, and end centering/alignment codes. Also, set the character used to separate thousands in numeric displays.


Inserts a hyphen in the word.


Divides a word with a hyphen only when the word spans the hyphenation zone.


Divide a word without using a hyphen, but only when the word spans the hyphenation zone. Use this for words separated by a slash ("and/or"), an en dash, or an em dash.


Insert specific kinds of tab codes, hyphenation codes, hard space codes, and end centering/alignment codes. Also, set the character used to separate thousands in numeric displays.


Keeps text together on either side of a hyphen.


Wrap the word to the next line when it spans the hyphenation zone.


Lets you change the character used to separate hundreds from thousands (as in 1,000).


Lets you change the character used to separate hundreds from thousands (as in 1,000).


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Keeps the first and last line of a paragraph from being separated from the rest of the paragraph by a page break.


Keeps the first and last line of a paragraph from being separated from the rest of the paragraph by a page break.


Select a block (contiguous section) of text in your document, and select this option to keep that text from being divided on two pages.


Select a block (contiguous section) of text in your document, and select this option to keep that text from being divided on two pages.


In a paragraph, set the number of lines you want to keep together, counting from the cursor forward. For example, click in a heading and specify 4 lines to keep the heading and at least four lines of the following text together.


In a paragraph, set the number of lines you want to keep together, counting from the cursor forward. For example, click in a heading and specify 4 lines to keep the heading and at least four lines of the following text together.


In a paragraph, set the number of lines you want to keep together, counting from the cursor forward. For example, click in a heading and specify 4 lines to keep the heading and at least four lines of the following text together.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


Increases the current note number by 1.


Decreases the current note number by 1.


Lets you specify a new number for the current note.


Increments the current footnote number up or down.


Specify the amount of white space between the line and the text above or below it.


Specify the amount of white space between the line and the text above it.


Specify the amount of white space between the line and the text above it.


Specify the amount of white space between the line and the footnote text below it.


Specify the amount of white space between the line and the footnote text below it.


Sets the format of the line separating footnotes from text.


Places the line at the left or right margin, between margins (full), centered between margins, or at a position you specify.


Places the line at the left or right margin, between margins (full), centered between margins, or at a position you specify.


Specify the distance from the left edge of page. This is only available if you chose Set for the line position.


Specify the distance from the left edge of page. This is only available if you chose Set for the line position.


Specify the length of the footnote separator line. If you select Full for the line position, this option is grayed.


Specify the length of the footnote separator line. If you select Full for the line position, this option is grayed.


Specify the line style for the footnote separator line.


Specify the line style for the footnote separator line.


Lets you specify the minimum amount of space that must be available for an endnote at the bottom of a page. If the specified amount of space is not available for an endnote near the bottom margin of a page, the endnote moves to the next page.


Lets you choose numbers, letters, or characters for numbering endnotes.


If you choose characters as the numbering method, you can type a character or press CTRL + W to select a non-keyboard symbol.


Move the cursor to a specific location on the page.


Leave the cursor at its current horizontal position.


Move the cursor a specific distance to the left of its current position.


Move the cursor a specific distance to the right of its current position.


Move the cursor to an exact distance from the left edge of the page.


After you select a horizontal positioning option, specify the distance to move the cursor.


After you select a horizontal positioning option, specify the distance to move the cursor.


Move the cursor to a specific location on the page.


Leave the cursor at its current vertical position.


Move the cursor a specific distance above its current position.


Move the cursor a specific distance down from its current position.


Move the cursor to an exact distance down from the top of the page.


Specify whether you want text inserted above or below the position you set.


Move the cursor to a specific location on the page.


After you select a vertical positioning option, specify the distance to move the cursor.


After you select a vertical positioning option, specify the distance to move the cursor.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview of the dialog box.


If someone has asked you to edit the document, lets you choose a color to mark your changes and then marks the changes you make.


If you wrote the document, lets you see the document with all the changes that others have made and accept or reject the changes.


Places a marker in the margin beside lines that contain edited text.


Places a marker in the left margin of the page.


Places a marker the the left margin for odd-numbered pages and in the right margin for even-numbered pages.


Places a marker in the right margin.


Allows you to specify the type of marking character.


Click Reviewer or Author to use the Document Review toolbar.


Align object horizontally.


Align object horizontally relative to the left margin


Align object horizontally and centered.


Align object horizontally relative to the right margin.


Aligns object vertically.


Aligns object vertically relative to the top of the page.


Aligns object vertically in the center of the page.


Aligns object vertically relative to the bottom of the page.


Aligns the object relative to the page.


Aligns the object relative to the edge of the page.


Aligns the object relative to the center of the page.


Aligns the object relative to a column of text.


Aligns the object relative to the center of a column of text.


Selecting OK will affect the object's anchor positions.


Enable this box if you do not wish to see this warning.


Give the style a short name to help you identify it in the list of styles.


Defines the line that surrounds paragraphs, columns, pages, graphics, or drop caps.


Select the box sides you want to change. The Separator option is available only for paragraph and column borders. It inserts a horizontal line between paragraphs or a vertical line between columns.


Select the box sides you want to change. The Separator option is available only for paragraph and column borders. It inserts a horizontal line between paragraphs or a vertical line between columns.


Select the box sides you want to change. The Separator option is available only for paragraph and column borders. It inserts a horizontal line between paragraphs or a vertical line between columns.


Select the box sides you want to change. The Separator option is available only for paragraph and column borders. It inserts a horizontal line between paragraphs or a vertical line between columns.


Select the box sides you want to change. The Separator option is available only for paragraph and column borders. It inserts a horizontal line between paragraphs or a vertical line between columns.


Select the box sides you want to change. The Separator option is available only for paragraph and column borders. It inserts a horizontal line between paragraphs or a vertical line between columns.


Select a line style for the border. To use a style not on the palette or list, click Line styles.


Select a line style for the border. To use a style not on the palette or list, click Line styles.


Defines the line that surrounds paragraphs, columns, pages, graphics, or drop caps.


Select a color from the palette. Select Use line style color if you want the line to be the color of the current line style.


Select a color from the palette. Select Use line style color if you want the line to be the color of the current line style.


Specify a radius for rounded border corners. The higher the number the more rounded the corner.


Specify a radius for rounded border corners. The higher the number the more rounded the corner.


Illustrates how the border will look as you change the style.


Specify the distance between the border and the inside or outside contents. Select Show spacing to preview the distance.


Specify the distance between the border and the inside contents. Select Show spacing to preview the distance.


Specify the distance between the border and the inside contents. Select Show spacing to preview the distance.


Specify the distance between the border and the surrounding contents. Select Show spacing to preview the distance.


Specify the distance between the border and the surrounding contents. Select Show spacing to preview the distance.


Select this option to use standard spacing between the border and the inside contents and between the border and the surrounding contents. Select Show spacing to see the results.


Specify whether to show the separator line in the Preview box above. This option is available only for paragraph and column borders.


View the inside and outside spacing width in the Preview box above.


Defines the line that surrounds paragraphs, columns, pages, graphics, or drop caps.


Select the corner of the box where the drop shadow should appear.


Select the corner of the box where the drop shadow should appear.


Select the color for the shadow behind the border.


Select the color for the shadow behind the border.


Specify how thick the shadow behind the border should be.


Specify how thick the shadow behind the border should be.


Enable to choose a height for a drop shadow.


Lets you choose a custom height for a drop shadow.


Lets you choose a custom height for a drop shadow.


Shifts the caption from the position you have currently selected. A positive number moves the caption forward. A negative number moves the caption backward. For example, if the caption position is Left, 0.5" moves the caption one-half inch from the left margin.


Shift the caption text from its current position. Specify a percentage of the width or height of the box. For example, specify 25% to move the caption one-fourth of the length of the box.


Specify a width measurement for the caption. This cannot be larger than the width or height of the box.


Specify a caption width using a percentage of the width or height of the box. For example, specify 50% to make the caption half as long as the box.


The current box numbering style. For example, the Figure numbering style is Figure 1, Figure 2, an so on.


The current caption numbering style.


Select different numbering styles for captions.


The current caption numbering style.


Specify the footnote number you want to edit or create.


Specify the footnote number you want to edit or create.


Specify the endnote you want to edit or create.


Lets you specify the note you want to create or edit.


Customizes the format of footnotes. For example, you can change the numbering method, position on the page, or the spacing between text and a separator line.


Uses numbers, letters, or characters for footnote numbering.


Select this option to have every page start over with the first footnote number.


Customizes the format of footnotes. For example, you can change the numbering method, position on the page, or the spacing between text and a separator line.


Specify a format for all footnote numbers in the document text.


Specify a format for footnote numbers in the footnote text at the bottom of the page.


Specify the amount of white space between the footnotes at the bottom of the page.


Specify the amount of white space between the footnotes at the bottom of the page.


Customizes the format of footnotes. For example, you can change the numbering method, position on the page, or the spacing between text and a separator line.


Specify whether footnotes print immediately below the last line of text or at the bottom of the page. This placement is used when the text does not fill the entire page.


Specify whether footnotes print immediately below the last line of text or at the bottom of the page. This placement is used when the text does not fill the entire page.


Customizes the format of footnotes. For example, you can change the numbering method, position on the page, or the spacing between text and a separator line.


Customizes the format of footnotes. For example, you can change the numbering method, position on the page, or the spacing between text and a separator line.


Specify the minimum vertical space to allow for footnotes. If this much space is not available for a footnote near the bottom of a page, the footnote moves to the next page.


Specify the minimum vertical space to allow for footnotes. If this much space is not available for a footnote near the bottom of a page, the footnote moves to the next page.


When a footnote is divided between two pages, prints "(continued...)" on the last footnote line of the first page and on the first footnote line of the next page.


Sets the format of the line separating footnotes from text.


Sets the format of the line separating footnotes from text.


Specify the amount of white space between the line and the text above it.


Specify the amount of white space between the line and the footnote text below it.


Sets the format of the line separating footnotes from text.


Places the line at the left or right margin (Left or Right), between margins (Full), centered between margins (Center), or at a position you specify (Set).


Specify the distance from the left edge of page. This is only available if you chose Set for the Line position.


Specify the distance from the left edge of page. This is only available if you chose Set for the Line position.


Specify the length of the footnote separator line. If you select Full for the Line position, this option is dimmed.


Specify the length of the footnote separator line. If you select Full for the Line position, this option is dimmed.


Specify the line style for the footnote separator line.


Specify the line style for the footnote separator line.


Generate any items defined with links or references within the document.


Generate any items defined with links or references within the document.


Resaves condensed subdocuments with the generated changes. Only applies if your document has condensed subdocuments.


Creates and generates any hyperlinks to any marked text.


Choose a reference type.


Choose a reference type.


Type the text that comes before the QuickReference.


Type the text that comes before the QuickReference.


Type the text that follows the QuickReference.


Type the text that follows the QuickReference.


Displays an example of a QuickReference based on the options you enter.


Displays an example of a QuickReference based on the options you enter.


Displays an example of a QuickReference based on the options you enter.


 Lets you create HTML-enabled references that apply to both paper and Web documents by specifying text before and after the reference, rather than just a page number.


 Choose a reference type.


Specify the section name in which the authority will appear (for example, Cases).


Specify the section name in which the authority will appear (for example, Cases).


Specify the shortened form of the authority.


Specify the shortened form of the authority.


Lists the short forms of the authorities for the document.


Lists the section under which the authority will appear.


Lists the short forms of the authorities for the document.


Specify how a list or a table of authorities section looks.


Displays the style selected for the definition.


Displays the numbering format selected for the definition.


Specify how a list or a table of authorities section looks.


Create a list or table of authorities section definition.


Retrieves a list or table of authorities section definition from another document.


Deletes the selected definition.


Edit a list or table of authorities section definition.


Specify the name for the table of authorities section definition.


Specify the name for the table of authorities section definition.


Specify how the text and numbering will look.


Specify how the text and numbering will look.


Specify how the text and numbering will look.


Customize the page numbering style for the table of authorities section definition.


Shows how the table of authorities will display with the position setting you have selected.


When you select this option, underlining in the authorities you mark will appear in the table of authorities.


Groups page numbers instead of printing them individually. For example, page numbers would be 4-6 instead of 4, 5, 6.


Click to use underlining and dash selections for all new table of authorities sections.


Shows the currently selected style.


Shows the currently selected style.


Change the currently selected style.


Specify the name of the file containing the definitions and click OK to display the definition names.


Specify the name of the file containing the definitions and click OK to display the definition names.


Lists the names of the definitions contained in the file you specified.


Lists the names of the definitions contained in the file you specified.


Select a new style for the list definition or table of authorities section definition.


Select a new style for the list definition or table of authorities section definition.


Create a new style using the Styles Editor.


Edit an existing style using the Styles Editor.


Displays the style level.


Displays the style level.


Displays the name of the style level.


Displays the name of the style level.


Create a new style using the Styles Editor.


Modify the selected style.


Use the same page number style in the index as you are using in the document.


Use an index page number style that is different from the document page numbers. You can type text for the new style in the edit box and click Insert to insert numbers into the style.


Use an index page number style that is different from the document page numbers. You can type text for the new style in the edit box and click Insert to insert numbers into the style.


Insert the different available number types (page, chapter, volume, etc.) into the page numbering style you are creating for your index.


Displays a list of all bookmarks.


Specify which table to choose.


Displays a list of all tables.


Specify a cell or range of cells.


Displays a list of all cells.


Displays a list of all WP code.


Displays a list of all hyperlinks in the document.


Displays a list of accessible items.


Select a highlight color.


Select a highlight color.


Specify a highlight shading percentage.


Specify a highlight shading percentage.


Lets you specify the file you want to publish to HTML.


Keep the image fill colors, make the image transparent so the background shows through the image, or convert the image to an outline with a white fill.


Displays the selected data source.


Displays the selected data source.


Displays the selected table.


Displays the selected table.


Displays the available fields.


Displays the available fields.


Select for additional queries.


Displays the selected SQL statement.


Set the space you want to remove from or add to the current space between the two characters at each side of insertion point. To remove space, set a negative number.


Set the space you want to remove from or add to the current space between the two characters at each side of insertion point. To remove space, set a negative number.


Select the unit of measure (inches, centimeters, points, etc.) you want to use for adjusting kerning.


Select the unit of measure (inches, centimeters, points, etc.) you want to use for adjusting kerning.


Specifies a paper size, paper location, paper orientation, and text adjustments.


Specify the width and height of individual labels.


Specify the width and height of individual labels.


Specify how labels are arranged in columns (up and down) and rows (left to right).


Specify how labels are arranged in columns (up and down) and rows (left to right).


Specifies the horizontal distance between label columns and the vertical distance between label rows. If there is no space between labels, specify 0" and 0".


Specifies the horizontal distance between label columns and the vertical distance between label rows. If there is no space between labels, specify 0" and 0".


Specify the location of the top left label (measured from paper edge to label edge).


Limit the printable area of each label by setting label margins.


Limit the printable area of each label by setting label margins.


Limit the printable area of each label by setting label margins.


Limit the printable area of each label by setting label margins.


Edits the name and description of the label file.


Allows you to specify how much of the endnote is to be kept on one page.


Displays large icons on the toolbar.


Deletes the selected toolbar.


Inserts a hyphen.


Ignores selected word.


Inserts a space.


Suspends hyphenation for the selected word.


Places the hyphenation at a soft return.


Displays an overview of this topic.


Allows you to use the mouse or the arrow keys to position the hyphen.


Displays the name of the selected bulleted list type.


Describes the bulleted list type.


Displays the style level.


Displays the name of the style level.


Create a new style using the Styles editor.


Modify the selected style.


Define a specific field.


Define a specific field.


Define a specific field.


Allows you to select a specific field.


Allows you to select a specific field.


Allows you to select a specific field.


Clears all fields.


Displays examples of selected records.


Delete a custom date/time format.


Displays the color component value for the hue.


Lets you specify a color component value for the hue.


Displays the color component value for the lightness.


Lets you specify a color component value for the lightness.


Displays a color component value for the saturation.


Lets you specify a color component value for the saturation.


Displays a color component value for the currently selected color. The name next to the box identifies the component name as cyan.


Lets you specify a cyan color component value.


Displays a color component value for the currently selected color. The name next to the box identifies the component name as magenta.


Lets you specify a magenta color component value.


Displays a color component value for the currently selected color. The name next to the box identifies the component name as yellow.


Lets you specify a yellow color component value.


Displays a color component value for the currently selected color. The name next to the box identifies the component name as black.


Lets you specify a black color component value.


Select a new color to add to the color palette. Click on the color wheel to select a color. Drag the small square on the light-to-dark sliding scale to lighten or darken the color. To make precise adjustments, select a color model and change the associated number values. Click OK to add the color to the color palette.


Displays a name for the list/outline format you are creating.


Displays a description for the list/outline format you are creating.


Displays the number you have defined for each level of your outline style.


Use the same page number style in the index as you are using in the document.


Use an index page number style that is different from the document page numbers. You can type text for the new style in the edit box and click Insert to insert numbers into the style.


Use an index page number style that is different from the document page numbers. You can type text for the new style in the edit box and click Insert to insert numbers into the style.


Insert the different available number types (page, chapter, volume, etc.) into the page numbering style you are creating for your index.


Lets you choose a digital signature to attach to a document.


Lets you view information about a digital signature.


Shows who the certificate is issued to.


Shows who the certificate is issued by.


Shows the date when the certificate validation begins.


Shows the date when the certificate validation ends.


Describes the intended uses for the certificate.


Describes the intended uses for the certificate.


Displays whether or not the certificate is valid.


Allows you to choose a validation method.


Use the Internet to check the certificate’s authority.


Check the parent certificate for validation.


Check the root certificate for validation.


Displays the sender of the signed document.


Displays information about the digital signature.


Opens the Certificate dialog box so you can view more information and choose a validation method for the digital signature.


Lets you know the digital signature attached to the document is invalid.


Lets you view information about the digital signature.


Specify the filename of the image in this box.


Specify the filename of the image in this box.


Edit the contents of the box.


Displays the document image name.


Displays the document image name.


Displays the different attachment points.


Allows you to preview the image in the preview window.


Allows you to preview the image in the preview window.


Select an item (right margin, left margin, etc.), then set the horizontal and vertical distances between that item and the left side of the box.


Select an item (right margin, left margin, etc.), then set the horizontal and vertical distances between that item and the left side of the box.


Select an item (right margin, left margin, etc.), then set the horizontal and vertical distances between that item and the left side of the box.


Select an item (right margin, left margin, etc.), then set the horizontal and vertical distances between that item and the left side of the box.


Graphics boxes, lines, borders, and fill come with a predefined style (look). You can customize a style for use one time, or you can create a style for use with other graphics.


Graphics boxes, lines, borders, and fill come with a predefined style (look). You can customize a style for use one time, or you can create a style for use with other graphics.


Graphics boxes, lines, borders, and fill come with a predefined style (look). You can customize a style for use one time, or you can create a style for use with other graphics.


Graphics boxes, lines, borders, and fill come with a predefined style (look). You can customize a style for use one time, or you can create a style for use with other graphics.


Graphics boxes, lines, borders, and fill come with a predefined style (look). You can customize a style for use one time, or you can create a style for use with other graphics.


Graphics boxes, lines, borders, and fill come with a predefined style (look). You can customize a style for use one time, or you can create a style for use with other graphics.


ISelect a position, or select Set and specify a distance from the left edge of the page. To extend the line from the left to right margin, select Full.


Select a position, or select Set and specify a distance from the left edge of the page. To extend the line from the left to right margin, select Full.


Select a position, or select Set and specify a distance from the left edge of the page. To extend the line from the left to right margin, select Full.


Select a position, or select Set and specify a distance from the left edge of the page. To extend the line from the left to right margin, select Full.


Select a line style for the border. To use a style not on the palette or list, click Line Styles.


Change the thickness of the line.


Change the amount of space on the bottom of the page.


Change the amount of space on the bottom of the page.


Select a position, or select Set and specify a distance from the left edge of the page. To extend the line from the left to right margin, select Full.


Select a position, or select Set and specify a distance from the left edge of the page. To extend the line from the left to right margin, select Full.


Specify the amount of space at the top of the page.


Set a minimum measurement for the box height.


Set a minimum measurement for the box height.


Give the style a short name to help you identify it in the list of styles.


Give the style a short name to help you identify it in the list of styles.


Prints the header, footer, or watermark on even, odd, or all pages. Use Even and Odd for two-sided documents.


Prints the header, footer, or watermark on odd pages. Use for two-sided documents.


Prints the header, footer, or watermark on even pages. Use for two-sided documents.


Prints the header, footer, or watermark on all pages.


Adjusts the space between the text and the header or footer. You can also drag the dotted gray guideline.


Adjusts the space between the text and the header or footer. You can also drag the dotted gray guideline.


Adjusts the space between the text and the header or footer. You can also drag the dotted gray guideline.


Publish comments along with the file.


Allows you to choose HTML publish options.


Lists your default GIF options.


Enables interlaced GIFs.


Displays the GIF as a transparency.


Choose a color for the transparency.


Lists your default JPEG options.


Adjust the quality of your JPEG.


Adjust the quality of your JPEG.


Specifies settings for tabs, such as type and position.


Lets you examine the changes that others have made to a document. Each person's changes are marked in a different color. You can move from change to change and accept or reject each one, or you can accept or reject all changes.


Lists the names of people reviewing the document and the color being used to mark their comments.


Turn on or off the margin markings that have been made in the document.


Turn on or off the color display of the changes that have been made in the document.


Close this feature bar without saving any changes you have made.


Specify the position of the tab setting you want to add or clear. The position is measured from the left margin or left edge of the paper.


 Select the previous annotation.


Select the next annotation.


Insert the currently selected annotation into the text of the document.


Inserts all annotations into the document text.


Deletes the currently selected annotation.


Deletes all annotations from the document text.


Closes this dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Use the menu to define your search.


Type the text or codes you want to find.


Type the text or codes you want to find.


Type the text you want to replace the text with.


Type the text you want to replace the text with.


Specify the font style, size, and attributes of the text you are searching for.


Specify the font style, size, and attributes of the text you are searching for.


 Specify a font typeface to limit the search. Find looks for the text only when it appears in the specified font.


 Specify a font typeface to limit the search. Find looks for the text only when it appears in the specified font.


 Specify a font style (bold, italics, etc.). Find limits the serach to text that appears in the specified font and style.


 Specify a font style (bold, italics, etc.). Find limits the serach to text that appears in the specified font and style.


 Specify a point size to limit the search. Find limits the serach to text that appears in the specified font and style.


 Specify a point size to limit the search. Find limits the serach to text that appears in the specified font and style.


 Specify the font style, size, and attributes of the text you are searching for.


 Limits the search to text with a bold attribute.


 Limits the search to text with an italic attribute.


 Limits the search to text with an underline attribute.


 Limits the search to text with a double underline attribute.


 Limits the search to text with an outline attribute.


 Limits the search to text with a shadow attribute.


 Limits the search to text with a small caps attribute.


 Limits the search to text with a redline attribute.


 Limits the search to text with a strikeout attribute.


 Limits the search to text with a superscript attribute.


 Limits the search to text with a subscript attribute.


 Limits the search to text with a fine attribute.


 Limits the search to text with a small attribute.


 Limits the search to text with a large attribute.


 Limits the search to text with a very large attribute.


 Limits the search to text with an extra large attribute.


 Specify the number of times to replace the search text.


 Specify the number of times to replace the search text.


 Inserts a paragraph number automatically.


 Specify whether line numbers will print as numbers, letters, or Roman numerals.


 Specify the number assigned to the first numbered line of text.


 Number the lines in a document and print each line number at a specified place.


 If someone has asked you to edit the document, lets you choose a color to mark your changes and then marks the changes you make.


 If you wrote the document, lets you see the document with all the changes that others have made and accept or reject the changes.


 Click reviewer or Author to use the Document review toolbar.


Displays the inserted bitmap image object.


Type the text and apply features in this document window.


Type text in table cells to organize information.


Lets you preview the outline.


Lets you preview the outline.


Lets you preview the outline.


Lets you display only numbers in the window.


Lets you display styles associated with each level in the window.


Lets you create a concordance file.


Lets you align endnotes and footnotes with document margins.


Lets you align headers and footers with document margins.


Lets you align watermarks with document margins.


Place the caption at the left, right, or center of the side it is on.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


 Allows you to define selection conditions.


 Allows you to define selection conditions.


 Allows you to define selection conditions.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


 Lets you move the selected object back one layer in the document.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


 Lets you choose a line pattern.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


Lets you create a table with equal column widths.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


 Changes the background color of an object.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


Lets you create columns by separating text by paragraphs.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


Displays the table format, if a table format is selected.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


Displays the table format, if a table format is selected.


 Lets you move the selected object back one layer in the document.


 Lets you move the selected object back one layer in the document.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


 Lets you choose the shadow color for an object.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


Lets you choose the format of the file you want to convert.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


Select this option if you want to drag a box to specify the size of each new graphic. Clear it to insert standard sized graphics. (You can change the size and position of a graphic after it is inserted.)


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


 Changes the foreground color of an object.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


 Changes the fill style of an object.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


 Lets you move the selected object back one layer in the document.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


Lets you choose the format of the file you want to convert.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


Lets you create columns by separating text by commas.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


Lets you specify the number of rows in the table.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


 Lets you specify the shadow position and color for an object.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


 Lets you move the selected object back one layer in the document.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


 Lets you move the selected object forward one layer in the document.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


 Lets you move the selected object back one layer in the document.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


 Lets you move the selected object back one layer in the document.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


Lets you specify the number of columns in the table.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


 Allows you to define selection conditions.


 Allows you to define selection conditions.


 Allows you to define selection conditions.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


Lets you create a table by converting parallel columns.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


Lists the text delimeter options.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


 Lets you choose fill style, foreground color, and background color.


 Lets you choose the outline color, pattern, and width.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


Displays the name of the file you want to open.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


Lets you specify the number of columns in the table.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


 Lets you choose an outline color.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


Lets you create columns by separating text by a specified character.


Lets you specify the number of rows in the table.


Lets you create columns by separating text by tabs.


Lets you create columns by separating text by a specified character.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


 Lets you choose a line thickness.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


 Allows you to define selection conditions.


 Allows you to define selection conditions.


 Allows you to define selection conditions.


 Allows you to define selection conditions.


 Allows you to define selection conditions.


 Allows you to define selection conditions.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


Lets you create columns by merging data files.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


Opens the Table SpeedFormat dialog box, which lets you apply a table format to the table.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


 Lets you choose the shadow position for an object. Holding down the mouse button on this tool opens a flyout, from which you can choose a shadow position.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


Displays the name of the file you want to open.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


Lets you preview the paragraph format changes.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


Lets you automatically format the column width to fit the text.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


For information about this item, see the online Help.


Lets you change environment settings for WordPerfect.


Lets you choose a direction for a drop shadow.


Lets you choose a direction for a drop shadow.


Lets you choose a direction for a drop shadow.


Lets you choose a direction for a drop shadow.


Lets you choose a direction for a drop shadow.


Lets you choose a direction for a drop shadow.


Lets you choose a direction for a drop shadow.


Lets you choose a direction for a drop shadow.


Lets you choose a direction for a drop shadow.


Lets you choose a direction for a drop shadow.


Lets you choose a direction for a drop shadow.


Lets you choose a direction for a drop shadow.


Lets you choose a direction for a drop shadow.


Lets you choose a direction for a drop shadow.


Lets you choose a direction for a drop shadow.


Lets you choose a direction for a drop shadow.


Lets you choose a direction for a drop shadow.


Lets you choose a direction for a drop shadow.


Lets you choose a direction for a drop shadow.


Lets you choose a direction for a drop shadow.


Lets you choose a direction for a drop shadow.


Lets you choose a direction for a drop shadow.


Lets you choose a direction for a drop shadow.


Lets you choose a direction for a drop shadow.


Lets you choose a direction for a drop shadow.


Lets you add a subject name to a routing slip. The subject name that you type in the box displays in the subject box of the e-mail that contains the document.


Lets you add a subject name to a routing slip. The subject name that you type in the box displays in the subject box of the e-mail that contains the document.


Lets you type the message to be included with the routing slip. The text that you type in the Message box displays in the message area of the e-mail that contains the document.


Lets you type the message to be included with the routing slip. The text that you type in the Message box displays in the message area of the e-mail that contains the document.


Displays a list of the reviewers that are added to the routing slip.


Displays a list of the reviewers that are added to the routing slip.


 Lets you add a reviewer to the routing slip.


Lets you delete a reviewer from the routing slip.


Lets you move a reviewer up in the routing order.


Lets you move a reviewer down in the routing order.


Lets you delete all reviewers from the routing slip.


Lets you choose Outlook as your default address book.


Lets you choose a name from the reviewer list.


Lets you choose a name from the reviewer list.


Lets you change the routing assignment.


Lets you review the document.


Launches Outlook, if Outlook is not launched, and creates an e-mail addressed to the next reviewer listed on the routing slip. The document is automatically inserted in the e-mail as an attachment.


Allows you to save the changes that you made and send the document later.


Closes the document without saving any changes.


Displays documents codes.


Displays the name and location of a .PDF file.


Opens the Save as PDF dialog box and lets you choose the drive and folder in which to save the file.


Enable to publish all pages in a document.


Enable to publish the selected object.


Enable to publish or export the currently displayed frame.


Enable to specify the frames, or the range of frames, to publish.

A dash (-) between numbers defines a range of sequential frames (e.g., 1-5 prints pages 1 to 5).

A comma (,) between numbers defines a series of nonsequential frames (e.g., 1,5 prints pages 1 and 5 only).

Any combination of dashes and commas is supported (e.g., 1-3, 5, 7, 10-12 prints pages 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 11, and 12).


Lets you specify the pages, or the range of pages, to publish.


Lets you choose a compatibility, depending upon what kind of viewer the recipients of the PDF file have.


Displays the name of the author of the PDF file.


Displays keywords associated with the PDF file.


Displays a .PDF style from the list box. You can choose a preset .PDF style or create your own. The preset PDF styles contain guidelines for general publishing and publishing to the Web.


Lets you add or save a .PDF style.


Lets you delete a .PDF style.


Enable to export text as curves. If you are using unusual text characters, exporting text as curves can eliminate problems with font variances on different computer systems.


Enable to embed fonts. This makes a .PDF file more portable since the fonts do not have to reside on other systems.


Enable to let WordPerfect embed the 14 basic fonts to your computer system. This eliminates font variances on different systems.


Enable to convert True Type to Type 1 fonts. Converting True Type to Type 1 fonts can increase file size if there are many fonts in a file.


Enable to subset Type 1 fonts. Subsetting fonts can reduce file size.


Displays a percentage of the fonts used.


Lets you type a percentage of fonts used in a document.


Displays a percentage of the fonts used.


Enable to export files in binary file format. Binary is less portable as some computers do not support the file format.


Enable to export files in ASCII file format. ASCII is a fully portable file format.


Enable to compress text and  line art. This is useful when you want to reduce file size.


Lets you compress bitmaps using JPEG, LZW, or ZIP compression. This is useful when you want to reduce file size.


Lets you change JPEG compression quality. The higher the image quality, the larger the file size.


Lets you change JPEG compression quality. The higher the image quality, the larger the file size.


Displays the degree of JPEG compression quality used when publishing bitmaps.


Lets you change JPEG compression quality. The higher the image quality, the larger the file size.


Lets you change JPEG compression quality. The higher the image quality, the larger the file size.


Enable to include hyperlinks in a .PDF file. Including hyperlinks lets you view, in Adobe Acrobat or Acrobat Reader, jumps to other Web pages or the Internet.


Enable to generate bookmarks in a .PDF file. Bookmarks are links represented by text.


Enable to display the project page in Adobe Acrobat or Acrobat Reader.


Enable to display a full screen in Adobe Acrobat or Acrobat Reader.


Enable to display bookmarks in Adobe Acrobat or Acrobat Reader.


Lets you output values as Native, CMYK, RGB, or grayscale.


Enable to optimize the resolution of images in the PDF file for the World Wide Web.


Enable to embed a file within a PDF file.


Displays the filename and location of embedded files.


Lets you choose the drive and folder where the file you want to embed is stored.


Using WordPerfect legal features

WordPerfect legal features are designed to cater to the needs of your law practice. The standard features of WordPerfect provide you with the tools to create, review, and compare legal documents; to import and export documents; and to publish your legal documents in various formats. In addition, you can create specialized legal documents such as cases and pleadings.

The WordPerfect legal features are not automatically installed during a typical installation. If you want to install the legal features, you must add the legal features during the installation.

In this section, you will learn about

•	using the legal toolbar

•	creating and editing pleading styles

•	creating cases for pleading documents

•	creating pleading documents

•	publishing pleading documents to EDGAR


Using the Legal toolbar

WordPerfect lets you access various legal tools from the Legal toolbar. You can use the toolbar to create legal documents such as pleadings, tables of contents, and tables of authorities.

You can hide or display the Legal toolbar.

 How to


To display the legal toolbar

1	Click View [image] Toolbars.

2	Enable the Legal check box in the Available toolbars list.

 Note

•	The WordPerfect legal features are not automatically installed during a typical installation. If you want to install the legal features, you must add the legal features during the installation.

 Tip

•	You can hide the Legal toolbar by disabling the Legal check box.

 Related topics


Creating and editing pleading styles

Before you generate a pleading document, you must create a pleading style. You can create as many styles as you need using preset pleading styles or custom pleading styles.

The Pleading Expert Designer automatically displays a preview of your pleading style, which is updated as you make changes.

You can edit a pleading style. You can also delete a pleading style.

 How to


To use a preset pleading style

1	Click Tools [image] Legal tools [image] Pleading Expert Designer.

2	Click Next.

3	Choose a style from the Available court pleading styles list box.

4	Type the court name in the Court name box, and click Next.

5	Follow the steps in the Pleading Expert Designer wizard.

 Note

•	Each step required to create or edit a pleading style is listed on the left side of the Pleading Expert Designer window. If you are making only a few changes to a pleading style, you can go directly to the step you need by clicking it.

•	The WordPerfect legal features are not automatically installed during a typical installation. If you want to install the legal features, you must add the legal features during the installation.

 Tip

•	You can open the Pleading Expert Designer by clicking the Pleading Expert Designer button on the Legal toolbar.

 Related topics


To create a custom pleading style

1	Click Tools [image] Legal tools [image] Pleading Expert Designer.

2	Click Next.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	New pleading style [image] lets you create a new custom style

•	Copy from existing style [image] lets you create a custom style from an existing style

If you enable the Copy from existing style option, choose a style from the Available court pleading styles list box.

4	Type a style name in the New pleading style name box.

5	Follow the steps in the Pleading Expert Designer wizard.

 Notes

•	Each step required to create or edit a pleading style is listed on the left side of the Pleading Expert Designer window. If you are making only a few changes to a pleading style, you can go directly to the step you need by clicking it.

•	If you create a pleading style using an existing style, the original style remains intact.

•	The WordPerfect legal features are not automatically installed during a typical installation. If you want to install the legal features, you must add the legal features during the installation.

 Tip

•	You can open the Pleading Expert Designer by clicking the Pleading Expert Designer button on the Legal toolbar.

 Related topics


To edit a pleading style

1	Click Tools [image] Legal tools [image] Pleading Expert Designer.

2	Click Next.

3	Enable the Edit style option.

4	Choose a style from the Available court pleading styles list box.

5	Follow the steps in the Pleading Expert Designer wizard.

 Note

•	Each step required to create or edit a pleading style is listed on the left side of the Pleading Expert Designer window. If you are making only a few changes to a pleading style, you can go directly to the step you need by clicking it.

•	The WordPerfect legal features are not automatically installed during a typical installation. If you want to install the legal features, you must add the legal features during the installation.

 Tip

•	You can open the Pleading Expert Designer by clicking the Pleading Expert Designer button on the Legal toolbar.

 Related topics


To delete a pleading style

1	Click Tools [image] Legal tools [image] Pleading Expert Designer.

2	Click Next.

3	Enable the Delete style option.

4	Choose a pleading style from the Available court pleading styles list box.

5	Click Next.

6	Click Yes.

 Note

•	The WordPerfect legal features are not automatically installed during a typical installation. If you want to install the legal features, you must add the legal features during the installation.

 Tip

•	You can open the Pleading Expert Designer by clicking the Pleading Expert Designer button on the Legal toolbar.

 Related topics


Creating cases for pleading documents

You can create a new case, or you can create a case by copying an existing one. If you create a case using an existing case, the original remains intact.

You can edit and delete cases.

 How to


To create a new case

1	Click Tools [image] Legal tools [image] Pleading Expert Filler.

2	Click Next.

3	Enable the New case option.

4	Type a name for the case in the New case name box.

5	Follow the steps in the Pleading Expert Filler wizard.

 Note

•	The WordPerfect legal features are not automatically installed during a typical installation. If you want to install the legal features, you must add the legal features during the installation.

 Tip

•	You can also open the Pleading Expert Filler by clicking the Pleading Expert Filler button on the Legal toolbar.

 Related topics


To copy a case

1	Click Tools [image] Legal tools [image] Pleading Expert Filler.

2	Click Next.

3	Enable the Copy an existing case option.

4	Choose a case from the Existing cases list box.

5	Type a name for the case in the New case name box.

6	Follow the steps in the Pleading Expert Filler wizard.

 Note

•	Each step required to create a case is listed on the left side of the Pleading Expert Filler window. If you are making only a few changes to a case, you can go directly to the step you need by clicking it.

•	The WordPerfect legal features are not automatically installed during a typical installation. If you want to install the legal features, you must add the legal features during the installation.

 Tip

•	You can also open the Pleading Expert Filler by clicking the Pleading Expert Filler button on the Legal toolbar.

 Related topics


To edit a case

1	Click Tools [image] Legal tools [image] Pleading Expert Filler.

2	Click Next.

3	Enable the Edit case information option.

4	Choose a case from the Existing cases list box.

5	Follow the steps in the Pleading Expert Filler wizard.

 Note

•	Each step required to edit a case is listed on the left side of the Pleading Expert Filler window. If you are making only a few changes to a case, you can go directly to the step you need by clicking it.

•	The WordPerfect legal features are not automatically installed during a typical installation. If you want to install the legal features, you must add the legal features during the installation.

 Tip

•	You can also open the Pleading Expert Filler by clicking the Pleading Expert Filler button on the Legal toolbar.

 Related topics


To delete a case

1	Click Tools [image] Legal tools [image] Pleading Expert Filler.

2	Click Next.

3	Enable the Delete case information option.

4	Choose a case from the Existing cases list box.

5	Click Next.

6	Click OK.

7	Click Close.

 Note

•	The WordPerfect legal features are not automatically installed during a typical installation. If you want to install the legal features, you must add the legal features during the installation.

 Tip

•	You can also open the Pleading Expert Filler by clicking the Pleading Expert Filler button on the Legal toolbar.

 Related topics


Creating pleading documents

You can create a pleading document. Before creating a pleading document, you must first create a case. For information about creating a case, see "Creating cases for pleading documents."

 How to


To create a pleading document

1	Click Tools [image] Legal tools [image] Pleading Expert Filler.

2	Click Next.

3	Choose a case from the Existing cases list box.

4	Click Finish.

 Note

•	The WordPerfect legal features are not automatically installed during a typical installation. If you want to install the legal features, you must add the legal features during the installation.

 Tip

•	You can also open the Pleading Expert Filler by clicking the Pleading Expert Filler button on the Legal toolbar.

 Related topics


Publishing pleading documents to EDGAR

WordPerfect lets you publish documents to an Electronic Data Gathering, Analysis, and Retrieval (EDGAR) system format. WordPerfect does not create all the documentation necessary for a complete electronic filing, but it alleviates many problems associated with the ASCII DOS .TXT option.

WordPerfect EDGAR features include

•	80 characters per line of text

•	132 characters per line in tables

•	a restricted ASCII character set

•	an export of footnotes as part of the ASCII document

•	a special tagging for footnote numbering

•	an End Of Document tag

Once a document has been converted to the EDGAR format, the ASCII document cannot be restored as a WordPerfect file. The document should be modified in WordPerfect, and then exported again to the EDGAR format. This will help you reduce the likelihood of having multiple versions of a document [image] one in WordPerfect format and another in EDGAR.

 How to


To publish a document to EDGAR

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Type a name for the file in the File name box.

3	Choose EDGAR from the File type list box.

4	Click Save.

 Notes

•	The document you are saving as an EDGAR file should have a name different from the name of the active WordPerfect document.

•	EDGAR documents are always in a fixed-pitch, 10-point font. If you want to see what the final document looks like, you must select a fixed-pitch, 10-point font for the document text before you publish to EDGAR.

•	Publishing a document to EDGAR does not attach header information to a document. When preparing a document for publishing to EDGAR, you must create an appropriate ASCII header file and attach it to the beginning of the file after it has been saved.

•	Publishing a document to EDGAR may not apply all table tags correctly; therefore, you may have to review each table in a document after it is published to EDGAR.

 Tip

•	You can also publish a document to EDGAR by clicking the EDGAR button on the Legal toolbar. For more information on displaying the Legal toolbar, see "To display the Legal toolbar."

 Related topics


Using WordPerfect Classic mode

WordPerfect Classic mode lets you work in the familiar visual environment of Corel WordPerfect 5.1 while using the functionality of WordPerfect 11.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	installing Classic mode

•	working in the Classic mode environment

•	customizing the Classic mode display options

•	using the Classic mode keyboard

•	using Classic mode keystrokes

•	using Classic mode secondary keystrokes


Installing Classic mode

Before you can start working in the WordPerfect Classic mode environment and using its corresponding keyboard, you must install the WordPerfect Classic mode environment and keyboard features.

 How to


To install Classic mode environment and keyboard features

1	Close any open WordPerfect Office applications.

2	Insert the WordPerfect Office CD into the CD drive.

3	On the Windows taskbar, click Start [image] Settings [image] Control panel.

4	Double-click the Add/Remove programs icon.

5	Choose WordPerfect Office 11 from the Currently installed programs list.

6	Click Change/Remove.

7	In the InstallShield wizard, enable the Modify option, and click Next.

8	In the Select Features list, double-click WordPerfect Office 11, WordPerfect, and enable the WordPerfect Classic mode option.

9	Follow the instructions in the InstallShield wizard.

 Related topics


Working in the Classic mode environment

You can enable the WordPerfect Classic mode environment at any time, and you can use it independently of the WordPerfect Classic mode keyboard mapping. For more information about keyboard mapping, see "Using the Classic mode keyboard."

The WordPerfect Classic mode environment emulates that of Corel WordPerfect 5.1 by modifying the WordPerfect environment. For example, in WordPerfect Classic mode some elements, such as the toolbars, property bar, horizontal scrollbar, and ruler, are not displayed by default; the page display shows document text in a window with minimal white space in the margins; the document color is blue; and the displayed text is gray, although it still prints black-on-white unless otherwise specified. However, you can customize all display options. For more information, see "Customizing the Classic mode display options."

The following image shows the WordPerfect Classic mode environment.

 How to


To enable in the Classic mode environment

1	In WordPerfect, click Tools [image] Settings [image] Display.

2	Click the Document tab.

3	Enable the Classic mode (WP 5.1) check box.

 Note

•	Windows system colors are set by default for WordPerfect. If you enable the WordPerfect Classic mode environment and want to use Windows system colors, you must enable the Windows system colors check box.

 Tips

•	If you are using the WordPerfect Classic mode keyboard mapping, you can enable the WordPerfect Classic mode environment by pressing Alt + Num 5. For more information on WordPerfect Classic mode keyboard mapping, see "Using the Classic mode keyboard."

•	You can revert to the Windows environment for WordPerfect by disabling the WP Classic mode check box.

 Related topics


Customizing the Classic mode display options

When you enable the WordPerfect Classic mode environment, you can customize the document window by displaying the horizontal scroll bar, the property bar, the WordPerfect toolbar, and the ruler. You can enlarge or reduce the page display. You can also modify the page display to view margin icons. For information on enabling the WordPerfect Classic mode environment, see "Working in the Classic mode environment."

The following image shows the WordPerfect Classic mode environment with the following items displayed: the horizontal scrollbar, the property bar, the WordPerfect toolbar, and the document margins.

 How to


To display the horizontal scroll bar

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] Display.

2	In the Display settings dialog box, click the Document tab.

3	In the Scroll bars area, enable the Horizontal check box.

 Note

•	If you customize the Classic mode environment by displaying the horizontal scroll bar and then you switch to the WordPerfect default environment, the horizontal scroll bar will be displayed. However, if you switch back to the WordPerfect Classic mode environment, the horizontal scroll bar will not be displayed. For information about how the WordPerfect environment is modified when you are using the Classic mode environment, see "Working in the Classic mode environment."

 Tip

•	You can hide the horizontal scroll bar by disabling the Horizontal check box.

 Related topics


To display the property bar and the WordPerfect toolbar

To	Do the following
Display the property bar	Click View [image] Toolbars, and enable the Property bar check box.
Display the WordPerfect toolbar	Click View [image] Toolbars, and enable the WordPerfect 11 check box.
 Related topics


To display or hide the ruler

•	Click View [image] Ruler.

A check mark next to the Ruler command indicates that the ruler is displayed.

 Note

•	If you customize the WordPerfect Classic mode environment by displaying the ruler and then switch to the WordPerfect default environment, the ruler will be displayed. However, if you switch back to the WordPerfect Classic mode environment, the ruler will not be displayed. For information about how the WordPerfect environment is modified when you are using the Classic mode environment, see "Working in the Classic mode environment."

 Related topics


To enlarge or reduce the page display

1	Click View [image] Zoom.

2	Enable one of the following options:

•	Margin width [image] displays a complete line or block of text within a window with minimal white space to the right or left

•	Page width [image] displays the width of the page, including left and right margins, in the window

•	Full page [image] displays the page and all four page margins in the document window

•	Other [image] lets you enter a custom zoom percentage

 Note

•	Margin width is the default for the WordPerfect Classic mode environment.

 Tip

•	Clicking the Zoom button on the toolbar enlarges or reduces the page display.

 Related topics


To view margin icons

1	Click View [image] Zoom.

2	In the Zoom dialog box, enable the 100% option.

 Related topics


Using the Classic mode keyboard

While working in WordPerfect 11, you can use the WordPerfect Classic mode keyboard by mapping to it.

 How to


To map to the Classic mode keyboard

1	In WordPerfect, click Tools [image] Settings [image] Customize.

2	Click the Keyboards tab.

3	Choose <WPDOS 5.1 Keyboard> from the Available keyboards list.

4	Click Select.

5	Click Close.

 Related topics


Using Classic mode keystrokes

The WordPerfect Classic mode options/menu bar provides multiple options for keystroke combinations. You can use the shortcut keys to display a list of options. The WordPerfect Classic mode keystroke options are based on Corel WordPerfect 5.1.

 How to


WordPerfect Classic mode keystrokes

Function key	Function
F1	Lets you undo or redo deletion actions you performed
Shift + F1	Displays the Settings dialog box
Ctrl + F1	Displays the MS-DOS prompt
Alt + F1	Displays the thesaurus
F2	Displays the Find and replace dialog box
Shift + F2	Searches for the previous occurrence if a previous search string was given
Ctrl + F2	Displays the spelling checker
Alt + F2	Displays the Find and replace dialog box
F3	Displays the Help window
Shift + F3	Lets you move through open WordPerfect documents
Ctrl + F3	Lets you rewrite the screen, use windows, and draw lines. For information about secondary keystrokes for Ctrl + F3, see "Ctrl + F3."
Alt + F3	Displays the Reveal Codes window
F4	Inserts a left indent
Shift + F4	Inserts a double indent
Shift + Tab	Inserts a hanging indent
Ctrl + F4	Lets you select text to move, copy, delete, or append. For information about secondary keystrokes for Ctrl + F4, see "Ctrl + F4.".
Alt + F4	Lets you select text using the arrow keys
F5	Displays the Open file dialog box
Shift + F5	Lets you insert the date, outlines, and paragraph numbering. For information about secondary keystrokes for Shift + F5, see "Shift + F5."
Ctrl + F5	Lets you import and export text in various formats. For information about secondary keystrokes for Ctrl + F5, see "Ctrl + F5."
Alt + F5	Lets you access reference tools. For information about secondary keystrokes for Alt + F5, see "Alt + F5."
F6	Toggles bolding on and off from the point where the cursor is positioned
Shift + F6	Centers text on a line and lets you insert dot leaders by pressing Shift + F6 twice
Ctrl + F6	Displays the Tab set dialog box
Alt + F6	Aligns text evenly with the right margin and lets you insert dot leaders by pressing Alt + F6 twice
F7	Quits WordPerfect and prompts you to save any changes
Shift + F7	Displays the Print dialog box
Ctrl + F7	Lets you insert footnotes and endnotes. For information about secondary keystrokes for Ctrl + F7, see "Ctrl + F7."
Alt + F7	Lets you insert columns, tables, and formulas. For information about secondary keystrokes for Alt + F7, see "Alt + F7."
F8	Toggles underlining on and off from the point where the cursor is positioned
Shift + F8	Lets you access formatting options. For information about secondary keystrokes for Shift + F8, see "Shift + F8."
Ctrl + F8	Displays the Font properties dialog box
Alt + F8	Displays the Styles dialog box
F9	Inserts an end field code into the document for a merge
Shift + F9	Displays the Merge dialog box
Ctrl + F9	Lets you merge and sort documents. For information about secondary keystrokes for Ctrl + F9, see "Ctrl + F9."
Alt + F9	Lets you create and edit figures, boxes, lines, and equations. For information about secondary keystrokes for Alt + F9, see "Alt + F9."
F10	Displays the Save as dialog box
Shift + F10	Displays the Open file dialog box
Ctrl + F10	Displays the Record macro dialog box
Alt + F10	Displays the Play macro dialog box
F11	Displays the Reveal Codes
Shift + F11	Toggles italic font on and off from the point where the cursor is positioned
Ctrl + F11	Toggles large font on and off from the point where the cursor is positioned
Alt + F11	Toggles very large font on and off from the point where the cursor is positioned
F12	Lets you select text by using the arrow keys
Shift + F12	Pastes the text you last copied to the Clipboard
Ctrl + F12	Cuts selected text
Alt + F12	Copies selected text
 Related topics


WordPerfect Classic mode shortcut keys

Shortcut key	Function
Esc	Closes a WordPerfect dialog box or the Corel WordPerfect 5.1 menu bar
Alt + W	Toggles shadowing on and off from the point where the cursor is positioned
Alt + R	Toggles red text on and off from the point where the cursor is positioned
Alt + T	Toggles strikeout on and off from the point where the cursor is positioned
Alt + I	Toggles italic font on and off from the point where the cursor is positioned
Alt + O	Displays the Bullets & numbering dialog box
Alt + P	Toggles superscript font on and off from the point where the cursor is positioned
Alt + B	Toggles subscript font on and off from the point where the cursor is positioned
Alt + S	Toggles small font on and off from the point where the cursor is positioned
Alt + D	Toggles double underlining on and off from the point where the cursor is positioned
Alt + F	Toggles fine font on and off from the point where the cursor is positioned
Alt + G	Displays the Print dialog box
Alt + L	Toggles large font on and off from the point where the cursor is positioned
Alt + X	Toggles extra large font on and off from the point where the cursor is positioned
Alt + V	Toggles very large font on and off from the point where the cursor is positioned
Ctrl + B	Toggles the base font on and off from the point where the font is positioned
Ctrl + C	Displays the Define columns dialog box
Ctrl + D	Lets you set double line spacing
Ctrl + E	Lets you insert footnotes and endnotes
Ctrl + F	Lets you insert footnotes and endnotes
Ctrl + G	Displays the Scrapbook dialog box
Ctrl + H	Displays the Headers/Footers dialog box
Ctrl + O	Displays the Headers/Footers dialog box
Ctrl + I	Displays the Styles editor dialog box
Ctrl + J	Lets you justify text
Ctrl + L	Displays the Page setup dialog box
Ctrl + M	Displays the Page setup dialog box
Ctrl + P	Displays the Page setup dialog box
Ctrl + Q	Displays the Equation editor dialog box
Ctrl + S	Lets you set single spacing
Ctrl + T	Displays the Tab set dialog box
Ctrl + Page Up	Displays the Edit macro dialog box
Ctrl + Insert	Lets you copy selected text
Delete	Lets you delete text or graphics
Home	Lets you move to the start of a line
Num 5	Lets you move to the start of a line
Ctrl + Num 5	Displays the Go to dialog box
Alt + Page Up	Moves to the top of the previous page
Alt + Page Down	Moves to the top of the next page
 Related topics


Obsolete commands

Shortcut key	Function
Alt + F9 + 1+ 3	Insert a new number (figure)
Alt + F9 + 2 + 3	Insert a new number (table box)
Alt + F9 + 3 + 3	Insert a new number (text box)
Alt + F9 + 4 + 3	Insert a new number (user box)
Alt + F9 + 6 + 3	Insert a new number (equation)
Shift + F8 + 3 + 1	Display pitch (format document)
 Related topics


Using Classic mode secondary keystrokes

In the WordPerfect Classic mode environment, secondary keystrokes let you access secondary menu items.

 How to


Ctrl + F3

Keystroke	Function
1 (or W)	Tiles open documents horizontally
2 (or L)	Displays the Create graphics line dialog box
3 (or R)	Refreshes the screen
4 (or I)	Displays the About WordPerfect 11 dialog box
 Related topics


Ctrl + F4

Keystroke	Function
1 (or S)	Selects the sentence in which the cursor is positioned and lets you move, copy, delete, or append the sentence
2 (or P)	Selects the paragraph in which the cursor is positioned and lets you move, copy, delete, or append the paragraph
3 (or A)	Selects the page in which the cursor is positioned and lets you move, copy, delete, or append the page
4 (or R)	Pastes the last thing you copied to the Clipboard
 Related topics


Ctrl + F5

Keystroke	Function
1 (or T)	Lets you open or save an MS-DOS text file, when you provide the full path indicating where the file is located or where it will be stored
2 (or P)	Displays the Save as dialog box so that you can enable the Password protect check box
3 (or A)	Displays the Save as dialog box and lets you save the file
4 (or C)	Lets you create a comment, edit it, and covert it to text
5 (or S)	Lets you import dates, create links, and edit them
 Related topics


Ctrl + F7

Keystroke	Function
1 (or F)	Lets you create and edit footnotes
2 (or E)	Lets you create and edit endnotes
3 (or P)	Displays the Footnote/Endnote dialog box
 Related topics


Ctrl + F9

Keystroke	Function
1 (or M)	Displays the Merge dialog box
2 (or S)	Displays the Sort dialog box
 Related topics


Shift + F5

Keystroke	Function
1 (or D)	Inserts the current date
2 (or C)	Inserts a date code, which is updated when the document is open or printed
3 (or F)	Displays the Date/Time dialog box
4 (or O)	Displays the Bullets & numbering dialog box
5 (or P)	Displays the Set paragraph number dialog box
6 (or D)	Displays the Insert paragraph number dialog box
 Related topics


Shift + F8

Keystroke	Function
1 (or L), then 1 or 2	Displays the Line hyphenation dialog box
1 (or L), then 3	Lets you justify text
1 (or L), then 5	Displays the Line height dialog box
1 (or L), then 6	Displays the Line spacing dialog box
1 (or L), then 7	Displays the Page setup dialog box
1 (or L), then 8	Displays the Tab set dialog box
1 (or L), then 9	Displays the Keep text together dialog box
2 (or P), then 1	Displays the Center page(s) dialog box
2 (or P), then 2	Displays the Force page dialog box
2 (or P), then 3	Displays the Headers/Footers dialog box
2 (or P), then 4	Displays the Headers/Footers dialog box
2 (or P), then 5	Displays the Page setup dialog box
2 (or P), then 6	Displays the Select page numbering format dialog box
2 (or P), then 7	Displays the Page setup dialog box
2 (or P), then 8	Displays the Suppress dialog box
3 (or D), then 2	Displays the Styles editor dialog box
3 (or D), then 3	Displays the Document default font dialog box
3 (or D), then 4	Displays the Redline dialog box
3 (or D), then 5	Displays the Properties dialog box
4 (or O), then 1	Displays the Advance dialog box
4 (or O), then 2	Displays the Keep text together dialog box
4 (or O), then 3	Lets you format currency, dates, and times
4 (or O), then 4	Displays the Language dialog box
4 (or O), then 5	Displays the Overstrike dialog box
4 (or O), then 6	Lets you specify print options, such as kerning and word/letter spacing
4 (or O), then 7	Displays the Font properties dialog box
4 (or O), then 8	Displays the Paragraph border/fill dialog box
4 (or O), then 9	Displays the Other codes dialog box
 Related topics


Alt + F7

Keystroke	Function
1 (or C)	Lets you insert columns and specify options in the Columns dialog box
2 (or T)	Lets you create a table and edit the table properties using the Properties for table format dialog box
3 (or M)	Displays the Formula toolbar when the cursor is positioned in a table
 Related topics


Alt + F9

Keystroke	Function
1 (or F)	Lets you create a figure and edit it using the Edit box dialog box
2 (or T)	Lets you create a table box and edit it using the Edit box dialog box
3 (or B)	Lets you create a text box and edit it using the Edit box dialog box
4 (or U)	Lets you create a user box and edit it using the Edit box dialog box
5 (or L)	Lets you insert horizontal and vertical lines and edit them using the Edit graphics line dialog box
6 (or E)	Lets you build complex equations
 Related topics


Alt + F5

Keystroke	Function
1 (or R)	Displays the Cross-reference toolbar and lets you mark a target and generate a cross-reference
2 (or S)	Lets you link a subdocument to a master document by specifying the drive and folder where the file will be stored
3 (or I)	Displays the Index toolbar and lets you mark index entries, define an index, and generate it
4 (or A)	Displays the Table of authorities toolbar and lets you mark, edit, define, and generate a table of authorities
5 (or D), then 1	Displays the Define table of contents dialog box
5 (or D), then 2	Displays the Define list dialog box
5 (or D), then 3	Displays the Define index dialog box
5 (or D), then 4	Displays the Edit full form dialog box
5 (or D), then 5	Displays the Edit full form dialog box
6 (or G), then 1	Displays the Remove marking dialog box
6 (or G), then 2	Displays the Document compare dialog box
6 (or G), then 3	Lets you expand the master document
6 (or G), then 4	Lets you condense the master document
6 (or G), then 5	Displays the Generate dialog box
 Related topics


Reference: Merging


Reference: The Merge toolbar and programming commands

The Merge toolbar displays at the top of the document window when you create a form document or a data file for a merge. You can control a merge and edit merge files by using the Merge toolbar.

You can also control a merge by using merge programming commands. The merge commands are similar to codes used in computer programming languages. For example, you need to specify parameters for some commands, and you can create subroutines, a set of commands that can be repeated in a merge.

 How to


Using the Merge toolbar

When you create a form document or a data file for a merge, the Merge toolbar displays at the top of the document window.

The following image shows the Merge toolbar.

You can control a merge and perform specific merge functions by using the Merge toolbar. The Merge toolbar is context-sensitive, which means that the buttons available on the Merge toolbar change according to the task you are performing. For example, you would see different buttons for performing a keyboard merge and for editing a data table file.

You cannot hide the Merge toolbar for a merge form document or merge data file. If it is not visible, then the active file is not a form document or a merge data file.

 Related topics


Prompting for user input and message display

Several commands are used to display a message for, or request information from, the person running the merge. You can use a message to inform the user of the progress of the merge or you can use a prompt to remind the user of the kind of information needed in a fill-in form.

The following table lists commands displaying a message or prompt and shows how they differ from each other:

Command	Action and user input
PROMPT (followed by WAIT)	Displays message for the duration of the WAIT command; no user input is required.
STATUSPROMPT	Displays message until another message is displayed; no user input is required.
KEYBOARD	Displays message and asks for keyboard input; text is inserted in the document. The user types information and clicks Continue on the Merge toolbar (or presses Alt + Enter).
GETSTRING	Displays message and asks for keyboard input; text is assigned to a variable. The user types information and presses Enter.
CHAR	Displays message and asks for one-character input; the character is assigned to a variable. The user types one character.
LOOK	No message; checks whether a key has been pressed. If a key has been pressed, the key is assigned to a variable; otherwise, the variable is deleted. The user types one character or nothing (merge does not pause for input).
 Related topics


Reusing commands with subroutines

You can create a subroutine to call a set of commands which are repeated several times in a merge. You do not need to add them each time. You can add them once, label them as a subroutine, then return to them (or call them) each time you want them to run.

The three commands used to define and call a subroutine are described in the following table.

Command	Action and user input
CALL(label)	Stops the merge and directs it to execute the subroutine. The label parameter must match the name of the label.
LABEL(labelname)	Marks the beginning of the subroutine. The labelname parameter is a unique name that identifies the subroutine.
RETURN	Marks the end of the subroutine and returns the merge to the line after the CALL command. If you do not add the RETURN command, the merge will continue in an infinite loop or will not continue correctly.
 Related topics


Using multiple files and macros in a merge

A merge can consist of more than one data file or form file, and it can include multiple macros. This may be useful if you want to merge different documents with the same data or if you have multiple data sources to merge. There are three ways to connect merge files: nesting, chaining, and substituting.

Nesting

Nesting a file or macro is like calling a subroutine. The merge pauses while the nested file or macro runs, then continues after the nested file has finished. This is useful if you use certain procedures frequently in your merges because you can save them in smaller files.

You can have multiple levels of nesting, a merge file can nest a second file or macro, which in turn nests another file, and so on. The three nest commands are described in the following table.

Command	Action and user input
NESTDATA(filename)	Changes to another data source. After that data has been merged with the form file, the merge returns to the first data source. Include a full path with the filename.
NESTFORM(filename)	Pauses the merge and changes to another form file. After that file has merged completely, the original merge continues. Include a full path with the filename.
NESTMACRO(macroname)	Pauses the merge, plays the macro, then continues the merge after the macro ends. You do not need to add a full path or the .wcm filename extension to the name of the macro.
Chaining

Chaining another file or macro starts that file or macro when the original merge is finished. This is one way to run multiple merges one after the other instead of starting each one manually. Only one chain command is used in a merge file; if there is more than one, the last one is used. The three chain commands are described in the following table.

Command	Action and user input
CHAINDATA(filename)	Merges records from the second file when all records from the first data source have been merged. Include a full path with the filename.
CHAINFORM(filename)	Merges the new form file when the original form file has finished. Include a full path with the filename.
CHAINMACRO(macroname)	Plays the macro after the merge has finished. You do not need to add a full path or the .wcm filename extension to the name of the macro.
Substituting

Substituting another form or data file is another way to change from one merge file to another. However, a substitute command moves the merge immediately to the second file without finishing the original merge file. When this happens, the new merge does not return to the original merge. The two substitute commands are described in the following table.

Command	Action and user input
SUBSTDATA(filename)	Changes to the new data file and begins merging its records. Include a full path with the filename.
SUBSTFORM(filename)	Changes to the new form file and begins executing the merge commands in the file. Include a full path with the filename.
 Related topics


Understanding merge code parameters

Most merge programming codes use parameters (also called arguments). In the following table, parameters are enclosed in parentheses and any optional parameters are enclosed in square brackets. When there are two or more parameters, they are separated with a semicolon.

Merge code parameters

You need to enter the correct parameters and arguments as required for the merge code. The following table lists parameters and their arguments.

Parameter	What you do
(expr);(subexpr)	Enter a number, string, variable, command, expression, or combination of these
(label)	Enter a unique label name
(var)	Enter a unique variable name
(field)	Enter a unique name or field number
(filename)	Enter a filename, including the full path
(macroname)	Enter a unique macro name; the full path is optional and no .wcm extension is needed.
(title)	Enter the title of the dialog box
(prompt);(message)	Enter information to display on the screen
(comment)	Enter a description of what the merge does; this does not display on screen.
 Related topics


Merge programming commands

WordPerfect merge programming commands let you program a merge. Many commands are similar to those in other programming languages. The following commands can be used in merge. For more information about each command, click on the command name to link to the command's Help topic. For information on merging, see "Merging documents."

ASSIGN(var;expr)

ASSIGNLOCAL(var;expr)

BEEP

BREAK

CALL(label)

CANCELOFF

CANCELON

CAPS(expr)

CASEOF(expr[;...;expr])

CHAINDATA(filename)

CHAINFORM(filename)

CHAINMACRO(macroname)

CHAR(var[;prompt][;title])

CODES(merge codes)

COMMENT(comment)

CONTINUE

CTON(character)

DATE

DEFAULT

DISPLAYSTOP

DOCUMENT(filename)

ELSE

EMBEDMACRO(macro statements)

ENDFIELD

ENDFOR

ENDIF

ENDRECORD

ENDSWITCH

ENDWHILE

FIELD(field)

FIELDNAMES(name1;...;nameN)

FIRSTCAP(expr)

FOREACH(var;expr1;...;exprN)

FORNEXT(var;start;stop[;step])

GETSTRING(var[;prompt][;title])

GO(label)

IF(expr)

IFBLANK(field)

IFEXISTS(var)

IFNOTBLANK(field)

INSERT(text)

KEYBOARD([prompt])

LABEL(label)

LOOK(var)

MRGCMND(merge codes)

NESTDATA(filename)

NESTFORM(filename)

NESTMACRO(macroname)

NEXT

NEXTRECORD

NTOC(number)

ONCANCEL(action)

ONERROR(action)

PAGEOFF

PAGEON

POSTNET(string)

PRINT

PROCESSOFF

PROCESSON

PROMPT(message)

QUIT

REPEATROW

RETURN

RETURNCANCEL

RETURNERROR

REWRITE

STATUSPROMPT(message)

STEPOFF

STEPON

STOP

STRLEN(expr)

STRPOS(expr;subexpr)

SUBSTDATA(filename)

SUBSTFORM(filename)

SUBSTR(expr;start;length)

SWITCH(expr)

SYSTEM(sysvar)

TOLOWER(expr)

TOUPPER(expr)

VARIABLE(var)

WAIT(10ths second)

WHILE(expr)

 How to


ASSIGN(var;expr)

Use ASSIGN to assign the value returned by expr to the global variable var. You do not need to enclose the expression in quotes.

Expressions are evaluated, and the result is assigned to the variable.

Non-numeric characters and expressions that cannot be evaluated numerically are treated as strings.

After a value has been assigned to a variable, the variable command VARIABLE(var) can be placed anywhere you would normally place the variable contents. To erase a variable (remove it from memory), leave the expr argument empty. For example, you could use the command ASSIGN(Fred;) to erase a variable named Fred. When you erase a variable, it no longer "exists." For information, see IFEXISTS(var).

To assign a local variable, see ASSIGNLOCAL(var;expr).

In the following example, variable Fred is first assigned a value, then an expression, then a string.

CODES(

ASSIGN(Fred;3)

Assign 3 to variable Fred.

ASSIGN(Fred;VARIABLE(Fred)*2)

Multiply old value of variable Fred by 2; assign the result (6) as the new value of variable Fred.

ASSIGN(Fred;WordPerfect)

Assign the string "WordPerfect" to variable Fred.

VARIABLE(Fred)

Return the value of the variable to the document.

)

 Related topics


BEEP

Use BEEP to cause your computer to beep. This command is often useful in combination with CHAR, KEYBOARD, PROMPT, STATUSPROMPT, and GETSTRING, which prompt the user. You can also use it to signal various points of the merge, such as the end of a lengthy process.

The following example sounds a beep at each keyboard pause. The user enters the requested information, then click Continue on the Merge feature bar or presses ALT + ENTER (ENDFIELD) to continue to the next prompt.

MEMO

To:	BEEP KEYBOARD(Enter To information)

From:	BEEP KEYBOARD(Enter From information)

Date:	DATE

Subject: 	BEEP KEYBOARD(Enter Subject information)

 Related topics


BREAK

Use BREAK to exit from a loop before it would normally end. The location of the command and the type of file it is in determine how it functions.

The rules that govern how BREAK functions are listed below:

Each of the following rules assumes that the previous rules do not hold.

•	If BREAK is encountered within a FORNEXT or WHILE structure, execution moves to the end of the structure (just after the ENDFOR or ENDWHILE). If these structures are nested, execution moves after the ENDFOR or ENDWHILE command of the current level.

•	If BREAK is encountered in a nested file, execution returns to the parent file.

•	If BREAK is encountered in a form file, the merge moves to the top of the form file and continues with the next data record.

•	If BREAK is encountered in a data file, the merge is terminated.

The following example uses BREAK to exit an infinite loop when the correct number is guessed.

CODES(

ASSIGN(Actual Number;SUBSTR(SYSTEM(random);3;1))

WHILE(1)

CHAR(Guess;Guess a number between 0 - 9?;Guessing Game)

IF(VARIABLE(Guess)=VARIABLE(Actual Number))

BEEP

PROMPT(Correct, the number was VARIABLE(Actual Number))

WAIT(30)

BREAK

ELSE

PROMPT(Sorry, the number wasn't VARIABLE(Guess))

WAIT(10)

ENDIF

ENDWHILE

)

 Related topics


CALL(label)

Use CALL to transfer execution to the label subroutine. When execution of the subroutine is completed (when a RETURN is encountered in the subroutine), execution returns to the command following CALL. For more information about subroutines and labels, see Levels.

The example below is a form file that creates a data file. The Info subroutine is called to get the information for each record.

GETSTRING prompts the user to enter information and assigns the information to a variable. MRGCMND places the necessary merge codes into the data file being created.

When no name is entered for variable name, that variable is erased.

IFEXISTS then returns a false (0), and QUIT is executed, ending the merge.

CODES(

MRGCMND(FIELDNAMES(Name;Address;City;State;ZIP)ENDRECORD ====================================

)

WHILE(1)

CALL(Info)

VARIABLE(name)MRGCMND(ENDFIELD)

VARIABLE(address)MRGCMND(ENDFIELD)

VARIABLE(city)MRGCMND(ENDFIELD)

VARIABLE(state)MRGCMND(ENDFIELD)

VARIABLE(zip)MRGCMND(ENDFIELD)

MRGCMND(ENDRECORD)

====================================

ENDWHILE

LABEL(Info)

GETSTRING(name;Enter Name or choose Cancel to Quit;Name)

IFEXISTS(name)

ELSE

QUIT

ENDIF

GETSTRING(address;Enter Address;Address)

GETSTRING(city;Enter City;City)

GETSTRING(state;Enter State;State)

GETSTRING(zip;Enter ZIP Code;ZIP Code)

RETURN

)

 Related topics


CANCELOFF

Use CANCELOFF to stop the ESC key from performing its normal function. CANCELOFF is useful to prevent a user from stopping a merge by pressing ESC.

CANCELOFF

•	(During this part of the merge, pressing Cancel does not end the merge.)

CANCELON

•	(During this part of the merge, pressing Cancel does not end the merge.)

 Related topics


CANCELON

Use CANCELON to enable the ESC key after it has been disabled with the CANCELOFF command.

For an example of CANCELON, see CANCELOFF.

 Related topics


CAPS(expr)

Use CAPS to capitalize the first character of each word in the returned expression expr.

To change all letters in a returned expression to uppercase or lowercase, see TOUPPER or TOLOWER. To capitalize just the first word, see FIRSTCAP.

In the example below, CAPS capitalizes the first letter of each word in the name, address, and city variables. TOUPPER capitalizes both letters of the state abbreviation. FIRSTCAP capitalizes the first letter of the first word in the comments string. TOLOWER ensures that the merge will continue if either an uppercase or a lowercase "y" is assigned to VARIABLE(char).

CODES(

LABEL(info)

GETSTRING(name;Enter Name;Name)

ASSIGN(name;CAPS(VARIABLE(name)))

GETSTRING(address;Enter Address;Address)

ASSIGN(address;CAPS(VARIABLE(address)))

GETSTRING(city;Enter City;City)

ASSIGN(city;CAPS(VARIABLE(city)))

GETSTRING(state;Enter state abbreviation;State)

ASSIGN(state;TOUPPER(VARIABLE(state)))

GETSTRING(zip;Enter ZIP code;ZIP)

GETSTRING(comments;Enter comments;Additional Comments)

ASSIGN(comments;FIRSTCAP(VARIABLE(comments)))

VARIABLE(name)

VARIABLE(address)

VARIABLE(city) VARIABLE(state) VARIABLE(zip)

VARIABLE(comments)

====================================

CODES(

CHAR(char;Do Another Record?;Continue (Y/N)?)

IF(TOLOWER(VARIABLE(char)) = y)

GO(info)

ENDIF

)

 Related topics


CASEOF(expr[;...;expr])

Use CASEOF when using the SWITCH command. When you use CASEOF, you can enter multiple merge expressions within the parentheses.

For examples of CASEOF, see SWITCH and FORNEXT.

 Related topics


CHAINDATA(filename)

Use CHAINDATA to begin using records from the named data file, when the end of the current data file is reached. This command is especially useful if you have broken a large data file into several smaller files. If you insert CHAINDATA in the smaller data files, they will act like one data file.

The following example shows how a large data file has been broken into two smaller files. When you specify the first small file as the data file in a merge, the records of the second small file will be used as soon as those in the first small file are completed.

First Small File:

FIELDNAMES(name;status) ENDRECORD

====================================

PROCESSON CHAINDATA(file2)PROCESSOFF COMMENT(

The PROCESS commands ensure that the CHAINDATA command executes.

The merge stores the CHAINDATA command and filename, then executes it

when the current data file has ended.)

JoseENDFIELD

StaffENDFIELD

ENDRECORD

====================================

•	(additional records)

====================================

BarbaraENDFIELD

ProfessionalENDFIELD

ENDRECORD

Second Small File (named FILE2 in the default directory):

FIELDNAMES(name;status)

ENDRECORD

====================================

JulieENDFIELD

Part-timeENDFIELD

ENDRECORD

====================================

•	(additional records)

====================================

ShojiENDFIELD

Leave of AbsenceENDFIELD

ENDRECORD

====================================

 Related topics


CHAINFORM(filename)

Use CHAINFORM to continue the merge with an additional form file after all records have been merged with the current form file.

The following example uses CHAINFORM to merge an envelope form file with the current data file.

CHAINFORM(envelope.frm)

•	(body of form file)

 Related topics


CHAINMACRO(macroname)

Use CHAINMACRO to start the named macro at the end of the merge, if the merge terminates normally. You can place CHAINMACRO anywhere in the form file.

Only the last macro chained during the merge is executed.

In the following example, the chained macro print.wcm executes when the merge is complete.

CHAINMACRO(print)

COMMENT(Chain the macro PRINT.WCM when the merge is complete.)

DATE

Dear FIELD(Name),

•	(rest of the letter)

Sincerely,

Chris Smith

 Related topics


CHAR(var[;prompt][;title])

Use CHAR to prompt the user to input a single character. CHAR prompts you with a message and waits until you press a single key.

The pressed key is assigned to the specified variable var. Prompt is the information displayed in the dialog box telling the user what to do.

Title is the title of the dialog box created during the merge.

For an example of CHAR, see CTON.

 Related topics


CODES(merge codes)

Use CODES to enter merge codes and have the merge ignore any formatting or text you might add. The merge carries out all the merge commands inside the CODES parentheses but ignores any text or formatting (such as hard returns). To enter text or formatting inside the CODES parentheses, use the INSERT command.

The following would occur in a form file. When merging with a data file, the example pauses the merge at each record and lets you choose which records you want to merge.

CODES(

LABEL(top)

ASSIGN(field;FIELD(1))

EMBEDMACRO(

PERSIST(fld)

PROMPT("Which name would you like to merge? ";" OK to merge "+field+"?";2)

PAUSE

ENDPROMPT

)

IF(VARIABLE(fld)=2)

INSERT(FIELD(1))

INSERT(FIELD(2))

INSERT(FIELD(3))

====================================

ENDIF

NEXTRECORD

GO(top)

)

For another example of CODES, see CTON.

 Related topics


COMMENT(comment)

Use COMMENT to include comments that will make the merge easier to understand. Merge ignores everything between the COMMENT parentheses.

For an example of COMMENT, see CTON.

 Related topics


CONTINUE

Use CONTINUE at the end of a CASEOF statement to execute the commands in the next CASEOF statement.

For examples of CONTINUE, see SWITCH and FORNEXT.

 Related topics


CTON(character)

Use CTON (Character to number) to convert a character (any character in the WordPerfect character sets) to a unique number (its WordPerfect "key value"). CTON performs the inverse (opposite) function of NTOC. You can use the key value to calculate the WordPerfect character set value.

To calculate the character set value for a given character

1	 Use CTON to obtain the key value.

2	 Divide the key value by 256.

The quotient is the number of the WordPerfect character set (0–12).

The remainder is the character number in the character set (0–255).

The following example calculates the character set value for a character. Because all the variables are local, this file could be nested within another file and would not change any of the original file's variables, even if they have the same name. The comments in the first part of this merge do not need to be in a COMMENT command, because they are within the CODES command. The final comment must be in a COMMENT command, or it will be inserted in the merged document.

CODES(

ASSIGNLOCAL(char;0)

Initialize a local variable named char.

CHAR(char;Type a character;Display Character Set Value)

Assign input to the variable char.

ASSIGNLOCAL(set;CTON(VARIABLE(char))/256)

Assign quotient to a variable named set.

ASSIGNLOCAL(num;CTON(VARIABLE(char))%256)

Assign remainder to a variable named num.

)

VARIABLE(set),VARIABLE(num)

COMMENT(Write out the character set value.)

 Related topics


DATE

Use DATE to insert the current date in merged documents, as formatted in the Date format feature. The merged file will contain the current date as indicated by your computer's internal clock.

For an example of DATE, see BEEP.

 Related topics


DEFAULT

Use DEFAULT with the SWITCH command to cover all cases not covered by CASEOF. When the expression being tested is different from all the CASEOF expressions, the merge executes DEFAULT.

For examples of DEFAULT, see SWITCH and FORNEXT.

 Related topics


DISPLAYSTOP

Use DISPLAYSTOP to stop the display of text after a KEYBOARD command. For example, after a KEYBOARD command, the merge displays as many as 1000 characters ahead. DISPLAYSTOP placed in text after KEYBOARD stops the text from displaying from that point on.

DATE

FIELD(name)

FIELD(address)

FIELD(city)

Dear FIELD(name):

It has come to our attention that your bill has not been paid. Please send us $KEYBOARD(Enter how much they owe us [image] Press ALT+ENTER or choose Continue when done), which is the balance of your unpaid account.DISPLAYSTOP

If the balance of your account is not paid in KEYBOARD(Enter how many days [image] Press ALT + ENTER or choose Continue when done) days, we will be forced to take legal action.DISPLAYSTOP

If you have already made arrangements to settle your account, please disregard this notice.

The rest of the letter after DISPLAYSTOP does not display on the screen while the user is prompted to type information at the keyboard.

This removes distracting information from the screen, so users can focus their attention on the area where they are to enter information.

 Related topics


DOCUMENT(filename)

Use DOCUMENT to insert the named document into the merged document at the DOCUMENT command. The document is not processed as a merge file, so any merge commands in the inserted document are included in the file but not executed. This command is commonly used for inserting variable paragraphs in contracts and similar documents (often called document assembly) or for building a form or data file.

In the following example, DOCUMENT inserts the document called oneroom.mrg in the merged document if the variable rooms is equal to 1, or it inserts the document tworooms.mrg if the variable rooms is not equal to 1.

CODES(

CHAR(rooms;Enter the number of rooms (1 or 2); Number of Rooms)

IF(VARIABLE(rooms)=1)

DOCUMENT(c:\mrgfiles\oneroom.mrg)

ELSE

DOCUMENT(c:\mrgfiles\tworooms.mrg)

ENDIF

)

 Related topics


ELSE

Use ELSE with IF, IFBLANK, IFEXISTS, IFNOTBLANK, and ENDIF. ELSE marks the beginning of the commands that execute should the IF value be zero (false).

ELSE is not a required part of an IF statement. It should be used when there are certain steps that need to be performed only when the IF value is zero (false).

Commands that appear after ENDIF execute whether or not the IF value is true.

For an example of ELSE, see DOCUMENT.

 Related topics


EMBEDMACRO(macro statements)

Use EMBEDMACRO to embed macro commands within a merge. You can enter any macro command inside the EMBEDMACRO parentheses. The macro commands are compiled the first time they are encountered during the merge.

For an example of EMBEDMACRO, see CODES.

 Related topics


ENDFIELD

Use ENDFIELD to signal the end of a field in a data file. A hard return [HRt] is automatically inserted with this command to make the file easier to read.

When you insert this command, the number of the field where the cursor is currently located displays at the bottom of the window. If you use FIELDNAMES, the name of the field appears instead of the number.

Records in the following data file have three fields:

International ExportingENDFIELD

(801) 555-4421ENDFIELD

George WileyENDFIELD

ENDRECORD

====================================

Tradewinds, Inc.ENDFIELD

(409) 555-3567ENDFIELD

Susan EscherENDFIELD

ENDRECORD

====================================

 Related topics


ENDFOR

Use ENDFOR to signal the end of FORNEXT and FOREACH loops.

For an example of ENDFOR, see FORNEXT.

 Related topics


ENDIF

Use ENDIF to mark the end of an IF structure. ENDIF is used with IF, IFBLANK, IFEXISTS, IFNOTBLANK, and ELSE.

For an example of ENDIF, see DOCUMENT.

 Related topics


ENDRECORD

Use ENDRECORD to signal the end of a record in a data file. A hard page break is inserted automatically with this command to make the file easier to read.

When you insert this command, the number of the field where the cursor is currently located displays at the bottom of the window. If you use FIELDNAMES, the name of the field appears instead of the number.

For examples of ENDRECORD, see ENDFIELD and FIELDNAMES.

 Related topics


ENDSWITCH

Use ENDSWITCH to end a SWITCH statement.

For an example of ENDSWITCH, see SWITCH.

 Related topics


ENDWHILE

Use ENDWHILE to signal the end of a WHILE loop.

For an example of ENDWHILE, see NEXTRECORD.

 Related topics


FIELD(field)

Use FIELD to insert the contents of the named (or numbered) field in the merged document or in another merge command.

In the following example, the contents of the name and address fields are inserted in the letter.

FIELD(name)

FIELD(address)

Dear FIELD(name):

For additional examples of FIELD, see DISPLAYSTOP.

 Related topics


FIELDNAMES(name1;...;nameN)

Use FIELDNAMES to declare the names and order of the fields in a data file. Using this command in the data file allows you to reference the fields by name in a form file, which is usually easier than remembering the order of the fields and referencing them by number.

WordPerfect places FIELDNAMES at the top of the data file. It must be located at the top of the file to work correctly. If records have more fields than those declared in FIELDNAMES, additional fields are numbered. When initially inserted, the command and field names are all on one line. You may find it easier to read if you put each field name on a separate line, as in the example below. A hard page code [HPg] is automatically inserted when you insert ENDRECORD.

After you insert this command, the name or number of the field where the cursor is currently located displays on the status bar at the bottom of the window.

In the following example, the first three fields of each record are named using FIELDNAMES. The additional fields are not named and are therefore numbered Field 4, Field 5, and so on.

FIELDNAMES(

company;

phone;

contact;

)ENDRECORD

====================================

International ExportingENDFIELD

(801) 555-4421ENDFIELD

George WileyENDFIELD

FurnitureENDFIELD

45ENDFIELD

$1.5 millionENDFIELD

ENDRECORD

====================================

Tradewinds, Inc.ENDFIELD

(409) 555-3567ENDFIELD

Susan EscherENDFIELD

MemorabiliaENDFIELD

200ENDFIELD

$2.0 millionENDFIELD

ENDRECORD

====================================

For another example of FIELDNAMES, see CHAINDATA.

 Related topics


FIRSTCAP(expr)

Use FIRSTCAP to capitalize the first letter of the first word in the returned expression expr.

For an example of FIRSTCAP, see CAPS.

 Related topics


FOREACH(var;expr1;...;exprN)

Use FOREACH to assign a list of items to one variable var. The merge then executes the subsequent commands for each expr listed in FOREACH, changing var to the next value at the end of each loop.

For example, the following codes assign different days of the week to the variable weekday until it matches the field day.

FOREACH(weekday;Monday;Tuesday;Wednesday;Thursday;Friday)

IF(VARIABLE(weekday)=FIELD(day))

BREAK

ENDIF

ENDFOR

 Related topics


FORNEXT(var;start;stop[;step])

Use FORNEXT to execute a series of commands a certain number of times. The commands between FORNEXT and ENDFOR are executed once for each value of var between start and stop inclusive, as incremented by step.

The start, stop, and step values can be entered in the command as expressions, variables, or other commands. Each expression, variable, or command is evaluated, and the resulting value is assigned to the variable. The step value is optional; its default value is 1 (or -1, if stop is less than start).

In any FORNEXT loop, ENDFOR must be used to determine the end of the series of commands included in the loop. ENDFOR sends execution to the top of the loop for the next iteration. You can also use NEXT to send execution to the next iteration, but you must still include ENDFOR to mark the end of the loop.

FORNEXT initializes the variable with the start value. If the variable has not been assigned, it is defined as a local variable. You do not need to pre-assign the variable. Each subsequent time FORNEXT is executed (at the top of the loop), the variable is incremented by the step value.

The example below uses a FORNEXT loop to apply a SWITCH statement once for each character in the sentence that is entered.

CODES(

GETSTRING(sentence;Type a sentence;Sentence To Be Evaluated)

ASSIGN(vowels;0)

ASSIGN(consonants;0)

ASSIGN(misc;0)

FORNEXT(i;1;STRLEN(VARIABLE(sentence));)

SWITCH(TOLOWER(SUBSTR(VARIABLE(sentence);VARIABLE(i);1)))

CASEOF(a;e;i;o;u)

ASSIGN(vowels;VARIABLE(vowels)+1)

CASEOF(b;c;d)

CONTINUE

CASEOF(f;g;h;)

CONTINUE

CASEOF(j;k;l;m;n)

CONTINUE

CASEOF(p;q;r;s;t)

CONTINUE

CASEOF(v;w;x;y;z)

ASSIGN(consonants;VARIABLE(consonants)+1)

DEFAULT

ASSIGN(misc;VARIABLE(misc)+1)

ENDSWITCH

ENDFOR

)

There were:

VARIABLE(vowels) vowels,

VARIABLE(consonants) consonants, and

VARIABLE(misc) other characters.

 Related topics


GETSTRING(var[;prompt][;title])

Use GETSTRING to prompt the user by displaying a dialog box.

Information returned by the dialog box is assigned to the variable var.

Prompt is the information displayed in the dialog box telling the user what to do. Title is the title of the dialog box created during the merge.

For an example of GETSTRING, see CAPS.

 Related topics


GO(label)

Use GO to transfer execution to the location in the merge file indicated by label. It is used in conjunction with LABEL, which marks the place to which execution is transferred.

GO is useful when you want to skip a part of your merge or transfer control to another part based on a condition. Unlike CALL, GO does not require the merge to return to that point of execution.

For an example of GO, see CAPS.

 Related topics


IF(expr)

Use IF to execute a set of commands only if a certain condition exists.

If the condition exists (expr is evaluated to be true), the commands between the IF and ENDIF are executed. If an ELSE is included, the commands between the IF and ELSE are executed if the expression is true; otherwise, the commands between the ELSE and ENDIF are executed.

The expr argument is usually a logical expression. An expression is true if it is evaluated as a non-zero number. For example, when the expression 4=4 is evaluated, the result is –1 (which corresponds to true). The value is false if it results in a 0 or contains nothing at all.

An IF statement always begins with IF and ends with ENDIF. If you want certain commands to execute only when the value is not true, use ELSE.

For an example of IF, see DOCUMENT.

 Related topics


IFBLANK(field)

IFBLANK(field) Use IFBLANK to execute a set of commands if the indicated field is blank. Be sure to end the set of commands to be executed with an ENDIF command. See also IFNOTBLANK.

In the following example, the data file records have a Title field and a Name field. The merge determines if the Title field of the current record is blank. If it is blank, only the name is inserted in the merged document. Otherwise, the merge inserts the title before the name.

CODES(

IFBLANK(title)

If the Title field is blank in this record,

INSERT(FIELD(name))

Write out just the Name.

ELSE

Otherwise,

INSERT(FIELD(title) FIELD(name))

Write the Title before the Name.

ENDIF

End of IFBLANK statement.

)

 Related topics


IFEXISTS(var)

Use IFEXISTS to check if the indicated variable has been defined. If it has, the commands following IFEXISTS are executed. Like other IF statements, IFEXISTS requires an ENDIF and can use an ELSE command.

The following commands could be placed at the end of any form file.

They cancel the merge if any key is pressed.

LOOK(Key)

IFEXISTS(Key)

STOP

ENDIF

 Related topics


IFNOTBLANK(field)

Use IFNOTBLANK to execute a set of commands if the indicated field is not blank. Be sure to end the set of commands to be executed with an ENDIF command. See also IFBLANK.

In the following example, the data merge file records have a Title field and a Name field. The merge determines if the Title field of the current record is blank. If it is not, the title is inserted before the name. Otherwise, the merge inserts only the name.

CODES(

IFNOTBLANK(title)

If the Title field is not blank in this record,

INSERT(FIELD(title) FIELD(name))

Write the Title before the Name.

ELSE

Otherwise,

INSERT(FIELD(name))

Write out only the Name.

ENDIF

End of IFNOTBLANK statement.

)

 Related topics


INSERT(text)

Use INSERT to enter text or formatting inside a CODES command.

For example, the merge will not recognize a hard return inside the CODES parentheses. To make the merge return a hard return, use INSERT, then press hard return.

For examples of INSERT, see IFNOTBLANK and NESTMACRO(macroname).

 Related topics


KEYBOARD([prompt])

Use KEYBOARD to pause an executing merge so the user can enter information from the keyboard. As many as 1,000 characters of the form file are displayed. Merge codes are displayed using the current display setting. The merge continues when you click Continue on the Merge feature bar or press ALT + ENTER (ENDFIELD).

While an executing merge is paused at KEYBOARD, you can execute QUIT, NEXTRECORD, or STOP from the keyboard.

In the following example, the KEYBOARD commands pause to let you enter the "From:," "To:," and "Subject:" text as the merge is executed.

MEMO

To:	BEEP KEYBOARD(Enter To information)

From:	BEEP KEYBOARD(Enter From information)

Date:	DATE

Subject: 	BEEP KEYBOARD(Enter Subject information)

If KEYBOARD is executed within another merge command, a dialog box displays with the indicated prompt. You cannot execute commands from the keyboard, but any text entered at the prompt is inserted into the merged document.

 Related topics


LABEL(label)

Use LABEL to mark a place in the merge file. Execution can be sent directly to the label from any place in the merge file. CALL and GO are used to send execution to the label.

The label name distinguishes one label from another. Label names can be as many as 30 characters long, including spaces. Different labels in the same merge file must have different names. If a name is duplicated, the first one is used, and the other is ignored.

Do not assign a label and local variable the same name, or the merge may not function properly.

For examples of LABEL, see CALL and CAPS.

 Related topics


LOOK(var)

Use LOOK to determine if a key has been pressed. If it has, that key is assigned to the variable; it is not executed. If no key has been pressed, the variable is deleted; execution continues without stopping.

For an example of LOOK, see IFEXISTS.

 Related topics


MRGCMND(merge codes)

Use MRGCMND to insert text, codes, and commands in the document being created by the merge. Any text, codes, or merge commands that appear between the MRGCMND parentheses are sent directly to the merged document without the commands being interpreted or executed.

For an example of MRGCMND, see CALL.

 Related topics


NESTDATA(filename)

Use NESTDATA to interrupt the use of the current data file and switch to another data file during the merge. The parent data file then continues only when the merge on the nested data file has been completed. You can nest data files as many as 10. For information, see Levels.

If you nest from within one data file to another, be careful to avoid infinite loops. Use CANCEL or BREAK to terminate the loop.

When you nest a data file, the switch to that file occurs immediately.

When you chain data files, the switch to the new data file is made when the end of the current data file is reached. For more information, see CHAINDATA.

For an example of NESTDATA, see NESTFORM.

 Related topics


NESTFORM(filename)

Use NESTFORM to turn control of the merge over to another form file. When the commands in the nested file have been executed, control returns to the original form file, where execution resumes after NESTFORM. For information on how to change the data file, see NESTDATA.

You can nest form files as many as 10. Using NESTFORM without specifying a filename is the same as using SUBSTFORM with the current form filename as the argument. In this case, NESTFORM does not use one of the 10 nest levels. For more information, see Levels.

FIELD(name),

It has been a pleasure serving you this year.

CODES(

IF(FIELD(balance)!=0)

NESTDATA(transact.dat)

NESTFORM(invoice.frm)

ENDIF

)

Sincerely,

 Related topics


NESTMACRO(macroname)

Use NESTMACRO to execute the named macro during a merge.

When the macro is finished, the merge continues with the code following NESTMACRO.

Macros created in earlier versions of WordPerfect (before version 6.x) will need to be converted.

The following example nests a macro that computes the interest on an account balance.

CODES(

ASSIGN(balance;FIELD(balance))

NESTMACRO(calcint)

INSERT(Interest on this balance is VARIABLE(interest))

)

 Related topics


NEXT

Use NEXT to execute the next iteration of a FORNEXT, FOREACH, or WHILE loop. Usually, the ENDFOR or ENDWHILE that ends the loop sends execution to the next iteration. However, you can use NEXT to send execution to the next iteration from anywhere within the loop. For example, you may use nested IF statements as part of the loop. Then, when a certain condition is true, execution will skip the rest of the commands in the loop and go to the next iteration. In this case, you would use NEXT at the point where you want the next iteration to begin.

Even if you use NEXT in a loop, you must still use an ENDFOR or ENDWHILE to mark the end of the loop.

The following merge writes **********@@@@@.

CODES(

FORNEXT(i;1;15;1)

Repeat the loop 15 times, starting at 1, ending at 15, in

increments of 1.

IF(VARIABLE(i)10)

If variable i is greater than 10,

INSERT(@)

write an @,

NEXT

and skip to the next iteration of this FORNEXT loop.

ENDIF

INSERT(*)

Write an * each time the loop is completed.

ENDFOR

)

 Related topics


NEXTRECORD

Use NEXTRECORD to move the record pointer in the data file to the next record. If it does not find the next record, it ends the merge or returns the merge to the previous data file if the data file was nested.

While an executing merge is paused at KEYBOARD, you can execute NEXTRECORD from the keyboard.

In this example, the data file is searched until the variable company name matches the company field in the data file. When a match is found, the contents of the amount field for that record in the data file are written to the merged document.

CODES(

WHILE(VARIABLE(Company Name)!=FIELD(Company))

NEXTRECORD

ENDWHILE

)

FIELD(Amount)

 Related topics


NTOC(number)

Use NTOC (Number to character) to convert a WordPerfect key value or character set number to its character equivalent. It performs the inverse function of CTON. For example, the NTOC of 294 is Ç.

To calculate the key value for a given character set value

•	Multiply the character set number by 256, then add the number of the character.

For example, "Ç" is character number 38 in Character Set 1.

Multiply 256 times 1 (256), then add 38 (294). The NTOC of 294 is Ç.

NTOC will return nothing if you enter a number that is not equivalent to a character.

The following example prompts for a number, then returns the character equivalent.

GETSTRING(num;Enter a key value number;)

NTOC(VARIABLE(num))

 Related topics


ONCANCEL(action)

Use ONCANCEL to specify what the merge does if you press ESC (Cancel) or if a RETURNCANCEL has been returned by a subroutine, a nested macro, or a nested merge. When a Cancel occurs, the merge performs the default action (STOP) if it has not already encountered the ONCANCEL command. For this reason, it is a good idea to place the command before a Cancel can occur, otherwise execution will terminate when ESC is pressed. If no action is specified in ONCANCEL, the cancel is ignored, and execution continues as if there had been no cancel.

Valid actions available with this command are:

•	BREAK

•	CALL

•	GO

•	QUIT

•	RETURN

•	RETURNCANCEL

•	RETURNERROR

•	STOP

When ESC is pressed, the last ONCANCEL command encountered in the file is executed.

ONCANCEL is local to the file in which it is encountered. It cannot be used from other files. For example, a data file cannot use ONCANCEL from a form file.

In the following example, if you press ESC during the merge, the end subroutine is executed.

CODES(

ONCANCEL(GO(end))

If ESC is pressed during the merge, execute the End

subroutine.

•	(commands in form file)

STOP

LABEL(end)

Beginning of End subroutine.

PROMPT(Merge canceled prematurely.)

Send notification message.

WAIT(40)

Display message for 4 seconds.

STOP

Terminate execution.

)

For another example of ONCANCEL, see RETURNCANCEL.

 Related topics


ONERROR(action)

Use ONERROR to tell WordPerfect what to do if an error is detected in merge execution or if a RETURNERROR has been returned by a subroutine or nested macro or merge.

Inserting ONERROR without an action causes the merge to ignore the error and continue execution when possible.

The errors that can be trapped with this command are:

•	File not found

•	Print queue errors

•	End of file condition returned by a NEXTRECORD

If you chain a file that does not exist or is not found, the error condition is not generated until the merge tries to execute the chained file (that is, at the end of the current merge file). For more information, see also CHAINDATA, CHAINFORM(filename), and CHAINMACRO.

The default action is STOP. For a list of other possible actions, see ONCANCEL.

ONERROR is local to the file in which it is encountered. It cannot be seen from other files. For example, a data file cannot use ONERROR from a form file.

In the following example, a new form file is nested. ONERROR specifies that subroutine error be executed if the file is not found when the merge tries to nest it.

CODES( ONERROR(GO(error))

If an error is generated, execute the Error subroutine.

•	(more merge commands)

NESTFORM(invoice.frm)

•	(more merge commands)

STOP

LABEL(error)

If the file was not found when the merge tried to nest it,

execution moves here.

PROMPT(File not found. Move INVOICE.FRM to default directory and start merge again.)

Send a message to the user.

WAIT(15)

Display the message for 1.5 seconds.

STOP

Terminate execution.

)

For another example of ONERROR, see RETURNERROR.

 Related topics


PAGEOFF

Use PAGEOFF to eliminate the hard page code [HPg] between copies of the form file in the merged document. Use PAGEON to begin inserting hard page codes again after you have used PAGEOFF.

PAGEON and PAGEOFF are global to the merge; they may be included in any form or data file and are in effect for all the files in the merge until the opposite command is encountered. PAGEOFF and PAGEON override the option set in the Merge Run dialog box.

These commands are useful for merging labels or for including multiple records in a document. You can also use PAGEOFF with PRINT to eliminate blank pages between copies of the merged document when merging to the printer.

For an example of PAGEOFF, see PAGEON.

 Related topics


PAGEON

Use PAGEON to reinstate the use of hard page codes between copies of the form file in the merged document. See also PAGEOFF.

In the example below, the nested form file, list.pf, creates a list of players on a given team. The final result of the merge is a list of the players on each team, one team per page.

CODES(

ASSIGN(team;FIELD(team))

Assign the current field to a global variable so that the nested

form file can use it.

INSERT(These people are on Team FIELD(team):)

PAGEOFF

This command prevents the insertion of a hard page between

iterations of the nested form file.

NESTFORM(list.frm)

This form file produces a list using the Name field of

all records whose Team field matches the current Team variable.

PAGEON

This command restores the use of page breaks to allow one team

list per page.

)

 Related topics


POSTNET(string)

Use POSTNET to insert a POSTNET bar code into a form file for letters, envelopes, or labels. For the string parameter, you can type the bar code digits or enter a field for the digits.

The following is a sample form file for an envelope including the return address and a POSTNET bar code:

JASPER DEAN

2745 CHARLES DU DRE PKWY

MADISON WI 53725-9876

POSTNET(FIELD(zipcode))

FIELD(name)

FIELD(address)

FIELD(city/state) FIELD(zipcode)

When this form file is merged, the mailing address will return a different name, address, city/state, and bar code for each record.

 Related topics


PRINT

Use PRINT to send the current merged text to the printer. Once the text is sent to the printer, it is no longer in the merged document.

When you merge to the printer using this command, the usual page break is still inserted between each iteration of the form file. To eliminate the extra page between each copy, insert PAGEOFF before PRINT as shown in the example.

The data file to be used with the form file in the following example contains 1,000 records. If you were to merge it to the document window, the resulting document would have 1,000 pages. This merge uses PRINT to send each letter to the printer as soon as it is merged.

ABC COMPANY

245 WEST CENTER STREET LONG BEACH CA 90807

DATE

FIELD(name)

FIELD(company)

Dear FIELD(firstname):

Thank you for your inquiry regarding our new product.

•	(rest of letter)

Sincerely,

Amy Wilcox

Product Manager

PAGEOFF PRINT

 Related topics


PROCESSOFF

Use PROCESSOFF to end a PROCESSON command.

For an example of PROCESSON and PROCESSOFF, see CHAINDATA.

 Related topics


PROCESSON

Use PROCESSON with PROCESSOFF in a data merge file to ensure that codes are processed even if they are not in the field or record being processed by the form file.

For an example of PROCESSON and PROCESSOFF, see CHAINDATA.

 Related topics


PROMPT(message)

Use PROMPT to display a message that gives instructions to the user.

For examples of PROMPT, see ONCANCEL and ONERROR.

 Related topics


QUIT

Use QUIT to stop the execution of the merge. For example, while a merge is paused at KEYBOARD, you can execute QUIT from the keyboard.

In a merge, the rest of the form file after QUIT is written out to the resulting merged document before the merge terminates, but any commands after QUIT are not executed. If you don't want the rest of the form file written out, use STOP instead of QUIT.

If QUIT is used in a data file, the data file is abandoned at that point.

However, the rest of the form file is written out (but not processed) just as if the command had been encountered in the form file. The merge then terminates.

The following example is a standard memo sent by a personnel department to all employees before their six-month salary review. The merge ends just after the DATE command, but the rest of the memo is written out to the resulting merged document.

MEMO

To:	KEYBOARD(Enter To information)

From:	Kim Charleston, Personnel

Date:	DATE QUIT

Subject: 	Six-month Review Preparation

====================================

•	(rest of memo)

 Related topics


REPEATROW

Use REPEATROW when merging information into a table from a data file. The REPEATROW command in a row inserts that row for each record in the data file.

 Related topics


RETURN

Use RETURN to mark the end of a subroutine and signal the merge to return from a CALL command. RETURN must be paired with CALL, or an error message displays.

For an example of RETURN, see CALL.

 Related topics


RETURNCANCEL

Use RETURNCANCEL to cause execution to leave the current level and return a Cancel to the next higher level. For more information, see Levels.

In this example, RETURNCANCEL is used to return a cancel from a status checking subroutine.

CODES(

ONCANCEL(GO(send message))

•	(During this part of the merge, if the user presses Cancel,

•	execution is transferred to the Send Message label.)

CALL(check status)

•	(more merge commands)

STOP

LABEL(check status)

IF(VARIABLE(chk)=0)

RETURNCANCEL

ELSE

RETURN

ENDIF

)

If the chk variable equals FALSE (0), then the ONCANCEL condition is executed; if it is TRUE, then it returns without executing the ONCANCEL condition.

 Related topics


RETURNERROR

Use RETURNERROR to cause execution to leave the current level and return an error to the next higher level. For more information, see Levels.

In this example, RETURNERROR returns an error from a subroutine that nests a form file.

CODES(

ONERROR(GO(error))

If an error is generated, execute the Error subroutine.

•	(more merge commands)

CALL(getfile)

•	(more merge commands)

STOP

LABEL(getfile)

ONERROR(RETURNERROR)

NESTFORM(invoice.frm)

RETURN

LABEL(error)

If the file was not found when the merge tried to nest it,

execution moves here.

PROMPT(File not found. Move INVOICE.FRM to default directory and start merge again.)

Send a message to the user.

WAIT(15)

Display the message for 1.5 seconds.

STOP

Terminate execution

)

 Related topics


REWRITE

Use REWRITE to rewrite the document window. Since none of the merged document is written to the document window during a merge, you may want to use this command to display what has been merged at a certain point.

In the following example, REWRITE is used to view each letter on the screen as it is merged.

ABC COMPANY

245 WEST CENTER STREET LONG BEACH CA 90807

DATE

FIELD(name)

FIELD(company)

Dear FIELD(firstname):

Thank you for your inquiry regarding our new product.

•	(rest of the letter)

Sincerely,

Amy Wilcox

Product Manager

REWRITE

 Related topics


STATUSPROMPT(message)

Use STATUSPROMPT to display a message. The message is displayed during the merge. The message stays in the message window until it is cleared by another command that uses the message window, such as another STATUSPROMPT or a KEYBOARD command.

For example, if you always run two merges one after the other, you could use STATUSPROMPT to display the prompt "Merge 1 has been completed" at the end of the first merge.

•	(Main body of first form file)

STATUSPROMPT(Merge 1 has been completed.)

You could then clear the message window at the end of the second merge by using STATUSPROMPT with no parameters.

•	(Main body of second form file)

STATUSPROMPT()

 Related topics


STEPOFF

Use STEPOFF to turn off a single step execution after it has been turned on. See also STEPON.

 Related topics


STEPON

Use STEPON for debugging merges. It causes the merge to execute one step at a time. Between each step, a message indicates what the next command is. The command executes when the user presses any key. Each character is displayed after it is written out to the resulting document.

You may find it useful to step through merges with Reveal Codes on.

•	(This section will execute normally.)

STEPON

•	(This section will execute one keystroke at a time.)

STEPOFF

•	(This section will execute normally.)

 Related topics


STOP

Use STOP to stop all execution. It is similar to QUIT, except that the rest of the form file is not read in. If this command is found in a nested file, execution is not returned to the parent file. Chained files are also not executed.

While an executing merge is paused at KEYBOARD, you can execute STOP from the keyboard.

For an example of STOP, see IFEXISTS.

 Related topics


STRLEN(expr)

Use STRLEN to determine the length of a variable or of the value returned by an expression. This command is useful for validating or restricting the length of user input.

You can use FIELD, VARIABLE, text, or complex expressions in the argument expr.

For an example of STRLEN, see SUBSTR.

 Related topics


STRPOS(expr;subexpr)

Use STRPOS to determine the position of a subexpr within an expr.

For an example of STRPOS, see SUBSTR.

 Related topics


SUBSTDATA(filename)

Use SUBSTDATA to change to the named data file and start with the first record in that file. The merge does not return to the original data file. If you substitute a file that is not found, or no file, an error is returned. You can use ONERROR to determine what should happen if this error occurs.

In the following example, two data files are used, each sorted by ZIP Code in descending order, so that any records where the ZIP field is blank will be at the end of the file. SUBSTDATA causes the records with no ZIP Code to be skipped, and the next data file to be used.

CODES(

IFBLANK(ZIP)

SUBSTDATA(file2.dat)

ENDIF

)

 Related topics


SUBSTFORM(filename)

Use SUBSTFORM to change to the named form file. SUBSTFORM is similar to NESTFORM and CHAINFORM. The difference is that the named form file is used instead of the current form file from the point of this command on. The merge does not return to the original form file; no commands following this one in the original form file are executed. Local variables in a previous form file are erased.

If you substitute either a file that is not found or no file, an error is returned. You can use ONERROR to determine what should happen if this error occurs.

In the following example, the data file has a Days Overdue field. The merge begins using the form file invoice.frm, which substitutes a different form file depending on the number in the Days Overdue field.

At the end of each substituted file, the record pointer is moved to the next record, and invoice.frm is substituted, so that it will execute again.

CODES(

ASSIGN(days;FIELD(Days Overdue) DIV 30)

SWITCH(VARIABLE(days))

CASEOF(0)

SUBSTFORM(under30.frm)

CASEOF(1)

SUBSTFORM(under60.frm)

CASEOF(2)

SUBSTFORM(under90.frm)

DEFAULT

SUBSTFORM(90&over.frm)

ENDSWITCH

)

In this example, the following code would be placed at the end of each substituted form file.

•	(body of file)

NEXTRECORD

SUBSTFORM(invoice.frm)

 Related topics


SUBSTR(expr;start;length)

Use SUBSTR to extract a portion (substring) of the expression specified in the expr parameter. You can specify which part of the expression to use with the start and length parameters. The start parameter counts from the left side of the expr. The length parameter specifies how many characters are included in the substring.

For example, if a form file contains the statement SUBSTR(think;2;2), the substring "hi" is inserted into the merged document. The start parameter has the value 2, so the substring begins with the second character in the expr parameter ("h."). The count parameter has the value 2, so the substring contains two characters ("h" and "i").

You can use FIELD, VARIABLE, text, or complex expressions in the argument expr.

In this example, the data file has a name field where the names are stored in the format "Last, First." SUBSTR extracts the first name from the name field. STRPOS is used to find the beginning of the first name (2 characters after the start of the comma and space). STRLEN is used to find the length of the first name (by subtracting the starting position of the first name from the length of the full name).

CODES(

ASSIGN(start;STRPOS(FIELD(name);, )+2)

ASSIGN(length;STRLEN(FIELD(name)-VARIABLE(start)))

ASSIGN(firstname;SUBSTR(FIELD(name);VARIABLE(start);VARIABLE(length)))

VARIABLE(firstname)

)

 Related topics


SWITCH(expr)

Use SWITCH with CASEOF, CONTINUE, DEFAULT, and ENDSWITCH to evaluate input and execute different functions depending on the input.

The expression in SWITCH must match the expression in CASEOF exactly. For example, "y" does not match "Y." If no match is found in the SWITCH statement, execution continues after the SWITCH statement. You can use DEFAULT as the last case in the command to handle all cases that do not match. You can use CONTINUE to perform the commands for more than one case.

In the following example, SWITCH is used to include certain documents in the merge file based on the value of the class field in a data file. If the class field does not match any of the first three cases, DEFAULT is executed, and the file general.fil is included in the merged document.

Because each of the other cases ends with CONTINUE, the DEFAULT case and any cases following the one selected are executed along with the case selected. For example, if the class field contains 2nd, then the files 2ndclass.fil, 3rdclass.fil, and general.fil would all be included in the merged document for that record.

Dear FIELD(name):

You have chosen to travel FIELD(class) class. This allows you to enjoy the following benefits during your trip:

CODES(

SWITCH(FIELD(class))

CASEOF(1st)

DOCUMENT(1stclass.fil)

CONTINUE

CASEOF(2nd)

DOCUMENT(2ndclass.fil)

CONTINUE

CASEOF(3rd)

DOCUMENT(3rdclass.fil)

CONTINUE

DEFAULT

DOCUMENT(general.fil)

ENDSWITCH

)

For another example of SWITCH, see FORNEXT.

 Related topics


SYSTEM(sysvar)

Use SYSTEM to return the value of the given system variable. System variables allow the merge to be aware of the current state of WordPerfect.

In the following example, the merge includes only the first three records of the form file. When the merge reaches the fourth page of the resulting merge document, it stops.

CODES(

IF(SYSTEM(Page)=4)

STOP

ENDIF

)

•	(Body of the form file)

System variables are listed on the Parameter Entry dialog box when you choose the SYSTEM command.

 Related topics


TOLOWER(expr)

Use TOLOWER to lowercase each character in the returned expression expr.

For an example of TOLOWER, see CAPS.

 Related topics


TOUPPER(expr)

Use TOUPPER to uppercase each character in the returned expression expr.

For an example of TOUPPER, see CAPS.

 Related topics


VARIABLE(var)

Use VARIABLE to access the contents of global and local variables. If you have both a global and a local variable with the same name, this command accesses the local variable. There is no way to access global variables while local variables of the same name exist. For an explanation of global and local variables, see Merge variables.

After you assign a value to a variable (using ASSIGN(var;expr) or ASSIGNLOCAL(var;expr)), you can place the VARIABLE command anywhere you would normally place the variable contents. You can place it as an argument for another command, as part of an argument for another command, or by itself.

For an example of VARIABLE, see SUBSTR.

 Related topics


WAIT(10ths second)

Use WAIT to delay further execution of the merge for the indicated time. This command is useful when you want a message to be displayed for a certain amount of time. The wait time is specified in tenths of a second (20 = 2 seconds).

For an example of WAIT, see ONCANCEL.

 Related topics


WHILE(expr)

Use WHILE to execute commands repeatedly. While the expression expr is true, the commands between WHILE and ENDWHILE are repeatedly executed. This command is like FORNEXT, except that it does not increment a value each time through the loop. In order to end the loop, you must use BREAK or another command that will force the expression to be evaluated as false. For more information, see Loops.

Remember that if you use a variable in expr, the variable must already exist before the WHILE command is executed.

For an example of WHILE, see NEXTRECORD.

 Related topics


ASSIGNLOCAL(var;expr)

Use ASSIGNLOCAL to assign the value returned by expr to the local variable var. Local variables are accessible only to the current file; they are deleted when the merge is finished or the file is exited. See also ASSIGN(var;expr)

For an example of ASSIGNLOCAL, see CTON.

 Related topics


Working with levels, loops, and merge variables

The following topics provide information about using levels, loops, and merge variables when you program a merge.

Levels

Loops

Merge variables

System variables compared to user defined variables

Global variables compared to local variables

Naming variables

Variable contents

Assigning variables

Executing variables

Variable duration

Operations on variables

 How to


Levels

In a merge document you can have as many as 40 levels of execution per file. IF commands do not require a level; they can be nested indefinitely. Each SWITCH, FORNEXT, or WHILE uses one level.

NESTMACRO, NESTFORM, and NESTDATA do not require an execution level, because each nested file has 40 new execution levels.

However, they do require a nesting level. You can nest files 10 deep.

Merge uses separate stacks to maintain execution levels and nesting levels.

 Related topics


Merge variables

A variable represents a place in memory where data is stored. As its name indicates, the data in a variable is changeable. You can use variables to calculate and keep track of text and numeric values that change during a merge.


System variables compared to user defined variables

There are two major types of variables in WordPerfect: system variables and user-defined variables. System variables are variables that WordPerfect creates and maintains; they contain information about the current state of the application. You cannot change the names or contents of these variables, but you can use their contents at any given time. System variables are listed on the Parameter Entry dialog box when you choose the System command.

User-defined variables are variables that you create. You determine the name and contents of these variables when you assign them. You can also perform operations on them to change their contents. There are two subcategories of user-defined variables: global and local.

 Related topics


Global variables compared to local variables

Global variables are accessible from anywhere inside a merge or a macro. All global merge variables can be read by macros; macro variables can be read by merge commands if the PERSIST command is used in the macro.

Local variables are available only in Merge and are stored in a place in memory separate from global variables. They are accessible only from the file in which they are defined. For example, if you create a local variable named Number in a form file, the data file or other form files cannot access the information stored in it. When you nest merge files, the local variables in the parent file cannot be used in the nested file.

When you return to the parent file, the local variables in the nested file no longer exist, but the local variables in the parent file are once again accessible.

Local variables take precedence over global variables. For example, suppose you have both a global and a local variable named Number. If you try to access the global variable Number from inside a file where the local variable Number is accessible, you will get the contents of the local variable. The global variable Number still exists, but is inaccessible until you are no longer accessing the current merge file.

 Related topics


Naming variables

Variable names can be as many as 30 characters long for both global and local variables. Although you can use the same name for a local and a global variable, you cannot use the same name for any two local variables or any two global variables. You should not use the same name for a local variable and a label.

Variable names are not case sensitive. Abc, AbC, ABC, and abc are read as the same variable.

Variables receive their names when they are assigned. For more information, see Assigning variables.

 Related topics


Variable contents

All user-defined variables can contain text or numbers. A user-defined variable can hold 127 characters.

 Related topics


Assigning variables

You assign a global variable with ASSIGN and a local variable with ASSIGNLOCAL. For example, the following two statements assign two different variables, one global and one local:

•	ASSIGN(Number;45)

•	ASSIGNLOCAL(Number;36)

ASSIGN creates a global variable named Number with "45" as its contents. ASSIGNLOCAL creates a separate, local variable named Number with "36" as its contents. For more information, see ASSIGN(var;expr) and ASSIGNLOCAL(var;expr).

In addition to using ASSIGN and ASSIGNLOCAL, the following commands also assign variables:

•	CHAR

•	FOREACH

•	GETSTRING

•	LOOK

The following rules determine whether the variable assigned by CHAR, GETSTRING, and LOOK are local or global in a merge:

•	If a local variable with the name used in the command exists, the command assigns the value to the local variable.

•	If no local variable with the name used in the command exists, but a global variable by that name does exist, the command assigns the value to the global variable.

•	If no variable with the name used in the command exists, a global variable of that name is created and assigned by the command.

FOR and FOREACH in Merge assign variables by the same rules as above, except that if no variable with the name used in the command exists (the third rule), a local variable is created and assigned by the command. This feature allows recursion using FOR and FOREACH in Merge.

If a variable already exists and you assign new contents to it, the previous contents will be replaced without warning.

 Related topics


Executing variables

You can execute (write out) a variable anywhere you want its contents to appear. For example, by executing a variable you can do the following:

•	Use the contents of the variable as a subroutine

•	Insert the contents as text in a document or in the message strings of programming commands

•	Provide variable arguments in other programming commands

To execute a variable, use VARIABLE. For example, the statement VARIABLE(Number) would execute the variable named Number.

 Related topics


Variable duration

Local variables exist only in the file in which they are defined. Once you quit the file that defined the variables or once the merge ends, the local variables are erased (and the memory assigned to them is released). However, the contents of global variables remain in memory until you exit WordPerfect. To conserve memory, you should use local variables instead of global variables whenever possible.

If you want to erase a variable without exiting a file or exiting WordPerfect, assign nothing to the variable by using the following commands: ASSIGN(var;) or ASSIGNLOCAL(var;). These commands empty the variable of its contents and release the memory used by the variable. After you use this command, the variable no longer exists. It is a good idea to empty variables at the beginning of the merge in which they are used (unless the merge assigns new contents to them).

 Related topics


Operations on variables

All variables can be compared to each other, and user-defined variables can have other operations performed on them. Operations are performed using various programming commands. See "Working with merge expressions" and "Merge Programming Commands."

 Related topics


Loops

Whenever the same commands repeat several times, that section of the merge is called a loop. When you create a loop, it is very important to have a way for the loop to end. If the loop does not have an end, there is no way to stop execution without pressing ESC or CTRL + ENTER.

There are many types of loops you can create with merge programming commands.

You can use an IF structure or you can use FORNEXT or WHILE. You can also create loops by going to or calling subroutines (with GO or CALL). The structure you should use for any given loop depends on the task you are trying to accomplish.

 Related topics


Working with merge expressions

Merge expressions are used to determine values in the ASSIGN, ASSIGNLOCAL, CAPS, CASEOF, CTON, FIRSTCAP, FOREACH, FORNEXT, IF, NTOC, STRLEN, STRPOS, SUBSTR, SWITCH, TOLOWER, TOUPPER, and WHILE commands. Expressions can perform operations on either numbers or strings.

The following topics explain how to use expressions when you program a merge in WordPerfect:

Numeric expressions

String expressions

Expression evaluation

Operator precedence

String delimiters

Other merge delimiters

 How to


Numeric expressions

Numeric expression values must contain only integers (or variables that contain integers).

You can use signed numbers in expressions. The highest positive number you can use is 2,147,483,647. Numbers higher than that are considered negative in WordPerfect. For information, see Negative numbers. The lowest negative number you can use is --2,147,483,648.

If you try to use an invalid numeric expression, the expression is treated as a text string. Examples of invalid numeric expressions are characters other than numbers and valid operators or expressions that evaluate to numbers outside the numeric limits.

The following is a list of numeric expressions. In this list, the terms n1 and n2 represent number 1 and number 2. Although only a single operator is illustrated in each example below, you can use several operators as well as parentheses in expressions. For definitions of the operations used in the following table, see "Expression terms."

Expression	Operation
NOT n1	Returns the logical (0 or -1) NOT of n1. Examples: NOT 0 is -1. NOT 2 is 0.
!n1	Returns the arithmetic (bitwise) NOT of n1. Examples: !0 is -1. !2 is -3.
-n1	Returns the negative of n1. Example: If variable Num holds 5, -VARIABLE(Num) is -5.
n1+n2	Returns the sum of n1 and n2. Example: 5+4 is 9.
n1–n2	Returns the difference of n1 and n2. Example: 10–1 is 9.
n1*n2	Returns the product of n1 and n2. Example: 6*5 is 30.
n1/n2 or n1 DIV n2	Returns the integer quotient of n1 and n2. Examples: 20/5 is 4. 5 DIV 2 is 2.
n1%n2 or n1 MOD n2	Returns the remainder of the quotient of n1 and n2. Examples: 20%5 is 0. 5 MOD 2 is 1.
n1 AND n2	Returns the logical (0 or -1) AND of n1 and n2. Examples: 0 AND -1 is 0. 3 AND 4 is -1.
n1 & n2	Returns the arithmetic (bitwise) AND of n1 and n2. Examples: 7&4 is 4. 3&4 is 0.
n1 OR n2	Returns the logical (0 or -1) OR of n1 and n2. Examples: 0 OR -1 is -1. 3 OR 4 is -1.
n1|n2	Returns the arithmetic (bitwise) OR of n1 and n2. Examples: 7|4 is 7. 3|4 is 7.
n1 XOR n2	Returns the logical (0 or -1) XOR (exclusive OR) of n1 and n2. Examples: 0 XOR -1 is -1. 3 XOR 4 is 0.
n1=n2	Returns a true value (-1) if n1 and n2 are equal; otherwise, returns a false value (0). Examples: If variable 1 holds 5, then VARIABLE(1)=5 is true, and VARIABLE(1)=3 is false.
n1!=n2 or n1<>n2	Returns a true value (-1) if n1 and n2 are not equal; otherwise, returns a false value (0). Examples: If variable 1 holds 5, then VARIABLE(1)!=3 is true, and VARIABLE(1)<>5 is false.
n1>n2	Returns a true value (-1) if n1 is greater than n2; otherwise, returns a false value (0). Examples: 6>4 is true. 4>6 is false.
n1<n2	Returns a true value (-1) if n1 is less than n2; otherwise, returns a false value (0). Examples:2<10 is true. 10<2 is false.
n1>=n2	Returns a true value (-1) if n1 is greater than or equal to n2; otherwise, returns a false value (0). Examples: 6>=6 is true. 4>=6 is false.
n1<=n2	Returns a true value (-1) if n1 is less than or equal to n2; otherwise, returns a false value (0). Examples: 2<=2 is true. 10<=2 is false.
 Related topics


Expression evaluation

An expression must be written according to the rules and syntax in this appendix for WordPerfect to evaluate it correctly. The following information will help you create and use expressions.

When an expression is encountered in a command, the expression is evaluated first, and the result of the expression is used to complete the command. For example, in the statement ASSIGN(1;VARIABLE(1)+1), the expression is VARIABLE(1)+1.

When the expression is evaluated, the contents of variable 1 are incremented by one. The assignment is then performed, replacing the old contents of variable 1 with the result of the expression.

In several of the expressions, the result of the operation is either true or false. WordPerfect assigns a numeric value to true (-1) and false (0). These values were chosen because they are opposites (numeric complements) of each other. For information, see Bitwise NOT in "Expression Terms." WordPerfect interprets any non-zero numeric value as true, but when it assigns a value for true, it assigns -1.

In the following example, the first assignment statement assigns false (0) to variable 1, the second assignment statement assigns true (-1), the logical opposite of false, to variable 1, and the third assignment statement assigns true (-1) to variable 1.

ASSIGN(1;5=4)

ASSIGN(1;NOT VARIABLE(1))

ASSIGN(1;5!=4)

The order in which the various operators are applied in an expression is not simply the order in which they occur. WordPerfect uses an order of precedence that determines which operators are used first, second, and so forth. For example, in the expression 4+7*8, there is a different result depending on whether the addition is performed before or after the multiplication. For more information about the order of evaluation, see Operator Precedence.

 Related topics


Operator precedence

WordPerfect supports expressions with several operators. Therefore, an order of evaluation must be followed. The operator precedence is similar to the precedence for mathematical operators. The following table shows the order in which operators are applied:

1. – (unary minus), + (unary plus), ! (bitwise NOT), NOT (logical NOT)

2. * (multiply), / (divide), DIV (divide), % (mod), MOD (mod)

3. – (subtract), + (add)

4. < (less than), > (greater than), = (equal to), != (not equal to), <= (less than or equal to), >= (greater than or equal to) Relational operators also work on strings.

5. & (bitwise AND), AND (logical AND), | (bitwise OR), OR (logical OR), XOR (exclusive OR)

You can override the operator precedence by placing parentheses around the elements you want evaluated first. Elements inside of parentheses are always evaluated before the elements outside. If parentheses are nested, the innermost parentheses are evaluated first.

In the expression 4+7*8, the multiplication (7*8) is performed first, followed by the addition, because multiplication has a higher precedence than addition. The result is 60. To perform the addition first, type (4+7)*8. In this case, the result is 88.

 Related topics


String delimiters

A string delimiter is a character that marks the beginning or end of a string. In string operations, quotation marks (") serve as string delimiters. In most cases, string delimiters are not needed. Any expression that cannot be evaluated as a valid numeric expression is considered a string.

However, if you want an expression to remain a string even though it could be evaluated as a numeric expression, surround the expression with quotation marks. For example, if you assign a phone number to a variable, but do not surround the number in quotes, the phone number is evaluated as a numeric expression. For example, the command ASSIGN(1;555-1555) assigns the result of subtracting 1555 from 555 (-1000) to variable 1. The command ASSIGN(1;"555-1555") assigns the string 555-1555 to variable 1.

 Related topics


Other merge delimiters

A merge delimiter is a word or character that marks the beginning or end of a parameter or argument. Word delimiters can include such reserved words as AND, OR, NOT.

Semi-colons (;) serve as merge delimiters in merge commands with multiple parameters (SUBSTR(expr;start;length). When a semi-colon is encountered during the merge, it is treated as ending the parameter unless the parameter is within quotation marks.

 Related topics


String expressions

A string is any sequence of one or more characters, including spaces. For example, 245, Strawberry, QB12, Z, and Personal Computer are strings. Quotation marks are not necessary to define strings.

The expressions outlined in the following table are used to compare strings. The terms s1 and s2 represent string 1 and string 2.

Expression	Operation
s1=s2	Returns a true value (-1) if string 1 is identical (including case) to string 2; otherwise, returns a false value (0). Examples: blue=blue is true. blue=BLUE is false.
s1!=s2 or s1<>s2	Returns a true value (-1) if string 1 is not identical (including case) to string 2; otherwise, returns a false value (0). Examples: If variable 1 holds the string "thread," then VARIABLE(1)!=rope is true, and VARIABLE(1)<>thread is false.
s1>s2	Returns a true value (-1) if string 1 is greater than* string 2; otherwise, returns a false value (0). Examples: abcd>aabcd is true. a>A is true.
s1<s2	Returns a true value (-1) if string 1 is less than* string 2; otherwise, returns a false value (0). Examples: aabcd<abcd is true. A<a is true.
s1>=s2	Returns a true value (-1) if string 1 is greater than* or equal to string 2; otherwise, returns a false value (0). Examples: abcd>=abcd is true. a>=A is true.
s1<=s2	Returns a true value (-1) if string 1 is less than* or equal to string 2; otherwise, returns a false value (0). Examples: abcd<=abcd is true. A<=a is true.
* In a string comparison, the WordPerfect character set values are compared. For information, see WordPerfect character set values.

 Related topics


Expression terms

The following are technical terms used in the discussion of expressions. Understanding these terms is not essential to performing merges. These definitions are provided for those who are familiar with basic programming concepts.

Bitwise Operation

Bitwise AND (&)

Bitwise NOT (!)

Bitwise OR (|)

Evaluate the Expression

Exclusive OR (XOR)

Logical AND (AND)

Logical NOT (NOT)

Logical OR (OR)

Negative Numbers

WordPerfect character set values

 How to


Bitwise operation

In computer language, numbers are represented as a series of 16 bits. A bit can only have a value of 1 or 0. Each 16-bit series (or column) represents a numeric value (such as 1, 2, 4, 8 and so on). The following table outlines some values and their corresponding bits.

Value	Bits
0	0000000000000000
–1	1111111111111111
–3	1111111111111101
–21	1111111111101011
3	0000000000000011
4	0000000000000100
7	0000000000000111
21	0000000000010101
47	0000000000101111
A bitwise operation works on one column at a time (starting with the right column) using a single bit from each number. The operation is done 16 times so each bit of each number is operated on.

 Related topics


Bitwise AND (&)

A bitwise AND operation compares the bits of two numbers. When both numbers have a 1 bit in the same position (for example, there is a 1 bit in column 1 [the right column] of the first number and the second number), a 1 is placed in that position in the result. The following table demonstrates the way the expression 21&47 is evaluated.

Value	Bits
21	0000000000010101
47	0000000000101111
21&47	0000000000000101
The resulting bits represent the number 5, so 21&47=5.

 Related topics


Bitwise NOT (!)

A bitwise NOT operation takes the bits of the number and complements them. For example, if the expression is !0 (0 is 0000000000000000), the resulting value is -1 (-1 is 1111111111111111).

 Related topics


Bitwise OR (|)

A bitwise OR operation compares the bits of both numbers. When either number has a 1 bit in the same position (for example, there is a 1 bit in column 1 [the right column] of the first number or the second number), a 1 is placed in that position in the result. For example, the expression 21|47 is evaluated as shown in the following table:

Value	Bits
21	0000000000010101
47	0000000000101111
21|47	0000000000111111
The resulting bits represent the number 63, so 21|47=63.

 Related topics


Evaluate the expression

Perform the operation(s) on the expression.

 Related topics


Exclusive OR (XOR)

A logical XOR operation evaluates two expressions and returns a true (-1) if one, but not both, of the expressions is true. If both expressions are false or both are true, XOR returns a false (0). For example, 1=1 XOR 2=3 is true (-1), because only one of the expressions being evaluated is true. 6>3 XOR 3>1 is false (0), because both expressions are true.

 Related topics


Logical AND (AND)

A logical AND operation evaluates two expressions and returns a true (-1) if both expressions are true. In all other cases, it returns a false (0). For example, 1=1 AND 2=3 is false (0), because one of the expressions being evaluated is false. 6>3 AND 3>1 is true (-1), because both expressions are true.

 Related topics


Logical NOT (NOT)

A logical NOT operation returns the logical opposite (0 or --1) of the expression. WordPerfect interprets any nonzero numeric value as true, but when it assigns a value for true, it assigns -1. For example, NOT 2 is false (0), because 2 is evaluated as true. NOT 0 is true (-1).

 Related topics


Logical OR (OR)

A logical OR operation evaluates two expressions and returns a true (-1) if either or both expressions are true. If both expressions are false, it returns a false (0). For example, 1=1 OR 2=3 is true (-1), because one of the expressions being evaluated is true.

6<3 OR 3<1 is false (0), because both expressions are false.

 Related topics


Negative numbers

In WordPerfect, negative numbers are represented as large positive numbers, from 2,147,483,648 to 4,294,967,295. The number

4,294,967,295 is -1, 4,294,967,294 is -2, and so on. To determine the number WordPerfect uses to represent any given negative number from -1 to -2,147,483,648, use the following formula:

4,294,967,296 – |x|

where x is the negative number whose equivalent you are trying to find. For example, to find the equivalent of -3,

4,294,967,296 – 3 = 4,294,967,293

To find the negative number (n) represented by a given equivalent, use this formula:

x – 4,294,967,296=n

where x is the equivalent. For example, to find the negative number represented by 4,294,967,293,

4,294,967,293 – 4,294,967,296 = -3

You can assign variables to be negative numbers by using the minus (–) operator or by using the WordPerfect equivalent. Do not use commas or other punctuation in the equivalent. For example,

ASSIGN(number;-1)

is the same as

ASSIGN(number;4294967295)

For more information about creating numeric expressions, see Numeric Expressions.

 Related topics


WordPerfect character set values

WordPerfect assigns a unique value to each character in each WordPerfect character set. For more information, see the descriptions for the CTON and NTOC commands under "Merge Programming Commands." This is called the WordPerfect character set value. In a string comparison, the character set values are compared.

For characters in the same character set, one character is considered "less than" another character if the first character comes before the second character. For example, in character set 0, "3" is less than "4" and "A" is less than "a." For characters in different character sets, the character from the character set with the lower numerical value is considered "less than" the character from the higher numerical character set. For example, any character from character set 2 is less than any character from character set 3.

 Related topics


Lets you specify the file you want to publish to XML.


Lets you specify the file you want to publish to XML.


Lets you choose a graphic type and graphic options.


Lets you publish the document graphics as GIF.


Lets you publish the document graphics as interlaced GIF.


Lets you publish the document graphics as transparent GIF.


Lets you choose a transparent color.


Lets you choose a transparent color.


Lets you publish the document graphics as JPEG.


Adjusts the quality of the JPEG images.


Adjusts the quality of the JPEG images.


Adjusts the quality of the JPEG images.


Adjusts the quality of the JPEG images.


Adjusts the quality of the JPEG images.


For more information about this topic, see the Help.


For more information about this topic, see the Help.


For more information about this topic, see the Help.


For more information about this topic, see the Help.


For more information about this topic, see the Help.


For more information about this topic, see the Help.


For more information about this topic, see the Help.


For more information about this topic, see the Help.


For more information about this topic, see the Help.


For more information about this topic, see the Help.


For more information about this topic, see the Help.


For more information about this topic, see the Help.


For more information about this topic, see the Help.


For more information about this topic, see the Help.


For more information about this topic, see the Help.


For more information about this topic, see the Help.


For more information about this topic, see the Help.


For more information about this topic, see the Help.


For more information about this topic, see the Help.


For more information about this topic, see the Help.